Service_For_Consultants_198303 Service For Consultants 198303
Service_For_Consultants_198303 Service_For_Consultants_198303
User Manual: Service_For_Consultants_198303
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 223
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
------- - - - ----:§~E: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 5664-167.1
Mar83
.:. :-:a
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
VIRTUAL MACHINE/SYSTEM-PRODUCTVM/SP (5664-167)
PURPOSE
The VM/System Product provides usability and performance extensions to VM/370; it is recommended for users running DOS/VS, VSE,
VS1, SVS and MVSunder VM/370 on processors supported by those
SCPs, or users with high-speed paging devices, and eMS intensive
users. The VM/System Product is designed to run on S/370 mdls 135,
135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 155 II, 158, 158-3, 158AP, 158MP, 165 II,
168,168-3, 168AP, 168MP and on 4321, 4331,4331 Model Group 2,
4341, 4341 Model Group 2, 3031, 3031AP, 3032, 3033 Model Group
N, 3033, 3033S, 3033AP, 3033AP-2, 3033MP, and the 2K storage
protect key version of the 3081 016 Processor Complex in S/370
mode.
Note: Information on the availability of the VM/SP High Performance
Option Licensed Program (5664-173) for VM/SP Release 3 will be
available"prior to the availability of VM/SP Release 3.
less frequently but keeping them there for longer periods. This may
lower the overall level of paging activity with accompanying
reduction in supervisor overhead and some increased throughput.
Systems that need more paging space than is available on
preferred paging devices.
The resource manager maintains active user pages on the high
speed or primary paging devices using a page migration scheme.
Page wait due to slow access times of secondary devices is
reduced and improved processor utilization and throughput may
result.
Improved Response to Trivial Interactions: May be achieved in the
following environments:
Where terminal interactions occur for both single trivial commands
.
and nontrivial transactions during terminal I/O.
SOL/OS on VM/SP Release 3 will.be supported on AP/MP, the
3081-016 Processor, and the VM/SP High Performance Option
concurrent with the above stated availability.
The resource manager distinguishes between the two types of
transactions by tracking the resource consumption rate and giving
higher priority to the smallest consumer.
The VM/System Product Release 3 contains all the function previously
available in the VM/370 Release 6 SCP, its priced extensions program
products (VM/BSE and VM/SE), VM/SP Release 1. and VM/SP
Release 2. Refer to the appropriate pages for an overview of the
functions provided in each of these products.
Where transactions are characterized by a wide range of resource
requi rements.
f
DESCRIPTION
Multiprocessor Support: The VM/System Product will offer to users
of VM /370 the reliability and availability characteristics of a full
multiprocessor environment. The VM/SP will support the 158MP,
168M P and 3033M P configurations with up to 16 channels per
processor and a maximum of 32 channels per MP configuration.
The fair share algorithms of the resource manager, which are
effective in both compute-bound and paging-bound environments,
distinguish between the different resource requirements of the
users. Consequently, a better interactive/ non-interactive split is
achieved with improved responsiveness to trivial transactions.
Improved Installation Management: Over the services provided in the
following environments:
Where multiple users require a specific percentage of the
processor.
3042 Attached Processor Model 2 Support: The VM/System Product.
when generated in multiprocessor mode, will support I/O on both sides
of a 3033 Attached Processor complex when the complex includes a
3042 Attached Processor mdl 2.
The SET FAVOR command with percentage option may now be
specified for more than one user.
The 3042 mdl 2 offers a standard group of 6 channels, and an optional
feature adds another group of 6, for configurations of 18, 22, 24 or 28
channels in a 3033 Attached Processor complex.
Directory priority controls may now be utilized to make CMS batch
facilities either fully non-interactive to minimize impact on the
system, or fully interactive to encourage its use.
3081 Processor in MP Mode: When the 3081 is structured so that a
channel set is available to each of the two integral central processors,
the multiprocessor mode of VM/SP should be specified. This permits
up to 16 channels per central processor and up to an aggregate
capability of 24 channels. The 3081 Processor may be structured to
limit a single channel set to one of the two central processors inherent
in 3081 (AP mode).
The storage management algorithm for returning free storage to the
dynamic area was modified. A check is made every hour and also upon
a user logging off, to determine if any dynamic area pages obtained for
free storage purposes can be returned to the dynamic area.
Note: VM/SP does not simulate multi-proceSSing for virtual machines
other than under Single Processor Mode. A virtual machine will be
dispatched by VM/SP on only one of the two processors in an MP
configuration unless the Single Processor Mode of the VM/SP is in
effect.
Enhanced Attached Processor Support: Several significant
enhancements to the VM/370 AP environment are available in the
VM /System Product, notably:
I
Improved locking logic that may result in a reduction in contention
on the global system lock.
Extended channel error recovery.
In addition, for both the AP and M P environments, several CP
commands have been improved to extend the system status and
processor activity data available to the system operator.
Improvements in Resource Management
Throughput Improvemonts: May be achieved in the following environment~: .
Systems with roal storage bottlenecks.
a
When real storage bottleneck is indicated, the resource manager
may reduce tho offect and increase tho lovol of multiprogramming.
This is achievod through the use of improved scheduling and
paging algorithms';';1;which give rise to smaller working set size
estimates and hiOher page steal ratios. Tho net result is that a
given re>al storago size appears more able to contain the given load
with improved throughput. .
The resource· 'manager also. migrates swap tables of interactive
users and frees up real· storage. for other purposes. This may
increase the level of multiprogramming and improve throughput.
Storage bound systems with long running non-interactive users
and high multiprogramming levels., ..
Such systems devote a large part' of, their paging activity to
swapping the long running users in and out of storage as each is
given a timeslice. The resource manager reduces this paging
overhead by swapping th~ longest running uS,ers· into real. storage
Where CMS batch facilities run non-interactively.
CP Performance Improvements
The set favored command accepts a percentage specification of 100.
This specification is handled as a special case by the scheduler where
the designated user will be kept at the top of the run list.
CMS disk I/O (Diagnose 18) takes advantage of ECPS:VM/370 for
CCW translation. The improvement is available with the existing
ECPS:VM/370 assist on the 3135-3, 3138, 3145-3 and 3148
Processors. The improvement is also available with the ECPS:VM/370
assist on the 4341 Processor.
Addition to ECPS: ECPS for VM/370 on S/370 mdls 135-3, 138,
145-3 and 148, and on the 4321, 4331 and 4341 processors has been
enhanced to accelerate the processing of the DIAGNOSE Interface
between a virtual machine and CP. Because CMS is a heavy user of
DIAGNOSE, the CMS user'may receive improved performance.
Operation of VM/SP on a 4321 processor is recommended in a
VM/CMS-onlyenvironment.
Smatt CP Option: Small CP option reduces real memory requirements
for CP which makes more· pageable storage available to virtual
machines.
Shadow Page and Segment Table Maintenance: VM/SP reduces
overhead associated with maintaining shadow tables used to run virtual
systems.
Multiple shadow tables will be m·aintained to reduce the overhead
associated with building shadow tables when a different address space
.
within a virtual machine is dispatched.
Shadow table ent;ies will be selectively invalidated when VM/SP
(extended by the VM / SP) steals a page from a virtual machine.
Shadow tables can be eliminated for V=R users running a production
system.
Shadow table maintenance will be reduced for areas in a virtual system
where the virtual address is equal to the real address.
Extended Support: VM/SP will support operating systems that utilize
the S/370 Extended Facility of the 3031, 3032. 3033 and 3081
Processors, and the S/370 Extended Feature of the S/370 mdls 158
and 168, provided the S/370 Extended Feature is installed on the
hardware. Thus. MVS/Systems Extensions and MVS/System Product
can be run undor tho VM/System Product on these processors.
------- - - - -----====';'=
- --- ISG
PP 5664-167.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
VM/SP (cont'd)
MVS Guest Environment: Release 1 of the MVS/System Product
(JES2. program number 5740-XYS. and JES3. program number
5740-XYN) will be supported as guest operating systems under the
VM /System Product.
The cross-memory services of Release 2 of the MVS/System Product
(JES2 and JES3) will be supported in the guest operating system
environment under the level of VM/System Product which Is most
current at the time of availability. or Release 2 of MVS/System Product.
However. cross-memory services will use the hardware microcode
implementation of the 3033 Extension Feature (Feature #6850) only
when executing underVM/SP High Performance Option (5664-173).
RELEASE 3 ENHANCEMENTS
Sal/OS Support
Sal/OS is a Relational data base Licensed Program (5748-XXJ).
CP and CMS enhancements have been included to allow SOL/OS
Release 2 to operate on VM/SP Release 3 without a guest VSE
operating system and without VSE!VSAM. These extensions have
been provided in a generalized fashion so that othe'r applications
may take advantage of them. The CP/CMS Extensions for
Application Programs sections below describe this support.
System Product Interpreter
The System Product Interpreter is a new command and macro
processor. It can be used for interpreted applications, command
processing and generation. for macros such as those used by the
System Product Editor, as a desk calculator. mathematical problem
solver. or for any other purpose for which an interpreted simpleto-use language is suitable. Syntax is in a high level form which is
easy to learn.
Highlights of the System Product Interpreter include:
- Extended Control Structure:
If-Then- Else
Select-When - Otherwise- End
Do-Interactive- End
Iterate and Leave
- Full set of arithmetic. character. and logical operators
- Selection of Standard functions
- Free Format. Mixed Case
- Interactive Debug
- In line Function and Subroutine calls
- Decimal and Scientific arithmetic capability
- Built-in string parsing instructions
The System Product Interpreter will be the primary interpretive
command and macro processor for VM/SP in the future. It is
intended that all future enhancements will be applied to the System
Product Interpreter. EXEC and EXEC2 will remain supported and
will coexist with the more powerful System Product Interpreter.
Programmable Operator Enhancements
Several enhancements to the Programmable Operator Facility have
been added. Among them are:
- Message routing with nicknames - allow messages to be routed
to other than the logical operator or to multiple operators via
CMS "TELL". This enhances the ability to have SPOOL and/or
TAPE operators at the remote site in addition to a system
operator at the host.
- Remote Node Availability - ability for periodic signaling between
a host and remote system and alerting the host operator of the
inability to communicate with a remote system. Improved
availability is also provided with the capability to recover from
Programmable Operator Facility ABENDs.
.... Enhanced text comparison - allows multiple text comparison
strings in a routing table entry with logical operations on the
strings.
- EXEC Action Routines - ability for action routines to be written in
all EXEC languages. supported by CMS. including the new
System Product Interpreter.
- lOG recording and error handling enhancements. ,
Enhanced Serviceability
- Symptom Records - A new record will be created that will assist
in problem identification. Information from this record can be
useful in communicating problems to the IBM support center.
The VM Interactive Problem Control Program System Extension
(VM IPCS/E 5748-SA1) Release 2 at the then current service
level is required to implement this enhancement.
- S/370 Program Event Recording (PER) support - This enhancement provides CP command support to facilitate debugging in a
virtual machine. It uses the S/370 hardware program event
recording (PER) feature to monitor successful branches.
instructions fetched within an address range. alteration of
storage within an address range. and alteration of a specific
general purpose register. In addition. the support provides the
ability to trace within multiple ranges. compare altered storage
and registers to specific values and execute CP commands on
specific events.
CP Extensions for Application Programs
Several extensions to CP have been made to support Application
programs:
- A DASD Block I/O System Service allowing a virtual machine
fast. device independent asynchronous access to fixed size
blocks on CMS formatted virtual DASD I/O devices.
- Inter-User Communication Vehicle (lUCV) extensions to provide:
1. Fast communications through data specification
parameter list and related protocol extensions.
in
the
2. Extended mask capability for individuallUCV control interrupts
3. Expanded trace capability
4. Support for the DASD Block I/O System Service
- Diagnose Zero support of time zone differential from Greenwich
Mean Time
CMS Extensions for Application Programs
A number of enhancements to CMS have been included to support
applications written to run on CMS:
- CMS File System Extensions - The CMS File System Extensions
include:
- 512-byte length physical DASD blocks - A new block size of
512 bytes is supported and is available through a new option
on the CMS FORMAT command.
- DASD Block I/O Support - New and extended CMS
commands and functions are provided to initialize CMS disks
for use with the CP DASD Block I/O system service.
- CMS IUCV Support
Support for IUCV communication has been introduced into CMS.
This support will allow multiple programs within a virtual
machine to use IUCV functions. Included is the ability to initialize
a CMS machine for IUCV communication and to invoke IUCV
functions via new CMS macros. These macros will also 'allow
the user to specify path-specific exits for IUCV extemal
interrupts. CMS IUCV support can be used to· access a CP;,:
DASD Block I/O system service':;.,JJI~:' .;:~,,~ :);
- CMS Wait on ECB - The ability to wait.0'lisn'tEC'B or a' list Of~
ECBs will be supported via a new CMS;macro.'l1'fhis macroV\,;iII
provide the capability to wait on OS an'~'(s,E forma,~.CBs.
- CMS ABEND Exit - A general CMS.abnormal exit ~ap'abmty will
be provided so that user programs,;,Ji,ay specify thei,address of a
routine to get control before CMS::'IABEND recoverY'begins. An
exit is established and cleared thrplJgh a new eMS macro.
~l :I'~~'I
.
;~~"'
- RDTERM Direct, - A new' option! on the~RDTERM macro will
allow a program to read an:inputline directly, from the console.
Lines already stacked in. th,e;.program or cons'ole stack will not
read. Thisfuriction will enable a program to prompt a terminal
user for. a response without disturbing the contents of the
program ·or. console stack.
- Immediate' Command Extensions -. The immediate command
capability of CI'y1S will be extended by allowing users to define
------- -------':'=:::::E~E:
PP 5664-167.3
Do not reproduce without written pernlission
ISG
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
VM/SP (cont'd)
their own immediate commands.
Enhanced VSAM Support
Programs being written for execution on CMS will now have the
following defined VSAM interface to use:
- VSE/VSAM Release 3 Support - CMS will support VSE/VSAM
Release 3 which includes significant enhancements designed to
improve catalog reliability and integrity while providing additional
serviceability and usability. VSE/VSAM Release 2 is not
supported.
- Assembler Language VSAM Support - An Assembler Language
interface to VSAM will be provided and supported. Most
OS/VSAM and VSE/VSAM macros are supported. OS/VSAM
requests are mapped to VSE/VSAM requests and executed
using VSE/VSAM code.
- VSAM Macro Distribution Enhancements - OS/VSAM macros
will be provided for use in a new CMS macro library. A utility will
be provided to install VSE/VSAM macros to a CMS macro
library.
New and Improved System Product Editor (XEDIn Functions
Enhancements to the System Product Editor (XEDIn to provide
new or improved support in the following areas:
-
Prefix macro support
Selective line editing
Screen Control
Additional SET RESERVED capabilities
Extended data stream (color)
Vertical screen split
Several new functions intended to provide additional data
manipulating capabilities
- Modifications to miscellaneous existing XEDIT functions to
improve flexibility and/or consistency between related subcom.
mands
XEDIT provides all of the major capabilities available in EDIT. It is
IBM's intent to provide all future VM/SP editing enhancements to
XED IT. XEDIT has attempted to provide the most useful capabilities
available in various editors. A compatability function for Display Editing
System 5796-PJP (EDGAR) was provided in VM/System Product
Release 1 to assist EDGAR users in the transition to XEDIT. Its primary
purpose was for migration only.
A subset of the EDGAR functions was provided to aid in migration. Not
all EDGAR commands or functions are supported in the same manner
as in EDGAR. There will not be any changes or enhancements to this
migration support. It is recommended that all those using this
migration support should complete the migration to XEDIT when
VM/SP Release 3 is installed. New XEDIT users should not use the·
EDGAR migration functions.
Publications Enhancements
New publications to be added to the Library:
- VM /SP Installation Guide - This manual provides procedural
and reference information pertaining to the VM / SP install
process.
- VM / SP Release 3 Guide - Intended primarily for current users,
this manual provides a summary of the Release 3 enhancements
to VM/SP, including use-oriented examples and identification of
changed modules.
- VM/SP System Product Interpreter User's Guide - A step-bystep guide to using the System Product Interprotor for new
users.
'
- VM/SP System Product Interpreter Reference - A complete
compilation of reference information for using tho System
Product Interpreter.
::.. VM/SP System Product Interpreter Refarence Summary - This
publication provides quick synoptic reference information about
System Product Interpreter statemonts and their use.
These publications will become available when the product
becomes available ....
Additionally, two pr~~ioJ~ly announced functions will be available in
VM/SP Rel~ase 3. They are: .
.
The Ml'ssing Int~rrupt5~pport announced July 6, 1982. This
function will monitor system I/O activity for interrupts not
completing within a certain time .period and attempt to correct the
See Programming Announcement 282-116 for
condition.
additional information.
.
Support for 'the Speed Matching. Buffer for the IBM 3375
announced July 30, 1982. This supporfprovides the capability to
use the hardware when connected to a 1.5 megabyte channel.
This includes paging, spooling, and/or mini disks. '
RELEASE 2 ENHANCEMENTS
Programmable Operator Support
The Programmable Operator facility can be used in a VM/SP
system to reduce or eliminate system operator messages. This
facility provides the capability to log messages, suppress messages, redirect messages, execute commands, and pre-program
message responses, all under the control of an editable message
routing table in a CMS file.
The Programmable Operator facility can be used by a stand-alone
VM/SP system or can allow the operation of a remote VM/SP
system to be controlled by an operator at a host VM/SP system.
Remote operation of a VM/SP system requires Release 2 or
Release 3 of the RSCS Networking program product on both
VM/SP systems. Installation of the RSCS Networking Release 3
program product will provide enhanced display utilization.
New CMS End-user Functions
Numerous end-user functions are being provided to assist the
non-professional user as well as the professional user in utilizing
the system. These functions are provided to enhance the system
usability and to improve user productivity. These functions
provide:
- The new VM/SP SENDFILE and RECEIVE commands may be
used in conjunction with the TSO/E Interactive Data Transmission Facility TRANSMIT and RECEIVE commands to exchange
files between VM/SP Release 2 and MVS/TSO systems
connected through an NJE/NJI network.
- Enhanced full screen capability to display information about
Reader Spool files. Allows the ability to review /browse through
files, to discard files, or initiate other actions such as copy, or
forward the file to other media / users.
- A full screen capapility to display file information (information
presented is similar to what L1STFILE provides today) and issue
CMS commands that perform some. type(s) of action on ~he
file(s) being displayed. Program function keys are also assigned
to useful functions like EDIT, SORT or HELP.
- Enhanced command capability such as:
a. Header Option on Print.
b. DISK LOAD extended to allow sequence identification and the
ability to load a file and retain its original date/time.
c. Ability to specify '=' for any file identifier in the fileid2 operand
of the COMPARE command.
d. L1STFILE enhanced to allow 'STACK', 'ARGS', 'BLOCK',
'TRACE', 'FIFO', 'LIFO' and extended pattern matching
options.
e. UPDATE extended to keep a record of missing PTF files.
f. A new command to display environmental status such as
userid, nodeid, date, time, zone.
New CMS Productivity Aids for the DP Professional
CMS has been enhanced to provide the DP professional user with
several productivity enhancements to make their system implementation easier. These productivity enhancements provide:
- A CMS facility to allow I/O between a device and an EXEC
program.
- The ability to dynamically extend the CMS nucleus.
- A routine to display at the console or stack virtual reader file
characteristics.
- An enhanced CMS QUERY command to display CMSLEVEL
information such as product name, release identification, service
level and information regarding virtual disks that are accessed.
In addition, QUERY command results can be stacked.
- A GLOBALV command which allows a user to maintain a
collection of named values whose lifetime is either within a single
IPL, within a session or across sessions.
- The ability to specify that portions of a line should be displayed,
highlighted, protected, and/or masked using the VM/SP editor.
- The ability to directly access EXEC 2 variables. Variables may
.
then be inspected and/or set from a program.·
DIAL Command support for remote BSe 3270 users.
This support provides the ability· for remote BSC 3270 users to
issue the DIAL command. The remote 3270 will appear to be a
locally attached terminal to the dialed virtual machine.
In addition, this support removes the previous restriction of 16
remote communication lines. The maximum number of remote
communication lines is now 256.
------- --------
PP 5664-167.4
Do nof reproduce without written permission
MarB3
= ~:§~§: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
VM/SP (cont'd)
CMS Nucleus Restructured.
The CMS nucleus has been restructure to provide a CMS system
which is more flexible and extendible for development, serviceability and maintenance purposes.
volumes or mini disks and performs data analysis and recovery either
stand-alone or in a virtual machine under VM/SP.
,
CMS Tokenization.
The eight-byte tokenization restriction has been eliminated for
parameter passing.
Dynamic SCP Transition To and From Native Mode: An installation
can have the ability to run another SCP in native mode on the same
system used for running VM /SP with a minimum of disruption to the
system's operation; it is possible to switch from VM/SP to anothe(
SCP, run that SCP in native mode and then switch. back to VM/SP
without IPUng the system. The guest SCP must run in a V=R area. It
can be MVS, SVS or VSl in non-handshaking mode.
Starter System Full Screen Support.
The ability to operate the new CMS editor in full screen mode has
been extended to the VM/SP Starter System running secondlevel. Previously, the new CMS editor would only run in single line
mode.
HELP Files.
The HELP files can now be pl?ced
on disks other than the S-DISK.
CMS/DOS Upgrade.
.
CMS/DOS support has been upgraded to VSE/Advanced
Functions Release 3 and VSE/VSAM Release 2 including support
for the 3375 DASD .
Command Retrieve Capability.
The CP SET Program Function command is enhanced to include
the option "RETR/EVE". When'specified, the system wiIJ save
input lines. When the specified program function key is pressed,
the saved input lines are redisplayed in the reverse sequence of
entry. The number of saved lines depends upon buffer size and
input line length.
QUERY Command Enhanced.
The QUERY command is enhanced to allow the user to specify the
operands "USER/D" or "CPLEVEL" .. The Query USER/D command responds with the userid and with the system identifier of
the system that the user is logged on to.
The query CPLEVEL provides information relative to the software
product's name (e.g., VM /SP), release number, service level
number, Nucleus Creation Date and time, along with the IPL date
and time.
Enhanced ASCII Support.
ASCII support has been enhanced to support the 3101 user with
RELEASE 1 ENHANCEMENTS
When the transition is made to native mode, the OS/VS SCP is
operating without VM/SP. The performance of the OS/VS system will
be equivalent to that OS/VS system running native with the same
amount of storage and the same I/O configuration it was using in the
VM/1SP V=R area. When the installation again requires VM/SP
services, the operator returns control to VM / SP and the installation
again has all the advantages that result from using VM/SP.
This gives an installation operational flexibility that it did not have
before. It is possible to run both VM/SP and OS/VS in native mode
on the same system, without the disruption of an IPL when a switch is
made between VM/SP and OS/VS. This capability is particularly
valuable when running an application that cannot be shut down, such
as DB/DC.
Note: This function is not supported for MVS on the 4321,4331 or the
4341 processors.
Single Processor Mode: It is possible to run VM/SP in Single
Processor Mode (SPM). SPM will allow an installation to restrict
VM/SP to a single processor of an AP or MP system, leaving the other
processor for the exclusive use of a virtual machine running MVS. In
SPM, MVS must be IPLed in a V=R area. MVS wiil then initialize the
other processor and run in AP or MP mode.
IPL Command Enhancement: This enhancement allows a user to
activate an OS/VSl system without any operator intervention. It is
similar to the capability provided by the DOS/VSE Automatic System
Initialization (ASI) Facility.
- Linesize Control option has been added.
Virtual Machine Storage Preservation: In VM/SP, during a warm
start or an abnormal termination by VM/SP, the virtual storage of
specified virtual machines will be preserved. Specifically, virtual
machine IPL was changed so that it no longer uses a page of the user's
virtual storage, and the V=R area under VM/SP will be preserved
during warm start. In addition, specific virtual machines can be
identified such that at VM/SP abend, or when that virtual machine is
abnormally terminated by VM/SP, the registers and main storage for
that virtual machine will be saved.
Enhanced 3800 Support.
This enhancement allows the RSCS Networking Release 3 program
product to pass to CP the 3800 attributes defined in an NJI header
created by a system using the NJJ protocol. This will also allow
files created in these systems to print properly on a 3BOO controlled
by VM/SP Release 2. Copy group ::lnd bun;t attriuuies remain
unsupported.
.
The improved integrity of virtual storage is particularly beneficial to
IMS/VS users running in a virtual machine who need to have storage
preserved so that they can run a stand-alone program to recover
IMS/VS Log Buffers. In addition, stand-alone dumps that are IPL'd
from an external storage device will now accuratelv reflec:t th"" ~!ser's
virtual 5tlli"a9~. because VMiSp will no longer use a page of that
storage.
Support for IBM 3375 DASD.
VM/SP Release 2 will support the 3375 Direct Access Storage
Device with the 3BOO Storage Control Models 1 or 2.
Single Console Image Facility: This support enables the operator of a
virtual machine to control mUltiple virtual machines from one physical
terminal. Availability is improved in cases where there is a console
failure because control can be automatically passed to the virtual
console of another user. This capability is available for use by any
guest machine.
the following:
I
- Screen Management - Contolled scrolling of output.
- Prompting - Linefeed prompting can be selected to allow data to
be entered starting in column 1.
- Read operations can be command-chained to write operations.
The new DASD will be supported as a paging, spooling, system
residence, T -disk, mini-disk and as a dedicated device to a virtual
machine operating system that supports the 3375 DASD.
Support for the new Speed-Matching Buffer (Feature:#6550).
The 3880 Speed-Matching Buffer Feature support allows
attachment of the new high speed'33BO DASD to processors with
channel speeds slower than those normally required by the new
devices. Refer to Announcement letter 280-61 for details
regarding the hardware support.
VM/SP support for the Speed-Matching Buffer is provided for use
of CMS, via Diagnose 1B, as well as by the CP component of the
operating system.
Trace Table Recording Facility.
A new serviceability enhancement is provided to record a history of
system operations on spool. This facility is controlled by a new
Class C command. Selective recording of CP trace entries by type,
VMBLOK address, interrupt code and device type is provided. In
addition, user generated information from a virtual machine and CP
information can be included.
A utility program is alsb provided. This utility provides the user
with the capability to print the collected information or display it on
a terminal.
As a customer convenience, the Class 2 SCP Stand-alone Device
Support Facility is being shipped in conjunction with VM/System
Product. Device Support Facility is a utility used to initialize DASD
Functions that enhance the reliability, availability and serviceability
characteristics of the VM/SP system include:
- An enhancement that will detect missing I/O interrupts and
notify a system operator of the problem.
.,'/"
- Enhancements to allow an installation to dynamically allocate.
space for a dump after an IPL and to reserve sufficient contigu-:;,\
ous DASD space for one or more system dumps. ..'i .
. ..
curre~~
- Expansion of the checkpoint limit for spool fi/estfigB?the
limit of 2,048 to a new limit of 9,900, thi''''aximum allowabre
number of spool files in the system.
~;':
:"):'
New functions that enhance the integrity and security oLthe VM/SP
system include:
. . j,'i'(:~?"~~, /~$~f
- A system option that will autorn'atlcallY clE!a;':fallocat~d T-Disk
DASD space and prevent access to residual data.
- A function to preven~lthesystem operator from being automatically logged on du(intran automatic system restart if the operator
was not 10gged •. on'th.~lprim~ry·system console when the system
.
ABEND occurred,
- An enhancement,to the SPTAPE comma'nd to support the DUMP
and LOAD functions for CP DUMP reader files.
------- -------=- - :§~E: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 5664-167.5
Mar83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
VM/SP (cont'd)
Full Screen Console Support Via SIO Interface: Full screen console
support will enable a guest machine (for example, VSE DOC or OS/VS
DIDOCS) and CP to share a locally-attached display terminal controlled
by CPo The guest machine can use a display terminal as a graphics
device in full screen mode while CP shares the terminal and uses it as a
line device. A Start I/O (SIO) instruction is the interface for this
support. A guest machine can use either the existing DIAGNOSE
interface or the SIO interface, but not both simultaneously.
Systems Network Architecture (SNA) Support: Full VM/370
operator console capabilities are provided to the SNA terminal users.
These console functions include full CP/CMS command processing
capabilities, CMS editor processing mode and full screen support for
3270 display ,terminal devices. This support requires that the Virtual
Machine/VTAM Communications Network Application (VM/VCNAI
program product and its prerequisites be installed.
Inter-User Communication Capability: The inter-user communication
vehicle (IUCV) facilitates the transfer of messages among virtual
machines and between a virtual machine and CPo
CMS File System Enhancements: The file system enhancements will
provide the user with a more efficient and flexible file system.
Specifically, the enhancements are:
Removal of the limitations on the size of CMS disks and the
number of files per CMS disk.
Support for physical block sizes of 800, 1024, 2048 and 4096
bytes.
Efficent handling of variable length files.
Selective directory updating.
Fixed Block Mode (FBM) device type support.
AIIIUCV interfaces are provided to the user at a macro level.
Concurrent open for read and write of CMS files.
A user can selectively establish and terminate communications
paths.
CMS access to one system disk and up to 25 minidisks concurrently.
Two users can establish multiple paths between themselves.
A virtual machine can receive messages and reply either synchronously without an interrupt or asynchronously via an external
interrupt.
An installation can restrict the number of messages outstanding on
each communication path.
I
Spooling of Accounting Records: This support provides the
installation with the ability to spool accounting data to a designated
virtual machine with a designated class. The data can be spooled to
provide punched output or spooled to a virtual machine's reader for
additional processing. This eliminates the need to have a real card
punch online at all times to get accounting records.
A receiver can selectively reject messages.
IUCV coexists with VMCF and provides extended inter-user
communication capabilities.
CP Spooling Enhancements
Interactive Help Facility Under CMS: The help facility is an informational/ online display service available at the CMS terminal to guide the
user in using' CP and CMS commands and reacting to CP and CMS
messages. As a result, the user can, in most cases, avoid referencing
manuals during CMS sessions.
With the enhanced HELP Facility of VM /SP, the user will be able to
issue CMS (including editor) and CP commands directly from the screen
on which a HELP file is displayed. Because HELP files will be viewed
via the new CMS editor, scrolling and locate facilities will be improved.
The New CMS EXEC Interpreter: VM/SP CMS will provide the user
with more advanced EXEC processing capabilities and improved
performance. The new EXEC interpreter:
Association of a form number with each spool file and spool
device. Features of form number support are:
Accepts words of up to 255 characters each.
- An eight character alphameric form number.
Allows commands to be issued either to CMS or to specified
subcommand environments; for example, to an editor.
- Optional automatic prompting of the spool operator for forms
changes.
Provides new string manipulation functions.
- Optional "setup mode" to allow the spool operator to align
forms.
Provides arithmetic functions for multiplication and division.
- Ability to order, change, purge, transfer, spool-to-tape and
query spool files by form number.
Supports user-defined functions and subroutines.
- Default form numbers that are installation specified.
- Optional installation specified translation
numbers to operator form numbers.
from
user form
Ability to transfer spool files between the reader and printer
queues, or the reader and punch queues.
Capturing of the Load FCB, Fold and Unfold CCWs in a virtual
printer spool file, and their subsequent execution on the real
printer.
Ability to select spool files for the QUERY command based on their
hold status.
An enhanced header page and a new trailer page for printed
output. A file sequence number helps the spool operator distribute
output correctly.
Additional spool operator information:
:'-: A "waiting" message when a real spool device finishes work.
- Ability to display the number of records left to print or punch in
the,currently active spool file.
- Display:"of the distribution code and, the new file sequence
number for 6,f!ch file printed or punched.
Ability for the(l~stallation to specify classification titles for selected
spool file classes.;~Tho title will be printed on the separator page,
and optlonallyoneach page of output.
Abilityt~ spe~iptthe distribu~ion code on SPOOL command.
Increase in the allowable copy cO~,nt to 255.
Spool Files to Tape: This support provides Class 0 commands which
enable the spooling operator to store to tape", or retrieve from tape,
those unit record output files which he or"she wishes to schedule for
real output at some later time on the VM /SP system. The restored files
will retain the same characteristics as the original files, but will be
assigned new spool-ids to avoid duplicate identification within the
spooling system. The spooling operator can store or retrieve spool files
selectively (by class or spool-id) or completely. An option is provided
to allow the operator to scan the tape.
,:h
Provides debugging facilities.
Improves execution time.
Coexists with the current CMS EXEC interpreter.
The New CMS Editor: The new CMS editor provides:
Full screen support for 3270 display stations, including: multiple
views of the same file or of different files, selective column viewing
and automatic wrapping of lines larger than the screen.
Ability to extend and tailor editor commands with a powerful macro
mechanism which uses the new eMS EXEC interpreter.
Extended string search facilities to improve text processing.
Enhanced functions to handle program development including
automatic update generation.
Ability to define the screen format according to individual
preferences.
Data import and export facilities.
Coexistence with the CMS editor.
3278-5 and 3279 terminal support.
CMS as Loader Capability: The CMS OS Loader will enable OS
relocatable load modules to be used under CMS. The load modules
may be loaded from an OS partitioned data set or a CMS load library.
This support also provides a facility to list, copy or compress members
of a eMS load library and to merge CMS load libraries.
This support further allows use of the OS/VS Linkage Editor to create a
eMS LOADLIB or a LOADLIB member. This is accomplished using the
existing LKED command. The supported Linkage Editor options are
defined in the CMS Command and Macro Reference (SC19-6209).
CMS Use of CP Page Management Interfaces: CMS now takes
advantage of the existing page control interfaces to better communicate
the true working set of pages to CP, thus better utilizing the page frame
resources ofZthe real machine.
CMS Tape Command Performance Improvement: To decrease
overhead, a large block-size (4K) is supported for tape dump.
CMS Support of Labeled Tapes: CMS processes labelled tapes as
follOWS:
------- - - - -----
PP 5664-167.6
Do not reproduce without written permission
= - - :E':fE: ISG
Mar83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
VM/SP (cont'd)
VOL 1 Labels
- Processed by DOS or OS OPEN simulation routines.
- Processed by CMS TAPPDS of TAPEMAC commands.
. - Displayed or written by CMS TAPE command.
HDR Labels
- Processed by DOS or OS OPEN simulation routines; exits are
provided to allow access to user-written routines to process
standard user (UHL) labels.
- Processed by CMS TAPPDS or TAPEMAC commands.
- Processed by a CMS macro designed for use in assembly
language programs in conjunction with other CMS tape macros.
EOF /EOV Labels
- Processed by DOS or OS CLOSE simulation routines; exits are
provided to allow access to user-written routines to process
standard user (UTL) labels.
- Processed by a CMS macro designed for use in assembly
language programs in conjunction with other CMS tape macros.
Non'·Standard Labels
- US(lr f)xits are provided in DOS or as OPEN and CLOSE
simulation routines and in TAPPDS or TAPEMAC commands to
allow access to user-written routines to process non-standard
labels.
Note: The following are supported:
• Label processing for tapes which are read backwards.
• Multi-volume files.
• ASCII labels.
CMS Support of Unlabeled Tapes: CMS will process unlabeled tapes.
Enhanced Support for the 3270 Information Display System Which
Includes:
APL Text Feature: The 3270 APL-TEXT feature provides the 3270 user
with access to the full APL, TEXT and EBCDIC character sets. This
makes it possible for the user to interact with the VS APL program
product as well as text processing applications which run under CMS.
This support extends the APL- TEXT function to users with 3274
Controllers/3278 Display Stations.
VM/System Product takes advantage of the
intensified display feature of the 3270 I nformation Display System as
follows:
Intensified
Display:
The "Current Line" of the CMS Editor will be intensified.
All CMS Edit messages will be intensified.
An application program may supply a 3270 Start Field ordor and an
attribute byte in a DIAGNOSE 58, CCW Code 19 (Virtual Console
Interface) data stream. This provides an application program with
the ability to define a field as normal intensity, intensified or
non-display.
Messages from the system operator or other users will be
intensified.
Tho re-display of user input is intensified so that it may be
distinguished from output. The SET command will activate or
deactivate intensification of input re-display.
Support for the Enhanced Display Terminals: The following
terminals and associated printers are supported:
2250 mdl 3 Display Unit
2840 Display Control mdl 2
3250 Graphics Display System
3251 Display Station
3255 Display Control Unit
3258 Channel Control Unit
3262 Printer mdls 3 and 13
3274 Control Unit mdl 18, 21 B (3272 compatible)
3274 Control Unit mdl 1C, 21 C, 31 C, 51 C (TP - BSC only)
3274 Control Unit mdl 10,21 D, 31 D (3272 compatible)
3276 Control Unit/Display Station mdl 2 (1920 character screen)
3276 Control Unit/Display Station mdl 3 (2560 character screen)
3276 Control Unit/Display Station mdl4 (3440 character screen)
3278 Display Station mdl 2 (1920 character screen)
3278 Display Station mdl 3 (2560 character screen)
3278 Display Station mdl 4 (3440 character screen)
3278 Display Station mdl 5 (3564 character screen)
3279 Display Station (Multi-color display screen)
3268/3287/3289 Printer (Copy command support only)
This includes support for the 96-charactor set (94 characters plus
space and null). and PF keys 13 through 24.
The VM/SP support for the 3279 provides a new data stream for
communicating between the device and the host, multiple colors for
data display, programmable symbol-set capability and extended
highlighting attributes; extended highlight functions are character
underscore, reverse video and blinking character. These attributes can
be set and reset for the different areas of the display screen. VM/SP
support for color enables the user to select colors for CP messages,
virtual machine output, redisplay of user input, user input area and the
CP status area.
Support for the 3880 Storage Control Models 1, 2 and 3
Support for the 3800 Printing Subsystem as a Virtual Spooling
Device: The VM/SP will allow extended use of the font, image and
copy capabilities of the 3800 Printing Subsystem. A user is able· to
print a file on a real 3800 or on any real spooling device supported by
CP Spooling running in conjunction with the VM/SP.
Dedication of Remote 32eX Printers: Remote bisynchronous 328X
printers can now be dedicated to guest machines. This support further
allows the Remote Spooling Communication Subsystem (RSCS)
program product to spool and print VM/370 files on the 328X printers.
(For further information, see the RSCS documentation.)
Support for the 3289 Printer Model 4: The 3289 mdl 4 is a 400
line-per-minute printer, functionally compatible with the 3203 Printer
mdl 4 except in the area of UCS buffer load.
Support for the 3262 Printer Models 1 and 11: The 3262 mdls 1 and
11 are, respectively, 650 and 325 line-per minute printers.
Support for the 3262 Printer Model 5: The 3262 mdl 5 is a channelattached 650 lines-per-minute printer functionally compatible with the
3262 mdll.
Support for the 8809 Tape: The 8809 is a two-speed tape drive (12.5
ips and 100 ips). It is supported at 12.5 ips in VM /370. The standalone dump-restore utility (DDR) supports the device at 100 ips to
provide high-speed backup capability when executing on a stand-alone
processor and 3310/3370 DASD.
Support for the 3310/3370 Direct Access Devices: The 3310/3370
are direct access devices that use Fixed Block Architecture. The Direct
Access Storage Compatibility Feature (#7901) of the 4331 Processor
for emulation of 2314, 3330 or 3340 format data on the 3310 or 3370 is
supported. VM/SP supports 3310 or 3370 volumes containing
emulated data which are dedicated to a guest operating system other
than VM/SP or CMS.
3380 CASe Support: VM/SP supports the 3380 Direct Access
Storage with the 3880 Storage Control mdls 2 and 3, using the Data
Streaming Feature on the 3031, 3032 and 3033 Processors, or attached
to a 3 MB channel on the 4341.
The 3380 DASD is supported by VM/SP as a paging, spooling,
SYSRES, T -disk or mini-disk device and as a device dedicated to a
virtual machine operating system that supports the 3380 DASD.
The 3380 DASD offers a new level of reliability and performance, with
increased capacity for online data storage.
Note: VM/SP does not support the dynamic path selection capability of
the 3380 DASD mdls AAF and A4 .
Missing Interrupt Handler: System I/O activity is monitored to detect
interrupts not occuring within an installation specified period of time.
An attempt at corrective action is made and a message is sent to the
system operator to advise of the results.
Note: Missing Interrupt Handler support for Release 2 of VM/System
Product is available 4Q 1982.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Ordering and installing all of the required communications facilities.<;
Generating the appropriate 3704/3705 Communications Controller,
programs.
7
C'c
C.~l· ':
,l"~
Allocating and formatting direct access storage~;sR~ce for ,t~e
VM/SP control program, the CMS system resl~e9!?~r'area and user
work areas.
, ' .' .,''tiy1i'.k,·,
Generating and updating user direct~;rt':~~'a~' virtual machine
descriptions.
..
'~,.\.,. . c ,
,
'~~t,
:1.1(,
,~.-~~~.
,
\':'~~1
Making the final evaluation as toiwhich programs sliould be run
under VM/SP in his environment~~~l,·"
Training personnel to operate;t~e VM/SP syst~m.
Teaching users VM /SP cOITJ!Tlands and how toLoperate the remote
terminals.
,;<:", ··w~'\,<':;::
Note: To run SVSunder the \1M/System Product,PTF UY77568 must
have been applied to the SVS system.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
, HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
------- --------
PP 5664-167.7
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar83
= - - :§~E: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
VM/SP (coni'd)
VM/System Product is designed to run on IBM S/370 models 135,
135-3,138, 145,145-3,148,155 11,158, 158-3, 158AP, 158MP, 165
II, 168, 168-3, 168AP, 168MP and on the 4321, 4331, 4331 Model
Group 2, 4341, 4341 Model Group 2,3031, 3031AP, 3032, 3033 Model
Group N, 3033, 3033S, 3033AP, 3033AP ...-2, 3033MP and the 2K
storage protect version of the 3081 Model 016 Processor Complex.
Note: Support of the VM/System Product High Performance Option
Licensed Program (5664-173) for VM / System Product Release 3 will
be available in first quarter 1984.
VM/SP Release 3 support of AP/MP and the 3081-016 Processors
will be available in first quarter 1984. Note: The VM/SP requires as a
prerequisite the application of EC #274276 (shipped in June 1980) to
the 3031 uniprocessor and 3031 attached processor.
I
Real Storage Requirement: The VM/System Product requires a
minimum user accessible storage of 512K.
Minimum machine requirements are listed for information only.
Depending upon the number of terminals used, the total workload of
the system, and the desired response time, all users should consider
increasing real storage size as appropriate.
Display Terminal Support: The IBM 3278 mdl 5 and 3279 display
terminals are supported.
Notes
1.
2.
VM/System Product supports a cardless environment. By using
the facility to spool accounting records and altering the system
generation procedures to use tape devices, the requirement for a
card reader/punch can be eliminated. Specific details are
contained in the VM / SP Planning and System Generation Guide.
Specific details relevant to the minimum configuration required for
hardware maintenance should be directed to the Field Engineering
Division.
ECPS: VM/370 Support
Model No.
VM!370
Availability
135-3
138
145-3
148
3031
3131AP
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
4321
4331 MG1
4331 MG2
4341 MG1
4341MG2
L{we119
Level 19
Leve! 19
Level 19
Level 19
EC #149136 and later
EC #149136 and later
EC #356901 and later
EC #147710 and later
EC#274276 and later
EC#274276/388860
and later
At shipment of processor
EC#364290 and later
EC#3644'15 and later
EC#154315 and later
EC#856093 and later
18
18
18
18
19
19
Notes
1.
The VM!System Product will execute on the 135-3, 138, 145-3
and 148 processors at earlier EC levels, but the hardware assist will
not be used.
2.
The 3031, 4321, 4331 and 3031AP Processors support only a
subset of ECPS:VM/370 function.
3.
If users running the VM/SP on S/370 mdls 135-3, 138, 145-3 or
148 with ECPS for VM!370 also choose to use the shadow table
maintenance functions of the VM/SP, they will not realize the full
benefit of ECPS. This is because the shadow table maintenance
algorithms will be used in preference to some ECPS algorithms.
4.
CMS disk I/O (Diagnose 18) has been modi"fied to take advantage
of ECPS:VM/370 for CCW translation. The improvement is
available with the existing ECPS:VM/370 assist on the S/370
.. 135-3, 138, 145- 3 and 148 Processors. The improvement is also
,; ~vailable with the ECPS:VM 1370 assist on the 4341 Processor.
5.
6.
The ECPS:VM/370 and ECPS:MVS options on the 4341 Model
Group ,1 are mutually exclusive. The 4341 Model Group 1
Processqr:J"WS users who have specific throughput or terminal
response.reqlJir~me~ts an~ who plan to run the MVS/Sys~em
Products 1n'~onJunctlon With the VM/SP should carefully review
their configura~!or~,to ensure that executod performance needs are
m1lt.
'~~',
'
The ECPS:VM/370 and ECPS:MVS options may be concurrently
utilized on the 4341 Model Group 2 Processor, whenever
ECPS:VM/370 and ECPS:MVS are both selected at IML time.
With this joint soloction, functions· of the shadow table bypass
assist defined in Virtual Machine Assist and Shadow Table
Bypass Assist (GA22-7074) are included; These functions are
designed to enhance· the performance of. o MVS running under
VM/370 in a V=R enyironment with the VM/System Product.
Shadow Table Bypass Support: On the 3031 a~d 3031 AP processors, an engineering change (EC #276271 and later) ,is available to
improve the performance gains of the shadow table function of the
VM/SP. Because system performance is dependent on a' number of
variables, IBM will not warrant that improvement in performance will be
realized in all cases where the VM /SP shadow table function is
activated.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
VSE/VSAM Release 3 program product support and CMS/DOS
services for VSE/ Advanced Function Release 3 are supported by
VM / SP Release 3.
I
COMPATIBILITY
Application programs that currently execute under the VM/Basic
System Extensions program product or the VM/System Extensions
program product or the VM/System Product Release 1 and are not
dependent on internal CD or CMS structure and/or control blocks,
should also run on the VM/System Product Release 2.
For ease of migration, the existing CMS editor continues to be
supported in the VM/SP. However, the existing CMS editor dan
Migration macros. If he or she desires, the user can invoke the existing
CMS editor.
I
The new VM/SP editor includes among its enhancements some of the
functions contained in the Display Editing System (DES) IUP, order
number 5796-PJP. Macros are provided to aid users in migrating from
DES to the new editor by providing a DES display format for command
input. The Macros provide a SYGSET of the EDGAR functions. Not all
functions will work exactly as EDGAR native mode.
CONVERSION
SPOOL file information has been changed in Release 3. A conversion
aid will be available via the SPTAPE function to allow those users who
currently have VM/SP Release 1 or Release 2 installed and do not want
to perform a COLD start the ability to migrate their SPOOL files to
VM/SP Release 3.
VM/SP Release 2 Programmable Operator Routing Tables must be
converted to the VM/SP Release 3 routing table format. A CMS EXEC
will be provided to aid in this conversion.
Other than the optional compatibility macros announced in VM/SP
Release 1, and the above items, no conversion aids are required to
move from VM/Basic System Extensions Release 2, VM/System
Extensions Release 2, or VM/SP Releases 1 or 2 to Release 3 of
VM/SP.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Title
Order
Number
Virtual Machine System Product:
Introduction
Glossary and Master Index
Planning and System Generation Guide
Operator's Guide
System Programmer's Guide
System Messages
OLTSEP and ERROR Recording Guide
Terminal User's Guide
Remote Spooling Communications Subsystems
(RSeS) User's Guide
CMS Command and Macro Reference
eMS User's Guide
CP Command Reference for General User's
Operating Systems in a Virtual Machine
Interactive Problem Control System (lPCS)
User's Guide
VM/SP Quick Guide for General Users
VM/SP Commands (General Users)
Reference Summary
VM/SP Commands (Other than General Users)
Reference Summary
EXEC 2 Reference
System Product Editor User's Guide
System Product Editor Command
and Macro Reference
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS See PP Index
ZONE * * *
ZONE·* * *
GC19-6200
GC19-6207
SC19-6201
SC19-6202
SC19-6203
SC19-6204
SC19-6205
GC19-6206
GC20-1816
SC19-6209
SC19-6210
SC19-6211
GC19-6212
GC20-1823
SX20-4400
SX20-4401
SX20-4402
SC24-5219
SC24-5220
SC24-5221
------- -------.=. =:: :5~~ ISG
PP 5702·RG1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Maior Revision
PROGRAM. PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 DISK RPG II
5702·RG1
PURPOSE
IBM System/3 Disk RPG II is a program product that operates under
control of the System Control Programming. It is disk resident on the
IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive, and in addition to the functions provided
by the Card RPG II, the Disk RPG II facilitates reading and writing disk
records and updating existing disk files using card and disk
input/output. A directly attached IBM 3741 Data Station is supported
for input or output at compile or execution time. Disk RPG II can be
used on IBM System/3 mdl 8.
DESCRIPTION
The 1442 is supported as an I/O device, and for reading RPG II source
statements or data. Disk RPG II permits punching 256 characters (see
GX20-1703) and packed decimal on the 1442.
The recording techniques used by all disk file organizations permit
mUltiple records to be read or written with a single I/O instruction.
Unlike previous data management techniques, System/3 disk files can
be written or read using different blocking factors in different programs.
This facility allows the user to process single records when a program
uses a large amount of storage or to use as much core as available in
processing multiple records to increase throughput.
Any of the disk data files created by System/3 object programs can be
processed by any program on the System/3 which uses disk system
management to access the files and has compatible disk storage.
The access methods supported are as follows:
1.
For source program compilation on a model 8 - an IBM 5408 Processing Unit mdl A14 (16K bytes), an IBM 5203 Printer, an IBM 5444 Disk
Storage Drive mdl A1, and either an IBM 3741
Data
Station/Programmable Workstation directly attached or an IBM 5471
Printer- Keyboard.
The object program generated by the Disk RPG II Compiler on the mdl 8
supports, in addition, all the capabilities of the IBM 5203 Printer, 3741
Data Station/Programmable Work Station directly attached, 5444 Disk
Storage Drives, 5448 Disk Storage (see "Disk RPG II 5445 Disk Storage
Drive Feature"), 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystems (see "Disk
RPG II Magnetic Tape Feature"), and 5408 Processing Unit of 16K
bytes and above.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5702-SC1.
required.
For 3741 support, 5702-SC1 feature #6066/#6067 is
DOCUMENTATION
Indexed
a) Random processing - by key.
b) Consecutive processing - by key including file loading.
Unlike previous indexed file organizations, the keys and data may
be in a different physical sequence; i.e., the most active records
may be placed in the front of the file with the index in sequence by
item number.
3.
The object program generated by the Disk RPG II Compiler supports, in
addition, all capacities of the IBM 5203 and 1403 Printers, IBM 5424
MFCU, 1442 mdl 7, 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation
directly attached, 5444 Disk Storage Drive, 5445/5448 Disk Storage
(see Disk RPG II 5445 Disk Storage Drive feature), 3410/3411
Magnetic Tape Subsystem (see Disk RPG II Magnetic Tape Feature),
and 5410 Processing Unit of 12K bytes and above.
Sequential
a) Consecutive processing - including updating in place.
b) Random processing - by relative record number including
updating but excluding file loading.
2.
A13 (12K bytes), an IBM 5424 MFCU mdl A1 or an IBM 1442 Card
Read Punch mdl 6, an IBM 5203 Printer mdl 1 or an IBM 1403 Printer
mdl 2 and an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive mdl 1.
Direct
a) Random Processing - by relative record number, including
updating and file loading. The open routine on the file load clears
the data area on disk.
b) Consecutive processing.
Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory on all disk files.
Non-standard labels cannot be used except as data records within the
file.
In addition to the extensions to RPG implemented in the System/3 Card
RPG II, Disk RPG II has the following language extensions:
a)
Chain Operation Code - User control of direct processing by key or
relative record number through the calculation specifications. This
facility can be used for chaining from one record to another record
in the same file and user generation of the key or relative record
number through program logic.
b) Automatic Overlay - When a program generates too much object
code for the stated machine size, the Disk RPG II Compiler will
generate overlays to fit. Not all programs - even with overlays can fit into the stated machine size. In any event, programs cannot
be compiled that would exceed 64K without overlays.
c) AND/OR - Relationships on calculation specifications.
d) ,Square root operation code in calculation specifications.
e). ;.Display Operation Code - The ability to display messages on and
• accept data from the 5471 Printer-Keyboard.
f) Spread card procossing is provided for within RPG II.
g) Output from tho Disk RPG II Compiler may be loaded into the
object program library or punched into cords or written on diskette
for subsequel)t loading.
h) Support for nonstandard (RPQ and OEM) devices is included. The
user must,. provide. a suitable I/O routine (object program) to
support tile' nonstandard device. The remainder of the program
written in RPG"II will be linked with the user's I/O routine during
program compilation.
i)
MOVEA operation code"; provides the ability to move a field to an
array or an array to a field. The move is left-justified and can begin
at any element of the array~ This gives the user the ability to access
a field on a byte-by-byte basis.
j) SETLL operation code---allows the user to ,set limits during
calculations for processing indexed files within limits.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirement: For source program c~',:npilation - an IBM
System/3 model 10 which includes an IBM 5410 Processing Unit mdl
(available from Mechanicsburg)
RPG /I Reference Manual (SC21-7504) ... RPG /I Additional Topics
Programmer's Guide (GC21-7567) ... Disk Concepts and Planning
Guide (GC21-7571) ... RPG " Disk File Processing Programmer's
Guide (GC21-7566) ... Introduction to RPG " (GC21-7514) ...
System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
DISK RPG II TELECOMMUNICATIONS FEATURE
FEATURES #6000 and #8002
PURPOSE
This feature is applicable to IBM System/3 mdl 8. The Disk RPG II
Telecommunications feature provides the user with the capability of
sending or receiving binary synchronous data over voice grade or high
Ilpeed*** communications lines. This support is achieved through the
use of an RPG II Telecommunications Specifications Sheet, and the
addition of BSCA (Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter) as a
device entry on the RPG 1\ File Description Specification. This RPG II
support permits System/3 to function in one of the following communication modes:
Receive only ... Receive with conversational reply*** ... Transmit only ...
Transmit with conversational reply*** .. , Alternate transmit and receive
file.****
DESCRIPTION
The following RPG II language features are supported for communications:
Input, Output and Combined Files ... Demand Files for Transmit and
Receive ... Blocking and Deblocking of Records ." Dual I/O Areas.
These BSCA features, options, and capabilities are supported by the
feature:
Manual call '" Manual answer ... Auto-call ... Auto-answer ...
Medium speed ... High speed ... Station selection ... EBCDIC data
transparency ... Intermediate block checking ... EBCDIC or ASCII
data and data link control characters. File translation of ASCII data
can .be accomplished by proper use of the file translate extension of
RPG II.
System/3 with a BSCA supported by the RPG II Telecommunications
feature can communicate with the following systems:
Another System/3 with BSCA, program supported by RPG II
Telecommunications feature.
A System/32 with BSCA, program-supported by RPG II.
A System/34 equipped with a Communications Adapter, programsupported by RPG II and Assembler.
A System/360 mdl 20 with BSCA, program-supported by BSCA
10CS.
S/360 mdl 22 or larger, S/370
A 2770 Data Communication System.
A 2780 Data Transmission Terminal.
A 3741-2 Data Station/3741-4 Programmable Workstation.
A 5110 Computer System supported as a 3741 mdl 2 or 4.
A 5231 mdl 2 with BSCA (#2074). Receive mode only. Supported
as a 3741 mdl 2 or 4.
A 5280 Distributed Data System
.
A Series/1 - Refer to Series/1 pages for appropriate features.
---
--- ----
:: - - :§~§:
PP 5702-RG1.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
S/3 Disk RPG II (cont'd)
A 6670 Information Distributor (as a 2770)
A System/7 with BSCA (#2074)
Note: For users of 5448 Disk Storage Drive, specify feature #6014 for
200-cylinder 5444 disk cartridge distribution.
This program provides the support to use System/3 in the following
telecommunications networks:
Point-to-Point switched ... Point-to-Point
Multipoint (as a tributary station).
nonswitched
System/3 with BSCA is a compatible member of the IBM BSC family
of terminals. It can be intermixed with other BSC terminals
(System/360 mdl 20, 1130, 1800, 5280, System/32, System/34,
2770, 2780, 3741-2, 3741-4, 3780 and 2715 mdl 2) on a multipoint
line when operating as a tributary station with a central System/360 or
System/370 computer* using DOS or OS BTAM. It can also share the
same phone number at the central System/360 or System/370
computer* with other BSC terminals (System/360 or System/370
computers**, System/360 mdl 20, 1130, 1800, System/32,
System/34, 2780, 2770, 3780, 3741-2,3741-4 and 6670 (as a 2770),
2715 Model 2).
System/360 mdls 22,25 and 30 DOS, mdls 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65
mode), and 75 with DOS and OS, and mdls 85, 91 and 195 with
OS; System/370 mdls 135, 145 and 155 using DOS or OS, and
mdl 165 using OS when operating in Basic Compatibility Mode.
**
System/360 mdl 22 with DOS, mdls 25 and 30 with BOS/BPS
or DOS/360, mdls 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), and 75 with
BOS/BPS, DOS or OS/360 and mdls 85, 91 and 195 with
OS/360, System/370 mdl 135, 145 and 155 with DOS and OS,
and mdl 165 with OS when operating in Basic Compatibility
Mode.
***
Not supported in communication with System/32, System/34,
5280, 2770, 2780, 3741-2 or 3741-4.
****
Transmit interspersed with Receive is not supported in communication with 2770, 2780, 3741-2 or 3741-4.
t
DISK RPG II MAGNETIC TAPE FEATURE
FEATURE #6016 or #6018
...
Operator Identification Card Reader feature (#5450) and the
Expanded Communications/Multipoint Data Link Control
feature (#1685) on 3741-2, -4 are not supported.
PURPOSE
This feature is applicable to IBM System/3 mdl 8. The Disk RPG II
Magnetic Tape Feature provides the user with RPG II support to
process data or record address files on magnetic tape. Records may be
fixed or variable length and may be either blocked or unblocked.
Minimum record or block length is 18 bytes; the maximum is 9,999
bytes.
The File Description Specifications define the control information and
device entry of Magnetic Tape to the RPG II compiler.
The feature supports consecutive input and output files. The files may
be recorded in either EBCDIC or ASCII code.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirement: For source compilation: For both the
mdl 8 and mdl 10 - the same requirements for compilation as Disk RPG
II (5702-RG1). For object program execution: In addition to what is
required for compilation, one or more units of the IBM 3410/3411
Magnetic Tape Subsystem are required.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5702-RG1; 5702-SC1; 5702-SC1 feature #6024/#6025.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM System/3 Magnetic Tape Planning Manual (GC21-5040) ...
System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
Note: For users of 5448 Disk Storage Drive, specify feature #6014 for
200-cylinder 5440 disk cartridge distribution.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 10 RPG II AUTO-REPORT FEATURE
FEATURE #6028, #6029
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirement: For source compilation: same as
Disk RPG II (5702-RG1).
For object program execution: Mdl 10 - an IBM 5410 Processing Unit
with a BSCA (Feature #2074) ... Mdl 8 - an IBM 5408 Processing Unit
with either the ICA (feature #4645) or the BSCA (feature #2074).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
PURPOSE
This feature is applicable to System/3 mdl 8. The RPG II Auto-Report
feature enhances the RPG II language by providing functions which
eliminate much of the preparation and coding work normally done by
the user when producing an application program in RPG II. It is
specifically designed to facilitate report preparation.
DESCRIPTION
5702-SC1; 5702-RG1.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
RPG /I Telecommunications Reference Manual (SC21-7507)
System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
...
DISK RPG 115445 DISK STORAGE DRIVE FEATURE
FEATURE #6012, #6014
Features: Coding of applications in RPG II is made easier by the
following Auto- Report functions.
PURPOSE
This feature supports the 5448 on both the mdl 8 and mdl 10, but
supports the 5445 on the mdl 10 only. The feature allows RPG II users
to process data files on the 5445/5448 Disk Storage Drive.
Page Headings - the user need supply only the report title.
Auto-Report generates skipping, spacing, horizontal alignment and
date and page number constants. Page overflow is considered and
the heading conditioned to print on the top of each page.
Simplified Output Specifications - A single output field specification can result in Auto Report generated statement to:
DESCRIPTION
The File Description Specifications define the control information and
device entry of the 5445/5448 Disk Storage Drive to the RPG II
compiler.
This feature supports the 5445/5448 Disk Storage Drive for data files
only. The same capability for data file storage and retrieval is provided
for the 5445/5448 as is provided for the 5444.· The file organizations
supported by Disk RPG II are: Sequential, Direct, and Indexed.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: For compilation on the mdl 8, the
same requirements as Disk RPG II (5702-RG1). For object program
execution, an rBM 5448 Disk Storage Drive is required.
For compilation on the mdl 10, the same requirements as Disk RPG II
(5702-RG1). For object program execution, an IBM 5445 or 5448 Disk
Storage Drive is required.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5702-RG1; 5702-SC1; 5702-SCl featuro #6022/#6023
Support) or 5702-SCl feature #6074 (5448 Support).
The Auto-Report program executes as a preprocessor to the RPG II
compiler which is a prerequisite for the feature. The input to the
program is RPG II source statements and new Auto-Report statements.
Auto-Report produces a diagnostic listing, replaces the Auto-Report
statements with generated or copied RPG II source statements and
calls the RPG " compiler for execution.
(5445
-
indicate printing with editing,
place column heading over the data fields,
control spacing,
control horizontal alignment of data,
define total fields and calculation specifications to accum~~e
totals by control levels (total rolling)
,.¥f~{'. t'.;~~
- flag total lines with asterisk indication. ,.}.t,(1:.¢;!~:'
~~.
:~,~:t<~.""'''~':;:','""
"
t,
COpy - The COPY statement providesthe;.a&ilitx,~to copy'RPG "
source statements from a disk library ··lrnt9.;'~.IJ.~~R.PG II source
program. Some values on the.c,:opled!Speclfl~tlolls may be
modified for the resulting compilation;r,;:.· .", ·:.,.:'~/:,:.F· .
'.
,·,./;t·:~\;~,"~{"i!f··
'!',\'.':.\~>,-,'
Source Program - The A!:-ito-Report program,'~d)asses control
directly to the RPG .11 :icompilerAq~cause~\coh;ipiiation of the
expanded source,program.lm addition, userS! may elect to punch
the source prog~am" so that~they 6a'ri~make modifications which
tailor the program mar'e closely to their:",requirements. They can
also elect tocatalog.,.to the Source Library a copy of the source
• l:,
program for late,t·compilation:
The Auto,:,Report f~rictions may be spe~ified for one printer file in any
RPG II program>;;.~Any RPG II. specifications not related to the selected
printer file and:.'any ~PG II s,tC!!ements for the printer file but not
------- ----:: - - :§'=!§: ISG
PP 5702-RG1.3
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
8/3 Disk RPG II (cont'd)
requesting Auto-Report functions, are passed to the RPG II compiler as
a part of the source program.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: Same as for RPG II.
This feature is applicable for the mdl 8 and has the same requirements
as Disk RPG II.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5702-RG1; 5702-SC1.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Disk System RPG /I Auto-Report Feature General Information Manual
(GC21-7563) '" RPG /I Auto-Report Reference Manual (SC21-5057)
System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
3277
3284
3286
3288
Display Station (mdl 1 or 2)
Printer (mdl 1 or 2)
Printer (mdl 1 or 2)
Printer (mdl 2)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements
Model 8.~.The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature requires an IBM
System/3 mdl 8 which includes an IBM 5408 Processing Unit mdl A16
(32K bytes) ... An IBM 5444 A02 Disk Storage Drive ... An IBM 5203
Printer... An IBM 5471 Printer-Keyboard or 3741 Data Station directly
attached ... An Integrated Communications Adapter, Local Display
Adapter, or Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter... and one of
the devices listed under "Terminals Supported".
PURPOSE
Model 10...The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature requires an IBM
System/3 mdl 10 which includes an IBM 5410 Processing Unit mdl
A16 (32K bytes) ... An IBM 5444 mdl 2 Disk Storage Drive... An IBM
5203 or 1403 Printer... An IBM 5424 MFCU or 1442 Card Read
Punch ... A Local Communications Adapter or Binary Synchronous
Communications Adapter... and one of the devices listed under
"Terminals Supported" .
The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature provides telecommunications
services for local or remote 3270 devices. This program is automatically linked into the RPG II application program via the SPECIAL file exit
capability on the RPG II File Description Specification Sheet. Neither
the Assembler nor the RPG II Telecommunications feature is required.
Using SUBR13, approximately 10K-13.5K bytes is added to the size of
the object program; using SUBR14, 4.25K-5.25K bytes is added. The
actual amount of resident overhead is determined by the user options
selected, and that size can be increased to approximately 15K if the
trace options are additionally selected when using SUBR13.
RPG II 3270 DISPLAY CONTROL FEATURE
FEATURE #0070
DESCRIPTION
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The following services are provided by the 3270 Display Control
feature:
5702-SC1, 5702-SC1 feature #6021, 5702-SC1 feature #6031 and
5702-RG1.
RPG II access to 3270 Display System terminals attached via the
Local Communcations Adapter (mdl 10), the Local Display Adapter,
or Integrated Communications Adapter (mdl 8) or BSCA (mdls 8
and 10).
Automatic buffering and queuing of terminal data
A display formatting interface which permits the support of 3270
devices with coding in RPG II.
COMPATIBILITY
The System/3 mdl 8/10 RPG II 3270 Display Control feature is
functionally compatible with the System/3 mdl 12 and System/3 mdl
15 RPG II 3270 Display Control feature.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Complete line control procedures are provided.
IBM RPG /I 3270 Display Control Feature Reference and Logic Manual
(SC21-5161) ... System13 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
Up to 18 terminals may be controlled (up to 12 can be attached via
the Local Display Adapter on the mdl 8).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
Two subroutines are provided. SUBR13 allows an RPG II program
to support the 3270 Information Display System without using
CCP. Using SUBR14, an existing program using the 3270 Display
Control Feature may be converted to execute under control of CCP
by replacing SUBR13 references with SUBR14 references in the
RPG II source program. The user must then make any adjustments
required by CCP and recompile the program.
Provides the capability of coding one or more applications within
one program. No task switching is provided.
Terminals Supported: The following terminals and communications
facilities are supported under the RPG II 3270 Display Control feature:
With the Local Communications Adapter (mdI10)
- One 3275 Display Station and Control
- One 3271 Display Control Unit (mdl1 or 2) with:
3277 Display Station (mdl 1 or 2)
3284 Printer (mdl 1 or 2)
3286 Printer (mdl 1 or 2)
3288 Printer (mdl 2)
With the Local Display Adapter (mdl 8)
3277
3284
3286
3288
Display Station (mdl 1 or 2)
Printer (mdl 1 or 2)
Printer,(rndl 1 or 2)
Printer (rndl 2)
~'ote: A maximum ol'12.,terminals may be attached via tho Local Display
Adapter.,!' '-\~f '
With the Inlegrated C~;ri~unic~tions Adapter (mdl B)
- One 3275 Display Station and Control, or
- One 327,1 Dispi~~'Contr~!,lJnit (mdf1,or 2), with:
3277 Display Station (mal 1 or 2)
3284 Printer (mdl 1 or 2) .
"~
3286 Printer (mdl 1or 2)
3288 Printer (mdl 2)': '
With the Binary Synchronou~ Communications Adapter (mdls 8,and 10)
- 3275 Display Station and Control, or
- 3271 Display Control Unit (mdl1
o~})~,;~th:
'-
--------- ----....
:: - - :§~E: ISG
PP 5702-SM1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 DISK SORT PROGRAM
5702-SM1
PURPOSE
The IBM System/3 model 10 Disk Sort Program will sort any disk file
organization supported by System/3 in ascending or descending
sequence. This includes Indexed, Direct, and Sequential files.
DESCRIPTION
The files must be located on a 5444 Disk Storage Drive. The sort
program will also accept fixed length records from magnetic tape files
created by tape sequential access methods supported by System/3
data management. Output of the sort program may be created on
either magnetic tape or disk. The sort program can select desired
records from the input file to be included or excluded from the sort.
Recognition of individual records can be based on:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Record code
Relation of a field to a constant
Relation of two fields in a record
Any relationship in a series (ORing)
All relationships in a series (ANDing)
Multiples of the above test in any combinations.
Control fields may be in a different location in records within the file.
Output from the sort program will be in three formats:
1)
2)
3)
Tags - A file of three-byte binary relative record nlimbers in the
sequence specified by the user.
Tagalong - A file of records containing the sort control fields
and/or the data fields the user has specified. By using this option,
the user can select only the data he needs from his input file to be
included in the output. By specifying the entire input record as a
tagalong field, the user can, in effect, accomplish a record sort.
Summary Tagalong - Records containing identical control fields are
combined by summarizing (totaling) specified fields into one record.
Specification of record selection, sort parameters and tagalong data
fields is accomplished by simple, RPG-like coding sheets that are
similar to those used by the MFCU sort program.
Sort control card diagnostics and messages are printed on either the
5203 or 1403 Printers or the 5471 Printer-Keyboard, depending on
which has been assigned to the system's logging function via the
operator control language. If the logging function has been 'turned off,'
the sort printed output will be suppressed.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requireme",t: An IBM System/3 model 10 which
includes an IBM 5410 Processing Unit model A13 (12K bytes), an IBM
5424 MFCU model A1 or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch model 6, an
IBM 5203 Printer model 1 or an IBM 1403 Printer model 2 and an IBM
5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1.
For use on IBM System/3 model 8 = an IBM 5408 Processing Unit
model A14 (16K bytes), an IBM 5203 Printer, an IBM 5444 Disk
Storage Drive model A1, and either an IBM 3741 Data Station directly
attached or an IBM 5471 Printer-Keyboard.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5702-SC1; for tape support, 5702-SC1 feature #6024/#6025 is also
required.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Disk Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7522) ... System/3 Bibliography
(GC20-8080).
DISK SORT 5445 DISK STORAGE DRIVE FEATURE
(Feature #6008/#6010)
PURPOSE
This feature enables the user to sort all disk file organizations supported
for System/3 in either ascending or descending sequence. This feature
supports the 5448 on both the System/3 model 8 and model 10, but
supports the 5445 on the model 10 only.
All functions available to the Disk System user through the Disk Sort
Program (5702-SM1) are provided.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirement: For the IBM Model 8 - the same
requirements as the Disk Sort Program (5702-SM1) for the model 8,
plus the IBM 5448 Disk Storage Drive (the 5448 requires a 5444 model
A2 as a prerequisite).
For the IBM Model 10 - the same requirements as the Disk Sort
Program (5702-SM1) for the model 10, plus the IBM 5445 or 5448 Disk
Storage Drive (the 5448 requires a 5444 model 2 or A2 as a prerequisite).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5702-SM1; 5702-SC1; 5702-SC1 feature #6022/#6023
Support) or 5702-SC1 feature #6074 (5448 Support).
(5445
Note: For users of 5448 Disk Storage Drive, specify feature #6010 for
200-cylinder 5440 disk cartridge distribution.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- -----:: - - :s"f~ ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM J~RODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 DISK RESIDENT MAGNETIC TAPE SORT
5702-SM2
PURPOSE
The IBM System/3 Disk Resident Magnetic Tape Sort program sorts
fixed length, blocked and unblocked files residing on Magnetic Tape.
The sort requires a system with a minimum of 12K bytes of core and
three magnetic tape drives. Up to four magnetic tape drives may be
utilized by the sort program. The file may be recorded in either EBCDIC
or ASCII code, and may reside on multiple tape reels. (This feature is
applicable to System/3 model 8.1
DESCRIPTION
The sort program can select desired records from the input file to be
included or excluded from the sort. Recognition of individual records
can be based on:
Record code
Relation of a field to a constant
Relation of two fields in a record
Any relationship in a series (ORing)
All relationships in a series (AN Ding)
Multiples of the above test in any combinations
Control fields may be in a different location in records within the file.
Output from the sort program is in the following format:
A file of records containing the sort control fields and the data fields the
user has specified. The user need select only the data he needs from
his input to be included in the output. By specifying the entire input
record as a tagalong field, the user can, in effect, accomplish a record
sort.
Specification of record selection, sort parameters and tagalong data
fields is accomplished by simple, RPG-like coding sheets that are
similar to those used by the Disk Sort program, 5702-SM1. The
addrout and summary sort capabilities of the Disk Sort are not
supported in the Magnetic Tape Sort programs.
Sort control card diagnostics and messages are printed on the system
output device.
Checkpoint/Restart is supported but does not require the SCP feature
(5702-SC1, feature #6026/#6027). The maximum block or record size
for input or output is 9,999 bytes. Input and output files may be
multi-volume, but work files for the sort can be single volume files only.
To utilize all of the functions of this program, at least three 9-track work
tapes must be available. If one or more of the work tapes is 7 -track,
then only those sort functions that relate to the standard System/3
64-character set (EBCDIC) are supported. As a result, sorts of packed
decimal data, of signed numeric data, or on zones are not allowed in
these 7 -track configurations.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: In addition to the minimum system
requirements for 5702-SM1, an IBM System/3 model 8 or model 10
requires three magnetic tape drives. (When operating using DPF, a
minimum program level of 8K is required).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5702-SC1; 5702-SC1, feature #6024/#6025.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Tape Sort Program Reference Manual (SC21-7572).
Bibliography (GC20-8080) .
.; :!ERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
.., System/3
PP 5702-SM2.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
-------- ----:: - - :§~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 DISK RESIDENT CARD UTILITIES
5102·UT1
PURPOSE
The following IBM System/3 Card System Utilities may be ordered as
disk resident on an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive. Their function is the
same as their card system equivalents:
MFCU Sort/Collate
96-Column List
Reproduce II nterpret
Data Recording
Data Verifying
BO-96 Conversion Program.
(This feature not applicable to IBM System/3 model B.)
DESCRIPTION
The Model 10 Gangpunch program is available only for the disk system
and provides the following capabilities:
Interspersed master-card gangpunching: The master and detail
cards are intermixed in the primary file.
Count-controlled gangpunching: A fixed or variable counter may
be used to punch a specified number of detail cards. The master
card is in the secondary file and the detail cards are in the primary
file.
Match master cards and detail cards on a control field and punch
into the detail card if a match occurs: The master card is in the
secondary file and the detail card is in the primary file.
The following functions may be performed with any of the major
types of gang punching described above: Offset gangpunching ...
gang punching consecutive numbers into detail cards .,. gangpunching a constant into detail cards... card interpretation (entire
card or only what is punched) ... selection of a single type of master
card from many master cards '" selection of a single type of detail
card from many detail cards.
For count-controlled and match fields processing, MFCU2 is used
for input and MFCU1 is used for output. For interspersed
processing, MFCU1 is used for both input and output.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirement: An IBM System/3 model 10 which
includes an IBM 5410 Processing Unit model A13 (12K bytes), an IBM
5424 MFCU model A1, an IBM 5203 Printer mode! 1 or 1403 Printer
model 2 and an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1.
An IBM 5475 Data Entry Keyboard is required if the Data Recording
and/or Data Verifying programs are utilized.
An IBM 1442 Card Read Punch model 6 is required, in addition to the
IBM 5424 MFCU, if the BO-96 Conversion program is utilized.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: 5702-SC1.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Sort Collate and Card Utilities Reference Manual (SC21-7529) ...
Systeml3 80-96 Conversion Program and RPG Support for the 1442
Card Read Punch (SC21-751B) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20B080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5102·UT1.1
MarB3
Major Revision
------- ----:: - -~~~ ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAMPR()DUCTS
SYSTEM/3 UTILITY PROGRAM FOR
1255 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER
5702-UT2
PURPOSE
This IBM System/3 utility· program provides the disk oriented IBM
System/3 model 10 user control of document processing on the IBM
1255 Magnetic Character Reader. It provides a means of reading
MICR-encoded documents from the 1255, accumulating document
totals and amount field totals for each pocket, and placing the data
from the documents on output disk and printer files. The program is
designed to fulfill the basic requirements of the "ON-US" data capture
run required for all Demand Deposit Application programming. (This
program is applicable to the IBM System/3 modelS.)
DESCRIPTION
The program reads fields from the documents as specified by the user
and then, based on decisions indicated by the user, it will stacker select
these documents into user-specified pockets. If requested, Modulus
10 and 11 checking will be performed. Then, after each document has
been read and stacker selected, the utility will print user-specified fields
from that document. Fixed-length records will also be created and
placed on disk file (5444 or 5445 or 5448) or a tape file (3410 or 3411,
9-track only).
An additional facility provided by the program is the accumulation of
document totals and amount field totals and then printing these at end
of job. Subtotals may be printed at any time as indicated by the user
during program execution.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Configuration: Utility Program for the IBM 1255
Magnetic Character Reader will operate on a minimum configuration
IBM System/3 model 10 which includes an IBM 5410 Processing Unit
(12K bytes) with a Serial I/O Channel (#7081), an IBM 5424 MFCU
(250 cpm read and 60 cpm punch and print), an IBM 5203 Printer (96
print positions and 100 Ipm), or an IBM 1403 Printer (132 print
positions and 600 Ipm), an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive (2.45 million
bytes) and an IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. The minimum
main storage required to support a system including an IBM 5445 or
5448 Disk Storage Drive or IBM 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
is 16K bytes.
For use on IBM System/3 model a - an IBM 5408 Processing Unit
model A14 (16K bytes), an IBM 5203 Printer, an IBM 5444 Disk
Storage Drive model A 1, and either an IBM 3741 Data Station directly
attached or an IBM 5471 Printer-Keyboard. In addition, a Serial I/O
Channel and an IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader is required.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5702-SC1. For IBM 5445 support. 5702-SC1 feature #6022/#6023 is
also required (model 10 only). For IBM 5448 support, 5702-SC1
feature #6074 (model 10 only - IBM 5448 mutually exclusive with SIOC
on model 8). For tape support, 5702-SC1 feature #6024/#6025.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Utility Program For IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader Reference
Manual (SC21-7521) .. , System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5702-UT2.1
Mara3
Major Revision
--.-----:: -- --...- ::§~§: ISG
PP 5702-XP1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
JOB ANALYSIS SYSTEM/3 (JAS/3)
5702-XP1
DOCUMENTATION
PURPOSE
IBM Job Analysis System/3 (JAS/3) provides a powerful tool to aid
management in fulfilling its responsibilities in the planning, supervising,
and controlling of project-oriented work by the critical path method. It
is designed to be a high performance system with features which make
it easily usable by non-technical personnel.
JAS/3 operates under the System/3 Disk System Control Programs
5702-SC1 or 5703-SC1, 5704-SC1, 5704-SC2, or 5705-SC1.
Depending on core availability, JAS/3 has a processing capacity of
from 180 to 736 activities or work items and relationships per subnet
depending on core size.
HIGHLIGHTS
Front-to-back interfacing of up to 10 subnets to form a network with
up to 7,000 activities ... multiple networks per master file ... multiple
calendars (each subnet in a network can have its own calendar) ...
every relationship can have a lag ... multiple starts and ends (explicit or
implicit) ... reports easily modifiable via control cards .. , progress
reporting specifying actual start date and / or remaining duration .. ,
three types of schedule dates ... nine levels of milestones ... Direct
Access Master File... free-form data input.
Use: To use JAS/3, the customer must describe the activities which
constitute the project network. This data is punched into cards or
diskettes, for entry into the System/3 or can be entered directly from
the keyboard. Processing and report requ~sts can also be entered in
either fashion.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
All users should be familiar with the various features of this system
before attempting to use it for actual project control. Users will need a
knowledge of the fundamentals of the critical path technique before
they can prepare input.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum Configuration
Storage
System Unit Size
Reader/Punch
Disk
Printer
Control
Unit
5415
A17
48K
5424 MFCU or 5444 Modl
2560 MFCM or
1442 or
3741 Dir. Attach
Attach
1403
5421
5415
817
48K
5424 MFCU or 3340
2560 MFCM or
1442 or
3741 Dir. Attach
1403
5421
5415
019
96K
5424 MFCU or 3340
1442 or
2560 or
3741 Dir. Attach
1403
5421
5412
816
32K
5424 MFCU or 3340 Mod C2 1403
or
1442 Card Read
Punch
5203
3741 Dir. Attach
5421
5410
A13
12K
5424 MFCU or 5444 Mod 1
1442 Mod 6 or
3741 Dir. Attach
1403
or
5203
5421
5408
A14
16K
3741 Oir.
5444 Mod 1
Attach Keyboard
5203
5406
83
12K
5444 Mod 1
or
5213
2222
Additional Supported Devices:
and
2501 and
5444
5445s
3340,3344
5471 Printer/
5475 Keyboard
2(54445)
5445
5415
5410
5408
2(5444s)
5406
2(5444s)
5496
3741 Dir. Attach
Only Left
Carriage
on Dual
132 Chr. Mar.
Note: JAS/3 Does Not Support Spooling.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
JAS/3 is written in System/3 Basic Assembler language and operates
under the IBM System/3 Disk System Control Program. On a system
with Dual Programming feature, JAS/3 must run in Program Level 1.
(available from Mechanicsburg)
General Information Manual (GH20-1 085) ... Program Description and
Operations Manual (SH20-1176).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- _.. --
PP 5702-XX1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
=- -::§'f§: ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM.PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3DATA/3
5702-XX1, 5704-XX1. 5704-XX3. and 5705-XX1
PURPOSE
This program product provides users of IBM System/3 models 8, 10
Disk, 12 and 15 with a terminal-oriented data entry, inquiry, and file
maintenance system. The specific functions it provides are data entry,
data entry with master file input, inquiry, and inquiry with update.
HIGHLIGHTS
Uses a program definition and a data definition form. Both are
designed for ease-of-use with forms already familiar to the user.
Easy to install and use via RPG-like forms and fill-in-the-blanks
type prompting.
DATA/3 generated programs do not require a dedicated system;
that is, another program - batch or CCP - can be executed in the
other program level or partition.
DATA/3 generated programs can be executed under control of
CCP.
Places control and responsibility for data integrity at the data
source.
Offers up to four separate program security checks. Two are
available in the DATA/3 generated programs; two additional
checks are available when running under .cCP.
Requires no knowledge of programming languages by the terminal
operator.
Provides standard checking functions.
DESCRIPTION
Data Entry: Allows the operator to enter data on either a field or a record
basis. It creates a single output file which can contain multiple record
types depending on the application. Output files can be sequential,indexed, or direct. During data entry, the operator can page forward
or backward through the entry screens. The definition of the output
record format controls the program's flow by insuring that the proper
input, edit, and output record display format operations are performed.
If a field fails to pass a validity check, the field in error is intensified,
indicating a correction must be made by the operator.
Data Entry with Master File Input: Allows the operator to extract·
information from up to eight existing master files and combine this
information with data entered at the terminal. This combined data is
displayed, verified or overridden by the operator, and incorporated into
the output data file. Output files can be sequential or indexed, and, as
above, the operator can page forward and backward through the entry
screens during data entry.
Inquiry: This function allows access to records in a disk file by using a
record key. When there are several inquiry screen format displays used
by the program, the operator can switch from display to display. The
program may also specify 'ease-of~reading' editing for numeric fields.
Inquiry with Update: This function provides file maintenance capability.
When a record is accessed by key and displayed at the terminal, the
operator can change the appropriate fields and direct the program to
replace the record on disk with the new information. Data integrity is
preserved by having user specify at program definition time which fields
may be altered (unprotected) and which displayed fields may not be
altered (protected). Records may also be added by the operator at the
terminal.
Use: DATA/3 can be used in a wide variety of applications where a need
exists for online data entry, data inquiry and file maintenance.
It is particularly suited for customer service '" order entry... inventory
and production control ... stockholder records ... credit control.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Customizing DATA/3 to their specific needs. This will include the initial
specification of the data files that DATA/3 generated programs will
interface with. A data definition form is available.
Program definit)o'ilforms are available for use when a program is to be
generated usin~fttj~;OATA/3 facilities. These forms enable users to
specify program n8nie, security, data file intorfaces, 3270 screen
formats and field editlng'"requirements of their various programs.
, SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The minimum configuration for IBM,System/3 model 10 Disk System is
IBM 5410 Processing Unit - 24K fofNon";'CCP or 32K for CCP ... IBM
5444 Disk Storage Drive model 2 ... IBM 5424 Multi-function Card Unit
or 1442 Card Read Punch ... IBM 5203 Printer or 1403 Printer ... Local
Communications Adapter (LCA) or Binary Synchronous. Communications Adapter (BSCA) ... IBM 3270 Information Display System
. (minimum one display station)~ Programming Requirements include ...
model 10 Disk System Control Programming (5702-SC1, Release 12 or
later; or Release 13 if the Display Adapter is to be used) ... BSCA
Multiline/Multipoint feature (5702-SC1, feature #6030/#6031), ...
Macros feature (5702-SC1, feature #6020/#6021) ... Overlay Linkage
and
Checkpoint/Restart
feature
(5702-SC1
feature
Editor
#6026/#6027) ... RPG II Compiler (5702-RG1).
The minimum configuration for the IBM System/3 model 8 is IBM 5408
Processing Unit model A16 (32K bytes) ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive
model A2 ... IBM 5203 Printer ... IBM 5471 Printer-Keyboard or 3741
Data Station/Programmable Workstation directly attached ... Integrated
Communications Adapter (ICA) or Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter (BSCA) or the Local Display Adapter ... IBM 3270 Information
Display System (minimum one display station). Programming
Requirements same as IBM System/3 model 10.
The minimum configuration for IBM System/3 model 12 is IBM 5412
Processing Unit B16 (32K) ... IBM 5424 MFCU or 1442 Card Read
Punch or 3741 Data Station / Programmable Workstation directly
attached ... IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer ... IBM 3340 DASF ... Integrated
Communications Adapter (ICA) or Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter (BSCA) or Local Display Adapter ... IBM 3270 Information
Display System (minimum. one display station). Programming
requirements include .. , IBM model 12 System Control Programming
.
(5705-SC1) ... RPG II Compiler (5705-RG1).
The minimum configuration for IBM System/3 model 15 is the same as
for model 15 SCP, but in addition, the following are required: IBM 3270
Information Display System (minimum one I display station) ... Local
Communications Adapter (LCA) or BSCA or Display Adapter (FC4601);
or the model 150, the BSCC is supported by DATA/3, but only under
CCP. Programming requirements for 5704-XX1include the SCP
(5704-SC1 Release 3 or later; or Release 4 if the Display Adapter is to
be used) and RPG II Compiler (5704-RG1). Programming requirements
for 5704-XX3 include the SCP (5704-SC2) and RPG II Compiler
(5704- RG2).
Additional devices supported include additional 5444 or 5445 disks,
5448 disks, 3340 disks, 3344 disks, and multiple terminals (including
printers) on the 3270 Information Display System. (Program Function
Keys 1-5 are required on the 3270 terminals.) The Data Entry Keyboard
is recommended on the 3270 terminals.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
DATA/3 generated programs are compiled and executed like any other
RPG II program. The generated programs operate under control of the
System/3 System Control Programming (SCP) as follows:
SYSTEM/3
DATA/3
SCP
Models 8 and 10
Model 12
Model 15
Model 15
5702-XX1
5705-XX1
5704-XX1
5704-XX3
5702-SC1
5705-SC1
5704-SC1
5704-SC2
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
DATA/3 Reference Manual (SC21-5102) S/3 Bibliography (GC208080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
-------- ----=--:S~E: ISG
PP5703·F01.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 DISK FORTRAN IV
5703·F01
PURPOSE
COMPATIBILITY
IBM System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV processes programs written in the
IBM System/3 FORTRAN language, producing output suitable for
execution with the IBM System/3 model 6 System Control Programming (5703-SC1). (This program is not used with the model 4).
System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV source programs for System/3 model 6
are compatible with the System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV for System/3
model 10 except for changes required to accommodate differences in
attached I/O. The System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV compiler accepts
source programs written in the IBM System/360 Basic FORTRAN IV
language, which encompasses American National Standard Basic
FORTRAN as defined in X3.10.1966. The compiler also accepts source
programs written in the IBM 1130, Basic FORTRAN language with minor
modifications.
HIGHLIGHTS
The System/3 FORTRAN language contains those features defined in
American National Standard Basic FORTRAN, X3.10.1966; language
extensions supported by IBM 1130 Basic FORTRAN; and additional
features and capabilities previously available only with certain IBM Full
FORTRAN compilers. These features include:
The DEBUG facility, which enables the user to locate errors in a
FORTRAN source program. By use of four basic statements, the
debug facility provides for tracing flow within a program and
between programs, and for checking the validity of subscripts.
The IMPLICIT statement, which enables the user to specify the
type (including length) of all variables, arrays, and user-supplied
functions whose name begins with a particular letter.
Length specification for INTEGER and REAL type statements,
which allows the explicit specification of the INTEGER*2,
INTEGER*4, REAL*4, and REAL *8 (double precision) data types.
The relational IF statement, which is used to direct the transfer of
control after the evaluation of relational expressions.
List-directed input/output, which permits reading and writing of
formatted data without a FORMAT statement.
The GENERIC statement, which enables the user to specify a single
name for a FORTRAN built-in or library function having several
names. Depending on argument type, the correct function is
selected by the compiler with each appearance of the name.
IBM FORTRAN language extensions INVOKE, PROGRAM and
GLOBAL, which allow FORTRAN main programs to be loaded
successively into main storage and executed, while permitting
these programs to share a common data area. These language
extensions provide function equivalent to 1130 FORTRAN CALL
LINK.
Names of up to six characters for variables, arrays, functions, and
subroutines.
DESCRIPTION
PERFORMANCE
The. System/3· Disk FORTRAN IV will compile and execute approximately 100 source statements on a12K system with increased capacity
on a 16K system.
The System/3 Disk FORTRAN will compile and execute in 9K of main
storage, exclusive of control program requirements. Object time
performance is dependent on program type, size, I/O functions
performed and other factors pertinent to program execution speed.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
FORTRAN Reference Manual (SC28-6874) ... FORTRAN Commercial
Subroutines (SC28-6875) .... S/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
Multiple Program Requests: Program Products and System Control
Programming type 5703 (System/3 model 4 or 6) which are ordered
from PID for shipment at the same time will be shipped to the user
stacked on a 5440 disk cartridge (or equivalent)* under the following
conditions:
1. The scheduled ship date, seven-digit customer number and CPU
number must be the same for all programs ordered.
2.
All of the program feature orders must specify the same cylinder
size (100 cyl or 200 cy/). (Note: Model 4 uses only 200-cylinder
disks).
3.
The total storage requirements of the programs ordered must not
exceed the number of available cylinders indicated by the specify
number (100 or 200 cylinders).*
4.
The announcement of availability must indicate that the program
can be stacked.
*
More than one disk cartridge may be required.
The System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV library contains mathematical and
sEtrvice subprograms required during execution to perform arithmetic
operations, input and output constant conversion and input/output
control.
Action Required: Sufficient lead time is necessary to facilitate the proper
coordination of System Control Programming and program products
shipped from PID, and the system installation date. The fol/owing
,
procedures must be followed:
System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV is supplemented by a Commercial
Subroutine Package which is equivalent in function to the 1130
Commercial Subroutine Package with the exception that I/O routines
for the model 6 version are not provided. Therefore, FORTRAN I/O
must be used for model 6 device support.
System Control Programming and program products are shipped
from PIO on 5440 Disk Cartridge. A cartridge may either be
supplied by the user or it may be ordered from IBM.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Configuration: For compilation and execution, a
System/3 model 6 with a minimum of 12K bytes of main storage is
required. Disk FORTRAN IV requires a minimum of 9K bytes of main
storage for compilation - exclusive of control program requirements.
1 - IBM 5406 Central Processing Unit (model 803)
1 - IBM 5444 Disk Drive (model 1)
1 - IBM 5213 Printer (model 1) or 2222 Printer (model 1)
Ad'ditlonol Device Support
IBM 5406 Central Processing Unit (model 804) ... iBM 5213 Printer
models 2 or 3 ... IBM 2222 Printer model 2 ... IBM 5444 Disk models 2
or 3 ... IBM 5496 Online Data Recorder with IBM System/3 model 6
attachment feature ... IBM 129 Online Data Recorder with card I/O
attachment feature (supported as IBM 5496). FORTRAN supports the
IBM 3741 directly attached as an input or output device for compilation
only.
Prerequisite: EC 571595 is required for all IBM System/3 model 6 CPUs
on which System/3 FORTRAN will be run.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5703-SC1; 5703-SC1 feature #6010/#6011.
Orders may be submitted directly to PID for 5440 disk cartridges to
be used for program deliveries.
Orders will be scheduled for shipment from PID the Friday of the
second week following AAS order entry, unless a later scheduled
ship date is requested. Customer disks must arrive at PID the
Tuesday before the Friday scheduled date.
The branch must verify that System Control Programming and
program products are on order and scheduled for shipment from
PIO to ensure their arrival concurrent with systems delivery.
When rescheduling a system, the branch must also ensure that'
associated System Control Programming, program products, and
disks are also properly resch eduled.
Failure to adhere to the above procedures can result in late shipmentot
programs and late installations.
System/3 Model 4 Program Products Minimum System ReqLlirements ::'
'"',f5Sd~)~t
Program Products
6404
6213
RPG"
Disk Sort Program
CCP/Oisk Sort
Conversational Utilities
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
t;':'
>' "'".''
644I:~~{!1p3·SC1'
,
X ~4~.,.;~~X
X ,'1£,'" X '
X
": X
X
X''
:)~~~~~,
'"
------- -------.:. =-= :§f~ ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
S/3 Disk FORTRAN IV (cont'd)
System/3 Model 6 Program Products Minimum System Requirements
5213
5444
SCP
5703·SC1
Model 6 Sort
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Model 6 Conversational
Utility Programs
- Keyboard Data Entry
-Keyboard Source Entry
-Data Interchange Utility
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Program Products
Model 6 RPG II
6406
8K
1255 Magnetic Character
Reader Utility (plus 1255)
System/3 BASIC
Disk FORTRAN IV
12K
X
X
X
Note: To support the 3741 directly attached or 2265,
5406 is required.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
X
X
a minimum of 12K
PP 5703-F01.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
Do not reproduce without written permission
ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 HEALTH, WELFARE AND PENSION FUND
SYSTEM (5703-N11)
PURPOSE
The IBM System/3 Health, Welfare and Pension Fund System meets
basic contribution accounting requirements for jointly administered
Health, Welfare and Pension Funds. In addition, member, contribution,
and claims information is maintained for improved management
analysis and control. The program is designed for the System/3 model
6.
The compact System/3 model 6 offers for the first time all the benefits
of a stored program system to a large number of smaller funds, while
avoiding significant facility problems. The Health, Welfare and Pension
Fund System program product provides a comprehensive, easily
installed package which assumes minimum tailoring and no permanent
.
user programming capability.
HIGHLIGHTS
Contribution accounting including prelisting for both hourly and flat
rate contribution funds
Notification of employer contribution shortage
M ember contribution I history file
Claim history file
Historic employer contribution file
Computer prepared claim and pension checks
Inquiry facility for all primary files
Full maintenance of all system files
Data for typical eligibility determination
Utilization of the low cost System/3 model 6
Control of all files, complete audit trail
Use: The Health, Welfare and Pension Fund will use this system for
contribution accounting, pension and claim check preparation, to
provide data for eligibility determination and for analysis and control of
its operation.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
A thorough knowledge and understanding of both current contribution
accounting procedures and controls and of the program product
contribution accounting and controls ... any modification for unique
requirements ." generation of system control program and program
product ... coding and capture of required files and tables ... assignment
of employer account numbers, claim codes, contract codes ...
establishing individual audit requirements ... providing for manual
supervision of controls and the integration of controls into the reporting
framework used by the fund.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum Machine Configuration
Description
Type
M/SF
Processing Unit (12K)'
Printer Attachment
5406
B3
3902
Printer (132 positions)
5213
2
Disk Storage (2.45 M bytes)
5444
The file storage requirements will vary greatly from fund to fund based
upon such factors as number of members, collection cycle, and claim
rate characteristics. Additional information can be found In the General
Information Manual. Please contact your Regional Insurance Industry
Marketing representative or the Insurance System Center. Princeton.
New Jersey, for further assistance.
Reconstruction from machine-readable media will require the purchase
of additional 5440 Disk Cartridges.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The Health, Welfare and Pension Fund system is written in RPG " and
operates under the control of the IBM System/3 model 6 System
Control Program (5703-SC1).
All files are indexed disk.
Required Program Products· System/3 Model 6
RPG " (5703-RG1)
Conversational Utilities (5703-UT1)
Disk Sort (5703-SM1)
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Genera/Information Manual (GH20-1189) .
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5703-N11.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- --------
PP 5703-RG1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
..:.:=.: :§~§: ISG
Mar"S3
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6 RPG II
5703-RG1
PURPOSE
IBM System/3 model 6 RPG II is a program product that operates
under control of the System Control Programming. It is disk resident,
and in addition to the functions provided by the S/3 Disk RPG II
(5702-RG1), the S/3 model 6 RPG II supports operator keyboard
console and other unique devices, as indicated below.
DESCRIPTION
The recording techniques used by all disk file organizations permit
mUltiple records to be read or written with a single 1/0 instruction.
Unlike previous data management techniques, System/3 disk files can
be written or read using different blocking factors in different programs.
This facility allows the user to process single records when a program
uses a large amount of storage or to use as much core as available in
processing multiple records to increase throughput.
System/3 Model 6 RPG II supports three types of file organization Sequential, Indexed, and Direct. Direct files are addressed by relative
record number; records may be loaded or retrieved by specifying the
number of the record in the file.
The access methods supported are as follows:
1.
Sequential
a) Consecutive processing - including updating in place.
b) Random processing - by relative record number including
updating but excluding file loading.
2.
Indexed
a) Random processing - by key.
b) Sequential processing - by key including file loading.
Unlike previous indexed file organizations, the keys and data may
be in a different physical sequence; i.e., the most active records
may be placed in the front of the file with the index in sequence
by item number.
3.
Direct
a) Random processing - by relative record number, including
updating and file loading. The open routine on the file load clears
the data area on disk.
b) Consecutive processing.
Standard S/3 disk labels are mandatory on all disk files. Non-standard
labels cannot be used except as data records within the file.
When a program generates too much object code for the specified size,
the compiler will generate overlays. Not all programs - even with
overlays - can fit into the stated macnine size. In any event, programs
cannot be compiled that would exceed 64K without overlays.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
System Configuration: An IBM System/3 model 4 workstation system
includes: IBM 5404 Processing Unit model A1S (64K bytes) ... IBM,
5447 Disk Storage and Control ... IBM 5213 Printer ... IBM 3277
Display Station model 1 ... at least one locally attached terminal. (Note:
The 3277 is supported only by CCP; RPG II does not use the 3277.)
A minimum IBM System/3 model 6 configuration includes: IBM 5406
Processing Unit model B2 (8K bytes) ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive ...
IBM 5213 or 2222 Printer.
Disk data files created by disk system management are compatible
across System/3 models.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
5ystem/3 Models 4 and 6 RPG /I Reference Manual (SC21-7517) ...
Introduction to RPG /I (GC21-7514) ... RPG /I Additional Topics
Programmer's Guide (GC21-7567) ... RPG /I Disk File Processing
Programmer's Guide (GC21-7566) ... Disk Concepts and Planning
Guide (GC21-7571) ... 5/3 Bibliography (GC20-S080).
RPG II TELECOMMUNICATIONS FEATURE
(Feature #6000 or #60(2)
PURPOSE
The RPG II Telecommunications feature provides the user with the
capability of sending or receiving binary synchronous data over voice
grade or high speed communications lines. This support is achieved
through the use of an RPG II Telecommunications Specification Sheet,
and the addition of BSCA (Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter) as a device entry on the RPG II File Description Specification.
This RPG II support permits System/3 to function in one of the
following communication modes:
Receive only
Receive with conversational reply···
Transmit only
Transmit with conversational reply···
Alternate transmit and receive file····
DESCRIPTION
The RPG II language features supported for communications are:
Input, Output and Combined Files ... Demand Files for Transmit and
Receive ... Blocking and Deblocking of Records ... Dual I/O Areas.
These BSCA features, options, and capabilities are supported by the
feature:
Manual call ... Manual answer ... Auto-call ... Auto-answer ...
Medium speed .. , High speed ... Station selection ... EBCDIC data
transparency... Intermediate block checking ... EBCDIC or ASCII
data and data link control characters. File translation of ASCII data
can be accomplished by proper use of the file translate extension of
RPG II.
Sys,tem/3 with a BSCA supported by the RPG II Telecommunications
feature can communicate with the following systems:
Another System/3 with BSCA, program-supported by RPG II
Telecommunications feature.
A System/32 with BSCA (#2074), program-supported by RPG II.
A System/34 equipped with a Communications Adapter, programsupported by RPG II and Assembler.
A System/360 model 20 with BSCA, program-supported by BSCA
10CS.
A System/360 (or System 1370 when operating in Basic Compatibility mode) program-supported by DOS BTAM, OS BTAM, or OS
TCAM*.
Devices Supported: The following devices and features are supported by
RPG II object programs:
A 2770 Data Communication System.
Mdl 4
A 3741-2 Data Station.t
Mdl 6
Description
X
X
X
X
X
129 Card Data Recorder mdl 1, 2 or 3
2222 Printer mdl 1 or 2 (including
Ledger Card Device and second tractor)
X
2265 Display Station mdl2 (5406-B3 or B4
is required)
X
3741 Data Station mdl 1 or 2 directly attached
~
3741 Programmable Workstation mdl 3 or 4
directly attached
X
5213 Printer mdl1, 2 or 3
.,i,5213:Printer mdl3
£~~;~~5404~P~ocess!ng Un!t mdl A18
X·::1! 5406 Processing Unit mdl B2, B3 or B4
~\5444"Disk Storage Drive mdl 1, 2, 3
X
l!i¥.'5447 Disk Storage and Control mdl A 1 or A2
X':·: 5496 Data Recorder mdl1
:\~$:/" SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
·~!~!.:t't
T\
5703-SC1 for IBM 3741 support, 5703-SCl feature #6026/#6027 is
'\
" ",,';
,
required.
.
iii
.
~ .... M~JJBILlTY';::if; . .'·:,
:,.t,.,
System/3 model 6 RPG II IS s.ource language comp~tlbl9 with RPG II
for other System/3 models,9xcept for.. differences),'due to different
hardware.
. , • . .."".,' '.
A 2780 Data Transmission Terminal.
A 3741-4 Programmable Work Station.t
A 5110 Computer System supported as a 3741 model 2 or 4.
A 5230 Data Collection System with BSCA (#2074). Receive mode
only. Supported as a 3741 model 2 or 4.
A 5280 Distributed Data System with Communications Adapter
(#2500).
A Series/l - Refer to Series/1 pages for appropriate features.
A 6670 Information Distributor (as a 2770).
A System/7 with (#2074)
This program provides the support to use System/3 in the following
telecommunications networks: .
Point-to- Point switched ... Point-to- Point
MultipOint (as a tributary station).
nonswitched
System/3 with BSCA is a compatible member of the IBM BSC family
of terminals. It can be intermixed with other BSC terminals
(System/360 model 20, 5280, System/32, System/34, 1130, 1800,
2770, 2780 and 2715 model 2, 3780, 3741-2) on a multipoint line
when operating as a tributary station with a central System/360 or
System/370 compute~· using DOS or OS BTAM. It can also share the
--.--- ---:: - - :s"fE: ISG
PP 5703-RG1.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5/3 Mdl6 RPG II (cont'd)
same phone number at the central System/360 or System/370
computer* with other BSC terminals (System/360 or System/370
computers*·, System/360 model 20, System/32, System/34, 5280,
1130, 1800. 2780, 2770 and 2715 model 2, 6670 (as a 2770), 3780 ,
3741-2. -4).
•
**
System/360 models 22,25 and 30 with 00S/360, models 40,50,
65, 67 (in 65 mode), and 75 with OOS/360and OS/360 and
models 85, 91 and 195 with OS/360. System/370 models 135,
145 and 155 with DOS and OS and model 165 with OS when
operating in Basic Compatibility mode.
System/360 models 22, 25 and 30 with BOS/BPS or 00S/360.
models 40.50.65,67 (in 65 mode), and 75 with BOS/BPS, DOS or
OS/360 and models 85, 91 and 195 with OS/360. System/370
models 135. 145 and 155 with DOS and OS and model 165 with
OS when operating in Basic Compatibility mode.
.** Not supported in communications with System/32, System/34,
2770. 2780 and 3741-2, -4.
·***Transmit interspersed with Receive is not supported in communication with 2770. 2780 or 3741-2. -4.
t
Operator Identification Card Reader feature (#5450) and the
Expanded Communications/Multipoint Data Link Control feature
(#1685) on 3741- 2, 4 are not supported.
The functions and specifications for the System/3 model 6 RPG II
Telecommunications feature are identical to those of the System/3
model 10 Disk RPG II Telecommunications feature.
of the source program so that he can make modifications which
tailor the program more closely to his requirements.
The Auto-Report functions may be specified for one printer file in any
RPG II program. Any RPG " specifications not related to the selected
printer file and any RPG II statements for the printer file but not
requesting Auto-Report functions, are passed to the RPG " compiler as
a part of the source program.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
System Configuration: This program can be used on the IBM· System /3
model 4 or model 6. Minimum requirements are the same as for RPG II
(5703-RG1).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5703-RG1; 5703-SC1.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
RPG 1/ Auto-Report Reference Manual (SC21-5057) ... System/3
Bibliography (GC20-8080)
RPG 113270 DISPLAY CONTROL FEATURE
(Feature #6030 - Model 4 only)
PURPOSE
This program can be used on the IBM System/3 model 4 or model 6.
Minimum requirements are the same as for RPG " (5703-RG1).
The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature provides telecommunications
services on the IBM model 4 for local or remote IBM 3270 devices.
This program is automatically linked into the RPG II application program
via the SPECIAL file exit capability on the RPG II File Description
Specification Sheet. The RPG II Telecommunications feature is not
required.
For object program execution - the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074) is required. For System/3 model 6. an IBM 5406
model B3 or B4 is required to support communications with an IBM
2770 or 2780.
The following services are provided by the RPG " 3270 Display Control
feature:
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
RPG II access to 3270 Display System terminals attached to the
CPU or the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5703-RG1;5703-SC1
Automatic buffering and queuing of terminal data.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
RPG 1/ Telecommunications Programming Reference
(GC21-7507). .., System /3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
DESCRIPTION
Manual
RPG II AUTO-REPORT FEATURES
(Features #6008, #60(9)
PURPOSE
The RPG " Auto-Report feature enhances the RPG " language by
providing functions which eliminate much of the preparation and coding
work normally done by the user when producing an application program
in RPG II. It is specifically designed to facilitate report preparation.
The IBM System/3 Auto-Report program executes as a preprocessor
to the RPG II compiler which is a prerequisite for this feature. The input
to the program is RPG " source statements and Auto-Report statements. Auto-Report produces a diagnostic listing, replaces the
Auto-Report statements with generated or copied RPG " source
statements and calls the RPG " compiler for execution.
DESCRIPTION
Coding of applications in RPG " is made easier by the following
Auto-Report functions.
Page Headings - The user need supply only the report title.
Auto-Report generates skipping, spacing, horizontal alignment and
date and page number constants. Page overflow is considered and
the heading conditioned to print on the top of each page.
Simplified Output Specifications - A single output field specification can result in Auto-Report generated statements to:
-
Indicate printing with editing
Place column heading over the data fields
Control spacing
Control horizontal alignment of data
Define total fields and calculation specifications to. accumulate
totals by control levels (total rolling),
- Flag total lines with asterisk indication.
COpy - The COPY statement provides the ability to copy RPG "
source statements from a disk library into the RPG II source
program. Some values on the copies specifications may be
modified for the resulting compilation.
Source Program - The Auto Report program passes control directly
to the RPG " compiler to cause compilation of the expanded source
program. In addition. the user may elect to catalog to disk a copy
A display formatting interface which permits the support of 3270
devices with coding in RPG II.
Complete line control procedures are provided.
Up to 18 terminals may be controlled (up to 5 can be attached to
the CPU).
Two subroutines are provided. SUBR13 allows an RPG " program
to support the 3270 Information Display System without using
CCP. Using SUBR14, an existing program using the 3270 Display
Control feature may be converted to execute under control of CCP
by replacing SUBR13 references with SUBR14 references in the
RPG " source program. The user must only then make any
adjustments required by CCP and recompile the program.
Provides the capability of coding one or more applicatons within
one program. No task switching is provided.
Terminals Supported: The following terminals and Communication
facilities are supported by the RPG " 3270 Display Control feature:
With the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter
3275 Display Station and Control
3271 Display Control Unit (models 1 or 2) with:
- 3277 Display Stations (models 1 or 2)
- 3284 Printer (models 1 or 2)
- 3286 Printer (models 1 or 2)
- 3288 Printer (model 2)
Directly to CPU
3277
3284
3286
3288
Display Stations (models 1 or 2)
Printer (models 1 or 2)
Printer (models 1 or 2)
Printer (model 2)
Note: A maximum of 5 terminals may be att~ched:to'theCPU.
.,'
~;'~~'1.1~
,:.
)~"'"
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONME~t
HARDWARE REQUIREME~TS
'if
Mimimum System Requirements
.. _
The RPG " IBM 3270 Display Contrj, feature requires an IBM
System/3 model 4 which includes an IBM:l54Q4 Processing Unit model
A18 (64K bytes) ... an IBM 5447 Disk Storage and Control ... an IBM
5213 model. 3Printer••. and one of the· devices listed under "Terminals
Supported".
.. . ...
.
, ,
Using SUBR13;' approximately 10.25K-13.75K bytes is added to the
size of ,the object program; using .,:SUBR14, 4.25K-5.25K bytes is
------- ----:: - -:E~S: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5/3 Mdl 6 RPG II (cont'd)
added. The actual amount of resident overhead is determined by the
user options selected. and that size can be increased to approximately
15K if the trace options are optionally selected when using SUBR13.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5703-SC1, 5703-RG1
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM RPG /I 3270 Display Control Feature Reference and Logic Manual
(SC21-5161) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5703-RG1.3
Mar83
Major Revision
- ----- -------====';'=
- --- ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
---.
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6 DISK SORT PROGRAM
5703·SM1
PURPOSE
This IBM System/3 model 6 disk sort program sorts any disk file
organization supported by IBM System/3 disk systems management in
ascending or descending sequence. This includes Indexed, Direct, and
Sequential files. The sort program can select desired records from the
input file to be included or excluded from the sort. Recognition of
individual records can be based on:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Record code
Relation of a field to a constant
Relation of two fields in a record
Any relationship in a series (ORing)
All relationships in a series (ANDing)
Multiples of the above tests in any combinations.
DESCRIPTION
Control fields can be In a different location in records within the file.
Output from the sort program will be in one of three formats:
1)
Tags· A file of 3-byte binary relative record numbers in the
sequence specified by the user.
2)
Tagalong - A file of records containing the sort control fields
and/or the data fields the user has specified. By using this option,
the user can select only the data he needs from his input file to be
included in the output. By specifying the entire input record as a
tagalong field, the user can, in effect, accomplish a record sort.
3)
Summary Tagalong - Records containing identical control fields are
combined by summarizing (totaling) specified fields into one record.
Specification of record selection, sort parameters and tagalong data
fields is accomplished by simple, RPG-like coding sheets.
The functions and syntax of specification statements for the System/3
model 6 Disk Sort program are identical with those of the System/3
model 10 Disk Sort. An output data file created by the System/3
model 6 Disk Sort can be processed by any System/3 program which
uses disk system management to access the file.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
An IBM System/3 model 4 workstation system includes: IBM 5404
Processing Unit model A18 (64K bytes) ... IBM 5447 Disk Storage and
Control ... IBM 5213 Printer ... IBM 3277 Display Station model 1 ... at
least one locally attached terminal. (Note: The IBM 3277 is supported
only by CCP; the Disk Sort Program does not use the 3277.)
The minimum System/3 model 6 configuration includes: IBM 5406
Processing Unit model B2 (8K bytes) ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive .. ,
IBM 5213 or 2222 Printer.
Devices Supported
The following devices are supported by the Disk Sort program:
Model 4
Model 6
Description
X
X
X
129 Card Data Recorder model 1, 2 or 3
2222 Printer model 1 or 2
2265 Display Station model 2 (5406 model B3
or B4 is required)
X
3741 Data Station model 1 or 2 directly
attached
X
3741 Programmable Workstation model 3 or 4
directly attached
X
5213 Printer model 1, 2 or 3
X
5213 Printer model 3
X
5404 Processing Unit model A18
X
5406 Processing Unit model B2, B3 or B4
X
5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1, 2 or 3
X
5447 Disk Storage and Control model A1
orA2
X
5496 Data Recorder model 1
For Sort Specification input: IBM 129, 3741, 5444, 5447, 5496, or
operator keyboardconsole.
For input, work and output files: IBM 5444, 5447
For diagnostics and messages: IBM 2222, 2265, 5213
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5703-SC1. For IBM 3741 support, 5703-SC1 feature #6026/#6027 is
required.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Disk Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7522)
(GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
S /3 Bibliography
PP 5703·SM1.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- ----:: - -~~5: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
CCP/DISK SORT PROGRAM (Model 4 Only)
5703-SM2
PURPOSE
This program is functionally compatible with the IBM System/3 model
6 Disk Sort program (5703-SM1). With the CCP/Disk Sort program,
however, the user can generate an object module which can be
executed as a task under control of the Communications Control
program (CCP) (5703-SC1 feature #6033), or as a program in batch
(non-CCP) mode.
This program requires 12K bytes of main storage (exclusive of control
program requirements) for both generation and execution, and
automatic allocation of sort work files is not supported.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
An IBM System/3 model 4 workstation system includes: IBM 5404
Processing Unit model A 1B (64K bytes) ... IBM 5447 Disk Storage and
Control model A1 or A2 '" IBM 5213 Printer model 3 '" IBM 3277
Display Station model 1 ... at least one locally attached terminal.
(Note: The IBM 3277 is supported only by CCP).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5703-SC1; 5703-SC1 feature #6011.
5703-SC1 feature #6033.
For execution under CCP:
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Disk 50rt Reference Manual (GC21-7522)
(GC20-BOBO).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
5/3 Bibliography
PP 5703-SM2.1
MarB3
Major Revision
---.... - --- ----
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: -=-= :S~5: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6 CONVERSATIONAL UTILITY PROGRAMS
5703-UT1
PURPOSE
There are three IBM System/3 Conversational Utility programs that are
disk resident and operate under control of the SCP:
The Keyboard Data Entry program allows the user to key data directly
onto the disk. It will format records according to user specifications
and output an indexed disk file which can later be processed by a user
RPG II program or the Sort program. Additional functions of the
program include the ability to correct records and take hash or control
totals.
The Keyboard Source Entry program allows the user to key source
statements (RPG II) or procedures directly from the keyboard to the
source library on disk. The source statements may be in the form of
RPG II source programs, format records for the Keyboard Data Entry
program, Utility control statements, etc. The disk library is in a format
which is acceptable to the system and to the RPG II compiler.
Additional features include the ability to correct source statements.
The Data Interchange Utility allows the user to convert disk data files
created by disk system management (such as RPG II - produced data
files) into BASIC data files, and vice versa. The files are not converted
in place; Instead. a new fila is creCited. The user must specify the
format of his RPG II records and the fields to be converted. The final
output will be acceptable to the new system.
(Note: The Data Interchange Utility is not used with the model 4). Data
files created by the System/3 model 6 Conversational Utilities can be
processed by any System/3 program which uses disk system
management to access the files. The exception is that data files that
are converted by the Data Interchange Utility (DIU) program to
System/3 BASIC format are accessible only by System/3 BASIC and
by DIU.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
An IBM System/3 model 4 workstation system includes: IBM 5404
Processing Unit model A 18 (64K bytes) ... IBM 5447 Disk Storage and
Control ... IBM 5213 Printer ... IBM 3277 Display Station model 1 ... at
least one locally attached terminal. (Note: The IBM 3277 is supported
only by CCP; the Conversational Utilities do not use the 3277.)
A minimum IBM System/3 model 6 configuration includes: IBM 5406
Processing Unit model B2 (8K bytes) ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive ...
IBM 5213 or 2222 Printer.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5703-SC1.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
5ystem/3 Model 4 and 6 Conversational Utilities Reference Manual
(SC21-7528) ... 5/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
TERMS a"nd CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5703-UT1.1
Mar83
Major Revision
------- -----
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - - :§~E: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 UTILITY PROGRAM FOR
1255 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER
5703-UT2
PURPOSE
This utility program allows the IBM System/3 model 6 user to control
document processing on the IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. It
provides a means of reading MICR-encoded documents from the 1255,
accumulating document totals and amount field totals for each stacker,
and placing the data from the documents on output disk and printer
files. The program is designed to fulfill the basic requirements of the
"ON-US" data capture run required for all Demand Deposit Application
programming.
The program will read fields from the documents as specified by the
user and then, based on decisions indicated by the user, it will stacker
select these documents into user-specified stackers. If requested,
Modulus 10 or 11 checking will be performed. Then after each
document has been read and stacker selected, the utility will print
user-specified fields from that document. Fixed-length disk records
will also be created and placed on a disk file.
An additional facility provided by the program is the printing of
document totals and amount field totals at end of job. Subtotals may
be printed during program execution at times selected by the user.
The utility program is functionally compatible with System/3 model 10
Disk System Utility program for 1255 Magnetic Character Reader.
(This program is not used with the model 4.)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REOUIREMENTS
This program requires an IBM 5406 Processing Unit model B3 or B4
with a Serial I/O Channel (#7081) ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive
model 1. 2 or 3 ... IBM 5213 Printer model 1, 2 or 3 or IBM 2222 Printer
model 1 or 2... and IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader modell, 2
or 3.
SOFTWARE REOUIREMENTS: 5703-SC1.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
1255 Utility Reference Manual (SC21-7527)
(GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
5/3 Bibliography
PP 5703-UT2.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -------ISG
PP 5703-XA 1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
..:..::::§~§:
Mar83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
STAT/BASIC FOR SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6
5703-XA1
PURPOSE
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
STAT / BASIC is an interactive program encompassing the most
commonly used statistical techniques for the analysis of numerical data.
The program operates on an IBM System/3 model 6.
The size of the user area required to run the STAT /BASIC procedures is
a function of the number of statements in an individual procedure and
the amount of data processed in short and long precision.
STAT /BASIC is designed to meet the needs of the statistician,
engineer, researcher or business analyst. It helps in using the computer
directly for statistical analyses. A statistically-oriented user should have
no difficulty in quickly learning the capabilities of the program. The
interactive mode of the package allows a non-data processing-oriented
user to use the program with ease, with a minimum of training.
All procedures, with the exception of the transformation procedure, can
be executed in short precision in a user area of 40,000 bytes with a
symbol table size of 9,000 bytes.
Direct use on the System/3 model 6 provides the user with fast results.
Because of the interactive nature of STAT/BASIC, the user can sit at
the keyboard and see the results of his analyses as they are developed.
Delays and some of the sources of error familiar in batch processing are
eliminated with STAT /BAS!C.
DESCRIPTION
STAT /BASIC consists of 40 procedures, written in the BASIC
language, providing a wide range of capabilities under the following
categories:
Data Generation - Read ... Print Edit ... Transformation.
Elementary Statistics - Cross Tabulation ... Histogram .. , Tally ...
Moments ... T -test ... Chi-square.
Regression and Correlation Analysis - Correlation .. , Simple
Regression ... Stepwise Regression .. , Multiple Regression ...
Polynomial Regression.
Multivariate Analysis - Discriminant Analysis .. , Canonical
Correlation ... Factor Analysis Part 1 .. , Factor Analysis Part 2.
Analysis of Variance - One-way Analysis of Variance ... Factorial
Design.
Nonparametric Statistics - Kendall Rank Correlation ... Sign Test .. .
Wilcoxon's Matched-pairs Signed-ranks Test ... Cochran a Test .. .
Friedman Two-way Analysis of Variance ... Mann-Whitney U Test
.. , Kendall Coefficient of Concordance '" Biserial Corrolation ...
Point-biserial Correlation ... Tetrachoric Correlation ... Phi Coefficient.
Time Series Analysis - Moving Average ... Seasonal Analysis ...
Cyclical Analysis ... Auto-covariance and Auto-correlation ...
Cross-covariance and Cross-correlation ... Triple Exponential
Smoothing.
Biostatistics - Survival Rate... Probit Analysis.
On a System/3 model 6, the maximum size of a data matrix that can be
processed is 300 rows (observations) by 30 columns (variablos).
Exceptions are:
For the edit and transformation programs, this limitation of 300
rows and 30 columns applies, but the number of rows (N) times the
number of columns (M) must not exceed 3500 (N x M s 3500).
For the chi-square and Kendall coefficient of concordance
programs, the maximum size of a data matrix is 100 rows by 30
columns.
HIGHLIGHTS
A comprehensive set of statistical procedures.
A user with a knowledge of statistics can learn the program
capabilities with a minimum of effort.
Interactive mode simplifies usage.
Calculations performed in short or long precision.
Extensive error checking with correction facilities.
Instructional messages clarify procedures or options available.
Use: The user may utilize any of the STAT/BASIC programs through the
console keyboard with System/3 model 6. The user first types a few
systems commands and the name of the desired statistical program.
Following a Ready indication, STAT/BASIC guides the user through his
problem by typing out procedural instructions. Alternate courses of
action or options are usually in the form of questions, which the user
answers by typing the appropriate replies.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The STAT/BASIC programs are distributed in machine-readable form
for loading into the user system. Once stored, it is available to any
member of the organization authorized to use the system.
if confidential information is to be stored in the library, the user must
take appropriate steps to safeguard against unauthorized access.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
All procedures, with the exception of the transformation procedure, can
be executed in long precision in a user area of 50,000 bytes with a
symbol table size of 16,300 bytes. The transformation procedure
cannot be executed in long precision; it can be executed in short
precision in a user area of 50,000 bytes with a symbol table size of
10,800 bytes.
IBM System/3 Model S ... The minimum system is the same as that
required for System/3 BASIC, specifically IBM 5406 Processing Unit
model B2 (8K) ... one IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1 .. , one IBM
5213 Printer model 1.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
STAT /BASIC is written in BASIC. To run the program on an, IBM
System/3 model 6 requires the System/3 BASIC (5703-XM1) program
product.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
General Information Manual (GH20-1027) .
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- ----.:..---=-= :§~E: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 BASIC
5703-XM1
PURPOSE
IBM System/3 BASIC is a stand-alone, total facility interactive
programming system. BASIC enables the user to enter BASIC
statements, commands, utilities, BASIC data, and Desk Calculator
(DCAlC) instructions all in a completely interactive environment.
DESCRIPTION
System programs, source programs, and data files are stored on disk
for direct accessibility. The system uses a virtual memory concept to
allow the user to compile and execute large programs that otherwise
would not fit into main storage.
System/3 BASIC, besides having a complete interactive interface to the
user through the operator keyboard console, also provides the ability for
continuous execution of stacked jobs without operator intervention.
Input to the System!3 BASIC is in the form of commands, data, or
BASIC statements from either the keyboard console or from cards.
Output is to the printer and/or to the 2265 model 2 Display Station.
The disk is an input or output device as well as temporary and
permanent storage for all forms of user data or programs.
DCAlC (Desk Calculator) is a function of BASIC allowing the user to
use the system as a large, highly sophisticated electronic desk
calculator. No user knowledge of programming is necessary to put
DCAlC to its full use.
DCAlC will give the user the ability to add, subtract, multiply, divide,
and compute powers, roots, trigonometric functions, etc. Special
procedures can be defined and stored into DCAlC for future use. All of
the functional routines (built-in functions) within BASIC are available to
the DCAlC user, except for the DET function.
The user has full control over his BASIC program with the command
language. Commands are analyzed and result in the requested action
being performed immediately upon the system. These commands allow
the user intervention before, during, and after BASIC program
execution.
A set of utilities are included in System/3 BASIC to allow for system
generation and disk pack usage. The utilities give disk copy, file
allocation, configuration, analysis, initialization, and track assignment
capabilities to the user.
PERFORMANCE
The BASIC compiler can compile a 500-statement BASIC source
program in 30 to 35 seconds. The BASIC program can be listed at a
rate of approximately 60 statements-per-minute on the 5213 model 1
Printer (assuming the average statement is 40 characters long).
DCAlC will respond to any user input within two seconds.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: The minimum system configuration for
System/3 BASIC, DCAlC, and the utilities is: An IBM 5406 Processing
Unit model B2 (8K bytes), an IBM 5213 Printer model 1 or an IBM 2222
Printer model 1 and anlBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1.
Additional units and features supported are: IBM 5406 Processing Unit
models B3 (12K bytes) and B4 (16K bytes), IBM 5213 Printer models 2
and 3, IBM 2222 Printer model 2, IBM 5496 Data Recorder with
System/3 model 6 Attachment feature, IBM 129 Card Data Recorder
with System/3 model 6 Card Input/Output feature, additional
capacities of the IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive, and the IBM 2265
model 2 Display Station. (Support of the 2265 requires a minimum of
12K bytes of main storage and the eight additional command keys.)
.Note: A co-resident system requires a minimum of 4.90 million bytes of
5444 disk storage for operation.
System/3 BASIC is not supported on the model 4.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: None.
DOCUMENTATION
(av~ilable from Mechanicsburg)
BASIC Reference. Manual. (GC34-0001) ... BASIC Operator's Guide
(GC34-00031.. ... ~S./3
Bibliography (GC20-8080).
r
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5703-XM1 ..1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- --------
Do not reproduce without written permission
= ::-:. :§~§: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
MATH/BASIC for SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6
5703-XM2
PURPOSE
IBM System/3 MATH/BASIC is a set of conversational routines for the
solution of the most frequently encountered mathematical problems in
science and industry. The library operates on an IBM System/3 model
6.
MATH/BASIC is designed to meet the needs of the engineer and
scientist. The conversational features of MATH / BASIC allow a
non-data processing-oriented user to use the programs with a
minimum of training.
HIGHLIGHTS
A comprehensive set of mathematical routines.
Calculations in short and long precision.
Control of operation in the case of ill-conditioned problems and
error messages.
Ease-of-use due to conversational mode.
DESCRIPTION
MATH/BASIC consists of 44 routines providing computing capabilities
in the following areas:
Linear equations, matrix eigenvalue problem.
Zeros of polynomials, zeros and minima of functions.
Quadrature/ differentation
Interpolation, approximation and smoothing.
Ordinary differential equations.
Discrete Fourier transform.
Special functions.
Linear programming.
Use: The user can utilize any of the MATH/BASIC routines through a
System/3 model 6 console keyboard.
The user first enters a few systems commands and the name of the
desired MATH/BASIC routine. Following a READY indication,
MATH/BASIC guides the user through his problem by printing
procedural instructions. Alternate courses of action or options are
described usually in the form of questions, which the user answers by
entering the appropriate replies.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The MATH/BASIC program is distributed in machine-readable form for
loading into the user's system. Once stored, it is available to any
member of the organization authorized to use the system.
If confidential information is to be stored in the library, the user must
take appropriate steps to safeguard against unauthorized access.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The minimum configuration for the IBM System/3 model 6 is the same
as that required for System/3 BASIC, that is. one IBM 5406 Processing
Unit model B2 (8K) ... one IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1 ... one
IBM 5213 Printer model 1.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
MATH/BASIC is written in the BASIC language. To run the program
on an IBM System/3 model 6 requires the System/3 BASIC (5703XM1).
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
General Information Manual (GH20-1128).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5703-XM2.1
Mar83
Major Revision
------- - - - ----==-= ~~§: ISG
PP 5703-XM3.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
BUSINESS ANALYSIS/BASIC FOR
SYSTEM/3 MODEl6
5703-XM3
PURPOSE
Business Analysis/BASIC is a comprehensive set of interactive routines
for use on the IBM System/3 model 6.
Business Analysis/BASIC program is distributed in machine-readable
form for loading into the user's system. Once stored, it is available to
any member of the organization authorized to use the system.
It consists of 30 routines written in the BASIC language, providing the
problem-solver professional with procedures for data generation and
maintenance, spread sheet analysis, investment analysis, break-even or
cost-volume-profit analysis, depreciation analysis, and time series
analysis. The program is designed so that a detailed knowledge of
programming is not required.
If the user has confidential information to be stored in disk files, it will
be his responsibility to take appropriate steps to safeguard against
unauthorized access.
DESCRIPTION
The minimum configuration for the System/3 model 6 is the same as
that required for IBM System/3 BASIC, that is, one IBM 5406
Processing Unit model B2 (8K), one IBM 5444 Storage Drive modell,
and one IBM 5213 Printer model 1.
Business Analysis/BASIC includes 30 interactive routines for assisting
the problem-solver in exercising the following functions:
Spread Sheet Analysis:
Investment Analysis:
(available from Mechanicsburg)
General Information Manual (GH20-1175) ... Promotional Flyer
(G520-2527).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
- Break-even with definite assumptions
- Break-even with probabilistic assumptions
Depreciation Analysis:
Straight line depreciation
Sum-of-years digits depreciation
Declining balance depreciation
Equipment units depreciation
Time Series Analysis:
-
Compound growth rate projection
Moving average
Seasonal analysis
Cyclical analysis
Autocovariance and Autocorrelation
Crosscovariance and Crosscorrelation
Exponential Smoothing
Simple Regression
Graphic Presentation:
- Histograms
- Exponential Smoothing Plots
Routine and File Indexing:
- Business Analysis/BASIC routine index
- User-created data file log
Data Generation and Maintenance:
- Create and update data files
- Select and rearrange records in data files and spread sheet data
files
- Resequence records in data files and spread sheet data files
- Print data files
HIGHLIGHTS
Comprehensive set of analytical routines to assist the user in
examining investment alternatives and in preparing financial plans .
. Spread sheet analysis capability for report creation and update .
.•
Interactive features include instructional messages, flexible control
of calculations, extensive error Checking, and data editing.
Use: The p:rofessional analyst can utilize any of the Business
routines through the System/3 model 6 console
Analysis/~ASIC
keyboard.
The user first enters a'few systems commands (LOGON, EDIT, etc.) and
the name of the, desired Business Analysis/BASIC routine. Following a
READY indication, the Business,Analysis/BASIC routine guides the
user through his problem by' typing out procedural instructions.
Alternative courses of action' or options . are presented in the form of
questions, which the user answers byente.ring the appropriate replies.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
','
Business Analysis/BASIC is written in the BASIC language. To run the
program on an IBM System/3 model 6 requires System/3 BASIC
(5703-XM1).
DOCUMENTATION
Return-on-Investment computation
Discounted Cash Flow analysis
Loan analysis (multiple and single)
Lease vs Purchase analysis
Make vs Buy analysis
Break-Even Analysis:
-
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
- Spread Sheet data file creation and update
- Spread Sheet report formatting
-
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
~'J.
......
:?~
. <
'
The user must have the necessary computer configuration as described
below. The user will also need the aSsociated program product for his
system as mentioned under "Programming Systems... ·t
---..:.::::: :S~~ ISG
PP 5704-AS1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
-~--- ----
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 BASIC ASSEMBLER
5704-AS1; 5704-AS2
PURPOSE
The IBM System/3 model 15 Basic Assembler program is a program
product that processes source programs written in the Basic Assembler
language, and produces executable object programs. The program is
disk resident on an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive or 3340 Direct Access
Storage Facility or 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-AS2 only).
5704-AS1 is used with SCP 5704-SC1, and 5704-AS2 is used with
SCP 5704-SC2.
DESCRIPTION
The Basic Assembler language is a symbolic programming language
used to write programs. Some of the features provided by the program
and its language are:
Mnemonic Operation Codes
Symbolic Referencing of Storage Addresses
Automatic Storage Assignment
Address Displacement Calculation
Convenient Data Representation
Operand Field Expressions
Source Identification - Sequence Fields
Assembler Instructions
Source Program Listing
Cross- Reference Listing
Error Checking and Diagnostic Messages
Source input to the Assembler can be from the system input device
(card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard), from a source
library, or from a source file generated by the macro processor. Work
files for the Assembler can be on either a 5444 or 5445 Disk Storage
Drive, or a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344 Direct Access
Storage. The Overlay Linkage Editor may be used to generate
executable object programs.
Model 15 Basic Assembler Device Support
*
**
Source
Assembly
Object
Execution
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes··
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
10-48K
10-48K
up to 48K
up to 56K·
Object program size can be up to 56K, depending on the CCP,
spool and configuration options selected during system generation.
Assembler and system halts are logged on the 3277. Source
statements may be entered from the keyboard.
Stand-Alone Programs: The Basic Assembler can be used to create a
stand-alone program. The object program is punched into cards.
Program loading is performed with an initial program loader through the
alternate IPL device (MFCU, MFCM, or 1442). Stand-alone programs
are coded entirely by the user with no dependence on other programming support.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
* Note: The IBM 1403 printer should be equipped with the Universal
Character Set feature and a PN (50-character set) interchangeable
train cartridge. A 48-character set (for example, HN or AN
arrangement) can be used with the Assembler; however, the user
must be willing to accept substitute characters.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5704-SC1 for 5704-AS1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-AS2.
COMPATIBILITY
System/3 model 15 Basic Assembler is functionally equivalent to the
Basic Assembler programs on other System/3 models. Four mnemonics are unique to model 15: Load CPU (LCP), Store CPU (SCP),
Command CPU (CCP), and Supervisor Call (SVC). When converting
from another System!3 model, there may be changes required in macro
statements.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Assembler Reference Manual (SC21-7509) ... Components Reference
Manual (GA21-9236) ... 5/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
The Basic Assembler may be used for assembly of relocatable
subroutines for use with model 15 RPG II, COBOL, or FORTRAN. The
subroutines, written in the Basic Assembler language, are coded by the
user and separately assembled. The process of program linking is
accomplished during compilation of the RPG II, COBOL, or FORTRAN
source programs by means of the Overlay Linkage Editor.
5444 Disk Storage Drive (5704-ASl only)
model A2 or A3
5445 Disk Storage (5704-ASl only)
modell, 2 or 3
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
model A2, B1 or B2
3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-AS2 only)
model B2
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit
modell, 2. or 3
1403 Printer
model 2, 5, or N1
3277 Display Station
model 1
5424 MFCU
model A 1 or A2
2560 MFCM
model A 1 or A2
1442 Card Read Punch
model 6 or 7
2501 Card Reader
model A 1 or A2
3284 Printer model 1
1255 MCR modell, 20r3
3881 OMR model 1
3741 (directly attached)
modell, 2, 3 or 4
BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, LCA, or DA
Main Storage Requirements
5704-ASl
5704-AS2
Minimum System Requirements: The same as for SCp* (5704-SC1 for
5704-AS1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-AS2).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- ----:: - -~"f~ ISG
PP 5704-CB1.1
Mar 83
Do not reproduce without written permission
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15
SUBSET ANS COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY
5704-CB1; 5704-CB2
PURPOSE
Model 15 COBOL is a program product that operates under control of
the IBM System 13 model 15 System Control Programming. 5704-CB1
is used with SCP 5704-SC1, and 5704-CB2 is used with SCP
5704-SC2. The compiler and library are disk resident on the IBM 5444
Disk Storage Drive or 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344
Direct Access Storage (5704-CB2 only). The compiler requires as input
a COBOL source language program and produces as output, by means
of the system's Overlay Linkage Editor, a System/3 machine language
object program, either cataloged in an object library, punched into 80or 96-column cards, or written onto a diskette.
System/3 COBOL supports Grade 1 Braille for both compiler listings
and object program printed output. Minimum requirements include a
132-print position printer with 8 lines linch spacing (1403 Printer); the
compiler requires a 14K partition in order to produce Braille listings. A
user-provided elastic strip is attached over the printer hammers to
produce the Braille characters.
Source input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card
reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard) or from a source
library. Work files for the compiler can be on any 5444 or 5445 Disk
Storage Drive or on a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344
Direct Access Storage (5704-CB2 only). The Overlay Linkage Editor is
used to generate object programs.
.American National Standard COBOL Considerations
The U.S~ Industry standard for COBOL is American National Standard
(ANS) COBOL. ANS COBOL, X3.23-1968, was approved by the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) on August 23, 1968. The
following functional processing modules of the ANSI standard are
included in the System/3 model 15 Compiler.
1
1
1
1
2
1
1, 2
Nucleus
Sequential Access 1, 2
0, 2
Random Access
Library
0, 2
Table Handling
1, 3
Segmentation
0, 2
The first digit above represents the level of the modules included in the
compiler; the second digit represents the lowest level in the American
National Standards Institute Standard (0 implies that the module may
be completely missing from the standard compilers). The third digit
'represents the highest level in the ANSI standard.
The international standard for COBOL is ISO Recommendation Number
1989, which was approved by ISO (International Organization for
Standardization) in 1972. System 13 model 15 COBOL bears the same
relation to the ISO standard as to the ANSI standard, inasmuch as the
two standards are identical in technical content.
Random Processing - by key.
Sequential Processing - by key including file loading.
Direct Organization
Random Processing - by relative recording number, including
updating and file loading.
Consecutive Processing.
Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory for all disk files.
Non-standard labels cannot be used except for data records within the
file.
Record size can range from 1 byte to 32K bytes, and records may be
processed as blocked or unblocked. Logical records may span physical
disk sectors, tracks or cylinders.
Multi-volume indexed files are supported.
Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411
Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by other
System/3 COBOL compilers. COBOL object programs can process
data on magnetic tape; highlights include:
Consecutive input or output files
1 - 4 tape drives
Fixed length records, blocked or unblocked
Variable length records, blocked or unblocked
Record size from 18 to 32,768 bytes
Block size from 18 to 32,768 bytes
IBM Standard Labels, ANSI labels, no labels
Option for two 110 areas
9-track, 800/1600 bpi
7-track, 200/556/800 bpi
Single volume or multi-volume files
Single file or multi-file volumes
Recording format: EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only)
Printer Support: COBOL supports the 1403 as follows: Space 0, 1, 2, or
3 before or after printing a line; skip to line number before or after
printing a line; overflow detection.
COBOL supports the 3284 Printer the same way it does the 1403,
except that space 0 after print is not allowed.
Card I/O Support: Model 15 COBOL supports the MFCU, MFCM, 1442,
and 2501 as follows:
MFCU
MFCM*
1442
2501
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
64
256
256
256
Extensions to the modules of American National Standard COBOL
listed above, comprising:
Read
Punch
Card Print
Stacker Select
(punch only)
Associated file
Character set
(EBCDIC)
- Certain language elements which are defined in higher levels of
the American National Standard COBOL than those listed.
* MFCM support is similar to MFCU support; six lines of card printing
is possible on the MFCM (optional feature on model A1 only).
- Certain language elements defined by the CODASYL Programming Language Committee but not yet included by ANSI in
American National Standard COBOL.
Diskette Support: Data can be read from a diskette using ACCEPT verb.
In addition, for 5704-CB2 only, a directly-attached 3741 can be
specified as an input or output device in the ASSIGN clause of the
SELECT statement.
Additions: In addition to the standard language, the following additional
features are provided:
1.
Indexed Organization
- IBM-developed extensions consistent with those supported by
the System/360 and 370 OS and DOS ANS COBOL compilers
and 1130 ANS COBOL compiler.
2.
ROLLOUT IROLLIN support allows a COBOL object program to be
·interrupted during execution. This is provided by invocation of a
supplied program via a CALL statement (CALL "CBROLL").
ROLLOUT/ROLLIN is not supported in 5704-CB2.
3.
The interval timer is supported for time-of-day functions. This is
provided by invocation of a supplied (SCP) subroutine via a CALL
..'CFTOD' statement.
Support of 3277 Display Station: A model 15 COBOL object program
supports the 3277. as a destination device for the DISPLAY and
ACCEPT commands. Record. lengths of 1 to 120 characters may be
processed by ACCEPT, and records of 1 to 107 characters may be
processed by DISPLAY. The 78-key Operator Console Keyboard is
used for data input.·
.
Disk File Support: The access· meth()d~~upported for 5444, 5445, 3340
and 3344 are the same as those'supported, by other System/3 COBOL
compilers, and are as follows:
.~;<:;(.:;;..
..
J..;.. , . . ';-.:-""_
Sequential Organization
:"
i
Consecutive Processing - including updating in place.
Random Processing - by relative record number including updating
but excluding file loading.
------- -------::-:.
ISG
~
Do not reproduce without written permission
:§~5:
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
Subset ANS COBOL Compiler and Library (cont'd)
Model 15 COBOL Device Support
5444 Disk Storage Drive (5704-C81 only)
model A2 or A3
5445 Disk Storage (5704-CB1 only)
model 1, 2 or 3
3340 Direct Access Storage
Facility model A2, 81, or B2
3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-CB2
only) model B2
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit
model 1, 2, or 3
1403 Printer
model 2, 5, or Nl
3277 Display Station
model 1
5424 MFCU
model A 1 or A2
2560 MFCM
model A 1 or A2
1442 Card Read Punch
model 6 or 7
2501 Card Reader
model A 1 or A2
3284 Printer model 1
1255 MCR modell, 2 or 3
3881 OMR model 1
3741 (directly attached)
model 1, 2, 3 or 4
8SCA, 1 or 2 lines, LCA. or DA
Main Storage Requirements
5704-CB1
5704-CB2
***
Compilation
Execution
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes**
No
12-48K
12-48K
8-48K
8-56K***
COBOL and system halts are logged on the 3277. Source
statements may be entered from the keyboard.
5704-CB2 only. See" Diskette Support".
Object program size can be up to 56K, depending on the CCP,
spool and configuration options selected during system generation.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: Same as for SCP (5704-SC1 for
5704-CB1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-CB2). For the IBM 1403 Printer, the
HN print arrangement is recommended.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5704-SC1 for 5704-CB1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-CB2.
COMPATIBILITY
System/3 COBOL is upward compatible with the DOS and OS
ANS COBOL compilers and is a superset of 1130 ANS COBOL
providing growth from 1130 through System/3 to System/360 and
370. ROLLOUT support is unique to model 15 COBOL.
Migration to and from System/3 COBOL requires little source
program conversion to effect the transition. Certain 1130 library
routines are not included in the System/3 COBOL library, i.e.,
CALLed subprograms.
System/3 model 15 COBOL is source language compatible with
COBOL on other System/3 models, except for differences due to
different hardware. A COBOL source program can be recompiled
by a model 15 COBOL compiler without changes to the source
program (assuming the same I/O). The resulting object program
can be executed under control of the appropriate model 15 SCP
and will produce output identical to that on the previous system
(assuming equivalent I/O devices and data).
Any of the disk data files created by any System/3 program using
disk system management (e.g., RPG II, Sort and COBOL) can be
processed by any System/3 program which uses disk system
management to access the file. Scratch files (RETAIN-S) created
on other System/3 models are not accessible on the model 15.
Files on magnetic tape are similarly compatible between the
System/3 models, except only the model 15 supports multi-file
tape volumes.
The directly-attached 3741 Data Station or Programmable Workstation
is supported only in 5704-CB2.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
COBOL Reference Manual (GC28-6452) ... Disk Concepts and Planning
Guide (GC21-7571). ... S /3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5704-CB1.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -------.:..=:
:5fE: ISG
PP 5704-F01.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 DISK FORTRAN IV
5704-F01; 5704-F02
PURPOSE
Model 15 FORTRAN IV is a program product that operates under
control of the IBM System/3 model 15 SCPo 5704-F01 is used with
SCP 5704-SC1; 5704-F02 is used with SCP 5704-SC2. The compiler
and library are disk resident on the IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive or the
IBM 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or IBM 3344 Direct Access
Storage (5704-F02 only). The compiler requires as input a FORTRAN
source language program and produces as output, by means of the
system's Overlay Linkage Editor, a System/3 machine language object
program, either cataloged in an object library or punched into 80- or
96-column cards or written onto a diskette. A source program listing,
diagnostic messages and main storage map can be requested.
Card I/O Support: The model 15 FORTRAN supports the MFCU, MFCM,
1442, and 2501 as follows:
Read
Punch
Card Print
Stacker Select··
Combined File···
Character set
(EBCDIC)
The model 15 FORTRAN IV language is identical to the FORTRAN IV
language for other System/3 models. It contains those features
defined in American National Standard Basic FORTRAN, X3.10-1966
and additional language features and capabilities previously available
only with certain IBM Full FORTRAN IV Compilers.
The model 15 FORTRAN IV Library contains mathematical and service
subroutines required during execution to perform arithmetic operations,
input and output conversion, and input and output control.
The model 15 FORTRAN IV Library also includes a Commercial
Subroutine Package which is equivalent in function to the 1130
Commercial Subroutine Package insofar as is meaningful in terms of
System/3 model 15 devices and data management.
The interval timer is supported for time-of-day functions. This is
provided by a supplied SCP subroutine, CFTOD.
Support of 3277 Display Stotlon: A model 15 FORTRAN object program
can support the 3277 in oither a split-screen or full-screen mode.
Using a split-screen, an input file (up to 125 bytes) and/or an output
file (up to 125 bytes) can be specified. In full-screen mode, 279 bytes
can be read or written. The Operator Console Keyboard is used for data
input.
Disk File Support: The access methods supported for 5444, 5445, 3340
and 3344 are the same as those supported by FORTRAN on other
System/3 models, and are as follows:
Sequential I/O
Consecutive processing of formatted or unformatted records is
supported. Record size of formatted records can range from 1 to
256 bytes. Record size of unformatted records can range from 1 to
32,767 bytes.
Direct Access I/O
Random processing is by relative record number; consecutive
processing can also be performed. Record size can range from 1 to
32,767 bytes, formatted or unformatted.
Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory for all disk files.
Non-standard labels cannot be used except as data records within the
file.
Indexed files are not supported.
Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411
Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by
FORTRAN for other System/3 models. FORTRAN object programs can
process data on magnotic tape; highlights include:
'~
Consecutive input or output files
1" - 4 tape drivos
Formatted or unformatted records
Record size from 18 to 32,767 bytes
...." Block size from 18 to 32,767 bytes
, IBM Standard Labels, ANSI Labels, no labels
9-track;,800/1600 bpi
7-track;200/556/800 bpi
Single volujn,e or multi-volume files
Single ~ileilor:'!:'lulti-file volumes
Recording format: EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only)
Printer Support: The FORTRAN language supports the 1403 as follows:
Space 0: 1.' or 2 ~eJ9,r,e"C?~i\!lIjter printing~ line ... skip to ~ine 1 before or
after printing a Ilne/ ... ' overflow detection. Commercial Subroutines
support the 1403 as follow's: 'Spa~immediately. 0,1, 2. or 3 lines ...
skip immediately to a specifi~d lin~;h~niber., ' " , ,"
FORTRAN supports the 3284 Printer the same' way' it, does the 1403,
"
except that space 0 after print is not::allowed.·
MFCM*
1442
2501
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
64
256
256
256
*
MFCM support is similar to MFCU support; six lines of card
printing is possible on the MFCM (optional feature on model A1
only).
**
Commercial Subroutines support stacker selection of cards from
the secondary hopper of the MFCU or MFCM.
DESCRIPTION
Source input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card
reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard) or from the source
library. Work files for the compiler can be on any 5444 or 5445 Disk
Storage Drive or on 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or on the 3344
Direct Access Storage. The Overlay Linkage Editor is used to generate
object programs.
MFCU
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
*** When using the Commercial Subroutines, the MFCU2, MFCM2, or
1442 may be defined as both input and output.
Diskette Support: 5704- F01 supports the 3741 directly attached as an
input or output device for compilation only. 5704-F02, in addition to
compilation, supports the 3741 as an inputloutput devic e during object
program execution.
Model 15 FORTRAN Device Support
Compilation
Execution
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes·
Yes
Yes
Yes
5444 Disk Storage Drive (5704-F01 only)
model A2 or A3
5445 Disk Storage (5704-F01 only)
model 1, 2 or 3
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
model A2, B1, or B2
3344 Direct Access Storage (5704- F02 only)
model B2
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit
model 1, 2, or 3
1403 Printer
model 2, 5, or N1
3277 Display Station
model 1
5424 MFCU
model A1 or A2
2560 MFCM
model A1 or A2
1442 Card Read Punch
model 6 or 7
2501 Card Reader
model A1 or A2
3284 Printer model 1
1255 MCR model 1, 2 or 3
3881 OMR model 1
3741 (directly attached)
model 1, 2, 3, or 4
BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, LCA or DA
Main Storage Requirements
5704-F01
5704-F02
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes···
No
10-48K
10-48K
8-48K
8-56K·*
*
FORTRAN and system halts are logged on the 3277. Source
statements may be entered from the keyboard.
** Object program size can be up to 56K, depending on the CCP,
spool and configuration options selected during system generation.
*** 5704-F02 only; see "Diskette Support".
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: Same as for SCP (5704-SC1 for
5704-F01; 5704-SC2 for 5704-F02).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5704-SCl for 5704-F01; 5704-SC2 for 5704-F02.
COMPATIBILITY
System/3 Model 15 FORTRAN IV is sourco language compatible with
FORTRAN IV on other Systom/3 modols. A FORTRAN IV source
program can be recompiled by a modol 15 FORTRAN IV compiler
without changes to the source program (assuming the same I/O). The
resulting object program can be executed under control of the
appropriate model 15 SCP and will produce output identical to that on
the previous system (assuming equivalent I/O devices and data).
The FORTRAN IV compiler accepts source programs written in the IBM
System/360 Basic FORTRAN IV language, which encompasses
American National Standard Basic FORTRAN as defined in X3.101966. The compiler also accepts source programs written in the IBM
1130 Basic FORTRAN IV language with minor modifications.
--.--- ---:: - - :§"f5: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/3 Mdl15 Disk FORTRAN IV (cont'd)
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
FORTRAN IV Reference Manual (SC28-6874) ... FORTRAN IV
Commercial Subroutines (SC28-6875) ... Disk Concepts and Planning
Guide (GC21-7671) ... S/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5704-F01.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
----- ------":':=::::5f§: ISG
PP 5704-RG1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
-~-
Mar83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SVSTEM/3 MODEL 15 RPG II
5704-RG1; 5704-RG2
PURPOSE
but excluding file loading.
Model 15 RPG II is a program product that operates under control of
the System/3 model 15 System Control Programming. 5704-RG1 is
used with SCP 5704-SC1, and 5704-RG2 is used with SCP 5704-SC2.
RPG II is disk resident on the 5444 Disk Storage Drive or 3340 Direct
Access Storage Facility or 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-RG2
only). It requires as input an RPG II source language program and
produces as output a System/3 model 15 machine language object
program, either cataloged in an object library or punched into 80- or
96-column cards, or written onto a diskette. A source program listing,
diagnostic messages, and a main storage map can be requested.
DESCRIPTION
To use the RPG II compiler, the user supplies information about the job
to be processed. The job can be described on specification sheets prior
to entering the source statements into the. system. The specification
sheets are: Auto-Report, Control Card and File Description, Extension
and Line Counter, Telecommunications, Input, Calculation and
Output- Format.
Source Input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card
reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard) or from a source
library. Work files for the compiler can be on either a 5444 or 5445
Disk Storage Drive, or on a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344
Direct Access Storage (6704-RG2 only). The Overlay Linkage Editor,
invoked by the compiler, is used to generate overlays, executable object
programs, etc. (On other System/3 models, RPG II uses its own
linkage editor rather than the system's Overlay Linkage Editor.) The user
can request non-link-edited output from the model 15 RPG II compiler,
allowing modification of the control statements prior to the execution of
the Overlay Linkage Editor.
In addition to the functions provided by S/3 model 10 Disk RPG II,
model 15 RPG II provides the following capabilities:
Model 15 RPG II includes the following support that is available as
separate features in some of the other System/3 models:
Telecommunications, Auto-Report, 5445 and Tape support.
Indexed Organization
Random processing - by key.
Sequential processing - by key including file loading.
Direct Organization
Random Processing - by relative record number. including updating
and file loading.
Consecutive Processing
Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory for all disk files.
Non-standard labels cannot be used except as data records within the
file.
Record size can range from 1 to 9,999 bytes, and records can be
processed as blocked or unblocked. Logical records may span physical
disk sectors, tracks or cylinders.
Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411
Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by other
System/3 RPG II compilers. RPG II object programs can process data
or record address files on magnetic tape. Highlights of tape support
include:
Consecutive input or output files
1 - 4 tape drives
Fixed length records, blocked or unblocked
Variable length records. blocked or unblocked
Record size from 18 to 9,999 bytes
Block size from 18 to 9,999 bytes
IBM Standard Labels. ANSI labels. no labels
Option for two I/O areas
9-track, 800/1600 bpi
7-track, 200/556/800 bpi
Single volume or multi-volume files
Single file or multi-file volumes
Recording format: EBCDIC or ASCII
Program options to Rewind or Rewind/Unload at end of job.
Support of 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility, 2560 MFCM, 2501
Card Reader, 3284 Printer, 1255 Magnetic Character Reader, and
3277 Display Station (with operator console keyboard).
Printer Support: RPG 1\ supports the 1403 Printer as follows: Space 0, 1,
2. or 3 before or after printing a line; skip to line number before or after
printing a line; overflow detection; first page forms alignment.
Support of 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-RG2 only).
RPG II supports the 3284 Printer the same way it does the 1403, except
that space 0 after print is not allowed.
Support of interval timer for time-of-day function.
Device Independent Data Management - a sequential file is defined
whose assignment to a device can be specified by an OCl FILE
statement when the object program is executed. The sequential file
can be input (2501, 1442, MFCU, MFCM, 3741 directly attached,
5444, 5445, 3340, 3344 or '3410/3411) or output (1403, 3284,
1442, MFCU, 3741 directly attached, MFCM, 5444, 5445, 3340,
3344 or 3410/3411) but not update, add or combined. Specifications unique to a particular device, such as space, skip, and stacker
select are not allowed for this kind of file.
Additional index space - for 5444, 5445, 3340 or 3344 indexed
files, an optional File Description Specification entry, INDEX,
permits additional main storage to be used to accommodate more
sectors of file index. This is advantageous when sequentially
processing indexed files.
Card I/O Support: RPG II supports the M FCU, M FCM, 1442, and 2501 as
follows:
Read
Punch
Card Print
Stacker Select
Combined File
Character set
(EBCDIC)
MFCU
MFCM
1442
2501
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
64
256
256
256
RPG II support of the MFCM is identical to the System/360 model 20
RPG support, except for certain situations involving stacker selection
and combined files.
Note: 5704-RG2 supports an 'external buffers' option and does not
support B-type inquiry programs.
Card input or output files for which stacker selection is not specified
may be double buffered.
Auto-Report: RPG II Auto-Report enhances the RPG II language by
providing functions which eliminate much of the preparation and coding
work normally done by the user. It is specifically designed to facilitate
report preparation.
Diskette Support: RPG II supports the 3741 directly attached as an input
or output device through device independent data management or
standard data management.
Auto- Report executes as a preprocessor to
input is RPG II source statements and
Auto-Report produces a diagnostic listing,
statements with generated or copied RPG
,calls the RPG II compiler for execution.
the RPG II Compiler. The
Auto-Report statements.
replaces the Auto-Report
II source statements and
Telecommunications Support: The first and/or second Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA) and the Local Communications
Adapter are supported through the use of the RPG II Telecommunications Specifications and the addition of BSCA as a device entry on the
RPG II File Description Specification. (The Display Adapter and the
BSCC are not supported by the RPG II Telecommunications support.)
The support is identical to that provided by other system/3 Telecommunications features, and it includes:
Support of 3277 Display Station: The 3277 is an integral part of the
system and is used as the system console. A model 15 RPG II object
... program can access the 3277 as an input file (up to 120 bytes), as an
output file (up to 120 bytes). as an update file (up to 279 bytes), or as a
display file (up to 35 bytes). The 78-key Operator Console Keyboard is
used for data input. The program function keys 1-9 can be tested by
mear,s of a supplied subroutine,SUB,R89.
Modes: Receive only ... Receive with conversational reply··· ... Transmit
only ... Transmit with conversational reply·** ... Alternate transmit and
receive file.·**
•••
Not supported in communication with 2770 and 2780. 6670 (as a
2770).
Disk File Support: The aCcess methods supported for 5444, 5445, 3340
and 3344 are the same as those supported by other system/3 RPG II
compilers. and are as follows:
'.
RPG II language features supported: Input, Output and Combined files ...
demand files for Transmit and Receive ", Blocking and deblocking of
records ... Dual I/O areas.
Sequential Organization
BSCA features, options, and capabilities supported: Manual call ... manual
answer ... Auto-call ... Auto-answer '" Medium Speed '" High Speed
... Station Selection... EBCDIC data transparency ... intermediate block
checking ... EBCDIC or ASCII data and data link control characters. File
translation of ASCII data can be accomplished by proper use of the file
translation facility of RPG II .
Consecutive Processing - including.updating in place.
Random Processing - by relative record number including updating
......
------- ----=- - :§~E: ISG
PP 5704-RG1.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/3 Model 15 RPG II (cont'd)
For additional information, see the description of the model 10 Disk
RPG II Telecommunications feature (5702-RG1, feature #6000/#6002).
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Communication with the 5231 model 2 is in Receive mode only. The
5231 model 2 is supported as a 3741 model 2 or4.
Yes
Yes
Introduction to RPG 1/ (GC21-7514) ... RPG 1/ Reference Manual
(SC21-7504) ... RPG 1/ Additional Topics Programmer's Guide
(GC21-7567) ... RPG 1/ Disk File Processing Programmer's Guide
(GC21-7566) ... RPG 1/ Auto-Report General Information (GC21-7563)
... Auto-Report Reference Manual (SC21-5057) ... RPG 1/ Telecommunications Programming Reference Manual (SC21-7507) ... Disk
Concepts and Planning Guide (GC21-7571). ... 5/3 Bibliography
(GC20-8080).
Yes
Yes
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
PURPOSE
Yes
Yes
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Yes
The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature provides telecommunications
services for local or remote 3270 devices. The program can be
automatically linked into the RPG II application program via the
SPECIAL file exit capability on the RPG II File Description Specification
Sheet. Neither the Assembler nor the RPG II Telecommunications
feature is required.
Yes
Yes
DESCRIPTION
Yes
Yes
The following services are provided by the 3270 Display Control
Feature:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes****
Yes****
System/3 Model 15 RPG II Device Support
5444 Disk Storage Drive (5704- RG 1 only)
model A2 or A3
5445 Disk Storage (5704- RG 1 only)
model 1, 2 or 3
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
model A2, B1, or B2
3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-RG2
only) model B2
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit
model 1, 2, or 3
Compilation
Execution
RPG 113270 DISPLAY CONTROL FEATURE
Feature #16005/#6006
1403 Printer
model 2, 5, or N 1
3277 Display Station
model 1
5424 MFCU
model A1 or A2
2560 MFCM
model A1 or A2
1442 Card Read Punch
model 6 or 7
2501 Card Reader
model A1 or A2
3284 Printer model 1
1255 MCR model 1, 2 or 3
3881 OMR model 1
3741 (directly attached)
model 1, 2, 30r4
BSCA, 1 or 2 lines. LCA. or DA
Main Storage Requirements
5704-RG1
5704-RG2
No
No
RPG II access to 3270 Display System Terminals attached via the
Display Adapter (DA), the Local Communications Adapter (LCA), or
the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA).
Automatic buffering and queuing of terminal data
Yes
No
Yes
Yes**
10-48K
10-48K
8-48K***
8-56K*****
A display formatting interface which permits the support of 3270
devices with coding in RPG II
*
RPG II and system halts are logged on the 3277.
statements may be entered from the keyboard.
Source
**
For a list of terminals supported, see the model 5 SCP pages.
***
When a program generates object code that exceeds the partition
size as specified, overlays will be generated to fit. Not all
programs - even with overlays - can fit into the stated partition
size.
**** Requires SCP subroutine; RPG II SPECIAL exit is used.
***** The discussion of overlays above (***) also applies to 5704-RG2.
In addition, object program size can be up to 56K, depending on
the CCP, spool and configuration options selected during system
generation.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: Same as for model 15 SCP (5704-SC1
for 5704-RG1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-RG2).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5704-SC1 for 5704-RG1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-RG2.
COMPATIBILITY
Programs: System/3 model 15 RPG II is source language compatible
with RPG II on other System/3 models, except for differences due to
different hardware. An RPG II source program can be recompiled by a
model 15 RPG II compiler, without changes to the source program
(assuming the same I/O). The resulting object program can be
executed under control of the appropriate model 15 SCP and will
produce output identical to that on the previous system (assuming
equivalent I/O devices and data). The System/3 inline inquiry
subroutine (SUBR95) is not supported by model 15 RPG II. but the
program function keys 1-9 can be tested by using a different subroutine, SUBR89.
Data: Any of the disk data files created by any System/3 program using
disk system management (e.g., RPG II, Sort, and COBOL) can be
processed by any System/3 program which uses disk system
management to access the file. Scratch fiies (RETAiN-S) created on
other System/3 models are not accessible on the model 15. Files on
magnetic tape are similarly compatible between System 3 models,
except only the model 15 supports multifile tape volumes.
Complete line control procedures are provided
Up to 18 terminals may be supported
Provides the capability of coding one or more applications within
one program. No task switching is provided.
Two subroutines are provided. SUBR13 allows an RPG II program
to support 3270s without using CCP. SUBR14 provides upward
compatibility with CCP, requiring only program recompilation,
assuming the RPG II program meets the CCP requirements.
Terminals Supported
The following terminals and. communications facilities are supported
under the RPG II 3270 Display Control Feature:
With the Display Adapter
3277
3284
3286
3288
Display Station (model 1 or 2)
Printer (model 1 or 2)
Printer (model 1 or 2)
Line Printer (model 2)
With the Local Communications Adapter (LCA) or Binary Synchronous
Communications Adapter (BSCA)
3275 Display Station and Control, or
3271 Display Control Unit (model 1 or 2), with:
3277
3284
3286
3288
Display Station (model 1 or 2)
Printer (model 1 or 2)
Printer (model 1 or 2)
Line Printer (model 2)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Note: The RPG II 3270 Disr.lay Control feature is not supporte.d und.er
SCP 6704-SC2 (model 150 .
.
...
' ';
Mlni':'lum System Requirements: In addition to the mini.mtirft~SYS,tem
reqUirements of the SCP (5704-SC1), the RPG II 3270 Dlsplay:Control
feature requires one of the following: Display Adaptf,tr,(DA), the Local
Communications Adapter (LCA), or the Binary Synchronous Communi'.~. er'~Terminals
cations Ad~pter (BSCA), plus one of the devices liste~.• ~,u~.
Supported .
..;I.;,ii:
~~'Ii.jIII,
•
Using SUBR13, approximately 10K-12~bytes are a~,ded to the size of
the object program. Using SUBR14, :',approximately 4.3K bytes are
added to the size of the object program.· .-
SOFTW~RE·REQUIREM~NTS
"
S704-SC1; 5704-RG1
.'
,'~.
...
' ""I'
.
------- -----
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - -~'=?'E: ISG
.PROGRAM. PRODUCTS
System/3 Model 15 RPG II (cont'd)
COMPATIBILITY
The RPG II 3270 Display Control Feature is functionally compatible with
the System/3 model 8/10 and System/3 model 12 RPG II 3270
Display Control feature.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg) ,
System/3 RPG /I 3270 Display Control Feature Reference and Logic
Manual (SC21-5161) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
PP 5704-RG1.3
Mar 83
Major. Revision
------- - - - --
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - - :§'f§: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 DISK SORT
5704-SM1; 5704-SM9
PURPOSE
The IBM System/3 model 15 Disk Sort program is a program product
that sorts a file into ascending or descending sequence. It is resident
on an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive or an IBM 3340 Direct Access
Storage Facility or IBM 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-SM9 only).
5704-SM1 is used with SCP 5704-SC1, and 5704-SM9 is used with
SCP 5704-SC2.
DESCRIPTION
Input file: From 1 to 8 files may be input to the Disk Sort Program.
These files may be on 5444 or 5445 Disk Storage drives, 3340 Direct
Access Storage Facility, 3344 Direct Access Storage, 3410/3411
Magnetic Tape Subsystem, card reader, or 3741 directly attached. A
disk input file can have sequential, indexed or direct organization. For a
disk file, the input record size can be from 1 to 9,999 bytes. A tape
input file can have fixed length records, either blocked or unblocked;
variable length tape records are not supported. The maximum input
tape record or block size is 9,999 bytes, and the minimum is 18 bytes.
Input tape files can be 9-track 800/1600 bpi or 7-track 200/556/800
bpi. The tape file can be recorded in either EBCDIC or ASCII code.
Input can be either a single volume file or a multi-volume file. For a
diskette input file, the record size can be only 96 bytes.
Work file: A work file can be resident on a 5444 or 5445 Disk Storage
Drive, or on a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344 Direct
Access Storage. Work space can be specified by the user or can be
automatically allocated by the program. Directed auto-allocate
references to units 03 or 04 on the 3344 Direct Access Storage is
interpreted to mean any of the four logical volumes on the drive.
Output file: The output file can be resident on a 5444 or 5445 Disk
Storage Drive, or on a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or on 3344
Direct Access Storage, or on a unit of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape
Subsystem. A disk output file can have sequential organization only.
Characteristics of tape output files are the same as for tape input files,
described above. The maximum output record size for disk or tape is
4,096 bytes. Output of the program will be in one of three formats:
Tag (ADDROUT), tag-along, or summary tag-along.
Features
Records can be selected or omitted, and reformatted.
Specified records may be forced ahead of others.
An alternate collating sequence can be specified.
Control fields can be in different locations in the records.
The total length of the control fields can be from 1 to 256 bytes;
there is no other limit on the number of control fields.
Control fields can be sorted in ascending or descending sequence,
or mixed (some ascending and some descending).
Control fields can be sorted using only the digit or zone portion of
the character. The fields can be packed or unpacked decimal, or
character formats.
Records containing identical control fields can be combined by
summarizing specified fields into one record.
Use: Specifications are described on a simple, RPG-like coding sheet.
These specifications are entered into the system using the system input
device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard), or they
can be stored in the source library on disk. Sort control card diagnostics and messages may be displayed on the system logging device
(CRT, 1403 or 3284). The program can be executed in a multiprogramming environment and requires from 8K to 48K bytes of main
storage, exclusive of SCP requirements.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: Same as for SCP (5704-SC1 for
5704-SM1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-SM9).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5704-SC1 for 5704-SM1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-SM9.
COMPATIBILITY
The System /3 model 15 Disk Sort program is compatible with the Disk
Sort programs used on other System/3 models.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Disk Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7522). ... System/3 Bibliography
(GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5704-SM1.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- ----=--~'fs: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
j)ROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 MAGNETIC TAPE SORT
5704-SM2; 5704-SMS
PURPOSE
The IBM System/3 model 15 Magnetic Tape Sort Program is a program
product that sorts a tape file into ascending or descending sequence. It
is resident on an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive or an IBM 3340 Direct
Access Storage Facility or IBM 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-SM8
only). 5704-SM2 is used with SCP 5704-SC1, and 5704-SM8 is used
with SCP 5704-SC2. A configuration that includes three or four tape
units is required.
Input file: The input file resides on any unit of the 3410/3411 Magnetic
Tape Subsystem. The input file can have fixed length records, either
blocked or unblocked. (Variable length records are not supported). The
maximum input record or block size is 9,999 bytes. The minimum input
record or block size is 18 bytes. Input tape files can be 9-track
800/1600 bpi or 7-track 200/556/800 bpi. The file can be recorded in
either EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only) code. Input can
be either a single volume file or a multi-volume file.
Work files: Three work tapes are required: A fourth can be utilized, if
available. Work tapes can be either 7 - or 9-track (see restrictions
below). Work tapes must be single volume only (not multi-volume).
Output file: The output file resides on ~ny unit of the 3410/3411
Magnetic Tape Subsystem. Characteristics of tape output files are the
same as for tape input files, described above. Output is a file of records
containing the sort control fields and / or the data fields the user has
specified. (The tag (ADDROUT) and summary tag-along sort capabilities of the Disk Sort are not supported in the Tape Sort.)
Restrictions: To utilize all of the functions of this program, at least three
9-track work tapes must be available. If one or more of the work tapes
is 7 -track, then only those sort functions that relate to the standard
System/3 64-character set (EBCDIC) are supported. As a result, sorts
of binary data, packed or unpacked decimal data or sorts on zones are
not allowed in these 7-track configurations.
Features
Records can be selected or omitted, and reformatted.
Specified records may be forced ahead of others.
An alternate collating sequence can be specified.
A checkpoint/ restart facility is supported.
Control fields can be in different locations in the records.
The total length of the control fields can be from 1 to 256 bytes;
there is no other limit on the number of control fields.
Control fields can be sorted using only the digit or zone portion of
the character. The fields can be packed or unpacked decimal, or
character formats.
• Control fields can be sorted in ascending or descending sequence, or
mixed (some ascending and some descending).
Use: Specifications are described on a simple, RPG-like coding sheet.
These specifications are entered into the system using the system input
device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard), or they
can be stored in the source library on disk. Sort control card diagnostics and messages may be displayed on the system logging device
(CRT, 1403 or 32S4). The program can be executed in a multiprogramming environment and requires SK to 4SK bytes of main storage,
exclusive of SCP requirements.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: Same as for SCP (5704-SC1 for
5704-SM2; 5704-SC2 for 5704-SMS). In addition, at least three tape
drives of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem are required.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5704-SC1 for 5704-SM2; 5704-SC2 for 5704-SMS.
COMPATIBILITY
The model 15 MaQnotic Tape Sort Program is functionally compatible
with the Disk ReSident Magnetic Sort Programs for other System/3
models.
DOC:UMENTATION
. (available from Mechanicsburg)
Tape Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7572).
(GC20-S0S0).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: ,See PP Index
S/3 Bibliography
PP 5704-SM2.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -------.:. ::-::.
ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
:§~§:
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 CCP/DISK SORT
5704-SM7
PURPOSE
The IBM System/3 model 15 CCP/Disk Sort program is a program
product that is used to sort a file into ascending or descending
sequence. It is resident on an IBM 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
or IBM 3344 Direct Access Storage. 5704-SM7 is used with SCP
5704-SC2.
With the CCP/Disk Sort program, the user can generate an object
module which can be executed as a task under control of the Communications Control Program (CCP) (5704-SC2, feature #6011/#6012), or
as a program under control of the SCP in a non-CCP partition.
All Disk Sort functions are available in the CCP/Disk Sort program,
including tag, tag-along and summary tag-along sorts, with the
following exceptions or requirements:
For generation, only 12K bytes of main storage is used.
For the size of the generated program, 12K to 48K can be
However, CCP does not allow a program greater than 32K.
Only disk input files can be specified. (From 1 to 8 input files may
be used.)
Deferred mount of the output file is not supported, and the output
file cannot be written over the input file.
Automatic work file allocation is not supported.
Work record lengths cannot be less than 3 bytes.
Use: To use this program, two steps are necessary:
Generation: Using information from OCl FILE statements (for
input, work and output files) and sort specifications, this program
generates an object module which is cataloged into the object
library. Generation is done in a non-CCP partition.
Execution: The CCP system or terminal operator calls the generated
object program by entering the name of the program, similar to
calling any other program under CCP control. A generated program
can be loaded in a batch partition by the system operator.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: Same as for SCP (5704-SC2).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5704-SC2.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Disk Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7522)
(GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
S /3 Bibliography
PP 5704-SM7.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- - - - --
PP 5704-UT1.1
Do not reproduco without written permission
:: - - :§'f~ ISG
MarS3
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15
DISK RESIDENT CARD UTILITIES
5704-UT1; 5704-UT3
PURPOSE
This IBM System/3 program product is resident on an IBM 5444 Disk
Storage Drive or an IBM 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or IBM
3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-UT3 only). 5704-UT1 is used with
SCP 5704-SC1 and 5704-UT3 is used with SCP 5704-SC2. It
provides the following programs that support SO- or 96-column card
files: Sort/Collate, List, Reproduce/Interpret, and Gangpunch. (The
following programs are not provided in 5704-UT1 or 5704-UT3 but are
available in the model 10 Utilities, 5701-UT1 and 5702-UT1: Data
Recording, Data Verifying and SO-96 Conversion Program.)
DESCRIPTION
Sort/Collate Program - Functionally identical to the model 10
Sort/Collate Program (see 5701-UT1), the model 15 program also
supports the 2560 MFCM.
List Program - Functionally identical to the model 10 96-column List
Program (see 5701- UT1), the model 15 program supports input from
5424 MFCU, 2560 MFCM, 1442 Card Read Punch, or 2501 Card
Reader. Printed output is directed to the 1403 or 32S4 Printer.
Reproduce/Interpret Program - Functionally identical to the model 10
Reproduce/Interpret Program (see 5701-UT1), the model 15 program
supports:
MFCU-1 input and MFCU-2 output, or
MFCM-1 input and MFCM-2 output, or
2501 input and 1442 output.
Gangpunch Program - The model 15 Gangpunch Program provides the
following capabilities:
Interspersed master-card gangpunching: The master and detail
cards are intermixed in the primary file.
Count-controlled gangpunching: A fixed or variable counter may
be used to punch a specified number of detail cards. The master
card is in the secondary file and the detail cards are in the primary
file.
Match master cards and detail cards on a control field and punch
into the detail card if a match occurs: The master card is in the
secondary file and the detail card is in the primary file.
The following functions may be performed with any of the major
types of gangpunching described above: Offset gangpunching ...
gangpunching consecutive numbers into detail cards ... 9angpunching a constant into detail cards ... card interpretation (entire
card or only what is punched) •.. selection of a single type of master
card from many master cards ... selection of a single type of detail
card from many detail cards.
The Gangpunch Program supports the following devices:
For count-controlled and match fields processing
- MFCU2 input and MFCU1 output, or
- MFCM2 input and MFCM1 output, or
- 2501 input and 1442 output.
For interspersed processing
- MFCUl input and output, or
- MFCM1 input and output, or
- 1442 input and output.
Use: The programs described above can be executed in a multiprogramming environment and require main storage, exclusive of SCP
requirements, as follows: (Note: The minimum partition size is SK.)
Sort/Collate
,List Program
SK*
3K
6K
6K
.Reprod~ce/lnterprot
;Gangp~nch
Additional main storage is used, if available.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
t:t,AR DW,f\R E, REQUIREMENTS
,l
MinimumSy~tem Roqulrome~ts: Same as for SCP (5704-SCl for
5704-UT1; 5704~SC2 for 5704,:,UT3), The devices required for the
particular program (c:iescribedabove) must be available.
v:'
,
'"
"i
,
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
,~:;,c
l;,/<,~; ~1r> I .
!,. ,
5704-SC1 for 5704";,UT1; 5?p4-'S~2for 5704~~T3.
",;(COMPAlIBILITY. ",
The model 15 Disk Re~ident C~id"tutilities,. that" have, model 10
equival,ents are functionally c~"1RIl~ible, ,to,~the 'm?~tel' 10 versions.
Operation of the programsls.'dlfferent,~due o.tol.ji>, the model 15
system / operator interface.
,,",I,,',,
.•:"". . ,
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Sort/Col/ate and Card Utilities Reference Manual (SC21-7529) ... 5/3
Bibliography (GC20-S0aO).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
---------------
PP 5705-AS1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
= - - :§~§: ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM·PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 BASIC ASSEMBLER
5705-AS1
PURPOSE
The IBM System/3 model 12 Basic Assembler program is a program
product that processes source programs written in the Basic Assembler
language and produces executable object programs. The program is
disk resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access Storage
Facility (DASF) and operates under control of the model 12 SCPo
The Basic Assembler language is a symbolic programming language
used to write programs. Some of the features provided by the program
and its language are:
Mnemonic Operation Codes
Symbolic Referencing of Storage Addresses
Automatic Storage Assignment
Address Displacement Calculation
Convenient Data Representation
Operand Field Expressions
Source Identification--Sequence Fields
Assembler Instructions
Source Program Listing
Cross- Reference Listing
Error Checking and Diagnostic Messages
The Basic Assembler can be used to create a stand-alone program.
The object program is punched into cards. Program loading is
performed with an initial program loader through the 5424 MFCU or the
1442 Card Read Punch. Stand-alone programs are coded entirely by
the user with no dependence on other programming support.
The Basic Assembler may also be used for assembly of relocatable
subroutines for use with model 12 RPG II, COBOL, or FORTRAN. The
subroutines, written in the Basic Assembler language, are coded by the
user and separately assembled. The process of program linking is
accomplished during compilation of the RPG " source program or by
means of the Overlay Linkage Editor, in the case of COBOL or
FORTRAN.
Source input into the Assembler can be from the system input device
(card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 5471 keyboard). from a source
library, or from a source file generated by the Macro Processor. Work
files for the Assembler are on the simulation area of a 3340. The
Overlay Linkage Editor is used to generate executable object programs.
Model 12 Basic Assembler Device Support
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
model C2
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit,
modell, 2 or 3
5203 Printer, modell, 2 or 3
1403 Printer, model 2, 5 or N 1
5424 MFCU, model A1 or A2
1442 Card Read Punch, model
6 or 7
5471 Printer-Keyboard, model 1
1255 MCR, model 1, 2 or 3
3881 OMR, model 1
3741 Data Station / Programmable
Workstation, modell, 2, 3
or 4 (directly attached)
BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, ICA, or Local
Display Adapter
Main Storage Requirements
Program Level Size)
Source
Assembly
Object
Execution
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
10-56K*
Up to 64K*
* The maximum program level is 64K less supervisor requirements.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: An IBM System/3 model 12 which
includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K) ... and an IBM
5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch or an IBM directlyattached 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation ... and an IBM
5203 or 1403 Printer* ... and an IBM 3340 DASF.
*
Note: The 5203 or 1403 printer should be equipped with the
Universal Character Set feature and a PN (60-character set) print
chain/train arrangement. A 48-character set (for example, HN or
LC arrangement) can be used with the Assembler; however, the
user must be willing to accept substitute characters.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5705-SC1.
COMPATIBILITY
The model 12 Basic Assembler program is source language compatible
with the model 10 Basic Assembler program. Macro instructions used
in model 10 programs (model 10 Macros feature of the SCP) may have
to be changed before re-assembling with the model 12 Assembler.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
System/3 Basic Assembler Reference Manual (SC21-7509) ...
System/3 Basic Assembler Program Product Specifications (GC215079) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- - - - ----=;:: ~~§: ISG
PP 5705-CB1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 SUBSET
ANS COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY
5705-CB1)
PURPOSE
IBM System/3 model 12 COBOL is a program product that operates
under control of the System/3 model 12 System Control Programming.
The compiler and library are disk resident in a simulation area on the
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility (DASF). The compiler requires as
input a COBOL source language program and produces as output, by
means of the System/3 Overlay Linkage Editor, a System/3 machine
language object program, either cataloged in an object library, punched
into 80- or 96-column cards, or written onto a diskette. A source
program listing, diagnostic messages and a main storage map can be
requested.
DESCRIPTION
Record size can range from 1 to 32K bytes, and records may be
processed as blocked or unblocked. Logical records may span physical
disk sectors, tracks or cylinders.
Multi-volume sequential files are supported on the 3340 main data
area. Offline multi-volume files are only supported on Drive 2 of the
3340. Neither multi-volume nor indexed files are supported on the
simulation areas of the 3340.
Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411
Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by
System/3 model 10 COBOL. COBOL object programs can process
data on magnetic tape; highlights include:
Consecutive input or output files
1 -4 tape drives
Fixed length records, blocked or unblocked
Variable length records, blocked or unblocked
Record size from 18 to 32,768 bytes
Block size from 18 to 32,768 bytes
IBM Standard Labels, ANSI labels, no labels
Option for two I/O areas
9-track, 800/1600 bpi
7-track, 200/556/800 bpi
Single volume or multivolume files
Recording format: EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or
ASCII (9-track only)
System/3 COBOL supports Grade 1 Braille for both compiler listings
and object program printed output. Minimum requirements include a
132-position printer (5203 or 1403) with 8 lines/inch spacing. A
user-provided elastic strip is attached over the printer hammers to
produce the Braille characters. The compiler requires a 14K program
level in order to produce Braille listings.
Source input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card
reader, 3741 directly attached, or 5471 keyboard) or from a source
library. Work files for the compiler are in a simulation area of a 3340
Direct Access Storage Facility. The Overlay Linkage Editor is used to
generate object programs.
American National Standard COBOL Considerations: The U.S. Industry
standard for COBOL is American National Standard COBOL, X3.231968, which was approved by the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) on August 23, 1968. The following functional
processing modules of the ANSI standard are included in the System/3
model 12 compiler.
Printer Support: COBOL supports the 5203 and 1403 as follows: Space
0, 1, 2, or 3 before or after printing a line; skip to line number before or
after printing a line; overflow detection.
Card I/O Support: Model 12 COBOL supports the MFCU and 1442 as
follows:
1 Nucleus
1, 2
1 Sequential Access 1, 2
1 Random Access 0, 2
1 Library
0, 2
1,3
2Table Handling
1 Segmentation
0, 2
The first digit above represents the level of the modules included in the
compiler; the second digit represents the lowest level in the American
National Standards Institute Standard (0 implies that the module may
be completely missing from the standard compilers).
The third digit represents the highest level in the ANSI standard.
The international standard for COBOL is ISO Recommendation Number
1989, which was approved by ISO (International Organization for
Standardization) in 1972. System/3 model 12 COBOL bears the same
relation to the ISO standard as to the ANSI standard, inasmuch as the
two standards are identical in technical content.
Additions: In addition to the standard language, tho following additional
features are provided:
Extensions to the modules of American Notional Standard COBOL
listed above, comprising
- Certain language elements which oro dofined in higher levels of
the American National Standard COBOL than those listed.
- Certain language elements defined by tho CODASYL Programming Langua~e Committee but not yot included by ANSI in
American National Standard COBOL.
- IBM-developed extensions consistent with those supported by
the System/360 and 370 OS and DOS ANS COBOL compilers
and 1130 ANS COBOL compiler.
Disk File Support: The access methods supportod for the 3340 are the
same as those supported by System/3 model 10 COBOL and are as
follows:
Indexed (mai'n data are~- o'nly)~'"
Random Processing - by ,key!,;,
sequential~roc~S~ing~Yk~y including file loading.
Direct'
~
,'
,,
.
Rand~m pro.cesSing-~yirelativ'8'f;ecord number!,i"ccluding updating
and file loading.
_,:1
Consecutive Processing.
I
';
,;",
"
'::',,'
:. _ ,
Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory,f6'r':;i:'all disk files.
~~~-standard labels cannot be used excep~l.,c:?~r!!~l~,records within the
1442
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
256
Model 12 COBOL Device Support
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
model C2
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit
model 1, 2 or 3
5203 Printer, model 1. 2 or 3
1403 Printer, model 2, 5 or N 1
5424 MFCU, model A1 or A2
1442 Card Read Punch
model60r 7
5471 Printer-Keyboard, model 1
1255 MCR, model 1, 2 or 3
'
3881 OMR, model 1
3741 Data Station/Programmable
Workstation model 1, 2, 3 or 4
(directly attached)
BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, ICA, or
Local Display Adapter
Main Storage Requirements (Program
Level Size)
Compilation
Execution
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes·
No
No
Yes
Yes·
No
No
12-56K
8-56K
• This device is supported only by using the DISPLAY or ACCEPT
statement.
The maximum program level is 64K less supervisor requirements.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
. Consecutive Processing - including updating in place.
Random Processing - by relative record number including updating
but e~cluding file loading.
MFCU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
64
Diskette Support: COBOL supports the 3741 directly attached as an input
or output device for compilation. For object programs, the 3741 is
supported only by using the ACCEPT statement.
••
,Sequential
, (\
.~
Read
Punch
Card Print
Stacker Select (punch only)
Associated File
Character Set (EBCDIC)
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: For source compilation - An IBM
System/3 model 12 which includos on IBM 6412 Processing Unit
model B16 (32K) ... and an IBM 6424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card
IBM
3741
Data
Read
Punch
or
a
diroctly-attached
Station/Programmable Workstation ... and an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer
(the HN print arrangement is recommended) ... and a 3340 DASF.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5705-SC1.
----:: - -~~§: ISG
-- - ----
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/3 Mdl12 Subset ANS COBOL
Compiler and Library (cont'd)
COMPATIBILITY
System/3 COBOL is upward compatible with the DOS and as
ANS COBOL compilers and is a superset of 1130 ANS COBOL
providing growth from 1130 through System/3 to System/360 and
370.
Migration to and from System/3 COBOL requires little source
program conversion to effect the transition. Certain 1130 library
routines are not included in the System/3 COBOL library, e.g.,
CALLed subprograms.
System/3 model 12 COBOL is source language compatible with
System/3 model 10 COBOL, with language differences due to
differences in I/O. A System/3 model 10 COBOL source program
can be re-compiled on System/3 model 12, without changes to the
source, and be executed under control of System/3 model 12 SCP
- assuming the same I/O. (Note: A 5444 is equivalent to a
simulation area on the 3340; indexed and multi-volume files are
supported in the main data areas only; split cylinder files are not
supported.)
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
System/3 Subset ANS COBOL Reference Manual (GC28-6452) ...
System/3 Subset ANS COBOL Program Product Specification
(GC28-6462) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5705-CB1.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- ----:: - -~~S: ISG
PP 5705·F01.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 DISK FORTRAN IV
5705·F01
PURPOSE
**
System/3 model 12 FORTRAN IV is a program product that operates
under control of the System/3 model 12 SCPo The compiler and library
are disk resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access Storage
Facility (DASF). The compiler requires as input a FORTRAN source
language program and produces as output, by means of the system's
Overlay Linkage Editor, a System/3 machine language object program,
either cataloged in an object library, punched into 80- or 96-column
cards, or written onto a diskette. A source program listing, diagnostic
messages and a main storage map may be requested.
DESCRIPTION
Source input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card
reader, 3741 directly attached, or 5471 keyboard) or from a source
library. Work files for the compiler are in a simulation area of the 3340
Direct Access Storage Facility. The Overlay Linkage Editor is used to
generate object programs.
The model 12 FORTRAN IV language is identical to the System/3
model 6 or 10 FORTRAN IV language. It contains those features
defined in American National Standard Basic FORTRAN, X3.10-1966
and additional language features and capabilities previously available
only with certain Full FORTRAN IV Compilers.
The model 12 FORTRAN IV Library contains mathematical and service
subroutines required during execution to perform arithmetic operations,
input and output conversion, and input and output control.
The model 12 FORTRAN IV Library also includes a Commercial
Subroutine Package which is equivalent in function to the 1130
Commercial Subroutine Package insofar as is meaningful in terms of
System/3 model 12 devices and data management.
Disk File Support: The access methods supported for the 3340 are the
same as those supported by System/3 model 10 FORTRAN, and are as
follows:
Sequential I/O
Consecutive processing of formattod or unformatted records is
supported. Record size of formatted records can range from 1 to
256 bytes.
Record size of unformatted records can range from 1 to 32,767
bytes.
Direct Access I/O
Random processing is by relative record number; consecutive
processing can also be performed. Record size can range from 1 to
32,767 bytes, formatted or unformatted.
Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory for all disk files.
Non-standard labels cannot be used except as data records within the
file.
Indexed files are not supported.
Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411
Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by
System/3 model 10 FORTRAN. FORTRAN object programs can
process data on magnetic tape; highlights of tape support include:
.'
Consecutive input or output files
1-4 tape drives
Formatted or unformatted records
Record size from 18 to 32,767 bytes
Block size from 18 to 32,767 bytes
IBM Standard Labels, ANSI Labels, no labels
9-track, 800/1600 bpi
7-track, 200/556/800 bpi
Single volume files
Multivolume files
Recording format: EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or ASCII
(9-track only)
Printer Support: The FORTRAN language supports the 5203 and 1403 as
folloyvs: Space 0, 1, or 2 before or after printing a line ... skip to line 1
before or after printing a line ... overflow detection. Commercial
Subroutines support the 5203 and 1403 as follows: Space immediately
0, 1, 2 or 3 lines ... skip Immodiately to a specified line number.
Card I/O Support: The Model 12' FORTRAN supports the MFCU and
1442 as f o l l o w s : ' ,
'.
'Read
Punch
Card Print
Stacker Select·
Combined File··
Character set (EBCDIC)
*
MFCU
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
64
1442
"Yes
" Yes
No
No
No
256
Commercial Subroutines support stacker selection of cards from
the 1442 and from the secondary ~opperof the MFCU.
Through use of the Commercial Subroutines, the MFCU or 1442
can support a combined file.
Diskette Support: FORTRAN supports the 3741 directly attached as an
input or output device for compilation only.
Model 12 FORTRAN Device Support
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
model C2
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit
modell, 2 or 3
5203 Printer, model 1, 2 or 3
1403 Printer, model 2, 5 or N 1
5424 MFCU, model Al or A2
1442 Card Read Punch,
model 6 or7
5471 Printer-Keyboard, model 1
1255 MCR, modell, 2 or 3
3881 OMR, model 1
3741 Data Station/Programmable
Workstation model 1, 2, 3 or 4
(directly attached)
BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, ICA, or
Local Display Adapter
Main Storage Requirements
Program Level Size)
•
Compilation
Execution
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
9-56K*
8-56K*
The maximum program level is 64K less supervisor requirements
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: For source compilation - A System/3
model 12 which includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16
(32K) ... and an IBM 5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch or
a directly-attached IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation
... and an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer ... and an IBM 3340 DASF.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5705-SC1.
COMPATIBILITY
System/3 model 12 Disk FORTRAN IV source programs are compatible
with System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV for System 3 model 6, 8 or 10 except
for changes required to accommodate differences in attached I/O. The
model 12 FORTRAN compiler accepts source programs written in the
IBM System/360 Basic FORTRAN IV language, which encompasses
American National Standard Basic FORTRAN as defined in X3.101966. The compiler also accepts source programs written in the IBM
1130 Basic FORTRAN IV language with minor modifications.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
System/3 FORTRAN IV Reference Manual (SC28-6874) ... System/3
FORTRAN IV Commercial Subroutines (SC28-6875) .. , System/3
FORTRAN IV Program Product Specifications (GC28-6880) .. ,
System/3 Bibliography (GC20-B080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- --------
PP 5705-M31.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
.::. =-= :§':fE: ISG
Mar83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
DATA COLLECTION SYSTEM SUPPORT FOR SYSTEM/3
5705-M31
PURPOSE
The IBM 5230 Data Collection System Support for System/3 program
product provides the manufacturer with a convenient, practical means
of preparing shop floor data for processing by a user-provided
management accounting system. Data collected by the IBM 5230 Data
Collection System is edited, consolidated, and formatted on the
System/3 for such applications as payroll accounting, inventory
management, and production control. By the customer making simple
changes in the output formats of both program products, IBM 5230
Data Collections System Support for System/3 can provide input to
and use turnaround documents from the System/3 Shop Loading and
Control program product (5702-M51).
DESCRIPTION
The 5230 Data Collection System. Support for System/3 program
product provides two phases of operations: A 5230 personalization
phase and a data conversion phase.
The 5230 personalization phase provides a menu of actions from which
the user selects those that best fit the operation. Using the menu
selections and loop definitions for up to three 5231 controllers with up
to four loop each, this phase creates the personalization records
required to personalize the 5230 Data Collection System.
The data conversion phase prepares the data received from the 5230
Data Collection System for processing by the user-provided applications. The data can be accepted through the data communications
facilities, the 96-column cards, the 80-column cards, or the diskette
offered as output options by the 5230 Data Collection System. (Input
from 80-column cards or diskette requires minor changes to source).
Both material transactions and labor transactions are prepared by the
program product. The material transactions are edited, listed, formatted
and stored for later processing by the user-provided inventory
management and production control applications. Labor transactions
are expanded, edited, checked for accuracy and adjusted for break and
lunch times and lunch and shift start-stop time variances. Time and
attendance totals are checked against job time totals with warning
messages printed for differences that exceed user-prescribed limits.
The elapsed time for time and attendance and job time is calculated.
Job time applied to overlapping jobs is apportioned to the jobs. A
correction procedure is included to allow for changing incorrect labor
records. The results of the labor transaction processing are stored for
later processing by the user-provided payroll and production control
applications.
Reports are printed, at the user's option, for material transactions and
for labor transactions. The material transactions report is a single
listing. Labor transactions reports provide labor-related information
suitable for management review and checking by foremen for
correctness.
A Program Reference Manual provides installation and planning
information such as input and output formats, a description of the
processing, control and audit information, and a discussion of the
sample problem.
An Operations Guide specifies the procedures that must be followed to
make any necessary modifications, to compile and include the program
in the system library, and to prepare data for the program. A discussion
of operating procedures and messages is also included.
HIGHLIGHTS
Provides needed input to user-provided applications
- Elapsed time calculation for payroll
- Material receipt and issue data for inventory management
- Job elapsed time and location data for production control
Management reports generated as a byproduct of data entry
- Jobs started checked against time and attendance record
- Transaction records checked for complete and accurate entry
Provides for automatic generation of machine-readable data
- Uses punched-card turnaround documents from user-supplied
applications
- Reduces transcription errors
- Eliminates timekeeper calculation of elapsed time
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM will provide assistance in many areas pertaining to the installation
of IBM program products. However, the responsibility for providing
accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training,
installation, and continued day to day operation lies solely with the
customer. Activities, within these areas of customer responsibility, are
defined to include, but not be limited to, the following:
Personnel selection and training ... the customer is responsible for
selectinp at least one person who will be responsible for supervising the
installation and at least one person to assume the duties of an operator.
The customer is also responsible for the coordination and education of
the various user departments affected by the installation.
Installation ... the customer is responsible for installation of the product.
Installation activities include:
Establishing an installation plan and schedule consistent with the
requirements and availability of customer personnel
Entering control data and compiling the program
Copying the delivered disk cartridges for backup purposes
Creation of the badge file and verification of the data
Modification of existing programs to interface to the program
product
Day-to-day system operation ... the customer is responsible for the day
to day operation of the system and the results derived from its
operation. The customer is also responsible for maintaining controls
and audit trails consistent with good business practices and for the
security and safekeeping of all machine-readable material and
documents which are related to, and/or resulting from, the operation of
the system.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM 5230 Data Collection System Support will execute on any
model of the System/3 meeting the following minimum configuration:
System/3 Model 8
IBM 5408 with 16K of primary storage
IBM 3741 Data Station directly attached
IBM 5444 model A 1 Disk Storage Drive
IBM 5203 Printer with 132 print positions and PN or GN print
character arrangement
System/3 Model 10
IBM 5410 with 16K of primary storage
IBM 5444 model 1 or A 1 Disk Storage Drive
IBM 5424 Multifunction Card Unit
IBM 5203 Printer with 132 print positions and PN or GN print
character arrangement
System/3 Model 12
IBM 5412 with 32K of primary storage
IBM 3340 model C2 Direct Access Storage Facility
IBM 5424 Multifunction Card Unit or IBM 3741 Data Station
directly attached
IBM 5203 Printer with 132 print positions and PN or GN print
character arrangement
System/3 Model 15
IBM 5415 with 48K of primary storage
IBM 5444 model A2 Disk Storage drive
IBM 5424 Multifunction Card Unit or IBM 3741 Data Station
directly attached
IBM 3277 Systems Console
IBM 5421 Printer Control Unit
IBM 1403 Printer with 132 print positions and PN or GN print
character arrangement
If the data communications features of 5230 Data Collection System
Support for the System/3 are to be used, tho Binary Synchronous
Communications Adapter, the Local Communications Adapter, or the
Integrated Communications Adapter must be added to the minimum
configuration. The processing unit must contain the appropriate
expansion and attachments features if required.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM 5230 System Support for System/3 is written in RPG.Ii'
programming language and executes under control of the System/3
System Control Program. The System/3 Disk Sort program is also,.
required for execution of the program. The System/3 RPG " compiler):'
is required for tailoring and compiling the Data Collection System
Support for System/3. The program numbers applicable to the
different system models are given below.
For System/3 Models 8 and 10
System Control Program
Disk Sort Program
RPG" Compiler
5702-SC1
'5702-SM1
5702-RG,Jl
If data communications is ,used, the RPG " C0rllpiler.must have
,
either feature #6000 or feature #6002 installeq:,i
For System/3 Model',12
System Contro!, Program
.Disk Sort ProgrClrTl
RPG "Compiler
5705-:SC1
5705-SM1
5705-RG1
------- -----
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - - :§'f§: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
Data Collection System Support for System/3 (cont'd)
For System/3 Model 15
System Control Program
Disk Sort Program
RPG II Compiler
5704-SC1
5704-SM1
5704-RG1
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM 5230 Data Collection System Support for System/3 General
Information Manual (GH30-0204) ... Facts Flyer (G580-0073) ... Data
Collection Application Workbook (GH20-0203) ... Executive Guide
(G580-0072) ... IBM 5230 Data Collection User's Guide (GA34-0040).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5705-M31.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------------.=.===~=
- ---ISG
PP 5705-RG1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 RPG II
5705-RG1
PURPOSE
IBM Systom/3 model 12 RPG II is a program product that operates
under control of the System/3 model 12 System Control Programming.
RPG II is disk resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access
Storage Facility (DASF). It requires as input an RPG II source language
program and produces as output a System/3 model 12 machine
language object program, either cataloged in an object library or
punched into 80- or 96-column cards, or written onto a diskette. A
source program listing, diagnostic messages, and a main storage map
can be requested.
To use the RPG II compiler, the user supplies information about the job
to be processed. The job can be described on specification sheets prior
to entering the source statements into the system. The specification
sheets are: Auto Report, Control Card and File Description, Extension
and Line Counter, Telecommunications, Input, Calculation and
Output- Format.
Source Input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card
reader, 3741 directly attached, or 5471 keyboard) or from a source
library. Work files for the compiler are on a simulation area of a 3340
data module.
In addition to the functions provided by System/3 model 10 Disk RPG
II, model 12 RPG II provides the following capabilities:
Support of 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility.
Included as standard functions of the model 12 RPG II, the
following support that is available as separately priced features in
model 6 and/or 10 RPG II: Telecommunications, Auto Report, and
Magnetic Tape support.
Disk File Support: The access methods supported for the 3340 are the
same as those supported by System/3 model 10 Disk RPG II and are as
follows:
Sequential
Consecutive Processing - including updating in place.
Random Processing - by relative record number including updating
but excluding file loading.
Indexed (main data area only)
Random processing - by key.
Sequential processing - by key including file loading.
Direct
Random Processing - by relative record number, including updating
and file loading.
Consecutive Processing.
Card I/O Support: RPG II supports the MFCU and 1442 as follows:
Read
Punch
Card Print
Stacker Select
Combined File
Character set
(EBCDIC)
MFCU
1442
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
64
256
Diskette Support: A directly-attached 3741 is supported as a unit record
input/output device for RPG II object programs.
Model 12 RPG II Device Support
Compilation
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility,
model C2
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit,
models 1, 2 or 3
5203 Printer, model 1, 2 or 3
1403 Printer, model 2,5, or N1
5424 MFCU, model A1 or A2
1442 Card Read Punch, model 6 or 7
5471 Printer-Keyboard, model 1
1255 MCR, model 1, 2 or 3
3881 OMR, model 1
3741 Data Station/Programmable
Workstation model 1, 2, 3 or 4
(directly attached)
BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, ICA, or
Local Display Adapter
Main Stora~e Requirements (Program
Level Size
Execution
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes··
Yes··
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
8-56K·
8-56K·
• The maximum program levol is 64K less supervisor requirements.
•• Requires SCP subroutine; RPG II SPECIAL exit is used.
Auto Report: Model 12 RPG II Auto Report is functionally identical to the
S/3 model 10 Disk RPG II Auto Report feature. Auto Report enhances
the RPG II language by providing functions which eliminate much of the
preparation and coding work normally done by the user. It is specifically designed to facilitate report preparation.
Auto Report executes as a preprocessor to the RPG II Compiler. The
input is RPG II source statements and Auto Report statements. Auto
Report produces a diagnostic listing, replaces the Auto Report
statements with generated or copied RPG II source statements and
calls the RPG II Compiler for execution.
Record size can range from 1 to 9,999 bytes, and records can be
processed as blocked or unblocked. Logical records may span physical
disk sectors, tracks or cylinders.
Telecommunications Support: Support of the Binary Synchronous
Communications Adapter (BSCA), and the Integrated Communications
Adapter (lCA) is achieved through use of the RPG II Telecommunications Specifications Sheet and the addition of BSCA as a device entry
on the RPG II File Description Specification. The support is identical to
that provided by System/3 model 6 and 10 RPG II Telecommunications
features, and includes:
Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411
Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by
System/3 model 10 Disk RPG II. RPG II object programs can process
data or record address files on magnetic tape. Highlights of tape
support include:
Communication modes: Receive only... Receive with conversational
reply· ... Transmit only... Transmit with conversational reply· .,.
Alternate transmit and receive file. (·Not supported in communication
with System 32, System/34, 2770, 2780, 3741-2, and 3741-4 or a
5110 Computer System supported as a 3741 model 2 or 4.)
Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory for all disk files.
Non-standard labels cannot be used (except as data records within the
file).
Consecutive input or output files
1 -4 tape drives
Fixed length records, blocked or unblocked
Variable length records, blocked or unblocked
Record size from 18 to 9,999 bytes
Block size from 18 to 9,999 bytes
IBM Standard Labels, ANSI Labels, no labels
Option for two I/O areas
9-track, 800/1600 bpi
7-track, 200/556/800 bpi
Single volume or multi-volume files
Recording format: EBCDIC (7-or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only)
Program options to Rewind or Rewind/Unload at end of job
Printer Support: RPG II supports the 5203 and 1403 Printer as follows:
Space 0, 1, 2 or 3 before or after printing a line; skip to line number
before or after printing a line; overflow detection; first page forms
alignment. The 5203 dual feed carriage is supported.
Communication with the 5231 model 2 is in Receive mode only. The
5231 model 2 is supported as a 3741 model 2 or 4.
RPG II language features supported: Input, Output, and Combined files ...
Demand files for Transmit and Receive ... Blocking and deblocking of
records ... Dual I/O areas.
BSCA and ICA features, options and capabilities supported: Manual Call ...
Manual answer ... Auto-call (BSCA only) .,. Auto-Answer ... Medium
speed ... High speed (BSCA only) ... Station selection ... EBCDIC data
transparency ... intermediate block checking '" EBCDIC or ASCII data
and data link control characters. File translation of ASCII data can be
accomplished by proper use of the file translation facility of RPG II.
For additional information, see the description. of the mo~e!' 10 Disk
RPG II Telecommunications feature (5702-RG~i feature #6000/#6002).
COMPATI~IL.~Tv
.
System/3 model 12 RPG II is,sourc~I~~guage 'co'iilpatible with the
System/3 model 10 Disk RPGII (5702-RG1) and System/3 model 6
RPG II (5703- RG 1) except'Jor differences due to different hardware. A
System/3 model 6 or 10" Disk RPG II source program can be recompiled on System/3 model 1~, without:,~hanges to the sour~e, and
be executed under control of System/3 mddel12 SCP - assuming the
same I/O. (Note:. 5444 is equivalent to a 5444 simulation area on the
3340; indexed and. multi-volume ,files are supported in the main data
areas only; split cylin,der~iles are not supported; shared I/O areas are
not supported.) .
------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG
PP 5705-RG1.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGR~MJ~RODUCTS
System/3 Model 12 RPG II (cont'd)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: For source program compilation - An
IBM System/3 model 12 which includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit
model B16 (32K) .. , and an IBM 5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card
Read Punch or directly-attached IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable
Workstation ... and an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer ... and an IBM 3340
DASF.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5705-SC1.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Introduction to RPG /I (GC21-7514) ... System/3 RPG Reference
Manual (SC21-7504) ... System/3 RPG /I Auto Report General
Information (GC21-7563) ... System/3 PRG /I Auto Report Reference
Manual (SC21-5057) ... System/3 RPG " Telecommunications
Reference Manual (SC21-7507) ... System/3 RPG" Program Product
Specifications (GC21-5081) ... System/3 RPG " Additional Topics
Programmer's Guide (GC21-7577) ... System/3 RPG " Disk File
Processing Programmer's Guide (GC21-7566)
System/3
Bibliography (GC20-8080).
RPG II 3270 DISPLAY CONTROL FEATURE
Feature #6003/#6004
PURPOSE
The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature provides telecommunications
services for local or remote 3270 devices. The program is automatically
linked into the RPG II application program via the SPECIAL file exit
capability on the RPG II File Description Specification Sheet. Neither
the Assembler nor the RPG II Telecommunications feature is required.
DESCRIPTION
The following services are provided by the Display Control feature:
RPG II access to 3270 Display System Terminals attached via the
, Local Display Adapter, the Integrated Communications Adapter
(ICA), or the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA).
Automatic buffering and queuing of terminal data
A display formatting interface which permits the support of 3270
devices with coding in RPG II
Complete line control procedures are provided
Up to 18 terminals may be controlled (up to 12 can be attached via
the Local Display Adapter)
Provides the capability of coding one or more applications within
one program. No task switching is provided.
Two subroutines are provided. SUBR13 allows an RPG II program
to support 3270s without using CCP. SUBR14 provides upward
compatibility with CCp, requiring only program recompilation,
assuming the RPG II program meets the CCP requirements.
Terminals Supported: The following terminals and communications
facilities are supported under the RPG II 3270 Display Control feature:
With the Local Display Adapter
3277
3284
3286
3288
Display Station (model 1 or 2)
Printer (model 1 or 2)
Printer (model 1 or 2)
Printer (model 2)
~Note: A maximum of 12 terminals may be attached via the Local
,:7Display Adapter.
With the Integrated Communications Adapter (ICA) or the Binary
Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA).
3275 Display Station and Control, or
3271 Display Control Unit (model 1 or 2), with:
- 3271, Display Station (model 1 or 2)
- 3284!,Printer (model ,1 or 2)
- 3286 Printer (model 1 or 2)
- 3288 Printer (model 2) ,,\:' ',.
SPECIFI~D OPERATING,ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: The RPG 11.3270 Display Control feature
requires an IBM System/3 model 12whichincludes, as a minimum, an
IBM 5412 Processing Unif:model B16(32K bytes) ... an IBM 3340
model C2 DASF ... an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer ... an IBM 5424 MFCU
or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch:or a directly-attached 3741 Data
Station/Programmable Workstation ... a Local Display Adapter or an
Integrated Communications Adapter Or", a Binary Synchronous
Communications Adapter and one of the devices listed under
'"Terminals Supported".
Using SUBR13, approximately 10K-12K bytes are added to the size of
the object program. Using SUB14, approximately 4.3K bytes are added
to the size of the object program.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5705-SC1,5705-RG1.
COMPATIBILITY
The System/3 model 12 RPG II 3270 Display Control feature is
functionally compatible with the System/3 model 8/10 and System/3
model 15 RPG II 3270 Display Control feature.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM RPG 113270 Display Control Feature Reference and Logic Manual
(SC21-5161) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
Programming Service Classification: A.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- ----
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - - :§~E: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 DISK SORT
5705-SM1
PURPOSE
The IBM System/3 model 12 Disk Sort program is a program product
that sorts a file into ascending or descending sequence. The program is
resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
(DASF) and operates under control of the model 12 SCPo
DESCRIPTION
Input files - Multiple input files are supported - up to eight input files
from disk and/or tape. An input file can be resident on a 3340 DASF or
on a unit of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape subsystem. A disk file can
have sequential, indexed or direct organization. For a disk file, the input
record size can be from 1 to 9,999 bytes. A tape input file can have
fixed length records, either blocked or unblocked; variable length tape
records are not supported. The maximum input tape record or block
size is 9,999 bytes, and the minimum is 18 bytes. Input tape files can
be 9-track 800/1600 bpi or 7-track 200/556/800 bpi. The tape file
can be recorded in either EBCDIC or ASCII code. Input can be either a
single volume file or a multi-volume file.
Work file - A work file can be resident on a simulation area or main data
area of a 3340 DASF. Work space can be specified by the user or can
be automatically allocated by the program.
Output file - The output file can be resident on a 3340 DASF or on a unit
of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem. A disk output file can
have sequential organization only. Characteristics of tape output files
are the same as for tape input files, described above. The maximum
output record size for disk or tape is 4,096 bytes. Output of the
program will be one of three formats: Tag (ADDROUT), tag-along, or
summary tag-along.
Features
Records can be selected or omitted, and reformatted.
Specified records may be forced ahead of others.
An alternate collating sequence can be specified.
Control fields can be in different locations in the records.
The total length of the control fields can be from 1 to 256 bytes;
there is no other limit on the number of control fields.
Control fields can be sorted in ascending or descending sequence,
or mixed (some ascending and some descending),
Control fields can be sorted using only the digit or zone portion of
the character. The fields can be packed or unpacked decimal, or
character formats.
Records containing identical control fields can be combined by
summarizing specified fields into one record.
Use: Specifications are described on a simple, RPG-like coding sheet.
These specifications are entered into the system using the system input
device, or they can be stored in the source library on disk. Sort control
statement diagnostics and messages may be displayed on the system
logging device.
The program can be executed in a dual programming environment and
uses from 8K to 56K bytes of main storage, exclusive of SCP requirements.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: An IBM System/3 model 12 which
includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32Kl. and an IBM
5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch or a directly-attached
IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation, and an IBM 5203
or 1403 Printer and an IBM 3340 DASF.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5705-SC1. (See SCP pages.)
COMPATIBILITY
The model 12 Disk Sort program is source language compatible with
the Disk Sort programs for the System/3 models 6,8 and 10.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
System/3 Disk Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7522) ... System/3 Disk
Sort Program Product Specifications (GC21-5083) ... System/3
Bibliography (GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5705-SM1.1
Mar83
Major Revision
------- --------
Do not reproduce without written permission
==:: ~~E: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 MAGNETIC TAPE SORT
5705-SM2
PURPOSE
The IBM System/3 model 12 Magnetic Tape Sort program is a program
product that sorts a tape file into ascending or descending sequence. It
is resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access Storage
Facility (DASF) and operates under control of the model 12 SCPo A
configuration that includes three or four tape units is required. The
program is functionally identical to the System/3 model 10 Disk
Resident Magnetic Tape Sort program (5702-SM2).
Input files - The input file resides on any unit of the 3410/3411 Magnetic
Tape Subsystem. The input file can have fixed length records, either
blocked or unblocked. (Variable length records are not supported.) The
maximum input record or block size is 9,999 bytes. The minimum input
record or block size is 18 bytes. Input tape files can be 9-track
800/1600 bpi or 7-track 200/556/800 bpi. The file can be recorded in
either EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only) code. Input can
be either a single volume file or a multivolume file.
Work files - Three work tapes are required; a fourth can be utilized, if
available. Work tapes can be either 7- or 9-track (see restrictions
below). Work tapes must be single volume only (not multivolume).
Output file - The output file resides on any unit of the 3410/3411
Magnetic Tape Subsystem. Characteristics of tape output files are the
same as for tape input files, described above. Output is a file of records
containing the sort control fields and/or the data fields the user has
specified. (The tag rADDROUT] and .summary tag-along sort
capabilities of the Disk Sort are not supported in the Tape Sort.)
Restrictions: To utilize all of the functions of this program, at least three
9-track work tapes must be available. If one or more of the work tapes
is 7 -track, then only those sort functions that relate to the standard
System/3 64-character set (EBCDIC) are supported. As a result, sorts
of binary data, packed or unpacked decimal data or sorts on zones are
not allowed in these 7-track configurations.
Features
Records can be selected or omitted, and reformatted.
Specified records may be forced ahead of others
An alternate collating sequence can be specified.
A checkpoint/restart facility is supported.
Control fields can be in different locations in the records.
The total length of the control fiolds can be from 1 to 256 bytes;
there is no other limit on the number of control fields.
Control fields can be sortod using only the digit or zone portion of
the character. The fields can be packed or unpacked decimal, or
character formats.
Control fields can be sortod in ascending or descending sequence
or mixed (some ascending and some descending).
Use: Specifications are describod on a simple, RPG-like coding sheet.
These specifications are entorod into the system using the system input
device, or they can be stored in the source library on disk. Sort control
statement diagnostics and mossages may be displayed on the system
logging device. The program can be executed in a dual programming
environment and requires 8K to 55K bytes of main storage, exclusive of
SCP requirements.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: An IBM System/3 model 12 which
includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K), and an IBM
,5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch or a directly-attached
~.IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation, and an IBM 5203
or 1403 Printer, and an IBM 3340 DASF. At least three tape drives of
the IBM 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem are required.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5705-SC1,.t:.(Se~~CP
pages.)
COMPATIBILITY
The moden 2;...MagneticTape Sort program is functionally compatible
with tho Disk';.,~e.sident Magnetic Tape Sort program for System/3
model 8 and Sys\~rn/3 niodeIJO.,'
,
DOCUMENTATION
'(available from Mecha~icsburg)
System/3 Tape Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7572) ... System/3
Magnetic Tape Program Planning Manual (GC21-5040) ... System/3
Tape Sort Program Products Specificat.ic/ns (GC21-5138) ... System/3
Bibliography (GC20-8080). ':>
" ,'"
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5705-SM2.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- - - - --
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - - :§~§: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 DISK RESIDENT CARD UTILITIES
5705-UT1
PURPOSE
This IBM System/3 program product is resident in a simulation area on
the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility (DASF) and operates under
control of the model 12 SCPo The following programs are provided:
Sort/Collate, list, Reproduce/Interpret, and Gangpunch.
(The
following programs, included in the model 10 Utilities, 5701-UT1 and
5702-UT1, are not available for the model 12: Data Recording, Data
Verifying, and 80-96 Conversion program.)
DESCRIPTION
Functionally compatible with the model 10
Sort/ Collate program (see 5701- UT1). The model 12 program
supports the 5424 MFCU only.
Sort/Collate Program -
list Program - Functionally compatible with the model 10 96-column
List program (see 5701- UT1). The model 12 program supports input
from 5424 MFCU, 1442 Card Read Punch, or the directly-attached
3741.
Reproduce/Interpret Program - Functionally compatible with the model
10 Reproduce/lnterpret program (see 5701-UT1). The model 12
program supports the 5424 MFCU only.
Functionally compatible with the· model 10
Gangpunch program (see 5702-UT1). The model 12 program supports
the 5424 MFCU.
Gangpunch Program -
Use: Each program described above can be executed in an 8K program
level in a dual program environment.
SPECIFIED OPEATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: An IBM System/3 model 12 which
includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K), and an IBM
5203 or 1403 Printer, and an IBM 3340 DASF, and the device required
for the particular program described above (IBM 5424 MFCU, 1442
Card Read Punch, or a directly-attached IBM 3741 Data
Station / Programmable Workstation).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5705-SC1. (See SCP pages.)
COMPATIBILITY
The model 12 Disk Resident Card Utilities that have model 10
equivalents are functionally compatible to the modol 10 versions.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
System/3 Sort/Col/ate and Card Utilities Roforence Manual SC217529) ... System/3 Disk Resident Card Utilities Program Product
Specifications (GC21-7535) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5705-UT1.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3 UTILITY PROGRAM FOR
1255 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER
5705-UT2
PURPOSE
This utility program provides the System/3 model 12 user control of
document processing on the IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. It
provides a means of reading MICR encoded documents from the 1255,
accumulating document totals and amount field totals for each pocket,
and placing the data from the documents on output disk or tape and
printer files. The program is designed to fulfill the basic requirements
of the"ON-US" data capture run required for all Demand Deposit
Application Programming.
DESCRIPTION
The program reads fields from the documents as specified by the user
and then, based on decisions indicated by the user, it will stacker select
these documents into user-specified pockets. If requested, Modulus
10 or 11 checking will be performed. Then after each document has
been read and stacker selected, the utility will print user-specified fields
from that document. Fixed-length disk records will also be created and
placed on a disk file or a tape file (3410 or 3411 9-track only).
An additional facility provided by the program is the accumulation of
document totals and amount field totals and then printing these at end
of job. Subtotals may be printed at any time as indicated by the user
during program execution.
Use: The utility requires at least 10K bytes of main storage when disk
output is requested and 12K bytes of main storage when tape output is
requested (exclusive of SCP requirements). The program will operate in
a dual program environment.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: An IBM System/3 model 12 which
includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K) with a Serial
I/O Channel (#7081), and an IBM 5424 MFCU or a directly-attached
IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation, and an IBM 5203
or 1403 Printer, and an IBM 3340 DASF, and an IBM 1255 Magnetic
Character Reader, model 1, 2 or 3.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5705-SC1. (See SCP pages.)
COMPATIBILITY
The model 12 Utility Program for the 1255 MCR is functionally
compatible to the model 10 version.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
System/3 Models 10 and 12 Utility Programs for the 1255 MeR
Reference Manual (SC21-7521) ... System /3 1255 Utility Program
System/3 Bibliography
Product Specifications (GC21-5030).
(GC20-8080).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5705-UT2.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -------==:::
ISG
PP 5707-F01.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
:§~§:
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/7FORTRANIV
STAND-ALONE COMPILER and LIBRARY
5707-F01
PURPOSE
Provides high-level FORTRAN language support for the System/7 user
by offering the ease and speed of coding in the FORTRAN language.
The Compiler and Library program product is installed on the System/7
and executes as a component under the System/7 Program Preparation
Facilities, thereby significantly enhancing stand-alone program
preparation capability on the System /7.
The System/7 FORTRAN IV program product is designed to provide
users with convenient access to a powerful, easy-to-use higher-level
language with which they may write scientific, sensor-based and other
applications.
Minimum Hardware for execution under control of the 8·12K version of
DSS/1:
IBM System/7 (5010 mdl A, B, or E) with at least 12K words of
main storage
IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module (mdl 1 or 2), with or without cycle
steal feature
IBM 5028 Operator Station
With this configuration, only the 5028 can be used for I/O.
Service programs for 5707-AA1 are provided on a separate 8-channel
paper tape when #9056 is ordered.
DESCRIPTION
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Users will compile their programs with the System/7 FORTRAN IV
compiler. The System/7 Linkage Editor under the S/7 Program
Preparation Facilities will combine these programs with the FORTRAN
library routines, sensor-based routines, and lor other MSP /7 routines
to form an executable real-time application program. The FORTRAN
programs which are connected to an interrupt on a priority level via
MSP /7 facilities gain control whenever the appropriate device or
software interrupt occurs.
IBM System/7 FORTRAN IV runs under the control of the IBM
System/7 Program Preparation Facilities. The object modules
produced by FORTRAN must be link-edited and formatted prior to
execution in the IBM System/7. Both the stand-alone Macro
Assembler and the Macro Library/Relocatable are required for
preparing the real-time nucleus (in lieu of using DSS/7 for non-real
time applications) for those user applications utilizing sensor-based
subprograms.
The user also may utilize the batch DSS/7 nucleus provided as part of
the System/7 Program Preparation Facilities. Thus, users need not
build their own MSP /7 nucleus, thereby enhancing the installability and
usability of FORTRAN. In this environment the user is offered batch
compile-and-go facilities and sequential DP I/O device support for the
5028 Operator Station, 5022 Disk Storage Module, 129 Data Recorder
and the 7431 Serial Printer.
Thecompiler accepts source programs written in System/7 FORTRAN,
which is an extension of ANS Basic FO RTRAN, X3.10-1966 and
produces object modules that are acceptable to LlNK/7 for link-editing.
The System/7 FORTRAN IV compiler will also accept source programs
written in ANS Basic FORTRAN. The language level is similar with the
host FORTRAN program product.
COMPATIBILITY
Some of the features that FORTRAN offers include:
ANS Basic FORTRAN with major extension
Syntax checking mode, at substantial compile time savings
Optimization during compilation for time, space and execution
performance
Sequential Access Method support of the 5028 Operator Station,
5022 Disk Storage Module, 129 Data Recorder, 7431 Serial Printer
Direct support of the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter
through the Communications Access Method
Extensive library containing mathematical subprograms, implicitlycalled subprograms, service subprograms, and sensor-based
subroutines. New sensor-based subroutines havo been included
conforming to the Instrument Society of America Standard S61.1
providing such functions as:
- initiation, suspension and termination of user programs based
upon time parameters
- reading analog input points in random or sequential order
- setting and resetting digital output at specified times
- reading and writing input and output registers
- bit manipulation through logical shift complement and inclusive
and exclusive OR, AN 0 functions.
Compatibility with host FORTRAN IV Library and host FORTRAN IV
source and object code.
MSP /7 functions including sensor I/O available through CALL
statements
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Understand the application they wish to perform and provide the
appropriate hardware and software design
Install the System/7 Program Preparation Facilities
Utilize the batch DSS/7 (8-12K) nucleus or generate the supporting system nucleus for servicing sensor-based devices
Provide the required user-written programs and link-edit these
programs with the MSP /7 nucleus
Test the resulting object programs
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum Hardware for Compilation:
IBM System/7 (5010 mdl A, B, or E) with at least 12K words of
main storage
IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module (mdl 1 or 2), with or without cycle
steal feature
IBM 5028 Operator Station
Minimum Hardware for Execution: For stand-alone execution, the
minimum requirements are:
An IBM System/7 (5010 mdl A, B, or E) with at least 6K words of
main storage
IBM 5028 Operator Station
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Program Product Specifications: IBM System/7 FORTRAN IV
(System/7 Compiler and Library) (GC34-0034) ... An Introduction to
System/7 FORTRAN IV (GC28-6869).
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- -----:: - -:s~a: ISG
PP 5707-F12.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROG RAM PRODUCTS
TREND ANALYSIS/370 - (5740-F12)
Color Graphics Support Feature (5707-F12)
DESCRIPTION
Trend Analysis/370 is an easy-to-use, interactive, IMS/VS-based
computer application designed to allow presentation of time series data
in tabular report form on a 3270 Information Display System. Using the
System/7 Color Graphics Support Feature, presentation can be done
graphically on a color television monitor. Time series numerical data,
either from an organization's internal systems or from the external
environment, can be formatted and stored for use by the system.
Information stored for use by Trend Analysis/370 is logically organized
by time period (daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semi-annually and
annually), by organization (such as companies, divisions, departments,
subsidiaries, competitors or part numbers) and by data element (such as
assets, expenses, net/gross sales or unit price). It is the customer's
responsibility to provide the source information, either by writing a
simple format conversion program for machine-readable information, or
by entering it manually through online data entry terminal facilities
provided by Trend Analysis/370.
The Trend Analysis/370 program provides a framework within which
time series information can be stored, retrieved, manipulated and
presented as required during the process of executive or management
decision-making. Users may customize their use of the system by
stipUlating, interactively, the information content and format of the
reports they are creating, or by pre-defining the reports.
In either case, they interact with the system through the use of 'menus'.
These are simply terminal displays (3277) of a list of options for users to
select from in creating their reports. For a pre-defined report, a single
menu suffices (i.e., 'give me standard' report number 6') while for an
interactively-created report, a series of menus would be required (i.e.,
to select from lists of available data, manipulation facilities, report
formats, time periods of interest, etc.). Data selection menus are
created by users themselves; report option menus are provided along
with the program.
Trend Analysis/370 also provides for the presentation of decisionsupporting information in whatever format the user decides is best
suited to the information to be displayed. For example, a report of
'today's closing balances' could be shown in tabular form on a terminal
display screen (and a printed copy may be requested). On the other
hand, using the System/7 Color Graphics Support Feature, an analysis
of the expenses incurred by six departments by month over the past 24
months could be displayed on a standard color television monitor as six
lines, each line in a different color against a black background, with
white axes and scales. In tabular form, this report might have required
several pages from which trends or patterns would be more difficult to
discover.
entry facility can be used to enter non-machine readable data values
and subsequently modify them.
• Design' menus to reflect the most logical sequencing of the source
data and the Trend Analysis/370 facilities that will be used.
For the Color Graphics Support Feature they include:
• The customer must purchase, install and maintain all data interfaces,
cabling and equipment not specifically provided and maintained by
IBM, in accordance with published System/7 Physical Planning
Specifications (see "System Requirements").
• The customer must write the System/7 code to interface with the
video display generator or submit a PRPQ to IBM for System/7
interface code for the selected device.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Trend Analysis/370 operates under IMS/VS Version 1 Release 1.0 or
later versions, using any version of OS/VSl or OS/VS2 which supports
IMS/VS. This requirement means that the minimum IBM S/370 which
can be used, (and also process other transactions) is a mdl 145 with
1,024K bytes of main storage. The product uses 173K in main storage
(real or virtual depending upon the customer's installation requirements)
and requires a 260K Message Processing Region (real or virtual). Each
of the, two batch support programs requires 256K in main storage. (real
or virtual).
The IBM 3270 Information Display System is used to communicate with
Trend Analysis/370 and can be attached locally or remotely.
The system and terminal requirements are the IMS/VS requirements
(please refer to the IMS/VS pages). However, Trend Analysis/370
requires the large (1,920 characters) Display Station such as the IBM
3277 mdl 2. A Printer such as the IBM 3286 mdl 2 is optional.
The Color Graphics Support Feature operates under the Disk Support
System/7 on an IBM System/7. It can operate in a local or a remote
environment. In a remote environment, the required IBM System/7
components are:
Feature
Type Code
Quantity
per
Machine
#1610
Asynchronous
Communication
Control
#2165
Common Carrier
Adapter
HIGHLIGHTS
Communication
Asynchronous 1200
Adapter
D08001
Digital I/O Module
5013
Digital Input
Control
#3284
• The Color Graphics Support Feature enables the compression of a
large tabular report (hundreds of numbers over several pages) into a
single color graphical display on a standard television monitor. Time
series data is particularly suited to analysis when viewed in graphical
form.
2
#3289
2
#3422
For Trend'Analysis/370 they include:
D08147
Common
Attachment
129/5496/7431
D08150
Data Recorder 129
Attachment
• Ident,ifythe Source of required information.
•
Assi~n'''uflique numbors to each organization and data element.
., Assign,upto:eight-character acronyms and up to twenty-character
descriptors to:'each data element and organization.
'~,
Load' the uriiq~e numbe'r~:': acr~nyms and descriptors into the
description database using a batch program supplied by Trend
,',c",
Analysis/370. .'
• Assign a general password, ,data' access, password and a data
modification pa~wordto limit access to this sequence of menus, to
limit the infor~~'tion 'that may b~.' seen by personnel holding the
general passw~, anp to limit,:data modification capability to only
";
authorized people!'
• Write, conversion': pr~ram~!o reforrnatexisting. machine-readable
data ,to :rneet forma~ rec{Ulrements'..of the Trend Analysis/370
interface program fof"the!'time series data base. The online data
.,'
'.'?~
~
"
Digital Output Medium
Power Group
Process Interrupt
#5710
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Digital Input
Group
Digital Output
Control
#3296
• An easy-to-use 'menu' approach permits users, with minimal
training, to customize the information content and format of a
desired report.
Description
Processor Module
mdl E28 Minimum
5010
Trend Analysis/370, then, is a major support tool for executive
management, providing for the storage, retrieval, manipulation and
presentation of time series information to assist and augment the
decision-making process.
• Trend Analysis/370 provides time series data in tabular report form
for comparison of mUltiple organizations and data elements at a
point in time, for comparing the performance of mUltiple organizations over time and for analysis of the performance of a single
organization over time.
RPQ
Reference
Number
5022
Disk Storage
Module
5026
Enclosure - 3 Position
Minimum
5028
5029
Operator Station
Feature Attachment to
System/7
#3283
2
Digital Input Voltage
Sense
#3410
3
Digital Output
Connector
------- ----:: - - :§~§:
Do not reproduce without written permission
ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
PP 5707-F12.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
Trend Analysis/370 (cont'd)
129
Card Data
Recorder
Expansion
Feature
#3610
I/O Attachment for
System/7
8T0065
For all machine types other than the IBM 5010, the model for that
machine type may be any that the customer desires. In a remote
environment, an IBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit, 2702 Transmission
Control, a 2703 Transmission Control, 3704 Communications Controller
in 2701/2702/2703 Emulation Mode, or 3705 Communications
Controller in 2701/2702/2703 Emulation Mode is required. Appropriate modems, such as the IBM 3872 Modem, are also required.
For a local attachment to a channel, the specifications for the IBM
5013, 5022, 5026, 5028, 5029 and 129 remain the same as that for a
remote environment. The specifications for the IBM 5010 and a 2701
Data Adapter Unit are:
Feature
Type Code
RPQ
Reference
Number
Quantity
per
Machine
Description
Processor Module
mdl E28 Minimum
5010
Asynchronous
Communication
Control
#1610
Communication
Asynchronous
50KB Adapter
008000
Data Adapter
Unit
2701
Asynchronous
Communication
Adapter
858450
The following are not required but recommended to increase the
performance of the respective machine types:
Feature
Type Code
RPQ
Reference
Number
Quantity
per
Machine
5010 #2662
Cycle Steal
Basic
Disk Cycle Steal
5022 #2664
129
Description
Z04771
Skip/Read Double
SPD
Additionally, two Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) devices are
required:
Video Display Generator.
Red/Green/Blue (RGB) Television Monitor.
The video display generator is a device whose function is to provide a
30-times-per-second refresh (signal regeneration) to an RGB television
monitor or any other device which requires a similar signal regeneration.
The OEM RGB television monitor, to meet United States standards,
should have 525 scan lines of two interlaced fields, with a 30-timesper-second refresh rate. Of the 525 scan lines on the TV monitor, 480
are usable for display. With a display aperture ratio of four horizontal to
three vertical, 640 bits of information can be displayed on each of the
480 lines. The Color Graphics Support Feature is based upon this
coordinate display of 480 vertical elements by 640 horizontal elements.
The Color Graphics Support Feature has been testod with one of the
commercially available video display generators and two of the
commerically available television monitors.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM Trend Analysis/370 program product is written in Programming Language/l (PL/l) and operates under the control of the
Information Management System/Virtual Storage (lMS/VS) Version 1
Release 0 or later versions. The prerequisite program products aro:
Information Management System/VS
5740-XX2
IMS/VS Data Communication Feature
5740-XX2
PL/l OS Resident Library
5734-LM4
PL/l OS Transient Library
5734-LM5
If user exit code is written, then the PL/1 OS Optimizing Compiler
(5734-PLl) is required.
The Color Graphics Support Feature is written in MSP /7 and operates
under the control of the Disk Support System/7 (5707-AG1) and
should only be used in conjunction with the Trend Analysis/370
program product (5740- F12). The program logic manual for the feature
contains the interface specifications and guidelines necessary to
program the System/7 to utilize a video display generator. It is
recommended that the System/7 Host PreJlaration Program Facility for
OS/VS (5744-AF1) be used on the S/370 to compile the code.
Alternatively, the S/7 Program Preparation Facilities (5707-AA1) can be
used to do the compilations on the System/7.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Design Objectives ... Promotional Brochure (G520-3064)... Slide Set
(GV20-0610) .. , General Information Manual
RPQs ACCEPTED: Yes
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- ----.=.---=-= ::5~5: ISG
PP 5707·M33.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURING MONITORING SYSTEM VERSION 2
5707·M33 (OS/VS)
5707·M34 (DOS/VS)
PURPOSE
The IBM Manufacturing Monitoring System (abbreviated to MMS) is a
program product designed for realtime monitoring of plant floor
activities and resources.
DESCRIPTION
MMS S/370 Data Feature is written in IBM OS/VS and DOS/VS
Assembler language and operates on a host IBM S/370 Virtual Storage
system under control of the IBM Operating System (OS/VS1 or
OS/VS2) or the IBM Disk Operating System (DOS/VS). For data
access and data management it uses QSAM, BSAM, BDAM, and
BTAM (under OS/VS) or SAM, DAM; and BTAM (under DOS/VS).
MMS consists of a base program, the Basic System/7 Code, which
resides in a System/7, and a feature, the S/370 Data Feature, which
resides in a S/370 and is required for MMS data set generation and
teleprocessing capabilities. The System/7 communicates with the
plant floor via 2790 terminals operated by plant personnel. Userprovided sensors, attached to System/7 digital input and output points,
sense status and production count of machines (optional).
Generation of the Basic System/7 code and compilation and execution
of the S/370 Data Feature can also be performed on a S/370 operating
under OS/VS1, OS/VS2 or DOS/VS running under the control of
VM/370.
MMS accepts, edits, and processes transactions entered by workers,
foremen, dispatchers, stock-keepers, and other personnel who report
via terminal on setup, operation start and completion, interruptions,
delivery to stock, and so on.
For execution of the MMS Basic System/7 Code, the minimum
machine requirements are as follows:
Signals received from machine sensors - indicating machine status,
failure conditions, and quantities produced - are used to calculate
utilization data, report failure conditions, monitor idle times, and check
consistency of machine status against job status reported via terminal.
1
Based on this data, MMS monitors the execution of shop orders, their
correct sequence, and timely completion, and the utilization of
machines. It also calls for immediate action whenever exceptional
conditions are detected. The data collected on System/7 disk files can
be transmitted periodically, for additional evaluation, to a S/370 via
binary synchronous or asynchronous communication linkages, using the
MMS S/370 Data Feature, or to an IBM System/3 via physical disk
transfer. When using the binary synchronous communication linkage
(BSC), MMS data logging and sensor input processing can be
performed in parallel with the transmission of System/7 disk file data to
a S/370 host. This function is important for plants with 3-shift
operations.
HIGHLIGHTS
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM System /7 with:
IBM 5010 A16 or E16 Processor Module with 16,384 words of
storage (for MMS with machine monitoring function but without
BSCA) or
IBM 5010 E20 Processor Module with 20,480 words of storage (for
MMS without machine monitoring function but with BSCA) or
IBM 5010 E20 Processor Module with 20,480 words of storage (for
MMS with machine monitoring function and BSCA).
Users of the MMS Version 1 who change to Version 2 will experience a
storage increase of approximately 1 K words due to increased storage
requirements of MSP/7 Release 7 even if no functional extensions are
installed.
Data transmission between IBM System/7 and an IBM S/370 host can
be performed either by the
MMS assists the user in the following functions:
Collection of plant activity data, such as reporting on job status and
machine status changes, work and operator assignments, maintenance.
IBM 5010 A14 Processor Module with 14,336 words of storage (for
MMS without machine monitoring function and without Binary
Synchronous Communications Control - BSCA) or
Binary Synchronous Communications Control (#2074) with 1,200 to
40,800 bps.
or the
Machine monitoring, by sensing machine status, failure conditions,
and quantities produced.
Asynchronous Communications Control (#1610) with 600 bits/sec.
Realtime information, on workstations, job queues, shop orders,
and machine operators.
IBM 5013 A01 Digital I/O Module
Plant communication, with message generation and distribution
according to order progress and exceptional conditions detected.
Feedback for planning and accounting, e.g., for scheduling
systems, cost and payroll accounting, quality assurance, material
planning.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBiliTIES
IBM 5012 A01 Multifunction Module, or
One or more digital input (01) and output (DO) groups are required if the
user installs direct machine monitoring and/or digital output-driven
devices, such as lamp indicator boxes. The number of 01 and DO
groups depends on the hardware attached and the addressing
technique applied.
1
To tailor MMS according to the user's environment, the customer must
provide specifications and parameters that describe the plant environment and select the MMS functions required.
If users install sensor hardware for machine monitoring and piece
counting, a user-written System/7 interface program is required to
connect the particular hardware equipment to MMS. An MMS sample
problem will be provided as a guide for the user programming effort.
i,,:Prerequisite to successful implementation of MMS is an intensive
education of the plant personnel operating torminals and using M MS
functions.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
MMS Basic System/7 Code is written in IBM System/7 Assembler
language, >' . .
'
The IBM System17 "MSP/7 Host Program Preparation Facilities II,
Release (ASM/7,'UNK/7, FORMAT /7, MACLIB/R: Group Order
Numbor 5744~~F1:for OS/VS, 5747-AF1 for DOS/VS) are required to
generate the MMS System/7. ,
';' ';~~~'~~,
,(
,
~
System generatioo, must be performed on an IBM S/370 processor
operating under control of the IBM ,Operating System (OS/VS or
OS/VS2) or the IBM Disk Operating System' (DOS/VS).
The MMS System/7 batch' pr~grams use the direct-access method of
MSP/7 Symbolic File Sup~ortfor access to disk'data sets. The MMS
System/7 realtime programs L!~e the Basic Access Support for disk file
,,""iP;
access.
For initialization of System/7 disks, for definition and deletion of data
sets, and for program loading onto System /7 disk, the MSP /7 Disk
Support System (5707-SC2 or 5707-AGHis., re,guired.
IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module mdl 1 or 2, with one removable
disk recommended for fast exchange of full disks. Up to three IBM
5022 modules can be supported with or without Cycle Steal
features (#2662, #2664).
IBM 5026 C03 Enclosure or up with Storage Power Addition
(#7401).
IBM 5028001 Operator Station.
IBM 2790 Data Communication System with:
1
IBM 2791 and/or 2793 Area Station.
The following devices can be attached to area stations:
IBM 2796/2797 Data Entry Unit,
IBM 1053 Remote Printer, and
IBM 1035 Badge Reader.
The number and type of devices depend on the user's plant organization, transaction load, and plant layout.
Refer to the System/7 and IBM 2790 documentation for restrictions
regarding the number of terminals attachable to the 2790 loop of
System/7.
Additional input/output devices, such as the IBM 129 Card Data
Recorder and tho IBM 7431 Serial Printer, can be supported by MMS if
appropriate usor'supplied interface programs are attached to MMS user
exits.
For generation of the MMS Basic System/7 Code, and for compilation
and execution of the S/370 Data Feature, the minimum machine
requirements are as follows (in addition to those stated above):
An IBM S/370 Central Processing Unit supported by OS/VS1,
OS/VS2, or DOS/VS. Address space requirements for the virtual
region or partition are as follows:
------- ---:: - - :5~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
MMS V2 (cont'd)
For generation of the Basic System /7 Code:
128K bytes for the System/7 Host Macro Assembler, ASM/7.
For compilation of the S/370 Data Feature:
256K bytes for the OS/VS Assembler
128K bytes for the DOS/VS Assembler
For execution of the S/370 Data Feature:
48K bytes for data set generation and for data transmission.
Any IBM Direct-Access Storage Facility supported by the operating
system, Assembler, and access methods used.
If the IBM System/7 is to be connected to the host system via a
teleprocessing linkage, an IBM 2701 Data Adapter or equivalent
transmission control unit and PIT (Post - Telephone - Telegraph:
common carrier) or IBM modems are required.
MMS system generation can also be performed at an IBM Center.
Licensing 5707-M33, MMSwith OS/VS Host System: MMS
consists of System/7 code required for plant monitoring and communication and of S/370 code required for MMS data set generation and
teleprocessing capabilities.
The basic System/7 code offered as MMS Basic Material is assembled
on ~,host S/370,and used on a System/7.
The S/370 code offered as MMS S/370 Data Feature is assembled,
and used on a S/370.
The Basic Material (System/7 code) and the S/370 Data Feature
(S/370 code) each must be licensed on a designated central processing
unit (Designated CPU).
The Basic Material must be licensed on a System/7. The S/370 Data
Feature must be licensed on a S/370.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5707-M33.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -------.:. =-= ~~§: ISG
PP 5707-XN3.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/7 PROCESS CONTROL PROGRAM (PCP /7)
5707-XN3 (using HPPF-II/0S Systems)
5707-XN4 (using HPPF-II/DOS Systems)
5707-XN5 (using System/7 Program Preparation)
PURPOSE
System/7 Process Control Program (PCP/7) is designed to provide
process monitoring, supervisory control, and direct digital control of
continuous industrial processes. The program executes in a System/7
and is prepared on a S/360 or S/370 using the MSP/7 Host Program
Preparation Facility-II (HPPF-II) or on a System/7 using the System/7
Program Preparation Facilities (System/7 PPF). Process operator
communication with the program is supported through the RPQ 7414
Interactive Console or 5028 Operator Station used as a Process
Operator Console (PaC) attached to the System/7. In addition, support
is provided for communications to a S/360, S/370, 1800, or 1130
System operating with the appropriate Distributed System Program
(DSP).
The program is tailored to specific monitoring or control applications by
means of user-specified information, which is stored in tabular form in
the program. All of the information required to describe each process
variable is specified in this table along with the program steps which
must be executed to achieve the required control action. The table
(Process Variable Record [PVR] Table) is scanned on a periodic basis
and each variable is then processed in accordance with the information
in the table. The table is generated by specifying the pertinent
parameters of each process variable through a fill-in-the-blanks
procedure. The parameters specified include the symbolic variable
name, such as T100 to FOO5; type of measurement, analog or digital;
range and units of measurement; and frequency of processing.
In addition, the macro permits the user to specify digital control
processing steps for a variable and also the parameters for each step.
Control processing options include:
Two types of Digital Filtering
Control algorithm selection
Limits and limit violation action
Selection of output type and disposition
HIGHLIGHTS
Measurement Processing - Scanning of process variables,
measurement conditioning, limit checking, and alarm annunciation.
Measured variables are converted to engineering units for display
and calculation.
Direct Digital Control Procosslng - Several control algorithm
options, includinQ a five-mode controller and a ratio controller. The
five-mode algOrithm provides standard three-term (proportional,
integral, derivative) control with two additional non-linear modes.
The absolute form of the al~orithm is used to produce absolute or
incremental output on an individual PVR basis.
Supervisory Control - PCP /7 solves a difference equation that
computes the appropriate change in the target of a controlled
variable based both on the deviation of the current value of a
primary variable from its target and on the changes in other related
variables. The change to the target of the controlled variable can
be staged over a period of time.
Setpoint Adjustment - The ability to adjust the setpoint of an
external analog controller.
Operator Communication - Support for up to two RPQ 7414
Interactive Consoles or one 5028 Operator Station when used as a
Process Operator Console (PaC). Two console-selectable modes
of information access are provided. In the operator mode, the
process operator is restricted to accessing only that information
with which he must be concerned. In the engineer mode, nearly
unlimited information access is possible.
Error Analysis and Control - The ability to detect and take control
,on system errors. If the System/7 configuration includes the
optional 5022 disk, the PCP /7 program and data can be stored on
, disk and used for restart purposes.
~. M~i*iple
UtilitiJJS - The ability to load and dump System/7
.r:', proc'E$S data, in the form of the PVR table via the 5028 Operator
~' Statio[l.
"
.,
p·~ce~s.:'O'tapreparation - Users specify tho characteristics of
the.,k Jlro~e$sdata to, the system through fill~in-the-blanks forms.
ApG/7, If :fnstalled. on the host preparation system, not only
pr.ovides forms.~tor specifying' process data, but also for specifying
system charac~eristics~
i~stall
. ';CUST.OMER RESPONSIBILITIES
si~;~mJ:Z'
To
PCP/7 i a
the user must perform the following:
• . Define the Applicaifon.,'::Users must first determine the scope of
the applicatiolT and tile control strategy to be useCl.~'~lso, they must
identify' . instru~entation and cabling, including' sensors and
computer output stations.: that will interface the process with the
System/7.
c,
."
Determine System/7 Configuration - The computer system
equipment necessary to satisfy the application scope must be
identified.
Specify PCP/7 System Generation Options - Depending on the
specific System/7 configuration and scope of application, PCP /7
will require different modules and / or will take different action
within the modules. Users tailor PCP /7 to meet the needs of their
specific application by a user-oriented specification procedure that
identifies the equipment they have and the program options they
require. This requires extensive knowledge of the application but
minimal knowledge of MSP /7 and programming.
Prepare Any User Additions - Any processing routines added to
PCP /7 must be prepared by the user. These routines may require
MSP /7 specification macros in addition to those generated by
PCP/7 as a result of the specification procedure. APG/7, if used,
includes a high-level procedural language facility for coding user
routines. PCP /7, in turn, provides an interface that allows APG /7
or System/7 FORTRAN IV to access and modify the PVR Table.
User routines that cO.mpete with PCP /7 for such System /7
resources as the disk and the host communication adapter, require
special consideration. In order to ensure maximum PCP /7
performance, users should be aware of the way in which PCP/7
uses these resources and organize their additions in the complementary manner. A good knowledge of programming and MSP /7
is required for any additions.
Generato PCP/7 Storage Load - This may be done using either
the MSP/7 Host Program Preparation Facility II on any 5/37,0 that
meets the minimum machine requirements, or the System/7
Program Preparation Facilities on a System/7 that meets the
minimum machine requirements.
Generate Process Variable Record Table - The user generates
the PVR Table by using fill-in-the-blanks facilities to define each
measured or controlled variable. The table, once loaded into
System/7 storage, can be modified online using the pac in either
operator or engineer mode.
Load Storage Module and PVR Table - If PCP /7 is generated on
a S/370 host and the System/7 is not host-connected, both the
PCP /7 program and the PVR Table must be punched onto paper
tape and loaded to System /7 using the 5028 Operator Station. If
the System/7 is host-connected, the storage load and PVR Table
can be loaded directly from the host system. In the case of a host
1800 or 1130 System, the appropriate DSP or Disk Monitor facility
is used to load System/7 object code, generated on a S/360 or
S/370, to 1800 or 1130 disk storage. DSP is subsequently used to
transmit a storage load to the System /7.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The minimum IBM System/7 configuration for PCP/7 program
execution is:
One IBM 5010 Processor, mdl A14 or B14 (14K words of storage).
One 5012 Multifunction Module with sufficient sensor-based
features to measure the variables and output control signals.
One 5026 Enclosure
One 5028 Operator Station.
The 5012 Muitifunction ModLie provides the following:
As many as 32 analog input points
As many as 128 digital input points
As many as 64 digital output points
One or two analog output points
This system supports a useable group' of digital control functions,
including five-mode control of 50 process variables. (Storage
requirements increase by approximately 25 words for each control
variable added.) The complete sot of Input proceSSing, control
processing, and console functions, requlros additional storage.
Selection of certain user program options, disk support, or host
communication support (DSP) also incroases the storage requirement.
PCP/7 provides more user-selectable processing options than are likely
to be used in a sin~le process control system. The inclusion of the full
range of these options, within anyone application of PCP/7, together
with the disk support and host communication functions, would result in
a program exceeding 22K of System/7 storage. The detailed storage
requirements for system options are available in the appendix of the
IBM Process Control Program (PCP/7) Operations Guide.
The following components allow implementation of additional PCP /7
functions:
------- - - - ----= - - :§'=fE: ISG
PP 6707·XN3.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/7 PCP/7 (cant'd)
5014 Analog Input Module, which handles up to 128 analog inputs.
RPQ 7414 Interactive Consoles (without buffer of character set
expansion), each of which includes a TV monitor (black and white
display), alphameric keyboard (block style), function keyboard and
1053 Console Printer (optional). (7414 can be located up to 2,000
feet from the System/7).
Asynchronous Communications Control Attachment (ACCA) for
host communication (except for 1130 host).
1130 Host Attachment for 1130 host communication.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
General Information Manual (GH19-7007) ... Program Product
Specifications (GH19-7008). .., System/370 Distributed System
Program General Information Manual (GH20-1171) ... System/370
Distributed System Program - Program Reference Manual (GH209500)... 1130 Distributed System Program - Program Reference
Manual (GH20-1144) ... 1800 Distributed System Program - Program
Reference Manual (GH20-1143) ... Application Program Generator
General Information Manual (GH20-1162) ... Application Program
Generator Program Reference Manual (SH20-9502)
5022 Disk for checkpoint and restart.
RPQ Bipolar Analog Output in a 5012 Multifunction Module.
5013 Digital I/O Module which provides up to 128 digital input and
64 digital output points. (PCP/7 does not support RPQ's housed in
the 5013 Module). .
See IBM System/7 Functional Characteristics (GA34-0003) and IBM
7414 Model 1 Control Unit Custom Feature Description and Physical
Planning Information (GA27-2743) for details on these components.
The minimum configuration (S/360, S/370, or System/7) needed to
assemble, format, and link-edit PCP/7 is satisfied by the configuration
specified for MSP /7 Host Preparation Facilities II or System/7 Program
Preparation Facilities, except that PCP /7 under DOS and DOS/VS
requires an address space of 40K. The user requires enough direct
access storage to support three work files, an MSP/7 library, and a
PCP/7 library. 65 cylinders of 2314 space, or its equivalent will suffice.
For the minimum configuration specified for stand-alone System/7
program preparation, the MSP /7 Source Library Editor must be used to
minimize program listing requirements. The system configuration
requirements for both host and stand-alone program preparation are
specified in IBM System/7 Macro Assemblers (GC34-0018).
For use with the System/7 Program Preparation Facilities, an additional
5022 Disk Storage Module (mdl 1, 2, 3, or 4) is recommended if the
complete MSP /7, PCP /7, and FORTRAN IV Libraries are required to
remain online at all times for the user's stand-alone System/7. In this
case, the additional disk storage module will provide substantial
additional storage for user source and object modules and application
program data files.
Since support for the 129 Data Recorder and the 7431 Matrix Printer
, (see RPQ 008147) is included under the System/7 Program Preparation
Facilities, it is strong I)' recommended that these devices be used for
faster and easier PCP!7 preparation.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The modules that comprise PCP /7 are written using MSP /7 system
macros and ASM /7 Assembler Language instructions. PCP /7 can be
prepared on an IBM S/360 or an IBM S/370 using the MSP/7 Host
Program Preparation Facility II (HPPF II) operating under OS, OS/VS1,
OS/VS2, DOS, or DOS/VS, or on an IBM System/7 using the
System/7 Program Preparation Facilities (System/7 PPF). Users tailor
their PCP /7 system according to the IBM System/7 configuration and
the PCP
features desired by selecting the appropriate PCP /7
specification macro parameters. The application program preparation
facility uses this information to prepare an object module. This nucleus
module is then combined with other. PCP /7 object modules and
user-written modules in object form as input to LlNK/7, to produce a
link-edited load module. The load module will be processed by
FORMAT /7 or $UDFMT into final executable form.
n
Tho PCP/7 load module may be loaded intothe IBM System/7 using
tho facilities of DSS/7 if prepared using the System/7 PPF. If prepared
using HPPF-II, the module may be transmitted over a teleprocessing
lino 10 tho IBM System/7, or it may be punched into 8-track paper tape
for input through the operator station's paper tape reader.
IBM programs that can be used in support of PCP/7 are:
Host Program Preparation Facilities" (HPPF II)
OS
360A-TX-020,360A-TX-026
OS/VSl
5744-AF1
DOS
360A-TX-Ol0, 360A-TX-016
DOS/VS
5745-AF1
System/7 Program Preparation Facilities (S/7 PPF)
5707-AA1
System/7 FORTRAN IV
OS
5734-F04
DOS
5736-F01
S/7
PPF5707-FOl
System/7 Application Program Generator (APG/7)
as
5734-XC3
DOS
5736-XC3
Distributed System Program (DSP)
OS
360A-TX-032
1130
1130-SV-002
1800
1800-SV-003
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- -------=- =-= :§~§: ISG
PP 6707-XR1.1
Do not reproduce without writton permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM TRANSACTION GENERATOR SYSTEM (TGS/7)
5707·X~1 • Stand-Alone
5740-XR3· Host Preparation (OS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2)
PURPOSE
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
TGS/7 is a System/7 - 2790 program designed to increase the user's
efficiency and productivity. It provides pre-coded transaction
processing modules common to most data collection applications, and
will support the 2790. disk and teleprocessing facilities available to the
System/7. The data collection transaction modules provided include
input checking. basic calculations, disk processing. message processing. and inquiry processing.
For TGS/7 Stand-alone, the following program system is a prerequisite:
.
Users interface to TGS/7 through forms. The users fill in these forms
to specify the particular data collection modules they want to employ
and to provide parameters for tailoring them to their application
environment. The actual selecting and tailoring of these application
modules is performed by facilities provided by APG/7. a prerequisite to
TGS/7.
TGS/7 first edits the TGS/7 forms data for correctness. The APG/7
program generation facilities then select and tailor the specified
application modules and combine them with supervisory nucleus
modules to produce an entire application system of System/7
programs. For the last step. the generated programs are assembled.
linked. and formatted. and the object programs are ready for loading
and execution.
HIGHLIGHTS
TGS/7 can be a significant productivity aid in installing. supporting.
and modifying System/7 - 2790 data collection applications.
Stand-alone APG/7 - 5707-XCl
For TGS/7 Host Preparation (OS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2), the following
programming system is a prerequisite:
Application Program Generator (APG /7) - 5734- XC3
Refer to APG/7 and Stand-alone APG/7 in the program product pages
for subsequent prerequisite programming systems.
When using the System/7 BSCA feature to transmit to a remote
computing system. the remote system must use the following
teleprocessing access methods:
For System/370:
DOS /VS - BTAM
OS/VSl - BTAM or TCAM
OS/VS2 - BTAM or TCAM
For System/3:
System/3 MLMP
For System/7:
M5P /7 Communications Access Method
The TGS/7 application prototype file provides pre-coded and
tested data collection transaction processing modules.
When using the System/7 ACCA feature to transmit to a remote
system (5/360 or S/370 only) the remote system must use teleprocessing access methods as specified in the programming section (see
System/7 Macro Ubrary/Relocatable).
TGS/7 forms enable the users to select and tailor the particular
modules required for their specific data collection application.
(available from Mechanicsburg)
The user need not be an MSP /7 or APG /7 programmer to install a
System/7 - 2790 data collection system using TGS/7.
General Information Manual (GH20-9510) ... Program Product
Specifications (GH20-9530)
The User's Guide provides an easy to follow sequence of steps for
APG /7 and MSP /7 use.
TGS/7 edit facilities check the forms data for correctness and
guide the user in correcting form data errors when they occur.
APG/7 is a prerequisite to TGS/7 and provides program generation. compiler, and operating system facilities.
TGS/7 supports the APG/7 Statement of Direction in emphasizing
APG/7 as the major IBM application tool for the development and
installation of System/7 programs.
TGS/7 provides the user with a growth vehicle which is compatible
with APG/7.
Use: The users fill in TGS/7 forms to specify the particular TGS/7 data
collection processing modules they want to employ and to provide
parameters for tailoring them to their application environment. TGS/7
edits the forms data for correctness and. when errors occur. generates
messages to guide the users in correcting their forms input. The
APG /7 program generation facilities then select and tailor the specified
TGS/7 application procedures and combine them with supervisory
nucleus modules to produce an entire application system of System/7
programs.
When using the TGS /7 BSCA and ACCA support to transmit to a
remote computer system, receiving and processing transmitted data on
the remote system is the user's responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
An IBM 5010 processor with 20K words of storage ... one IBM 5022
Disk Storage Module mdl 1 or 2 ... IBM 5028 Operator Station ... one
IBM 5026 Enclosure mdl C3 ... one IBM 5013 Digital Input/Output
Module (with one 2790 Control #8195).
,
'",
Notes:j~
.• "
1.
For host preparation, an IBM S/370 is also required which will
support System/7 HPPF.and APG/7.
2.
For stand~alone preparation, an IBM 129 and 7431 are recommended for entering specification forms input data and for printing
,:
intermediate output listings.
3.
For generated program execution,' at least one IBM 2790 Control
feature and at least one 2790 data entry device are required.
4.
To determine 'overall device. feature. and storage requirements for
specific system configurations, see the IBM System/7 Transaction
Generator System (TGS/7) User's Guide (SH?0'i;,,9511).
5.
For the inclusion of online batch program preparation, add an
additional 12K words of storage for the batch partition and one
more 5022 Mdl 1 or 2 disk storage module. (Also. the 5026
Enclosure mdl C3 will have to be changed to a Mdl C6.)
'7fJ.:.:
DOCUMENTATION
Specification Forms Pad (50 forms per pad) as follows:
Configuration Definition (GX26-3702) ... Transaction Definition
(GX26-3703) ... Data Definition (GX26-3704) ... Procedures Control
(GX26-3705) ... Update Disk Files (GX26-3706) ... Output to All
Devices (GX26-3707).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
--- 1-======
ISG
< .::. : - : .
Do not reproduce without written permission
:§~§:
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280 ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE
5708-AS1
PURPOSE
The 5280 Assembler Language is a licensed program which provides a
symbolic programming language used to write programs for the 5280
system. This licensed program consists of an assembler and the 3740
ACL Conversion Aid program.
DESCRIPTION
Source programs written in Assembler language are processed into
5280 machine language. Input to the assembler is a source program
data set. If desired, this data set may be created by entering source
stfltements through a user-written DE/RPG or Assembler language
program. or the Key Entry Utility program [included in 5280 Utilities
(5708- UT1) ]. Output of the assembler is an object program written to
a diskette data set.
Some of the features provided by the 5280 Assembler Language are:
Mnemonic Operation Codes
S~mbolic
Referencing of Storage Addresses
Automatic Storage Assignment
Address Displacement Calculation
Symbolic Data Representation
Binary and Decimal Arithmetic
Operand Expressions
Source Program Listing
Cross- Reference Listing
Error Checking a~d Diagnostic Messages
3740 ACl Conversion ~id Prog/'am: Assists the user in converting existing
3740 ACL (Application Control Language) programs into 5280
Assembler language. The program will not convert CRDR, CROP, EXEC
A, COMM, IF CRD or CKPT instructions. Some converted instructions
may not function as on the 3740*.
* For details, see IBM 5280 Assembler Language Reference Manual
(SC21-7790).
Input to this program is a diskette data set with ACl source code.
Output is a data set containing 5280 Assembler Language source code.
Assembler source code requires the 5280 Assembler Language licensed
program for assembly.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
, Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: 5280 Assembler
: Language (570B-AS1) will be available to customers for pre-installation
testing on IBM Test Center Systems in accordance with IBM's Program
Testing Policy.
,;
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM 5280 Assembler will run on any IBM 5280 system which has,
as a minimum, either 2 diskotte 1 drives, or 1 diskette 20 drive. The
IBM 3740 ACL Conversion Aid Progrom will run on any IBM 5280
system. Minimum main storage partition size requirements are as
follows: for the 5280 Assembler - 9K; for the 3740 ACl Conversion Aid
Program - 16K.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
. The Assembler, Assembler object programs, and the IBM 3740 ACl
. Conversion Aid Program require the IBM 5280 System Control
Programming (5708-SC 1).
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM 5280 Assembler Language Licensed Program Specifications
(GC21-7801) .. , IBM 5280 Assembler Language Reference Manual
(SC21-7790) ... IBM 5280 Functions Reference Manual (GA21-9353).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5708-AS1.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------------==-:
--ISG
PP 5708-CB1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
:§~E:
Mar83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280 COBOL-OS/VS HOST COMPILER AND LIBRARY
5708-CB1
PURPOSE
5280 COBOL-OS/VS Host Compiler and Library is a licensed program
that compiles on a 5/370, 30XX or 4300 under VM/SP, OS/VS1 or
OS/VS2 (MVS). Output of the compiler is a 5280 machine-language
object program that will execute on a 5285, 5286 or 5288. This object
program may be copied to diskette (except for VM/SP) for transfer to a
5280 system or transmitted via communications directly to a 5280
system.
5280 COBOL provides customers with a powerful, comprehensive,
easy-to-use language for use in preparation and execution of
commercial application programs. The language offers a wide range of
commercial features, plus facilities for handling input and output,
structuring the source programs and debugging COBOL programs.
5280 COBOL allows the development of interactive applications by
supporting functions that enable users to accept data from and display
data on a 5280 keyboard/ display.
5280 COBOL is designed for an interactive commercial environment
where users can perform transaction processing applications such as
order entry, as well as applications that run in a background batch
environment.
HIGHLIGHTS
Language
Support of American National Standard (ANS) COBOL X3.231974.
Support of 1975 Federal Information Processing Standard for
COBOL.
Extensive User Options
-
Source listings
Cross-reference
Storage map of variables
Statement offset listing
Object listing
Object program record size of 80 or 128 bytes
Program Development and Productivity Aids
-
Symbolic debug
Flow trace
Extensive error checking
FIPS Flagger
Generalized CALL
A job-to-job facility
DESCRIPTION
I/O Capabilities
5280 COBOL programs can work with SEQUENTIAL, RELATIVE and
INDEXED I/O files.
The access methods supported are as follows:
Sequential Organization
- Sequential processing
Relative Organization
- Sequential processing
- Random processing by relative record number
Indexed Organization
- Sequential processing
- Random processing by record key using index file or in-memory
index The new COBOL Transaction I/O extension by IBM
provides a set of verbs and syntax for controlling a
keyboard/display. Users can write interactive programs which
allow an operator to perform functions such as entering data,
performing inquiries and updating files. The capability is
pr<;>vided for defining display formats and operator-entered
fields. Field editing functions, which are a subset of the DE/RPG
'functions, Bre also available. Formats are stored within members
of a partitioned data set and copied into the source program as
needed.
Table Handling
Define and process fixed lenoth tables of up to three dimensions.
Segmentation
The Segmentation feature permits:
Dividing the Procedure Division of a COBOL. program into a series
of segments. I:
. /"''0'4·.L'
Specifying ttlat;some segments (fixed segmen~~)must be resident
in main storage while the program is runriing, and cannot be
overlaid, while others (independent segments)' are loaded into an
overlay area when needed.
Reducing main storage requirements during program execution.
Interprogram Communication
This facility allows transferring of control from one COBOL program to
another within a partition. Programs can access the same data.
Data Communications
Data communications support for COBOL is via a CALL interface to the
5280 Communications Utilities licensed program (5708-DC1) access
methods.
Industry Standards
5280 COBOL is designed in accordance with the following industry
standards as understood and interpreted by IBM as of January 1980.
American National Standard (ANS) COBOL, X3.23-1974. ANS
COBOL is identical to ISO 1989-COBOL, approved February 1978
by the International Organization for Standardization. The following
processing modules are supported:
1 NUC 1.2
1 TBL 1,2
1 SEQ 1,2*
1 REL 0,2*
1 INX 0,2*
1 SEG 0,2
1 LIB 0,2
1 DEB 0,2
1 IPC 0,2
* RERUN clause is checked for syntactic
co~~ectness
only.
The first digit above represents the level of the modules included in the
compiler; the second digit represents the lowest level specified for
American National Standard COBOL (0 implies that the module may be
completely missing from a standard compiler); the third digit represents
the highest level specified in the Standard.
In addition to the above, the following Level 2 features are also
supported:
COMPUTE statement
Qualification
Arithmetic operators
Complex conditions
CORRESPONDING phrase
ACCEPT and DISPLAY verbs
Multiple operand support for arithmetic statements
Nested IFs
Nested REDEFINEs
PERFORM UNTIL
01 through 49 and 88 level numbers
LINAGE
START verb
December, 1975 Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS
Pub 21-1), Low-Intermediate Level. The RERUN clause is checked
for syntactic correctness only. Additional support is provided for
many features of higher FIPS levels.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation' and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Compilation: The IBM 5280 COBOL-OS/VS Host Compiler and Library
(5708-CB1) executes on an IBM 5/370, 30XX or 4300 with at least
192K bytes of virtual storage as well as a configuration sufficient to run
the selected operating system.
Object Program Execution: COBOL object programs will run on any IBM
5280 system with a minimum of 48K bytes of main storage capacity.
COBOL object programs require a minimum partition size of 16K bytes.
Actual partition size requirements are a function of the COBOL source
program. If data communications is used, a minimum of 64K bytes of
main storage capacity is required.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS'
IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1) is required. The
IBM 5280 Communications Utilities licensed program (5708-DC1) is
required when using data communications via COBOL and will require a
communications partition.
----- ----:: - - :S~E: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
-~-
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
6280 COBOL-OS/VS Host Compiler and Library (cont'd)
CONVERSION/COMPATIBILITY
A high degree of upward compatibility does exist between the 5280
COBOL compiler and the OS/VS COBOL Compiler and Library
(5740-CB1). However, differences do exist and some conversion will
be necessary. These differences include transaction I/O support and
communications support. Also, computational data will be incompatible
with System/370.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM 5280 COBOL-OS/VS Host Compiler and Library Licensed Program
Specifications (GL23-0033) ... IBM 5280 COBOL Language Reference
(GL23-0031) ... IBM 5280 COBOL Programmer's Guide (SL23-0032) ...
IBM 5280 COBOL Host Compilers Problem Determination Manual
(SL23-0043).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5708-CB1.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- ----:: - - :E'fE: ISG
PP 6708-CB2.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280 COBOL-DOS/VSE HOST COMPILER AND LIBRARY
6708-CB2
PURPOSE
5280 COBOL-DOS/VSE Host Compiler and Library is a licensed
program that compiles on a System/370, 30XX or 4300 under
DOS/VSE. Output of the compiler is a 5280 machine language object
program that will execute on a 5285, 5286 or 5288. This object
program may be copied to diskette for transfer to a 5280 system or
transmitted via communications directly to a 5280 system.
5280 COBOL provides customers with a powerful, comprehensive,
easy-to-use language for use in preparation and execution of
commercial application programs. The language offers a wide range of
commercial features, plus facilities for handling input and output,
structuring the source programs, and debugging COBOL programs.
5280 COBOL allows the development of interactive applications by
supporting functions that enable users to accept data from and display
data on a 5280 keyboard/display.
5280 COBOL is designed for an interactive commercial environment
where users can perform transaction processing applications such as
order entry, as well as applications that run in a background batch
environment.
HIGHLIGHTS
Language
- Support of American National Standard (ANS) COBOL X3.231974.
- Support of 1975 Federal Information Processing Standard for
COBOL.
Source listings
Cross-reference
Storage map of variables
Statement offset listing
Object listing
Object program record size of 80 or 128 bytes
Program Development and Productivity Aids
-
Symbolic debug
Flow trace
Extensive error checking
FIPS Flagger
Generalized CALL
A job-to-job facility
DESCRIPTION
I/O Capabilities
5280 COBOL programs can work with SEQUENTIAL, RELATIVE and
INDEXED I/O files.
The access methods supported are as follows:
Sequential Organization
- Sequential processing
Relative Organization
- Sequential processing
- Random processing by relative record number using index file or
in-memory index
Indexed Organization
- Sequential processing
- Random processing by record key using index file or in-memory
.
index
The COBOL Transaction I/O extension by IBM provides a set of verbs
and syntax for controlling a keyboard/display. Users can write
interactive programs which allow an operator to perform functions such
as entering data, performing inquiries, and updating files. The capability
is provided for defining display formats and operator-entered fields.
Field editing functions, which are a subset of the DE/RPG functions,
are also available. Formats are stored within books of the source
statement.Jibrary and are copied into the source program as needed.
Table Handling,
Define and process fixed length tables of up to three dimensions.
Segmentation
.
',: ~,#,~.
The Segmentation feature permits:.'
Dividing the Procedure Division of a' COBOL program into a series
of segments.,~
,:_ ' ,
~pecifying that some;segments (fixed:~egme~~) must be resident
main storage while the program IS fl.lnmrig,",and cannot be
overlaid, while others (independent. segments)fi are;' loaded into an
overlay area when needed.
In
This facility allows transferring of control from one COBOL program to
another within a partition. Programs can access the same data.
Data Communications
Data communications support for COBOL is via a CALL interface to the
5280 Communications Utilities licensed program (5708-DC1) access
methods.
Industry Standards
IBM 5280 COBOL is designed in accordance with the following industry
standards a s understood and interpreted by IBM as of January 1980.
American National Standard (ANS) COBOL, X3.23-1974. ANS
COBOL is identical to ISO 1989-COBOL approved February 1978
by the International Organization for Standardization. The following
processing modules are supported:
1 NUC 1,2
1 TBL 1,2
1 SEa 1,2*
1 REL 0,2*
1 INX 0,2*
1 SEG 0,2
1 LIB 0,2
1 DEB 0,2
11PC 0,2
* RERUN clause is checked for syntactic correctness only.
Extensive User Options
-
Reducing main storage requirements during program execution.
Interprogram Communication
The first digit above represents the level of the modules included in the
compiler; the second digit represents the lowest level specified for
American National Standard COBOL (0 implies that the module may be
completely missing from a standard compiler); the third digit represents
the highest level specified in the Standard.
In addition to the above, the following Level 2 features are also
supported:
COMPUTE statement
Qualification
Arithmetic operators
Complex conditions
CORRESPONDING phrase
ACCEPT and DISPLAY verbs
Multiple operand support for arithmetic statements
Nested IFs
Nested REDEFINEs
PERFORM UNTIL
01 through 49 and 88 level numbers
LINAGE
START verb
December 1975 Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS
Pub21-1), Low-Intermediate Level. The RERUN clause is checked
for syntactic correctness only. Additional support is provided for
many features of higher FIPS levels.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, .personnel selection and training, installation and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
Compilation: The IBM 5280 COBOL-DOS/VSE Host Compiler and
Library (5708-CB2) executes on an IBM S/370, 30XX or 4300 with at
least a 168K byte partition plus the GETVIS space as well as a
configuration sufficient to run the selected operating system.
Object Program Execution: COBOL object programs will run on any IBM
5280 system with a minimum of 48K bytes of main storage capacity.
COBOL object programs require a minimum partition size of 16K bytes.
Actual partition size requirements are a function of the COBOL source
program. If data communications is used, a minimum of 64K bytes of
main storage capacity is required.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1) is required. The
5280 Communications Utilities Licensed Program (5708- DC 1) Is
required when using data communications via COBOL and will require a
communications partition.
-------- ----.=. :-:. :E~E: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280 COBOL-DOS/VSE Host Compiler & Library (cont'd)
CONVERSION/COMPATIBILITY
Some compatibility does exist between the 5280 COBOL compiler and
DOS/VS COBOL Compiler and Library (5746-CB1). Both compilers are
designed in accordance with American National Standard COBOL. The
5280 COBOL supports the 1974 standard (X3.23-1974). while the
DOS/VS COBOL supports the 1968 standard (X3.23-1968). Therefore.
differences do exist and some conversion will be necessary.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM 5280 COBOL--DOS/VSE Host Compiler and 'Library Licensed
Program Specifications (GL23-0034) ... IBM 5280 COBOL Language
Reference (GL23-0031) ... IBM 5280 COBOL Programmer's Guide
(SL23-0032) ... IBM 5280 COBOL Host Compilers Problem Determination Manual (SL23-0043).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5708-CB2.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- - - - ----= - - :§~§: ISG
PP 570B-CL1.1
Do not reproduco without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
52BO PROCEDURE CONTROll.ANGUAGE
5708-Cl1
PURPOSE
The 5280 Procedure Control language is a licensed program which
provides 5280 usera with job stream capability and the ability to
execute a program with little or no operator intervention. The licensed
program consists of a control program and supporting programs. Use
of this licensed program is optional for 5280 users.
HIGHLIGHTS
Control language: The control language consists of a set of statements
which are used to identify a job and its processing requirements to the
system. The language provides a method of describing a job stream,
together with all associated prompts and program specifications. A
series of related control language statements is referred to as a
'procedure'. A procedure is used to provide control for a job or series
of jobs. Control language facilities include:
Specification of the name of the program(s) to be compiled and/or
executed.
Specification of the device from which a program is to be loaded.
Specification of the data sets to be processed and the location of
the data sets.
Control language statement and error logging. Control language
statements can be logged in order to provide a history or to provide
a diagnostic aid in the event of abnormal procedure termination.
A logical IF statement, which provides for intelligence within
procedures. It is possible to execute different jobs based on tests
performed within a procedure.
Specification of default responses with optional operator override
capability. Responses can be made to specific user program
generated prompts or to prompts from IBM-supplied programs,
such as a utility or a sort.
Ability to provide default responses or operator-keyed responses
to error messages.
Internal subroutines and variables.
DESCRIPTION
Procedure Data Sots: Control language statements required to control a
specific job or sequence of jobs are stored on a source procedure data
set. The source procedure data set can be created in two ways:
1.
During standard (not controlled) execution of a job, the source
procedure data set can be automatically created through use of the
Procedure Build Initator Program. The data set will contain all the
information required to repeat that job sequence, including all
program load specifications and prompt responses.
2.
The data sot can be created by directly entering each control
language statoment via a data entry program. The data entry
program can be a usor-written program or an IBM-supplied
program such as the Key Entry utility (part of the 5280 Utilities
licensed program).
The source procedure data set must be translated into object form in
order to be utilized in a 'controlled' environment. The Procedure
Preprocessor program converts the source data set into an object
procedure data set. The object procedure data set is used by the
Controller program to control execution of a specific program or series
of programs.
Controlled Program L:xecution: Programs running in a controlled
environment execute under control of the Controller program. The
Controller program provides the link between controlled programs and
object procedure data sets. It detects and services requests from
controlled programs. An interface to the operator is available via a set
of ()perlltor commands.
In
a controlled environment, the Controller program supplies program
load parameters and keyboard responses. A sequence of program
prompts can be answered without operator intervention. The only time
an operator is required to enter input to a controlled program is when an
operlltor respon~e. is. specifically requested by a control language
statement,. an error occurs that is not handled by the object procedure
data set, or keyboard entry is requlrod by a data entry program such as
DE/RPG:
The Controller program resides in a background partition and must
remain in main storage during execution of controllod programs,
Standard, 'not cOl.1trolled' 5280 programs can be concurrently oxecuted
in other partitions; These programs are functionally unaffected by and
do not interfElce with the Controller Program.
Operator Command$: The keyboard operator can communicate with the
Controller Program via a set: of commands. The commands allow the
operator to restart or terminate procedure· exe.cutian and to update
system parameters such as the system· dal~to~5;d~fault Controller
program prompt responses.
Program Support: The following IBM programs can operate under control
of the Controller Program:
5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1)
5280 COBOL Host Compilers and Libraries (5708-CB1, 5708-CB2,
5708-CB3, 5708-CB4) (object programs)
5280 Communications Utilities (5708-DC1)
5280 DE/RPG (5708-DE1) (compiler and obje~t programs)
5280-3270 Emulation (5708-EM1)
5280 Sort/Merge (5708-SM1)
5280 Utilities (5708- UT1 )
5280 Assembler Language (5708-AS1) (Assembler and object
programs-)
- Keyboard accesses in Assembler language programs will not be
controlled.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM 5280 Procedure Control Language will run on any 5280 system
which has, as a minimum, 48K bytes of main storage capacity and one
diskette drive. Minimum main storage partition size requirements are as
follows: 6K for the Procedure Build Initiator program; 12K- for the
Controller Program; 14K for the Procedure Preprocessor program. The
common functions area SYSJJCFA requires 22K.
12K will control one partition, with the Controller program and
object procedure data sets both residing on a diskette with formats
1, 2, 4, 5, or 7. The Controller program partition size will vary
between 12K and 23K depending up on the number of partitions
controlled and the diskette format used. The Controller program
diskette must remain resident while the Controller Program is
running. See the IBM 5280 Procedure Control Language Reference Manual for specific requirements for the Controller program
partition size.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1) is required. A
customer-created IPL diskette containing the SYSJJCFA data set is
alsCi required. SYSJJCFA is included in this licensed program.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM 5280 Procedure Control Language Licensed Program
Specifications (GC23-0753) ... IBM 5280 Procedure Control Language
Reference Manual (SC23-0706).
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------ ----
PP 5708-DC1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - - :§~5: ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280 COMMUNICATIONS UTILITIES
5708-DC1
PURPOSE
SAJE has the following functions available to the host system:
The 5280 Communications Utilities licensed program, used with the
Communications Adapter feature (#2500) consists of Communications
Access Method (CAM) support, a set of communications utility
programs, and an interface to the access method for communications
application programs written in 5280 COBOL, 5280 DE/RPG, or 5280
Assembler language.
HIGHLIGHTS
One Console (Input and Output)
One Reader
One Printer
One Punch
Highlights of the SRJE workstation support are:
MULTI-LEAVING Remote Job Entry (MRJE)
.•
Job streams can originate at either the 5280 diskette or keyboard.
SNA Remote Job Entry (SRJE)
Card I/O operation is simulated by diskette.
Batch Data Transfer and Inquiry
Communications Configuration and Job Description
Job output from the host is sent to the 5280 as a print or punch
data stream.
General support includes:
Punch data streams are written to diskette.
- Communications Access Methods (CAM)
- Systems Network Architecture/Synchronous Data Link Control
(SNA/SDLC)
- Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC)
- Application program interface to DE/RPG, COBOL and
Assembler Language
- BSC Multipoint Monitor
- Direct Device Support
- Diskette Data Management
- Concurrent Program Operation
- Diagnostics (BSC Online Test, Trace Capability, Communications
Job Statistics)
DESCRIPTION
MULTI·LEAVING Remote Job Entry (MRJE): The 5280 Communications Utilities permit a 5280 system to function as a Remote Job Entry
(RJE) workstation for submission of jobs to a S/370 under OS/VS1
RES, OS/VS2 JES2, OS/VS2 JES3 or VM/370 RSCS. The MRJE
Utility communicates with the host system over a point-to-point
(switched or nonswitched) communication line via the Binary Synchronous mode of the communications adapter. Host system RJE
programming support should be generated specifying System/3 as the
supported terminal with:
One Console (input and output)
One Reader
One Printer
One Punch
Highlights of the MRJE workstation are:
MULTI-LEAVING support permits taking advantage of concurrent
5280 device operation.
Card I/O operation is simulated by diskette storage.
Expansion of blanks and duplicate characters may be performed to
increase host output line utilization.
Job streams can originate at either the 5280 diskette or keyboard.
Punch data streams are written to diskette.
Print data streams can go to either the diskette or printer.
Special printer forms are supported.
Console data streams are used for sending and receiving commands and operator messages between the 5280 and the host
system.
SRJE Utility Control Statements can be entered from the keyboard
or from a diskette data set.
Job statistics for each session are maintained which are displayed
at the end of the session.
Batch/Inquiry Data Transfer: The capability to perform batch data
transfer and interactive inquiries with various host systems using either
BSC or SNA/SDLC protocol is supplied as part of the communications
utilities. These batch data transfer and inquiry utilities use the
information created/maintained by the preparation utilities for program
execution.
The utilities permit the user to easily transfer information over the
communications line with minimum operator involvement.
Binary Synchronous Communications (SSC)
These utilities provide the interface to support data communications
with S/370 models 115 to 168 and 30XX, 4331 and 4341 processors
operating under DOS/VSE, VSE/ Advanced Function, OS/VS1 and
OS/VS2 (MVS) accordingly. Attachment is through 3704/3705 with
Emulation Program (EP) or the Partition Emulation Program (PEP)
extension to 3704/3705 ACF/NCP/VS or the Integrated Communications Adapter for S/370, 115, 125 and 138 or the Communications
Adapter of the 4331.
Using the 5280 Communications Utilities, the 5280 system appears as
a:
3741 to CICS/VS and IMS/VS
3780 to VSE/POWER
The preferred 5280 support to CICS/VS and IMS/V5 is 5NA LU1. The
3741 line protocol of the esc Data Communications Utility (SYSBDCU)
would normally be used when replacing a 3741.
Print data streams can be directed to either diskette or printer.
SYSBDCU is also used to interface the 5280 to DOS/VSE/POWER
using 3780 line protocol.
Supports special printer forms
SYSBDCU should not be considered as providing 3741 or 3780
emulation capabilities.
Operates with detached keyboard/display.
The 5280 system also appears as a 3741 to:
Supports transmission of multivolume data sets.
Console data streams are used for sending and receIVIng commands and operator messages between the 5280 and the host.
MRJE utility control statements can be entered from the keyboard
or4from a diskette data set.
Job statistics are maintained which are displayed at the end of the
session.
SNA Remote Job Entry (SRJE): The 5280 Communications Utilities
enable the 5280 system to submit RJE jobs to a host S/370 using
SNA/SDLC link protocol. The utility supports a single LU-LU session
with the following host subsystems using ACF/VTAM and
ACF./NCP/VS:
OS/VS1 Remote Entry Service (RES)
OS/VS2 Job Entry Subsystem 2 (JES2)
OS/VS2 Job Entry Subsystem 3 (JES3)
DOS/VSE/POWER
System/3 with CCP or RPG II
System/32 with RPG II
System/34 with RPG II or SSP-ICF
System/38 with RPG III or COBOL
Series/1 RPS Version 3/4
3741 models 2 and 4
3747
6265
5280
The 5280 communications configuration utility· allows the u!Jer t.~
describe certain communication characteristics, prior to pl',pgram
execution, such as terminal type, terminal add~ess and timeouts.,~
:
5280 as a Terminal (I..U. TYPEV to S/370 CIC~/Vffand IMS/VS'ili sing
SNA/SDLC Protocols· •
. " '.
\
The 5280 communicates .with ·IMS/VS appliclations under 05/V~ or
OS/VS2 (MVS) or CICS/VS applications exEicuting under DOSmSE,
VSE/ Advanced Function, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2JMVS) in 5/370 models
145 to 168 for IMS/VS, and models 138 to·:168 for CICS/VS. The
"~
4~
.
------- -------= =:: a'f5: ISG
PP S708-0C1.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280 Communications Utilities (cont'd)
5280 communicates with IMS/VS or CICS/VS applications in 30XX,
4331 and 4341 processors. Multiple (up to 4) LU- LU sessions with
ACF/VTAM are supported by IMS/VS or CICS/VS.
The 5280 communications configuration utility allows the user to
describe certain communication characteristics, prior to program
execution, such as station address, pacing counts and Logon.
Communications Configuration and Job Description: The primary
functions of the communications configuration 'and job description
utilities are to:
Describe the communications environment.
Describe the transmit, receive and/or inquiry functions that make
up a job.
Users of the 5280 system describe the communications jobs for
execution by running easy-to-use keyboard/display prompt/response
preparation utilities. The responses to the prompts a,e savod on
diskette and identified by name. The information is then supplied to the
appropriate utilities at execution time to control the communication
session with the remote host or terminal system.
Multiple job records may be maintained to provide communications
flexibility within the 5280 system.
Diskette Support: Diskette support is an integral part of the 5280
Communications Utilities. It permits users to maintain and control a
diskette data set(s) in a variety of ways. Included in the support is the
capability to transmit and receive Single and multiple data sets from/to
one or more physical diskette drives; to support data sets spanning one
or more diskettes; to allocate and write received data to a new data set,
add received data to the end of an existing data set and replace
received data in an existing data set.
Direct Device Support: The 5280 Communications Utilities provide
direct device support as to the origin and destination of the data
transferred over the communications line.
To the Line
From the Line
Data Set(s)
Magnetic Stripe Reader
(for BSC support only)
Keyboard
Data Set(s)
Printer
Display
In addition, certain combinations of multiple 5280 output devices are
allowed.
Application Program User Interface: The 5280 Communications
Utilities provide an interface to the Communication Access Methods
(CAM) for a user to write DE/RPG, COBOL or 5280 Assembler
language programs. As an example, this could provide 5280 users
additional communications capabilities for those applications requiring
random inquiries to remote host master files with the response data
processed by the 5280 application.
BSC Multipoint Monitor: The BSC Multipoint Monitor provides, for
the communicating 5285 Programmable Data Station and the 5288
Programmable Control Unit residing on a BSC multipoint network, the
ability to respond to host polling and selection without the requirement
to have a Communications Access Method (CAM) loaded into main
storage. The Multipoint Monitor resides in the common functions area.
Use of the Multipoint Monitor prevents the host from removing the
5280 from polling lists, which would thereby require reactivation at the
host when communications are desired.
Concurrent Program Operation: The 5280 Communications Utilities
require a minimum of two partitions: one for a Communications Access
Method «(CAM) and one for an IBM-supplied 5280 Communications
. Utility or a user communications application program.
For concurrent program operation, the system may be running other
application programs concurrent with a Communications Utility. The
limitation is the amount of main storage available, number of partitions
and possible performance considerations.
Diagnostics (BSC Online Test, Trace Capability, Communications
Job Statistics): The Communications Utilities maintain information and
provide statistics on the job just executed, such as the number of
input/ output records processed. Additional communications information such as status indicators, counters, error logs and communications
trace table is available.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
leM !)'lay provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensqd programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
orderiflg Information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
contir«Jed day-to-d~y operation lies solely with the customer.
Instfation of IBM
IicenS~d programs'is a customer responsibility.
Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: The IBM
5280 Communications~Utilities (5708-DC1) will be available to
cuStomers for pre-installation testing on IBM Test Center Systems in
accordance with IBM's Program Testing Policy.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it' is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The minimum system configuration required to support communications
in a BSC network is:
AN IBM 5285 with 32K bytes of main storage capacity, the Communications Adapter (#2500) and a display size(s) of 960 characters.
Because the SNA support requires either the Elapsed Time Counter
(#3610) or the Magnetic Stripe Reader Adapter/Elapsed Time Counter
(#4960), the customer should carefully evaluate his future requirements
when installing a BSC system.
OR:
An IBM 5288 with 32K bytes of main storage capacity, the Communications Adapter (#2500), anci an auxiliary data station (5281 or 5282)
with a display size(s) of 960 characters. Because the SNA support
requires either the Elapsed Time Counter (#3610) or the Magnetic Stripe
Reader Adapter/Elapsed Time Counter (#4955), the customer should
carefully evaluate his future requirements when installing a BSC system.
The MRJE has the same requirements as above except that it requires
48K bytes of main storage capacity on the 5285 and 64K bytes of main
storage on the 5288.
The minimum system configuration required to support communications
in an SNA network, including the SRJE utility. is:
An IBM 5285 with 64K bytes of main storage capacity, the Communications Adapter (#2500), a disp'lay size(s) of 960 characters, and either
the Elapsed Time Counter (#3610) or the Magnetic Stripe Reader
Adapter / Elapsed Time Counter (#4960).
OR:
An IBM 5288 with 64K bytes of main storage capacity, the Communications Adapter (#2500), an auxiliary data station (5281 or 5282) with a
display size(s) of 960 characters, and either the Elapsed Time Counter
(#3610) or the Magnetic Stripe Reader Adapter/Elapsed Time Counter.
(#4955).
One communications line can be connected (via the appropriate line
interface) to the adapter.
Optional hardware that is available for use with the Communications
Utilities is:
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
5222 Printer
5224 Printer
5225 Printer
5256 Printer
3270 Emulation Communications Adapter
Magnetic Stripe Reader
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1).
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM 5280 Communications Utilities Licensed Program Specifications
(GC34-0387) ... IBM 5280 Communications Reference Manual
(SC34-0247).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
----------- ---- ---
PP 5708-0E1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
=.:::';"= ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280DE/RPG
5708-DE1
PURPOSE
DE/RPG is a licensed program that provides advanced data entry and
associated processing cepability for the 5280 system. DE/RPG uses
the Data DescriRtion Specifications (DDS) form, which is also supported
on the System/38. An RPG subroutine capability is included which is a
subset of RPG III calculation operation codes. The DE/RPG licensed
program consists of a Compiler and a Source Entry Program.
A broad range of capability is provided to allow the user to perform jobs
ranging from simple, transcriptive kay entry, to high-function data entry
requiring extensive editing, data set access and user-defined processing. User-defined formats, presented on the display, constitute the
framework for entering data, creating a record and writing that record to
a diskette data set. Extensive data editing is available to maximize
productivity of the data entry process and reduce the need for
expensive error correction procedures. Using General Utility Specification forms and Data Description Specification forms, the user can
define a data entry program by simply specifying which edits and
checks are required.
DE/RPG uses DDS forms for specification of data entry formats. A
format or series of formats provide the framework for a data entry job.
Sequence of execution of formats is determined by job definition,
operator selection, or dynamically, based on analysis of current data.
Basic function is expanded through use of the RPG Calculation
Specifications. This provides the user with the capability of defining
specialized routines, such as complex arithmetic calculations, array
handling, device I/O operations or initiate/terminate and read/write to
communications. This RPG subroutine capability can also be used to
create a stand-alone batch DE/RPG program.
HIGHLIGHTS
direct interface to the 5280 Communications Utilities licensed
program (5708-DC1) and the 3270 Emulation licensed program
(5708-EM1). Sequence of instruction execution is user-defined the RPG •cycle' does not apply. The following operation codes are
available:
Arithmetic and data manipulation - ADD, Z-ADD, SUB, Z-SUB,
MULT, DIV, MVR, LOKUP, MOVE, MOVEA, MOVEL, COMP
Branching - CABxx, GOTO, TAG
Indicator testing - SETON, SETOF, BITON, BITOF, TESTB
Subroutine operations - EXSR, BEGSR, ENDSR
Special I/O operations:
- Diskette - OPEN, CLOSE, READ, READP, WRITE, CHAIN,
SETLL,UPDAT,DELET
- Printer - OPEN, CLOSE, WRITE
- Keyboard/display - EXFMT, WRITE
- Communications - OPEN, CLOSE, READ, WRITE
- Assembler subroutine exit - CALL
Diskette Data Set Support
The 5280 system supports the sequential data set organization.
The access methods available are: sequential, direct by relative
record number and key indexed. Data sets can be shared by
multiple programs on a read or write/update basis. Concurrent
update of a record by multiple programs is prevented.
Modes of Operation
The four basic modes of operation of a DE/RPG program are:
- Prompts and data fields can be positioned anywhere on the
screen below the status line (Line 1 of the display).
- Multiple formats can be displayed on a sin~le screen.
- Display attributes for prompts and data fields include highlight,
blink, reverse image, underline, non display and column separators.
- Enter: Initial data entry. The record created is written to a
diskette data set.
- Update: Review and modification of selected records in an
existing data set.
- Verify: Verify data in an existing data set for accuracy.
- Rerun: Sequential processing of an existing data set performing
all field edits and checks without operator intervention (that is,
normal key input is bypassed).
High-Function Editing
Special Functions
Provides the capability of checking and performing operations on
data as it is entered. Edits can be performed on a character, field,
or record basis, and include:
During operation of a DE/RPG proQram, the operator can select
from a number of available special functions. These special
functions include:
- Character check - alpha, alpha only, numeric, numeric only,
signed numeric, digits only, hexadecimal
- Mandatory enter
- Mandatory fill
- Data required
- Exit key required
- Duplication - from previous record or named field
- Right adjust with blank or zero fill
- Self check/generate - Modulus 10/11 or user-defined
- Counter arithmetic
- Automatic field insert - constant, named field or results of an
arithmetic expression
- Comparison test - compare to constant, named field or
arithmetic expression
- Substitute table data for keyed data
- Table lookup - test for matching table entry
- Range test - compare to cons:ants, named fields or table entries
- Reformat field position - resequence fields for output record
- Set indicators on/off
- Exit to user subroutine
- User-written error messages
- Crosscheck - compare values of two fields against a table to
ensure valid combination
- Sequence check - compare current value of field with previous
value
- Picture check - multiple keyboard shifts in a single data field
- Search Data Set - locate and retrieve a record in a data set by its
position within the data set, or by record content.
- Manual Format Selection - operator selection of a format within
the current job.
- Record Insert/Delete - insert a record into or delete a record
from a data set.
- Copy - transfer a record from a data set to the current transaction data set.
- Print - an unformatted printing of the current record.
- Mark Field - mark a field in error to facilitate later correction.
- Edit Release - suspend editing of a field.
Display Screen Design
Production Statistics
All DE/RPG programs will maintain production statistics on a job
basis and on a station basis. Statistics that can be maintained
include: Keystrokes, records, elapsed time, marked records, verify
correction keystrokes, number of jobs (on a station basis).
User-Written Subroutines
Through use of the RPG Calculation Specifications, capabili~ is
provided to create subroutines for DE/RPG programs. In addition,
this capability allows the user to write a non-interactive, standalone DE/RPG program that can run in any partition. The operation
codes available are a subset of System/38 RPG III Calculation
Specification operation codes. This capability can be used for such
functions as complex edit routines, extensive arithmetic calculations, "!laster data set access and report printing. Simple
read/Write statements provide access to communications via a
Device Support
All devices available on the 5280 system are supported by
DE/RPG:
-
Keyboard/display
Diskette 1 drive
Diskette 20 drive
Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4950)
5222 Printer
5224 Printer
5225 Printer
5256 Printer
DE/RPG Source Entry Program
'<'
The DE/RPG Source Entry program is used to create a DE/RPG~'
source statement data set, which becomes input to the DE/RPG-,
compiler. Operating through the keyboard/display, the user seleclj:
the required statement type and is prompted to enter the parame;;r:
ters requ!red to complete the statement., The par!imeters 'ie~
entered via the keyboard, the program automat,ioall,Y .,formats e~
statement into the form required by the DE/,RPG'compiler.cand ~
record is written to ,diSkette. Three' mo~es", ~f ~peratl~n Ce':
'.
..:;. ;:;i\11.:, ,;,
'.'
!t
normally used:
- Enter Mode - for the'origir:'al
-
fJ;3!~:Mode
enterin~;.of siit~m~nts for l/~ouie
ma~i~gCOrrectio~,~f,',or ~~, itiO,~S
~istirg'
;';;folto an
DE/RPG source statement.data set.., .. ·C" . . . . .
- Verify Mode - for~erifying''tIata in artexistil')g source sta~ment ", ~'.1. ' ~
:.' f·
;
data set for accuracy.
Progra,m Use
------- ------
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - - ~'f§: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280 DE/RPG (cont'd)
Input to the compiler is a DE/RPG source statement data set. This
data set may be created by the DE/RPG Source Entry Program, a
DE/RPG user-defined data entry program or the 5280 Key Entry
Utility program (part of the 5280 Utilities licensed program 5708-UT1). During compilation, a source listing is optional, and if
requested, can be directed to a printer or diskette. Output of the
compiler is an object program data set written to diskette. For
object program execution, when the requirement exists for mUltiple
operators to perform the same job, each operator must have an
individual copy of the program, executing in a separate partition.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: 5280 DE/RPG
(5708-DE1) will be available to customers for pre-installation testing on
IBM Test Center Systems in accordance with IBM's Program Testing
Policy.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The DE/RPG compiler will run on any IBM 5280 system which has, as a
minimum, either two diskette 1 drives or one diskette 20 drive. The
DE/RPG Source Entry Program will run on any IBM 5280 system.
Minimum main storage partition size requirements are as follows: 9K
for the DE/RPG compiler; 13K for the DE/RPG Source Entry program.
The compiler will take advantage of additional main storage capacity if it
is available.
If the user desires to maintain the elapsed time production statistic, the
Elapsed Time Counter or the Magnetic Stripe Reader Adapter/Elapsed
Time Counter (special features) is required as follows: For the IBM 5285
- #3610, #4955 or #4960; for the IBM 5286 - #3610 or #4955; for the
IBM 5288 - #3610 or #4955.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The DE/RPG compiler, DE/RPG object programs and the DE/RPG
Source Entry Program require the IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1). In addition, DE/RPG object programs and the
DEI RPG Source Entry program have, as a prerequisite, the IBM 5280
Utilities licensed program (5708-UT1). DE/RPG object programs and
the DE/RPG Source Entry program require a customer-created IPL
diskette containing the SYSCFA or SYSHELP data set (part of the 5280
Utilities).
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM 5280 DE/RPG Licensed Program Specifications (GC21-7798) ...
IBM 5280 DE / RPG Reference Manual (SC21-7787) ... IBM 5280
DE / RPG User's Guide (SC21-7804) ... IBM 5280 Introduction to
DE / RPG (SC21-7803) ... IBM 5280 DE / RPG Problem Determination
Procedures for the Programmar (SC21-7852).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5708-DE1.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
--..----- -------.:..:=:: :§~E: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
PP 5708-EM1.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
5280 - 3270 EMULATION
5708-EM1
PURPOSE
5280 - 3270 Emulation allows the 5280 Distributed Data System to
appear as selected 3270 control units and devices. The operating
environments supported are:
3270 Device Emulation under System Network Architecture/
Synchronous Data Link Control (SNA/SDLC) and Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC). The 3270 Device Emulation Utility
allows the 5280 to appear as selected 3270 control units and
devices to existing host applications.
3270 Batch Transfer - BSC. Using this utility program, the 5280
user can transmit and receive batch data over a 3270 BSC network
using 3270 line protocols. An appropriate user-written program is
required at the host. Only graphic data (hex characters '4Q'-'FF')
can be transmitted.
3270 Program Interface - BSC. This provides an interface for a
user-written program in the 5280, written in DE/RPG or COBOL,
to exchange records with a user-written program in a host system
using 3270 BSC protocols. Only graphic data can be transmitted.
HIGHLIGHTS
3270 Device Emulation
Control Unit:
The 5280 appears to the host as a 3274 model 1C Control Unit
under SNA/SDLC or as a 3271 model 2 Control Unit under BSC.
Display/Keyboard:
The 1,920-character 5281 Data Station (attached to a 5288
Programmable Control Unit) and the 1,920-character 5285
Programmable Data Station appear to a host system as a 3277
model 2 Display Station with selected features.
Typewriter, data entry, and data entry with proof arrangement
keyboards are supported. 3270 Program Function keys are
supported.
The Local Print Key function is supported in SNA/SDLC and BSC.
Printer:
The 3270 Printer Emulation Utility allows the 5222, 5224, 5225,
and 5256 Printers to appear as the 3284 model 2, 3286 model 2, or
3288 model 2 Printer in BSC, or the 3287 model 1 and 2 Printer in
SNA/SDLC.
3270 BSe Batch Transfer Utility Program
Data on a 5280 diskette can be sent to (or received from) an
appropriately written host application program. Only graphic data
can be transmitted.
This utility is designed for batch transfer and limits the interference
to other interactive sessions on the line. As a result, transfer of a
data set can take more time than a normal batch transfer operation.
The transmission and reception of multivolume diskette data sets is
supported.
Unsolicited host operator messages are handled by the 5280
display while the utility program is in operation.
Logon to an interactive host is allowed prior to starting Batch
Transfer.
The use of a user-provided record identifying character in the data
stream permits distinguishing user data from system messages.
Fixed length, blocked or unblocked records up to 1,918 bytes are
supported.
3270 BSe Program Interfaca
Read/write level of interface on a logical record basis is available in
an interactive mode using DE/RPG and COBOL.
The DE/RPG or COBOL application program provides a 1,920character Device (Image) Buffer and 4,096-character, or less,' Data
Stream Buffer.
User-written programs must be provided at both ends of the
communications link with careful consideration given to the
application design and the characteristics of the communications
subsystem.
DESCRIPTION
The 5280 - 3270 Emulation licensed program consists of the following
six basic parts:
3270 Device Emulation Program - BSC and SNA/SDLC
'3270 Batch Transfer Utility - BSC
3270 Program Interface - SSC
Communications Access Method - BSC
Communications Access Method - SNA/SDLC
Communications Access Method - 3270/SRJE
3270 Device Emulation Program - BSe and SNA/SDLe
Host system communication subsystems that are supported are: S/370
IMS/VS, CICS/VS, TSO, and System/3 model 150 CCP.
Control Unit:
The 3270 Device Emulation Program allows the 5280 to appear to a
host system as a 3274 model 1C (SNA/SDLC) or a 3271 model 2 (BSC)
Control Unit.
Device emulation of the 3270 allows the 5280 to reside on the same
communications link that supports a 3274 model 1C or 3271 model 2
Control Unit. Since this program provides data stream translation, host
application programs will generally require little or no changes to
support the 5280 as a 3270. Performance, however, may be degraded.
Display/Keyboard:
The 1,920-character 5281 Data Station (attached to a 5288 Programmable Control Unit) and the 1,920-character 5285 Programmable Data
Station appear to a host system as a 3277 model 2 Display Station with
selected features. Features not supported include: ASCII, Magnetic
Stripe Reader, Light- Pen, and the Copy Command (from the host).
Certain keys are in different locations on the 5280 keyboards. The
EBCDIC typewriter, data entry, and data entry with proof arrangement
keyboards and the EBCDIC transmission codes are supported. Function
keys on the 3277 will be mapped onto the 5280 keyboard to provide for
equivalent function: that is, Field Mark, Erase Input, PA, and PF keys.
Up to 24 PF keys are supported. The host initiated local copy (print) is
supported for SNA/SDLC. The local print key function is supported for
SNA/SDLC and BSC. The magnetic stripe reader and the light.,.pen are
not supported.
Printer:
The 3270 Printer Emulation utility provides to the 5280 user a method
of using a 5280 printer as if it were a 3270 printer. The data to be
printed is transmitted from the host system. The 3270 printers
emulated are 3284 model 2, 3286 model 2, and 3288 model 2 in BSC.
The 3287 Printer (models 1 and 2) is supported in SNA/SDLC. Special
features available on these printers are not supported.
The 5280 printers supported are the 5222, 5224, 5225, and 5256. They
will print characters that match 3270 printer characters where it is
physically possible. Characters that do not match will print a standard
default character. Users that must print all characters exactly as on a
3270 printer can do so by using a printer with the multinational
character set. Upper and lower case printing is supported on all printers
and vertical forms control is supported as on the 3287 and 3288
Printers.
The Printer Emulation Utility operates in either a foreground or
background partition, and a maximum of five printer emulations may be
active at one time.
The printers may operate in local mode, systems mode (entirely under
host control) or shared mode.
3270 Batch Transfer - BSe
The 3270 Batch Transfer Emulation Utility will enable the user to
transmit and receive batch data when communicating with a host
system via 3270 BSC. Record lengths can be a maximum of 1,918
bytes. Transaction IDs and how they are to be used during transmission may be specified. It is possible to transmit and receive single or
multiple volume data sets containing graphic text (hex characters
'4Q'-'FF') only. Unsolicited messages and interactive logon/logoff can,
also be handled. The utility executes in a foreground partition. A user
program is required at the host to send or receive batch data.
3270 Program Interface - BSe
This function provides the 5280 user with a program-to-program
interface that uses 3270 BSC protocols. The 5280 application program
that uses this function appears to the host system as a 3271 model 2
device. Up to seven concurrent sessions are supported. E,ach session
,~ll
represonts a different 3270 device address..
The user application interface for this function is through DE/ RPG and
COBOL. The DE/RPG support for the ,3270 program~~interface will
provide a new parameter on the DEVICE keyword. Th~ user will specify
'COMM3270' as the device ,type. A file defined with this device code
may be accessed from the "calculation specifications using READ,
WRITE, OPEN, and CLOSE operations.
,;;,
The COBOL support'is imp)~rii~nted by use of the COBOL CALL
routines. A, COBOL program ir;lterfaces.to the 3270 CAM through
library routines.' Communications~'are initiated by activating the CALL
verbs that open and close data sets and read or write records.
------- - - - -:: - - :§~§:
PP 5708-EM1.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280 - 3270 Emulation (cont'd)
BSC Considerations: Primary operation is on nonswitched multipoint
communications facilities. Switched network backup (SNBU) may be
utilized if the associated modems and application programs support this
capability.
The following BSC host system support is provided for 5280 - 3270
Device Emulation:
IMS/VS with BTAM under OS/VSl or OS/VS2 (MVS)
IMS/VS with ACF/VTAM under OS/VSl or OS/VS2 (MVS)
IMS/VS with ACF/TCAM under OS/VSl or OS/VS2 (MVS)
CICS/VS with BTAM under OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS)
CICS/VS with ACF/TCAM under OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS)
CICS/VS with BTAM-ES or ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME under
DOS/VSE
CICS/VS with ACF/VTAM under OS/VSl or OS/VS2 (MVS)
TSO with ACF/VTAM under OS/VS2 (MVS)*
TSO with ACF/TCAM under OS/VS2 (MVS)*
RSCS with VM/370 (printer emulation)
CMS with VM/370 (display emulation)
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The current release of IBM 5280 System Control Programming
(5708-SC1) and the current release of IBM 5280 Communications
Utilities (5708- DC 1)
*
96K bytes if a
keyboard / display
printer is
used
in
conjunction
with
the
96K bytes may be required depending upon the host system
network parameters effect on the SNA CAM buffer size. Refer to
the IBM 5280 - 3270 Emulation Reference Manual (SC34-0384).
160K bytes is required if the 3270/SRJE CAM is to be run with
two utilities, (96K with one utility). such as the IBM 3270 SNA
Display Emulation program and the SNA Remote Job Entry Utility
(part of the 5280 Communications Utilities licensed program),
executing concurrently.
COMPATIBILITY
5280 Communications Support Compatibility: The 5280 - 3270 Emulation
licensed program can co-exist on a 5280 system with other noncommunicating programs. Running a 3270 Emulation program
concurrently with Transcriptive (that is. high keying rate) Key Entry
(TKE) may degrade TKE performance. No other 5280 communications
programs can run concurrently.
DOCUMENTATION
System/3 model 150 under CCP
(available from Mechanicsburg)
* TSO does not support printers.
IBM 5280 - 3270 Emulation Licensed Program Specifications
(GC34-0382) .. , IBM 5280 - 3270 Emulation Reference Manual
(SC34-0384).
Notes:
1.
All of the above systems (except System/3) are also supported
when under control of VM/370.
2.
The 3270 Batch Transfer - BSC and the 3270 Program Interface BSC functions are not supported by IMS or CICS/VS. Support for
these functions is limited to those specific interfaces described in
the IBM 5280 - 3270 Emulation Reference Manual (SC34-0384).
SNA/SDLC Considerations: Operation is on point-to-point switched
as well as nonswitched point-to-point or multipoint communications
facilities. The point-to-point switched capability is a function of the
5280 - 3270 Emulation licensed program (not a function of the 3274).
The following SNA/SDLC host system support is provided for 5280 3270 Device Emulation:
IMS/VS with ACF/VTAM under OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS)
IMS/VS with ACF/TCAM under OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS)
CICS/VS with ACF/VTAM under OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS)
CICS/VS with ACF/TCAM under OS/VS1 or )S/VS2 (MVS)
CICS/VS with ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME under DOS/VSE
TSO with ACF/VTAM under OS/VS2 (MVS)*
TSO with ACF/TCAM under OS/VS2 (MVS)*
VSPC (Version 2 of later) with ACF/VTAM under OS/VS2 (MVS)
* TSO does not support printers.
Note: All of the above systems are also supported when under control of
VM/370.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
:rhe minimum 5280 system configuration required to support the 5280
- 3270 Device Emulation capabilities is:
An IBM 6285 with 64K* bytes of main storage capacity, the 3270
. Emulation Communications Adapter (#3270), and Optional 1,920Character Display Size (#3505). SNA support requires, in addition,
eithor the Elapsed Time Counter (#3610) or the Magnetic Stripe Reader
Adapter / Elaps~d Time Counter (#4960).
OR
An IBM 5288 with 64K*· bytes of main storage capacity, the IBM 3270
~mulation Communications Adapter (#3270), and an IBM 5281 Data
Station with a~isplay size of 1,920 characters. SNA support requires,
in addition. either the Elapsed Time Counter (#3610) or the Magnetic
Stripe Reader Adapter/Elapsed Time Counter (#4955).
Refer to the IBM 5280 - 3270 Emulation Reference Manual (SC340384) for required main storage requirements of o~her functions.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- -------.=.::.: :§~~ ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280 SORT/MERGE
5708·SM1
PURPOSE
The 5280 Sort/Merge licensed program consists of a Sort Program and
a Merge Program. The Sort and Merge programs support any diskette
data set organization supported by the 5280 system. The Merge
Program supports multivolume data sets.
Sort Program: The 5280 Sort program sorts a single diskette data set
into ascending or descending sequence.
HIGHLIGHTS
Sort parameters are entered at the keyboard or read from a
'Command' data set which contains previously recorded parameters. Use of the 'Command' data set allows easier execution of
most frequently desired sort functions.
Records are sorted by a control field which can consist of from one
to six subfields from different locations of the record.
Control fields can be sorted in ascending or descending sequence
or mixed (some ascending and some descending).
Records can be selected, omitted, or reformatted.
An alternate collating sequence can be specified.
Records can be in EBCDIC or ASCII code.
Work space and data sets are automatically allocated by the
program.
The order of records with identical control fields is preserved.
Output from the sort program will be 1 of 4 formats:
1. Full record
2. Address Out - A data set of 4-byte relative record numbers.·
3. Record Subset - A data set containing user-specified data fields.
4. Index/Key - A data set with records consisting of a key and a
relative record number.· The key is a user-specified input record
data field.
• The relative record number corresponds to the position of the
input record in the input data set.
DESCRIPTION
Merge Program: The 5280 Merge program will combine records from
two sequentially-ordered diskette data sets into another diskette data
set. The records can be in ascending or descending order. An alternate
collating sequence can be specified. Multivolume data sets are
supported for both input and output. Merge parameters are entered at
the keyboard or read from a 'Command' data set which contains
previously recorded parameters. Use of the 'Command' data set allows
easier execution of most frequently desired merge functions.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: The 5280
Sort/Merge (5708-SM1) will be available to customers for preinstallation testing on IBM Test Center Systems in accordance with
IBM's Program Testing Policy.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The Sort/Merge will run on any IBM 5280 system. Minimum main
storage partition size requirements for the Sort and Merge Programs is
16K. The Sort and Merge ProQrams will take advantage of additional
main storage capacity if it is available.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1).
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM 5280 Sort/Merge Licensed Program Specifications (GC21-7800)
... IBM 5280 Sort / Merge Reference / Operation Manual (SC21-7789).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5708·SM1.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -----
PP 570S-UT1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - -~~~ ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280 UTI UTI ES
5708-UT1
PURPOSE
The 5280 Utilities licensed program provides the following utilities for
the 5280 user.
DESCRIPTION
Diskette Initialization Utility Formats the diskette according to user
requirements. The program will initialize diskettes 1 and 2 with sector
sizes of 128, 256 or 512 bytes, and diskette 20 with sector sizes of
256,512 or 1,024 bytes.
Diskette/Data Set Clear Utility: Performs the following functions:
DROP: Clears the data set(s) in preparation for the recording of
new data.
FREE: Deletes the data set(s) and its header label from the diskette
so that space is no longer assigned to that data set.
Diskette Label Maintenance Utility: Provides the user with the capability
to allocate new data sets, delete old data sets, and to modify volume
and data set labels. The following capabilities are provided:
ALLOCATE: Used to establish space for a new data set on a
diskette.
DELETE: Offers capability to either drop or free a header label.
MODIFY VOLUME LABEL: Can be used to alter the Volume 10,
Owner 10 and accessibility field.
MODIFY DATA SET LABEL: Provides the user with the capability
to modify header label fields.
Diskette Label List Utility: Provides the user with the capability to
display, print, or write to diskette: Diskette volume labels, data set
labels, data set names, and data set directories.
Printer format information for SCS processing may be supplied
from the keyboard or from a printer format record on diskette.
Printer forms alignment option. The first line of output may be
reprinted multiple times.
Print restart capability. For SCS data sets, the operator can halt
printing and restart at any point in the data set.
Multivolume input.
Resource Allocation Utility: Allows the user to display, alter, or delete the
logical device identifier and physical address of an existing entry, or add
an entry to the resource allocation table. The resource allocation table
contains physical device addresses with corresponding logical
identifiers, and is originally built using the System Configuration
Program [part of 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1)].
3740 Format Conversion Utility: Allows the user to convert 3740 key
entry program levels into source DE/RPG jobs. This utility converts
basic field definitions such as right adjust, skip, dup, bypass, self check,
field totals and their associated prompts. 3740 functions that are not
converted by this utility can be implemented by adding appropriate
DE/RPG statements to the DE/RPG program. Input to this utility is
3740 key entry string language from a diskette data set.
Diskette Compress Utility: Permits the user to rearrange data sets to
make one contiguous space out of the unused space between data, sets.
Deleted data sets are removed from the diskette.
Key Entry Utility: Provides the capability to create formats for basic key
entry functions using the 3740 key entry string language. The key entry
functions are functionally and operationally similar to the 3740 for enter,
update, and verify operations.
Diskette Copy Utility: Allows the user to copy all or a portion of a
diskette onto the same or another diskette. Multivolume data sets are
supported. The following functions are provided:
This program takes advantage of 5280 ease-of-use characteristics to
provide improvements in data set allocation, searches, and production
statistics. Basic 3740 key entry functions are provided, except for self
check, auxdup, 'numbers only' switch, online field totals, and non-key
entry functions, such as printing and offline field totals.
IMAGE COPY: Copies the entire contents of an input diskette onto
an output diskette. Input and output diskettes must be the same
type and format.
The 3740 string language is entered at the keyboard and the reSUlting
formats are immediately available or may be saved on diskette for later
use.
VOLUME COPY: Copies a group of data sets or the entire contents
of an input diskette onto an output diskette. Input and output
diskettes can be different types and have different formats.
Deleted data sets are not copied.
This utility is intended for simple key entry with little editing. It is not a
3740 emulator.
DATA SET COPY: Copies the contents of up to four input data
sets to an output data set.
SPECIFY RECORD COPY: Copies the contents of a data set
between 'from-to' relative record numbers to an output data set.
SPECIFY KEY COPY: Allows the user to specify by key(s) which
records are to be copied.
SINGLE DRIVE DATA SET COPY: Copies a data set from one
diskette to another using only one diskette drive.
Diskette Print Utility: Allows the user to print all or selected records on a
diskette. The program provides the following options:
Print all records in a data set.
Print all records from a group of data sets or all data sets.
Print all records in a data set between user-specified relative record
numbers.
Print all records in a data set matching a user-specified key(s).
"R'e~ords are printed exactly as recorded on diskette without reformat-
ting or editing.
" The, program also provides the capability to print a data set conSisting
. of printer output previously directed to diskette. The datl!J set must
have been croated from printer output (such as a DE/RPll compiler
output listing) directed to a diskette or from data transmitted over a
communications line, and must be a valid Standard Character String
(SCS) data sot with appropriate printer format control.
SCS/BSC,~37411 Print Utility: Provides the following print functions:
Print BSC (3741 protocol) data sets that havo not undergone the
Standard Character String (SCS) .mapping process. The utility will
perform th\)' SCS processing and provide a halt whon an invalid
oscape sequol)ce is encountered.
....
Print a singlEi: ~CS dl;lta set whict);'6'ontains'valid printer format
~:.
control ch~ract~~s.
Print a group ,bf SCS da~a' $ets, having a common forms type
identified. Thi, capability supports data sets transmitted to a 5280
in the form 'PRINTsss' or 'Asssxxxx'.
#).:
,
,
, Other features of ~his utility include::
;
,.
The Key Entry Utility requires an IPL diskette containing the SYSCFA or
SYSHELP data set (part of this licensed program).
System Status Utility: Provides the user with the capability to retrieve
certain system status information. Current system status can be
displayed, providing information on each main storage partition. This
information includes partition number, name of program currently being
executed (if any), partition size, and partition type (foreground or
'
background).
System configuration parameters, stored on an IPL diskette, can be
retrieved and displayed or printed. These parameters define the
configuration of the system for which the IPL diskette was generated,
and include: System size (main storage), common function area size,
printer type(s) and address(es), partition definitions (number, type and
size) and type and number of keyboards.
Menu Configuration Utility: Provides the programmer with the means to
create and maintain a menu for a set of programs or procedures. A
menu provides a displayed list of items (for example, job descriptions)
from which an operator makes a selection. Menu selection allows the
operator to start a job (or procedure) by simply selecting a menu item
number. This utility creates a data set which contains the menu(s) and
all information necessary to access, load, and initiate execution of the
associated programs and/or procedures. The data set is stored on the
diskette which contains the programs and/or procedures associated
with the menu(s).
Menu Utility: Provides the operator with the means to display and use
menus. Initial execution of this utility provides a menu containing an
entry for each online diskette which contains a menu data set. The
operator can then select a menu for a specific set of programs and
choose a specific job to be executed. The program will automatically be
loaded and executed in a pre-selected background partition, the
smallest available background partition, or the partition in which the
Menu Utility is executing.
Data Set Display Utility: Provides the user with an easy way to review the
contents of a data set. The unformatted records are presented on the
display, one line per record. For records with more than 80 characters,
the user can move the display right or left to view the entire record. Up
to 22 lines of records (depending on display size) are displayed on each
screen. The user can scroll forward and backward through the data set.
Each successive display will index through the data set a user-specified
number of records.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
------- - - - -----
Do not reproduce without written permission
=- --:§~5: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5280 Utilities (cont'd)
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: The 5280 Utilities
(5708-UT1) will be available to customers for pre-installation testing on
IBM Test Center Systems in accordance with IBM's Program Testing
Policy.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM 5280 Utilities (except Volume Copy, the write..,to-diskette
option of the Label List Utility, and the Menu Utility) will run on any IBM
5280 System. Volume Copy and the write-to-diskette option of the
Label List Utility will run on any IBM 5280 System which has, at a
minimum, two diskette drives. The Menu Utility will run on any IBM
5280 system which has a display size of 960 or 1,920 characters.
Minimum main storage partition size requirements are as follows: 8K
for the Key Entry Utility; 9K for the Diskette/Data Set Clear, Diskette
Label Maintenance, Diskette Label List, System Status*, Diskette
Initialization, Diskette Copy, Diskette Print, Resource Allocation,
Diskette Compress and 3740 Format Conversion Utilities; 12K for the
Data Set Display Utility; 16K for the Menu Utility; 20K for the Menu
Configuration Utility; and 22K for the SCS/BSC (3741) Print Utility.
Each of the Utilities (except Diskette Initialization, Resource Allocation,
Menu Configuration, and Menu) will take advantage of additional main
storage capacity if it is available.
*16K for the IPL diskette option
For the Key Entry Utility, if the user desires to maintain the elapsed time
production statistic, the Elapsed Time Counter or the Magnetic Stripe
Reader Adapter / Elapsed Time. Counter (special features) is required as
follows: For the 5285 - #3610, #4955, or #4960; for the 5286 - #3610
or #4955; for the 5288---#3610 or #4955.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1).
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM 5280 Utilities Licensed Program Specifications (GC21-7799) ...
IBM 5280 Utilities Reference/Operation Manual (SC21-7788).
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5708-UT1.2
Mar83
Major Revision
------- -------=- -~~~ ISG
PP 5714-RG1.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
S/38 RPG III (cont'd)
one or more KFLD operation codes to designate those fields comprising
the composite key.
Documentation Aids: Documentation enhancements include a
cross-reference allowing easy access to determine where fields, files,
and indicators are used.
DDS text descriptions are available to source documentation.
The SEU (or source file) sequence number is used as the default
number method for statements and diagnostics and is carried into the
object code to assist in execution time debugging. In addition, for any
statement found in error, Position 1 of the compiler listing will show an
asterisk. Asterisks will also appear under each field in error in the listing
of the source.
Nested level indication shows each statement level in a nest of DO
loops and IF/ELSE processing.
RELEASE 5.0 ENHANCEMENTS
System/38 RPG III is being enhanced in Release 5.0 to include support
for CPF commitment control, local data area, and for multiple devices in
a display or mixed file. CPF commitment control is a mechanism for the
user to code restart into interactive programs to assure the integrity of
changes made to one or more files. Multiple device and local data area
support provides functions similar to System/34.
.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM System/38 RPG III runs on all models of IBM System/38.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM System/38 RPG III and/or System/38 COBOL is designed to
operate with the IBM System/38 CPF (5714-SS1).
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM 5ystem/38 RPG 1/1 Licensed Program Design
(GC21-7760).
HIGHLIGHTS
New operation codes and file specification continuation options
have been added to provide multiple device support of display and
mixed files.
Access to the CPF Local Data Area provides function similar to that
provided for the System/34.
DESCRIPTION
Definition of files under CPF commitment control and operation codes
to cause commitment or return to the prior commitment boundary are
being added to RPG III. This support provides the programmer with
greater flexibility in designing interactive sessions and greater ease in
backing out undesired transactions.
The operation codes (ACO, REL, POST and NEXT) and file specification
continuation options (NUM, IND, SAVDS and 10) are being added for
display and mixed file support of multiple devices. These additions will
provide functions similar to those provided by the System/34.
The CPF Local Data Area can be read in at the start of an RPG III
program and written back at program termination. In addition, the IN
and OUT operation codes can be used with other data areas. This
support will provide a function similar to that provided by System/34.
CUSTOMER EDUCATION
System/38 RPG III Education is available as follows:
Title
Course
Fundamentals of RPG II Programming
RPG II Programming Workshop
RPG III Structurod Programming Workshop
02005*
01005*
A2004
Code
* Not required for the experienced RPG II Programmer
COMPATIBILITY
Usually with minor source changes, batch System/32, System/34, and
System/3 RPG II programs can be compiled and executed on
System/38. The changes principally involve the Header (H) specifica.;tion and File Description (F) specification.
CONVERSION REQUIREMENTS
Conversion requirements appear in tho 5/38 Installation Manual Conversio.n Planning (GC21-7732) .
. ;.' P~NNING INFORMATION
us'~r~:' Release 4.1 must be installed prior to installing
Program Use DuringCustomor Preinstallation Testing: The
System/38 RPG III licensed program (5714-RG1) is available to
customers for preinstallation testing on IBM Test Center Systems in
accordance with IBM's Program Testing Policy.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
-Installation of System/38 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. IBM may provide' marketing assistance,·in accordance with
Marketing and Service Guidelines in the GI Section, in the installation of
IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing
accurate ordering information, personnel selection' and training,
installation, and continued day-to-day. operation. lies solely with the
customer.
Objectives
The following documents are scheduled to be updated and available in
June 1983:
5/38 Guide to Publications, Glossary and Master Index (GC21-7726)
... 5/38 RPG 1/1 Reference Manual and Programmer's Guide (SC217725).
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
New operation codes and commitment file designation are being
added to support CPFcommitment control.
For existing
Release 5.0.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
------- -------==-==";'
- ---= ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 5714-5S1.1
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/38 CONTROL PROGRAM FACILITY (CPF)
5714-SS1
PURPOSE
The IBM System/38 Control Program Facility (CPF) licensed program,
used with IBM System/38 machine functions, provides these major
capabilities:
Work Management
Data Management
- Data Base Data Management (DB OM)
- Device Support (OS)
- Data Description Specifications (DDS)
Control Language
(eu
Data Base Data Management: Data Base Data Management support
is integrated within the System/38. The relationship between physical
data files is independent. Each file, may be created, modified, or
deleted without effect on other physical files.
The primary features of Data Base Data Management (DB OM) are:
Data Independence
Journal Facility
- Control Language Programming
- Single Consistent Interface
Security
Data Security
Data Maintenance
Data Sharing
Message Facilities
SpOOling
Communications
- System/38 as a terminal to System/370 IMS/VS or CICS/VS
(SNA/SDLC)
- System/3S as a host for remote 5250 Information Display
,
System devices
- System/38 Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) facilities
- Point-to-point
- Multipoint tributary
System/38 as a Peer to CICS OS/VS and CICS/OOS/VS Version
1 Release 6 and another System/38 using New SNA (LU6.2 and
PU2.1).
Installation (System Specialization)
System Services
-
- Data Base Data Management
- Device Support
- Data Description Specifications (DDS)
Test and Debug Facilities
Library Facility
Journal Facility
Save/Restore Facility
Service Facilities
File Reference Facility
Copy Facility
Power Warning Feature
System/38 Data Base Data Management is designed to simplify
operations and increase user productivity. The user need only describe,
create, and store the data once in a physical data file. System/38 Data
Base Data Management provides the capability for multiple users to
concurrently access that data logically in various organizations,
sequences, and formats (logical file), regardless of the actual physical
structure of that data. This provides a high degree of data independence to individual programs and users. Options are available to specify
the type of maintenance to be performed to the sequencing of data
including immediate, delayed, and rebuild.
A journal facility exists to allow for forward or backout recovery. Once
a file is specified to be journaled, all changes are implicitly captured by
the system. The journal may also be of benefit for such functions as
faster daily backup, security, audit trail, activity reporting, and
debugging. Commands are provided for recovery, display, and
management of the journal objects.
Data security is provided by controlling ownership, authorization to use
the data, and is actually a function of System/38 Security. (See
"Security" for more information on Security features.)
With physical data only residing in one place and in one physical
structure, it is easier to maintain. When data is altered in the physical
file, the same program or any other proQram which subsequently
retrieves that data, receives the updated version. Records added to the
files are available to users when they are written to the file.
Work Management: The primary functions of the System/38 CPF
Work Management are to:
Data Base Data Management permits multiple users to access data.
For updates, it will lock the record being updated until the update is
done, to assure that all update requests are serially handled. It also
provides the capability to lock data files for exclusive use until
relinquished.
Accept and process, concurrently, work from multiple users of the
system.
Device Support: System/38 Device Support will support the following
devices:
DESCRIPTION
Support batch, interactive, and spooling functions.
System Console
Allocate and control the usage of system resources in a multitasking environment.
5250 Information Display System devices including local and
remote displays and printers (5256/5224/5225)
Users from any 5250 System display device (or the system console)
may initiate work, either interactive or batch. Work Management
processes the job requests, acquires the system resources required for
the jobs, executes, and terminates the jobs. Work Management
supports transaction processing functions.
Work Management handles the contention resulting from multiple jobs
competing concurrently for system resources. In order to accomplish
this, it manages the scheduling and queuing necessary to share the
system resources among all jobs. The user may control the job
processing requirements and priorities through the Control Language.
All work is managed concurrently in subsystems (a defined operating
environment such as batch, interactive, and spool), and jobs may be
allocated to pools (a logical division of main storage) within a subsystem. These features permit the user to establish special operating
environments, and control the execution of high priority jobs.
Data Management
Data Management access methods support sequential, indexed,
and direct (relative record number) file organization, and permit
multiple user-defined indices per file.
Data Management provides the support for disk data file handling
such as create, add, delete, and traditional data I/O operations like
read and write.
Data Management provides the I/O management for all I/O
devices. (Note that disk storage is not considered I/O on
System/38.)
Data Management provides support enabling the user to describe
data and device files external to the application programs.
Data Management includes support for:
Diskette Magazine Drive
5424 MFCU
5211 model 2 Printer
5219, 5224, 5225 Printers
3262 Printer
3203 model 5 Printer
3370 Direct Access Storage Device
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape
System/38 Device Support is similar to data management and I/O
supervisor routines for devices on other IBM systems, but with
enhanced capability.
System/38 provides device independence by permitting the user to
define device files (via DDS) external to the program. The user then has
increased flexibility to direct and controL device I/O through Control
Language overrides independent of program instruction. For example,
a program may have output coded for a workstation printer but
selection of a specific printer could be made upon program execution.
Also, devices may be dynamically allocated, or deallocated, to active
processes. System/38 Device Support will support device file
definitions whether coded in'the program or defined to the device data
management, and relieve the programmer of device attachment l11ethod
(local or remote). ,,"
,
,
.'
,
,
•
Subfile capability is provided for •display device~. This reduces the
programming effort for the user to, group records of like format, for
concurrent display, modification,· or input: For example, a display
device operator may, enter, an entire screen, of order entry line items
------- -------=-:=:: :§~E: ISG
PP 5714-SS1.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/38 Control Program Facility (CPF) (cont'd)
before submitting them to the system for processing by the program
one record at a time.
Also extensive data manipulating functions such as screen formatting,
editing, and validity checking are supported for display devices.
Data Description Specification: The Data Description support in
System/38 Data Management is the user's means to describe files for
the data base and devices independent of application programs.
The files may be described once external to the application program.
The external description is automatically added to the program at
compile time. This reduces redundant I/O coding for programs using
the same data. It also gives a consistent view of the structure of the
data to each using program, thus reducing transcription, and associated
errors in repetitious I/O coding.
Display device formats for display I/O are entered via DDS. During
format description, data base field definitions can be used, and editing
and validity checking features are available. These capabilities greatly
simplify the application programming.
The user enters source description information on a Data Description
Specification Form, similar in approach to RPG coding. For syntax
checking while entering the source description, the user may optionally
use the Source Entry Utility on the System/38 .•
Data records are stored in online auxiliarY disk devices ih the order they
are received by the system. These physical files may be accessed in
arrival sequence or by field(s) defined to produce a composite key. All
records in a physical file have the same format.
.
A logical file is the vehicle to allow the user to change the presentation
of the data in a physical file. For example, with logical files the user
may:
Specify a different format than the physical file. These formats can
specify field reordering, omission, concatenation, and different field
attributes.
Select or omit records from the physical file.
Specify a different ordering (key) than the physical file.
Specify records from multiple physical files sequenced together by
a composite key (similar to RPG matching record logic).
DDS supports SNA/SDlC LU-1, SNA/SDLC LU6.2 and BSC
communications device file record formats similar to the method
used for data base files. Functional control of communication
operation is managed through use of communications-specific
DDS keywords.
Control language: To request system function, the user enters Cl
commands, which are abbreviations of words for each command.
Parameters are also entered to tailor the functions performed by the
co;mmand.
The System/38 Control Program Facility through the Control Language
(Cl) provides:
entry by the system. Commands may be selected from a menu and
then displayed, along with the parameter options, from which the user
can enter, select, or default.
!
,I
The experienced user may learn and enter the commands to execute a
job. There is ease-of-use for the experienced user also. Command
statement structure is free form, no fixed position requirements for
parameters. Parameters may be positional or keyWord form, and most
of the parameters have default values.
Special menus are provided for the system operator and the programmer. These menus are designed to simplify the typical requests and
also allow the entry of any command.
Workstation users without data processing experience can work from
application menu displays (user-coded). This means reduced need for
them to have detailed knowledge of the Control Language or the
system, and their access to the system can be easily limited and
controlled.
Another aid permits the user to get additional description of an error
message by depressing the 'HELP' key on the keyboard.
Control Language Programs: A CL program is a group of CL
commands converted to an executable program by the CL compiler. CL
programs allow the user to group CL commands and application
programs together. CL programs permit the definition of data as
variables (fields), and can pass data (parameters) to other programs.
The 'IF' command allows conditional execution of commands based on
the result of logical expressions. Branching is also supported.
The user can define screens (menus and prompts) and display them
under control of a Cl program.
Values for parameters for commands in CL programs can be supplied at
execution time via a prompt to the user. Most commands are valid
within CL programs.
The system's program debug support is available for Cl programs.
User-Created Commands: The System/38 users can define their own
commands to invoke system function or a user program. Associated
parameters can be defined and validity checked during execution. This
feature is useful for those users who need a specialized operating
environment, or those who wish to reduce or restrict the parameter
entry choices for users of the system.
The character set used for the Control Language is EBCDIC (Extended
Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code). All 256 EBCDIC characters
can be used within comments and quoted character strings (literals),
but only the following subset of EBCDIC characters can be used to
code CL commands:
26 letters (A through Z)
10 numbers (0 through 9)
3 alphabetic
ext~nders ($, #, @)
Special characters
An easy-to-Iearn and use, consistent interface for the user to
request and control system and application function.
(For the special characters and their function, see the IBM System/38
CPF Reference Manual - Control Language, SC21-7731.)
Commands executable from console, workstation, or batch job
stream.
Message Facilities: Message facilities can be used to exchange
information among users of the system or among programs (system
and application) and users.
CL programs callable by RPG III, COBOL, or other CL programs.
A tailorable interface, with user-created commands to meet
varying requirements.
Information
Compilable control language capability.
Control Language for the System/38 is described in three sections:
Message Handling provides support for establishing a message,
providing a path for it to travel, controlling traffic on the path, and
getting it to its destination. Messages can be displayed immediately or
queued for display when requested.
- User command selection from menus
- Prompting by the system for parameters
- Free form syntax
Control LanguaQe Programs
Compiled co~~~~ds. '
Manipulation of variables
Call command with parameter capability
User-defined logic flow, '. ' "
Access to DDS (for display formats)
System program testing ,support
Interprogram communication (via message queues and data
areas)
User-Cre~ted
Commands
..... To fulfill special needs
- To control, parameter sele'?tion
Ease-of-Use Fa.cili~ies: System/38 supports both
and the experienced Control language user.
inexperienced user in the learn-as-you-go mode.
unfamiliar with the Control Language can be guided
• ' Broadcast
Reply
. Ease-of-Use Facilities
-
Message Handling on System/38 provides for creation, storage,
queuing, routing, and authorizing messages for:
the' inexperienced
Cl supports the
Authorized users
through command
Specific system level messages are placed in the system history file.
All entries are logged with date and time, identify the source of the
message, and have an identification number. The usor may process the
system history file. '
Users of message facilitios can croato impromptu or predefined
messages. Impromptu mossagos will usually be simple text strings
created to handle specific situations, such as messages between
workstation usors. Predefined messages are created as' message
descriptions, with a unique identification number,' and stored in a
message file for subsequent retrieval. They will usually be error
messages sent by programs encountering certain defined conditions .
------- - - - -.=.---- -:5~E: ISG .
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 5714-SS1.3
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/3S Control Program Facility (CPF) (cont'd)
SNA-ALERT Facility: The System/38 alert function notifies an SNA
remote S/370, 30XX, or 43XX host network operator of conditions
detected by the System/38. The alert support provides significant
function to be used for centralized remote host problem determination.
The following support includes:
Alert generation by the System/38 upon certain failing conditions.
The alert and associated information are sent via SNA/SDLC to the
remote host system.
The companion host programs support processing of the alert data
to enable the user to centralize network problem determination.
The required host programs that support the System/38 alert consist of
the Network Communications Control Facility (NCCF) and Network
Problem Determination Application (NPDA). Also required is one SNA
communications line to the host system.
Spooling: Spooling enhances device I/O by controlling device
contention, decreasing process execution time, and increasing user
control of jobs in the system. Since programs get their input from, and
direct their output to, spool queues (instead of directly interacting with
the I/O device), multiple concurrently executing programs can appear
to be using the same device. This also means that program execution
time is not restricted to the speed of the I/O device.
The significant features of System/38 Spooling are:
Multiple input/output queues
Multiple output copies
One program can output to multiple files
Workstation control of queues
Display of spooled output
Output spool queues can be directed to any device
Input job streams from external devices (card, diskette) or from the data
base can be processed by spool readers or entered directly onto an
input queue. Output to printers, punches, and diskettes is processed by
spool writers. Multiple spool queues can be established, and spooling
provides the capability for the system or workstation operators to
display or modify their spool queue attributes.
Spool support permits interleaving of output from multiple jobs to a
spool queue, and from a single job to multiple spool files.
Communications
SNA/SDLC as a 'terminal: System/38 communicates as a terminal to
System/370 CICS/VS and IMS/VS using Synchronous Data Link
Control (SDLC) as a part of Systems Network Architecture (SNA).
System/38 communicates to IMS/VS applications executing under
OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS), or CICS/VS applications executing under
DOS/VSE, OS/VS1, or OS/VS2 (MVS) in System/370 models 145 to
168 for IMS/VS, and models 135 to 168 for CICS/VS, and 3031,
3032, 3033, 4331 and 4341 processors. Communication to any of
these operating systems when running under VM/370 is also
supported. Communication is via the levels of VTAM, ACF/VTAM,
ACF/VTAME, TCAM or ACF/TCAM supported by IMS/VS or
CICS/VS at the time of shipment. NCP/VS or ACF/NCP/VS will be
required as appropriate.
Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC): System/38 Release 4 CPF
Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) support provides the
facilities which allow the user to write application programs to
communicate with other systems and devices which are compatible
with 3780 BSC implementation.
For all devices listed below, it is the user's responsibility to provide the
application program which uses the System/38 BSC support, and to
ensure compatibility with supported protocols and/or unique data
formats required by the attached devices.
System/3S Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) program-toprogram over polnt-to-point switched or polnt-to-point nonswitched
facilities
Communications to the following systems and devices are supported:
f'
System/3
System/32
System/34
System/38
Series / 1
System/370, 30XX, 43XX
DOS/VSE
OS/VS1
OS/VS2
CICS/VS (Version 1.5.0)
3741
5110/5120
5230
5260
5280
BTAM-ES
BTAM/TCAM
BTAM /TCAM
OS/VS or DOS/VSE BTAM
System/3S Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) As A Multipoint
Tributary are:
Multipoint Tributary - The System/38 will act as one, or several,
terminals (or tributaries) on a nonswitched multipoint BSC line.
The BSC line is scheduled by a BSC control station or host. The
host may be a System/3 with CCP, a Series/1, or a System/370,
30XX, or 43XX. The System/38 can recognize up to 32 poll and
selection addresses for each line.
Multiple Session Support - The System/38 will support up to 32
sessions per line when attached as a multipoint tributary station.
This is accomplished by assigning one of, the 32 polling and
selection addresses to each session. The support will provide for
multiple logical sessions to occur concurrently over a single link. A
maximum of 256 logical sessions per system is allowed.
Additional Systems/Devices Supported - The System/38 acting
as a multipoint tributary supports BSC attachment of the following
systems and devices:
-
3776/3777 Batch Terminals
5520 Administrative System
6240 Communicating Mag Card Typewriter
6580 Displaywriter System
6640 Document Printer
6670 Information Distributor
OS /6 Office System
CMCII Communicating Mag Card Typewriter II
Other BSC Features
Component Selection - Some BSC terminals have several attached
I/O devices or components. System/38 provides support through
DDS and Function Management for the user to select the device or
component to which the data is to be transmitted. This function is
accomplished by inserting the component selection characters
inside of the outbound text. The component selection function is a
program-to-terminal protocol which operates only on point-topoint lines and only on WRITE operations.
Compression/Decompression - This constitutes a technique for
utilizing line time more efficiently.
- Compression: Sequence of three or more blanks, X'4O', are
replaced by a two-character sequence for transmission.
- Decompression: Data that has been received from the BSC line
is scanned for controls in the data stream that define how to
reconstruct the original data.
Note: Compression and Decompression are mutually exclusive'
with transparent data, user-blocked data, and ASCII.
Trailing Blank Truncation - This permits the System/38 to utilize
communications line time more efficiently. In some applications,
the fixed length record has a variable amount of data at the
beginning of each record and the end is filled with blanks. The
trailing blank truncation facility removes the trailing blanks when
creating a transmission block. The trailing blanks are replaced with
a blocking character such as IRS or ITB or a BSC ending character,
ETX or ETB, as appropriate.
Note: Trailing blank truncation is mutually exclusive with transparency, user-blocked data, and blocked data with *NOSEP.
,
System/38 Release 5.0 CPF Binary Synchronous Communications
(BSC) support provides additional function which allows the System/38
to appear as a 3270 Information Display System to a remote host
computer.
System/38 3270 Device Emulation consists of two offerings:
The System/38 5250, 5291 and 5292 displays and printers will
emulate the functions of a 3270. No System!38 user program~
ming is required.
,
A 3270 program interface is provided which allows a System/38
application program to communicate with application programs
operating on a remote host system.
'
System/3S as a Host for Romote 5250 Information Display System
Devices: The System/38 CPF also provides remote communication
support for the 5250 System family of terminals. ,(As described in the
M5381 pages, the 5250 system is supported locally by th~,;workstation
controller.)
,"
,');:
The 5250 System is supported as an SNA,device. Although the remote
communication attachment of the 5250 System devices may be by
switched or leased line, the devices have the same capabilities 85 local
'
'\' '
directly-attached d~vices. "
When featured for nonswitched multipoint communications facilities,
the System/38 Communications Attachment feature provides ha,rdware
Autopoll for up ,to eight (8) control units (5251 mdls 2 and 12) per TP
line. Anytime a.TP line has more than eight (8) control units varied
online, polling is automatically tra.nsferred ~o s},stem microc~de. 1he
system microcode supports a maximum of fifty (50) control Units vaned
online (being polled) per line.
------- -----------_.-------- ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 5714-551.4
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5ystem/3S Control Program Facility (CPF) (cont'd)
System/3S as a Peer to CICS/OS/VS and CICS/DOS/VS Version 1
Release 6 and to another System/3S. The System/38 Peer support is
based on new SNA definitions (SNA LU6.2 and PU2.1).
Attachment to a S/370 is as an SDLC secondary. Attachment to
another System/38 requires SDLC primary on one System/38 and
SDLC secondary on the other System/38(s). The link configuration can
be either point-to-point nonswitched, point-to-point switched, or
multipoint nonswitched. The link speeds supported are all of the
standard speeds, up to 57.6K bps.
These SNA extensions are designed to provide common session
protocols for both document interchange and distributed data
processing. This provides the base by which users can establish a
single network definition for distributed processing.
These new SNA extensions now allow System/38 to participate in a
transaction processing environment as well as in. the batch and
interactive environment. Within a network, the System/38 can serve
as either the front-end processor or the back-end processor.
Communications Error Recovery Procedure (ERP): The enhanced
ERP will enable users to recover from many communication errors with
little or no operator intervention. When the recovery process begins
after an error is encountered, jobs will not need to be canceled, nor will
the communications objects need to be varied off. The application will
need to either release the device or close the file. If communications
are to be resumed, the applications will acquire the device (if it was
released) or open the file (if it was closed). All communications (BSC
and SDLC) devices, local workstations, and multidropping of 5250 and
Advanced Program-to-Program Communications (APPC) devices on
the same line will be supported.
Installation (System Specialization): The Installation facility of
System/38 CPF provides the means for the user to install the Control
Program Facility. This substitutes for the traditional system generation
which is not required on the System/38.
To install, the user loads CPF through the diskette device or a tape
device attached to the system. This establishes default libraries, user
profile definitions, basic I/O definitions, etc. The system is ready to
use, but the user may want to do some additional system specialization
such as:
Describe additional I/O devices.
Define additional subsystems.
Define additional user profiles.
Modification of the supplied definitions.
library Facility: Library support on the System/38 provides the user the
means to operationally grQup related objects. Objects are programs,
file definitions, data files, etc. Libraries are used to logically (not
physically) group objects in any division meaningful to the user, such as
by application or by ownership. An object is an item of a library and no
two objects of the same name and type may be a member of the same
library. Although a system library is installed with the system, mult!ple
user-defined libraries are permitted. The user controls object
maintenance in the libraries.
Save/Restore Facility: The Save/Restore Facility on System/38
supports the 3410/3411 tape drive and the diskette magazine drive and
the magnetic tape drives in the following functions:
Back-up of user libraries and objects
Keeping seldom used or sensitive information offline
Data interchange between System/38s
Back-up of the system library
The SAVE commands are used to write a copy of a library, all libraries,
an object, or a group of objects in a library to the save device. The
RESTORE commands are used to restore to the system saved objects
and libraries. The system maintains a directory of saved objects and
can identify the most recent copy of a saved object. The system can
identify by date and time when an object was last changed.. To provide
for faster daily backup, a command is provided to save only those
.
objects which have changed after a specific date.
Service Facilities: CPF supports servicing of CPF, the System/38, and
workstations. Many service functions can be done concurrent to other
system operations enhancing productivity for IBM and our customers.
(Note: Concurrent servicing is accomplished through the Concurrent
Service Monitor (CSM) which is a part of CPF.)
Some of the service facilities available, through Control Language
commands, to support CPF and the System/38 are:
For CPF
- Problem analysis and diagnosis through dumps of internal job
information and traces of processing flow.
- Problem reporting by prodUCing diagnostic documentation on a
diskette for IBM service use.
- Problem resolution by installing IBM-supplied program changes.
For the System/38
- Providing the machine error log for print or display.
- Production of a trace of internal machine activities.
System specialization can be dono anytime and does not require a
system generation function.
The CPF provides support through which workstation device operation
can be checked and workstation printer operation can be verified.
System Services
File Reference Facility: The File Reference facility provides the user with
information about the definition, organization and usage of the data
base. It also provides information about the definition and usage of
device files. It will provide significant aid in two areas:
Test And Debug Facilities: The Test and Debug Facilities offer
System/38 users significant productivity in the testing and training
area.
The user can copy production files and programs to a 'test' library to
create a test environment nearly identical to the production environment. The user still has the full range of system function and can
observe and control operation of the program, but the user is prevented
from updating production files. This also permits testing to occur
concurrent to othor operations.
For completo protection of the production environment, the security
features of the system can be used to prevent any access of the
production objects by the development planner.
. This tost environment is also useful for training operators because:
It duplicates the real environment.
It protects production files.
Debug support provides error diagnosis tools for the programmer.
Debug requires no special statements in the source program. Through
CL commands t~e user may:
Halt executio~ at a'specified statement number (source listing).
Tracethe sequericebf statement execution.
Display and modify progr~in vnriables (fields).
Obtain a printed copy of the interactive dialog with the system.
The CL command for program debug places programs in debug mode.
In debug mode, breakpoints to halt execution (source program
statement numbers) may be specified. For trace, ranges of statement
numbers may be entered' to determine the sequence of statement
execution. Commands for breakpoint or trace do not affect any other
concurrent operation of that same program.
Documentation of the system.
Supplying information to help determine the effect of planned
changes.
Some functions providing information on file and field usage throughout the system can be output to a disk file for subsequent access and
manipulation by the user. The following information is available:
Files currently using a specified format.
Files dependent on a specified file and type of dependency.
File members dependent on a specified file member and type of
dependency.
Field descriptions by file.
Data file usage by compiled program.
File Reference Facility functions can be invoked in interactive or batch
mode. Output can be directed to a display or a printer, and in most
cases to a data base file.
Copy Facility: The System/38 copy function provides some enhancements to the traditional file copying capabilities. The copy support can:
Copy data from diskette, card, magnetic tape, or data base files to
diskette, card, printer, magnetic tape, or data base files.
Provide selection of records to be copied by the ~alue of:
- Fields within records
- Characters within fields
- Record formats
Provide for adding records to an existing file member.
Provide for the copying of an output spool file to a data base file to
allow conversion of these files to microfiche applications, transmission to other systems, or processing of spooled output.
--------------ISG
PP
Do not reproduce without written permission
5714~SS1.5
Mar 83
":''::::§~E:
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/3S Control Program Facility (CPF) (cont'd)
Provide for the selection of a record format when a multiformat
(logical file) is being copied.
Provide for reorganization of a data base file.
Provide for a high speed copy of data base files which reads and
writes disk sectors as opposed to individual records.
Power Warning Feature: CPF provides progral)'lming support for
user-supplied Uninterruptable Power Supply devices. A system value
will control which message queue will be sent a message if normal
power is lost or restored. This .allows user program logic to control
termination/continuation of the System/38 operation.
Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: The
System/38 Control Program Facility (5714-SS1) is available to
customers for pre-installation testing on IBM Test Center Systems in
accordance with IBM's Program Testing Policy.
CUSTOMER RESPONSI~ILlTIES
Installation of System/38 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. IBM may provide marketing assistance, in accordance with
Marketing and Service Guidelines in the GI Section, in the installation of
IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing
accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training,
installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the
customer.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM System/38 CPF runs on all models of the IBM System/38.
All IBM licensed programs for System/38 ar!; designed to operate in an
environment that includes the System/38 CPF (5714-SS1) or its
equivalent. The licensed program order should be entered via AAS at
the same time as the system order. IBM's ability to provide concurrent
hardware maintenance is dependent upon functions provided by the
CPF or its full equivalent support.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: None
i
CPF Main Storage Usage: All Control Program Facility instructions are
pageable, and therefore, invoked by the system as needed. The
amount of main storage occupied at any given time is greatly dependent upon system functions concurrently and dynamically invoked by
multiple system users.
SECURITY
Security on System/38 provides: the user a selectable degree of
protection of the system and data that can be increased by stages. Its
major features are:
User-controlled level of security
Security Officer to provide security control
Ownership/ Authorization of objects (such as data files and
programs) is user-controlled.
The degree of security exercised on the system can range from minimal
security, to authorization for use to each individual data file, program,
and device. The security officer 'owns' the system objects, has full
rights of access across the system, and controls enrollment of users of
the system. All users of the system are enrolled and have a user profile
which controls their access to system and data resources. Security is
based on ownership and authorization of objects in the system.
Objects are data files, programs, formats, device descriptions, etc. All
objects; in the system have an owner.: The owner has all rights to the
object and may authorize various classes of access and usage of these
objects to other enrolled users of the system.
Security support is divided into two types of functions - the definition
and the enforcement of security procedures. Definition functions of
Security are:
The Security Officer - This person has full authority across the
system and controls the installation security procedures.
The User Profile - All users enrolled on the system' have a user
profile. It is a collection point for all security information related to
each user.
User Idehtification - All users of the system must identify
,
themselves, tO,the system~
Object Authorization - Specifies the individual user's rights of use
of the system resources.
Enforcement functions of Security are:
User Verification - Verifies a user's identity tocontrol.access to the
system.
Object Verification - Assures user's right to access system devices,
'
programs, and data objects.
Security Information Displays - Provides security status displays to
the security officer to aid controlling security.
Security may be controlled by library a'nd/or the'objects within a library.
A special function exists to allow the owner of a program to allow
authorized users of the program to use their authorizations. This can be
used to minimize the number of detail specifications and ensure that
certain functions and file accesses are performed only under the control
of specific application programs. Data Base allows specific file formats
to be created to provide a form of field level security.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM System/38 Control Program
Specifications (GC21-7763).
Facility
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
Licensed
Program
-- .........
- -------:: - - ::E~E: ISG
PP 5714-551.6
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
New
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/3S CONTROL PROGRAM FACILITY (CPF)
RELEASE 5.0 ENHANCEMENTS
5714-551
PURPOSE
IBM System/38 CPF is enhanced in Release 5.0 to include: Support for
additional devices, communication enhancements, a commitment
control (recovery/restart) function and many other functional improvements.
Release 5.0 HIGHLIGHTS
Communications Support
- Advanced Program-to-Program Communications (APPC)
- SNA-Alert Support
- Mixed file and High-Level Language (HLL) Multiple Device
Support
- Error Recovery Procedure Enhancements
- High-Speed Line Enhancements
- 3270 Device Emulation
-
Copy file enhancements and new copy commands
Most create commands will use source text as a default
Display file description command option for outfile
Increase in number of values for the DDS VALUES keyword
Messages used as constants in DDS
Command selection menu enhancements
Programmer and systems operator menu prompting for SBMJOB
option
Option to preserve edit codes and system values at install
Multidimension array support in debug functions
RPG auto report added to programmer menu
Forty-eight character names in debug functions
Ease of conversion from System/34
- Several of the previously described native functions will provide a
simpler conversion from System/34.
Device Support
- Existence check on media (diskette, tape)
- Diskette command improvements
Commitment Control
- A commitment boundary restart aid, which assists in restarting
following abnormal job or system termination.
Spool Enhancements
- DSPOUTQ identification of forms type and number of copies
- Start a writer to a forms type
- Support of change writer
Save / Restore
-
Save/Restore of logical file access paths
Save/Restore of message, job and output queue descriptions
Option to prevent incomplete saves
Optional listing for restore objects
Improved allocation of source members
Improved tape error recovery
Journal
-
Protection against deletion of unsaved journal receiver
New default for Apply Journal Change command
Retrieve Journal Entry command
Compare Journal Images command
Enhanced journal displays
Work Management
Local data area
Change of a job's execution attributes
Option to control job log creation
DSPJOB enhancements
Job start/ completion message enhancements
Display Active Job (DSPACTJOB) and Display System Status
(DSPSYSSTS) enhancements
- Job description parameter in user profile
- Retaining once active batch jobs on job queues
-
Security
•
Operations from the DSPOBJAUT display
Generic grant/ revoke of authority
Revoke object authority feedback
Display user profile option for changes
Authority checking from system menus/displays
Library Support
- Add and remove from library list commands
- Delete by genoric name
- Library display command enhancements
CL/Promptor
-
Inquiry message capability on unmonitored messages
Send usor message command
Data base sequential input in CL programs
Retrieve job attributes command enhancements
Selective prompting
Noninteractive commands used with the prompter
Return res~lting command from prompter without executing
Data Base
..-
Rename member ,command
,
User notification df access path rebuild at open
Access patH rebuild options at IMPL
Option to force access paths more frequently
Freeing of space with CLRPFM
Other Enhancements
- Conditional defaults for inquiry m'essages
DESCRIPTION
Communications
Advanced Program to Program Communications (APPC)
APPC is a CPF enhancement that provides a program-to-program
protocol between two applications in different products. APPC is
based on SNA architecture and provides a peer relationship
between the interconnected products. This support allows
System/38 to function as a departmental node with the ability to
duplicate systems between departments. Additionally, it provides
horizontal growth capability.
SNA-Alert Support
This enhancement allows the remote host network operator to be
notified of certain system conditions to assist in problem determination.
Mixed File and High Level Language (HLL) Multiple Device Support
This enhancement provides new function and an improved
interface for multiple device applications.
Communications Error Recovery Procedures (ERP)
This function enables users to recover from many communication
errors with little or no operator intervention.
High-speed Lines Enhancement
Allows high-speed (57.6K bps) local attachment of System/38 to
3705.
Allows high-speed (56.0K bps) remote communication to 3705,
4331 Communications Adapter, and System/38.
3270 Device Emulation
This enhancement allows the System/38 and locally or remotely
attached 5250 Information Display System devices to appear as a
3270 control unit and devices.
For more information on the Communications Enhancements for
Release 5.0, see Programming Announcement Letter dated January 14,
1983.
DEVICE SUPPORT
Existence Check on Media Commands
The new commands CHKDKT and CHKTAP are provided to allow
the user to check for the existence of a specific volume (or file)
lable on al diskette or tape. For example, this allows a program to
precheck the existence of the correct media before proceeding on a
specific function using that media.
Diskette Command Improvements
The SUFFIX parameter has been added to the CLRDKT, INZDKT,
RNMDKT, and DLTDKTLBL commands. The RNMDKT command
now supports a range of diskettes within a magazine thus allowing
an entire magazine to be renamed.
Commitment,Control
Commitment control is a function designed to assist the user in
recovery/restart of applications. The most difficult aspect of restart in
a complex transaction environment is ensuring that restart will occur
when all files are at a specific point. Commitment control ensures that
a job is at a specific point (called a commitment boundary) in the event
of a system or job abnormal termination.
The user defines his commitment control environment in CL statements
and specifies the files to be under commitment control in RPG or
COBOL. New operations are supported in RPG, COBOl, and CL to
allow the user to request a group of data base changes to be committed
or rolled back. The rollback function allows the user to easily cancel a
group of data base changes when the application program senses a
need to cancel the effect of a transaction. Through commitment
------- -------=-===";'
- ----= ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
PP 5714-551.7
Mar83
New
System/3S CPF RS.O (cont'd)
control, the system will implicitly roll back any uncommitted changes in
case of a system or job failure.
Restart can normally be provided by user coding which would access
the la~t transaction record entered by an operator or by using a
commitment control notify object. The notify object allows the program
to store information about the last transaction before a failure in a data
base file, a message queue, or a data area.
Data base files used in a commitment control environment must be
journaled to the same journal.
All data base changes which are part of a commitment boundary will be
locked until either a commit or rollback occurs. Optionally, records can
also be locked in read-only files where the contents of a record should
remain static until a commit or rollback occurs.
Commitment control functions will also allow the user to retain locks on
mUltiple records in a single file.
Because the commitment control function will cause data base records
to be locked until a commit or rollback occurs, the user must consider
the. frequency of issu!ng a commit or rollback. A commitment boundary
which can span multiple enter keys can cause other users to wait until
the commitment boundary is reached. In the event of a record lock
timeout, the message which occurs will be enhanced to include the job
name which has caused the record to be locked. The DSPJOB menu
will provide an option to show the commitment control status.
SPOOL
DSPOUTQ support of Forms Types and Copies
The DSPOUTQ display will add columns for forms type and number
of copies. This information will be truncated if displayed at the
64-character console device.
Start a Writer to a Forms Type
A new parameter will be added to STRPRTWTR to allow the user
to control what form types in an output queue should be output. A
CHGWTR command will also be available to allow formtype and
output queue to be changed for an active printer writer without
ending the writer. These functions should allow better control
when dealing with spocial form types and help minimize the
overhead associated with canceling and starting a writer mUltiple
times to the same device.
Support of Change Writer
A CHGWTR command will be available to allow form type and
output queue to be changed for an active printer writer without
ending the writer.
SAVE/RESTORE
Save/Restore of Logical File Access Paths
An option on the save commands will allow associated logical file
access paths to be saved. An access path will only be saved or
restored when all related physical files are saved or restored. This
option will cause an incrosse in the amount of save time and media
usage, but will decrease the amount of time necessary to complete
a restore operation since the associated access paths will not have
to be rebuilt.
Save/Restore of Message, Job and Output Queue Descriptions
The object types of *MSGQ, *JOBQ, and *OUTQ may' be saved
and restored. Only the description (not the contents) Will be saved
and restored. This facilitates the transfer and recovery of libraries.
All object types are now supported by Save/Restore.
save operations since each member will have only a single disk
allocation.
Improved Tape Error Recovery
Tape error recovery has been improved to allow the user to mount
a new tape when media errors occur during a save operation. This
will eliminate most situations where the save function must be
aborted due to media errors, by allowing the user to continue on a
new tape.
JOURNAL
Delete Journal Receiver Protection
If an attempt is made to delete a journal receiver that has never
been saved, an inquiry message will be sent to the user allowing
the option to cancel or ignore. The message should assist in
prE!venting the user from destroying his means of backup or audit
trail.
New Default for Apply Journal Change Command
The default for the TOENT parameter will be changed to
*LASTRST. This will allow the defaults of the command to be used
in a normal recovery environment where the user restores his last
backup and reapplies the entries in the journal from the last save up
to the restore.
Retrieve Journal Entry Command
A RTVJRNE command will be provided to retrieve a specific journal
entry and return the entry into CL variables. Similar selection
criteria as with the current DSPJRN command may be used. This
simplifies determining the journal sequence number of journal
entri~s which may be used to automate certain recovery or backup
functions.
Compare Journal Images Command
A command will be available to compare the before and after
images for record level changes recorded in a journal and highlight
the differences. A listing form of output is provided. This can
assist in problem determination.
Enhanced Journal Displays
The journal displays will be enhanced to include such things as an
explanation of the code and type of journal entries and the ability to
switch from a character to hex display.
WORK MANAGEMENT
Local Data Area
Each job will have an implicitly defined 512-byte character data
area. This can be used for Intrajob communication and it is also
implicitly submitted to any batch Jobs when SBMJOB is used. The
local data area will have a name of *LDA and may be accessed by
CHG/RTV /DSPDTAARA commands. The DSPDTAARA command
is enhanced to support hex values. The local data area is an
alternative means of passing variables within a job and can also be
used .to pass variables to batch jobs.
Changing of a Job's Execution Attributes
New options on the CHGJOB command will allow a change to the
execution attributes of EXCPTY, TIMESLlCE, PURGE, and
DFlWAIT. The user making the change may change any job on the
system, but must have the special *JOBCTL authority defined in his
user profile. This allows improved control over execution attributes.
Option to Prevent Incomplete Saves
Option to Control Job Log Creations
An option will be added to the SAVOBJ/SAVCHGOBJ/ SAVLlB
commands to ensure that all objects can be saved prior to saving
them. This precheck function will allow the user to easily determine that all objects requested to be saved are available before any
media is written. This can eliminate situations where a file is
bypassed by the save function because the file is open for update
by another user.
A new job attribute will exist to control whether a job log should bfi
produced if the job completes in a normal manner. This allows the
user to eliminate the output of job logs except when a problem
occurs.
Optional Listing of Restored Objects
An option will be provided on the restore commands to list each
object that is being restored and its associated security-related
information. The existing low level messages for a successful
restore of each object will be removed to improve the performance
when a large number of objects are being restored. The listing
should allow a better means of security control when new objects
are restored to the system.
Improved Allocation of Source Members
An internal option will be supported by SEU and Text Management
to determine the exact number of records to be written to the
member after creation or maintenance is performed. This will allow
the system to tailor the allocation needed for the specific member
instead of using a default allocation method. This should benefit
DSPJOB Enhancements
A new DSPJOB option will allow the display of the current library
list. This output will also be supplied.in the DSPJOB dump
described later.
'. ' : " "
Job Start/Completion Message Enhancements. '
The job start message (CPF 1124) will be enhanced to include the
subsystem and the time the job entered the' system (e.g., the
submitted time for batch. jobs). The job completion message (CPF
1164) will be enhanced to ,include such things as total response
time, the number.ofinteractions, the number of disk I/O operations
and the type of job. Both of these messages appear in the job log
and in the QHST log. This information can be useful in analyzing
system workload, '. providing job analysis statistics, and problem
determination data. '
------- --------
Do not reproduce without written permission
==:: :E~E: ISG
PP 5714-SS1.8
Mar 83
New
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/38 CPF R5.0 (cont'd)
Display Active Job (DSPACTJOB) and Display System Status
(DSPSYSSTS) Enhancements
The DSPACTJOB display will provide an improved description of
certain wait conditions and an indication of whether a job's
execution priority has been downgraded because the time-slice has
been exceeded. The DSPSYSSTS internal fields, which are used to
calculate page fault rates, have been increased in size to greatly
reduce wrapping.
Job Description Parameter in User Profile
A job description parameter will be added to the user profile and
*USRPRF may be specified on ADDWSE/CHGWSE to assign job
attributes to communications jobs. This also allows job attributes
to be specified for work station users (instead of the current
approach, by device).
Retaining Once Active Batch Jobs on Job Oueues
A new command (similar to TFRJOB) will allow a currently
executing batch job to be placed on a job queue. Unlike the
TFRJOB command, the new command will allow the job to remain
on the job queue in the event of an IMPL.
SECURITY
Data Base Sequential Input in CL Programs
CL programs will support data base sequential input files. This
simplifies working with files created by functions such as
DSPOBJD. The support uses the existing DCLF and RCVF
commands. MONMSG may be used for the end of file condition.
Only one DCLF is allowed per CL program.
Retrieve Job Attributes Command Enhancements
!
The RTVJOBA command will support new parameters to allow
retrieval of additional job attributes such as EXCPTY, OUTO,
LOGLVL, and USRLlBL. This will simplify the changing of these job
attributes and storing/ replacing them when a subprogram with
unique requirements is called.
Operations from the DSPOBJAUT Display
Selective Prompting
If the user has appropriate authority, a CF key option will appear on
the DSPOBJAUT display to allow the user to redisplay the
information as input capable fields. This allows the simple
changing of authorization rights, as well as allowing new users to
be added and existing users to be totally removed.
Selective prompting allows a CL program to use the prompter
facility at execution time to prompt for a command, and control:
Generic Grant and Revoke of Authority
The GRT /RVK commands will allow a generic function or will allow
all objects in a library to be specified. This will simplify the
specifying of security authorizations.
Revoke Object Authority Feedback
The RVKOBJAUT command will provide a diagnostic message
when the user whose authority is being revoked does not have the
specific authority being revoked.
- Which parameters are prompted
- Which defaults appear
- If the user is allowed to change specific parameters
This allows use of the prompter to directly invoke command
functions, while allowing the programmer to control what is
prompted and what may be changed by the user.
Noninteractive Commands used with the Prompter
Noninteractive commands (e.g., JOB, ENDJOB, etc.) will be
prompted when PF4 is pressed. A warning message will be sent,
but the user will be allowed to see the prompts for these commands.
Display User Profile Option for Changes
Return Resulting Command from Prompter Without Executing
A GF key option will be added to the DSPUSRPRF command to
allow the user to display the CHGUSRPRF prompt for the same
user with the current values displayed. This simplifies changing the
values for the various parameters.
New Program OCACHEK (similar to OCAEXEC), may be called to
either syntax check or prompt a command, and have the results
returned without executing the command. This may be used in
prompting for commands to be submitted or logged.
Authority Checking from System Menus/Displays
Authority checking will bo performed on all command functions
attempted from CPF manus/displays. This will allow better
security control when utilizing system menus/displays.
LIBRARY SUPPORT
Add and Remove from Library List Commands
ADDUBLE/RMVUBLE commands will be provided to allow the
user to add a library before or after the existing libraries on the user
portion of the library list, or remove a library from the user portion
of the library list. This will offer a simple means of adding specific
user libraries to the existing library list without having to know what
the current list is.
Delete by Generic Name
Most of the DLT commands are enhanced to allow use of a generic
name. This will simplify operations when generic object types must
be deleted.
..
Send User Message Command
A command will be provided for use in communicating from CL
programs to users or the system operator. This will provide for
simple inquiry messages to be handled in one command. A pause
function is also provided. A VALUES keyword is supported to
allow checking of responses and a translate table option is provided
to allow conversion from lowercase to uppercase. This command
should simplify the applications where a CL program needs a
minimal amount of dialog with a user.
Library Display Command Enhancements
, When tho DSPLIB command is used without specifying a library,
tho user will be presented with a list of library names to select
from. Both the DSPLIB and DSPOBJD displays will provide an
entry per object. to allow access to the full or service attributes
provided by the DETAIL paramoter of lhe DSPOBJD command.
The DSPLlBL command has boen enhanced to include the text
description of the libraries.
CL/PROMPTER
Inquiry Messag,e Capability on Unmonitored Messages
CL programs will now issue an inquiry message on an unmonitored
escape and let the user request ignore and retry, in addition to the
cancel and dump options already supported for the CPA 0701
message. CL programs· can now report· errors, similar to RPG or
COBOL programs where inquiry messages are sent to the interactive user or system operator (depending on the type .of job) when
an unexpected condition occurs.
DATABASE
Rename Member Command
A RNMM command will be provided to simplify operations when a
member must be renamed.
User Notification of Access Path Rebuild At Open
When the user opens a file, causing an access path to be rebuilt, a
message will be sent to the external message queue stating the
cause for the delay in proceeding to the function. This should
minimize the need for problem determination in this circumstance.
Access Path Rebuild Options at 1M PL
Following an abnormal IMPL in which access paths have been
invalidated, a display will be available to the operator. This will
describe each access path which must be rebuilt, show the number
of records which must be read to rebuild the access path, and allow
the operator to temporarily change the value of the RECOVER
option that was specified for the file. The operator will have better
control over whether the system should be brought up quickly or
not brought up until certain access paths are rebuilt.
Option to Force Access Paths More Frequently
An option will be provided on CRT /CHG data base file commands
to cause the access paths and underlying data to be forced to disk
on every access path update. This will minimize (but will not
eliminate) the exposure to an access path rebuild in case of an
abnormal termination. This function can be of value in certain large
file/low activity environments, but performance should be carefully
considered.
Freeing of Space with CLRPFM
When the CLRPFM command is issued, any space associated with
the physical access path is reset and the file allocation is reset to its
initial value. This will help provide better allocation of storage on
the system.
------- ----:: - - :§'f§: ISG
PP 5714-881.9
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
New
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
8ystem/38 CPF R5.0 (cont'd)
OTHER ENHANCEMENTS
Conditional Defaults for Inquiry Messages
A job attribute will be added to the JOB, CHGJOB, and SBMJOB
commands, and may be placed in a job description to determine
automatic action when an inquiry message is sent by a program
such as Cl, RPG, or COBOL. The user may choose to:
EASE·Of·CONVERSION From System/34
The release includes general enhancements which can make it easier to
convert from System/34. This includes such functions previously
discussed as:
Messages used as constants in DDS.
CHKDKT command to check for the existence of a volume 10 or file
label on diskette.
Display output queue of a forms type.
Start a writer to a forms type.
local data area.
Delete by generic name.
Inquiry messages on unmonitored escape messages in Cl
programs.
Send user message command.
Rename member command.
Copy file enhancements and new commands.
Mixed file and Hll multiple device support.
- Send the inquiry message
- Send a default reply
- Use a new system-defined object for system reply values
Commands exist to maintain the system reply list which allows
entries for specific or generic messages. An option exists to allow
a DSPJOB dump prior to replying to the message. This may be
used for many functions such as:
- Automatically taking a DSPJOB dump and a program dump, and
cancelling the program when an inquiry occurs. This can be used
to eliminate operator intervention and ensure that problem
determination information exists.
- Automatically responding to some messages which are sent to
the system operator (messages relative to mounting the proper
print belt, for example).
Copy File Enhancements and New Copy Commands
Enhancements to the CPYF command support have been made to
allow such functions as creating the TOMBR when it does not exist, '
copying zero records, better handling of packed keys, and generic
FROMMBR support. A new CPYSRCF command is provided which
is designed to work with source members and provide a formatted
listing. Four new commands (CPYFRMDKT, CPYTODKT, CPYFRMTAP, and CPYTOTAP) are available to simplify use of copy
functions using diskette or tape. These commands support most of
the device parameters found on the corresponding OVRDKTF and
OVRTAPF commands.
Most Create Commands Which Use Source Will Default TEXT
Most of the CRT commands which use source members will
change the default of the TEXT parameter to default to the text
description of the source member. This will simplify the creation
and retention of text descriptions on various objects.
Display File Description Outfile Option
The DSPFD command will provide an OUTFIlE option which will
allow the attributes of the various file types to be placed in a data
base file. A new parameter will control the subtype of file output.
This output file option will allow many applications to take
advantage of the attributes and statistics stored in the file descriptions to create reports and control various functions.
Increase in Number of Values of DDS VALUES Keyword
The DDS keyword VALUES will accept up to 100 entries instead of
the current limit of 20. This should simplify the validity checking of
certain fields.
Messages Used as Constants in DDS
A new DDS keyword (MSGCON) will allow the contents of a
message description to be compiled into a device file. This can be
used to simplify certain standard text functions used in multiple
files.
Command Selection Menu Enhancements
A new command will be supported and will be an option on the
programmer and system operator's menus to allow the user direct
access to an enhanced version of the command selection menu.
This will allow the user who knows a verb (e.g., CNl), or an object
(e.g., SBSD), or a common abbreviation (e.g., JOB) to access all the
commands with the same letter combinations. Over 175 additional
menus will exist to simplify the process of selecting the proper
command.
Programmer and System Operator Menu Prompting for 5MBJOB
Option
The programmer and system operator menus will allow access to
the prompter for the entry of RQSDTA when Option 6 is requested.
In addition, the value in the RQSDTA field will be syntax checked
as if it is a command. This will allow the full use of the prompter
when submitting jobs from these menus.
Install Options for Edit Codes and System Values
Additional options will appear on the install prompt to allow
retention of installed edit codes or system values. This will simplify
the installation of a new release.
Multidimension Array Support in Debug Functions
The debug commands will allow changing and displaying of
variables with up to three dimensions. This is specifically designed
for COBOL support.
Customer Education:
follows:
System/38 CPF education is available as
Title
Course Code
System/38 Concepts
System/38 Application Analysis
System/38 Application Programming Workshop
System/38 Implementation I
System/38 Implementation II
A2510
A2003
A2004
A2001
A2501
These courses will be updated to reflect the Release 5.0 enhancements.
PLANNING INFORMATION
For existing users, Release 4.1 must be installed prior to installing
Release 5.0.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Installation of System/38 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. IBM may provide marketing assistance, in accordance with
Marketing and Service Guidelines in the GI Section, in the installation of
IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing
accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training,
installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the
customer.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM System/38 CPF runs on all models of the IBM System/38.
AIIIBM licensed programs for System/38 are designed to operate in an
environment that includes the System/38 CPF (5714-SS1) or its
equivalent. The licensed program order should be entered via AAS at
the same time as the system order. IBM's ability to provide concurrent
hardware maintenance is dependent upon functions provided by the
CPF or its full equivalent support.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: None
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
The following documents are scheduled to be updated and available in
June 1983:
S/38 Guide to Publications, Glossary and Master Index (GC21-7726)
... S/38 Installation Manual - Conversion Planning (GC21-7732) ....
S/38 Guide to Program Product Installation and Device Configuration.'
(GC21-7775) ... S/38 Operator's Guide (SC21-7735) ... S/38
Programming Reference Summary (SC21-7734) ... S/38 Messages
Guide: CPF, RPG //land IOU (SC21-7736) .. , S/38 Problem Determination Guide JSC21-7876) ... S /38 Control Languaf/.8 Reference
Manual (SC21-7731) ... S /38 Control Program FaCility Licensed
Program Specifications (GC21-7763) ... S/38Control Program Facility
Programmer's Guide (SC21-7730) ... S/38 Control Program Facility
Reference Manual - Data Description Specifications (SC21-7806) ...
S/38Programmer's/User's Work Station. Guide (SC21-7744) ... S/38
Data Communications Programmer's Guide (SC21-7825) ... S/383270
Emulation Utility Reference Manual and User's Gl.!ide (SC21-7961).
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- -------.:..
ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
::-:.:§~a:
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/7 ASSEMBLER
5718-SC2 (Features #7027, #7029, #9005)
PURPOSE
System /7 Assembler language is a symbolic programming language for
use with the System/7. This language provides the programmer with a
convenient means of writing machine instructions, designating
registers, and specifying format and addresses of storage areas, data,
and constants. All operational capabilities of the System/7 can be
expressed in System /7 Assembler language programs.
DESCRIPTION
The System/7 Assembler is a paper tape-oriented, one pass,
one-for-one Assembler program which translates source programs
written in System/7 Assembler language into machine loadable object
programs on paper tape.
The most significant features provided are briefly summarized in the
following paragraphs:
One-pass: By resolving forward referenced symbols as overlay
patches, the assembly is completed in one pass.
Forward Referencing: Symbolic names may be referenced prior to
definition.
Renaming Symbols: A symbolic name can be equated to another
symbol so that both refer to the same storage location, register,
etc.
Convenient Data Representation: Constants can be specified as
alphabetic characters, decimal digits, and storage addresses for
ease of definition.
Optional Program Listing: Program listings can be provided, at
assembly time, of source and resulting object program. This is a
programmer option.
Error Checking: Source programs are examined by the assembler
for possible errors arising from incorrect usage of the language. A
message is printed on the printer describing the error discovered.
This occurs even if the above program listing was not requested.
Subroutine Entry: Subroutine names that are still undefined
symbols at the end of assembly are printed on the keyboard printer.
The source for these subroutines can then be entered and the
assembly completed.
Multiple Assemblies: Multiple assemblies may be done without
reloading the assembler program.
Minimum System Requirements: A. System/7 with at least 4K
words of storage and an Operator Station.
Although this assembler offers a subset of the resources that are
available with the macro assemblers, a programmer can prepare an
effective program to control an application. (The Functional Subroutines, with the exception of mUltiply and divide, are not available in Paper
Tape Format.)
System/7 Utilities: Included with the System/7 Assembler are utility
programs to provide the user with tested and maintained programs to
assist in program maintenance and debugging on System/7. The
following utilities require 128 words of storage and reside in the
System/7 IPL area.
Storage Dump: Output the contents of storage to the keyboard
printer or paper tape punch.
Storage Patch: Alter storage locations via the Operator Station
keyboard.
IPL Loader: Reads the storage load paper tape produced by the
System/7 Assembler, Host Program Preparation Facilities, or
storage dump. This loader will construct the necessary storage
load in the System/7.
Storage Initialization: Initializes both System/7 storage and
registers. This function must be performed after power-on of the
System/7.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HAJ:lDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System '; Corifigu~ation: System/7 Assembler requires a
System /7 with a minimum of 4K of storage and an Operator Station.
(Program preparation cannot be accomplished on a 2K system.)
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mec~a,nicsburg)
MSp,/7 ProgralJ1 L(;gic Manual (GY34-0003);
.:t-.
.
TERMS and ~ONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5718-SC2.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -----
PP 5718-XX1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
=--:§'=fE: ISG
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
1800 CHROMATOGRAPH MONITORING
5718-XX1
PURPOSE
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
IBM 1800 Chromatograph Monitoring provides advanced data
acquisition and fused peak analysis techniques for the simultaneous
monitoring of multiple chromatographs in realtime. The program scans
the signals from the chromatographs, analyzes the peak spectrum, and
produces the reports. It is particularly well suited to the quality-control
laboratory environment.
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
DESCRIPTION
The Chromatograph Monitoring Program operates either under the
1800 Time-Sharing Executive (TSX) or the 1800 Multiprogramming
Executive (MPX). Time-sharing jobs may execute concurrently in the
TSX version, and background jobs in the MPX version.
The advantages are reduced turn-around time on chromatograph runs,
greater accuracy and better reproducibility than manual methods, better
utilization of analyst time, and greater chromatograph utilization through
automatic control.
The maximum number of chromatographs that can be monitored is a
function of 1800 core size and speed, and the scanning frequency
desired. Typical systems have 10 to 60 chromatographs wired, with 10
to 30 operating simultaneously.
Extensive digital filtering techniques are employed to minimize noise
problems, including spike rejection of raw data. First and second curve
derivatives are calculated using a least squares technique. Exponential
smoothing is applied to raw data and curve derivatives. Dead bands
and confirming counts are used to insure that only significant, persistent
changes in the derivatives are considered. All filter parameters are
adjustable and can be changed during a run.
Backflushing, and column-switching can be controlled by the program.
The rate of scanning each chromatograph can be varied individually,
and can be changed during a run.
Analytical methods (for example, run parameters, peak decomposition
method, type of run) can be defined and updated in real time by a series
of data cards without interrupting the routine operation of the system.
MUltiple reference peaks can be used to improve the estimation of
expected peak times.
Peak areas can be calculated by several methods including a least
squares curve fitting technique.
Use: The lab analyst initiates scanning of the chromatograph by
entering information about the analytical method to be used, the
chromatograph number, date and time of the sample, and other
experimental parameters through a 1092 Keyboard, and then closing
the start switch on the chromatograph. The chromatograph start light is
turned on confirming computer monitoring. No further attention by the
analyst is required to record the spectrum and produce the report.
Offline or background jobs can be executed during the monitoring of
the chromatographs.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer is responsible for performing the following functions:
Installing start buttons and lights at each chromatograph with cabling to
the 1800 PI and ECO terminals.
Providing low-noise, low-impedance chromatograph analog signals to
the 1800.
Generating a suitable TSX or MPX operating system.
Defining system equates which specify the machine configuration
\~i\addressing.
Executing the customizer program to modify the source programs for
the particulur installation.
Geherating the required COMMON/INSKEL/cards using a utility
program provided.
Compiling or assembling the package programs supplied in source form
and building the core loads and data files.
Maintaining suitable listings and core maps for the use of system
maintenance personnel •.
As with other systems,. customers are responsible for providing
adequate protection against accidental loss or misuse of their data.
This includes an adequate review of the system's security provisions by
the user.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM .1801 Processor-Controller model 1C or 2C (16K) for TSX,
model1CB or 2CB (24K) for MPX
IBM 1810 Disk Storage model A1 or B1
One IBM 1442 Card Read/Punch model 6 or 7
One IBM 1816 Printer Keyboard or 1053 Printer model 3
IBM 1828 Enclosure model 2
Analog - Digital Converter model 1 (#1231)
Two IBM 1851 Multiplexer Terminals model 1
Three Differential Amplifiers (#3246)
One IBM 1092 Matrix Keyboard model 1 with 1051 Attachment
(#7915) and RPQ C08735 (1800 attachment)
IBM 1894 model 10 (RPQ C08056), 1092 Keyboard Attach Basic
with #3612, ECO-one group, #5715, PIC-one group, and #3285,
DIC-one group (Option A) or #5715, PIC-one group (Option B)
IBM 1894 model 1, 1092 Keyboard Attach, Adapter (RPQ C08057).
The following is required for each chromatograph wired to the system:
Four analog input MPX/R points; one on each of four input voltage
levels (10 mv, 50 mv, 500 mv, 5 volt) (#5252) ... one point of Process
Interrupt-Contact (#5715) ... one point of Electronic Contact Operate
(#3612).
Additional devices that are supported and recommended are: A 1443
printer if much offline work is to be done. It is also helpful in system
installation for online monitoring of the scan program ... additional 1810
Disk Drive if more than 472 sectors are required for data files in TSX or
571 sectors in MPX ... additional 1053 Printers if chromatographs are
widely separated ... additional 1092 Keyboards if chromatographs are
widely separated.
Note: The CNP programs may only use the 12 standard interrupt levels.
The TSX Version requires a Variable Core of 5,600 words, 1,880 words
for skeleton programs, and 2,626 words of skeleton COMMON (20
chromatographs and one 1092). The MPX version requires a Variable
Core of 5,186 words, a core load area of 2,192 words, 3,592 words of
skeleton programs including system routines, and 1,918 words of
skeleton COMMON (14 chromatographs and one 1092). The core load
area may be eliminated by operating an interrupt core load in variable
core, at some increase in system overhead.
To compile and build the program requires the above configuration
without the Process I/O and 1092 Matrix Keyboard and its attachments.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM 1800 Chromatograph Monitoring Program is written in IBM
1800 Assembler language and 1800 FORTRAN. It operates under
either the IBM 1800 Time-Sharing Executive (TSX) or the 1800
Multiprogramming Executive (MPX). The calculation routines, and the
analysis report output programs, are written in FORTRAN to facilitate
modification.
This program product is released to work with Version 3 of TSX, or
Version 3 of MPX, and all subsequent versions and modifications unless
so stated in a future revision of this document.
The Error Alert Control program (EAC) within the TSX operating system
masks all interrupt levels during the processing of an error. Since EAC
uses a series of overlays from the disk, the time involved can be as
much as several seconds. The Chromatograph Monitoring program
cannot operate under these conditions because data would be lost. A
change is therefore made to EAC to allow the level(s) of the timers and
analog input to remain unmasked during EAC operation. Any errors on
the unmasked levells) can result in a double ontry Into EAC with a .
resultant unrecoverable MLTP EAC message. The multiple EAC,
however, is probably due to hardware problems on the unmasked
leveHs) and should not be considerod a TSX problem. The Interval
Timer Control program in TSX is also modified to allow timer A to
continue running after a timor Interrupt is processed. Customer
Engineering involvemont In those areas of code is potentially billable.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Application Description Manual (GH20-0724).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
--.----- ----=- -:i'f5: ISG
PP 5719-GP1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
New
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
7361 FASTDRAFT LICENSED PROGRAM
5719-GP1
PURPOSE
This IBM licensed program supports the IBM 7361 FASTDRAFT
FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
For initial construction of shapes:
System.
The IBM 7361 Fastdraft licensed program supports the
Fastdraft System configuration. This program is
intended to satisfy requirements for general purpose interactive drafting
using 2D cartesian coordinates. It has been developed for use by
non-computer oriented drafters. The overall purpose of the 7361
system and the Fastdraft software is to provide an easy-to-Iearn and
use system to enable drafters to improve drafting productivity.
Mathematical/Construction Options
maximum 7361
Edit Menu options provide for the construction of lines, circles,
ellipses, boxes, etc.
Editing Options (for use on existing shapes)
Menu options are provided for Window, Restore, Delete, Intersect,
Rotate, Move, Scale, Measure, etc.
HIGHLIGHTS
Drafting Options
Has capabilities for Isometric drawings and assemblies for clearer
visualization of a part and an expanded range of drawing disciplines.
Provides drafters with graphics systems equivalents for all the
conventional tools (i.e., drawing instruments, templates, drafting
board) required for general drafting tasks.
Drafting functions are selected by a drafter using a light-pen, from
menus displayed on the 3251 mdl2 Display Station component of
the 7361 system.
Prompting messages on the 3251 mdl 2 guide the user through
drafting functions requiring multiple steps.
Isometrics, dimensioning, cross hatching, filleting, etc.
Drafting Requirements of the following standards organizations are
supported:
- American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
- International Standards Organization (ISO)
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
To install and use the 7361 Fastdraft licensed program, the customer
will:
Order, as a .minimum, the basic 7361 system shown under
"Devices Supported".
Drawings are saved on diskettes (one drawing per diskette) and can
be restored to disk working storage for editing or plotting purposes
at any time.
Order the Fastdraft licensed program (5719-GP1) from IBM.
Follow site preparation guidelines found in the IBM 7361 Fastdraft
System Guide.
Emphasis is on ease-of-Iearning and use. A User's Manual guides
the drafter step-by-step through the use of prompting messages,
from simple to more complex functions.
Read the following publications to acquire a knowledge of the
graphics functions provided and the installation procedures:
Supports separate workstation areas on disk for each display
station. Each action is written to disk. Therefore, minimal recovery
is required in the event of a power outage.
IBM 7361 Fastdraft System Guide (SC34-0514) introduces the
system and gives instructions for software installation, operation
and maintenance. It also includes physical installation planning
information.
User can create his own templates (as pattern library symbols).
Fastdraft software offers a choice of the level of detail for
creating/editing drawings. The level selected is highlighted and
changes are restricted to that level. The five hierarchical levels are:
-
IBM 7361 Fastdraft Training Guide (SC34-0515) is a self-study
manual that explains how to use the functions offered, plot a
drawing, create pattern libraries, etc. No knowledge of computers
or programming is required.
Points
Lines
Shapes
Patterns
Views
After the user has become initially familiar with the system, a
review of the IBM Fastdraft Workstation Reference (SC34-0516)
will provide in depth information about each of the drafting
functions available.
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Three function menus are provided. The drafter selects a menu, and
follows with the selection of the functions needed from the displayed
menu, by use of the light-pen and the keyboard. The keyboard is
primarily used to select the menu and to input measurement and other
alphameric data.
Devices Supported: The IBM 7361 Fastdraft licensed program is
specifically designed for use with the IBM 7361 Fastdraft System.
Components of the 7361 system are:
Main Menu consists of four parts:
Basic
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Drawing and Diskette Options.
The IBM 7361 Graphics Processor Unit mdl 001.
Drawing Identification.
The IBM 3251 mdl 2 Display Station with two special features:
Alphameric Keyboard (#4631) and Light-Pen (#4750).
Drawing Parameters.
The IBM 3101 mdl 10 Display Terminal (used as the system
console for program installation and for DPCE Service Representative use in diagnostic testing).
Notation Area.
Provides the capability to get and save drawings, clear storage, identify
jobs, format diskettes, plot, create notes, etc.
Customizing Menu is used to:
Specify metric or inch units for the drawing.
Optional
l':.
A second 3251 mdl 2 Display Station (with #4631 and #4750/'~'
features).
An IBM 7374 Color Plotter mdl 001.
Set or change the values for drawing and dimensioning the work.
Set up the Edit Menu screen and text formatting.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (None)
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Select different pens for the plotter.
The Fastdraft options from the Edit Menu use the specifications or
attributes set up on the Customizing Menu.
Display Window.
IBM 7361 Fastdroft System Guide (SC34-0514)* ... IBM 7361
Fastdraft Training Guide (SC34-0515)* ... IBMFastdraft Workstation
Reference (SC34-0516) ... IBM 7361 LicensedProgram Specifications
(GC34-0513). **
Coordinate Readout Area.
*
Available by May 31,1983
Instruction Area.
**
Describes the IBM 7361 Fastdraft licensE!d/progrflfTl and warrants
that it conforms to its specifications (as"-contah\ed'.in the document).
.
,'"
',.
.
Edit Menu has four areas:
Edit Menu Options.
Provides the capability to create, structure, copy, rotate, delete and
modify drawings in working storage.
.
The 7361 Fastdraft system operates as a dedicated drafting system.
RPQs ACCEPTED: Yes
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See pp,jndex
------- - - - --.
PP 5719-RJ6.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar83
:: - - :§':f§: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
IBM SERIES/1 REALTIME PROGRAMMING SYSTEM
ADVANCED REMOTE JOB ENTRY
5719-RJ6
DESCRIPTION
Full Function RJE
The IBM Series/1 Realtime Programming System Advanced Remote
Job Entry (ARJE) Licensed Program executes as an application program
on the Realtime Programming System (RPS). The ARJE Licensed
Program supports the use of an IBM Series/1 as a remote job entry
workstation using either Systems Network Architecture (SNA) or
Multileaving Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC).
The workstation console function gives the user the ability to query
the host system as to the status of a submitted job and / or query
the host for any other normally allowed information (j.e., system
status etc.). Facilities are also provided to allow a user to record
ARJE console activity to an RPS data set for subsequent printing
(called journaling).
Advanced Remote Job Entry supports:
The print output received by ARJE may be either printed directly on
an available physical printer or, through the use of tho RPS spool
function, placed in a disk/diskette spool data set for printing at a
later time. The use of the spool facility to store output on a
diskette allows the user to transport that data to another RPS
Series/1 for printing. Facilities exist in the RPS spool function to
allow the user to control the printing of specific jobs from the spool
processor output queue. ARJE supports 3211/3203-4 Forms
Control Blocks for printed data. The FCB parameters are: Lines
per inch, form end (page length), and page line to channel
assignments (i.e., for each "select vertical channel" command
received from the host, ARJE will skip to a specific line on the
current printer page). A utility will be provided with ARJE to allow
the user to define FCBs corresponding to the FCB/forms requests
that may be sent by the host.
MRJE
Multileaving Remote Job Entry (MRJE)
Synchronous Communications (BSC).
support
for
Binary
SNA RJE
Multiple Logical Unit Systems Network Architecture (SNA) support
for Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC).
Unattended Operation
ARJE allows unattended operation by having ARJE commands on
disk/diskette, and support for dynamic punch file allocation, and
auto answer.
Full Function RJE
In addition to standard RJE capabilities, ARJE has full function
console support with status reporting and journaling, data
decompression, and printer form support.
ARJE Commands
ARJE commands have been designed for ease of use and are
identical for MRJE or SNA RJE operation.
Host Remote Job Entry Subsystems
ARJE supports the following:
Bse
OS/VS2JES2
OS/VS2JES3
VM/370 RSCS
SDLC
OS/VS2JES2
OS!VS2JES3
DOS/VSE VSE/POWER
HIGHLIGHTS
The ARJE licensed program is an application program loaded by the
terminal operator or another RPS application program. The purpose of
the program is to provido tho RPS user with the ability to participate in
an SNA network or BSC environment as an RJE workstation. It will
allow the user who has created a job stream via RPS edit facilities to
transmit that job stream to a host Job entry subsystem for processing.
Upon completion, tho output from the job stream(s) will normally be
sent back to tho workstation for punching (routed to an RPS data set)
and / or printing.
MRJE
The Binary Synchronous Support for point-to-point (switched or
nonswitched) communication is with the ARJE Multileaving Remote
.Job Entry (MRJE) option. Multileaving is a term which describes a
computer-to-computer communications technique developed for
use by tho HASP system. It has since been implemented by other
IBM RJE programming systems. It permits the intermixing of input
and output data streams on the communication lines. it is fully
synchronizod, two directional transmission of a variable number of
data stroams between the Series/1 and a host system. The
Series/1 appears as a System/3 with console support to the host
job entry subsystems.
SNA RJE
ARJE Commands
The ARJE commands are single line commands with parameters
that can be specified by the user. These commands are summarized below:
- Help -- Print a list of the commands
- Readfile -- Identify a command/data file to be processed
- Printer -- Alter current ARJE printer assignment
- Punch - - Modify punch specifications
- Library -- Change library environment
_. Attend -- Change operational mode (attended/unattended)
- Status -- Report current ARJE status
- Journal -- Turn on/off journal activity
- Operator -- Transmit host operator command
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer is responsible for the installation and use of this licensed
program.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The Series/1 Realtime Programming System Advanced Remote Job
Entry requires the following hardware for installation:
A Series/ 1 4954 or 4955 processor.
One of the following disk/disk13tte devices:
.- 4962 Disk Storage Unit (all models).
- 4963 Disk Storage Unit (all models).
- 4964 Diskette Storage Unit.
The Systems Network Architecture (SNA) RJE option of ARJE
supports (switched or nonswitchedl point-to-point or multipoint
Synchronous Data Link Control protocol. The Series/1 ARJE has
Multiple Logical Unit support under a single workstation providing
up to four LLJ to LU sessions. ARJE uses Logical Unit Type 1
protocols for session communication with the host job entry
subsystems.
- 4978 Display Station.
Unattended Operation
- 4979 Display Station.
Three ARJE capabilities, I.e., ARJE commands in a disk/diskette
data set, dynamic punch file allocation, and auto answer, enable the
workstation to operate without the user being physically present.
- 3101 Display Terminal Model 1 or 2 or Typewriter Models
ASR33/ ASR35 or equivalent teletypewriter device attached by
any of the following:
The ARJE user can place ARJE commands in a disk/diskette data
set in addition ·to entering thom at his workstation display terminal.
These ARJE comrpands will be read in and processed just as if they
. ..
were entered-,iit the display.
The usei'cari"also ~ctivate ARJE in a "'wait" state (auto answer), to
establish thEr;Connection with the host job entry subsystem when a
call is receiVed from the host. Thus,. Series/1 site personnel can
perform other functions while ARJE is executing.
The punched output receiv~d by ARJEis always placed in a
Realtime Programming System disk/diskette data set. This data
set is allocated by ARJE (dynamic allocation).
- 4965 Diskette and I/O Expansion Unit.
- 4966 Diskette Magazine Unit.
One of the following interactive devices:
Adapter
(3101
or
ASR33/35
#7850
Teletypewriter
equivalent).
#2095/
#2096
Feature- Programmable Adapter D02350
(3101 only)
#1610
Asynchronous Single Line Adapter (3101 only).
#2091/
#2092.
Asynchronous Multi-line Adapter (3101 only).
One of the following adapters:
#1310
Multi-function Attachment (BSC modo).
or
--------= ------ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 5719-RJ6.2
Mar 83
:§~§:
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
Series/1 Advanced Remote Job Entry (cont'd)
#2074
Binary Synchronous
Control.
Communications Single
Lirie
#2075
Binary Synchronous
Control.
Communications Single
Line
#2080
X.21 Adapter
Interface.
(BSC/SDLC
mode)
under
V.35
#2093
Binary Synchronous Communications 8-Line Control
#2094
Binary Synchronous Communications 4-Line Adapter
#2090
Synchronous Data Link Control - Single Line Control
Optionally, one of the following:
4973 Line Printer.
4974 Matrix Printer.
4975 Matrix Printer (via #1310 MFA).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The following IBM licensed programs or functionally equivalent
programs are prerequisites for the installation of the IBM Series/1
Realtime Programming System Advanced Remote Job Entry Licensed
Program (5719-RJ6):
IBM Series/1 Realtime Programming System Version 5 (5719PC5).
For SNA RJE option only of ARJE:
IBM Series/1 Realtime Programming System Systems Extended
Network Architecture Support Licensed Program (5719-SN1).
The Series/l Realtime. Programming System Advanced Remote Job
Entry Licensed Program requires an additional 26K bytes of storage.
DOCUMENTATION
IBM Series/1 Realtime Programming System Advanced Remote Job
Entry Licensed Program Specification '" IBM Series/1 Realiime
Programn?ing System Advanced Remote Job Entry User's Guido ...
IBM Series/1 Realtime Programming System Advanced Remote Job
Entry Reference Card.
PROGRAMMING RPQs
PRPQs will be accepted. Response time will dopend upon complexity.
------- -----------_.-------- ISG
PP 5721-DC3.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5110 PRINT PLOT/PROBLEM SOLVER LIBRARY
5721-DC3 (BASIC) and 5721-DC4 (APL)
PURPOSE
IBM 5110 Print Plot/Problem Solver Library is an interactive program.
When used in conjunction with the printer control function support
provided (also available via RPQ S40161), it allows the IBM 5110 to plot
data generated by BASIC or APL programs, or to plot data entered from
the keyboard onto an IBM 5103 Printer. (Note: All further references to
the Print Plot/Problem Solver Library assume the printer control
function support is that provided with the Print Plot program and not
the RPQ.) In addition, the Print Plot/Problem Solver Library, through the
use of the Serial I/O Adapter, can be used with these types of
peripheral devices:
Guide to test the system and 5103 Printer, and to make sure the
programs work properly.
It is the customer's responsibility to provide sufficient backup cartridges
or diskettes (see license agreement for limitations) to ensure continued
operation in case of a failure. It is the customer's responsibility to
provide sufficient security for these licensed programs.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Absolute Vector Plotters
Print Plot/ APL requires a minimum of 32K of processor storage (IBM
5110 models A12 or C12 [tape], A22 or C22 [diskette ]).
Storage Display Terminals
The present implementation will be compatible only with certain
peripheral devices of the above generic device types. Peripheral device
support programs are the user's responsibility. See User's Manual for
more detail.
Print Plot/Problem Solver Library will provide the capability for
generating the most used types of graphs such as line graphs, bar
charts, histograms, point plotting, etc. The user may write a program to
generate the data or enter the data directly from the keyboard.
HIGHLIGHTS
Print Plot/Problem Solver Library supports the following functions:
Plot of horizontal and vertical lines given starting point and length.
Automatic plotting of axes.
Automatic plotting of grid.
Automatic plotting of scale numbers and tick marks including
logarithmic.
Connect two points with straight line or connect more than two
points with straight lines between points in the order given.
Automatic plotting of histogram.
Automatic plotting of bar charts.
Plot of curve identifying characters (from standard character set).
Built-in routine for scaling to compensate for dot density differences horizontally and vertically so that a square will be square and
a circle will be round.
Variable density of plot.
Reversible platen so that the paper can move backward as well as
forward.
Standard 5103 character
identification or title.
set
printed
horizontally
for
chart
Calculate and plot curve fits for given points.
DESCRIPTION
Print Plot/Problem Solver Library consists of a series of modules, that
when loaded into the system, will provide a wide range of plotting
capabilities. In generating a graph using Print Plot, the user would
generally invoke processing as follows:
Specify, interactively, metric or inch plotting.
Specify the size and location of graph within the plot limits.
Specify the location of the origin within tho graph, the user X value
and Y value at the origin. and the horizontal and vertical scaling
. factors. The scaling factors can be either linear or logarithmic.
If axes are to be plotted, either specify Dutomatic plotting of axes,
or use Print Plot commands to plot axes to user specifications.
If grids are to be plotted, invoko the grid plotting functions.
Specity horizontal and vertical dot density.
Specify a symbol to be printed at all user-defined points.
Input user coordinates for all points to be plotted indicating
whether each individual point should or should not be connected to
the last point provided. In addition to keyboard entered and user
program-generated points,' the data for plotting points may be
provided via a data file.
When generating special typos of graphs (bar charts or histograms), the
user may utilize the Print Plot routines which are tailored to these
specific applications.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The Print Plot/ Problem Solver Library is distributed on cartridge or
diskette for loading into the user's system. A User's Guide is also
provided. The customer should use the test data supplied in the User's
Print Plot/BASIC also requires a minimum of 32K of processor storage
(IBM 5110 models B12, C12, B22 or C22).
The printer control function support will be automatically provided with
any Print Plot/Problem Solver Library ordered. The printer control
function support is separately available via RPQ S40161.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS None
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- -----
Do not reproduce without written permission
=- -~r§: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5110 STAT/PROBLEM SOLVER LIBRARY (BASIC)
5721-0C7
PURPOSE
The IBM 5110 STAT/Problem Solver Library is an interactive program
encompassing commonly used statistical techniques for the analysis of
numerical data. The library is available in BASIC only for the IBM 5110.
STAT /Problem Solver Library helps the problem solver to utilize the
computer directly for statistical analysis. A statistically-oriented user
should have no difficulty in quickly learning the capabilities of the·
programs. The interactive mode of the package allows a non-data
processing-oriented professional to readily utilize the programs.
Because of the interactive nature of the STAT/Problem Solver Library
the user can sit at the keyboard and see the result of the analysis as it is
developed. Delays and some of the sources of error associated with
batch processing and time sharing usage are eliminated.
HIGHLIGHTS
A comprehensive set of statistical procedures.
A user with a knowledge of statistics can learn the program with a
minimum of effort.
Interactive mode simplifies usage.
Error checking with correction facilities.
Instructional messages clarify procedures or options available.
DESCRIPTION
STAT /Problem Solver Library consists of a series of routines covering a
wide range of capabilities under the following categories:
Data Generation - Read, Print, Edit, Transform
Elementary Statistics - Cross
Moments, T - Test, Chi-Square
Tabulation,
Histogram,
Tally,
Regression and Correlation Analysis - Correlation, Simple Regression, Stepwise Regression, Multiple Regression, Polynomial
Regression
Multivariate Analysis - Discriminant Analysis, Canonical Correlation,
Factor Analysis
Analysis of Variance - One-way Analysis of Variance, Factorial
Design
Non-Parametric Statistics - Kendall Ranks Correlation, Sign Test,
Wilcoxon's Matched-pairs Signed Ranks Test, Cochran Q- Test,
Freedman Two-way Analysis of Variance, Mann-Whitney U-Test,
Kendall Coefficient of Concordance Biserial Correlation, Point
Biserial Correlation, Tetrachoric Correlation, Phi-Coefficient.
Time Series Analysis - Moving Average, Seasonal Analysis, Cyclical
Analysis, Auto-Covariance and Auto-correlation, Cross-Covariance
and Correlation, Triple Exponential Smoothing.
Biostatistics - Survival Rate, Probit Analysis
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The STAT/Problem Solver Library is distributed in machine-readable
form for loading into the user's system. A User's Guide is also
provided. Customers should use the procedures outlined in the User's
Guide with their own data to test the machine-readable code to make
sure the programs are working properly.
It is the customer's responsibility to provide sufficient backup cartridges
or diskettes (no more than 5 are permitted under the license agreement)
to ensure continued operation in case of a failure. It is the customer's
responsibility to provide sufficient security for these licensed programs.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
STAT /BASIC will operate on an IBM 16K 5110 system. The library is
able to automatically adjust the minimum-maximum entries to fit
various storage sizes and input/ output options.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: None
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5721-0C7.1
Mar 83
------- ----:: - - ~"f§: ISG
PP 5721-XB1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACCOUNTING APPLICATIONS
For The 5120 COMPUTING SYSTE"M
6120 BILLING ... (5721-XB1)
IBM 6120 PAYROLL .• , (5721·XB2)
IBM 6120 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE .•. (5721-XB3)
IBM 6120 ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE •.• (5721-XB4)
IBM 6120 INVENTORY REPORTING ••. (5721-XB5)
IBM 6120 GENERAL LEDGER '" 15721-XB6)
PURPOSE
The IBM 5120 Computing System licensed programs for accounting
applications are cross-industry programs, applicable to many different
business types, which provide the user with powerful tools for running
and managing a business.
The levels of support provided for these programs .include: Documentation designed to increase ease-of-use and productivity; an Installa";
tion Support Center (JSC) Hotline available to all customers for
assistance; Responsive Program Temporary Fix (PTF) - an enhancement to the distribution and applying of program fixes.
HIGHLIGHTS
Creates transaction data on diskette for direct input to the 5120
Accounts Receivable and Inventory Reporting.
Installation-time tailoring including selection of Accounts
Receivable/Inventory interface, back order, general ledger account
numbers for use with accounts receivable input and automatic
invoice numbering.
PAYROLL (5721-XB2)
5120 Payroll provides an application that performs basic payroll
computations and produces payroll checks with earnings statements
and. deduction reports, It accommodates both hourly and salaried
payrolls. Additional program flexibility and options are provided to
satisfy many special customer needs.
Functions and Features
.Weekly, biweekly, semimonthly or monthly pay periods.
Provides payroll register, payroll checks with Earnings Statements,
Deduction Report (with exceptions) and Distribution Journal.
Interrelated applications through generation and passing of
transaction data on diskettes for direct input, as appropriate.
Preparation of the 1979 W-2 forms with subtotals and 941-A
showing excess wages for SUI.
New approach to program documentation designed to significantly
increase ease-of-use and customer self-sufficiency. during
installation and operation.
Vacation, holiday and sick time processing and reporting.
Installation Support Center (ISC), with a direct customer hotline for
questions related to the installation and operation of these
applications.
Central Service from the Application Development Center for error
correction, including rapid distribution of PTFs and the capability for
users to automatically apply the fixes through Responsive PTF
facility.
Enhanced ease-of-use through appropriate use of menu-driven
procedure selection and/or screen prompting.
Built-in auditibility and control through such techniques as zero
balancing and control totals.
Installation-time tailoring to select key options and user specific
control and report data.
BRADS " (5798- NXT) file definitions provided with the programs
for selected portions of the application files.
DESCRIPTION
BILLING (5721-XB1)
IBM 5120 Billing is a post-billing application providing the user the
ability to create invoices for customer orders already shipped. The
customer name and address, item descriptions and rrices are
automatically obtained from the customer and item files I the 5120
Accounts Receivable and Inventory Reporting programs are installed. If
these programs are not installed, the data can be keyed In directly for
each invoice. Extensions and discounts are automatically applied and
transaction records created for direct input to 5120 Accounts Receivable and Inventory Reporting programs.
Functions and Features
Pay for regular. employees on hourly basis, with additional capability
for
- Payment of special wages only (for example, piecework).
- Two overtime rates set by user.
- A shift differential premium handled as percent of hourly rate or
flat amount per hour, set at user option. Shifts 2 and 3 may
differ.
- Pay rates based on "skill" codes.
Pay for salaried employees, with additional capability for
- Payment of cominissiononly.
- Recording overtime hours, with or without pay.
Provides for processing special payments such as awards and
bonuses.
Allows additional Federal Income Tax withholding at employee's
request.
Provides user a specified tax table for Federal and State/local tax
computation with one state and one local tax deduction per pay
period per employee. Up to four state/local changes allowed per
year per employee.
Non-statutory doductions allowed, with capability for:
- Up to eight per employee, with a total system capacity of 40
non-statutory types.
- Specirying deduction frequency, and continuing until stopped or
predefined limit is reached.
- Deduction amount may be percent of gross, amount per period,
or amount per hour.
- Stock/bond deduction with a certificate value and balance
forward.
Inquiry to any employee record.
Post-billing.
Security provisions with user pre-set passwords.
Automatic price extensions.
B~oken
Case pricing.
Discounts optionally applied based on invoice total.
Interactive data entry for file creation/maintenance and transactions.
Auditibility and control through payroll data batch proof and zero
balancing general ledger distribution.
Availability of four customer class prices per item controlled by a
price code in the Customer Master File.
Creation of summary job/department cost distribution data .for
input to the 5120 General ledger program.
Up to 2 sales taxes (State, local) plus Federal Excise tax.
Installation-time tailoring, including company name/address,
security password and various processing options such as pay rates
based on skill, Interface to the 5120 General Ledger, job costing
and distribution.
Up to 3 classes of special charges (packing, freight, etc.).
Handles cash sales.
Billing of non-inventoried items.
Optional handling of back order, back order shown on invoice.
Invoice by single order, specified orders, or batch orders.
Credit memos for returns and adjustments.
Dally sales information from Billing is summarized in the order file
and available to user as input to a user sales history file.
Auditibility and control through edit lists and control totals for
Invoice Register, Accounts Receivable and Inventory transaction
files.
Interactive data entry and edit of customer orders.
Can override any fixed data during data entry (that Is, price,
discounts, cost, etc.)
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE (5721-XB3)
The 5120 Accounts Payable is an interactive solution designed to assist
the user in controlling cash outflow, while maintaining accurate and
detailed records of vendor invoices and credits.
.
Information is provided to help management take advantage of vendor
discounts. Accounting controls, audit trails, a menu facility and
operator prompting can assist the user in maximizing productivity. Data
validity is provided through zero balancing of debits and credits by
voucher number at entry time.
't:
Functions and Features
Multicompany support.
Payment options by "due date", "on demand", or "within date".
------- ------==:: ~~§: ISG
PP 5721-XB1.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5120 Accounting Applications (cont'd)
Allows for expedited payments when necessary to deviate from
regular payment cycles.
Optionally allows generated standard recurring payable items for
several payment cycles.
Handles partially prepaid vendor invoices, adjustments, transfer,
reversals, and vendor debit and credit memos on an accrual basis.
Handling of broken-case quantities
On-demand stock status reporting with flagging of exception items
(for example, out of stock, below reorder level, etc.) which may
optionally be restricted to selected vendors, item classes, or
inventory items
Comprehensive inventory analysis report
Credit memo tracking through key reports.
Perpetual inventory maintenance
Use of up to nine specified cash bank account numbers for cash
disbursements.
Item costing - both average cost and last cost
Allows accounting for and deduction of cash discounts.
Maintenance of month-to-date and year-to-date sales and cost of
items sold for all items
Supports open payables and cash disbursements.
Displayed inquiry of the contents of Inventory Master File records
'
using the File Maintenance process
Auditibility and control functions including zero balancing by
voucher and control totals for batch input and update.
Provides for vendor master file inquiry through file maintenance
facility.
Interactive data entry and correction capability with fast response
screen for efficient data entry.
Use of specified general ledger accounts for payables, discounts
earned, cash and expense distributions.
Creation of journal entry data to be used for input to general ledger
or optionally create journal. entry on diskette for input to the 5120
General Ledger.
Installation-time tailoring includes selection and definition of report
titles, payment options, interface to 5120 General Ledger and use
of security feature.
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE (5721-XB4)
The 5120 Accounts Receivable is an application designed to provide the
user with timely information to help improve cash flow, and reduce bad
debt losses by control of the accounts receivable. The accounts
receivable transactions are summarized into debits and credits to the
general ledger accounts. The system provides a summarized journal
report and optionally creates a general ledger transaction file on
diskette, summarized by account, for entry to the user's general ledger.
Functions and Features
Open-item accounting or balance forward accounting selectable by
customer.
Accounts receivable aging Including three aged, one current, and
one future period, with aged Trial Balanceon demand.
Customer account information may be selectively printed for credit
checking and cash application.
Automatic creation of late charge transactions which may be
reviewed and edited before posting. Late charge rate and first late
period can be specified.
Deferred statement printing.
Suppression of statements and/or late charges on an individual
customer basis, as required.
.
Credit limit reporting.
Past due reporting.
"Sundry" entries for which general ledger account numbe'rs may be
specified at transaction entry time.
Physical inventory list - in sequence by warehouse and location
Auditibility and .control functions including Master File update
sequence numbering and dating, and control totals for transaction
entry
Installation-time tailoring
GENERAL LEDGER (5721-XB6)
The 5120 General Ledger System is an application designed to
accomplish the basic bookkeeping functions of posting journal entries
to general ledger and creating financial statements. The programs are
based on double-entry bookkeeping principles in accordance with
established professional standards. The system has been designed for
easy implementation and installation, allowing a user to be productively
operational in a short time.
'
Functions and Features
Accommodate up to eleven major divisions of accounts.
Account structure within each division can be tailored by the user to
meet their specific requirements.
Produces General Ledger, General Ledger Trial Balance, Chart of
Accounts and Transaction Listings.
Produces Balance Sheet and Income Statement on 8 1/2" x 11"
format.
Auditibility and control through edit of data input formats, entry of
debit and credit transactions under systems guidance, batch total
control and zero balancing for input transactions.
Use of master menu screen, with optional return after each
procedure.
Accepts transactions, direct from diskette, generated by the 5120
Payroll, Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable programs.
Program Documentation: A documentation approach is provided to
help customers install these IBM accounting applications. The
materials offer significant improvements in the following areas:
They are written in user-oriented language.
The material within each book is presented in an easy-to-follow,
step-by-step structure that guides the customer through the
installation of the application.
Hands-on operator training is provided. This training is self-paced
and can be used with or without accompanying audio cassettes,
depending upon the experience level of the user.
Auditibility function including control totals for batch input and
update.
The materials are designed to interface with the 5120 Operator
Training providing a coordinated prerequisite for the specific
operator training.
Interactive entry and correction capability for invoice, debit memo,
credit memo, payment, adjustment data and late charge data. Fast
response screen for efficient data entry.
They are designed to work in conjunction with the ISC customer
hotline.
Creation of journal summary transactions for input to general
ledger, with optional diskette output for input to the 5120 General
Ledger program.
Installation-time tailoring includes user company name and report
titles, general ledger account numbers, interface to the IBM 5120
General Ledger and Billing programs, choice by customer of
balance forward or open item accounting, and others.
INVENTORY REPORTING (5721-XB5)
The 5120 Inventory Reporting offers small enterprises the management
reports to help appropriate optimizationof inventory levels. The user is
assisted in purchasing decisions by up-to~date reports reflecting stock
movement, on-hand and on-order quantities, as well as sales and cost
data.
\t,
Functions and Features
Quantity on-hand and warehouse location kept separately for up to
three warehouses
The books are visually attractive.
The following materials are available for each application.
Getting Ready: This book steps the customer through the implementation
process. It spells out, in simple terms, what has to be done to get the
application up and running.
'
Operator Training: Complete instructional materials are provided for
training the operator. This training program uses both audio and
workbook to bring operators up to speed quickly. After training, the
operator workbook and a Ready Reference Guide are used as needed.
Reports and Information: This book helps management take full
advantago of the reports and information provided by the application. It
describes, in detail, the reports produced and how they are used.
In addition, a separate program detail manual will be optionally available
for each application.
------- ----:: - - :S~§: ISG
PP 5721-XB1.3
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCT5
5120 Accounting Applications (cont'd)
Installation Support:
5110
5120
Atlanta National Market Support Center
Customer telephone service to the Atlanta National Market 5upport
Center, formerly the AC5C, is available only for selected 5120 licensed
programs as follows:
5110 B22 Computer
(32K BA5IC)
Feature #3200 Diskette
50rt (except Payroll)
5110 B32 Computer
(32K BASIC)
Feature#32oo Diskette
50rt (exceptPayroll)
5103 mdl11 Printer
5103 mdl11 Printer
IBM will provide 90 days of no-charge telephone service to 5120
customers who are installing their first 5120 licensed program.
These programs are:
-
Billing (5721-XB1)
Payroll (5721-XB2)
Accounts Payable (5721-XB3)
Accounts Receivable (5721-XB4)
Inventory (5721-XB5)
General Ledger (5721-XB6)
BRAD5 " (5796-NXT)
Customers may purchase 12 months of continuing telephone
service for all of the above licensed programs.
Telephone service for the 5100, 5110, and 5120 BA51C programming languages is no longer available.
Responsive Program Temporary Fix (PTF: Responsive PTF is a diskette
system designed to have customers automatically install program fixes
for the 5120 Accounting Applications and BRAD5 II.
It consists of a single diskette containing program fixes and a program
which prompts the customer to apply the required fix or fixes. The
diskette will contain all known fixes to the supported applications.
Central 5ervice. at the West Coast Application Development Center, is
responsible for developing fixes, maintaining the Responsive diskette,
and shipping it to a customer at the request of the ISC. The customer
will also receive information on how to initiate the system to the point
where screen prompts are provided for further guidance.
Responsive PTF does not replace the normal methods of periodic
update releases, as required, through PID. It is meant to serve as an
enhanced level of support for use between releases.
Use of Accounting Applications with BRADS" (5798-NXT): BRAD5
II provides the facility for a non-programmer to define files, create and
maintain the files, build file inquiries and generate reports from the file
data. The 5120 Accounting Applications (except General Ledger) will
further support that capability by providing selective BRAD5 " file
definitions with the applications. Thus, the task of definition, file
creation, and maintenance is accomplished as part of the application. A
user who has BRAD5 " can then build inquiries and develop additional
reports for the defined files. This facility can help meet user unique
inquiry and report requirements not contained in the applications.
In addition, with BRAD5 II, the user can extend the usefulness and
value of the 5120 by developing additional simple applications (that is,
asset inventory. company phone book, price lists. mailing lists. bills of
material. etc.). without requiring a knowledge of BA51C programming.
BRAD5 " is also a highly productive application development tool.
Thus the user. who also has BA51C language programming experience.
can productively develop additional applications of varying complexities.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide normal marketing assistance and guidance. The
responsibility for personnel selection and training. installation and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
The customer is responsible for error detection and analysis and
submission of APARs. but can obtain obtain hotline assistance from the
15C.
IBM Central 5ervice is responsible for the development and distribution
of program fixes. but the customer has the responsibility to apply fixes
to the program and can obtain hotline assistance from the 15C and use
of the Responsive PTF diskette and program.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
5upport will be provided for these licensed programs when they are
operated in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM 5120 Accounting Applications (General Ledger. Accounts
Payable, Payroll. Billing. Inventory Reporting. Accounts Receivable) are
designed to operate on an IBM 5120 Computing 5ystem or a 5110
Computer with the following minimum configur.ations:
5114 Diskette. Unit
Feature #3240
(5econd Diskette Drive)
Each of the applications operates individually. with its own diskettes. on
a dedicated 5120 or 5110. Though there is data-passing. via diskette.
between selective applications. there is no system or file co-residency.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM 5110 Accounting FOPs [General Ledger (5798-NPH).
Accounts Payable (5798-NPK). Payroll (5798-NPJ). Inventory
Reporting (5798-NXK). Accounts Receivable (5798-NPN) 1 were used
as a base for development of the 5120 Accounting Applications.
Enhancements. extensive changes to the interfaces. the addition of
Billing with an interface to the enhanced Accounts Receivable and
Inventory. and the development of a new documentation approach have
resulted in major changes. Because of these changes operational
problems can occur if the 5110 and 5120 programs are used together.
Therefore. IBM cannot support the intermixing of the 5110 and the
5120 applications.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Marketing Publications
The following program documentation is provided as part of the Basic
Material shipped with the programs from PID. It is also available from
Mechanicsburg. and includes the following:
IBM 5120 Billing (5721·XB1)
Getting Ready Binder (5B30-0438) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual
(5B30-0439) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5B30-0441) ... Reports
and Information Manual (5B30-0440) ... Operator Training Binder
(5B30-0442) contains: '" Operator Training Manual (5B30-0443) .,.
Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0236) ... Ready Reference Manual
(5B30-0444) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2519) ... Application
Extension Booklet (L830-2527).
IBM 5120 Payroll (5721-XB2)
Getting Ready Binder (5B30-0403) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual
(5830-0404) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5B30-0406) .. , Reports
and Information Manual (5830-0405) ... Operator Training Binder
(5B30-0407) contains: ... Operator Training Manual (5B30-0408) ...
Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0231) ... Ready Reference Manual
(5830-0409) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2516) ... Application
Extension Booklet (LB30-2524).
,
IBM 6120 Accounts Payable (5721-XB3)
Getting Ready Binder (5B30-0424) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual
(5B30-0425) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5B30-0427) ... Reports
and Information Manual (5B30-0426) ... Operator Training Binder
(5830-0428) contains: ... Operator Training Manual (5B30-0429) ...
Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0234) ... Ready Reference Manual
(5B30-0430) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2518) ... Application
Extension Booklet (LB30-2525).
IBM 5120 Accounts Receivable (5721-X84)
Getting Ready Binder (5B30-0431) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual
(5B30-0432) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5B30-0434) ... Reports
and Information Manual (5830-0433) ... Operator Training Binder
(5B30-0435) contains: '" Operator Training Manual (5B30-0436) ...
Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0235) ... Ready Reference Manual.,
(5830-0437) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2515) ... Application
Extension Booklet (LB30-2523).
IBM 6120 Inventory Reporting (5721-XB5)
Getting Ready Binder (5B30-0417) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual
(5830-0418) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5B30-0420) .. , Reports
and Information Manual (5B30-0419) ... Operator Training Binder
(5B30-0421) contains: '" Operator Training Manual (5830-0422) ...
Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0233) ... Ready Reference Manual
(5B30-0423) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2520) .... Application
Extensiof1Booklet (LB30-2526).
IBM 5120 General Ledger (5721-X86)
.
Getting Ready Binder (5830-0410) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual
(5830-0411) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5830-0413) .. , Reports
and Information Manual (5B30-0412) ... Operator Training Binder
(5B30-0414) contains: ... Operator Training Manual. (5B30-0415) ...
Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0232) '" Ready Reference Manual
(5B30-0416) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2517): •
RPQs ACCEPTED:· No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: 5ee PP Index
------- -------=ISG
Do not reproduce without written pormission
-~~~
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 BASIC ASSEMBL.ER LANGUAGE
and MACRO PROCESSOR
5725-AS1
PURPOSE
The Basic Assembler language is a symbolic programming language
used to write programs for the System/32. Source programs written in
this language are processed by the Basic Assembler licensed program
to produce relocatable object programs which are converted to
executable format by the System/32 System Control ProgrammingOverlay Linkage Editor facility. The Basic Assembler can be used to
create a stand-alone program. The object programs are stored in the
System/32 Library. Program loading is performed through System/32
OCL.
Programs may be coded entirely by the user with no dependence on
any other programming other than System/32 System Control
Programming (5725-SC1).
Basic Assembler may also be used for assembly of relocatable
subroutines for use with System/32 RPG II. The subroutines written in
the Basic Assembler language are coded by the user and separately
assembled. The process of program linking is accomplished during
compilation of the RPG II source program.
HIGHLIGHTS
Some of the features provided by the Basic Assembler licensed
program and its language are:
Mnemonic Operation Codes
Symbolic Referencing of Storage Addresses
Automatic Storage Assignment
Address Displacement Calculation
Convenient Data Representation
Operand Field Expressions
Source Identification - Sequence Fields
Assembler Instructions
Cross-Reference Listings
Error Checking and Diagnostic Messages
System/32 macros provide support to the Assembler user through the
Macro Processor for the following System Control Program facilities:
Disk functions, printer operations, keyboard and display screen access
and binary synchronous communications.
The macros are supplied to provide an interface to existing SCP
support. Additional macros may be written by the user using the macro
definition language provided.
By referring to macro definitions, the Macro Processor expands macro
instructions coded by the user. The macro definitions are coded in a
macro language. The macro definitions may be supplied by either the
user or IBM. See the related System/32 SCP macros. All macro
instructions are expanded into assembler source language statements
that in turn can be processed by the Basic Assembler.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM System/32 Basic Assembler .. language and Macro Processor
licensed program supports all models and features of the IBM 5320.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
A concurrent version of IBM System/32 System Control Programming
(5725-SC1) is required to support IBM System/32 Basic Assembler
language and Macro Processor licensed program.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-AS1.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -------.:.~ ~~E: ISG
PP 5725-C21.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 CLIENT ACCOUNTING and
FINANCIAL REPORTING SYSTEM (CAFRS)
5725-C21
PURPOSE
The System/32 Client Accounting and Financial Reporting System
(CAFRS) offers the public accounting profession a comprehensive aid to
solving the problems of client accounting. It assists the Certified Public
Accountant, Public Accountant, or bookkeeper in operating a more
profitable and productive practice.
HIGHLIGHTS
CAFRS can be installed without in-house programming capability:
File sizes may be changed, within limits, as needed, by the system
tailoring procedure to allow additional clients to be serviced or to
offer optional processing features to more clients
on a System/32. The Operator Reference Summary Card is provided
for the operator as a reminder of the major operational functions of
each procedure. It is intended to be used once the operator is
thoroughly trained in tile particular application.
Instructional material in the form of a self-study course is provided for
the operator for training in the use of the runbook.
An Application Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material,
for use by the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering
continuing support. It describes the architecture of programs,
procedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed
descriptions of each program.
Easy-to-use runbook is available
Application Description: The Client Accounting and Financial
Reporting System is a full-function ready-to-execute application. It
includes application reference manuals. a run book. source code. object
code, execution procedures, and an application logic manual, if ordered
as optional base material.
Step-by-step installation activity plan and detail user's information
supplied by Application Reference Manuals
It is designed to allow flexibility in the options included to meet an
individual client's special needs:
File load and maintenance procedures provided
System-controlled master and transaction file backup procedures
CAFRS provides ease-of-use options to the user
Designed to fit industry requirements
OCl procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are
packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation
Monitoring of procedures prevents execution of a program until
preceding programs have been completely and successfully
executed
Compatible online/offline file maintenance and transaction data
entry via the System/32 keyboard or diskettes created on the 3740
Data Entry System
Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of
master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what
procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate
up-to-date master files
Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated
from report writing functions
Selective printing options are available for many report functions
CAFRS uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to
provide a solid accounting system:
Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation,
audit and control are provided
Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided
Standard types of accounting reports, such as journals, ledger, trial
balance, and financial statements plus special supporting analyses
and lists, are provided
DESCRIPTION
The Client Accounting and Financial Reporting System is a ready-toexecute application for the small accountmg firm.
It combines two data entry approaches - operator-oriented and
batch-oriented. Support is provided for transaction entry through the
System/32 keyboard or through a diskette created on a 3740 Data
Entry System.
The application has certain records within a control file which contain
questionnaire responses. These records allow the application to select
file sizes and functions to suit each firm's needs. The questionnaire
responses are keyed during initial installation and may be changed as
needed. The System Tailoring Procedure allows these responses to be
entered.
The System Tailoring Procedure utilizes the answers to .a series of
questions regarding the firm's requirements. It provides the following:
Tailoring the application on-site at installation time.
Allows users to activate and deactivate provided functions as their
requirements change.
All provided functions are included in the programs but only
required functions are executed.
File sizes may be expanded or contracted, as needed. by rerunning
the System Tailoring Procedure.
An Application Reference Manual provides a step-by-step installation
activity plan including sample numbering systems, sample input and
maintenance data forms. file loading sequences, control forms with
suggested procedures. Volume" of the Application Reference Manual
provides information on the day-to-day use of the application.
The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to-use set
of instructions showing all the activities necessary to run the programs
Up to 13 periods per fiscal year
Automatically calculated journal entries based upon algorithms
previously defined by the accountant
Multiple special-purpose journals with
accounts, and headings specified by client
source code,
related
Ability to correct prior periods
Extensive chart of account flexibility to provide desired heading and
account description information, up to 9 levels of subtotals for
combining accounts, spacing and paging control
Optional titles and formats for financial statements
Support is provided for the optional consolidation of multiple clients.
Maintenance is provided for eliminating entries. Controls are included
to force fiscal period alignment of clients being consolidated. The same
processing capabilities are available for the consolidatp,d client as for
others.
Optional features and reports are available for any client, such as:
- last year comparative data on financial statements
- Print-suppression of zero-balance accounts on financial
statements
- Balance sheet
- I ncome and expense statement
- Combined department income and expense reporting
- Income and expense comparison to budget
- Income and expense account balance comparison to a specified
account balance, by department
- Income and expense account balance comparison to a clientspecified base, such as number of rooms. square feet, or miles
driven
- Supporting schedules
- Statement of Changes in Financial Position with related
worksheet and ability to process adjustments
- Reporting of financial ratios, defined by client with comparison to
industrial averages
- Employee payroll register
- Printing of presently formatted 941a and W-2 forms
- Accountant's transmittal letter
- Notes to the financial statements
- Annual General ledger
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance "in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information. personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day to day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT'
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
This IBM System/32 program will execute on all models of the IBM
System/32. The programs are compiled assuming a 16K minimum
system. Because of volume and time constraints, there may be a
requirement for providing .offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry
System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used. it must have the 128-character
record features (128-character - #5455. and feature group A - #4004).
For presentation purposes on the reports. left and right parentheses
have been included to indicate a dollar amount opposite an account's
normal balance: The 64-character set feature is required for the
System/32to print the parEmtheses.
------- - - - ----'='::...::§':f~ ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/32 CAFRS (cont'd)
Many functions have been included to protect the integrity of the
master files, programs, procedures, and libraries. Because of this, no
other user-written program may co-reside with this application unless
stringent coding requirements for these programs are met to insure
compatibility with the Client Accounting and Financial Reporting
System. The Application Logic Manual discusses in detail the coding
conventions used for the development of CAFRS.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
These programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II Programming
language and execute under control of the IBM System/32 System
Control Program (5725-SC1). IBM System/32 Utilities licensed
program (5725-UT1), which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source
Entry Utility, is required for execution of the programs. The IBM
System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to
the source code are necessary.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
... Design Objectives (GH30-0306) ... Education Flyer (G580-0108) ...
Seminar Slide Set
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-C21.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -------=
- - :§'f§: ISG
PP 5725-04B.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 LUMBER DEALERS
MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM
BILLING ... 5725-D4F
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ... 5725-D4B
INVENTORY CONTROL ... 5725-040
SALES ANALYSIS ... 5725-049
PURPOSE
These modular applications are available for either a 16K or 24K
System/32. The application function and data base are exactly the
same. Performance improvements in the larger memory size versions
for each system come from the reduction of overlays, incorporation of
larger blocking factors, and use of dual I/O areas.
When all four applications are installed they constitute an interrelated
application set with an integrated data base. They can help users
manage their two largest business assets, accounts receivable and
inventory, and give them profit performance data on their products,
customers, and salesmen. They can also help the user increase
operational efficiency and customer service.
- Alternate cost on hand
- Year-to-date sales
Basic Unit Cost - Standard cost method
Alternate Cost - average cost
Multiple Warehouses
SALES ANALYSIS (5725-049)
Sales and profitability figures by salesman, customer, item, and item
class. Availability of the information in the following reports is
dependent upon the applications selected and their installation
sequence.
Daily sales recap by salesman (Data from Billing or Accounts
Receivable)
Monthly salesman sales analysis (Data from Billing or Accounts
Receivable)
The Payroll, Accounts Payable, and General Ledger licensed programs
of the Distribution Financial Accounting System (DFAS) can co-reside
with the Lumber Dealers Management Accounting System.
Monthly customer within salesman sales analysis (Data from Billing
or Accounts Receivable)
DESCRIPTION
Monthly customer sales analysis (Data from Billing or Accounts
Receivable)
BILLING (5725-04F)
A post-billing system with data entry from the System/32 keyboard
and/or diskettes keyed on a 3740 Data Entry System. Editing, invoice
printing, invoice register, and sales summary. Features include:
Ship-to address file
Variable price selection methods
- Operator entry of price
- Contract price file
- Customer code selects either the list price, or, one of six prices,
discounts from list price, or markups from cost
Price convorsion, with computations for square foot, lineal foot, and
board foot items
Estimate preparation
Price list printing - six prices in addition to list price
State sales tax and one local sales tax
Customer code selects 1 of 6 payment terms
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE (5725-04B)
A combined balance forward and open item method, with data editing,
monthly statements, and delinquency notices. Features include:
Balance forward or open item selectable by account
lien expiration date checking
Late charge capability for both open item and balance forward
accounts
Credit limit checked during order edit if Billing is installed
Monthly item and item within item class sales analysis (Data from
Billing or Inventory)
Monthly item class within customer sales analysis (Data from
Billing)
The ability to report sales information for groups of items which do
not have inventory records on file
If Sales Analysis is the first or only Lumber Dealers application
installed, the customer must provide data entry and edit programs.
System Functions
Integrated data base which simplifies filn maintenance and provides
for more efficient disk utilization
User-maintained constants file is used in most programs which
allows operator to modify data subject to change, such as late
charges rate, tax rates, terms, or aging dates, without the need to
change and recompile programs
Specific file load and maintenance programs are included for each
master file
Easy-to-use printed Runbook for each application
Contains additional space in item and customer master records for
customer use
OCL procedures, sort specifications, and processing programs are
cataloged into logical work units which optimize system utilization
Automatic monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of
a program until preceding required programs have been completely
and successfully executed.
Aged trial balance monthly or on-demand
Dynamic backup and recovery system provides for periodic backup
of master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what
procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate
up-to-date master files.
Statement by job for contractors or by branch for multi-location
wholesalers
Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated
from report printing functions.
Variable statement format - two options
INVENTORY CONTROL (5725-040)
A system which allows management to obtain the information needed
for purchasing and profitability analysiS, including reports to assist in
taking inventory. Features include:
Stock Status Review - on demand, selectable for
-
All items, item within limits, active items only
Sequence by vendor (optiona!), item class, or item
Exceptions only: Bolow minimum or cost deviation
Current stock position: On hand, on order, and available
Sales and cost information: This month and year-to-date
Stock Status Report - monthly
- Current stock position
- Activity during the month
- Year-to-date drop shipped quantities
Inventory Analysis Report - on demand in sequence by
-
Item number
Date of last use or sale
Months supply on hand
Extended cost on hand
Vendor number
Item class
Vendor/item class
Selective printing allows the operator to control the printing mode
for reports.
Inquiry programs
Offline 3741 data entry diskette formats
File Size and Application Function Tailoring Capability
Programs and procedures for file allocation are included. The customer
can allocate file space during installation and change file space
allocations as business volumes change. Also, customers may control
the operation of some application functions by file maintenance and by
operator-controlled run-time options.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance .in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely ~ith tJm...cust.omer.
Installation of System/32 programs is a cust~mer "espo.~sibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENViRONMEiT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS·
'~b
I ".
The 16K options of these lAPs will execute~n all mo~6ls :of the IBM:
System/32. The 24K option ~ill':q~ecl!te o~ all modet~ o{ the IBM
------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/32 Lumber Dealers Management Accounting
System (cont'd)
System/32 except the 16K model. There may be a requirement for
providing offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The LOMAS programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG 1\ programming language.
The 16K and 24K IBM System/32 options are executed under control
of the IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1 Version 5
and above). IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1),
which includes Sort, Data File Utility. and Source Entry Utility, is
required for execution of the system. The RPG 1\ Compiler (5725-RG1)
is required if modifications are anticipated.
Instructional Materials
Operator Introduction and Exercises
These materials. consisting of a Student Guide. audio cassettes, and
System/32 diskettes. will help the operator learn and. practice
operations without using the customer data files. One copy will be
provided at no charge to the customer.
One copy of the following material is supplied via SLSS when program
number and initial library are specified. Additional copies may be
obtained by ordering them individually from Mechanicsburg.
Audio Cassettes (2) (SV30-0002) ... System/32 Diskettes (3) (SV300003) ... Student Guide (SR30-0171) ... Advisor Guide (SR30-0169) ...
Runbook (SR30-0170) ... Binder (SV30-OO24).
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Executive Guide (G580-0121) ... General Information Manual
(GH30-0166) ... lAP Specifications (GH30-0167) ... Application
Reference Manual (SH30-0168).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5726-048.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -------.::.:::
ISG
PP 5725-D6A.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
:§~5:
Mar83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 FOOD DISTRIBUTORS
MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM
BILLING ... 5725-06A
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ... 5725-066
INVENTORY CONTROL .. , 5725-068
SALES ANALYSIS .. , 5725-06C
Aging into four aging periods
PURPOSE
INVENTORY CONTROL (5725-068)
These modular applications are available for either a 16K or 24K
System/32. The application function and data base are exactly the
same. Performance improvements in the larger memory size versions
for each system come from the reduction of overlays, incorporation of
larger blocking factors, and use of dual I/O area.
Inventory control involves the recording of items received, sold, and on
hand, the updating of item costs and the recording of activity dates.
When all four applications are installed, they constitute an interrelated
application set with an integrated data base. They can help users
manage their two largest business assets, accounts receivable and
inventory, and give them profit performance data on their products,
customers, and salesmen. They can also help the user increase
operational efficiency and customer service.
The open order file, slot sequenced picking lists and automated pricing
and discounting methods can help improve order processing speed and
accuracy. Inventory Control provides information to the buyer that will
help optimize inventory investment through identification of the
obsolete, slow moving, and unprofitable items; and help increase
inventory turns and service levels. Automatic credit limit checking,
variable credit terms, late charges on open item and balance forward
accounts, delinquency notices, and aged receivables reports provide
tools for reducing bad debt losses and increasing cash flow. Daily,
monthly, and on-demand sales reports help monitor the attainment of
the distributor's sales objectives.
The Payroll, Accounts Payable, and General Ledger licensed programs
of the Distribution Financial Accounting System (DFAS) can co-reside
with Food Distributors Management Accounting System. If Billing is
used in the prebilling mode, a compatible inventory control system must
be installed before or with Billing.
DESCRIPTION
BILLING (5725-D6A)
A prebilling system (when used with a compatible inventory control
system) with postbilling capability, with data entry from the System/32
keyboard and/or from diskettes keyed on a 3740 Data Entry System,
with editing, invoicing, invoice register, and a salesman's recap.
Features include:
Open orders file with listing by customer and/or item that allows
either case labels or picking list in warehouse (slot) sequence
Ship-to address file
Variable pricing methods, including:
-
Contract pricing
Customer class pricing (six classes)
Cost plus pricing
Catchweight pricing
Broken case pricing and surcharge
Special charges and allowances
Case label charges
Cash and trade discounts
Inventory Control can provide accurate, periodic reviews of the status of
each item, while identifying any exception conditions, to assist
management in deciding what to buy, how much to buy and how often
to buy.
Inventory Control provides information that helps:
Maintain records of all items physically in stock as well as on order,
providing control and auditing for this major investment
Arrange for timely, economical ordering of stock
Minimize investment required to meet a specific service level, by
highlighting overstocked or slow-moving items.
The major features of Inventory Control include:
Two cost figures - last cost and burdened cost
Maintenance of broken case quantities
Warehouse location (slot)
Physical inventory aids
An array of reports to assist in:
-
Buyer ordering
Inventory Management
Transaction recording and control
Inventory Accounting
SALES ANALYSIS (5725-06C)
Sales Analysis offers sales and profitability figures by salesman,
customer, item, and item class. Availability of the information in the
reports is dependent upon the applications selected and their installation sequence. Major Sales Analysis Reports include:
Daily sales recap by salesman (data from Billing or Accounts
Receivable).
Monthly salesman sales analysis - current and year-to-date (Data
from Billing or Accounts Receivable).
Monthly customer sales analysis - current and year-to-date (Data
from Billing or Accounts Receivable).
Monthly salesman/customer sales analysis
current
year-to-date (Data from Billing or Accounts Receivable).
and
Monthly item and item within item class sales analysis - current
and year-to-date (Data from Billing or Inventory).
Monthly item class, within customer, within salesman sales analysis
- current and year-to-date (data from Billing).
Sales and tobacco tax
If Sales Analysis is the first or only application installed, the customer
must provide data entry and edit programs.
Credit limit checking
Functions
Automatic invoice numbering
Special deals
Automatic substitution
Suggested retail price on invoice and case labels
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE (5725-066)
Accounts Receivable provides for the recording, controlling, and
reporting of money owed for merchandise sold or services rendered.
Recognizing that a major portion of a wholesale food distributor's
assets may be tied up in accounts receivable, the procedures are
designed to provide timely information that helps your customer:
•
Monthly or weekly statements and delinquency notices
Aged trial balance monthly or on demand - Summary or detail
Maximize profit and return on investment through tight control over
all accounts due
Minimize losses from bad debts through appropriate attention to
slow-paying accounts
Maintain customer goodwill through prompt, accurate record
keeping
The major features of Accounts Receivable include:
Balance forward or open item selectable by account
Late charges for both open item and balance forward accounts on
monthly statements
Credit limit checked during order edit if Billing installed
Integrated data base which simplifies file maintenance and provides
for more efficient disk utilization.
User-maintained constants file is used in most programs which
allows operator to modify data subject to change, such as I~te
charge rate, tax rates, terms, or aging datos, without the need to
change and recompile programs.
Specific file load and maintenance programs are included for 'each
master f i l e . '
Easy-to-use printed Runbook for each application.
Contains additional space in item and customer master records for
customer use.
I
OCL procedures, sort specifications, and processing programs are
cataloged into logical work units which optimize system utilization.
Automatic monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of
a program until preceding required programs have been completely
and successfully executed.
Dynamic backup and recovery system provides for periodic backup
of master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what
procedures need to be rerun· from the last backup point to
re-create up-to-date. master files.
Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated
from report printing functions.
------- - - - ----=- -~~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/32 Food Distributors
Management Accounting System (cont'd)
Selective printing allows the operator to control the printing mode
for reports.
Inquiry programs, with data retrieval options selectable at program
run time, provide current information from the customer and item
master files.
Offline 3741 data entry diskette formats.
File Size and Application Function Tailoring Capability: Programs
and procedures for file allocation are included. Customers can allocate
file space during installation and change file space allocations as
business volumes change. They may control the operation of some
application functions by file maintenance and by operator controlled
run-time options.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The 16K option of these lAPs will execute on all models of the IBM
System/32. The 24K option will execute on all models of the IBM
System/32 except the 16K mdl. There may be a requirement for
providing offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The FDMAS lAPs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II programming
language.
The 16K and 24K IBM System/32 options are system-executed under
control of the IBM System/32 Control Program (5725-SC1 Version 5
and above). IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1),
which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is
required for execution of the system. The RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1)
is required if modifications are anticipated.
Instructional Materials
Operator Introduction and Exercises
These materials, consisting of a Student Guide, audio cassettes, and
System/32 diskettes, will help the operator learn and practice
operations without using the customer data files. One copy will be
provided at no charge to the customer.
One copy of the following material is supplied via SLSS when program
number and initial library are specified. Additional copies may be
obtained by ordering them individually from Mechanicsburg.
Audio Cassettes (2) (SV30-0002) ... System/32 Diskettes (3) (SV300003) ... Student Guide (SR30-0171) ... Advisor Guide (SR30-0169) ...
Runbook (SR30-0170) ... Binder (SV30-0024)
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Executive Guide (G580-0120) ... General Information Manual
(GH30-0156) ... lAP Specifications (GH30-0157) ... Application
Reference Manual (SH30-0158).
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-D6A.2
Mar83
Major Revision
----- - --- ----.:..::..: :§':f.E: ISG
PP 5725-041.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
---.
Mara3
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 DISTRIBUTORS MANAGEMENT
ACCOUNTING SYSTEM (DMAS)
BILLING •.. 5725-041
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ... 5725-043
INVENTORY CONTROL ... 5725-045
SALES ANALYSIS ... 5725-047
PURPOSE
These modular applications are available for either a 16K or 24K
System/32. The application function and data base are exactly the
same. Performance improvements in the larger memory size versions
for each system come from the reduction of overlays, incorporation of
larger blocking factors, and use of dual I/O areas.
When all four applications are installed they constitute an interrelated
application set with an integrated data base. They can help users
manage their two largest business assets, accounts receivable and
inventory, and give them profit performance data on their products,
customers, and salesmen. They can also help the user increase
operational efficiency and customer service.
The open order file, warehouse sequenced picking lists and automated
pricing and discounting methods can help improve order processing
speed and accuracy. The inventory control system provides information
to the buyer that will help optimize inventory investment through
identification of the obsolete, slow moving, and unprofitable items; and
help increase inventory turns and service levels. Automatic credit limit
checking, variable credit terms, late charges on open item and balance
forward accounts, delinquency notices, and aged receivables reports
provide tools for reducing bad debt losses and increasing cash flow.
Daily, monthly, and on-demand sales reports help monitor the
attainment of the distributor's sales objectives.
The Payroll, Accounts Payable, and General Ledger licensed programs
of the Distribution Financial Accounting System (DFAS) can co-reside
with the DMAS licensed programs.
DESCRIPTION
BILLING (5725-041)
A postbilling system with data entry from the System/32 keyboard
and/or from diskettes keyed on a 3740 Data Entry System, with
editing, invoicing, invoice register, and salesman's recap. Features
include:
Open orders file allows printing of either order acknowledgements
or packing lists
Ship-to address file
Variable price selection methods
Variable item discount or markup flexibility
Variable payment terms and cash discounts
Broken case pricing with surcharge
Pricing unit conversion - when inventory unit differs from selling
unit
Container charges automatically applied
Price list
Daily backorder slips
Federal Excise tax calculated
Inventory Analysis Report - on demand
Basic Unit Cost - average cost method
Alternate Cost - last cost method
MUltiple Warehouses
SALES ANALYSIS (5725·047)
Sales profitability figures by salesman, customer, item, and item class.
Availability of the information in the following reports is dependent
upon the applications selected and their installation sequence.
Daily sales recap by salesman (data from Billing or Accounts
Receivable)
Monthly salesman sales analysis - current and year-to-date (data
from Billing or Accounts Receivable)
Monthly customer sa.les analysis - current and year-to-date (data
from Billing or t'.ccounts Receivable)
Monthly salesman/customer sales analysis - current
year-to-date (data from Billing or Accounts Receivable)
and
Monthly salesman/customer/item class sales analysis - current
and year-to-date (data from Billing)
Monthly item and item within item class sales analysis - current
and year-to-date (data from Billing or Inventory)
If Sales Analysis is the first or only DMAS application installed, the
customer must provide Data Entry and Edit Programs.
System functions
Integrated data base which simplifies file maintenance and provides
for more efficient disk utilization.
User-maintained constants file is used in most programs which
allows operator to modify data subject to change, such as late
charge rate, tax rates, terms, or aging dates, without the need to
change and recompile programs.
Specific file load and maintenance programs are included for each
master file.
Easy-to-use printed RUN BOOK for each application
Contains additional space in item and customer master records for
customer use.
OCl procedures, sort specifications, and processing programs are
cataloged into logical work units which optimize system utilization.
Automatic monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of
a program until preceding required programs have been completely
and successfully executed.
Offline 3741 data entry diskette formats.
Dynamic backup and recovery system provides for periodic backup
of master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what
procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to
re-create up-to-date master files.
Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated
from report printing functions.
State sales tax (standard) plus two local sales taxes
Selective printing allows the operator to control the printing mode
for reports.
Monthly tax totals report
Inquiry programs provide current information from the customer
and item master files.
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE (5725-043)
A combined balance forward and open item method, with data editing,
monthly statements, and delinquency notices. Features inClude:.
Balance forward or open item selectable by account
Late charges for both open item and balance forward accounts
Future dating
File Size and Application Function Tailoring Capability: All necessary
programs and procedures for file allocation are included with the DMAS
programs. The customer can allocate file space during installation and
change file space a!locations as business volumes change. Also, the
customer may control the operation of some application functions by
file maintenance and by operator-controlled run-time options.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Credit limit checked during order edit if Billing is installed
Monthly statements and delinquency notices
Aged trial balance monthly or on demand - summary or detail
Statements by .iob or branch location
Aging of customer invoices with three past due periods
INVENTORY CONTROL (5725-045)
A system which allows management to obtain the information needed
for purchasing and profitability analysis, including a perpetual inventory
system and a physical inventory system. Features include:
Stock Status Review - on demand
Stock Status Report - monthly
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering Information, personnel selection. and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely. with the customer.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The 16K option will execute on all models of the IBM System/32. The
24K option will execute on all models of the IBM Syst8!1l/32 except the
16K model. There may be a requirement for providing 'offline keying on
an IBM 3740 Data Entry System.
.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/32 OMAS (cont'd)
The DMAS licensed programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II
programming language.
The 16K and 24K System/32 options are executed under control of the
IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1 Version 5 and
above). IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which
includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for
execution of the system. The RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if
modifications to the lAPs are anticipated.
Instructional Materials
Operator Introduction and Exercises
These materials, consisting of a Student Guide, audio cassettes, and
System/32 diskettes, will help the operator learn and practice
operations without using the customer data files. One copy will be
provided at no charge to the customer.
One copy of the following material is supplied via SLSS when program
number and initial library are specified. Additional copies may be
obtained by ordering them individually from Mechanicsburg.
Audio Cassettes (2) (SV30-0002) ... System/32 Diskettes (3) (SV300003) ... Student Guide (SR30-0171) ... Advisor Guide (SR30-0169) ...
Runbook (SR30-0170) ... Binder (SV30-0024)
A prerequisite to these exercises is the System/32 Operator Training
Self-study Course (SR30-0004).
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Executive Guide (G580-0112) '" General Information Manual
(GH30-0093) ... Specifications (GH30-0095) ... Application Reference
Manual (SH30-0141 )
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-041.2
Mar83
Major Revision
------- --------
PP 5725-061.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
..:. =:: ~'fE: ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 DISTRIBUTION
FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING SYSTEM (DFAS)
GENERAL LEDGER •.. 5725-061
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE •.. 5725·062
PAYROLL ... 5725-063
PURPOSE
These three applications provide distributors with a powerful aid in
managing their business.
HIGHLIGHTS
Independent or Interrelated application approach:
- Modular design 'facilitates sequential application installation
- Single data entry results in multiple application updates
- Modular design allows users to choose the applications that
address their problem areas
Wide variety of reports and report options included:
- Management reporting is a byproduct of normal data entry
- The 941-As and W-2s are saved on diskette and may be printed
later
- Detail or summary listings within a range of keys is supported in
many reports
Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide
a solid accounting system:
- Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided
- Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation,
audit and control are provided
- Security code deters unauthorized execution of key programs in
each application
- A journal reference numbering system supplies an audit trail for
any application that generates transactions into the General
ledger
- Tailoring the application on site at installation time.
- Allows users to change the selection of provided functions as
their business changes.
- All provided functions are included in the programs but only
required functions are executed.
- File sizes may be expanded or contracted as needed by rerunning
the System Tailoring Procedure.
An Application Reference Manual Volume 1 provides a step-by-step
installation activity plan including sample numbering systems, sample
input and maintenance data forms, file loading sequences, and control
forms with suggested procedures. Volume 2 of the Application
Reference Manual provides information on the day-to-day use of the
application.
The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to- use set
of instructions showing all the activities necessary to run the programs
on a System/32. The Operator Reference Summary Card is provided
for the operator as a reminder of the major operational functions of
each procedure. It is intended to be used once the operator is
thoroughly trained in the particular application.
Instructional material, with exercises, is provided for operator training in
the use of the Runbook. The course is not application-dependent.
Therefore, only one copy of the course is needed per customer no
matter how many DFAS applications are installed.
An Application Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material,
for use by the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering
continuing support. It describes the architecture of programs,
procedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed
descriptions of each program.
The System/32 product may co-reside, but not interact, with the
System/32 Distribution lAPs written up elsewhere in this section.
Applications Description: The three applications are ready-to-execute
applications. Each includes samples of all input forms and control
forms. Also included are the Application Reference Manuals, a
Runbook, Source Code, Object Code, execution procedures, and the
Application Logic Manual, if it is ordered as optional basic material.
Can be installed without customer programming capability:
These are some general features which all three applications have:
- System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing
on-site changes to file sizes and determination of functions used
- File maintenance and audit procedures provided
- Easy-to-use runbook
- Operator self-study course is available
- Step-by-step installation activity plan provided by the Application Reference Manuals
- User's information supplied to the supervisor by the Application
Reference Manuals
SPECIAL SALES INFORMATION
Each application offers opportunities for growing installed System/32s.
Each is primarily intended for the distributor with 20-250 employees.
Key accounting and management reports are provided to allow selling
and installing without a requirement for Systems Engineering Services
or customer programming capabilities.
Each application is a customer requirements-oriented system, and
caution should be used in changing the system design, function, or data
base layout. Exercise care in proposing these applications to large
distributors. Make an extensive study of the large distributor's needs to
determine the applicability, throughput, and the extent of any needed
modification to the programs, procedures, or file sizes.
Designed to fit industry requirements
Security codes to deter unauthorized use of master files
In-house inclusion/exclusion of functions to be executed
OCl procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are
packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation
Monitoring of execution soquence prevents execution of a program
until preceding required programs have been completely and
successfully executed
Compatible online/offline file maintenance and transaction data
entry via the System/32 keyboard or diskettes created on the 3740
Data Entry System
Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of
master files and edited transactions, and keeps track of what
procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate
up-to-date master files
Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated
from report writing functions
Some report printing can be deferred to a more convenient time
Selective printing options are available for many report functions
DESCRIPTION
GENERAL LEDGER (5725-061)
These three applications are independent yet interrelated, ready-toexecute applications for the small distributor:
This application combines all the transactions affecting the financial
status of the company during the period. They may be entered directly
as a General Journal Entry or may have been previously entered through;
interface with Accounts Payable or Payroll. Support is provided for
either a 13-period or 12-month fiscal year. At period-end closing time;
audit listings and the Financial Statement Worksheet are provided to
help verify that the user is still in balance before proceeding into the
actual closing. The reports will also aid in generation of any necessary
closing entries.
'
General ledger
Accounts Payable
Payroll
The system combines two data entry approaches - Operator-Oriented
and Batch-Oriented. Support is provided for transaction entry through
the System/32 keyboard or through a diskette keyed offline on a 3740
Data Entry System. The three easy-to-operate applications can be
installed in separate stages at different times and still be an interrelated
system.
Each application has certain requirements for records within a
cross-application Constants File which contains questionnaire
responses. These records allow the application to select certain fields
for editing, file sizes, and functions to suit each customer's needs. The
questionnaire responses are keyed during initial installation and may be
changed as needed. The System Tailoring Procedure allows these
responses to be entered.
The System Tailoring Procedure utilizes the answers to a series of
questions regarding a distributor's requirements. It provides the
following:
An Income Statement and' Balance Sheet are standard report outputs.
The user can design the format of these reports with an easy-to-use
format description procedure. The financial reports can illustrate
current financial data as compared to historical information, also te;>
budget information on the Income Statement. The capability is
provided to format Income Statements by subdivisions of a company,·
such as department. Several companies' financial information may b~
combined into one Balance Sheet and Income Statement. A Stateme~
of Changes in Financial Position Worksheet is provided.
i~j
I':
Users may define their own Chart of Accounts or use a suggest
account structure provided with the application. The fiscal year st ~
period or month is user-defined. Multiple company support for up • '
ten companies is included. Any transactions passed from Payroll ar!ii
applied to, company number one only.
------- ----:: - - ::E'f~ ISG
PP 5725-061.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/23 OFAS (cant'd)
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE (5725-062)
The Accounts Payable application provides an Open Payables and Cash
Disbursements function on either an accrual or cash basis. Invoices and
credit memos entered may be multi-lined and distributed by General
Ledger account number. Entries may be for standard or one-time
vendors and may be open or pre-paid. Credit memos may be entered
manually or initiated automatically by referencing a prior entered
invoice. Invoice payments may be aSSigned to a vendor other than the
original vendor. Invoices may be controlled through the application
based upon a voucher number entered with the invoice.
A Purchase Journal provides the audit trail for cost transactions
entering into the General Ledger system and into the Open Payables
File. An Open Payables Report is provided in due date or vendor
sequence. This turnaround document provides a way to select for
payment by date, vendor, or invoice, including partial payments, for
Cash Disbursements. Invoices may be entered or placed in hold status
to prevent inadvertent payment. A Cash Requirements Report is used
to assist in insuring sufficient funds are available and proper invoice
selection was made before the checkwriting procedure begins. The
Cash Disbursements Journal provides an audit trail for its transactions
entering the General Ledger application and acts as the Check Register.
Checkwriting and reconciliation are also provided.
A Vendor Analysis Report indicates key business volumes and
discounts lost and taken by previous year and current year. An
additional analysis report by business volume per vendor is also
provided. Multiple company support for up to 10 companies is
provided.
PAYROLL (5725-063)
This hourly/salary/executive payroll provides for regular, overtime,
premium, vacation, and sick pay. It may be run weekly, biweekly,
semimonthly, monthly. Hours may be entered daily or by pay period.
Exception hours provide time and one-half, double-time, double-time
and one-half, and triple time capabilities. Rates may be selected from
the Employee Master Record or keyed in as an override. Shift
differential capabilities are provided for second and third shift. The
differential may be defined as a percentage of the rate or cents to be
added to the rate.
these original shipments will have to update their lAPs to the larger
record size before they will co-reside with DFAs.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Each of these IBM system/32 Industry Application Programs will
execute on all models of the IBM system/32. The programs are
compiled assuming a 16K system. Because of volumes and time
constraints, there may be a requirement for providing offline keying on
an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used, it must
have the 128-character record features (128-character - #5455 and
feature group A - #4004).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The application programs for the IBM system/32 are written in IBM
system/32 RPG II Programming language and execute under control of
the IBM system/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1 Version
3). The IBM system/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which
includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for
execution of the programs. The IBM system/32 RPG II Compiler
(5725-RG1) is required if modifications to the source code are
necessary.
Instructional Materials
DFAS Operator Instructions (sBOF-3584).
One copy is supplied via sLss when program number and initial library
are specified. Additional copies can be obtained by specifying
sBOF-3584 which includes the following:
Binder (sR30-0120) .•. Study Guide (sR30-0117) '" Sample Run Book
(sR30-0ll8) ... Advisor Guide (sR30-0ll9) ... Cassette (sV30-0073)
.. , Diskette (SV30-0074) ... Plastic Insert (sR30-0l66)
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
Vacation/Holiday pay may be part of a regular paycheck or on a
separate check. A bonus payment is paid on a separate check with a
flat percentage of income tax deducted. Sick pay may be fully
non-taxable or only liable for income tax. Wages subject to Federal
Unemployment Insurance (FUn and State Unemployment Insurance
(SUI.) are determined.
The ability to handle taxable or non-taxable adjustments, pay advances,
and employer-paid union benefits (taxable and non-taxable) is also
provided. Once the gross earnings is calculated, deductions will be
taken to reach net pay. In addition to calculating present Federal and
FICA taxes, a standard tax algorithm is provided to calculate most
present state taxes based upon customer-provided data. Local taxes
may also fit the standard tax algorithm provided. The state disability
insurance deductions also use a standard algorithm based upon
customer-provided data. Miscellaneous deductions may be taken by
percent, fixed amount, hourly rate, upper limit, or cyclic within a
user-specified frequency. Union deductions may be taken by percent,
hourly rate, or fixed amount within a user-specified frequency.
Handwritten paychecks and paychecks never cashed (reversals) are also
supported by the application. Once the payroll register and checks are
printed, many analysis reports are produced: Labor Distribution,
Miscellaneous Deductions, Union Deductions, YTD/QTD Earnings,
Workmen's Compensation Worksheet, and Payroll Journal. The
presently formatted W-2 and 941A reports are also provided.
The capability is provided to pass transactions to the General Ledger
application, if installed. These transactions will be applied towards
company one only. Payroll may be on either a cash or accrual basis. "If
the cash basis is selected, no transactions are passed to the General
Ledger.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may' provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, Installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of system/32 programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Tl'i~ three applications are intended to be independent yet interrelated.
Many functions have been included to protect the integrity of the
~ster files, programs, procedures, and libraries.
I
f,
.~
h application may co-reside, but will not interact, with the
tribution lAPs but may also operate as stand-alone applications .
.:~~·e Distribution lAP must have a Constants File with a record length of
: JM characters. The original shipments of the Food and Paper lAPs for
. .J4K machines had 59-character records. The customers that received
'~
III."
. ~.~'~
"
--..------------==::: :§~E: ISG
PP 5725-E31.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/ 32 STUDENT RECORDS (5725-E31),
STUDENT ACCOUNTING (5725-E32),
STUDENT SCHEDULING (5725-E33)
PURPOSE
Each program. offers opportunities for new name and first systems
account sales in small school districts. These applications are primarily
intended for small school districts, or large secondary schools.
The Student Records lAP, which provides the data base and file
maintenance functions, is a prerequisite for either or both of the other
packages.
These three applications provide the school with a powerful aid in
managing its student record keeping functions.
The system design of these packages incorporates many significant
features:
•
G~neral ~ Sv.st.em 1ailorjng.t.9 ~I).e ~i(:hQ9h(.Yrlique" r~q.l!i~enienjs
for number of periods in a school day, number of terms (or
semesters) in a year, state reporting cycles, etc. All input specifications are described in terms familiar to school administrators and
require no detailed knowledge of data processing techniques. Data
files are shared among applications.
Student Records - provides common data base and file maintenance functions for the other applications. Basic record keeping
and reporting functions essential for secondary schools are also
included.
Student Accounting - consists of an Attendance Accounting
Application and a Mark Reporting Application.
Student Scheduling - supports both machine scheduling and
"arena" scheduling of students to classes. Provides many reports
to assist the principal and counselor in the scheduling process.
HIGHLIGHTS
Interrelated applications approach:
- Modular design allows users to choose applications that address
their problem areas
- Modular design facilitates sequential application installation
- Single data entry results in mUltiple application updates
Wide variety of reports and report options included:
- Management reporting is a byproduct of normal data entry
- Optional sequences and selection within a range is supported in
many reports
Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide
a solid student accounting system:
as needed. The System Tailoring Procedure allows these responses to
be entered and maintained.
The System Tailoring Procedure utilizes the answers to a series of
questions regarding a school's requirements. It provides the following:
Tailoring of the application at installation time.
Allows users to change the selection of provided functions as the
environment changes.
All provided functions are included in the programs but only
required functions are executed.
Files may be resized as needed by rerunning the System Tailoring
Procedure.
Application Reference Manual Volume 1 provides a step-by-step
installation activity plan including sample input and maintenance data
forms and file loading sequences. Application Reference Manual
Volume 1 is delivered with the Student Records application. It contains
information pertinent to all three applications. Each Volume 2 of the
Application Reference Manual provides information on the day-to-day
use of the application.
The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to-use set
of instructions showing all the activities necessary to run the programs
on a System/32. The Procedure Reference Summary is provided for
the operator as a reminder of the major operational functions of each
procedure. It is intended to be used as a quick reference once the
operator is thoroughly trained in the particular application.
Instructional material with exercises is provided for System/32 operator
training in the use of the Runbook. The course is not application
dependent. Therefore, only one copy of the course is needed per
.
customer no matter which of the student applications is installed.
An Application Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material,
for use by the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering
continuing support. It describes the architecture of programs,
procedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed
descriptions of each program.
Applications Description: The three applications are ready-toexecute. Each includes source code, object code, execution procedures, and the Application Logic Manual, if it is ordered as optional
basic material.
These are some general features which all three applications have:
Designed to fit industry requirements
- Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided
- Sample. user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation,
audit and control are provided
- Security codes deter unauthorized execution of key programs in
each application
Security codes to deter unauthorized use of master files
Can be installed without customer programming capability:
Monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program
until preceding required programs have been completely and
successfully executed
- Designed to fit industry requirements
- System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing
on-site changes to file sizes and determination of functions used
- File maintenance and auditability provided
- Easy-to-use run book
- Operator self-study course
- Step-by-step installation activity plan and detailed user
information provided by the Application Reference Manual
DESCRIPTION
These three applications are an interrelated and ready-to-execute set
of applications for the small school district or large secondary school:
Student Records
- Data Base and Maintenance
Student Accounting
- Attendance Accounting and Mark Reporting
Student Scheduling
- Assignment of Students to Classes
The system combines two data entry approaches - operator-oriented
and batch-oriented. Support is provided for transaction entry through
the System/32 keyboard or through a diskette keyed offline on a 3740
Data Entry System. Student Records is a prerequisite to the other
applications which can be installed at different times.
Each application has certain requirements records within a crossapplication Constants File which contain questionnaire responses.
These records allow the application to select certain fields for editing,
file sizes, and functions to suit each customer's needs. The questionnaire responses are keyed during initial installation and may be changed
In-house inclusion/exclusion of functions to be executed
OCl procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are
packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation
Compatible online/ offline file maintenance and transaction data
entry via the System/32 keyboard or diskettes created on a 3740
Data Entry System
Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of
master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what
procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate
up-to-date master files
Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated .
from report writing
S~lective' pri"nifriQ" QPt!Qn-s are ayailable f9r many reports.
STUDENT RECORDS (5725-E31)
The Student Records area represents a systems solution to the
problems of recording, retrieving, manipulating, and reporting student
data. The student record is the key to the school's student accounting
system. It is a vital source of information necessary to the implementation of the other applications. In addition to providing data to and
collecting data from the scheduling, mark reporting, and attendance
accounting applications, it contains student personal data for counseling. This data includes the student's name, school code, year of
graduation, current grade level, sex, birth date, address, and a number
of other data elements. It also contains student attendance information, the student's current schedule and mark reporting information, and
the school's curriculum for the current school year. From these files,
many reports can be provided for the school administration, teacher,
counselors and parents.
As the Student Records system is designe'd to be an ongoing systerT'!, it I
is not necessary to recreate all of the basic files at the beginning of each
school year. Programs are provided to accomplish a year-to-year
------- ----:: - - a'=f~ ISG
PP 5725-E31.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
Student Records, Accounting, Scheduling (cont'd)
transition by indicating the promotion of qualified students to the next
grade level, and their new school, if that is indicated at promotion time.
An important aspect of the student records application is the file
maintenance functions. Programs are provided to update information in
each of the files in the student records application as well as performing
the year-end transition functions (student transfers between schools,
promotions of students from one grade level to the next, etc.).
student's class assignments. For those students who could not be
completely scheduled because of a conflict in their course requests, a
Student Conflict report can be printed to assist the school administrator
in resolving that student's conflict. ' Once a final scheduling run has
been processed, the school may optionally run the study hall scheduler
which will assign the student to study halls during any unassigned time
in the school day.
The integrity of the data in the files is maintained through the use of
extensive editing of the data when it is entered into the system and
through complete backup .and recover{ procedures which are an integral
part of the package.
Output reports include:
Output reports include:
Student listings
Course Request Tally Report
Potential Conflict Matrix
Student Conflict Report
Ethnic Distribution Report
Student Schedules
Student Profiles
Room Schedules
Instructor Schedules
Class Rosters
STUDENT ACCOUNTING (5725-E32)
The Student Accounting package consists of two applications,
Attendance Accounting and Mark Reporting. The Student Records
package, which provides the data base and file maintenance functions,
is a prerequisite to this package.
Attendance Application
The maintenance of attendance records is an important aspect of
Student Accounting. In many states the amount of state aid for
public education is based on average student attendance. Under
manual methods, a considerable amount of time is expended by
teachers and staff personnel in keeping records and accumulating
data for state reports. The Attendance Accounting application
simplifies such tasks by collecting original data at the source
through the use of attendance data gathering documents, enabling
reports to be prepared accurately and rapidly, and reducing clerical
transcriptions.
Output reports include:
Daily Absence Phone list
Daily Absence Report
Unresolved Absence Report
Student Attendance Register
Student Category Register
School Category Register
B.
Course Request Verification
Name and Address Labels
Student Schedules
A.
Student Request Verification
Mark Reporting Application
The Mark Reporting application provides a means of recording
student progress data for reports to parents and to school
personnel. The primo data processed by this application are .the
student marks, which may be either numeric marks or alphabetic
marks with optional plus or minus signs. In addition, up to two
comments may be selected from a list of 99 user-defined comments and associated with each student's graded course. The
Mark Reporting application is designed to fit the needs of many
schools by providing a selection of reports and processing methods
from which to choose. Output reports include:
Report Card
Labels for Permanent Records
GPA listings
Mark Analysis
. Exception Reports,
STUDENT SCHEDULING (5725-E33)
The Student Scheduling package (Student Records (6725~E31) is a
prerequisite) processes student course requests against a manually
prepared master schedule of classes to produce a schedule of classes
for each student. To assist the school administrator in preparing this
master schedule of classes, the following reports are produced from the
student course requests: Student Verification Report, Course Verification Report, Course Request Tally Report, and Potential Conflict Matrix.
Once the master schedule of classes has been prepared, student
requests are processed by the Main Scheduler programs, or schools
may wish to use the arena scheduling option. Whether the class
assign~ents are accomplished through machine scheduling or arena
scheduling, the results are the same: A data base. reflecting each
Programs are provided to pass basic student identifying information
from the Student Records package to the Scheduling package and then,
once scheduling is completed and the scheduled term is about to begin,
the student data records will be updated to reflect the student's current
schedule of classes. One of the. primary objectives of the Student
Scheduling package is to provide for the variety of scheduling
philosophies present in today's secondary school environment. This
flexibility is accomplished by offering a number of basic scheduling
features and options which include:
Scheduling of up to 4 terms, or semesters
Up to 24 periods in a school day
Up to 20 requests per student
Flexibility in course requests - section requests, instructor requests,
term requests, free time requests, and alternates
Add-on scheduling
Study hall scheduling option
Arena scheduling option
Student scheduling is far more than a clerical chore. The basic
educational philosophy of an institution is reflected in the manner in
which students are assigned to a class section. For example, many
school systems permit varying degrees of student-elected alternates
and teacher preferences. This example illustrates the need for flexibility
in a student scheduling system to accommodate a wide spectrum of
educational policies. The student scheduling package provides the
administrator with a large variety of optional system features which can
be used to tailor the scheduling system to coincide with the policies of
the school.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The minimum system
System/32 with: .
configuration
requirements
are
an
IBM
24K bytes of main storage
5.0 M B of disk storage
Character or line print capability with 132 print positions and the
48-character set.
The lAPs are designed to process data recorded on the IBM System/32
keyboard, or data from a diskette recorded by the IBM 3740 Data Entry
System. Because of volumes and time constraints, there may be a
requirement for providing offline key entry on an IBM 3740 Data Entry
System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used, it must have the 128-character
record features (#5455) and Feature Group A (#4004).
The three applications are interrelated. Many functions have been
included to protect the integrity of the master files, programs,
procedures, and libraries. Because of this, no other lAP or user-written
programs may co-reside unless stringent coding requirements for these
programs are met to insu're compatibility with the Student Administration System. The Application Logic Manual discusses in detail the
coding conventions used for the development of the Student Administration System.
Because of the printing volumes and timing constraints involved in the
Mark Reporting applications, an 80 cps printer is recommended as a
practical minimum.
------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCT5
PP 5725-E31.3
Mar 83
Major Revision
Student Records, Accounting, Scheduling (cont'd)
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The application programs are written in IBM 5ystem/32 RPG II
Programming language and execute under control of the IBM
5ystem/32 5ystem Control Programming (5725-5C1) Version 5. The
IBM 5ystem/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes
5ort, Data File Utility, and 50urce Entry Utility, is required for execution
of the programs. The IBM 5ystem/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is
required if modifications to the source code are necessary.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Student Records Runbook (5B30-0127) ... Student Records Reference
Manual Volume 1 (5B30-0128) ... Student Records Reference Manual
Volume 2 (5830-0129) ... Student Accounting Runbook (5830-0131)
.. , Student Accounting Reference Manual (5830-0132) ." Student
Scheduling Runbook (5830-0134) ... Student Scheduling Reference
Manual (5830-0135) ... Student Records Logic Manual (L830-0130) ...
Student Accounting Logic Manual (L830-0133) ... Student Scheduling
Logic Manual (L830-0136)
TERMS and CONDITIONS: 5ee PP Index
\
...
------- -----
Do not reproduce without written permission
=--~~~ ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 FORTRAN IV
5725·F01
PURPOSE
System/32 FORTRAN IV processes programs written in the System/32
FORTRAN IV language, producing output suitable for execution with the
System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1).
DESCRIPTION
The System/32 FORTRAN IV language contains those features defined
in American National Standard Basic FORTRAN, X3.10.1966; language
extensions supported by IBM 1130 Basic FORTRAN; and additional
features and capabilities previously available only with certain IBM Full
FORTRAN compilers. These features include:
Logical data, logical expressions, and logical IF are supported.
- Logical elements (that is, constants, variables, and arrays) contain
true or false values.
- Operation symbols are used in logical and relational expressions
.NOT. (negative)
.AND. (conjunction)
.OR.
(union)
. LT.
.LE.
.EO.
.GT.
.NE.
.GE.
(less than)
(less or equal to)
(equal)
(greater than)
(notequal)
(greater or equal to)
- Logical expressions evaluate elements to obtain true or false
values.
- Logical assignment statements define a relationship - placing the
value of a logical expression in a variable or array element.
- The logical IF statement evaluates an expression and executes or
skips an associated statement, depending upon whether the
value of the expression is true or false, respectively.
- Logical variables and arrays can be initialized to true or false
using the DATA statements.
- Logical elements can be used as arguments of a CALL statement.
Integer 2-byte constants are provided to facilitiate IBM 1130 to
System/32 FORTRAN IV conversion.
Source Entry Utility [Utilities licensed program (5725- UT1 )],
although not a part of the FORTRAN lic~nsed program, may be
used to enter and maintain FORTRAN source programs.
IBM FORTRAN IV language extensions INVOKE, PROGRAM and
GLOBAL allow FORTRAN main programs to be loaded successfully
into main storage and executed, while permitting these programs to
share· a common data area. These language extensions provide
function equivalent to 1130 FORTRAN CALL LINK.
The Overlay Linkage Editor will automatically create overlays which
reduces the amount of .storage required to run System/32
FORTRAN IV programs but may increase the execution time.
The DEBUG facility enables the user to locate errors in a FORTRAN
source program. By use of four basic statements, the DEBUG
facility provides for tracing flow within a program and between
programs and for checking the validity of subscripts.
List directed input/output permits reading and writing of formatted
data without a FORMAT statement.
The GENERIC statement enables the user to specify a single name
for a FORTRAN built-in or library function having several names.
Depending on argument type, the correct function is selected by
the compiler with each appearance of the name.
The System/32 FORTRAN IV library contains mathematical and service
subprograms required during execution to perform arithmetic operations, input and output constant conversions and input! output control.
System/32 FORTRAN IV is supplemented by () commercial subroutine
package which is equivalent in function to the 1130 Commercial
Subroutine Package insofar as is meaningful in terms of System/32
devices and data management.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
FORTRAN IV compiler and its generated programs will oxecute on any
model of IBM System/32. Object programs will support Additional
Support (#1005) and Data Recorder Attachment (#3200). Control
Storage Increment (#1500) is required on the IBM 5320 for execution of
object programs. It is not required for compilation. On IBM 5320 Band
C models, FORTRAN graphics are provided by a 64-character EBCDIC
print belt or a 48-character FORTRAN print belt.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
A current version of IBM System/32 System Control Programming
(5725-SC1) is required t~.execute the FORTRAN IV compiler and its
generated programs.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725·F01.1
Mar83
Major Revision
------- -------====";'
- ---= ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 5725·F11.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
CUSTOMER ACCOUNTING SYSTEM
CUSTOMER INFORMATION FILE ... 5125-F11
DEMAND DEPOSIT ACCOUNTING ... 5125-F12
SAVINGS ACCOUNTING ... 5725-F13
INSTALLMENT LOAN ACCOUNTING ... 5125-F14
PURPOSE
The Customer Information File lAP (CIF) includes the data base, the
application conversion procedures, and the file maintenance procedures
for the system. It is a prerequisite for the Demand Deposit Accounting,
Savings Accounting and Installment Loan Accounting lAPs, which may
be installed independently of each other.
The applications provide broad application support for the small
commercial bank. The Customer Information File lAP enables the bank
to associate all of a customer's checking, savings, and installment loan
accounts with a single record that contains common information about
the customer and the customer's relationship to the bank. This enables
the bank to make decisions based on a broader knowledge of the status
of the customer's accounts. Account and customer information is
accessed by account number for daily transaction processing, and by
customer name for management reports, inquiries, etc. The Demand
Deposit Accounting, Savings Accounting and Installment loan
Accounting lAPs support the three most important data processing
applications in a commercial bank. Each of these lAPs contains a
variety of functional options, enabling the bank to tailor the application
to its own requirements.
These applications offer an opportunity for new name a'nd first system
account sales to small commercial banks. While the applications are
primarily intended for commercial banks with deposits of $5 to 25
million, the size of the bank deposits is not· by itself an accurate
indicator of proper lAP fit at any given bank.
HIGHLIGHTS
Can be Installed without Customer Prograinming Capability:
- Step-by-step installation activity plan and detailed user guidance
is provided in the 'Application Reference Manual
- System Tailoring Procedure accommodates account growth by
allowing on-site changes to file sizes and functions used.
- Application conversion procedures are provided.
- Conversion aids are provided to assist in, consolidating the master.
data from a customer's account records 'into a single CIF record.
- Strict DP controls are enforced during conversion.
- File maintenance is provided.
- Operator self-study course is provided.
Accounting and Control Techniques
- Two levels of security codes help deter unauthorized access to
programs and data.
:
- Sample audit trail and control techniques are documented.
- Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation,
audit and control are provided.
Interrelated Application Design
- Data base design reduces file space requirements.
- Common procedures add new accounts and provide file
maintenance for all installed applications.
- Access to all application accounts through the CIF Master
Record.
At installation time the options provided in the systems are selected
through a System Tailoring Procedure which allows the user to:
Tailor the application to use only the functions wanted.
Change selection of functions to be executed as the environment
changes.
Resize files as the bank's business expands, or if the bank wishes
to revise its original estimates.
There is only one Application Reference Manual, Volume 1, provided
with the System/32 Financial Institutions Customer Accounting
System. It is shipped with CIF and provides instructions for installing
and converting all of the Financial Institutions Customer Accounting
System lAPs. It contains guidance on installation planning, data
gathering, and the use of the installation and conversion procedures.
Samples of all required input data and. control forms are included. A
separate Volume 2 of the Application Reference Manual is provided for
each of the four lAPs. These manuals contain information on the daily
operations of the application. Included is information on procedure
scheduling, the operating of each procedure and the implementation of
sound operational controls.
A runbook and a procedure reference summary is provided for each
application. The Runbook provides the operator with an easy-to-use
set of instructions showing all the activities necessary to run the
procedures on a System/32. The Procedure Reference Summary is
provided for the operator as a reminder of the functions and use of each
procedure. It is intended to be used as a quick reference once the
operator is thoroughly trained in the particular application.
An Operator Instruction Manual with exercises is provided for operator
training in the use of the run book. The course is not oriented specifi-.
cally to financial applications. Therefore, only one copy of the course is
needed per customer regardless of which of the lAPs are installed.
An Application Logic Manual is provided for each application as
licensed material. It is mainly useful for the self-sufficient customer
and for systems engineering support. The manual describes the
architecture of the Financial Institutions Customer Accounting System,
and the logic of the programs and procedures. Data base cross
references and a data dictionary are also included.
The four applications are ready-to-execute. Each includes the sourc~
code, object code, execution procedures and the Application Logic
Manual. Some general features common to all four applications are:
I
Two levels of security codes help deter unauthorized access to
programs and data.
Customer tailors application processing by including or excluding
functions to be executed.
OCl procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are
packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation.
Monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program
until the required preceding programs have been successfully
executed.
File maintenance and monetary transactions may be entered via the
System/32 keyboard or diskettes created on a 3740 Data Entry
System.
DESCRIPTION
Monetary transactions may be entered via the 1255 Magnetic
Character Reader.
These four applications are an interrelated and ready-to-execute set of
applications for the small commercial bank:
A single set of CIF procedures enters and edits application
conversion data for all lAPs and creates the master files.
Customer Information File
- Data Base, File Maintenance, Application
Customer-oriented reports.
Conversion and
Demand Deposit Accounting
- Processing of checking accounts with optional functions of
Overdraft Banking, Automatic Funds Transfer. and Combined
Statements.
Savings Accounting
The Backup and Recovery design forces periodic backup of master
files and transactions. This provides for tracking of what procedures need to be rerun in recovery to re-create the master files.
Three generations of backup diskettes can be. maintained, each
containing a complete set of master files and transact~ons.
Reprint options permit printing multiple copies of reports.
CUSTOMER INFORMATION FILE (5125·F11)
- Processing of savings accounts, both regular savings accounts
and time deposit open accounts.
Installment loan Accounting
- Processing of installment loan accounts,
interest, add-on, and discount loans.
A single set of CIF procedures establishes new accounts and
performs master file maintenance for all lAPs.
including simple
The system provides transaction and file maintenance data entry
through the System/32 keyboard or through a diskette keyed offline on
a 3740 Data Entry System. The bank may optionally elect to use the
1255 Magnetic Character Reader (MICR) to capture transactions for
Demand Deposit Accounting, Savings Accounting, and Installment loan
Accounting. An installation questionnaire and data capture programs
are provided to support the 1255 MICA.
The Customer Information File lAP supports three general functions of
the System/32 Financial Institutions Customer Accounting System:
Application Conversion
Master File Maintenance
Cross-Application Reports
Customer Information File is a prerequisite for Demand Deposit
Accounting, Savings Accounting, and Installment Loan Accounting, and
is installed in conjunction with the installation and conversion of each of
those lAPs. The conversion process creates a CIF Master File, (which
contains customer-related data for each of. the bank's customers) and
separate Account Master Files for DDA, Savings, and Installment
------- -----------_.-------- ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
PP 5725-F11.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
System/32 Financial Institutions
Customer Accounting System (cont'd)
Loans. The Account Master Files contain account-related data for each
account in the three applications. The system maintains linkage from
each customer's Customer Information File record to the account
master record for each account - checking, savings, and installment
loan accounts. In addition a cross-reference file provides an access
path from each account master record to all of the customers associated with the account, based on the account number.
HIGHLIGHTS
Application Conversion: Separate programs are provided to enter and edit
the customer and account data and to build the data base during
application conversion. A two-phase conversion procedure is
established for each application. During the first phase the data that is
less subject to change (such as customer name and address, account
type, etc.) is entered. The master data from each customer's account
records is consolidated into a single Customer Information File record.
A unique access key is developed for each customer and all master
records are created. At this stage the records can be maintained, but
monetary transactions cannot be processed. This phase may take place
over several weeks 'or months.
During the second phase the remaining data, such as account balances
are entered, edited and loaded into the master records created in the
first phase. The records are placed in active status and the application
is ready for daily processing.
Strict batch controls are implemented for both phases of conversion.
The controls will not permit either phase to proceed if edit errors exist in
any records or if the monetary controls do not balance.
File Maintenance: All maintenance of inter-application master files is
performed by Customer Information File programs. A single operator
procedure is provided to add new customers or new accounts to any
converted application. Another procedure is used to change the data in
these master files - including status, etc. Monetary data can only be
changed through application transaction processing. A separate
procedure is provided to change the operator and supervisor security
codes.
Cross-Application Reports: A basic set of cross-application reports is
provided. The advanced customer may wish to extend the use of the
Customer Information File data base through additional user-written
report programs. (If these programs are to co-reside with the Financial
Institutions Customer Accounting System lAPs, they must, however,
meet stringent coding requirements to insure complete compatibility.)
The following items are provided:
A Customer Services Report, summarizing the number of
customers using installed applications or combinations of applications.
Mailing labels, to assist the bank in selective marketing of its
services, may be printed according to customer selection criteria
established by the execution of the Customer Services Report.
A Customer Profile showing information for an individual customer,
and the account status.
A customer inquiry, display on the console CRT, and containing a
subset of the information printed for a Customer Profile. Inquiry
may be by full or partial customer namo, customer key, or an
account number.
A Spread Report showing the distribution of account~ and the total
deposits for up to five user-supplied ranges of DDA and Savings
account balances.
A Master File List, in customer key sequence, to assist in the
maintenance of customer and account data.
DEMAND DEPOSIT ACCOUNTING (5725·F12)
The Demand Deposit Accounting (DDA) lAP provides daily transaction
processing and reporting for checking accounts for a commercial bank.
The lAP includes broad support for the standard processing functions
and for two. major optional functions - Overdraft Banking and
Automatic Funds Transfer (AFT).
The Customer Information File (5725-Fll), which provides the data
base and file maintenance functions, is a prerequisite for this lAP.
Standard DDA Functions: Transactions can be entered from the
operator console, a diskette creatod on a 3740 Data Entry System, or a
1255 Magnetic Character Reader.
Transactions can be posted against the current, available or collected
balance in the account. The bank must select one of these options at
installation time to apply to all DDA accounts.
Either one or two classes of float may be used for deposits to calculate
thecoJlected balance for accounts. The bank specifies the number of
days it requires to coJlecteach class.
The bank must assign one of the supported service charge options to
each DDA account. In addition, if the Savings Accounting Application
(5725-F13) is installed, the service charge may be waived based on
either a minimum or average balance maintained in the customer's
savings account. The supported service charge options are:
Free Checking
- No service charge.
Single Plan
- A fixed monthly service charge.
Special or Thrift
- A fixed monthly charge plus an extra charge for each item
designated by the bank as "service chargeable".
Minimum Balance and Charge Per Item
- The same as the Special or Thrift Option except that provision is
made for a charge for each item in a deposit: and the service
charge is zero if a bank-specified minimum or average current
balance is maintained in the account during the statement period.
Three-Two-One
- The service charge for the account will be one of three fixed
monthly charges, or will be zero, depending on the relationship of
the minimum current balance for the period to three ascending
balance levels designated by the bank. The account will be
charged amount 1 if the minimum current balance is below level
1, amount 2 if it is between level 1 and level 2, amount 3 if it is
between level 2 and level 3, and no charge if it is above level 3.
Volume Earnings
- The service charge is determined by calculating the cost of
servicing the account, subtracting from this amount a credit for
the amount the bank earned on the average collected balance,
and charging the account the difference. The bank may include a
fixed monthly cost, a cost per service-chargeable item, and a
cost per item deposited in the cost computation. The earnings
credit is a specified percentage of the average collected balance
for the statement period. If the earnings credit exceeds the cost,
the service charge is zero
Stop payment actions may be ordered against a check, based on check
amount or serial number. In addition a "stop all" action may be
initiated to prevent the posting of any checks to the account.
A hold for a specific amount may be specified against an account, or
the account may be frozen - in which case all transaction:; against it are
rejected.
The bank may specify a short list factor which applies to all accounts.
When the daily number of checks for an account reaches the specified
level, the checks are added together to form a single item for account
posting and statement printing. A list of the checks that were
combined to produce this single item is printed for filing in the
customer's account folder. The short list factor may be overriden to
always short list or never short list an account regardless of the number
of checks.
The bank must select one of two procedures for determining how to
handle an account when there are not sufficient funds to post all checks
that are presented. They may choose to, (1) post each item individually
until the balance is insufficient and then reject those items that cannot
be posted; or, (2) add all checks together and either post them or reject
them.
Overdraft Banking: The overdraft banking function may be invoked for
any specific account. If a check would normally cause the posting
balance to fall below zero, a loan sufficient to cover the check is
automatically advanced. Loans are always advanced in user-defined
increments, with a credit limit specified for each account. The loan
balance is maintained separate from the checking account balance, and
deposits do not reduce the loan balance. Finance charges are accrued
daily and added to the loan balance when the monthly statement is
printed. A user-defined minimum payment is also calculated at
statement time and automatically deducted from the DDA account
balance. The overdraft banking format of the standard statement
shows the running balance of the overdraft loan, its associated
transactions, and the loan status.
Automatic Funds Transfer (AFT): The AFT function provides periodic
transfers of funds from a checking account to another account - such
as a savings or installment loan account. If the Savings Accounting lAP
(5725-F13), or the Installment Loan Accounting lAP (5725-F14) is
installed, the deposit or payment is automatically credited. If the credit
is to some other account, it is listed on a report and must be credited
offline. The account holder may designate a frequency of weekly,
biweekly, monthly or quarterly for the transfer. A number of transfers
may b~ established against a single account.
Customer-Oriented Reports: These reports are all produced on
pre-printed forms. The sample forms shown in the documentation may
be ordered from the Systems Supplies Division.
---------------
Do not reproduce without written permission
.:.. =-= :§~~ ISG
PP 5725-F11.3
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/32 Financial Institutions
Customer Accounting System (cont'd)
Account statements are printed monthly. One of the five service charge
options, or free checking, must be assigned to each account. The bank
may offer each customer either the standard statement or a
"combined" statement. The combined statement includes the balances
of selected customer savings and installment loan accounts, if they exist
on an installed Savings Accounting lAP, (5725-F13) or Installment Loan
Accounting lAP (5725-F14).
The NSF Notice is a combination form which is used to notify the
customer either of checks drawn on insufficient funds, or of an
overdraft loan advance.
Auditor Confirmation Notices are generated on request, based on a
multiple start point systematic sample technique. The random start
points are selected by the auditor.
Internal Reports: The reports produced for internal use within the bank
include:
Transaction entry and edit reports.
Trial Balance
Activity Journal
Unposted Items Report
Auditor Confirmation Notices are generated on request, based on a
multiple start point systematic sample. techique. The random start
points are selected by the auditor.
Special Activity Report
Internal Reports: The reports produced for use within the bank
include:
Inactive and Dormant Accounts
Transaction entry and edit reports
Earnings Journal
Closed Accounts
Trial balance and Activity Journal
No- Book Transactions List
Unposted Items Report
Transaction History Report
Service Charge Journal
Accrual Report
Overdrawn and Drawing Against Uncollected Funds Report
Account Status Change Report
Significant Balance Change Report
Stop/Hold Journal
Inactive and Dormant Accounts List
Inactive and Dormant Accounts Activity Report
Account Status Change Report
Stopped Items List
Closed and Zero Balance Accounts List
Short Lists
Overdraft Banking Trial Balance Report
AFT Debits List and AFT Credits List
AFT Journal
Stop/Hold Journal
SAVINGS ACCOUNTING (5725-F13)
The Savings Accounting lAP provides daily transaction processing and
reporting for regular savings accounts and time deposit open accounts.
The Customer Information File (5725-F11), which provides the data
base and file maintenance functions, is a prerequisite for this lAP.
INSTALLMENT LOAN ACCOUNTING (5725-F14)
The Installment Loan Accounting lAP provides daily transaction
processing for installment loan accounts for a' commercial bank. The
lAP includes broad support for the handling of the common interest
calculation types, accrual and refund methods, and provides a variety of
other features.
The Customer Information File (5725-F11), which provides the data
base and file maintenance functions, is a prerequisite for this lAP.
Standard Functions: Transactions may be entered from the operator
console, a diskette created on a 3740 Data Entry System, or a 1255
Magnetic Character Reader. If the Demand Deposit Accounting lAP
(5725-F12) is installed, AFT payments to installment loan accounts will
be merged by the system into the daily transactions and automatically
applied to the designated accounts.
For simple interest loans, interest is accrued daily. For precomputed
(add-on and discount) laons, interest is accrued monthly on the loan's
anniversary day (the day of the month on which payment is scheduled)
by either the rule of 78s or straight-line accrual methods or on a cash
basis.
Standard Functions: Transactions may be entered from the operator
console, a diskette created on a 3740 Data Entry System, or a 1255
Magnetic Character Reader. If the Demand Deposit Accounting lAP
(5725-F12) is installed, Automatic Funds Transfer (AFT) to savings
accounts will be merged by the system into the daily transactions and
automatically credited to the designated accounts.
Early payoff calculations for precomputed loans use either the rule of
78s or straight-line method. They are performed monthly on, or up to
15 days after, the anniversary day. These calculations are performed
monthly for all loans including those on a quarterly payment schedule.
A loan paid off prior to the first regular monthly accrual will earn either
one full month's interest or interest computed at a daily rate for the
number of days outstanding.
A hold for any amount may be specified against an account, all
withdrawals may be stopped, or the account may be frozen - in which
case all transactions against it will be rejected.
Credit life and accident and health insurance are supported. Earnings
and collections on each type of insurance are maintained and reported
separately. Early payoff calculations include insurance earnings.
Up to eight different account plans, based on combinations of the
interest calculation techniques, and the compounding and crediting
options discussed below, may be offered at one time.
Dealers can be associated with a loan and earn a portion of the interest.
Dealers will earn by the same schedule and method that the bank earns.
Banks earnings and dealers earnings are reported separately on a daily
and monthly basis. The bank's recourse to dealer is identified.
Interest Calculation Techniques: The lAP supports both regular
saving deposits and time deposit open accounts. The Low Reference
Balance and Day of Deposit to Day of Withdrawal (000- DOW) interest
calculation techniques may be selected for savings deposit account
plans. Time deposit open account plans may be based on either, (1) a
requirement that the funds be on deposit for at least one complete
calendar quarter, or, (2) a requirement that they be on· deposit for at
least ninety consecutive calendar days.
For Low Reference Balance accounts, interest is calculated. and
compounded either quarterly or semi-annually. Grace periods at the
beginning of each month and end of the period may be defined, and
either the LIFO or FIFO posting option must be selected for each plan.
For all except Low Reference Balance accounts, interest is accrued
daily, and the bank may elect to compound interest continuously, daily,
quarterly or semi-annually.
The bank may elect to credit interest to the account (add it to the
account balance) either quarterly or semiannually.
Customer-Oriented Reports: For both regular savings deposit and
time deposit open accounts, the bank may choose to provide passbooks, periodic statements, or may do both. The system records and
reports "no-book" transactions against a passbook account.
Interest earned during the preceding year may be reported to the
customer each January on 1099 forms.
The bank may choose to print reminder notices and late notices and to
assess late charges for accounts missing a payment. A percentage of
the payment may be allowed to fulfill the payment obligation and
prevent late charges from being assessed.
Payments may be applied first to either past due amounts or to the
current payment, based on a bank-selected option. Late charges are
assessed only if the current payment has not been paid. The bank has
the option to permit automatic deduction of late charges from a
payment. The late charges will only be deducted after the current
month's payment obligation is fulfilled, past due amount is satisfied,
and full payments are applied to the loan balance. A separate late
charge payment is also accepted.
Loan extensions may be granted, thereby deferring payments for some
number of months. The bank may require a fee for extensions.
' . ,,'
Notices of Interest can be produced on request for all or selected
accounts. These notices are also produced automatically at the end of ~
each month for accounts closed during the month.
Payment notices can be printed for simple interest loans, advi§ing
customers of payments due.
Auditor confirmation, notices are. generated on request based on' ~'.~
multiple start point systematic sample technique. The random start
points are selected by the auditor.
------- ----! --~~~ ISG
PP 5725-F11.4
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCT5
System/32 Financial Institutions
Customer Accounting System (cont'd)
Internal Reports: The reports produced for use within the bank
include:
Transaction entry and Edit reports
Trial Balance
Update Totals
Earnings Update 5ummary
Transaction Journal
Unposted Items Report
5uspected Closed Report
Special Activity Report
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Customer Information File Runbook (5B30-0137) ... Customer
Information File Reference Manual Volume 1 (SB30-0138) ...
Customer Information File Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-0139)
... Demand Deposit Accounting Runbook (5B30-0141) ... Demand
Deposit Accounting Reference Manual (SB30-0142) ... Savings
Accounting Runbook (5B30-0144) ... Savings Accounting Reference
Manual (5B30-0145) ... Installment Loan Accounting Runbook
(5B30-0147) ... Installment Loan Accounting Reference Manual
(SB30-0148) ... Customer Information File Logic Manual (LB30-014O)
... Demand Deposit Accounting Logic Manual (LB30-0143) ..• Savings
Accounting Logic Manual (LB30-0146) ... Installment Loan Accounting
Logic Manual (LB30-0149).
Exception Report
Additional Support Materials
New Loans Report
... Licensed Program Design Objectives: ... Installment Loan
Accounting (GH30-0362) '" Licensed Program Specifications: ...
Customer Information File (GH30-0358) ... Demand Deposit
Accounting (GH30-0359) ... Savings Accounting (GH30-0360) .
Late Charge Assessments Report
Collection Report
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
History Merge
Monthly Earnings Report
Dealers Monthly Earnings Report
Monthly Insurance Company Report
Closed Loans Report
Transaction History Report
Aged Delinquency Report
Dealers Trial Balance
Loan Class Report
Loan Plan Report
Collateral Insurance Expiration Report·
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Each of these IBM System/32 Industry ~~plication Programs is
compiled assuming a 24K (#9041) or 32K (119141) system and will
execute on all models of the IBM System/32 equipped with a minimum
of 24K or 32K of memory. Because of volumes and time constraints,
there may be a requirement for offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data
Entry System and/or transaction entry IBM 1255 Magnetic Character
Reader. If an IBM 3741 is to be used, it must have Feature Group A #4002. If an IBM 3742 is to be used, it must have 128-Character
feature - #5455 and Feature Group A - #4004. In addition, the Proof
Keyboard feature (#5901 or #5902) is desirable but is not required.
All models of the IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader (MCR) that can
be attached to the IBM System132 are supported by these lAPs. The
Dash Symbol Transmission feature (#3215) cannot, however, be
installed if the customer wishes to use the MICR data capture programs
. supplied with the lAPs. Consult the appropriate pages for ordering
instructions and any restrictions that pertain to attachment of the IBM
1255 MCR to the IBM System/32.
The four applications are closely interrelatod. Many functions have
been included to protect the integrity of the master files, programs,
procedures, and libraries. Because of this, no other lAP or user-written
programs may co-reside unless stringent coding requirements for these
programs are met to insure compatibility with the Financial Institutions
Customer Accounting System. The Application Logic Manual
discusses in detail the coding conventions used.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1) (Version 6 or
above)
IBM System/32 Utilities Licensed Program (5725-UT1)
RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to the RPG
programs are required.
Customer Information File (5725-F11) is a prerequisite for Demand
Deposit ~ccounting· (5725- F12), Savings Accounting (5725- F13),
and Installment Loan Accounting (5725-F14).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- -------.:.:::: ~~E: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 5725·H11.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 HOSPITAL FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (HFMS)
PATIENT BILLING .•. 5725·H11
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ... 5725-H12
PAYROLL ... 5725·H13
GENERAL LEDGER/ACCOUNTS PAYABLE ... 5725·H14
system or overridden by keyboard entry. It produces reports necessary
to verify the accuracy of the information, automatically prepares the
daily revenue entries for General Ledger (5725-H14), and updates the
detail revenue file records.
PURPOSE
All detail posted charges are saved by the system on an accumulated
charges file, which is used by the billing subsystem to prepare detail
patient bills. Accounts Receivable (5725-H12) will post payments
against accounts not yet final billed into the accumulated charges file.
The Hospital Financial Management System offers the small hospital a
disk data-based system comprised of a series of programs and
procedures that perform the accounting, management reporting and
statistical functions for patient billing, accounts receivable, payroll and
,
general ledger/accounts payable.
Presentation of timely information enables management to observe
trends and deviations from the hospital's planned financial position.
This enables Hospital Management to quickly spot problems and initiate
corrective action. More important, it provides a basis upon which to
institute plans to improve the financial position. The accuracy of the
accounting information is mandatory because of reporting requirements
placed upon the hospital by regulatory agencies.
Completeness of hospital operating information provides the basis for
review, analysis, and cause-and-effect relation studies of such things
as rate setting, reimbursement analysis, patient mix, and services
performed. A comprehensive information base provides the justification for decisions regarding future operations and services.
Four applications are supported in HFMS. They are Patient Billing,
Accounts Receivable, Payroll, and General Ledger/Accounts Payable.
General Ledger and Accounts Payable are marketed together as one
offering. Each of the other applications is a separate offering. Each
application may be installed and operated independently or as an
integrated system.
A description of the four offerings follows the general highlights of the
system.
HMS is designed for the small hospital, in general 50 to 150 beds.
HIGHLIGHTS
An integrated series of offerings that can be installed in any
sequence for stand-alone or integrated operation.
The HFMS offering consists of:
- Source Code and Object Code
- Ready- To- Execute Procedures
- Predefined File Sizes
- Installation Guides
- Operator Runbooks
- Installation Supervision Self-Study Instructions
-Operator Self-Study Courses With Machine Exercises
- Hospital Application-Oriented Specifications for Data Entry and
Control Forms
- Technical Documentation for problem determination
Simplicity of operation characterized by application-oriented
commands, prompting, responses, and messages
Complete hospital disk data base
Complete file load and maintenance programs
Backup/recovery procedures imbedded in the application flow
Comprehensive data entry editing with errors explained to facilitate
correction
Inquiry facility for Patient Billing and Accounts Receivable
Optional entry of batch transaction input through diskettes
prepared on the 3740 Data Entry System
Comprehensive accounting controls through a defined audit trail
User-defined system control file entries for adapting HFMS to
customer requirements
DESCRIPTION
PATIENT BILLING' (5725·H11)
The system provides for accurate and timely postinQ of inpatient and
outpatient charges to produce patient bills and prOVIdes the basis for
the revenue statistics needed for third-party reporting, cost reimbursement, internal rate setting and revenue analysis. The offering has five
logical subsystems: Census, posting, billing, and revenue usage, and
statistics.
The census subsystem tracks the location of inpatients and processes
all outpatient activity. Census reports are produced in various
sequences which serve the needs of different users in the hospital. The
census reports and the daily recap are used to verify the accuracy of the
reported day's activity. The generation of the final census triggers the
automatic generation of room charges to the posting subsystem.
The posting subsystem enters all routine and ancillary charges
(including room charges from the census subsystem) into the inpatient
and outpatient billing files. Charges can be automatically priced by the
The billing subsystem uses the information in the inpatient and
outpatient billing files and the accumulated charges file to print patient
bills. The detail bills for both inpatients and outpatients include a
complete chronological detail of charges and a summary of charges at
the end of the bill. Inpatients' final detail bills are automatically'
produced after discharge. Outpatient emergency (one-time visit) detaIl
final bills are automatically produced after the patient visit, while
recurring outpatient final detail bills are produced when requested by
the hospital. After the detail final bill is produced, the billing file record
is deleted. Prior to this deletion, it is transferred to the accounts
receivable file if HFMS Accounts Receivable (5725-H12) is installed.
Detail cycle bills can also be requested for any current inpatient
account. This bill shows the balance as of the last cycle bill and a
detailed summary of current charges. Requesting cycle bills does not
alter the processing or format of the detail final bill which will eventually
be produced.
Summary bills can be printed on demand (inquiry) for any inpatient or
outpatient account not yet final billed. The bill is in summary format
containing all charges as of the last posting period.
The revenue usage subsystem is driven by the inpatient and outpatient
charges from the posting subsystem. Daily and monthly revenue
reports are produced in detail or in summary by departments showing
usage of individual services within the current period and year-to-date.
The statistics subsystem maintains and reports patient statistics by
medical service and patient category for both inpatients and outpatients, ancillary utilization statistics by department for all inpatients and
for five outpatient categories, and departmental revenue by six financial
classes.
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE (6725·H12)
Managing the Hospital's Accounts Receivable has become an
increasingly complex task. Required interaction with patients and many
third parties (including private and public insurance companies and
various governmental agencies) has created an explosion in clerical
tasks. This has resulted in a difficult control problem in the hospital
business office. The offering has three logical subsystems to aid in the
collection of accounts receivable and in controlling the large volume of
data involved. They are daily posting, statement writing, and reporting.
The posting subsystem creates receivable accounts either through
keyboard entry or by accepting transferred inpatient and outpatient
accounts which have been final billed from the HFMS - Patient Billing
offering (5725- H 11). The subsystem accepts a full range of transactions such as payments, adjustments, late charges, and bad debt
recoveries. If HFMS - Patient Billing (5725-H11) is installed, payments
can be accepted against active billing accounts and posted as credit
charges. Controls, procedures, edit and audit reports assist the
accounts receivable department in making sure transactions are posted
to the correct accounts. This automated posting procedure eliminates
many clerical tasks and frees business office personnel to concentrate
the majority of their time analyzing and pursuing collection of open
accounts.
The posting subsystem maintains a separate account for each patient
for each hospital visit. However, the ability to assign a guarantor
number (family number) is provided. The facility enables the system to
group all accounts for one family together for statement writing and
accounts receivable reporting. The system has further facilities to
handle both active and bad debt accounts with separate controls, to
transfer from patient to insurance and from insurance to patient, and to
generate entries for the General Ledger (5725-H14).
The Statement Writing Subsystem generates balance-forward
statements and includes a number of options that allow the user to
operate the system to meet unique reqUIrements. Statements can be
written on a weekly, biweekly, or monthly cycle to smooth the business
office workload. Statements can be written for all financial classes or
only selected financial classes (financial class denotes primary method
of payment, such as self-pay, Medicare, Blue Cross, Welfare, etc.).
Finance charges can be assessed at the option of the user. Statements
can be either family statements or individual account statements.
The Reporting Subsystem provides the user with a flexible information
system to be used in handling the unique patient and third-party
col/ection problems encountered in a hospital receivables system. Aged
receivables reports can be produced in varying sequences or as varipus
exception reports to help hospital personnel zero-in on specific
collection problems or to satisfy specific information needs. The a'ge of
accounts can be calculated based on discha.rge date, date of' tast
------- -------.! ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
-~~~
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
PP 5725-H11.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
System/32 HFMS (cont'd)
payment. or date insurance was filed. Reports can be produced for all
open accounts or selected accounts based on financial class, range of
dollar balances, and age since discharge date, last payment date, or
date insurance was filed. If patient number is aSSigned to all accounts,
the aging reports can be printed for all accounts for a patient alphabetically by patient name.
A selective Detail Status Report facility is provided in the system for the
user to retrieve reports showing all detail transactions for any specific
account or group of accounts, based on financial class or patient
number.
The system handles the processing for both Active and Bad Debt
Accounts. A report showing all accounts that have been transferred to
bad debt can be run at any time.
Account Balance Inquiry can be requested at any time to be displayed
on the System/32 Display Unit or printed or both. This allows the
business office to retrieve the most current information regarding any
account when it is required.
The Patient Account record and all Detail Transactions for an account
are maintained in the system until a user-specified number of days after
the account zero balances or until the account is deleted from the
system as an uncollectable bad debt. At the time an account is deleted
from the system, a one page report is printed showing all the detailed
information for the account. This report is then filed for reference
purposes.
PAXR~L~ (572~-~131
Within the hospital, personnel represents the most valuable and most
expensive resource. While an efficient mechanism for prompt
employee payment and bookkeeping is essential, the emphasis today is
necessarily on astute management - planning, scheduling, and
monitoring - to ensure the most productive use of this valuable and
costly resource. This application addresses these needs through four
logical subsystems: Payroll Processing, Labor Distribution, Benefits
Analysis, and Personnel Reporting.
The biweekly Payroll Processing subsystem calculates hourly and
salaried employee earnings, calculates statutory and voluntary
deductions, accrues vacation and sick leave, accumulates quarter and
year-to-date totals needed for 941-A and W-2 reports, and prints the
employee's check. It also provides necessary reports to show a
complete audit trail of each payroll run and to perform check reconciliation. The system calculates and deducts tax sheltered annuities, federal
withholding taxes, and Federal Insurance Compensation Act (FICA)
withholding. Rates are supplied to the programs from a system control
file to avoid program recompilation as rates change. The data fields
needed to calculate existing state, county, or city withholding taxes are
included in the data base and an exit point is provided in the program
for the inclusion of a user-written subroutine to calculate these taxes.
However, the earnings statement and reports have provisions to print
only one non-federal withholding tax.
Vacation and sick-leave hours are accrued based on actual hours
worked and a hospital-defined accrual rate that can vary by employee.
The system will handle up to 10 types of voluntary deductions that can
vary among employees regarding the frequency and method of
calculation. These hospital-defined voluntary deductions are calculated, deducted, and reported each pay period on both a current period
and year-to-date basIs.
The labor distribution subsystem produces current and year-to-date
reports each pay period by using the extended employee time records
and budgeted and year-to-date balances from the position control file.
These reports show hours and dollars (actual, budget, and variance)
categorized by productive and non-productive time. This subsystem
produces the departmental expense entries for General Ledger
(5725-H14).
The benefits analysis subsystem produces reports for both included and
contributory benefits each pay period. Included benefits are generally
those that are completely paid by the hospital, such as vacation, sick
leave and holidays. Contributory benefits are generally those that are
partly paid by the hospital and partly by the employee, such as life
insurance and health insurance.
employee verification of pertinent data. It serves as a turnaround
document for entering changes into the system.
Employee listings by name and number are printed for reference
purposes. An Annual Employee Benefits Report is produced for each
employee showing total earnings, included benefits, and contributory
benefits. The Turnover Report provides an analysis of employee
terminations by department showing the reason for each termination.
Union Listings by employee within union can be produced when
required.
GENERAL LEDGER/ACCOUNTS PAYABLE (5725-H141
In order to provide increased patient care, hospitals must work from a
sound financial base. In order to develop that base, the hospital
executive must have detailed hospital operating information that is
accurate, timely, and complete. The hospital must establish a plan, and
since they are controlled to cost-dependent prices,. they must work
within that plan. The general ledger application provides the information that is key to more effective management through three logical
subsystems: Daily processing, accounting period-end updating, and
accounting period-end financial reporting.
The daily processing subsystem produces a journal of the day's valid
transactions and adds them to the accumulated transaction file.
Transaction validity is established through the use of the batch proof
report. All transactions can be entered as miscellaneous journal entries.
However, other offerings of the Hospital Financial Management System
automatically provide journal entries from· Patient Billing (5725-H11),
Accounts Receivable (5725- H12), Payroll (5725- H 13), and General
Ledger / Accounts Payable (5725- H14) which will substantially reduce
keying time. All transactions from whatever source are thoroughly
edited by the system.
The accounting period-end updating subsystem provides the detail and
summary trial balances. They are produced at the close of each
accounting period. The system is deSigned to handle either 12 or 13
accounting periods per fiscal year. The trial balances can be run as
many times as necessary to insure that all closing and correcting entries
for that accounting period have been processed and the ledger is in
balance. The system then updates the General Ledger Accounts file by
extracting all entries for the accounting period (from the Accumulated
Transaction File and summing these entries with the balance as the end
of the last accounting period) to obtain the new year-to-date balance of
each account in the General Ledger Accounts File. The updated
General Ledger Accounts File is then used to produce the Financial and
Management reports by the accounting period-end reporting subsystem.
Comparative schedules of Patient Revenue, Miscellaneous Revenue,
Deductions from Revenue, and Expenses are produced showing
variances on a current month and year-to-date basis for either this year
versus last year or this year versus budget or both.
The format of the Balance Sheet. Income Statement, Pre-Cost
Allocation Schedule, Per Diem Revenue Report, and Per Diem Expense
Report can be tailored to the user's requirements through the use of the
Report Description Master file. This file contains a record for each
physical line that appears on each of the reports. By adding, changing
or deleting records in this file, characteristics of the reports such as the
number of lines, levels of total, and line and total descriptions. can be
changed to meet the needs of the user. This feature, along with the
ability to define the chart of accounts desired, provides a flexible
financial information system that can be defined by the user to produce
financial reports for assistance in creating and maintaining financial
stability for the hospital.
Accounts Payable: Inflation has caused a rapid increase in the cost of
supplies in all departments of the hospital. An accurate, efficient
Accounts Payable system has become a requirement. It is one of the
basic tools needed by hospital management to assist in reducing and
controlling the cost of providing health care because most of the
hospital's supplies expense originates through Accounts Payable.
Approved vendor invoices must be accurately recorded, efficiently
analyzed, and accurately distributed to affected cost centers.
The Included Benefits Report shows vacation and sick leave hours
carried over, accrued, taken and remaining for oach employee and
department. Holidays taken are also noted on this report. The
. Contributory Benefits Report provides an analysis of the amount paid by
the hospital for life and health insurance on a total cost basis and cost
per hours basis for each employee, position classification, and
department.
The key element of expense control can only be obtained if the proper
departments are given the information they need. For example, the
purchasing agent requires information regarding standardyendor terms
and volume of the businoss. The financial officor needs timely
information regarding opon Accounts Payable to analyze cash
requirements. Available cash must be usod effectively to take
advantage of all discounts through prompt payment. The business
office needs on efficient method of recording items, reporting to
management, and accurately distributing supplies expense to appropriate cost centors.
The personnel reporting subsystem· provides reports to assist the
personnel department in effectively using the people resource of the
hospital.
The Accounts Payable application meets these objectives and satisfies
these needs through four logical subsystems: Transaction entry, check
writing, expense distribution, and reporting.
An~~p-t~-date Employee Status Report for each employee in the
hospital IS produced by the system whenever a change is made on an
~mploye~'s record. AII:additio~s, changes, or. deletions of employee
information. are thoroughly edited by the system and printed on
M.aintenan~e Reports. .An Employee Personnel Profile is produced for
The transaction entry subsystem performs an extensive edit on all
approved invoices and credit memos. The required information is keyed
into the system and a Proof Report is printed to balance to controls.
Any errors are corrected prior to further processing. These transactions
------- -------.:. =:: :5~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
PP 5725-H11.3
Mar 83
Major Revision
System/32 HFMS (cont'd)
are accumulated with any prior unpaid items and a Cash Requirements
Report is printed to provide a current listing of all unpaid items listed by
invoice within vendor. The items to be paid are noted on the Cash
Requirements report and control totals are developed. Items to be paid
can be selected in either of two ways: All invoices for a vendor or only
certain invoices within a vendor can be selected. The computer
operator uses this report to enter a notification of items to be paid into
the system. A Payment Journal is printed by the system showing all
transactions selected to be paid. This report is used to balance to the
control totals and any keying errors are corrected prior to the writing of
checks.
Further flexibility is provided by the system because a check for any
items may be typed at any time and entered into the system with a
different code to designate a demand check. The transactions for these
demand checks flow through to the expense distribution, but no
computer checks are prepared. This facility provides the hospital
maximum flexibility for taking advantage of discounts and creating of
special checks such as travel advances.
The check writing subsystem produces the Check Registers, Checks,
and Remittance Advices for those items checked on the cash requirements report. The system allows for multiple check-writing runs during
the month which, in conjunction with the ability to handle demand
checks, provides the flexibility needed to control the payment of
outstanding accounts payable items. Check reconciliation reports are
included to allow the user to control the reconciling of checks and
produce an Aged Outstanding Check Register.
Once each accounting period, the Accumulated Transaction file is
sorted by General Ledger number and the expense distribution
subsystem is run. An Accounts Payable Distribution Report is produced
and summary expense entries are created for entry into the General
Ledger System.
The reporting subsystem provides analysis of year-to-date purchases
and discounts taken based on information in the Vendor Master file.
This file contains one record for each permanent or temporary vendor
used by the system to obtain vendor name, address, and discount terms
information. The amount of purchases, credit memos and discounts for
each vendor are also maintained in this file and Vendor Analysis Reports
can be printed whenever desired.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
These IBM System/32 Industry Application Programs will execute on
all models of the IBM System/32.
Information regarding disk allocation and usage (master and transaction
files) and recommended backup levels and diskette requirements are
available in the HFMS Installation Guide.
The OCL and file sizes, as distributed, will be fixed at the maximum
capacity, assuming all five applications are to be installed on a 5
megabyte file.
Any changes to file sizes other than those shown above should be
carefully reviewed by the customer and IBM System Engineering to
determine the necessity for more storage, estimate time required to
convert eCl procedures, and estimate throughput performance.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM HFMS System/32 program is written in IBM System/32 RPG
II and 0llerates under control of IBM System/32 System Control
Program (5725-SC1). In addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities licensed
program (5725-UT1) must be available for sorting of data (SORT),
entering transactions with the Data File Utilities (DFU) and for making
source program corrections with Source Entry Utility (SEU). If
compilation of the RPG HFMS source programs is required, the IBM
System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) and Source Entry Utility
(SEU), for making RPG II program corrections, must be available.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Patient Billing Installation Guide (SB30-oo08) ... Patient Billing
Runbook (SB30-0014) ... Accounts Receivable Instal/ation Guide
(SB30-ooo9) ... Accounts Receivable Runbook (SB30-oo15) ... Payroll
Installation Guide (SB30-oo10) ... Payroll Runbook (SB30-0016) ...
Accounts Payable Installation Guide (SB30-0011) ." Accounts Payable
Runbook (SB30-0017) ... General Ledger Installation Guido (SB300012) ... General Ledger Runbook (SB30-oo13) ... Patient Billing
Reference Manual (LB30-0004) ... Accounts Receivable Reference
Manual (LB30-000S) ... Payroll Reference Manual (LB30-0006) ...
Accounts Payable Reference Manual (LB30-0007) ... General Ledger
Reference Manual (LB30-0019).
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- -------.=.=::
~~~ ISG
PP 5725-H15.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 MEDICAL GROUP MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5725-H15
PURPOSE
The application provides the medical group with a powerful aid in
managing its business.
DESCRIPTION
The application is ready-to-execute. It includes source code, object
code, and execution procedures as basic material. The Application
Logic Manual is included if it is ordered as optional licensed material.
The Medical Group Management system is primarily intended for a
group of up to 20 doctors using a single accounting system.
There are some general features included in the application:
Key accounting and management reports are provided to allow selling
and installing without a requirement for services or customer programming capabilities.
Security codes to deter unauthorized use of master files
HIGHLIGHTS
Wide variety of reports and report options included:
- Management reporting is a byproduct of normal data entry
- Detail or summary listings within a range of options is supported
in many reports
Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide
a solid accounting system:
Designed to fit business requirements
In-house inclusion/ exclusion of functions to be executed
OCl procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are
packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation
Monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program
until preceding required programs have been completely and
successfully executed
Compatible online/offline data entry through the System/32
keyboard or by means of diskettes created on a 3740 Data Entry
System
- Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided
- Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation,
audit and control are provided
- Security code deters unauthorized execution of all programs in
the application
- A Reference Number may be used to supply an audit trail for any
transaction entered into the system
Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated
from report writing functions
Designed to be installed without customer programming capability:
Some report printing can be deferred to a more convenient time
- System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing
on-site changes to file sizes and determination of functions used
- File maintenance and audit procedures
- Easy-to-use runbook
- Operator self-study course is available
- Step-by-step installation activity plan provided by the Application Reference Manual
- User's installation and daily operating information supplied to the
supervisor by the Application Reference Manual
DESCRIPTION
The system combines two data entry approaches: Operator-oriented
and batch-oriented. Support is provided for transaction entry through
the System/32 keyboard or through a diskette created on a 3740 Data
Entry System.
The application has requirements records which contain Questionnaire
responses stored in a Constants File. These records allow the system
to select certain fields for editing, report formats, file sizes, and
functions to suit each customer's needs. The Questionnaire responses
are typed in during initial installation and may be changed as needed.
The System Tailoring Procedure allows these responses to be entered.
The System Tailoring Procedure uses the answers to a series of
questions regarding a medical group's requirements to build the
system. It provides the following:
Tailoring the application and Operational Control Language (OCl)
on site at installation time.
All provided functions are included in the programs but only
required functions are executed.
Allows the user to activate and deactivate provided functions as the
user's business changes.
File sizes may be increased or decreased as needed by rerunning
the System Tailoring Procedure.
Application Reference Manual Volume I provides a step-by-step
installation activity plan including sample numbering systems, sample
input and maintenance data forms, file loading sequences, and control
forms with suggested procedures. Volume II of the Application
Reference Manual provides information on the day-to-day use of the
application.
The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to-use set
of instructions stating all the activities necessary to run the programs on
a System/32. The Proceduro Roference Summary is provided for the
operator as a reminder of the major operational Instructions for each
procedure. It .is intended to be used once the operator is thoroughly
trained in the application.
Instructional material in the form of a self-study guide is provided to
train the System/32 operator in the use of the Runbook.
An Application. Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material,
for use by thE!;,self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering
c~"tinuing suJjport.
It describes the architecture of programs,
pr,Qcedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed
jpO:Scriptions Of each program. .
Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of
master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what
procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate
up-to-date master files.
Selective printing options are available for many report functions
The Medical Group Management System lAP is intended to provide a
balance forward accounts receivable system for a group of up to 20
doctors using a single accounting system.
The lAP provides the ability to bill patients on a monthly basis. Third
parties (insurance companies) can be billed as required. It provides
accounts receivable information including status reports and aged trial
balances in order to control accounts receivable.
An optional Daily Charge Slip system is provided to print an appointment list showing patient appointment information and patient charge
slips for recording patient charges, diagnoses and procedures. The
charge slips can then be used as turnaround documents for input into
A/R.
A practice analysis system is also optional and provides statistical
reports for each doctor on a calendar year basis.
Inquiry is provided allowing the user to locate a guarantor record by
keying either the guarantor's last name and first initial or the guarantor's
account number.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Each of these IBM System/32 Industry Application Programs will
execute on all models of the IBM System!32. The programs are
compiled assuming a 16K system. Because of volume and time
constraints, there may be a requirement for providing offline key entry
on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used, it
must have the 128-character record feature (#5455) and Feature Group
A (#4Q04).
Many functions have been included to protect the integrity of the
master files, programs, procedures and libraries. Because of this, no
other lAP or user-written programs may co-reside unless stringent
coding requirements for these programs are met to insure compability
with the Medical Group Management System. The Application Logic
Manual discusses in detail the coding conventions used for the
development of the Medical Group Management System.
SOFlWARE REQUIREMENTS
The application programs for the IBM System/32 are written in IBM
System/32 RPG II Programming language and execute under control of
the IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1 Version 3.
IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes
Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for execution
of the programs. The IBM System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is
required if modifications to the source code are necessary.
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: Seo PP Indox
--..----- ----:: - - :S~S: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
PP 5725-K11.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM/32 MEMBERSHIP and MAILING LIST SYSTEM
5725-K11
PURPOSE
Associations are constituted to serve their memberships. Their prime
functions are information retrieval and dissemination, establishment of
standards and ethics, research, and representing their members to
external agencies. Items of general interest are disseminated through
association publications sent through the postal service. However, the
need often exists to make specialized mailings to selected members
with specific characteristics. Information exchange also takes place at
events sponsored by associations. Associations, then, have data
processing needs characterized by large data bases which must be
processed in total but with the ability to process individual records or
groups of records on a selective or exception basis.
The Membership and Mailing List System is designed for associations
of up to approximately 15,000 members if optional files are not used.
HIGHLIGHTS
The Membership and Mailing List System provides an economical
approach for the needs of business and professional associations. It
addresses the following areas:
Data Base Management
Interrelates up to 10 master files into a single data base
Non-redundant data base (duplicate records eliminated)
Can be installed as:
- Single-file system (members are individuals)
- Dual-file system (members are companies with mailing sent to
and events attended by individuals). Usage of other master files
is optional as needed.
Full maintenance procedures
Cash Accounting
Invoices generated for dues and publications
Balance forward accounts maintained for dues
Cash application through file maintenance runs
Mailing Labels
One-up or four-up
Names and addresses vertically and horizontally aligned
Produced from the data base on user-defined selection criteria
Zip code changes noted and count shown
Includes zip codes and circulation reporting
Membership and Association Services
Membership cards
3 x 5 information cards
Membership rosters, dynamic listings, and profiles
Data file inquiry
Analyze Procedure
Provides a means to select and sequence. subsets from the data
base
Used for statistical profiles; input to all of the above runs; input to a
preformatted dynamic listing program - for management review
and analysis.
The Membership and Mailing list System a.so Includes the following
features:
Installation through a System Control File which allows implementation of user options and printed descriptions without recompilation
Inquiry capability to display or print individual member'S records
DESCRIPTION
The Membership and Mailing list System organizes the vital records of
an association into a comprehensive data base. The data base is
modular in design so that only those portions which are required for
user-desired functions need to be implemented. For example, if the
association does not maintain its membership in a chapter structure, the
chapter file is not used. Similarly, if it has no interest in knowing who
sponsored a member for membership, the sponsor file is not used. The
basic decision to be reached regarding the optionality of files, however,
concerns the manner in which the association structures its membership and what dues functions are required. A typical difference
between business associations and professional organizations is that
business associations tend to have companies as members while
professional organizations tend to have individuals as members. The
Membership and Mailing List System accounts for this difference by
separating the dues function from the mail function. Data required to
implement these two functions is· separated into two discrete files: the
dues file and the mail file.
If your customer has company members with individuals within the
company receiving mail, both files would be used (dual-file system). If,
however, the members of the association are individuals, either the
dues file or the mail file, or both, may be used. If partial payments are
to be accepted and the association has only one publication that it
distributes, the dues file should be implemented. If the association has
multiple publications with different payment rates and accepts full
payment only, the mail file should be implemented. However,
whichever file is implemented, the basic cash accounting and mailing
function are provided. The optional nature of the data base files is
implemented through a Systems Control File without need for
recompilation. Consult the Membership and Mailing List System
Installation Guide for further information.
The following sections describe system highlights in three important
functional areas: Accounting, mailing, and service.
Accounting Functions
Invoicing: Invoices are generated for both dues and publications. The
dues invoice shows the balance brought forward, the current dues
amount, and a new total owed. An optional special charge amount
(such as an initiation fee) can also be included. First dues billing for
new members can be pro-rated. Publication invoices can handle
amounts for two separate publications (mail file). Both types of
iiwoices as well as follow-up notices'are prepared' on user-defined
billing cycles and frequencies.
Cash Application: Cash can be applied to dues on a partial payment basis
(dues file only) or on a full-payment required basis. Payments for
publication subscription can be applied in even increments of the base
subscription rate with automatic calculation of the "paid to" date. Cash
receipts can also be applied for registration fees for associationsponsored events.
Mailing Functions
Mailing Labels: Mailing labels are prepared for user-defined subsets of
the data base. The selection is dynamic. User-defined parameters for
inclusion/exclusion and sequencing are keyed prior to the label run.
The labels can be printed one-up or four-up with names and addresses
horizontally and vertically aligned. Changes in zip code (if the labels are
sequenced by zip code) can be highlighted to facilitate mailing bundling.
Mailing type is noted, that is, sample publications.
Circulation Reports: This report recaps totals by state, zip code, or type of
mailing for each mailing. It can be used for advertising rate setting by
showing circulation demographics.
Membership/Association Service Functions
Membership Cards: Membership identification· cards, can be prepared
showing member'S name and current membership period.
3 x 6 Information Cards: These cards can be prepared with user-defined
inclusion/exclusion and sequencing criteria. They are useful for such
functions as convention registration, direct sales follow-up, etc.
Rosters: Periodic alphabetic listings of the membership, mailing lists, or
event participation can be prepared for reference.
Membership Profile: A profile of all information regarding a member can
be printed that can be sent for review and correction. Therefore, it can
serve as a turnaround document to maintain the accuracy of the data
base.
Additional Features: The Membership and Mailing List System is
deSigned to meet the needs of associations by producing standard
printouts of selected input. Input inclusion/exclusion and sequencing
criteria are entered through a simple ANALYZE command. This feature
provides great flexibility to your customer. For example, the system
does not arbitrarily send follow-up notices for dues or publication
invoices after a fixed period. Your customer can implement a 30- or
SO-day follow-up policy by simply entering the appropriate 30- or
60-day parameter into the ANALYZE command prior to running the
follow-up procedure. Analysis report formats have been established
for each major file. The user of the ANALYZE command in conjunction
with these report programs gives the user a dynamic listing capability to
answer needs as they occur. The ANALYZE command can also be
used without a subsequent report to develop statistical profiles
(demographic analysis) of the membership.
The optional files are implemented and descriptions are supplied to the
programs by answering a questionnaire. The responses are then
entered into a Systems Control File. Other options addressed on the
questionnaire include such policy matters as invoicing frequency and
dues proration for new members.
An inquiry capability is provided through the Data File Utjiities (DFU) to
indicate individual records on the System/32 display screen or to print
the records.
------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/32 Membership 8t Mailing List System (cont'd)
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
This System/32 Industry Application Program will execute on all
models of the IBM System/32.
Information regarding disk allocation and usage (master and transaction
files) and recommended backup levels and diskette requirements are
available in the Installation Guide.
The OCl and file sizes, as distributed, will be fixed at the maximum
capacity and normal distribution for the 5-megabyte file.
Any changes to file sizes should be carefully reviewed by the customer
and IBM Systems Engineering to determine the necessity for more
storage, estimate the time required to convert OCl procedures, and
estimate throughput performance.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The Membership and Mailing List System programs for IBM
System/32 are written in IBM System/32 RPG 1\ and operate under
control of IBJV1 System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1). In
addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities program product (5725-UT1)
must be available for sorting of data (SORT), entering transactions with
the Data File Utilities (DFU) and for making source program corrections
with Source Entry Utility (SEU). If compilation of the RPG II source
programs is required, the IBM System/32 RPG 1\ Compiler (5725-RG1)
and Source Entry Utility (SEU), for making RPG II program corrections,
must be available.
CONVERSION
The Membership and Mailing List System requires loading of a large
volume of data. This may make use of the System/32 keyboard
inadvisable for conversion input. Programs are supplied to load the files
from diskettes produced by the 3740 Data Entry System. Discussing
conversion approaches and schedules with your customer or prospect
will be a key element in your installation planning process.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Installation Guide (SB30-oo78) ... Runbook (SB30-oo79) ... Reference
Manual (lB30-oo76).
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
I:
PP 5725-K11.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
----- ---! - - :§'f§: ISG
--.
PP 5725-M3A.1
00 not reproduce without written permission
.-.
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
5230 DATA COLLECTION SYSTEM
SUPPORT for SYSTEM/32
5725-M3A
PURPOSE
The 5230 Data Collection System Support for System/32 program
provides the manufacturer with a convenient, practical means of
preparing shop floor data for processing by the System/32 Manufacturing Management Accounting System (MMAS) application programs.
Data collected by the 5230 Data Collection System is edited, consolidated, and formatted for processing by the MMAS Payroll, Inventory
Management, and Production Status and Costing lAPs or for userwritten manufacturing management systems (with appropriate changes
to the output modules).
This lAP offers current System/32 MMAS account upgrading in the
manufacturing industry. It is primarily intended for the manufacturer
with 50 to 250 employees.
HIGHLIGHTS
Interrelated to MMAS applications:
- Elapsed time calculation for Payroll
- Material receipt and issue data for Inventory Management
- Job time for Production Status and Costing
application to select certain options for the procedures to be used. The
questionnaire responses are keyed during initial installation and may be
changed as needed.
An Application Reference Manual provides a step-by-step installation
activity plan including sample input and maintenance data forms, file
loading sequences, and control forms with suggested procedures. This
manual also provides information on the day-to-day use of the
application.
The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to-use set
of instructions showing all the activities.
An Application Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material,
for use by the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering
continuing support. It describes the architecture of programs,
procedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed
descriptions of the program.
The 5230 Data Collection System Support for System/32 is a
ready-to-execute program. It includes source code, object code,
execution procedures, and the Application Logic Manual, if ordered as
optional basic material.
Management reports generated as a byproduct of data entry
- Option to print or not print all reports except error reports and
audit summaries
- Labor report by supervisor for checking
- Attendance and absentee reports
Provides internal cross-checking and editing
- Jobs started checked against jobs stopped
- Employee time on jobs checked against time and attendance
record
- Transaction records checked for complete and accurate entry
Provides automatic generation of machine-readable data
- Reduces transcription errors
- Eliminates time keeper calculation of elapsed time
- Supports up to 40 different shifts to provide added flexibility for
special starting times, lunch and other break times, and unique
weekend schedules.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM will provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed
programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering
information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued
day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM 5230 Data Collection System Support for IBM System/32 will
execute on all models of the IBM System/32 The programs are
compiled assuming a 16K system. If data communications features are
to be used, the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074)
must be installed in the IBM 5230 System Unit. If card output from the
IBM 5230 System is to be used, the Data Recorder Attachment (#3200)
may be installed on the System/32 only.
Can be installed without customer
- System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing
on-site changes to file sizes and determination of functions used
- File maintenance and audit procedures
'
- Easy-to-use runbook
- Step-by-step installation activity plan provided by the Application Reference Manual
- User's information supplied to the supervisor by the Application
Reference Manual
DESCRIPTION
The 5230 Data Collections System Support for System/32 provides
two .phases of operations: 5230 personalization phase and a data
conversion phase.
The 5230 personalization provides a menu of actions from which the
users select those that best fit their operation. Using the menu
selections and loop definitions for up to three 5231 Controllers with up
to four loops each, this phase creates the personalization records
required to personalize the 5230 Data Collection System.
The data conversion phase preparos the data received from the 5230
Data Collections System for processing by the MMAS applications.
The data can be accepted through the data communications facilities,
the cards, or the diskette offered as output options by the 5230 Data
Collection System.
Both material transactions and labor transactions are prepared. The
material transactions are edited, listed, formatted, and stored for later
use by the Inventory Management and Production Status and Costing
applications. Labor transactions are expanded, edited, checked for
accuracy, and adjusted for break and lunch times. They are also
adjusted for lunch and shift start-stop time variances. The elapsed time
for time and attendance and job time is calculated, and job time applied
to overlapping jobs is apportioned to the jobs. Time and attendance
totals are checked against job time totals with warning messages
printed for differences that exceed user-prescribed limits. A correction
procedure is included to allow for changing incorrect labor transactions.
The results of the labor transaction proceSSing are stored for later use
by the Payroll and Production Status and Costing applications.
Reports are printed, at the user's option, for material transactions and
for labor transactions. The material transactions report is a single
listing. Labor transaction reports provide labor-related information
suitable for management review and checking by supervisors for
correctness. Attendance and absentee reports are also printed.
This program augments the MMAS cross-application Constants File
with its own questionnaire responses. These records allow the
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM 5230 Data Collection System Support program for the IBM
System/32 is written in IBM System/32 RPG II Programming language
and executes under control of the IBM System/32 System Control
Program (5725-SC1 Version 3). IBM System/32 Utilities licensed
program (5725-UT1), which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source
Entry Utility, is required for execution of the program. The IBM
System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to
the source code are necessary. In addition, one of the following MMAS
applications should be installed.
Payroll (5725- M32)
Inventory Management (5725-M35)
Production Status and Costing (5725-M31)
Additional Materials:
Data Collection Application Workbook (GH20-0203) ... 18M 5230 Data
Collection User's Guide (GA34-0040)
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Runbook (SB30-0092) ... Application Reference Manual (SB30-0093)
... Logic Manual (LB30-0094).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- -------..:.:::
ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
:§':f~
pp 5725~M31.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 MANUFACTURING MANAGEMENT
ACCOUNTING SYSTEM (MMAS)
PRODUCTION STATUS AND COSTING ••. 5725-M31
PAYROLL ... 5725-M32
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE ... 5725-M33
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ... 5725-M34
INVENTORY MANAGEMENT ... 5725-M35
PRODUCT DEFINITION AND COSTING ... 5725-M36
GENERAL LEDGER ... 5725-M37
SALES ANALYSIS ... 5725-M38
ORDER ENTRY AND INVOICING ... 5725-M39
PURPOSE
The System/32 Manufacturing Management Accounting System
(MMAS) provides manufacturers with a powerful aid in managing the
business.
MMAS offers flexible applications specifically designed for the
manufacturing industry. MMAS provides key reports to help management direct and control their business effectively.
MMAS offers opportunities for new name and first systems account
sales in the manufacturing industry. It is primarily intended for the
manufacturer with 20 to 250 employees.
HIGHLIGHTS
Independent or interrelated applications approach:
- Modular design facilitates sequential application installation
- Single data entry results in multiple application updates
- Modular design allows users to choose the applications that
address problem areas
Wide variety of reports and report options included:
- Management reporting is a byproduct of normal data entry
- Certain reports (statements, 941-As, and W-2s) can be saved on
diskette for later printing
- Detail or summary listings within a range of keys is supported in
many reports
Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide
a solid accounting system:
- Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided
- Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation,
audit and control are provided
- Security code deters unauthorized inquiry or execution of key
programs in each application
- A Journal Reference Numbering System supplies audit trail for
any application that automatically generates transactions into the
General Ledger
Provides manufacturers with an easy-to-use method for organizing
and using manufacturing information such as bills-of-material,
product cost, and shop order or job cost.
MMAS can be installed without customer programming capability:
- System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing
on-site changes to file sizes and determ'ination of functions used
- File maintenance and audit procedures
- Easy-to-use run book
- Supervisor and operator self-study courses are available
- Step-by-step installation activity plan provided by the Application Reference Manual
- User's information supplied to the supervisor by the Application
Reference Manual
DESCRIPTION
The Manufacturing Management Accounting System is a set of nine
,independent yet interrelated, ready-to-execute applications for the
small manufacturer:
Order Entry and Invoicing
Sales Analysis
Accounts Receivable
Inventory Management
Receivable (5725- M34) must be installed before Sales Analysis
(5725- M38).
Each application has certain requirements records, within a crossapplication Constants File which contain questionnaire responses.
These records allow the application to select certain fields for editing,
report formats, file sizes, and functions to suit each customer's needs.
The questionnaire responses are keyed during initial installation and
may be changed as needed. The System Tailoring Procedure allows
these responses to be entered.
The System Tailoring Procedure utilizes the answers to a series of
questions regarding a manufacturer's requirements. It provides the
following:
Tailoring the application and Operator Control language (OCl)
on-site at installation time.
Allows the user to activate and deactivate provided functions as the
user's business changes.
All provided functions are included in the programs but only
required functions are executed.
File sizes may be expanded or contracted as needed by rerunning
the System Tailoring Procedure.
An Application Reference Manual provides a step-by-step installation
activity plan including sample numbering systems, sample input and
maintenance data forms, file loading sequences, control forms with
suggested procedures. Volume II of the Application Reference Manual
provides information on the day-to-day use of the application.
The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to-use set
of instructions showing all the activities necessary to run the MMAS
programs on a System/32. The Operator Reference Card is provided
for· the operator as a reminder of the major operational functions of
each procedure. It is intended to be used once the operator is
thoroughly trained in the particular application.
Instructional material in the form of self-study courses is provided for
the System/32 supervisor and operator to train them in"the use of the
Application Reference Manual and Runbook. The two courses are not
application dependent. Therefore, only one copy of each course is
needed per customer no matter how many applications are installed.
An Application Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material,
for use by the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering
continuing support. It describes the architecture of programs,
procedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed
descriptions of each program.
Fea.tures: The Manufacturing Management Accounting System
consists of nine full-function, ready-to-execute applications. MMAS
includes source code, object code, execution procedures, and the
Application Logic Manual, if ordered as optional basic material.
These are some general features which all applications have:
Designed to fit industry requirements
Security codes to deter unauthorized use of master files
In-house inclusion/exclusion of functions to be executed
Oel procedures, Sort specifications, and proceSSing programs are
packaged into logical work units which Simplify system operation
Monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program
until preceding programs have been completely and successfully
executed
Compatible online/ offline data entry through the system console or
by means of diskettes created on a 3740 Data Entry System
Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of
master files and edited transactions. and keeps track of what
procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate
up-to-date master files
Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated
from report writing functions
Product Definition and Costing
Some report printing can bo doferred to a more convenient time
Payroll
Selective printing options are availablo for many report functions
Accounts Payable
General Ledger
Production ~tatus and Costing: The system combines two data
entry approaches - operator-oriented and batch-oriented. Support
is provided:.fpr transaction entry through the System/32 keyboard
or throughi.S" diskette created on a 3740 Data Entry System. The
nine easy..;to-operate applications can be installed in separate
stages at different times and still be an interrelated system.
The only requirement is that Order Entry and Invoicing (5725-M39),
and/or Inventory Management (5725-M35), and lor Accounts
PRODUCTION STATUS AND COSTING (6726-M31)
This program provides management information on jobs or shop orders
from the point of release to the shop floor through the closing process.
Also, it provides a means to build and maintain a job select file for
retaining and releasing repetitive or standard jobs. This file contains
information at an operation and material level.
Jobs or shop orders may be released from the job select file and/or
manually, based on individual requirements. During the release function
the shop data base is created to provide for editing of feedback from
the shop floor and for management reports. In addition to the creation
------- ----=- - :S~S: ISG
PP 5725-M31.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/32 MMAS (cont'd)
of a shop data base, the release function creates a job worksheet to
move with the work and a group of labor tickets for labor reporting.
A Vendor Analysis Report indicates key business volumes and
discounts lost and taken for previous year and current year.
.
The report function provides a variety of production and accounting
reports such as Job Status, Work List, and exception reporting· for
quantity variance or cost variance. These reports reflect variance from
projection on both production and accounting information and may be
.
obtained in summary or detailed format.
Accounts Receivable supports a combination of both open-item and
balance-forward customers. Billing transactions are directly keyed or
accepted from Order Entry and Invoicing if that application is installed.
The updating function records information from the shop floor to· the
shop data base at the operation and material detail level. Updates to
the shop data base occur via labor, move, material issue, miscellaneous,
outside operations and material receipts transactions. These transactions reflect the activity (hours and cost) and movement (quantity) of
jobs or shop orders as they progress through the manufacturing facility.
Transactions may be entered either manually or from other applications
(Payroll, Inventory Management, and Accounts Payable) via the
application interface.
Upon completion of a job, the closeout function produces closeout
reports in both production and accounting formats to allow the analysis
of labor and cost projections against actual. After producing these
reports the closed jobs or shop orders are removed from the shop data
base.
PAYROLL (5725-M32)
This hourly/salary/executive payroll provides for regular, overtime,
premium, vacation, and sick pay. It may be run weekly, biweekly,
semimonthly, monthly. Hours may be entered daily or by pay period; if
selected, balancing time worked to attendance may be accomplished
daily or weekly. Exception hours provide time and one-half, double
time, double time and one-half, and triple time capabilities. Rates may
be selected from the Employee Master Record or keyed in as an
override. Shift differential capabilities are provided for second and third
shift. The differential may be defined as a percentage of the rate or
cents to be added to the rate.
Vacation/Holiday pay may be part of a regular pay check or on a
separate check. A bonus payment is paid on a separate check with a
flat percentage of income tax deducted. Sick pay may be fully
non-taxable or only liable for income tax. Wages subject to Federal
Unemployment Insurance (FUI) and State Unemployment Insurance
(SUI) are determined.
The ability to handle taxable or non-taxable adjustments, pay advances
and employer-paid union benefits (taxable and non-taxable) is also
provided. Once the gross earnings is calculated, deductions will be
taken to reach net pay. In addition to calculating present Federal and
FICA taxes, a standard tax algorithm is provided to calculate most
present state taxes based upon customer-provided data. Local taxes
may also fit the standard tax algorithm provided. The state disability
insurance deductions also use a standard algorithm based upon
customer-provided data. Miscellaneous deductions may be taken by
percent, fixed amount, hourly rate, upper limit, or cyclic within a
user-specified frequency. Union deductions may be taken by percent,
hourly rate, or fixed amount within a user-specified frequency.
Handwritten paychecks and paychecks never cashed (reversals) are also
supported by the application. Once the payroll register and checks are
printed, many analysis reports are produced: Labor Distribution, Job
Distribution, Miscellaneous Deductions, Union Deductions, YTD/QTD
Earnings, Workmen's Compensation Worksheet, and Payroll Journal.
The presently formatted W-2 and 941-A reports are also provided.
Tho capability is provided to pass transactions to the General Ledger
application, if installed. These transactions will be applied toward
company use only. Payroll may be on either a cash or accrual basis. If
the cash basis is selected, no transactions are passed to the General
Ledger.
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE (5725-M33)
Accounts Payable provides an Open Payables and Cash Disbursements
function on either an accrual or cash basis. Invoices and credit memos
entered may be multi lined and distributed by job, item number, cost
type and General Ledger account number. Entries may be for standard
or one-time vendors and may be open or prepaid. Credit memos may
be entered manually or initiated automatically based upon a prior
entered invoice.
A Purchase Journal provides the audit trail for cost transactions
entering into the General Ledger system and into the open payables file.
An Open Payables Report is provided in due date or vendor sequenco.
This turnaround document provides a mechanism to indicate payment
by data, vendor or invoice, including partial payments, for Cash
Disbursements. Invoices may be entered or placed In hold status to
prevent inadvertent payment of invoices in question.
A Cash Requirements Report is used to assist the controller In insuring
sufficient funds are available and proper invoice selection was made
before the checkwriting procedure begins. The Cash Disbursements
Journal provides an audit trail for its transactions entering the General
Ledger application and acts as the Check Register. Checkwriting and
reconciliation are also provided.
ACCOUNTS. RECEIVABLE (5725-M34)
All transactions (that is, invoices, cash receipts, adjustments, and credit
memos) are retained in an Open-Item File. This file may be purged
daily or monthly at the user's request. An Aged Trial Balance with
current plus four past periods is provided. It has multiple printing
options (summary, detail, selected line, within limits). Delinquency
Notices may also be printed. Late charges can be calculated for
balance forward customers.
Two optional formats are provided for the customer statements which
are printed at month-end. The capability is provided to delay the
printing of the statements until a more convenient time without
affecting the closing of the books. An account status inquiry feature is
also provided.
INVENTORY MANAGEMENT (5725-M35)
Inventory Management maintains a perpetual inventory and on-order
status for each item. It calculates and prints on demand numerous
management figures including: Economic order quantity, dollar profit
and percent of profit, average monthly usage, turnover rate, and reorder
point. Management reports are also provided: ABC Analysis Report,
two types of Stock Status, Inventory Analysis Report, Physical
Inventory Checklist, On-Order Status Reports, Inventory Valuation and
Variance Report, and Inventory Reorder Report. It can also interface
with Order Entry and Invoicing, Sales Analysis, Product Definition and
Costing, and Production Status and Costing.
PRODUCT DEFINITION AND COSTING (5725-M36)
Product Definition and Costing provides manufacturers with an
easy-to-use method of organizing bills-of-material and item information and calculating product costs using bills-of-material. Costs are
built from raw material up to the finished end-item. Assembly costs
may be recalculated when there is a change in the bill-of-material or in
the assembly labor or material costs or burden. The user can simulate
the effect of proposed cost changes in end-item costs due to changes
in labor, material or burden cost.
For all product costs the total cost of purchased parts is maintained
separately as material cost. These costs are calculated and maintained
level by level and make it possible for the user to identify the added
value (Jabor, burden) for products and assemblies for tax purposes.
Management reports can be produced when required since the cost
information is stored in the Product Definition and Costing data base.
These reports include costed bills of materia', cost reports reflecting
either real or potential cost changes and variances (simulations), and
special vendor where-used and final assembly where-used lists. The
basic formats used for parts lists and where-used lists are single level,
indented and summarized.
GENERAL LEDGER (5725-M37)
General Ledger combines all the transactions affecting the financial
status of the company during the month. They may be entered directly
as a General Journal Entry or may have been previously entered through
interface with Accounts Payable or Payroll. At month-end closing time,
Audit Registers and the Financial Statement Worksheet are provided to
help verify that the user is still in balance before proceeding into the
actual closing. The reports will also aid in generation of any necessary
closing entries.
An Income Statement and Balance Sheet are standard report outputs.
The user can define these reports with an easy-to-use format
description procedure. The financial reports can illustrate current
financial data as compared to budget or h~storical information.
Users may define their own chart of accounts or use a suggested
account structure provided with the application. The fiscal year start
month is user-defined. Multiple company support for up to ten
companies is included. Any transactions passed from Payroll or
Accounts Payable are applied to the first company only.
SALES ANALYSIS (6725-M38)
Sales Analysis reports summarize the activity and highlight the
performance of items, customers, and/or salespersons. Selected
reports may be printed in detail or summary, depending on the option
selected at printing time. Since all data used in Sales Analysis can be
entered through Order Entry and Invoicing, it should be installed to
obtain full benefit of the Sales Analysis application. If Sales Analysis is
installed with Accounts Receivable alone, only Salesperson and
Customer Sales AnalysiS can be obtained; or with Inventory Management alone, only Item Sales Analysis can be obtained.
ORDER ENTRY AND INVOICING (5725-M39)
This postbilling program includes order entry and edit, invoicing, and
preparation of an invoice register and price lists. The Order Acknowl-
------- ----:: - - ::FS'=f~ ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission'
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
PP 5725·M31.3
Mar 83
Major Revision
System/32 MMAS (cont'd)
I
edgement will show warehouse location. while the picking list is printed
in warehouse sequence. Pricing options include selection of the actual
selling price. a discount percent from a list price. operator-entered
price. or a contract price by customer. Up to six user-assigned
discount percentages by item and up to three tax percentages are
provided; Quantity break prices can be established optionally by item.
Order status and backorder status is provided by item. customer, or due
date. Support is also provided for partial shipments and backordering
or cancellation of the balance of the order. This application provides
data for input into Inventory Management,' Accounts Receivable, and
Sales Analysis.
Two invoice formats are available. Picking list is optional and can be
run either at order entry time or just prior to billing. Order acknowledgements are optional and may optionally be printed with prices.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However. the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information. personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day to day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Each of thes'e' IBM 'Sy'stem/32' 'Industry Application Programs will
execute on 16K or 24K models of the IBM 'System/32. The programs
are compiled assuming either a 16K or 24K system. It is not intended
that anyone customer install all nine applications on one IBM
System/32. Because of volume and time constraints. there may be a
requirement for providing offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry
System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used. it must have the 128-character
record features (#5455 and #4004). ,
The Manufacturing Management Accounting System is intended to be
an independent yet interrelated set of applications. Many functions
have been included to protect the integrity of the master files.
programs, procedures. and libraries. Because of this, no other
user-written program may co-reside with any MMASapplication
unless stringent coding requirements for these programs are met to
insure compatibility with the MMAS applications.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The application programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II
Programming language and execute under control of the IBM
5ystem/32 5ystem Control Program (5725-5Cl Version 2). IBM
5ystem/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes 50rt.
Data File Utility, and 50urce Entry Utility, is required for execution of the
programs. The IBM 5ystem/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is
required if modifications to the source code are necessary.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
MMA5 Application Guides:
Production Status and Costing (G580-0029) ... Payroll (G580-0031) .. .
Accounts Payable (G580:-0035) ... Accounts Receivable (G580-oo33) .. .
Inventory Management (G580-0030) ." Product Definition and Costing
(G580-0028) ... General Ledger (G580-0036) ... Sales Analysis
(G580-0034) ... Order Entry and Invoicing (G580-0032).
M MA5 lAP 5pecifications:
Production Status and Costing (GH30-oo37) ... Payroll (GH30-0035)
... Accounts Payable (GH30-0036) ... Accounts Receivable (GH300031) ... Inventory Management (GH30-0032) ... Product Definition
and Costing (GH30-0033) ... General Ledgor (GH30-0034) ... Sales
Analysis (GH30-0039) '" Order Entry and Invoicing (GH30-oo38).
Customer Self·Study Education:
MMA5 Users Guide. Modules 1 - 4
Set of 4 Audio Topes (5V30-0072) ... Workbook " Introduction to
MMAS (SR30-0104) ... Workbook 2, Product Definition and Costing
(5R30-0105) ... Workbook 3, Inventory Management (5R30-0106) ...
Workbook 4,Production Status ond Costing (5R30-0107).
MMA5 Users Guide. Modules 6 - 8
5et of 4 Audio Tapes (5V30-0091) ... Workbook 5" Accounts Payable
and General Ledger (5R30-01BO) ... Workbook 6, Payroll (5R30-0181)
... Workbook 7, Accounts Recoivllble, Order Entry ond Invoicing, Sales
Analysis (5R30-0182) ... Workbook 8, 5230 Data Collection System
'Support (SR30-0183).
Unlicensed Publications
... Production Status and Costing Runbook (5B30-oo38) '" Reference
Manual Volume 1 (5B30-0039) .;. Reference Manual Volume 2
(5B30-0059) ... Payroll Runbook (5B30-0032) ... Reference Manual
Volume 1 (SB30-0033) ." Reference Manual Volume 2 (SB30-oo56) ...
Accounts Payable Runbook (5B30-0035) ... Reference Manual Volume
1 (SB30-0036) '" Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-oo57) ...
Accounts Receivable ... Runbook (SB30-0020) ... Reference Manual
Volume 1 (5B30-oo21) ... Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-oo51) ...
Inventory Management Runbook (5B30-oo23) ... Reference Manual
Volume 1 (5B30-oo24) ... Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-oo53) '"
Product Definition and Costing Runbook (5B30-oo26) ... Reference
Manual Volume 1 (SB30-oo27) ... Reference Manual Volume 2
(5B30-oo54) ... General Ledger Runbook (5B30-0029) ... Reference
Manual Volume 1 (5B30-oo30) ... Reference Manual Volume 2
(5B30-oo55) ... Sales Analysis Runbook (SB30-0044) ... Reference
Manual Volume 1 (5830-0045) ... Reference Manual Volume 2
(SB30-oo61) ... Order Entry and Invoicing Runbook (SB30-0041) ...
Reference Manual Volume 1 (SB30-0042) ... Reference Manual
Volume 2 (5B30-oo60).
Licensed Publications
Production Status and Costing Logic Manual (LB30-0040) ... Payroll
Logic Manual (LB30-oo34) ... Accounts Payable' Logic Manual
(LB30-oo37) ... Accounts Receivable Logic Manual (LB30-0022) ...
Inventory Management Logic Manual (LB30-0025) '" Product
Definition and Costing Logic Manual (LB30-0028) .. , General Ledger
Logic Manual (LB30-0031) ... Sales Analysis Logic Manual (LB300046) ... Order Entry and Invoicing Logic Manual (LB30-0043).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: 5ee PP Index
--.--- ---:: - - :S~5: ISG
PP 5725·M44.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 SHIPPING CONTROL for
SUPPLIERS TO THE AUTOMOTIVE INDUSTRY
5725·M44
PURPOSE
System/32 Shipping Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry
provides solutions for many problems associated with planning,
controlling and reporting shipping dock transactions for the automotive
supplier. Shipping Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry
addresses the requirements for both release orders and discrete
quantity orders by generating a wide variety of planning reports,
shipping documentation and reporting of completed shipping transactions, which assists suppliers in effectively managing and controlling
their shipping operations.
Providing any programs which might be required to interface with
existing user· systems. Specifically, if discrete quantity orders are
to be' processed in the shipping application, the order file must be
prepared in the proper format.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Shipping Control ,has been designed for a minimum configuration of
IBM System/32 mdl A12. The IBM System/32 mdl B12 can be used if
the printing of cut form bills-of-Iading is not required. It is recomShipping Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry offers . mended that users of Shipping Control review with their marketing
representatives their direct access storage requirements which are a
opportunities for new name and first system account sales as well as
function of the' size of the' master data files and transaction volumes.
established data processing accounts in the automotive industry. It is
The size of the user's files will dictate the size of the disk storage
intended for automotive suppliers starting with enterprise locations with
capacity required. Listed below is a guideline which will be helpful in
at least 50 employees or 2 million dollars in sales, and ranging up to the
~etermining the user disk requirements.
size of manufacturing plants of the automotive companies.
Shipping Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry was designed
DESCRIPTION
to fit on the IBM System/32 with 5-megabyte disk capacity and the 80
Shipping Control is an operator~oriented system for suppliers, to the
cps Printer (mdl A22),assuming the following volumes:
automotive industry. The system is designed to operate in conjunction
1,700 Customer Master Records
with Release Control for Suppliers to the Automotive, Industry
800
Destination' Master Records
(5725-M45), or as a stand-alone, application interfaced, to, the
1,000 Item Master RecOrds
customer's release order processing and/or discrete order processing
200
Routing Master Records
systems through customer-supplied programs. The application is
4,000
Order Records
designed for the needs of the automotive supplier by incorporating both
800
Open Shipping Activity Records
batch and interactive modes of operation. All reports and shipping
450
Advanced Shipping Notification Records
documents generated in the application are designed to meetthe needs
for both the automotive original equipment manufacturers and the
These volumes are not restrictive but can be used as a guide to
"
replacement market.
determine if the customer's shipping control system and files can be
contained within the minimum system. The minimum IBM System/32
An installation guide provides a step-by-step installation activity plan
(mdl A 12) is supported if the customer daily transactions can be
including sample reports and maintenance user data forms, 'control
handled by a 4O-cps printer.
.
forms with suggested procedures, and other information necessary for
a successful installation.
The file sizes set in the distributed OCL reflect these volumes for a
5-megabyte file.
The runbook provides the operator with the detailed instructions
necessary to effectively operate Shipping Control and provide accurate
Any changes to the" file sizes should be carefully reviewed by the
and timely management reports for planning, controlling, reporting and
customer and IBM Systems Engineer to determine the necessity for
documenting shipping activity.
more direct access storage, estimate of time required to convert OCL
Procedures, and estimate of throughput performance.
HIGHLIGHTS
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Provides key planning reports:
Schedule and Status Report showing the daily shipping schedule
for current week, behind schedule position, current release position
and last shipment date and quantity.
Load and Routing Report showing projected daily shipments in
terms of net, tare and gross weight with the associated carrier and
routing instructions.
Container requirements reports showing detailed
requirement by customer andlor container part number.
container
Allows selection and printing of shipping documents in a batch
mode or through interaction between the system and the operator.
Picking slips may be printed in customer, part number, or location
sequence.
Load sheets selected in interactive mode allow the operator to view
the customer's requirements and the total weight buildup as parts
are assigned to the load.
Shipper documents designed to meet the requirements of the
original equipment manufacturer and the replacement market.
Bills of Lading may be printed in the formats required for direct
shipments or shipments through consolidation points.
Provides a wide variety of reports of completed shipping transactions.
Data files of shipping transactions are available for interfacing to other
applications areas through user-supplied programs.
.
Creates advanced shipping notification data files for most of the major
automotive manufacturers. Audit reports of all generated files are
provided.
.
Interfaces with Release Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry
(5725-M45) without programming modification.
.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer is responsible for the following:
Making all decisions regarding the application processing options
(refer to Installation Guide for a discussion of system options).
Acquiring all forms and supplies.
Gathering all master file data and generating all master files.
Preparing schedules.
Providing for installation assistance if required.
The programs in Shipping Control for Suppliers to the Automotive
Industry are written in IBM System/32 RPG II and operate under the
control of IBMSystem/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1). In
addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1)
must' be available for sorting of data (SORT) and Source Entry Utility
(SEU) for making procedure or RPG II source program modifications.
If compilation of the RPG II source programs is required, the IBM
System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) must be available.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Profit Building Resources from IBM for the Automotive Supplier
(G580-0066) ... Shipping Control Licensed Program Design Objectives
(GH30-oo13) ... Release Control Licensed Program Design Objectives
(GH30-oo14) ... Runbook (SB30-oo98) ... Installation Guide (SB300099).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
---
--- ----
PP 5725-M45.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - - :E'f~ ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 RELEASE CONTROL for
SUPPLIERS to the AUTOMOTIVE INDUSTRY
5725-M45
PURPOSE
System/32 Release Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry
provides the automotive parts suppliers with solutions to many
problems associated with processing and maintaining release orders
from the major automotive manufacturers.
~elease
.Control. offers a' means of easily maintaining accurate release
information which may be used to better manage the planning of
shipments, fabrication activities and material acquisitions.
Release Control offers opportunities for new name and first system
account sales as well as established data processing accounts in the
automotive industry. It is intended for automotive suppliers starting
with enterprise locations with at least 50 employees or 2 million dollars
in sales, and ranging up to the size of manufacturing plants of the
automotive companies.
Any changes to the file sizes should be carefully reviewed by the
customer and IBM Systems Engineer to determine the necessity for
more storage, estimate of time required to convert OCl procedures, and
estimate of throughput performance.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The programs in Release Control for Suppliers to the Automotive
Industry are written in IBM System/32 RPG II and operate under the
control of IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1). In
addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (S72S-UT1)
must be avail~ble for sorting of data (SORT) and Source Entry Utility
(SEU). fo~ making procedure or RPG II source proQram modifications. If
compIlation of the RPG II source programs IS required, the IBM
System/32 Compiler (5725-RG1) must be available.
.
DOCUMENTATION
DESCRIPTION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Release Control is an operator-oriented system for suppliers to the
. a~tomotiye !ndustry. The system is. designed to operate in conjunction
With Shipping Control for Suppliers to The Automotive Industry
(5725-M44), or as a stand-alone application.
Profit Building Resources from IBM for the Automotive Supplier
(G580-0066) ... Shipping Control Licensed Program Design Objectives
(GH30-0013) ... Release Control Licensed Program Design Objectives
(GH30-0014) ... Runbook (SB30-0095) ... Installation Guide (SB30(096).
~n in~tallation g~ide provides a step-by-step ~nstallation activity plan
including sample Input and user data forms for file maintenance control
forms with suggested procedures, and other information nece~sary for
a successful installation.
The runbook provides the operator with information necessary to
effectively operate Release Control to provide accurate and timely
management reports.
HIGHLIGHTS
Provides for key entry of release data with the ability to tailor the
operator prompting to the specific release document.
.
Provides for the processing of machine-readable release data as if
it were key entered.
Audit reports are printed showing release status before and after
update.
\
Processes shipping activity and adjustments to update release
status and to maintain shipping history.
Provides management reports in detail and summarized formats.
Allows inquiry into the release and shipping history' files for quick
resolution of customer or supplier questions.
Comes complete with source code, ready-to-execute. procedures
and object code.
'
Is documented with an installation guide, application logic manual
and an operator run book.
Provides for file maintenance to generate, list, update . or delete
'. .
master file records.
DeSigned to interface with the Shipping Control for Suppliers to the
Automotive Industry licensed program (5725-M44) without
program modification.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer is responsible for the following:
Acquiring all forms and supplies
Gathering all master file data and creating all master files
Preparing run schedule
Providing for installation assistance if required
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Release Control has been designed for a minimum configuration of IBM
System/32 mdl A12 (Matrix Printer) or B12 (Line Printer).
It is recommen~ed that users ~f the !BM R~lease C~ntrol for Suppliers
to ~he Automotive Industry review With their marketing representatives
their direct access storago requirements which are a function of the size
of the master data filos and transaction volumes. The size of the user's
file will dictate the storage capacity required.
The minimum system was deSigned to handle the following approximate volumes:
800 releases (customer/part number) with. an average of three
destinations each.
6,000 shipping history records, before a purge is necessary.
The file sizes set in the distributed OCl reflect these volumes for a
5-megabyte file ..
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
--..---- --------
Do not reproduce
.:.:::: :2~E: ISG
witho~t
PP 5725-M61.1
written permission
Mar83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
ACCOUNTING SYSTEM (CMAS)
JOB COSTING ... 5725-M61
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE ... 5725-M62
PAYROLL ... 5725-M63
GENERAL LEDGER ... 5725-M64
PURPOSE
The System/32 Construction Management Accounting System (CMAS)
provides the construction industry with a complete, yet flexible method
for managing their Payroll, Accounts Payable, Job Costing, and General
Ledger.
.
CMAS offers opportunities for new name and first systems account
sales in the construction industry. It is primarily intended for the
general contractor with 1 to 7 million dollars in contracts per year, 25 to
250 employees; or the subcontractor with $65,000,000 in contracts per
year, 35 to 250 employees.
CMAS offers flexible applications specifically designed for the
construction industry. CMAS key'reports help construction management effectively direct and control their business.
The Construction Management Accounting System consists of four full
function ready-to-execute applications. CMAS includes source code,
object code and execution procedures.
HIGHLIGHTS
Independent or interrelated applications approach
- Modular design facilitates sequential application installation.
- A journal reference numbering system ties the four applications
together when multiple CMAS Applications are installed.
- Single data entry results in multiple application update
Wide variety of reports and report options included
• Management Reporting is a byproduct of normal data entry
- All applications provide for multicompany entries and reports
- Field reporting allows for projecting profit and loss by joh
Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide
a solid accounting system.
- Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided
- Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation
and audit and control are provided
- Security code deters unauthorized inquiry or execution of key
programs in each application
CMAS can be installed without customer programming capability
- System tailoring procedure on-site to facilitate account growth
changes
- Display Screen input prompting and output report formats are
tailored to meet specific customer requirements
- Complete, system-controlled, operator oriented input prompting
- Complete file maintenance and audit programs and procedures
- Installation and operator self-study training exercises . are
provided to each customer
DESCRIPTION
The Construction Management Accounting System is a set of four
independent, interrelated, ready-to-execute applications for the small
to medium size contractor/subcontractor. The system combines two
approaches - operator-oriented and batch reporting. This approach
and programming system provides a sound accounting base by doing
Payroll with Labor Distribution, Accounts Payable with Subcontract
Accounting, Job Costing with Management Reporting and General
Ledger with Financial Statements.
The four easy-to-operate programs may be installed in separate stages
at different times and still be a totally interrelated system, that is, payroll
data may be passed by the system directly to general ledger and job
costing, etc.
Each application contains a requirements file with user questionnaire
responses which allows the application to select Input formats, report
formats, and functions to suit each customer's needs. These responses
are keyed in during initial installation and may be changed as customer
needs change.
The systems tailoring procedure controls the prompting of input records
and fields to be entered, the types of reports and fields on reports, and
data files used for output.
Systems tailoring procedure .is a procedure requesting the answers to a
series of questions regarding a contractor's company requirements.
Systems tailoring provides the following:
Tailoring the system on-site at installation time
Application reprogramming is not required as business changes
because system tailoring parameters can be changed by the
customer
The programs contain all the announced functions, but only
required functions are performed by the system
Applications may be installed in any sequence
System tailoring options include the following:
-
Multiple companies or single
Multiple states or single
Multiple unions or no unions
Custom formatting of Balance Sheets and Income Statements
An installation guide provides a step-by-step installation activity plan
including suggested numbering systems, sample input and maintenance
user data forms, control forms with suggested procedures, and other
activities necessary for a successful installation.
The runbook provides the operator with activities necessary to
effectively operate CMAS as an accounting system to provide accurate
,
and timely management reports.
Two self-study guides lead the user through the installation guide,
runbook, and associated materials to assist the self-sufficient
customer.
JOB COSTING (5725-M61)
General Journal entries with cost distribution may be entered with
distribution by company, job, pay item, cost code, and cost type.
Job Costing automatically updates the General Ledger component, if
available. General Ledger is then updated on a monthly basis.
Job Costing is automatically updated by the Accounts Payable
application, if installed. Payroll reports, when used with the Job Cost
reports provide a total perspective of job status.
Job Cost management reports are provided with unit costs, budget
comparison, and projected profit or loss based on field reporting of
percent complete or quantity 'put-in-place'. Income reporting with
distribution provides the basis for cash flow reports by company and by
job.
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE (5725-M62)
Invoices and credit memos entered may be multiline and distributed by
company, job, pay item, cost code, and cost type. The entries may
consist of vendor, miscellaneous, estimated or subcontract invoices.
Prepaid invoices are permitted on all of the invoice types. Credit
memos may be entered manually or initiated automatically based on a
prior enter .invoice.
Subcontract accounting provides for automatic movement and
accountibility of retainage and change orders. Subcontracts are
maintained on either a balance forward or open items basis. Subcontract status reports by job and by vendor denote the contract amount,
change orders, billed amount and date, payment amount and date,
retention, and taxes.
An accrued accounting system provides for timely job cost information,
while a cash flow handling capability indicates job cash position through
the general ledger.
The Accounts Payable application provides an Open Payable and Cash
Disbursements function. An Open Payable report is provided in due
date or vendor sequence. This turnaround document provides a
mechanism to indicate payment by date, job, vendor, or invoice,
including partial payments for Cash Disbursements.
Invoices may be entered or placed on hold status to prevent inadvertent
payment of invoices in question.
A Cash Requirements report is used to assist the controller in insuring
funds are available and proper invoice selection was made before the
check writing procedure begins.
Check writing and reconciliation are provided. The check format
provided includes a user-indicated check stub length to adapt the size
of the remittance advice. Stub overflow initiates a separate supplementary stub.
An Accounts Payable trial balance is available in job or vendor
.
sequence.
A Vendor Analysis Report indicates key business volumes
and year.
by~
quarter
PAYROLL (5725-M63)
This hourly/salary distributed payroll provides for regular, overtime,
premium, vacation, sick and travel pay. It may be run weekly, biweekly,
semimonthly, or monthly. Exception hours provide ~me and one-half,
double time, double time and one-half, and tripl~:;'time capabilities.
Rate selection may be standard, selected by· craft, 'PI: keyed in as an
exception overtime or premium rate.
-c., .•
.
--- -
PP 5725-M61.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
--- ----
:: - -~~E: ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/32 CMAS (cont'd)
Clear audit and accounting procedures aid in maintaining an
in-balance Payroll system.
Handwritten checks (payoffs, special, etc.) are easily handled.
Standard union deductions are used to prepare two standard union
deduction reports. Multiple union reporting is supported.
Workmen's compensation calculations and a workmen's compensation worksheet report provide a mechanism for weekly tracking
of insurance premiums.
A standard tax algorithm calculates federal, FICA. and all state
income taxes based on customer-provided data. Local taxes may
fit the standard tax algorithm provided.
Deductions by percent, fixed amount, upper limit, and miscellaneous deductions.
Taxable or non-taxable adjustments
State Disability Insurance is calculated and reported.
Federal Unemployment Insurance and
Insurance are calculated and reported.
State
Unemployment
Check writing and reconciliation are provided.
A payroll journal provides a clear audit trail of entries to the CMAS
General Ledger application.
Labor cost management reports are provided with unit cost budget
comparison, and projected profit or loss based on field reporting of
percent complete or quantity put-in-place. The reports are
available with distribution by company, job, pay item, cost code,
cost type, and job class.
941-A, W-2, and Certified Payroll reports are provided.
GENERAL LEDGER (5725-M64)
General Journal entries may be entered for end of month closings or for
out-of-balance conditions.
Journal entries identified by journal names and numbers are indicated
on the Financial Statement Worksheet and Trial Balance Listing. These
entries are automatically accepted from the Payroll, Accounts Payable,
and Job Costing applications.
On an out-of-balance condition, a procedure is provided to rearrange
the entries into journal reference number sequence and print out a
selective audit listing. This listing can be compared with the monthly
journals to quickly identify the out-of-balance entry.
An Income Statement and Balance Sheet are standard report outputs
which provide the user with the flexibility of defining these reports with
an easy-to-use format description procedure. This definition may be
changed as needs vary.
Financial reports can iIIustrato current financial data as compared to
budget or historical information.
Users may define their own chart of accounts or use a suggested
account structure provided with the application. The fiscal year start
date is user defined.
Application Files (Online all the time)
476
Payroll System - 250 Active Employees Design
-Payroll System File - 3 Records
-Employee Master - 250 inactive, 250 active employees
-Current Hours - 1,400 Distributions / Pay Period
-Employee Deductions - 2,000 Deductions for active or inactive
-Check Reconciliations - 1,250 Outstanding Checks (250 checks x
5 weeks)
-Job Classifications - 65 Job Classes
-Distribution - 160 Payroll Distribution Codes
-Active Labor Cost Distributions - 700 Weekly Distributions
-Union Master Deductions - 80 Union Deductions 10 Unions + (10
Unions x 7 deductions/union)
-Monthly Union Deductions - 3,000 deductions
-Tax Tables Federal/State/Local - 30 tax brackets (Federal,
single, weekly, 10 $ Brackets)
-Employee State and Local Taxes - 2,000 Deductions with
additional withholding (2 states x 2 locals x 500 active/inactive
employees)
-Insurance File - 155 Insurance company masters
-Insurance Summary - 1,200 Employee Workmen's Compensation
Accounts Payable - 1,200 checks design
401
-Payables Systems File - 3 records
-Active Vendor Master - 900 name and address
-Checks Written - 1,200 check/ month
-Open Payables Distribution - 1,000 Outstanding Invoices with
three distributions per invoice (3,000 records)
-Active Subcontracts - 1,000 Subcontracts
-Payables Work File - 1,400 Invoices and distributions
Job Costing - 100 Job Vouchers/Month Design
117
-Job Costing Systems File - 3 records
-Job Work File - 400 Job Vouchers/Batch
-Job Name Master - 240 Active Jobs
-Job Cost Detail - 2,100 Costing Entries (Active Job Costing
Distributions + Income Distributions)
389
General Ledger - 200 Journal Entries/Month
-General Ledger Systems File - 3 records
-General Ledger Work File - 200 General Journal Entries
-General Ledger Chart of Accounts - 800 accounts
-Temporary General Ledger Account Transactions - 9,200 entries
-General Ledger Format - 400 formatting records
Application Work Files Area
(Loaded by Application)
Paid for CMAS User
208
6
1,968
Total Blocks
The OCL and file sizes, as distributed, have been fixed· at the maximum
capacity with normal distribution for the 5 MB file.
Any changes to file sizes other than those shown above should be
carefully reviewed by the customers and IBM System Engineering to
determine the necessity for more storage, estimate of time required to
convert OCL procedures, and estimate throughput performance.
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
The IBM System/32 disk is backed up by dumping the disk to multiple
diskettes. IBM-supplied system programs are provided to the user on
diskettes initially and should be retained by the user for backup. The
user-created application data files must also be backed up on diskette.
Users are required to provide their own backup diskettes for CMAS
procedures, programs, and data files.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
Number of User-Supplied Diskettes Required for Backing Up the
System/32 Distributed System and Data Files
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
System/32 Back Up·
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
This IBM System/32 program will execute on all models of the IBM
System/32.
It is recommended that users of IBM Construction Management
Accounting System (CMAS) review with their Marketing Representatives their direct access storage requirements which are a function of
the size of master data files and transaction volumes. The size of the
user's files will dictate the size of the storage capability required. Listed
below are some guidelines which should be helpful in determining user
disk requirements.
Distributed System for System/32 5 Megabyte file (1 ,968 Blocks)
Files
Number of
Blocks· .
System Control Programming
SORT Executable Code
CMAS Executable.Work Units
239
34
98
·,These block,fiijures are for the System/32 feature only.
Single Level Double Level
Payroll
Accounts Payable
Job Costing
General Ledger
All 4 Applications
18
12
8
13
38
36
24
16
26
76
-Includes Backing Up: Daily Transactions: CMAS MachineReadable Object Programs; Disk-Resident Application Files
It does not include SCP 5725-SC1, Utilities 5725-UT1, RPG II
5725-RG1 machine-readable materials (PID shipment) or any other
programs, procedures, data files, and spare diskettes to replace
damaged or worn diskettes.
The System/32 user will require either the sum of the backup diskettes
for each application installed or 38 diskettes, whichever is less.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The CMAS licensed programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II
and operate under control of IBM System/32 System Control Program
(5725-SC1). In addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program
(5725-UT1) must be available for sorting of data (SORT) and Source
------- -----
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - -~~§: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/32 CMAS (cont'd)
Entry Utility (SEU) for making RPG II source program corrections. If
compilation of the RPG CMAS source programs is required, the IBM
System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) must be available.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
CMAS Specification Sheets: ... Payroll (GC21-5120) .. , Accounts
Payable (GC21-5117) .,. Job Costing (GC21-5119) ... General Ledger
(GC21-5118) ... Job Costing: ." Installation Guide (SC21-7624) ...
Runbook (SC21-7630) .. , Accounts Payable: ... Installation Guide
(SC21-7626) '" Runbook (SC21-7629) .. , Payroll: ... Installation Guide
(SC21-7625) ... Runbook (SC21-7268) '" General Ledger: ... Installation Guide (SC21-7623) ... Runbook (SC21-7631) ... Job Costing
Reference Manual (LY21-0549) ... Accounts Payable Reference
Manual (LY21-0548) ... Payroll Reference Manual (LY21-5110l ...
General Ledger Reference Manual (L Y21-0550) .. , Construction
Industry Brochure for System/3 (GC20-1999).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-M61.3
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- ----:: - -~~E: ISG
PP 5725-RG1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SVSTEM/32 RPG II
5725-RG1
PURPOSE
System/32 RPG II provides the following capabilities:
RPG II Language Level
System/32 Device Support
Auto- Report
Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC)
"System/32 Device Support" for the expanded definition of SET/KEY
which replaces the function.
Header specification entries have been added to specify UDATE
formats of mm/dd/yy, dd/mm/yy, yy/mm/dd and to designate
the edit character to be used with the Y edit code. The Shared I/O
Access Method is supported. The MOVEA and SETLL operation
codes are supported.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
DESCRIPTION
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
RPG II Language Level: The RPG II language is supported as on the
System/3 mdl 6. Overlays are automatically generated when necessary. Differences do occur due to different devices and SCP function.
System/32 RPG II supports all models of the IBM 5320 and the
following special features:
System/32 Device Support: All the devices available on the System/32
are supported by s7:stem/32 RPG II, except the diskette drive. Through
the use of System 32 OCL. the diskette drive is supported as an offline
multivolume sequential input, output or update file. The shared
input/ output access method is also supported. The following expanded
device support is provided:
SET/KEY Display Support: The field light capability (System/3 mdl
6) has been replaced by a prompting capability which will use
messages stored either in the program or the library to prompt the
operator.
CONSOLE File Support: Through the use of normally coded File
Description and Input Specifications, the CONSOLE File
(keyboard/display) is supported in a buffered interactive mode.
The operator is prompted by field name, one field at a time.
All input is buffered and overlapped with processing. The program is
coded to process records as from any other sequential input device.
Auto-Report: Auto-Report is included with the System/32 RPG II
compiler and includes the following features:
Copy: Specifications may be cataloged in the library and included
in any RPG II program via the COpy statement. It is especially
useful for cataloging the File Description and Input SpecificatiOnS
for which overrides may be coded to specify such thinqs as control
levels. By using the COPY statement, only one description of the
file need be catalogod and changed for all programs using the file.
Page Headings: Page hoadings can easily be speCified on Output
Specifications without tho need for Output Indicators or end
positions. The hoading Is centered over the report complete with
page numbers and date.
Simplified Report Specifications: A report may be produced by
listing on Output Specifications the fields desired in the order
desired. On one Output Specification, the field, column heading,
and an indication for column totals may be entered. The column
headings, fields, and column totals are automatically generated.
Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC): The Telecommunications
Specification is supported in System/32 RPG II. Support of Binary
Synchronous Communications will be provided by System/32 to
communicate with:
-
-
-
Another System/32 with RPG II
System/34 with RPG II and Assembler
System/3 with ML/MP, CCP or RPG II
System/7 with MSP/7
S/360 with any of the following:
BTAM
TCAM/NCp·
CICS/DOS, CICS/OS
S/370 with any of the following:
BTAM
TCAM/NCp·
VTAM/NCP
CICS/DOS, CICS/OS, CICS/VS
IMS/VS
S/360 mdl 20 with BSCA 10CS
3741 mdl2 or4
A 3747
A 5110 Computer System supported as a 3741 mdl 2 or 4
5231 mdl 2, Receive mode only. Supported as a 3741 mdl 2 or
4.
- 5280 Distributed Data System
•
Note: The 3704/3705 Emulation Program (EP) or the Partitioned
Emulation Program (PEP) extension to 3704/3705 NCP can be
used to emulate the 2701.
The BSC support for System/32 is supported on the host system as
System/3 BSC.
The RPG II device names are DISK, PRINTER, CRT, CONSOLE,
KEYBOARD and BSCA. The user indicators (Ul-U8) may be turned on
and off in the RPG II program. The status of these indicators may then
be tested by OCL The DSPLY operation code is not supported. See
#1005 Additional Storage
#1100 1255 Attachment
#2074 BSCA
#3200 Data Recorder Attachment
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
A current version of IBM System/32 System Control Programming
(5725-SC 1) is required.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Introduction to RPG /I (GC21-7514) ... RPG 1/ Additional Topics
Programmer's Guide (GC21-7567) ... Disk Concepts and Planning
Guide (GC21-7571) ... RPG /I Disk File Processing Programmer's
Guide (GC21-7566).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
--..--- ----
PP 5725-T21.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: .::...: :S~§: ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 MOTOR FREIGHT
ACCOUNTING SYSTEM (MFAS)
5725-T21
PURPOSE
This application provides small to medium size general commodity or .
spe~ialty motor freight carriers with a powerful aid in managing their
business.
The MFAS Revenue Accounting lAP offers conventional revenue
accounting functions to the small and medium size general commodity
and specialty carrier in the motor freight industry. These functions are
divided into the five categories of (1) Freight Bill Entry and Daily
Reports, (2) Accounts Receivable, (3) Interline Payables, (4) Shipment
Analysis, and (5) Owner/Operator Accounting.
The application is designed to help the general freight and specialty
carrier manage revenue accounting requirements and report prime
motor freight sales and operational data.
Volume 1 of the Application Reference Manual provides a step-bystep installation activity plan including sample input and maintenance
data forms, file loading sequences, and control forms with suggested
procedures. Volume 2 of the Application Reference Manual provides
information on the day-to-day use of the application.
The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed set of instructions
showing all the activities necessary to run the procedures on a
System 132. The Operator Reference Summary Card is provided for the
operator as a reminder of the major operational functions of each
procedure. It is intended to be used once the operator is thoroughly
familiar with the particular procedure.
Instructional material with exercises is provided to train the operator in
the use of the Runbook.
The entry of data from a coded copy of the freight bill establishes
records for daily statistical reporting, accounts receivable, interline
payables, shipper / consignee and interline statistics and shipment
analysis.
An Application Logic Manual is provided, for use by the self-sufficient
customer and for systems engineering continuing support. It describes
the architecture of programs, procedures, data base cross references,
data dictionary, and detailed descriptions of each program.
The entry of the owner/operator accounting data produces records of
owner / operator freight bill revenue, expenses, charges, advances, and
settlement amounts. Owner/operator accounting will also produce
settlement sheets detailing those items used in settling with the
owner/operator. Owner/operator accounting is by owner and/or
driver or unit.
Application Description: The Motor Freight Accounting System is a full
function, ready-to-execute application. Included are Source Code,
Object Code, execution procedures, and the Application Logic Manual.
HIGHLIGHTS
These are some general features which the Motor Freight Accounting
System has:
Designed to fit industry requirements
Security codes to deter unauthorized use of master files
Wide variety of reports and report options included:
In-house inclusion/exclusion of functions to be executed
- Management and operational data reporting is a byproduct of
normal data entry
- Detail or summary listings within a range of keys is supported in
many reports
- Statements for freight bill accounts receivable optionally printed
on stock paper or preprinted forms with or without tear off
portion for turnaround document.
OCL procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are
packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation
The Motor Freight Accounting System can co-reside in the
System/32 with the Distribution Financial Accounting System and
all application areas with the exception of owner/operator
accounting can supply data to general ledger.
Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide
a solid accounting system:
- Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided
- Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation,
audit and control are provided
- Security code deters unauthorized execution of programs
- A journal reference numbering system supplies an audit trail for
any area that generates transactions for the DFAS General
Ledger
Can be installed without customer programming capability:
- System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing
on-site changes to file sizes and determination of functions used
- File maintenance and audit procedures provided
- Detailed runbook
- Operator self-study course is available
- Step-by-step installation activity plan provided by the Application Reference Manuals
- User's information supplied to the supervisor by the Application
Reference Manuals
DESCRIPTION
The Motor Freight Accounting System is a ready-to-execute application for the small to medium size motor carrier.
The system uses the Data File Utility as its data entry approach.
Support is provided for transaction entry through the System/32
keyboard or through a diskette keyed offline on a 3740 Data Entry
System. The Motor Freight Accounting System Revenue Accounting
lAP can be installed with the Distribution Financial Accounting System
General Ledger, Accounts Payable, and Payroll lAPs in separate steps,
at different times and be an interrelated system.
The System Tailoring Procedure utilizes the answers to a series of
questions regarding a carrier's requirements. It provides the following:
Tailoring the application on-site at installation time.
Allows the users to change selections of provided functions as the
business changes.
All provided functions are included in the programs but only
reql;lired functions are executed.
File sizes may be expanded or contracted as needed by rerunning
the System Tailoring Procedure.
Monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program
until preceding required programs have been completely and
successfully executed
Compatible online/offline data entry through the System/32
console or by means of diskettes keyed offline on a 3740 Data
Entry System.
Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of
master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what
procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate
up-to-date master files
Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated
from report writing functions
Selective printing options are available for many report functions
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate
ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and
continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM System/32 Industry Application Program feature will execute
on all models of the IBM System/32 which have 24K bytes of main
storage. The programs are compiled assuming a 24K system. Because
of volume and time constraints, there may· be a requirement for
providing offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. If an IBM
3742 is to be used, it must have the 128-character record features
(128-character feature #5455 and feature group A #4(04).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The application programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG "
Programming language and execute under control of the IBM
System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1 Version 5). IBM
System/32 Utilities licensed program (S725-UT1), which includes Sort,
Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for execution of the
programs. The IBMSystem/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required
if modifications to the source code are necessary.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Runbook (SB30-0111) ... Reference Manual Vol. 1 (SB30-0112) ...
Reference Manual Vol. 2 (SB30-011~) ... Logic Manual (LB;30-0114).
------- ----:: - - :§':f§:
Do not reproduce without written permission
ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/32 MFAS (cont'd)
Education:
Industry Marketing Education Self-Study Binder (ZR30-0202) ...
Industry Marketing Education Self-Study Workbook Vol 1 (SR300203) ... Industry Marketing Education Self-Study Workbook Vol 2
(ZR30-0207) ... Industry Marketing Education Audio Cassettes
(ZV30-0098).
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-T21.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- - - - -:: - -~~E: ISG
PP S72S-UT1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 UTILITIES
S72S-UT1
,
PURPOSE
The following utilities are provided with the Utilities licensed program:
The ability to move statements around in a program.
The ability to include statements from another library member.
Data File Utility (DFU)
The ability to delete statements.
Sort
Statement insertion.
Source Entry Utility (SEU)
The following data base management functions are provided as part of
DFU:
- Data File Creation and Maintenance
- Data File Inquiry
- Data File List
DESCRIPTION
All functions of the above utility take advantage of cataloged RPG II File
Description and Input Specifications. To use any of the functions, the
user need only know the name of the file and the name of the cataloged
RPG II specifications. The functions will prompt for all the other
information necessary to tailor the job to the user's task. Field names
are included with the prompts to aid the user in selecting the data fields
to be used.
Data File Creation and Maintenance: This function provides the necessary
capabilities to create and maintain data files in a data base. Maximum
use is made of the display to prompt the operator by field name for the
data to be entered. For update, the data currently in the field is
displayed. This function operates only with indexed sequential files.
Highlights include:
Formatted Report for an Audit Trail
Auto- Duplication of Fields
Control Totals
Generated Keys
Modulus 10 and 11 Self-Check Digit
, Data File Inquiry: This function provides the necessary capability to allow
inquiry into a file. Any indexed file may be inquired into. The records
are displayed showing the current status of the information in the file.
Highlights include:
Retrieval by record key
The capability to roll forward or backward in key sequence through
the file.
The ability to optionally print a record with the 'PRINT REC'
command key.
All displayed fields include column headings for easy identification.
Data File List: This function provides the capability to list and summarize
selected information from any indexed or sequential file in the data
base. The function is very useful for obtaining one-time reports and for
creating recurring management reports. Highlights include:
Page headings including date and page number
Column headings
Edited data fields
Column totals - both final and subtotals
Selection based on record codes and/or field values
Sort-Ascending or Descending
Summary list with totals only
Retrieve and print data from a related file
Calculate and print additional fields
Sort: The System/32 Sort utility provides the function and capability of
the proven System/3 Sort. Highlights include:
Selection based on field contents: for example, record codes
-
Support of any data field
ADDROUT (Tag) Sort
Summary Sort
Automatically allocated work file
Ascending or descending sequence
Sourco Entry Utility (SEU): SEU can be used to create and maintain
OCl procedures, RPG " and FORTRAN IV source statements and SORT
source statements. Highlights include:
Sort formats to aid in entering Sort statements.
RPG II and Auto-Report formats to aid in entering RPG II and
Auto-Report statements.
Optional RPG " and Auto-Report syntax checking
Optional resequencing of statements in library.
Rolling forward or backward through cataloged statements.
Optional listing of statements.
Use of display to show statement being entered or updated.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program supports all models of the
IBM 5320 and #1005 Additional Storage.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
A current version of IBM System/32 System Control Programming
(5725-SC1) is required to support IBM System/32 Utilities licensed
program (5725-UT1).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- - - - -----
Do not reproduce without written permission
=- -:§~~ ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 FILE CONVERSION UTILITY (FCU)
5725-UT2
PURPOSE
The File Conversion Utility (FCU) is a stand-alone System/32 utility
accepting input from and providing output to 5321 Magnetic Card Unit
or fixed disk (Link Direct Access Method [LOAM], sequential, direct or
indexed sequential file organization).
DESCRIPTION
Functions
Convert numeric fields to packed, unpacked or signed binary.
Convert monocase EBCDIC characters to lowercase or to proper
noun (characters following blank or hyphen and first character of
field converted to uppercase; all others converted to lowercase).
Convert lowercase EBCDIC to uppercase.
Format numeric data for word processing (insert minus sign, insert
decimals, right or left justify, suppress leading zeroes and trailing
blanks).
Resequence fields in an output record
Insert constant data.
Process selected records (include or exclude based on field
comparison).
Display audit totals (sum, maximum and minimum) for packed or
unpacked numeric fields over an entire file.
Combine a primary Magnetic Card, LOAM or System/32 file with a
secondary input file to produce a merged output file. (The
secondary file must be indexed by a field in the primary file.)
Can process up to 512-byte records.
Support all System/32 Keyboard/Display character sets for
update. Supports Magnetic Card data.
Access variable-length
characters.
fields
separated
by
field
separator
- Proper noun conversion exceptions. Names requiring nonstandard capitalization (such as von Fleet, McKinley, O'Connor) can
be properly converted to upper/lowercase .by defining special
conversion specifications.
- Abbreviation expansion.
LOAM records up to 512K bytes can be processed when 24K bytes
of main storage are available.
User instruction and/or input is provided the utility through data
specification forms similar to forms used by RPG.
This utility provides support for the sharing of stored information
between application programs. The utility provide!:! the user with the
capability of converting a file formatted for lAP or· data processing
applications to a format acceptable to the word/text processing
applications. Similarly, data entered into Document Libraries can. be
used by other data processing programs after conversion by the utility
(each user installation requires analysis for limitations).
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM System/32 File Conversion utility supports all models and features
of the IBM 5320. For IBM 5321 Magnetic Card Unit support to LOAM
support, the Word Processor feature. (#6002) on 5725-SC1 is
required. 24K bytes of main storage is required for processing records
greater than 256 bytes.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
A current version of IBM System/32 System Control Programming
(5725-SC1) is requirod to support IBM System/32 File Conversion
Utility (5725-UT2).
.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-UT2.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -------.:.
ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
~ :§~E:
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 STATISTICAL SYSTEM
5725-XA1
,PURPOSE
The System/32 Statistical System is a set of routines offered for use by
Problem Solvers to satisy their needs in statistical data analysis. This
licensed program is a set of four major tools: Stepwise· Linear
Regression Analysis, Factor Analysis, Analysis of Variance, and
Orthogonal Polynomial Curve Fitting.
This flexible statistical system accepts user-supplied commands and
data which instruct the system to perform one or more of the above
analyses. Many options are available to the user, as described below.
Orthogonal Polynomials Curve Fitting - derivatives can be obtained
... polynomials can be reentered for evaluation at a specified set of
points.
Analysis of Variance - four factors are allowed ... balanced designs
can be analyzed, using factorial techniques ... a program for
arranging the Analysis of Variance table to conform to specific
design needs is included.
Factor Analysis - twenty-five variables are allowed ... eigenvalues
produced using the QR algorithm matrix output from programs can
be used as input for later analyses ... orthogonal and oblique
reference frames are possible.
Stepwise Linear Regression Analysis - matrix output can be used
and pooled with other matrices for use as input in later analysis ...
twenty-five variables are allowed ... deletion and entry of variables
are automatic.
In addition, many output report options may be selected by the user.
HIGHLIGHTS
Data irtput to the Statistical System can be entered from the
keyboard at the time of execution or read from the disk (stored
from a previous run) or read from disk where the data had been
created offline and transferred from diskette.
Output to be retained will be saved on disk.
Although FORTRAN coding knowledge is desirable,· it is not
required to use the Statistical System.
Prompting messages on the display device will aid the user in
selecting options available.
Interactive response is provided for the user via the keyboard.
Error checking and associated messages will be furnished.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
This program is distributed in machine-readable form (diskette). It is
the customer's responsibility to provide for safekeeping of the diskette
to ensure continued operation (back-up). A User's Guide is also
provided. Procedures for installation are furnished.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENTc
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM System/32 Statistical System is designed to operate on all
models of the IBM System/32.
The IBM System/32 Control Storage Increment (#1500) is required.
FORTRAN graphics on IBM 5320 Band C models are provided by the
64-character EBCDIC print belt or by a new 48-character FORTRAN
print belt. This new belt is recommended and may be ordered as #9492
as the belt provided with the system, or as feature #5552 as an
additional print belt.
IBM 5320 A models automatically provide FORTRAN graphics.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1),
Version 6 or later is required.
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-XA1.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -----
PP 5725-XA2.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - -:5~~ ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SVSTEM/32 RETAIL DATA PREPARATION
5725-XA2
PURPOSE
The System/32 Retail Data Preparation licensed program is designed to
satisfy the basic functional requirements of retailers. It is available for a
System/32 with 32K. It provides flexible, ready-to-execute programs
specifically designed for processing transaction log data produced on
5265 Point-of-Sale Terminals.
HIGHLIGHTS
Transaction data may come from diskettes created on 5265
Point-of-Sale Terminals (TP or hand carry).
Processing frequencies are user-specified, governed only by file
capacities and execution of prerequisite programs.
File sizes can be periodically reallocated.
Process-convert-separate transaction log data.
Establish control counts.
Publications: The RMAS General Information Manual contains a
description of RMAS and its application features and functions as they
may be used by a typical customer. It contains three sections. The first
introduces IBM's retail offering, as it pertains to the 5265 terminals,
with special attention to the licensed programs, of which Data
Preparation is the only one for System/32. The second provides more
detailed information on the major functions and operations associated
with the application programs. The last section reviews installation and
planning tasks, and customer responsibilities.
The Data Preparation User's Guide provides the technical planning,
reference, and operational information needed to understand, install,
manage, and use Data Preparation.
A Logic Manual is provided, as licensed material, for use by the
self-sufficient customer and for the systems engineer in maintaining
and modifying Data Preparation. The Logic Manual contains information on naming conventions, controls, program functions and specifications, problem determination and resolution steps and other
application-independent information. In addition, the Logic Manual will
contain information that is relevant to the application, such as program
descriptions, cross-reference lists and data dictionary.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance, in the installation of IBM
licensed programs. However, the responsibility for personnel selection
and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely
with the customer.
.
Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The minimum system configuration is an IBM System/32 consisting of:
IBM 5320 System Unit mdl A01 (with 3.2 megabytes of disk
storage)
Two #1005 Additional Storage special features (to 32K)
Although there is nothing inherent in the design of the IBM System/32
Retail Data Preparation program to prevent the use of the minimum
system configuration stated above, the system configuration for a
particular customer must be able to accommodate the expected
business volumes, data base size, and operating requirements.
The amount of disk storage required is influenced by:
The volume of daily transactions
The frequency of processing
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM System/32 Retail Data Preparation programs are written in
IBM System/32 RPG .11 programming language and execute under
control of the IBM System!32 Control Program (5725-SC1) (Version 8
or later). The IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1),
which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is
required for execution of the programs. The IBM System/32 RPG II
compiler (5725";RG1) is required if modification of the source code is
.
desired.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
5260 Introduction (GA21-9284) ... RMAS General Information Manual
(GH30-0136) ... Executive Brochure (G580-0201) ... Product Brochure
(G580-0202) ... Industry Segment Brochures: ... Department/Discount
Stores (G580-0203) ... Specialty Stores (G580-0204) ... Drug Stores
(G580-0205) ... Apparel/Shoe Stores (G580-0206) ... Hardgoods
Stores (G580-0207) ... Home Furnishing Stores (G580-0208)
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- ----:: --:s'f~ ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 SUBROUTINE LIBRARY - MATHEMATICS
SL-MATH (5725-XM1)
PURPOSE
The Subroutine Library - Mathematics (SL-MATH) is a set of basic
computational subroutines for the solution of. mathematical problems.
It includes a wide variety of subroutines, but is not exhaustive. in terms
of either functions performed or methods used. It provides powerful
tools for the solution of many problems in industry, science, and
engineering. The subroutines, which are designed as computational
building blocks, operate on data that resides in main storage.
Included are three subroutines dealing with optimization. The solution
of a standard linear programming problem by (1) the revised simplex
method with bounds and ranges and (2) the revised dual simplex
method is provided. The third optimization subroutine provides for the
solution of a capacitated network flow problem (generalized transportation problem). Sample programs will be provided for two of the
optimization subroutines.
HIGHLIGHTS
Some of the characteristics of SL-MATH are:
The subroutines are purely computational in nature. They do not
contain references to external devices, but operate exclusively on
data already contained in main storage. The user must prepare a
main program calling the SL-MATH subroutines and must furnish,
as part of this program, the input/output and, possibly, other
operational routines for the total solution of the problem.
All subroutines comply with the FORTRAN IV conventions. They
are called by means of the FORTRAN CALL statement, and are
executed according to the normal rules of FORTRAN IV.
The numerical mathematics part often provides multiple algorithms
for one problem class, allowing the user to choose the method
.
appropriate to the specific problem.
Certain classes of errors are detected and flagged. The program
takes appropriate action and warns the user.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The Subroutine Library - Mathematics is distributed in machinereadable form (diskettes). It is the customer's responsibility to provide
for safekeeping of the diskettes to ensure continued operation
(back-up). A User's Guide is also provided. The user must be familiar
with FORTRAN and must prepare a main program.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The storage requirements for a specific problem will depend on the
routines used, the size of the main program, and the data storage
requirements. The IBM System/32 Control Storage Increment (#1500)
is required.
FORTRAN graphics on IBM 5320 mdl Band C models are provided by
the 64-character EBCDIC print belt or by a new 48-character FORTRAN print belt. This new belt is recommended and may be ordered as
Specify #9492 as the belt provided with the system, or as feature #5552
as an additional print belt.
IBM 5320 A models automatically provide FORTRAN graphics.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The SL-MATH subroutines require the following:
IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1) Version 6 or
later is required.
IBM System/32 FORTRAN IV (5725-F01)
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-XM1.1
Mar 83
Major Revisior
-------- ------_.----- --- ISG
------
PP 5725-XX1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
-~--
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 WORD PROCESSOR/32
5725-XX1
PURPOSE
The Word Processor/32 (WP/32) licensed program provides a set of
office-related word processing functions to process text information
from a keyboard, store it in document form, and operate on and print
this information in a batch mode.
DESCRIPTION
Word Processor/32 (5725-XX1), combined with the System/32, offers
a comprehensive office data and word processing system.
The Word Processor/32 licensed program provides programming that
supports System/32 word processing features:
5321 Magnetic Card Unit
Dual Case Keyboard/Display with keys and functions corresponding to standard typewriter keyboards
Print features, including superscripting and subscripting
This combination of licensed program and System/32 hardware
features provides a comprehensive systems solution for:
Document and letter generation from stored and original text
Document editing at the magnetic card typewriter or via batch edit
Creation, maintenance, sequencing, and selection of lists used for ,
mass mailing or miscellaneous administrative support
Sharing data for word processing and data processing use
Production statistics reports
It provides functions ranging from automatic printing of data from
magnetic cards prepared at a magnetic card typewriter, to comprehensive formatting and editing of long documents stored in a document
library on the System/32 nonremovable disk storage facility.
Word Processor/32 will execute with System/32 System Control
Program (SCP), 5725-SC1. SCP feature #6002 is required.
HIGHLIGHTS
Existing functions of the Magnetic Card Selectric® typewriters are
enhanced by providing automatic printing and extended word
processing functions on the System/32.
Multiple input media
Magnetic cards recorded on (standard features supported):
Magnetic Card Selectric®
Magnetic Card II
Magnetic Card/ A
Magnetic Card Executivo®
Communicating Magnetic Card Selectric® (in nonteleprocessing mode)
- Format Feature on Magnetic Card II and Magnetic Card/ A for
input or output
- Standard· System/32 keyboard redefined to support one, of
twelve-character arr.~I'!Q~ments (requires Dual Case Keyboard
and Display feature #3400.)
- Diskette created on 3741 or 3742 in monocase or
upper /Iowercase convention. (3742 requires the 28-character
blocking feature #5455).
-
Comprehensive document formatting including:
- Stored formats for standard settings such as margins, tabs, line
spaCing, page length, etc.
- Headings and footings
- Page numbering
- Footnote control and numbering
- Line numbering
- Automatic pagination control including ability to keep blocks of
text together or reserve white space on a page (for insertion of
figures and tables) and controlled start/end of pages (sections,
chapters, etc).
- Right margin justification
- Line ending adjustment to accommodate change (no adjust is an
option).
- Centering,
- Superscript/Subscript, Word Underscore
Document Generation from a combination of original text and
prestored text. Documents can ran~e from simple letters built from
paragraphs to mUlti-page specifications.
Media Handling Efficiency through storage and retrieval of
documents from System/32 nonremovable disk.
Insertion of variables at designated places. within text, such as
tailoring a form letter with name and address and personal
comments.
Decimal Arithmetic performed on numeric symbol values.
Keyboard efficiencies including:
- Automatic paragraph and section numbering
. - Encoding/Expansion using three character 'symbols' to generate
long names or phrases commonly used
- Global change
- Support of tables with:
- Easy definition and entry
- Headings centered on columns
- Headings repeated on. multi page tables
- Blank space optionally padded with fill characters
- Right, left, and decimal alignment
- Automatic layout of table between margins
Forms fill-in with prestored definition of form and position of
variables
Mass mailing including:
- Conditional generation of paragraphs or whole letters based on a
test or comparison
- Easy definition and edit of name and address files
- Sequencing of letters; for example, into zip code order
.
.
- Direct access to contents of a System/32 data processing file
with data conversion to a format suited to text printing
(unpacked, commas inserted, decimals inserted, names converted to upper /Iowercase, etc.)
Preparation of' code-compatible magnetic cards for revision or
playout at a magnetic card typewriter, except proportional spacing
at Magnetic Card Executive.
Revision of disk-resident text with editing instructions entered from
magnetic card, System/32 keyboard, or diskette created on 3741
or 3742. Change list printed during edit provides ease of proofing.
Author / operator 'comments' or instructions can appear in proof
copy with automatic deletion in final print.
Production statistics control information trailer sheet printed at the
end of each task giving as appropriate: Date. operator. author.
department, task name, number of output pages, number of output
cards, number of input lines.
Production statistics reports printed daily, weekly, or monthly
detailing production volumes and system utilization by author,
department, and job, including year-to-date summary.
Administrative lists (personnel listings, telephone directories, sales
and inventory summaries, document logs of location of incoming
and outgoing correspondence, etc.) supported by:
- Formatting and printing of lists with headings, page numbers,
etc.
- Word processing-oriented definition and update of lists
- Sort and selection of lists via typist-oriented commands
Document security prohibiting read/write access by unauthorized
WP/32 users
Alternate use of the System/32 for word processing and data
processing applications
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Document security including
Document Class assignment
Security
Key
assignment
and
Manual operations and backup procedures
Data conversion
Implementor, system operator, and typist training
Installation of hardware and prerequiSite programs
System/32 operation
Installation of the licensed program
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM System/32 with at least 3.2 million bytes of disk storage, 50lpm
line printing speed, and 16K bytes of main storage capacity (an IBM
5320 System Unit mdl B or C).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
This Word Processor/32 licensed program is distributed as IBM
System/32 load modules. It is released to execute with Version 6 of
the IBM System/32 System Control Program (SCP), 5725-SC1, and all
subsequent versions and modifications unless so stated in a future
revision of this document. Some production statistics report generation
programs are written in RPG.
SCP feature #6002 is required.
Notes:
-------:: -- --.- :§"f!: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
Word Processor/32 (cont'd)
1.
There is no increase in printing throughput on C model systems
over B model systems for Word Processor /32 applications.
2.
Some applications executing c;omplex PRINT task in a ~6K main
storage environment may exhaust available main storage. If. this
occurs, it will be called to the attention of the IBM. System/32
operator by a message, and will require the operator to rerun the
PRINT task preceded by a PROOF task. The print speed, when
executing most print tasks, will be less than rated printer speed.
The speed of printing is dependent upon factors such as memory
size and the complexity of the task formatting requirements of the
application.
'
3.
Thorough evaluation of each prospect's throughput and file sizing
requirements must be made prior to proposal of either 16K main
storage or 3.2 million bytes of fixed disk storage, or both.
Support is provided for the following:
IBM 5321 Magnetic Card Unit
IBM 5321 Magnetic Card Unit Attachment
Dual Case Keyboard and Display
Half Line Space
48-character EBCDIC Print Belt
64-character EBCDIC Print Belt
96-character Artisan Print Belt
96-character Modified Courier Print Belt
Magnetic Card Typewriters supported by Word· Processor/32 must
have the Paragraph Indent Feature.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Product Flyer (G580-0095) ... Executive Brochure (G580-0094).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-XX1.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- ----:: - -~'f~ ISG
PP 5725-XX2.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SVSTEM/32 LETTER WRITING APPLICATION
5725-XX2
PURPOSE
System/32 Letter Writing Application licensed program provides the
System/32 user with the additional data processing capability of
printing personalized letters for large volume distribution. The Letter
Writing Application licensed program is directed toward the user with a
System/32 installed or on-order, whose primary volume letter
generation or response is nonexistent or presently done by means of
preprinted forms or flyers.
DESCRIPTION
The Letter Writing programs produce a letter in upper and lower case
with the ability to insert name and addresses into the address line, and
other variable information into the body of the letter. When inserting
variable information, the text line is spread, the phrase inserted, and
unnecessary blanks deleted. The resulting line length must not exceed
80 positions or data will be lost. A maximum of 73 phrase characters,
including phrase separator (», blanks, and shift designator ( - ), can be
entered for anyone name and address record for insertion into the body
of the letter. Multiple phrases are separated in the phrase field of the
name and address record by the phrase separator (»,and are used
sequentially as phrase insert characters. Logical OR symbols (I - upper
shift 1) are encountered in the letter text. Labels can be produced from
the Name and Address File as one-, two- or three-up across the page
for mailing purposes. A statistical detail or summary report may be
printed showing the number of name and address records on file by zip
code or one of two user-specified codes (5 alphameric positions each).
The system has three primary files; a Name and Address file, a Letter
Text file and a Title Table file.
..
The Name and· Address file contains first and last name, address
information, a letter code, a title· code and 2 user codes. It also has
space for limited phrases which may be inserted automatically into the
body of the letter. The letter code specifies which letter, from the Letter
Text file, the individual is to receive. This code may be changed if
desired, so that all addresses in the name and address file get the same
letter.
The Letter Text file contains fixed format text lines along with control
information for the selection of salutation format (casual or formal),
letter style, tab stops, date location and spacing, and name and title
default values, if they are not present in the name and address record.
The casual format allows use of first names or nicknames in the
salutation line while containing the surname in the address name line.
Suffixes to the last name (Jr., Sr., etc.), may be specified to print on the
name line but omitted from a formal salutation.
The Title Table file contains thirty-six titles which may be specified in
the name and address record by a title code. This information is
automatically inserted into the name line of the address and salutation
line, if desired.
File creation is in the form of diskettes from the 3740 Data Entry
System or through the System/32 keyboard. Maintenance is via the
System/32 keyboard only.
Text changes to the Letter Text file are limited to one line at a time. All
text changes to the Letter Text file are done as a replace .function. This
means that the entire line displayed on the CRT, a maximum of 40
characters including blanks, must be retyped. (40 characters represents
1/2 line.) Changes to the Name and Address file are handled in the
same manner on a field by field basis.
User codes in the name and address record.
- A three-position letter identification code in the name and
address record to specify the letter to be printed from the letter
text file. '
- Two 'user codes of 5 alphameric positions each in the name and
. address record to allow selective processing and sorting by
user-defined data when printing labels or letters.
Selective printing of letters from the text file by a letter identification code in the name and address record.
Label printing 1-, 2-, or 3-up with optional print alignment pattern.
Selective printing of labels or letters for any valid range of zip
codes, or range within one of the two user-specified codes.
Additional selective printing capability for restart of letters or labels
(skip X number of records, print Y number of records).
I
Sort and print labels or letters in sequence by zip code,. or one of
two user codes, or original entry sequence.
Print total at the end of each label or letter run to show the number
of labels or letters printed.
Print a brief statistical report showing detail or summarized total for
name and address records on file, by zip code,· or one of two
user-specified codes.
Print proof listing for all, or selected, labels or letters.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The 'customer is responsible for the following:
Personnel selection and training: The customer is responsible for
selecting at least one person who will oversee the installation and
at least one person to assume the duties of an operator. The
customer is also responsible for the coordination and education of
the various departments affected by the installation.
Providing for installation assistance if required and completing the
file· sizing necessary to insure adequate disk space for proper
installation.
Acquiring all forms and supplies.
Making all decisions regarding the application processing options
or user codes in the name and address records.
Gathering data for name and address file and generating all master
files.
Providing any programs that may be required to interface with
existing user programs, PPs or lAPs.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Due to the unique upper and lower case printing requirements of IBM
System/32 Letter Writing Application, throughput performance will not
be enhanced by upgrading from an IBM 5320 mdl B2X to a mdl B3X.
However, the joint letter writing/data processing user may require a
mdl B3X for increased throughput when using a monocase print belt for
data processing applications.
Full operator guidance through interactive CRT prompting for
ease- of- use.
It is recommended that IBM representatives review their direct access
storage requirements with their customers that have the System/32
Letter Writing Application. Storage requirements are a function of the
size of the master data files and transaction volumes. The size of the
master files will also dictate the size of the diskette storage capacity
required.
Input from either the System/32 keyboard or diskettes from the
3740 Data Entry System. Maintenance .is from System/32
Keyboard only.
The Letter Writing Application was designed to execute on all Band C
models of the IBM System/32. The following file capacities are
programmed into the Letter Writing OCL statements:
Routines for creation and maintenance of name and address
records and their translation into upper/lowercase characters.
1,898 name and address records (256 characters each) in the Name
and Address file
1,898 lines of text (96 characters each) in the Letter Text file
36 records in the Title file
HIGHLIGHTS
Routines for creation and maintenance of text files made up of
multiple letters and their translation into upper/lowercase characters.
.
Routines for creation and change of title table file, which contains
up to 36 title descriptions for insertion into the name line.
Letters printed in block, modified block, or personal format.
Casual or formal salutation.
Variable phrase insertions Into the body of the letter from the
phrase field of the name and address record.
With the above file size allocations, the Letter Writing Application
requires a minimum of 478 blocks of available data file area on the
system's fixed disk for proper execution. This space is required only
while using the Letter Writing Application, and may be returned for the
use of other applications. after Letter Writing tasks have been completed.
The above file volumes are not restrictive but can be used as a guide to
determine if the Letter Writing files can be contained within the system
where other Application files are also online. Further information
regarding disk allocation, diskette requirements, and file size modifications are contained in the Application Reference Manual/Runbook
(SH30-0207).
Any changes to file sizes should be carefully reviewed by the customer
and IBM Systems Engineering to determine the necessity for more
storage, estimate the time required to convert OCL procedures, and
estimate throughput performance.
------- - - - --
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - - :§'f§: ISG
. PROGRAM PRODUCTS
System/32 Letter Writing Application (cont'd)
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
This IBM System/32 licensed program was desi9ned to execute on all
line printing Band C models of the IBM System/32. Matrix printing is
not supported. In addition to the system, a 96-character print belt
(RPQ #GG0339) is required for the upper/lowercase type. Program
maintenance may be performed on all models of the IBM System/32.
Dual Case Keyboard and Display (#3400) for the IBM System/32 is not
supported by the IBM System/32 Letter Writing Application.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The Letter Writing programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II and
operate under control of the IBM System/32 System Control Program
(5725-SC1). In addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program
(5725- Un) must be available for sorting of data. If procedure and
source program modifications are to be made, Source Entry Utility
(SEU) must be installed.
If compilation of the RPG II. Source Programs is required, the IBM
System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) must be available.
System and File Backup: The System/32's disk is backed up by
dumping the disk to multiple diskettes. IBM-supplied system programs
are initially shipped to the user on IBM-provided diskettes which should
be retained by the user for backup. The user created application data
files (Name and Address file, Leher Text file and Title file) may be
backed up on one or more diskettes (depending on the size of the file),
using the file backup procedure provided in the Letter Writing
Application. The user is required to provide backup diskettes for
procedures, programs, and data files.
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-XX2.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- -------!.::.:
:E~E: ISG
Do not roproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/32 JOB ANALYSIS SYSTEM (JAS/32)
5725-XX3
PURPOSE
The System/32 Job Analysis System (JAS/32) is a powerful tool to aid
management in the planning, supervising, and controlling of projectoriented work by the critical path method. It is designed to be easily
used by nontechnical personnel.
The JAS/32 operates under the System/32 System Control Program,
(5725-SC1). Depending on main storage availability, the JAS/32 has
the ability to handle 275 to 736 activities or work items and relationships per subnet.
HIGHLIGHTS
Front-to-pack interfacing of up to 10 subnets to form a network
with up to 7,360 activities.
Up to 10 subnets per master file.
Up to 32 calendars.
Four types of time relationships between work items.
Multiple starts and ends.
Reports easily modifiable.
Progress reporting specifying actual start date and/or remaining
duration.
Three types of schedule dates: Actual, data, scheduled.
Nine levels of milestones.
Free-form or fixed-data input.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
All users should know the various features of this system before
attempting to use it for actual project control. Users will need to know
the fundamentals of the critical path technique before they can prepare
input.
The customer must describe the activities which form the project
network. This data may be recorded on diskettes for entry into the
System/32 using an IBM 3740. or it can be entered directly from the
keyboard. Processing and report requests may also be entered in either
fashion.
The customer should provide for safekeeping of the diskette to ensure
continued operation (backup). A User's Guide will also be provided.
Procedure for installation will be furnished.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The JAS/32 is deSigned to operate on all models of the IBM
System/32.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1),
Version 6 or later Source Entry Utility licensed program (5725UT1).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5725-XX3.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
--- -
PP 5726-F52.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
--- ---:: - - :S~5: ISG
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/34 MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR LAW FIRMS
5726-F52
[NO LONGER AVAILABLE, effective May, 1983.]
PURPOSE
The IBM System/34 Management System for Law Firms licensed
application program offers the partners in a law firm a practical,
convenient means of capturing time and disbursement data, and
organizing that data into meaningful working documents and management reports.
The application program is designed for the small to medium sized law
firm. It is a complete set of programs designed to assist the law firm in
time and disbursement accounting, billing and accounts receivable.
These programs capture and store data which is then organized into
reports to aid law partners in effectively controlling and managing the
firm's business functions. In addition, it can be utilized with the MMAS
General Ledger System licensed application program (5726- M37) to
provide traditional general ledger functions such as balance sheet,
Income statement and other reports describing the financial status of
the firm.
The System/34 Management System for Law Firms includes the
components necessary for a controlled flow of daily time entries,
disbursement entries (made on behalf of a client) and billing information, from data capture to final reports. Other entries, such as time or
disbursements transfers, cash receipts, accounts receivable journal
entries, file maintenance, and accounts receivable writeoffs, are
supported. A series of comprehensive reports, with frequency of many
of the reports being user-determined, is provided to the law firm.
HIGHLIGHTS
Provides Missing Time Report which flags individuals who have
reported less time than the firm standard
Provides a turnaround document for billing information on demand
or periodically with all of the necessary information to make billing
decisions and update computer stored records.
Provides disbursement-only billing information memos on demand
or periodically
Prints client bills in a variety of formats
Calculates the variance between the firm investment of time for a
bill and the actual amount received on the bill
Provides aged accounts receivable reports
Prepares aged reports of uribilled time and disbursements
Analyzes billed and unbilled time
Nonbillable time can be tracked for management analysis.
Billing Proofs can be used to verify billing attorney instructions.
A broad range of time and disbursements reports is provided:
-
Weekly Time Report
Missing Time Report
Individual Time Summary
Individual Unbilled Time Summary
Disbursements Journal
Billing Journal
Unbilled Time and Disbursements
The billing information function of the application processes time and
client disbursement records to provide billing information to assist in the
billing process. Features of the billing information function are:
Produces Billing Information Memos on demand showing all
reported activity performed by the firm for a client. This report is
used by the billing attorney as a turnaround document to record
decisions on actual amounts billed and/or written off.
Enables the billing attorney to bill without relieving time entries
(payment on account), by relieving time and client disbursement
entries, or by relieving client disbursements only.
Prints client bills in a variety of formats
Produces Matter Billing Summary reports showing billing analysis
for the billing attorney, the matter, or the client.
Shows billing variance (the dollar difference between time value
and fees billed) and billing realization (the ratio, expressed as a
percentage, between fees billed and the value of the individual's
reported and billed time).
Prepares retainer lists showing billable retainer amounts.
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
The Accounts Receivable application offers a systematic procedure of
recording and reporting client fee and disbursement bills, receipts and
write-offs as well as the firm's cash receipts. Features of the Accounts
Receivable application are:
Aging of client accounts
Allocation of fees and write-off amounts
Summary or detail printing of the Aged Receivables Report
Provides a file sizing program to create file sizes based on
individual user needs
Advance payments for fees and disbursements
Provides system tailoring procedures for user to select functions
Allows entry of billing information into Accounts Receivable without
any supporting time or client disbursement entries
Designed to be used with the General Ledger licensed program.
Provides initial file loading, record addition, and data entry
capabilities through keyboard entry or 3740 Data Entry System.
Provides data entry for daily transactions through keyboard or 3740
Data Entry System
.•
All information is automatically adjusted and all transfers are listed
for control and auditing purposes.
Provides file maintenance on existing master file records which use
DFU (keyboard only)
DESCRIPTION
TIME and DISBURSEMENT ACCOUNTING
The Time and Disbursement Accounting application controls recorded
unbilled time and disbursement entries made by the firm on behalf of a
client, and provides a broad ran~e of management reports. The major
.
Time .and Disbursement Accou(ltmg features are:
Additional time recording steps are not required of the professional
staff.
Aged unbilled time and disbursement reporting triggers billing
activity and should help improve cash flow.
Time and disbursement information is maintained in detail with
tot~ls accumulated at the matter and client levels.
One of two billing rates can be selected per individual.
Time and client disbursement description codes are user-defined.
Cash Receipts/Write-off Journal
Paid Open Bill and Write-off Report
Inactive Client/Matter List
Features: Included as part of this application program are several
features designed to enhance day-to-day operation.
File maintenance is a part of every application within the program.
Maintenance may be performed on descriptive data in all major files but
not on auditable totals and dollar amounts.
Checking procedures guide the correct sequence of operations to
maintain data integrity. When an operation is not successfully
completed due to missing or incorrect information, or due to an attempt
to perform an operation out of sequence, the operator is notified that
corrective action must be taken. The operator can then correct
problems before running subsequent tasks, which are dependent upon
the accuracy of prior input for proper reporting.
Backup and recovery routines maintain a dynamic tracking history which
records previously executed tasks. If recovery is necessary, the
recovery routines guide the user in recovering required data developed
since the last data back-up point.
Reprint options are available for most reports. Reports can be reprinted
to provide extra copies. If recovery is needed to recreate data files,
report printing is bypassed, thus saving time.
Narrative can be included or omitted as required.
Selective printing allows the operator to specify various options to
control the content and level of detail contained in reports.
References to an Individual can be suppressed on selected reports.
Printing options include:
A single disbursement journal handles both firm and client
disbursements.
All or selected time or client disbursement records can be
transferred from client-to-client, matter-to-matter, attorney-toattorney, or date-to-date.
Range printing. For example, the operator may specify client
identifiers as limits so that information IS printed only for the group
of clients whose identifiers fall between those specified.
.
Selection of specific data. For example, the operator may select to
print only matters whose unbilled disbursement totals exceed a
specified amount.
-------=::
- ---..:.---:5~5: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
. Mar83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
S/34 Management System for Law Firms (cont'd)
Selection of detail level. For example, the operator may optionally
request a detailed report or a summary report.
Users may modify information that is subject to change, such as
report selection criteria and aging periods.
Individual security codes for time and disbursement accounting,
accounts receivable and maintenance are user-assigned. at
installation time. These codes may be periodically changed as
authorization changes dictate.
File sizes, which are determined at installation time, may be resized
in the future to accommodate the firm's growth.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
IBM may provide marketing assistance, in accordance with the
Marketing and Service Guidelines in the GI section, in the installation of
IBM licensed programs. However. the responsibility for providing
accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training,
installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with ,the
customer.
Installation of System/34 application programs is a customer responsibility.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The minimum system configuration requirement is an IBM System/34
with:
32K bytes of main storage
8.6 megabytes of disk storage
40 characters per second matrix printer
IBM 5251 mdl11 Information Display Station
Because of volume and time constraints, there may be a requirement
for providing offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. If an
IBM 3742 is to be used, it must have the 128-character record features
128-character (#5455) and feature group A (#4004).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM System/34 System Support licensed program (5725-SS1 Version
1), and System/34 Utilities licensed program (5726-UT1).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP 5726-F52.2
--.--- ---:: - - :s'f§: ISG
PP 5734-F03.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
OS FORTRAN IV (H EXTENDED) COMPILER
.
5734-F03
PURPOSE
The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler program product, with the
FORTRAN IV Library (Mod II) program product, provides OS and CMS
FORTRAN users with increased performance and additional functional
capabilities.
DESCRIPTION
The compiler provides a compile time option which allows the
introduction of source programs in either BCD or EBCDIC character
codes. If a cross-reference listing and/or a structural source listing is
requested, a data set for each option must be defined.
This product includes language extensions to the Full FORTRAN
language. OS Full FORTRAN language is compatible with and
encompasses the American National Standard (ANS) FORTRAN. The
language includes the following extensions to ANS FORTRAN:
IMPLICIT statement allowing extended implicit classification by
first character of a name.
An extended type statement. including length specification.
G-conversion, extended to cover all numeric and logical data types.
Multiple entry points to subprograms, and non-standard returns
from subroutines.
Arrays of up to seven dimensions.
PAUSE statement extended to permit output of messages.
NAMElIST statement permitting input/output and conversion
without an explicit I/O list and FORMAT statement
Extended subscripts.
Hexadecimal constants and FORMAT code.
Support of the direct (BDAM fixed length only) data access
method.
Compatible extensions to the READ and WRITE statements to
provide direct data organization in support of direct access storage
devices.
Mixed mode arithmetic.
The T -specification, permitting printed output to begin at any print
position.
STOP statement allows the processing of codes for testing by OS
Job Control statements.
Enhancements to the OS Full FORTRAN language are:
EXTERNAL Statement Extension ... the EXTERNAL statement is
extended to provide the capability to' 'detach' the names of
FORTRAN-supplied library functions and subroutines. This feature
provides the user with the advantage of being able to supply his own
functions or subroutines in the place of FORTRAN-supplied library
functions and subroutines. The extension is achieved by the use of
an ampersand prefixed to the function or subroutine name in its
. appearance in the EXTERNAL statement.
Automatic Precision Increase Option ... this feature enables the
compiler to convert single precision floating point calculations to
double preCision and/or double precision floating point calculations
to extended precision. The Automatic Precision Increase option is a
useful tool in precision conversion.
Automatic Precision Increase assists in overcoming precision
problems encountered in converting second generation FORTRAN
programs to OS floating point format.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler supports all iBM OS machine
configurations currently supported by' the OS FORTRAN IV (H)
Compiler.
In MFT and MVT, a minimum of 160K bytes of main storage is required
for operation of the compiler, inclusive of data management.
In VS1 and VS2, 192K bytes of virtual storage, and in CMS, a virtual
machine of at least 600K bytes of virtual storage is required for the
compiler. The standard instruction set and floating point option are
required.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler requires no additional data
sets beyond the SYSIN, SYSPRINT, SYSLlN, SYSPUNCH, SYSUT1
and SYSUT2 data sets currently required by the FORTRAN H Compiler
depending upon the execution options selected.
Extended precision divide instruction is simulated for processors with
extended precision instruction set. Extended precision add, subtract,
multiply and divide instructions are simulated by the OS Supervisor for
processors not having the extended precision hardware.
The extended precision simulator is also available with eMS.
Operating Environment: The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler
operates as a separate component under OS MFT, MVT, VS1 and VS2,
as well 8S under CMS.
The FORTRAN IV Library (Mod II) (5734-LM3), or its equivalent, is
required when compiling and executing under the FORTRAN IV (H
Extended) Compiler.
For extended preciSion floating point simUlation, the Extended Precision
Simulation is required.
COMPATIBILITY/CONVERSION CONSIDERATIONS
The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler program product will compile
programs written for the OS FORTRAN H Compiler. Object code
compatibility will also be assured. Thus, users will not have to recode
nor recompile their FORTRAN programs when obtaining this program.
The disk format of CMS data sets are not compatible with OS,
however, the data sets are transferrable through utilities or card or tape.
It should be noted that ASCII data sets are not allowed under CMS.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
List-Directed I/O ... List-Directed I/O facility enables the user to
read and write formatted data without having to specify a FORMAT
statement. In List-Directed READ or WRITE statements, an asterisk
is substituted for the FORMAT statement number.
Installation Procedure Letter ... FORTRAN IV Language (GC28-6515,
TNL GN28-0595) ... FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler and Library
(Mod I/) Genera/Information (GC28-6884).
Automatic Function Selection ... This facility simplifies the user's
task of referencing built-in and library functions by obviating the
need for codinQ specific or data dependent function names.
Automatic Function Selection is requested by means of a new
specification statement, GENERIC •
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
. The processor can be invoked under CMS using the CMS command
FORTHX.
The three most significant features of the FORTRAN IV (H Extended)
Compiler program product are the ability to handle extended precision
arithmetic and to support asynchronous 1/ O.
Extended Precision ... FORTRAN is used extensively to solve
complex scientific problems. As the number of operations performed on a piece of data Increases, so do the accumulated errors
due to truncation. Higher procision, therefore, has to be used in
certain stages of the computation to maintain the desired result
significance.
The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler provides extended
precision support to assure optimum accuracy of computational
results.
Asynchronous I/O ... In the large systems area, where the
requirement for reading and writing large logical records is frequent.
this feature will offer significant performance improvement. (This
feature is not available under CMS.)
--------------.:..~ :5~5: ISG
PP 5734-F04.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
SYSTEM/7FORTRANIV
HOST COMPILER and LIBRARY
5734-F04 • OS; 5736·F01 • DOS
PURPOSE
Provides high-level FORTRAN IV Language support for the System/7
user, enhances the System/7 Host Program Preparation Facility II, and
offers to the System/7 user the ease and speed of coding in the
FORTRAN language.
System/7 FORTRAN IV (S/360/370 OS, DOS Host Compiler and
Library) processes source programs written in System/7 FORTRAN IV,
which is an extension of American National Standard Basic FORTRAN,
X3.10-1966. The FORTRAN processor is installed on a host S/360 or
S/370 under the facilities of OS/VS1, OS/VS2, DOS/VS, Operating
System, or the Disk Operating System; and produces relocatable object
code that is suitable, after link-editing and formatting, for execution on
a System/7.
System/7 FORTRAN IV requires the use of Host Program Preparation
Facility " for processing object and load modules. The required
facilities are:
MSP/7 Macro Library/Relocatable, which contains IBM supplied
sensor-based, input/output, and supervisory macros that are used
by the System/7 FORTRAN IV programs,
ASM/7 which assembles the MSP/7 macros,
LlNK/7, which link edits the compiled object code and combines it
with appropriate library and sensor-based subprograms to form a
load module, and
FORMAT /7, which accepts the output of LlNK/7 and produces a
System/7 storage load.
DESCRIPTION
The Floating Point feature must also be installed in the host System.
A minimum system configuration requires the following devices:
1111-
Input device
Output device
Console Typewriter
Disk Storage Device
For its residence on the host, the compiler and library require the
following number of tracks on an IBM 2314:
OS
15 Compiler
12 Library
DOS
11 Compiler (in the core-image library)
19 Library
An additional 21 tracks are required for DOS if the compiler object
modules are also kept in the relocatable library.
Systemn (for execution)
The minimum system configuration for executing on System/7 is the
following:
1 -IBM 5010 Processor Module - 6K or larger
1 - IBM 5028 Operator Station
To use FORTRAN direct-access or sequential I/O statements
unformatted, an IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module is also required plus
additional memory required by Symbolic File Support access methods.
Use of the 5022 disk device also requires the Disk Support System
(DSS/7) service programs.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Compiler
Supports all devices available to 5/360/370 FORTRAN IV
compilers during compilation.
Device statement support for the 5022 Disk Storage Module, the
129 Data Recorder, the 7431 Line Printer, the 5028 Operator
Station, and BSCA during execution.
Access, through CALL statements, to MSP /7 functions (including
sensor-based input/output).
Extensive syntax checking and diagnostics.
Time and Space optimization for enhanced object-time perform~
ance.
Library
Sensor-based subroutines per ISA S61.1
Mathematical subprograms for exponential, natural logarithm,
square root, sine, cosine, arctangent and hyperbolic tangent.
Subprograms for extensive error handling and diagnostics, format
conversion of numeric data, and input/output operations for the
5022 disk device (formatted and unformatted direct access and
unformatted sequential records) and the 5028 Operator Station
(ASCII data).
Environment specification macro instructions to identify the user's
FORTRAN input/output environment when configuring a storage
load module for System/7.
Modular and reentrant.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Understand the application they wish to perform and provide the
appropriate hardware and software design.
Generate a supporting system nucleus using the facilities of MSP /7
Host Program Preparation Facilities" on a S/360 or S/370.
Provide the required user-written programs and link edit these
programs with the MSP /7 nucleus on a S/360 or S/370.
Load and test the resulting object programs on a System/7.
Note: Generation of the supporting nucleus requires a thorough
understanding of MSP/7. The user should consider attending the
required MSP /7 education courses, or requesting IBM to provide this
nucleus through Systems Engineering Services.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Host System (for compilation)
The system configuration required on the host is an IBM S/360 or
S/370 CPU with at least 40K bytes of main storage available to the
compiler, exclusive of the storage required by data management and
the overlay supervisor (overlay supervisor exists for OS/VS1, OS/VS2,
and OS only). Source programs of 250 cards can be processed in the
minimum storage available to the compiler.
IBM System/7 FORTRAN IV runs under the facilities of OS/VS1,
OS/VS2, DOS/VS, Operating System or Disk Operating System. The
object modules produced by System/7 FORTRAN IV must be
link-edited using LlNK/7 and the resultant load module must be
formatted using FORMAT /7 ~rior to execution on a System/7 machine.
Both LlNK/7 and FORMAT!7 are system control-type programs that
execute on the host machine. The System/7 Host Macro Assembler
and the MSP /7 Macro Library /Relocatable are required for preparing
the nucleus and for those user applications that utilize sensor-based
subprograms.
COMPATIBILITY
The host compiler accepts source programs written in System /7
FORTRAN IV, which is an extension of American National Standard
Basic FORTRAN, X3.10-1966 and produces object modules that are
acceptable to LlNK/7 for link-editing. The System/7 FORTRAN IV
compiler will also accept source programs written in ANS Basic
FORTRAN. Its language level is similar to stand-alone System/7
FORTRAN, with minor differences due to hardware restrictions.
System/7 FORTRAN IV can process on the .5022 Disk Storage Module,
formatted and unformatted direct-access data sets that are compatible
with System/3 data sets.
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- ----:: --~~~ ISG
PP 5734-XC3.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
APPLICATION PROGRAM GENERATOR
OS - 5734-XC3; DOS - 5736-XC3
PURPOSE
The System/7 Application Program Generator (APG/7) offers
high-level program support for many different sensor~based applications found in the plant automation, process control, and dataacquisition applications. APG /7 reduces the. programming effort
required to install and maintain such applications. It allows the
customer or IBM systems en~ineer to focus attention on application
design, rather than machine-oriented programming details.
DESCRIPTION
APG/7 is made up of three major components: 'fill-in-the-blanks'
facilities, a high-level language compiler, and a series of System/7
subroutines. The first two execute on a S/360 or S/370; the third
consists of subroutines that execute on System/7, and are used to
implement functions invoked by 'fill-in-the-blanks' specifications, or by
language statements.
The 'fill-in-the-blanks' facilities provide question forms that guide the
user in the selection and specification of programs from the library of
Modular Systems Programs (MSP /7) or from the Application Module
Library (5707-LM1).
The APG /7 compiler provides the user a means for specification of
operations that are more conveniently handled by language statements,
rather than by specification of tables for library subroutines. The
language contain~ a compatible subset of PL/I. The APG/7 language
may be used to READ/WRITE files from/to a remote computing
system, using the System/7 Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter (BSCA). "Transmission of data to/from the remote computer
will be in EBCDIC ,ransparency mode in fixed record length.
The remotecomRuting system may be an S/370, mdl115 through mdl
195, an System/3, 'md110 or mdl15 Disk or another System/7 with the
BSCA feature.
\
The APG/7 language contains speCial features oriented to System/7
applications. These features are peculiar to APG /7; they are not part of
PL/1.
HIGHLIGHTS
'Fill-in-the-blanks' forms - guide users as they select and tailors
library programs to be used, describes their data tables, and
specifies the hardware configuration.
Host file maintenance - S/360-S/370 host data files can be
updated to reflect alterations to the System /7 program and data.
Report generation - data from S/360-S/370 host files can be
printed according to user-defined formats;
Language compiler - provides users with high level method of
describing their operating procedures using terminology familiar to
them. The language contains a compatible subset of PL/I.
Applications: APG/7 is designed for crOSS-industry use in realtime
sensor-based applications found in the plant automation, process
control, and data acquisition applications.
The APG/7 language addresses a broad spectrum of sensor-based
applications including manufacture, movement, test, and batch
sequence control.
Use: To create a program for execution in System/7, the user answers
questions about the application on 'fill-in-the-blanks' forms. These
answers select and tailor the operating system facilities required from
the MSP /7 library. If AML/7 is used, answers are also provided for the
application data tables and facilities. Application operations are than
described using the APG/7 procedural language. (Alternatively,
subroutines may be written using the macro assembler language.)
APG/7, working with the MSP/7 Host Program Preparation Facilities II,
converts this information into a System/7 storage load module. The
MSP /7 facilities are also used to format the storage load for transfer to
the System/7 for execution.
Maintenance of such application programs is eased, since APG/7
provides facilities to generate reports that completely document the
selections and the data provided on the forms. Additions to the APG/7
files can easily extend the use of the tailoring and documonting facilities
to application subroutines that the user may personally write.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Create specification Information for the application and complete
the 'fill-in-the-blanks' forms for input to APG/7.
Supply all program libraries necessary to the implementation of the
application. This includes program products such as AML/7 if
required.
Provide, if necessary, appropriate application routines using the
APG /7 procedural language.
SPEC'IFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
System Configuration for OS, OS/VS" or OS/VS2: APG/7 requires a
partition· or region. size of approximately 80K bytes. APG /7 requires
storage space on a disk file for programs and files. The OS version
uses approximately 418 tracks of an IBM 2316 Disk Pack or equivalent
3336. or 3348 Disk Pack Space. The sizes of some files are specified by
the customer and may be smaller than the standard values. The use of
tapes or cards for backup files can further reduce requirements.
System Configuration· for DOS or DOS/VS: APG /7 requires a partition
size of approximately 52K bytes. APG/7 requires storage space on a
disk file for programs and files. The DOS version uses approximately
685 tracks of an IBM 2316 Disk Pack or equivalent 3336 or 3348 Disk
Pack Space. The sizes of some files are specified by the customer and
may be smaller than the standard values. The use of tapes or cards for
backup files can further reduce requirements.
An APG/7 application program including only MSP/7 routines and not
using the APG/7 language, the IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module, the
IBM 3340 Disk Storage Module, an IBM 2790 Data Communication
System, the BSCA support, or the Sequential Access Method requires a
minimum System/7 configuration of 4K words of storage (an IBM 5010
Processor Module mdl A4 or B4) and an IBM 5028 Operator Station.
Normally, at least a mdl A6 or.86 (6K words) is required if the APG/7
language is used. If other programs are included, such as AML/7 or
PCP/7, the appropriate amount of storage must be added to the
requirement.
The System/7 Processor mdls E16-E64 (16K words to 64K words) are
supported.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The portions of APG/7 that execute on the IBM S/360 or S/370 are
written in macro assembler language. APG /7 operates under Release
26 and Release 27 of the Disk Operating System (DOS), and under
Release 29 (DOS/VS), using the SAM and DAM access methods.
When o'perating under the Operating System (OS), access methods
used are QSAM, BSAM, and BDAM. APG /7 also operates under
OS/VS1, and OS/VS2, in Real or Virtual Mode.
When using the IBM System/7 BSCA feature to communicate to a
remote computing system, the remote system must use Teleprocessing
access methods as follows:
For IBM S/370:
- DOS, DOS /VS - BTAM
- OS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2 - BTAM or TCAM
- DOS/VS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2 - VTAM
Refer to System/7 Facilities II Macro Library/Relocatable for System/7
specifications.
For IBM System/3:
- System/3 MLMP
For IBM System/7:
MSP /7 Communications Access Method
The IBM System/7 subroutines are written in· the System/7 macro
assembler language. The Modular Systems Program (MSP/7), ASM/7
and LlNK/7 are used in support of APG/7.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
General Information Manual (GH20-1162).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- ----:: - - :§"f§: ISG
PP 5J35-RC2.16
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/VTAM R3 (cont'd)
Decrypt Features
September 30, 1981
OS/VS1 Release 7
SCP
BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/
Decrypt Features
September 30, 1981
OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.7
SCP
BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/
Decrypt Features
September 30, 1981
OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.8
SCP
BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/
Decrypt Features
September 30,1981
December 31, 1980
September 30, 1981
September 301981
(1) End of currency for ACF/VTAM Release 1 on DOS/VS Release 34
is being extended from December 31, 1980 to March 31; 1981.
ACF/VTAM Release 2
The VSE System
SCP
BASE and MSNF Feature
December 31, 1982
December 31, 1982
OS/VS1 Release 6.7
SCP
BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/
Decrypt Features
December 31, 1980
OS /VS 1 Release 7
SCP
BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/
Decrypt Features
December 31, 1982
December 31, 1982
December 31, 1982
OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.8
SCP
December 31, 1982
'BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/
Decrypt Features
December 31, 1982
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Introduction to Advanced Communications Function (GC30-3033) ...
Advanced Communications Function for VT AM (ACF /VT AM) General
Information: Introduction (GC27-0462) ... ACF /VT AM Program
Summary (GC27-0457).
ACF /VT AM Licensed Program Specification will be available at
program product availability.
ACF/VTAM R3 TERMINAL SUPPORT CHARTt
Start/Stop Terminals (Note 1 ]
.
2740-1
*2741
3101, as CPT-TWX (M33/35)
3232-51 as CPT-TWX (MdI33/35)
6733 as CPT-TWX (M33/35)
*CPT-lWX (M33/35)
* WT Telegraph
BSC Terminals
* 3271-1, -2 rNote 21
* 3274-1C,-2'C,-31C",-51C,(3271-1, -2) [Notes 2 and 4]
*3275-1, -2 [Note 21
* 3276-1, -2, -3, -4 (~271-1, -2) (Notes 2 and 4]
* 3780 [Notes 2 and 81
* 5275 [3275-1. -2) [Note 2l
*5937 (3271-1, -2) [Note 2
* 8100/DPPX (3276-1, -2, - , -4) [Note 2]
SDLC Terminals
* 3232-1
*3271-11, -12 [Note 21
* 3274-1C,-21 C,-31 C,-S1C (3791) [Notes 2 and 4]
* 3275-11, -12 [Note 21
*3276-1, -2, -3, -4 (37~1) rNote 5]
*3276-11, -12, -13, -14 (3i91) [Note 4]
3601,3602
3614,3624 [Note 21
3631,3632[3601,3~02)
3661 [Note 3]
3684
3694
*3767-1, -2, -3
*3771-1, -2,-3
* 3773-1, -2, -3
3773-P1, -P2 -P3
*3774-1, -2
3774-P1, -P2
*3775-1
3775-P1
3776-1, -2, -3, -4
3777-1, -3, -4
3791 [Note 61
* 3791 (3730 [~ote 6]
3791/3760
4701-1,-2
5285/5288 (3770)
5520 (3791/3730)
5937 (3271) [Note 2]
6670
* 8100/DPPX (3791) [Note 6\
*8100/DPCX (3791) [Note 6
8775-11,-12 (3274) (Note 7
S/32 (3770)
S/34 (3770) (3791)
S/38 (3770)
Series/1
Local Terminals
*3272-1, -2
*3274-1A,-21A,-31A (3791), -1B,-21B (3272-1, -2).
-10,-210,-310 (3272-1, -2)
* 3791 } Note 61
* 3791 3730 [~ote 6 ]
3791/3760
4331 Display/Printer Adapter (3272- 2)
4331 Loop Adapter (3274-1 A)
t
All of the above terminals have both single and multisystem
support. The terminal type in parentheses designates the
programming support provided by ACF/VTAM R3, e.g., S/32
(3770) means the S/32 is supported as a 3770.
*
Also supported by TSO /VTAM
Note 1: The Start/Stop Terminals shown are supported only via the
Network Terminal Option (NTO) program product.
Note 2: Nonswitched connection only.
Note 3: Switched connection only.
Note 4: Buffer sizes of 960, 1920, 2560 and 3440 are supported.
Note 5: With the SDlC/BSC switch feature set to SDlC.
Note 6: TSO support applies only with 3270 Data Stream compatibility.
Note 7: For OS/VS1, ACF/VTAM Release 3 supports the IBM 8775
with Downstream loadable Functions. ACF/VTAM Release 3
on VSE and OS/VS2 (MVS) for the IBM 8775 is for base
function only.
Note 8: Supported only via tho Network Terminal Option Release 2
(NTO) program product.
MVS INTEGRITY
IBM will accept APARs do scribing any situation where the installation
of ACF /VTAM R3 causes an exposure to the system integrity of
OS/VS2 (MVS).
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- --------====';'=
- --- ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 5735-RC3.1
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION FOR TCAM
(ACF/TCAM) VERSION 2 RELEASE 1
OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 MVS (5735 - RC3)
PURPOSE
Advanced Communications Function for TCAM Version 2 .Release 1 is a
program product for users of OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 (MVS) that can
provide additional capabilities for improved installability and usability,
. problem determination, network operation and data communications in
. a network with a single S/370 or with multiple S/370s.
To support multiple S/370 networks, a user must install the
ACF /TCAM V2 Multisystem Networking Facility feature.
HIGHLIGHTS OF ACF/TCAM V2 R1
Problem determination and network operation... Includes additional
functions that can assist in optimizing management and control of a
user's data communication installation.
Enhanced SDLC data link test.
SNA terminal connectivity test.
Intensive mode recording of SDLC data link errors.
Dynamic display Qf ACF/NCP/VS storage.
Dynamic reconfiguration of nonswitched SNA-SDLC devices under
ACF/NCP/VS Release 2.
'Support for the Network Communications Control Facility (NCCF)
program product and its related NetWork Problem Determination
Application program product.
Enh!l~c;:ed datac?mmunicat!ons capabilities... Includes improved
fle)ublhty for session operation, data security and enhanced device
support.
Negotiable session initialization parameters.
Support of the Programmed Cryptographic Facility program product
(5740-XY5).
Support of channel-attached 3790 and 3270 systems.
Support of the channel-attached 3270 systems (SNA only) and
3790 systems (configuration support #9165 and #9169 only) in a
multiple processor network, using the Multisystems Networking
Facility feature.
Support of the 3790 Communication System inbound message
traffic pacing function. (Also supports 8100 and 3730 systems).
ACF /TCAM V2 R1 provides service programs and customer tailorable
facilities that enhance the installability and usability of ACF /TCAM in
the following areas:
System startup and restart.
Session establishment and routing control.
Statistics gathering.
Exception and error control.
Operator control.
Message retrieval.
Message routing.
In addition, the Multisystem Networking Facility feature has been
enhanced by providing customer aids for implementing the following:
Installation and management of ACF /TCAM host to host data
flows in large networks with mUltiple application types, such as:
-
Interactive applications.
Message routing.
Data collection.
Data distribution.
Extended device support for ACF /TCAM host to host networking.
Automatic recovery of ACF/TCAM host to host message traffic.
Other usability enhancements.
SUMMARY AND ADVANTAGES OF ACF/TCAM V2 R1
Problem Determination and Network Operation Functions
Enhanced data link test offers the capability to dedicate one station
on an SDLC to testing while allowing the remaining stations on that
link to remain active. When a station comprises a cluster control
unit and its attached devices, the control unit is dedicated to the
tost; its attached devices are deactivated.
SNA terminal connectivity test provides the capability of initiating
an echo test from the terminal end of a session to determine that
an SNA terminal and its connection to ACF /TCAM V2 are
functioning correctly. The test does not interlere with other
stations on the link, or with other devices on the same control unit.
Intensive mode error recording of SDLC data link errors allows a
network operator to dynamically invoke and terminate recording of
information about temporary errors that may be occurring on an
SDLC data link. This capability supplements existing support that
records permanent error information and permits a user to collect
additional information on SDLC data link errors. This detailed
information could preclude the need for specific testing in order to
recreate an error situation.
Dynamic display of ACF/NCP/VS storage allows the network
operator to display any contiguous 256 bytes without disrupting
normal ACF/NCP/VS operation. This display capability, provided
in hexadecimal representation, can be useful in dynamically
evaluating network problem situations.
Dynamic reconfiguration of nonswitched SNA-SDLC devices under
ACF/NCP/VS R2 allows the user to selectively add or delete
supported nonswitched SNA-SDLC devices, without disrupting
other network functions. This capability supplements the
ACF/NCP/VS R2 generation process, and supports temporary
configuration in a non-disruptive fashion, until a permanent
network control generation can be done.
In support of· the Network Communications Control Facility
program, ACF/TCAM V2 R1 provides an interface to support the
problem determination and operation facilities offered by this
program product.
Additional Data Communications Capabilities
Negotiable session initialization parameters allow a more flexible
session initialization process. During session initialization, two
user-written application programs or message handlers can
dynamically exchange certain session parameters to establish
and/ or modify transmission control and integrity of session data.
With this capability, it may be possible for a user to. simplify the
predefined installation of intercommunicating application programs.
ACF /TCAM support of the Programmed Cryptographic Facility
offers the user transmission security of data.
Support of enhanced 3705-11 (mdls J, K, & L) permits channel
attachment and/or SDLC data link attachment of the enhanced
3705-11 in an ACF/TCAM V2 R1 network with ACF/NCP/VS
Release 2.
Support of channel-attached 3270 and 3790 systems permits
these systems to be included in the single system SNA· environment supported by ACF/TCAM V2 R1.
Channel-attached SNA 3270 system and 3790 system networking
permits the channel,:"attached 3270 systems (SNA only) and 3790
systems (configuration support #9165 and #9169 only) supported
by ACF/TCAM V2 R1 to participate in multiple system networking.
3790 inbound paCing is supported as a user-selectable session
establishment function under ACF/TCAM V1 and V2 R1 with 3790
support. ACF/TCAM V2 R1 also supports 8100 and 3730
systems.
Enhanced Installability and Usability Capabilities: The following
enhancements to ACF/TCAM V2 R1 consist of macros, system service
programs, and message handler facilities that a customer can tailor to
meet unique system configurations. Model message control programs
are provided to aid the customer in implementing these new capabilities
and minimize his coding requirements.
Enhancements to the Base ACF/TCAM V2 R1 Program Product
An initiator program... Functions as a master task for a customer's
message control program. The initiator provides for automatic
activation, monitoring and selective restart of the message control
program and associated IBM or user supplied service programs.
The initiator allows non-failed tasks in the MCP region to continue
running when another task in the region fails. The initiator will.
optionally restart the failed task.
.
."
A message generation facility for building variable content start-up'
and restart messages.
'
Enhanced message handler facilities to provide ease of use arid
flexibility in:
. ' ,
- ACF /TCAM session establishment.
- Routing control.
- Security checking.
- Logon/logoff message handling.
- Error handling.
A system accounting facility that enables an installation to gather
system utilization data for financial accounting and system control.
Data such as line utilization, application program logons, number of
messages processed by each terminal, etc., can be captured for
either on-line or deferred processing.
Enhanced exception and error control facilities are. provided in the
form of macro instructions that the installation can use to achieve a
high degree of automation in exception handling procedures. To
end users and operations people, these facilities· can provide
awareness of exception conditions; advise the operator of
------- ----:: - -::E,;"E: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 5735-RC3.2
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 (cont'd)
automatic actions taken and / or generate messages indicating
required action and deliver the messages to the point where the
action needs to be taken.
Enhancements to operator control ....
- A command for transferring, copying and purging unsent queued
messages.
- A facility for adding user written commands.
- An on-line operator's guide that displays available commands
and command format details.
- Additional commands to facilitate large system management.
A message retrieval system service program allows disk queued
messages to be retrieved by command from specially designated
stations. Retrieved messages may be sent to any station(s) and / or
tape. This facility may be used in support of a message routing
application, or to aid in investigation and analysis of user difficulties. The program can locate sent and unsent messages by
specification of. sending or receiving station, time of entry,
sequence numbers or range of sequence numbers.
A message queue system service program that at the time of
system closedown can search all, or selected, queues for unprocessed or unsent messages and place those messages on tape for
introduction into a changed or altered system after a cold start.
This facility allows the installation to redefine the network configuration and perform a cold restart without message loss and without
having to wait for the system to drain. The latter could be difficult
if traffic has been queued after hours to terminals that have been
turned off for the night.
- A single set of input and output sequence numbers can be
defined and assigned to messages received from and sent to
each terminal. Messages may be retrieved by input and output
sequence numbers, thereby facilitating error recovery and
problem determination.
Data Collection
- Input from a terminal to an application in a cross-domain host
can be edited and accepted for processing by the terminal's host,
even if the application host has not been brought up.
- Using host to host data flows, message$ enter the terminal's
host immediately, and are delivered to the application host at the
system's convenience -- as determined by the priority and
routing parameters specified by the customer.
Data Distribution
- Output for a terminal can be accepted for delivery by the
terminal's host node even if the terminal is not up.
- Data may be moved in stages to other host(s) closer to the
destination terminal, or directly from the source host to the
destination host. The staging of data can be controlled by the
system operator, contributing to a more manageable and and
efficient flow of data through the network.
In addition, the macros, system service programs and message handler
facilities of the Multisystem Networking Facility feature provide the
customer with the following capabilities:
- Host-to-Host networking support for:
Non-SNA Channel attached devices.
Enhancements to the ACF/TCAM V2 R1 Multisystem Networking
Facility Feature: The enhancements to the networking feature of
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 are oriented toward support of large networks with
multiple application types. Two important elements of the enhanced
support are:
Host to host data flows... In which message traffic flowing on the
network is always handled by both the originating host and the
destination host. Depending upon the particular application, and user
specified routing instructions, message traffic may also be handled by
intermediate host nodes, in addition to the originating and destination
hosts.
Host to host data flows can contribute to increased network usability by
providing capabilities such as:
- An efficient mechanism for session establishment and message
routing for interactive applications.
- A technique for re-routing of interactive data around failed
network elements that is transparent to the terminal operator.
- A facility for staging the movement of non-interactive data
across a network during periods of low interactive message
traffic.
- Added capabilities for system accounting and control in large
networks.
Transmission categories ... A customer may establish up to 16
transmission categories in his network. All messages in the same
category are treated similarly with respect to queuing medium, message
priority, sequence checking, error handling, data staging, routing
alternatives, etc.
Use of host-to-host data flows and transmission categories is
facilitated by enhanced message handler facilities and user specified
networking tables. Within the structure provided by these enhancements, the ACF/TCAM V2 R1 user has the following capabilities:
Interactive Applications: Enhanced session establishment
message routing capabilities for interactive applications:
- Transaction routing on a message by message basis.
- Extended interchanges between a terminal and
application.
and
a single
Transaction input to different application programs residing in different
hosts may be routed without requiring the terminal operator to establish
separate SNA sessions for each transaction.
A terminal may access an application in another host, even if the
terminal is not defined in the application's host.
I"put for a conversational application that is not currently active can be
~ejected, with an appropiate message sent to the terminal sending the
mput.
Non-Interactive Applications
Message Routing
- Terminals need be defined to only their owning host nodes in
order to gain access to the network via host-to-host message
routing flows. New destinations may be added to the network,
affecting only the owning host's ACF1TCAM terminal table.
EP attached devices.
NCP attached start/stop, BSC and and SNA-SDLC devices
(in addition to the networking support already provided to
these devices).
- In the event that the primary route to a destination host node is
unavailable, messages in a particular transmission category can
be re-routed through an intermediate host node(s) enroute to
the destination host.
- The balancing of message traffic between two host nodes by the
use of transmission categories.
- Automatic recovery of host-to-host message traffic.
- Automatic monitoring of the availability of cross-domain host
nodes, terminals, and applications.
- Through the use of an expanded ACF /TCAM addressing
structure, networking support can be extended to:
•
•
•
•
Non-SNA hosts.
SNA clusters as "hosts".
Non-SNA links.
Multiple SNA networks.
Model Message Control Programs: The base and networking
capabilities previously described are utilized in Model Message Control
Programs, which are shipped to the customer in machine readable
form. The programs are Class A supported, and may be used exactly as
is, or tailored to the user's installation requirements. The models
include message handlers for 2740 EP start/stop, 3270 EP BSC, 3270
local, and 3767 SDLC devices, including TSO support.
The models will be documented in the publication, ACF /TCAM
Instal/ation Sample Programs.
MIGRATION and PL.ANNING CONSIDERATIONS
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 with ACF/NCP!VS: When used only for local user
applications (that is, data communications between two application
programs or message handlers in the same S/370 or between a
channel-attached terminal and an application program or message
handler on the same 5/370) ACF/TCAM V2 R1 supports the following
items without the need for AC F / NC P/VS:
Support of channel-attached 3790 and 3270 systems.
Support of IBM 3790 inbound pacing.
Negotiable session initialization parameters,
Support for the Network Communications Control Facility program
product.
When used for remote network user applications, ACF/TCAM V2 R1
supports the following items in conjunction with NCP /VS 5.0,
ACF/NCP/VS R1, or with ACF/NCP/VS R2:
Dynamic display of ACF/NCP/VS storage.
SNA terminal connectivity test.
Multisystem networking featuro support of channol-attached 3790
and 3270 systems.
----.
- --- ---:: '::":::SV5: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permi.sion
PP 5736-RC3.3
Mar 83
. PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 (cont'd)
Support for the Programmed Cryptographic Facility' program
product.
Support for the NCCF program product.
Support for 3790 inbound pacing.
Negotiable session initialization parameters
application). •
Enhanced installability and usability capabilities.
•
Applicable only to ACP/NCP/VS R1 and R2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(appli~tion-to-
When used for remote network user applications, ACF/TCAM V2 R1
supports the fol/owing items only in conjunction with ACF/NCP/VS
Release 2:
Enhanced SOlC data link test.
Intensive mode recording of SOlC data link errors.
Notes:
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Single system support is provided through
ACF/NCP/VS or NCP/VS. Multiple Systems Support Is provided through ACF /NCP /VS.
Nonswitched support only •.
S/360 mdls 25, 30, 40, 50, 65, 65MP, 67 (65 Mode)
75, 85, 91, 195 with either BOS, BPS, ~OS, OS;
S/370 mdls 115-168MP with either BOS, BPS, DOS,
OS, DOS/VS, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2.
3771-1,-2,-3; 3773-1,-2,-3; 3773-P1,';'P2,-P3;
3774-1.-2; 3774-P1,-P2; 3775-P1; 3776-1,-2,-3,4: 3771-1,-3,-4.
.
In 3767 compatibility mode.
TSO support applies only to 3790 with 3270 data
stream compatibility.
Configuration support 119165 and 1/9169 only.
------- ----:: - -~'=f~ ISG
PP 5735·RC3.4
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 (cont'd)
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART
FOR GET/PUT INTERFACE
Single
System
MultiSingle
System
Support
ACF/TCAM
via
EP/VS
SIS Terminal
1030
1050
1060
2260
2265
2740-1,2
2741
2760
3101
3232-51 (as CPT-TWX)
6733
(as CPT-TWX 33/35)
AT&T 83B3 WU 115A line
control type
CPT-TWX (M33/35) line
control type
WT Telegraph
(CCITT2 & 5)
BSC Terminals
2715-2
2772
2780
2922
2972-8,-11
3271-1,-2
3275-1,-2
3670
3735
3741-2,-4
3747
5110
1131
1826
5/3
5/360-20
5/360 (3)
5/370 (3)
5/38 (3271)
5285/5288
(as a 3271-2)
x
x
x
system
Support(1)
ACF/TCAM
via NCPI
VSor
ACF/NCPI
VS
Single
System
Support
TSO
with ACFI
TCAMvla
EP/VS
Single
System
Multisystem
Support (1)
TSO with ACFI
TCAM via NCPI
VSor
ACF/NCP/VS
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x (8)
xIS)
x (8)
x (8)
x
x
x (2)
x (2)
x (2)
x (2)
x
x
x
x
x
X
X
X
X
(2)
x (2)
x (2)
x
x
x
x
X
x
x
x
x
x
x
x (2)
x (2)
x (2)
x
x
x
X
x
x
x
x
x
x
x (2)
x (2)
SOLC Terminals
x
x (2)
x (2)
x (2)
x
x
x (2)
x (2)
3232-1
3271-11,-12
3275-11,-12
3274-1 C,-21C,-31C,-51C
3276-11,-12,-13,-14
3601,3602
3614
3624
3694
3767-1,-2,-3
3770 (4)
3791/3730
3791/3760
4701
5285/5288(as a 3274-1C)
Series/1
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Communications Controllers
3705-1 Remote
3705-11 Remote
* Local Terminals
2260
2715-1
3272-1,-2
3274-1A,-1 B,-1 0,
-21A, 21 B,-21 0,
::-31 A,-31 0
3791
3791/3730
7770-3
x
TCAM
x
TSO
x
X
x
x
x
x (7)
x (7)
x
x
x (6)
x (6)
x
x (2)
x (2)
x (2)
x
x
x (5)
x (6)
x (6)
--- -
PP 5735-RC3.5
Do not reproduce without written permission
--- ---.-:: - - i'f5: ISG
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 (cont'd)
ACF/TCAM TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART FOR GET/PUT INTERFACE (Cant'd.)
COMPATIBILITY MODE (1)
Single
SYltem
Support
TSO
with ACFI
TCAMvla
EP!VS
Sing'.
System
Multllystem
Support (1)
TSO with ACF/
TCAM via NCPI
VSor
ACF/NCP!VS
x
x (4)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
x(3)
x (3)
x (3)
Single
System
Support
ACF/TCAM
via
EP!VS
SIS Terminals
3767-1,-2 (2740-1)
3767-1,-2(2740-2)
3767-1,-2 (2741)
CMCST (2741)
S/7 (2740-1)
5100 (2741)
5110 (2741)
Single
System
Multi. system
Support(1)
ACF/TCAM
via NCPI
VSor
ACF/NCPI
VS
x
x (3)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x (3)
x
x
BSC Terminals
3274-1 C,-21 C,-31 C,-51 C
(3271)
3276-1,-2,-3,-4
(3271)
3771-1,-2,-3 (2772)
3773-1,-2,-3,-P1
-P2,-P3 (2772)
3774-1,-2.-P1
-P2 (2772)
3775-1,-P1 (2772)
3776-1,-2
(2772/3780)
3777-1 (2772/3780)
3780 (2772)
5265 (3741-2, -4)
5274 (3275-1,-2)
5285/5288 (3770)
5937 (3271-1,-2)
8130 (3271)
8130 (3780)
8140 (3271)
8140 (3780)
5/7 (S/3)
5/32 (5/3)
5/34 (5/3)
5/38 (5/3)
Series/1 (5/3)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x (3)
x
x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x (3)
x
x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
. x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
x (3)
x
x
x
x
x
SOLC Terminals
3232-1
3274-1C,-21C,-31C,-51C
(3791)
3276-1 , - 2, -3,-4
(3791)
3276-11,-12,-13,-14
(3791)
3770}3767)
5285 5288}3770)
5520 (3791 3730)
8130 (3791)
8140 (3791)
5/32 (3770)
5/34 (3770)
5/34 (3791)
5/38 (3770)
x (5)
x (6)
x (5)
x
x
x
x (6)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
The terminal type in parenthesis designates the
programming support provided by ACF /TCAM, e.g.,
5/7 (2740-1) means the 5/7 is supported as a
2740-1.
(2)
Single System Support is provided through
ACF/NCP/VS or NCP/VS. Multiple System Support
is provided through ACF/NCP/VS.
Nonswitched support only.
(4)
Switched support only.
(5)
Supported as an interactive 3767 - applies to
3777-1,-2,-3; 3773-1,-2,-3; 3774-1,-2; and
3775-1, -3 only.
(6)
Buffer size of 960, 2560, and 3440 also supported •
.If
x
x
(1)
(3)
x (7)
x
x (7)
·Local devices, except for SNA 3270 and 3790 systems, are not
supported by ACF /TCAM for cross-system communications with the
ACF /TCAM Multisystem Networking Facility .,. Unless such devices
communicate via host-to-host data flows.
Notes:
x(6)
x (6)
x
(7)
Applies to 3276 mdls 1, 2, 3, 4 with BSC/SOLC
SWitch set to SOLC mode.
ACF/TCAM V2 RECORD MODE TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART
BSC Termlnall
3271-1,-2 (2,4)
3274-1C,-21C,-31C,-61C (2,4)
3275-1,-2 (2,4)
3276-1,-2,-3,-4 (2,4)
6274 (3275-1,-2) (2,4)
6937 (3271-1,-2) (2,4)
8130 (3276) (2,4)
8140 (3276) (2,4)
--...-
--- ----
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
:: - -:s'=fs: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 (cont'd)
SOLe Terminals
3271-11,-12(2)
3274-1C,-21C,-31C,-51C (2)
3275-11,-12 (2)
3276-11,-12,-13,-14
3601,3602
3614 (2)
3624 (2)
3631 (2)
3632 (3601,3602) (2)
3651 (5)
3694
3767-1,-2,-3
3771-1,-2,-3
3773-1,-2,-3
3773- P1, - P2, - P3
3774-1,-2,-P1,-P2
3775-1
3775-P1
3776-1,-2,-3,-4
3777-1,-3,-4
3791
3791/3730
5285/5288 (3770)
5520 (3791 /3730)
5937 (3271) (3)
8130 (3791)
8140 (3191)
S/32 (3770)
S/34 (3770)
S/34 (3791)
Local Terminals
3272-1,-2
3274-1A,-1 8,-1 D,-21A,-21 8,-21 D,-31A,-31 0
3791 }1)
3791 3730 (1)
All the above terminals have both single and multisystem support.
(1)
PP 5735-RC3.6
Configuration Support #9165 and #9169 only.
(2)
Nonswitched connection only.
(3)
Switched connection only.
(4)
Connection only through NCP/VS or ACF/NCP/VS.
(5)
Applies to 3651 mdls A25, 825, A75, 875, C75 and 075, with
the appropriate SDLC communications features.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
-
-~--- ----
:: - - :§~§:
PP 5735-RC3.7
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
APVANCED COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION FOR TCAM
,
ACF/TCAM VERSION 2 RELEASE 2
5735 - RC3
Advanced Communications Function for TCAM Version 2 Release 2
adds support for record mode operations and associated device
products.
.
program product.
Support for 3790.inbound pacing.
Also supported between ACF /TCAM V2 and ACF /TCAM V1
or between ACF/TCAM V2 and ACF/VTAM V1 R1 systems.
••
Support provided in ACF /TCAM V2 R2 Record API.
HIGHLIGHTS OF ACF/TCAM V2 R2
Record API support... Provides a single telecommunications access
method interface to subsystems for ACF/TCAM V2 R2, and VTAM and
ACF/VTAM, and support for device products associated with record
mode operations.
Permits use of CICS, DSX, IMS, JES 2/3, and/or VSPC under
ACF/TCAM at execution time without change to the .existing
subsystem/service program.
.
Supports single-session inter-host subsystem communication ..
ACF/TCAM V2 R2 WITH ACF/NCP/VS: The following ACF/TCAM V2 R2
enhancements are supported in conjunction with ACF/NCP/VS
Release 1 or with ACF/NCP/VS Release 2:
Record API support. *
Single-session inter-host communication.
•
••
The following ACF /TCAM V2 enhancement is also supported from an
ACF/TCAM V2 host system when intercommunicating with an
ACF/TCAM Vl or ACF/VTAM R1 host system:
Channel-attached SNA 3270 system and 3790 system networking.
In the above configuration, the appropriate access method features for
multisystem networking must be installed.
ACF/TCAM V2 can co-exist with non-ACF/TCAM hosts and provide
the structure for network-wide services such as message routing, data
collection and data distribution. In addition, ACF /TCAM V2 enhanced
installability and usablilty functions can be used to interface two
separate networks that wish to communicate with one another.
**
Supported also by NCP /VS 5.0.
Requires the ACF/TCAM V2 R2 Multisystem Networking
Facility feature.
Communications Controller Support: ACF /TCAM Version 2 operates
with the following communications controllers, as supported by
NCP/VS 5.0, ACF/NCP/VS R1, and ACF/NCP/VS R2:
3705-1 Communications Controller.
3705-11 Communications Controller.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
To install and use ACF/TCAM V2, the customer must:
Design the single system network.
Order and install all required communications equipment.
Have prerequisite TCAM SCP for ACF /TCAM V2 installed.
Install ACF /TCAM V2.
Define the network to ACF/TCAM V2.
*
•
MIGRATION
Migrating from TCAM 10 or ACF/TCAM V1 to ACF/TCAM V2: The
following migration paths are available for the given levels of TCAM and
ACF/TCAM:
TCAM 10 will operate with the following levels of NCP/VS and
ACF/VS:
.
NCP/VS 5.0.
ACF/NCP/VS R1~
ACF/NCP/VS R2 (with appropriate TCAM 10 PTFs).
ACF/TCAM V1 will operate with the following levels of NCP/VS and
ACF/NCP/VS:
NCP/VS 5.0.
ACF/NCP/VS R1.
ACF/NCP/VS R2 (with appropriate ACF/TCAM V1 PTFs).
ACF /TCAM V2 R1 and R2 will operate with the following levels of
ACF/NCP/VS:
NCP/VS 5.0.
ACF/NCP/VS R1.
ACF/NCP/VS R2.
Install NCP/VS 5.0, ACF/NCP/VS R1, and/or ACF/NCP/VS R2
(unless all terminals defined to ACF /TCAM V2 are channelattached to the host processor or are EP /VS-defined).
Functions supported by TCAM 10 or ACF/TCAM V1 are also sup.ported
by ACF /TCAM V2 with the appropriate level of NCP /VS or
ACF/NCP/VS with the following exceptions:
Define the network to ACF/NCP/VS R1 and/or ACF/NCP/VS R2.
OS/VS2 SVS is not supported by ACF/TCAM V2, and consideration must be given to migrating a user's operating system support
before or at the same time as migrating to ACF/TCAM V2.
To install and use the ACF/TCAM V2 Multisystem Networking Facility
feature, the customer must:
Design the multisystem network.
Order and install any additional communications equipment (for
example, intersystem links between interconnected 3705 Communications Controllers).
Have prerequisite TCAM SCP for ACF /TCAM V2 installed.
Install ACF /TCAM V2.
Install ACF/NCP/VS R1 and/or ACF/NCP/VS R2.
Install the ACF/TCAM V2 Multisystem Networking Facility feature.
Define the multisystem network to AC F/TCAM V2 and to
ACF/NCP/VS R1 and/or ACF/NCP/VS R2 in each host system.
The enhancements to ACF/TCAM V2 R1 include an initiator task
that allows non-failed tasks in the MCP region to continue running
when another task in the region fails. The initiator will optionally
restart the failed task.
Both the MCP and TCAM operator control run as subtasks of the
initiator. These subtasks, along with other initiator subtasks, are
defined in a subtask table which contains information on each
subtask running under the control of the initiator. A default subtask
table, which may be changed by the user, is shipped with
ACF/TCAM V2 Rl.
The TCAM 10 or ACF/TCAM Vl user will need to do the following
in order to execute his MCP as an ACF/TCAM V2 system:
1)
Modify JCL to start the initiator rather than the MCP.
2)
Update the subtask table to include his MCP name, or
3)
Rename his MCP to the default name supplied in the subtask
table, or
OS/VS1 Release 6.7.
4)
Override the default name via JCL.
OS /VS2 (MVS) Release 3.8.
If the user chooses to code his own subtask table rather than use
the one supplied, he must code entries for his MCP and for the
TCAM operator control program.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 and V2 R2 require one of the following operating
systems at the specified level or subsequent levels unless otherwise
specified:
Multisystem Considerations: In a multiple host system environment,
the ACF/TCAM V2 enhancements are supported for each respective
ACF /TCAM V2 host system just as they are within a single host system
environment.
ACF/TCAM V2 supports the following items between ACF/TCAM V2
host systems, or betweon ACF/TCAM V2 and ACF/VTAM R2 host
systems:
Negotiable session initialization parameters.
Channel-attached SNA 3270 and 3790 systems.
Single-session inter-host subsystem communication .••
Support for the NCCF program product. *
Support for the Programmed Cryptographic Facility
In an ACF/TCAM V1 R1 multisystem networking environment,
when one host had two or more 3705s with ACF/NCP/VS,
cross-domain session traffic could be routed either through an
ACF/TCAM host transit node or directly through the 3705s without
host involvement. In ACF/TCAM V2, the host transit node
capability has been removed. Therefore, cross-domain session
traffic which does not use host to host data flows must be routed
directly through the 3705s. The new· 3705-11 high speed local
attachment feature for communication between 3705- lis offers an
attractive means of off-loading this function:
Migrating from TCS-ACF to ACF/TCAM V2 R1: All TCS-ACF
macros are supported by ACF ITCAM V2 R1. In addition, the functions
------- -----
PP 5735-RC3.8
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar83
:: - -~~§: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R2 (cont'd)
of the following TCS-ACF macros have been incorporated into
ACF ITCAM macros:
TCS-ACF
ACF/TCAM Macro/Operand
TCSROUTE
HOLDNEXT
NEXTMSG
TCSINTRO
FORWARD TTCIN =
HOLDSYNCHLD =
IEDRELS SYNCHLD =, BRANCH =,
INTRO NETMON =, MANUAL =,
NEWLINE =,NODEID =,
LOOPCNT =, LOOPQ =
OPTION USE =
PRIORITY PRISAVE =
SETSCAN SKIPFLD =
TERRSET MASK =
TOPTION
TCSPRIOR
SKIPFLD
MEROFF
Related IBM Programs: The following table summarizes ACF /TCAM
Version 2 relationships in a networking environment:
ACF/TCAM V2 R2
OSI
OS/
VS1
VS2
MVS
*
*
*
The physical device address (used on the copy function).
Machine and storage requirements will be provided in the Advanced
Communications Function for TCAM (ACFITCAM) Version 2
Installation: Storage Estimates, Conversion Information, Sample
Programs, at the availability of ACF/TCAM V2 on each supported
operating system.
IBM will accept APARs describing any situation where the installation of
ACF/TCAM V2 causes an exposure to the system integrity of OS/VS2
MVS.
*
*
•
.
*
VSPC
*
SSS 5.0
*
DSX
*
*
*
*
*
*
3650 Host Sup't**
Device Suppt.
Communication
Network Mgt.
*
II S
*
NCCF-NPDA
Programmed
Cryptographic
Facility
**
***
*
JES2/NJE 3.0
TSO
*
*
·
JES2/RJE 4.1
JES3/SNA RJP
Interactive
Other Considerations: ACF/TCAM V2 requires the following features
in support of the Compare and Swap instructions: Conditional
Swapping (#1051) on the 3135; Advanced Control Program Support
(#1001) or Conditional Swapping (#1051) on the 3145.
.
Record
API
IMS!VS 1.1.5
*
Compatibility: Source code compatibility is retained for existing user
programs that utilize current levels of TCS-ACF. However, such
programs may require changes to take advantage of the additional
capabilities offered through ACF ITCAM V2 R1.
In a mixed ACF/TCAM - ACF/VTAM multisystem environment, the
ability of ACF/VTAM to access device characteristics of terminals
controlled by ACF /TCAM V1 or ACF /TCAM V2 is limited to those
indicators defined and maintained by these versions of ACF ITCAM. In
particular, the ability to determine the following SNA 3270 (3271-11,12; 3275-11, -12) device characteristics is not supported:
CICS!VS 1.4
DB/DC
*
Users of TCS levels prior to TCS-ACF Version 1 Release 2 modification
2 should note that the format and size of two controls fields, the FHP
and TCSOPTS option field, have been changed. Any absolute (rather
than symbolic) references in user code to their content or size may to be
changed.
Each OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS) virtual machine in which ACF/TCAM
V2 resides rquires a. dedicated sub-channel address to a 3705-1 or
3705-11 with ACF/NCP/VS.
GET/PUT
Interface·
Job Entry
To aid in migration, ACF ITCAM V2 R1 will also support the above
TCS-ACF macros in their TCS-ACF form. However, it is recommended
that customers use the new TCAM operands.
ACF/TCAM V2 will operate in a VM/370 virtual machine which
supports the required release of the operating system (OS/VS1,
OS/VS2 MVS). ACF/TCAM V2 operation in a VM/370 environment is
intended for use in program development and testing and other uses
where performance is not critical. Operation of ACF ITCAM V2 under
VM 1370 Release 5, even with the virtual machine assist feature, may
add significant additional processor overhead. If your customer has
specific throughput or terminal response requirements, you should plan
to benchmark under VM/370 to ensure that any proposed configuration
will meet the customer's performance needs.
ACF/TCAM
V2R1
*
·
*
***
***
Includes programs utilizing TGET, TPUT, READ, WRITE, and
native TCAM applications not written to Record API.
Host support for 3650 Programmable Store System.
Supported by ACF /VTAM V2 but independent of interface levels
shown.
COMPATIBILITY
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 and R2 retain compatibility with ACF/TCAM V1,
with the following exception:
ACF ITCAM V2 does not support OS/VS2 SVS.
Consideration for this difference is described above under the section
entitled "Migration and Planning Considerations".
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 and R2 offer compatibility with NCP/VS 5.0,
ACF/NCP/VS R1, and ACF/NCp/VS R2.
Compatibility of related IBM programs (see previous chart) written to
the Record Mode Application Program Interface (Record API) is retained
in ACF /TCAM V2 R2, except for programs written to the Programmed
Operator interface and user programs written directly to the Record API.
PROGRAM CURRENCY
ACF/TCAM V1 is currently supported under OS/VS1 release 6.0 and
6.7, OS/VS2 (SVS) release 1.7, OS/VS2 (MVS) release 3.7 and 3.8.
ACF/TCAM V2 R1 and V2 R2 is supported by OS/VS1 Release 6.7,
and OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.8, and subsequent releases unless
otherwise specified.
DOCUMENTATION:
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Publications currently available which describe ACF I NCP /VS V2 are
the following:
Advanced Communications Function for TCAM (ACF I TCAM) Version
2 General Information: Introduction, ACF/TCAM Version 2 Program
library and Introduction to Advanced Communications Function.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- ----=- -:i"f5: ISG
PP 5735-RC3.9
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION .FOR TCAM
(ACF/TCAM) VERSION 2 RELEASE 3
OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 MVS (6735:'RC3)
Advanced Communications function for TCAM Version 2' Release 3 is a'
program product for users of OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 (MVS) that offers
expanded network configurability, network management capability and
enhanced network recoverability.
.
To support multiple S/370 netWorks, •a user must install the
ACF /TCAM V2 R3 Multisystem Networking Facility feature. To take
advantage of some of the functions provided by the Multisystem
Networking Facility, a user may install the feature in large, multi-node
single system environments.'"
HIGHLIGHTS OF ACF/TCAM V2 R3
Parallel Links: Multiple active SDLC links between adjacent 3705s.
Transmission' Groups: Logical groupings of transmission links
'
between adjacent network nodes. •
'Multlple Routes: Mi.J1tiple routes for SNAand non-SNA message
,
transmission between nodes in a network. •
Automatic Session Re-initiation Option: Disrupted sessions can be
automatically re-initiated to take advantage of multiple' route
availability. •
Multiple Priority Levels: Three levels of transmission' priorities;
selectable by session. •
'.
Extended NCP I~terconnection: New capabilities' for interconnecting
3705s in single and multiple system networks.
Extended NCP Ownership.
.
Flow Control:
Enhanced management of network traffic demands!
. .
Reduced Cross- Domain Resource Definition, Requirements.
Session Outage Notification:
outages.
Enhanced awareness of session
Enhanced Recovery Capabilities. •
Route Verification and Error Notification Facilities. •
Route Availability Monitoring Option: Notification to a session
requestor that a previously unavailable route is now available. •
Transmission Group Option for Line Trace.
Dynamic NCP Oump Facility.
• , Support of the Network Terminal Option (NTO) program product.
possible to distribute the' traffic for different sessions to. different
routes, dividing the load among several routes.
The ordered sequence of routes, determined by the installation, defines
the set of alternate routes available for session traffic. In the event a
route becomes inoperative during a session, the application program or
terminal may request that the session be re-initiated. This causes
automatic selection of one of the alternate routes. The user can then
resynchronize the session data traffic and continue data communications and application processing via network routes that remain in
operation.
Automatic Session Re-Initiation Option:' A user-provided exit routine
gains control whenever a session is terminated. The routine may
specify that automatic session re-initiation is to be provided for a given
session. When this OPtion is requested, TCAM will immediately request
a new session with the same characteristics as the terminating session.
The exit routine could be designed so that, for example, sessions
terminating because of route failure will be automatically re-initiated.
When a route fails, sessions using the route are terminated, the exit
routine gains control for each session and new sessions are requested.
If other routes are operational, a new session can be started immediately on one of the other routes, and data transmission can resume as
soon.asthe new sessions are established.·
Multiple Priority Levels: Three levels or transmission priorities, selectable
by session... A user can specify one of three message traffic priorities
for a session between two application programs or between a terminal
and an application program. For example, this permits message traffic
for a time' dependent session to be transmitted through a network
ahead of other message traffic. That is, interactive processing may be
given top priority. by a user while other network traffic,. such as batch
processing, is assigned to a lower priority by the user.
Extended NCP Interconnection: New capabilities for interconnecting
3705s in single and multiple system networks... in ACF ITCAM V2 R2
a remote NCP could only be link-attached via a single link to a single
channel-attached 3705. In ACF /TCAM V2 R3 a 3705 may now be
link-attached via Transmission Groups to one or more channelattached and/or link attached 3705s.
These capabilities can significantly expand the installation's configurability options. Also, they can improve the overall efficiency of the
network and improve the ability of a host processor to take over a 3705
whose current owner (or a link to that owner) has failed or has· been
deactivated.
See Figure 1 for Interconnection flexibility .
Supports the CCITT X.21 switched interface when the 3705-11 is
attached to an X.21 Interface via the 3705-11.
.
•
Requires the Multisystem Networking Facility feature .
Note: The ACF/TCAM V2 R3 Base ·System provides 'the capability to
define one Transmission Group between adjacent network nodes. The
capability to define more than one Transmission' Group requires the
networking feature.
SUMMARY AND ADVANTAGES OF ACF/TCAM V2 R3 .
+~-----+
I HOST I
+------+
I
+------+
I
I
I
I,
I
NCP I
,
I
+------+
Transmission Groups: Logical groupings of transmission links between
adjacent network nodes .... A user may define up to eight Transmission
Groups, each with one or more, SOLC links between adjacent 3705s
with ACF/NCP/VS R3. A Transmission Group permits multiple SDLC
links to be defined as a single logical Iirik.· A single channel between a
host and its channel attached 3705 is also defined as a Transmission
Group. If a link or links in a Transmission Group fails, session traffic
will automatically be placed on remaining active links without loss of
data. This enhances the reliability and availability of service between
3705s. Multiple Transmission Groups and appropriate route selection
permit a user to specify message traffic for different applications to
flow through a network via pre-assigned Transmission Groups. For
example, interactive processing may be assigned one group and batch
procossing may be assigned a different group, each with its own
physical link support.
+------+
I
I
1/1 1/1
I
I
+------+
I
I
I
NCP I
I
I
+------+
I HOST I
+------+
I
+------+
Parallel Links: Multiple active SOLC links between adjacent 3705s ....
Parallel Links allows data traffic to flow simultaneously over two or
more SOLC links between adjacent 3705s. All such links can be
operational and in use at the same time, and each can be activated or
deactivated independently of the others. This capability can provide
increased message flow and improve the availability and reliability of
transmissions between 3705s.
.
Multlplo Routes: Multiple routes for SNA and non-SNA message'
transmission between nodes in a network... A user may define up to
eight routes for message transmission between two host systems or
between a host system and a 3705. When a session is initiated
between two application programs or' between' a terminal and an
application program, one of the routes is automatically selected to
transmit the session traffic. The user may. limit the selection to a
particular route or to one of an ordered sequence of routes. Thus, it Is
FIGURE
+------+
I HOST I
+------+
I
+------+
I~
I
NCP I
----I
I~
I
1
I
+------+
+------+
I
+-----1
I
I
NCP I
I
I
+------+
I
I
I
I
NCP 1
I
+------+
+------+
I HOST I
+------+
I
I
I
+------+
I~
+------+
I
I
1/1 1/1
I
I
I
I
I
I
1/1
I
NCP 1
I~
1
I
+---~--+
I'
1/1
I
I'
I
NCP I
+------+
I
I~
1
NCP 1
I~
I
1-----+
+-~----+
I
I
I
NCP. I
I
I
+------+
+---~--+
.
1
+------+
I
I
1/1
I
1/11/1
1 ' 1
I
~---~~------------~~~------+
I
I,
NCP
I
I
, +-------_._-----------------+
-.-.-._.~._I_._~~.---.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~.-.-.-.-.
--- -
--- ----
:: - -:S";,§:
PP 5735-RC3.10
Do not reproduce without written permlnlon
Mar 83
ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R3 (cont'd)
+------+
+------+
+------+
+------+
I
I
I HOST I
I HOST I
+------+
+------+
I NCP 1-+
/1 NCP I
+1---1-+ I
/
+/-----+
I
I
1/1/
/
I
1/1 1/1/1 /1/
1/1
I
/1
1/
I
+--1/--+/1
+------+
I NCP I +-------1 NCP I
+------+
+------+
+--------+
---I HOST 1--I . +--------+ I
I
I
+----+
+----+
I NCPI'-7
+----+
I NCPI
---+----+
I
I
1/1
I
1/1
I
+-~--+
+----+
. +----+
+----+
II Ncpl'-7-1
I~_I
Ncpl
I
Extended NCP Ownership: As many as eight host systems can share the .
ownership of a 3705 that is channel-attached • and/or link-attached to
another 3705{s). Each of the owning host systems is notified in the
event the 3705 becomes inoperative. This permits re-instatement of a
failed or deactivated 3705 via anyone of the host systems that shares
in its ownership.
•
The channel attachments cannot exceed the number of channels
supported by the 3705-1 or the 3705-11 communications controllers.
Flow Control: Enhanced management of the network traffic demands •••
Via SNA protocols, the flow of message traffic is dynamically regulated
between a host system and a 3705 and between two host systems.
Continuous feedback is exchanged between network resources in order
to regulate network traffic and reduce the possibility of network
congestion.
Reduced Cross-domain Resource Definition Requirements: An enhancement that is available for both SNA terminal or application definitions ...
A SNA terminal in one domain can request a session with an application
program in a different domain without prior definition of the terminal
within the application program's host. Also, an application in one
domain can request a session with an application program or SNA
terminal in a different domain without prior definition of the requesting
application within the cross-domain application program's or crossdomain terminal's host.
This enhancement is designed to reduce the need for user-specified
cross-domain resource definitions in a multisystem environment and
also to reduce the storage required to support such definitions. It
permits the addition of an application program or SNA terminal to one
host system without the need to re-define other host systems with
which the resource may want to enter into a SNA session.
Session Outage Notification: If the route supporting a session becomes
inoperative, the session ends are made aware of the outage. Session
reinitiation may be requested as described under" Multiple Routes".
Enhanced Recovery Capabilities:
Enhanced restart or host-to-terminal control sessions: In
recovering from a host failure situation, a host system can recover
its control session for a 3271-11··, 3271-12··, 3274-10*,
3275-11··, 3275-12··, 3684, 3770 MLU, S/32. S/34 or S/38
without disruption of existing sessions between the device and
application programs on other host systems~ This permits user
applications that are not affected by such a failure to continue'
processing during recovery of the control session. This capability is
included in the base ACF/TCAM V2 R3 system.
•
This product must be 8t an appropriate EC level for this
function.
••
Support for these devices is provided by ACF/NCP/VS R3•
Enhanced takeover of a 3705: In the event a host system fails or
otherwise gives up control of a 3705, any host system that is
sharing ownership of the same 3705 will have its network operator
notified about the lost host. Any of the notified host systems can
take over control of the devices mentioned above without ~isrupt
ing their existing cross-domain sessions with application programs.
It Is no longer necessary to deactivate corresponding cross-domain
resource definitions before acquiring resources attached to the
3705 that were controlled by the lost host system.
•. Enhanced multiple host system re-synchronization: In recovering
from a failure situation, two host systems can re-synchronize their
control session without disruption of existing cross-domain
sessions between two application programs, or between II terminal
~nd an application program. This permits user applications that are
~'Pt affected by such a failure event to continue operations during
re-instatement of the host system's cross-domain control session.
Route Verification and Error Notification Facilities: Via the DISPLAY
command, a network operator can determine if a message route
originating in his host is operative or inoperative. This permits a
network operator to verify the availability of network routes and to take
corrective action for routes that may have become inoperative. It also
permits a network operator to verify that a route has been returned to
service following a failure or deactivation. During the verification,
appropriate resource owners are notified when an inactive or failed
resource is encountered on a route.
In addition, if during network operation a route fails, an awareness
message is issued at the host end point(s) identifying the inoperative
route to the network operator. New display commands have been
added which permit a network operator to take appropriate action to
minimize the affects of an unusable message route on network
applications.
Route Avail.bUlty Monitoring Option: A Ller-provided exit routine gains
control whenever a session initiation is attempted. The routine may
specify that route availability monitoring is to be provided for a given
session.
When a session initiation is attempted but there is no route available,
the' session attempt is rejected and the requestor is notified of the
failure.· It is the responsibility of the requestor to retry the session
request later. requesting the same or a different route. When route
availability monitoring is in effect for a session, however, the failure of
the initiation attempt is remembered by TCAM and the requestor is
notified of the availability of the route when it becomes available.
Transmlnlon Group Option for Line Trace: Extends the existing SOLC line
trace capabilities to Transmission Groups. Via the network operator
MODIFY command, the message traffic over a Transmission Group
between two 3705s can be traced as if it were a single SOLC link.
Dynamic NCP Dump Facility: A network operator can invoke a dump of
NCP storage from a channel-attached or SOLC-attached 3705. Since
NCP continues. to operate durin~ the dump process, the dump will
represent NCP status over a period of time. The dump contents are
recorded and printed via the facilities of the appropriate System
Support Programs (SSP) for NCP, and can be useful in dynamically
evaluating network problem situations.
Note: ACF /TCAM V2 R3 provides Multiple Active Routes and Session
Outage Notification support to non-SNA. non-EP devices. EP device
networking sUPPQrt continues as in ACF ITCAM V2 R2.
In addition to the existing TCAM support for non-SNA devices,
ACF /TCAM V2 R3 supports the following devices as virtual SNA
devices through its support of the Network Terminal Option (NTO)
program product.
2740 mdl 1 Communications Terminal, switched and nonswitched.
2741 Communications Terminal, switched and nonswitched.
Western Union Teletypewriter Exchange Service (TWX) M33/35,
switched and nonswitched.
World Trade Teletypewriter Terminal (WTTY), nonswitched only.
The support is provided for users of the OCB application interface and
the TCAM subsystem interface. These devices can participate in a
multiple system as well as a single system environment.
In addition to the existing support for non-SNA devices, TSO /TCAM
supports the 2741 and TWX M33/35 via the NTO program product.
ACF /TCAM Version 2 Release 3 also supports the following CCITT
X.21 switched function when attached to an X.21 Interface via the
3705-11:
-
Address calling.
Auto Answer.
Call progress signal.
Direct call.
Closed User Groups.
Abbreviated Address Calling.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
To inltalland use ACF/TCAM V2 R3, the customer must:
Design the single system network.
Order and install all required communications
equipment
Have prerequisite TCAM SCP for ACF /TCAM V2 R3
installed.
Install ACF /TCAM V2 R3.
Define the network to ACF/TCAM V2 R3.
Install NCP/VS 6.0, ACF/NCP/VS R1, ACF/NCP/VS R2,
or ACF /NCP /VS R3 (unless all terminals defined to
ACF /TCAM V2 R3 are channel-attached to the host
processor or are EP /VS - defined). .~
Define the network to NCP/VS 5.0, ACF/NCP/VS R1,
ACF/NCP/VS R2 or ACF/NCP/VS R3.
To install and use the ACF /TCAM V2 R3 Multisystem Networking
Facility feature, the customer must:
------- ----:: - - :E'fE: ISG
PP 5735-RC3.11
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R3 (cont'd)
Design the single or multisystem network.
Order and install any additional communications
equipment (for example, intersystem links between
interconnected 3705 Communications Controllers).
refer to the ACF ITCAM V2' Installation and Migration Guide available
at first customer shipment.
MIGRATION AND PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
Install ACF /TCAM V2 R3.
ACFITCAM V2 R3· with NCP/VS and ACF/NCP/VS: With the
exception of the dynamic NCP Dump facility and Reduced Cross
Domain Network Definition Requirements, the enhanced functions of
ACF /TCAM V2 R3 are supported only in conjunction· with
ACF/NCP/VS R3.
Install ACF/NCP/VS R1, ACF/NCP/VS R2, or
ACF/NCP/VS R3.
The NCP Dump facility will operate with NCP /VS 5.0 (with appropriate
PTFs), ACF/NCP VS R1. R2 or R3.
Install the ACF /TCAM V2 R3 Multisystem Networking
Facility feature.
Reduced Cross Domain Network Definition Requirements will operate
with ACF/NCP/VS R1, R2 or R3.
Define the network to ACF /TCAM V2 R3 and to
ACF/NCP/VS R1, ACF/NCP/VS R2, or ACF/NCP/VS R3 in
each host system.
ACF/TCAM V2 R3 with EP/VS: ACF/TCAM R3 will continue to
support the latest current level of the Emulator Program (EP /VS) and
Partitioned Emulator Program (PEP). See the Terminal Support chart for
specific device support.
Have prerequisite TCAM SCP for ACF /TCAM V2 R3
installed.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Hardware Configurations: ACF /TCAM V2 R3 operates with the following
communication controllers:
3705-1 Communications Controller.
Migrating from ACF/TCAM R1, ACF/TCAM V2 R1, or ACF/TCAM
V2R2 to ACF/TCAM V2 R3
The following. support alternatives are provided to aid in migration
planning:
NCP/VS
3705-11 Communications Controller.
Hardware Features: ACF /TCAM V2 requires the following features. in
support of the Compare and Swap instruction: Conditional. Swapping
(#1051) on the 3135; Advanced Control Program Support (#1001) or
Conditional Swapping (#1051) on the 3145.
System Configuration: ACF/TCAM V2 R3 runs in a virtual storage
environment in any operating system configuration that supports the
OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 MVS operating system as specified in the
"Programming Requirements" section below.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R3 needs one of the following operating systems:
OS/VS1 Releaso 7.0, or OS/VS2 MVS Release 3.8, and all subsequent
releases and modifications unless otherwise stated.
Software Configuration: ACF /TCAM V2 R3 requires one of the following
operating systems at the specified level, or subsequent levels, unless
otherwise specified:
OS !VS 1 Release 7.0.
OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.8.
5.0
ACF/NCP/VS •••••••••••-•••
R1
R2.1
R2
R3
(1)
TCAM 10
ACF/TCAM
ACF/TCAM
ACF/TCAM
ACF/TCAM
•
(1 )
X
V1
V2 R1
V2 R2
V2 R3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
No
X·
X·
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
No
X
X
X
X
Requires applicable access method PTFs..
Requires EREP PTFs for LPDA level maintenance data records.
Note: The above matrix assumes that customers will be at current access
method maintenance levels when migrating from one NCP release to
another.
.
The following significant differences between ACF /TCAM V2 and
ACF /TCAM V1 may require special planning. All other functions
supported by ACF/TCAM V1 are also supported by ACF/TCAM V2 Rl,
R2 and R3.
OS/VS2 (SVS) is not supported by ACF/TCAM V2, and consideration
must be given to migrating a user's operating system support before or
at the same time as migrating to ACF/TCAM V2.
.
ACF/TCAM V2 will operate in a VM/370 virtual machine which
supports the required release of the operating system (OS/VS1,
OS/VS2 MVS). VM/370 provides a means of supporting any
combination of TCAM and VTAM systems in the same processor each
running in its own virtual machine. This facility can be helpful when
changing TCAM releases, and when testing the ACF /TCAM Multisystem Networking Facility. Further, one VTAM and one TCAM system
can coexist in one virtual machine. Operation of ACF /TCAM V2 under
VM/370, even with the virtual machine assist feature, may add
additional processor overhead, which should bo considered in your
review of customer performance needs.
In an ACF /TCAM V1 multisystem networking environment, when one
host had two or more 3705s with ACF/NCP/VS, cross-domain session
traffic could be routed either through an ACF/TCAM host transit node
or directly through the 3705s without host involvement. In ACF /TCAM
V2, the host transit node capability has been removed. Therefore,
cross-domain session traffic which does not use host-to-host data
flows must be routed directly through the 3705s. The new 3705-11
high-speed local attachment feature for communication between
3705-lIs offers an attactive means of off-loading this function.
Ea~h OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS) virtual machine in which ACF/TCAM
V2 resides requires a dedicated sub-channel address to a 3705.
The ACF/TCAM V2 R3 enhancements are supported for each
respective ACF /TCAM V2 R3 host system.
Prerequisite SCP: Use of ACF /TCAM requires the concurrent
installation of prerequisite TCAM system control programming (SCP)
modules.
The ACF/TCAM V2 R3host system can coexist with ACF/TCAM
V2 ,R2, ACF/TCAM V2 Rl, ACF/TCAM V1, ACF/VTAME,
ACF/VTAM R3, ACF/VTAM R2, and/or ACF/VTAM Rl host
systems at the level of function supported by these host systems.
Other Considerations: In a mixed ACF/TCAM - ACF/VTAM
multisystem environment, the ability of ACF/VTAM to access device
characteristics or terminals controlled by ACF /TCAM V1 or
ACF /TCAM V2 is limited to those indicators defined and maintained by
these versions of ACF /TCAM. In particular, the ability to determine the
physical device address, used with the copy function of a 3271-11,
-12, is not supported.
3274 mdl 1A and 3274 mdl 1C/SNA Inbound Pacing ... Is supported
under ACF /TCAM V2 R2 and ACF /TCAM V2 R3. These products
must be at the appropriate EC level for this function.
COMPATIBILITY
See "Migration and Planning Considerations" section for important
compatibility exceptions.
Object code compatibility is retained in ACF /TCAM V2 R3 for related
IBM programs (see Related IBM program charts) written to the VTAM
Record Application Programs Interface (Record API). User programs
written directly to the VTAM Record API are not supported by the
ACF /TCAM V2 subsystem interface.
ACF /TCAM V2 R3 enhancements made in support of parallel links,
multiple routes, and extended NCP interconnection result in minor
operational differences from previous releases of TCAM. Users should
Multisystem Considerations: In a mUltiple host system environment:
PERFORMANCE and STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS
Machine and storage requirements will be provided in the Advanced.
Communications Function for TCAM (ACF/TCAM) Version 2
Installation: Sample Programs, at the availability of ACF/TCAM V2 R3
on each supported operating system.
The new functions provided by the ACF /TCAM V2 R3 Multisystem
Networking Facility feature may increase storage requirements and path
lengths over those in ACF/TCAM V2 Rl and R2. The actual performance impact (if any) to a customer will vary depending upon his,
particular hardware and network configuration.
DATA SECURITY, AUDITABILlTY, and CONTROL
Previously announced security functions such as support for the
Programmed Cryptographic Facility continue to be supported in
ACF /TCAM V2 R 3 . '
.
.
User management is responsible for the selection, adequacy, .and
implementation of these features and the appropriate application·· and
administration control.
---.----~
-----
-
.:..g~'f5:
PP 5736-RC3.12
Do not ,.produce without written permission
Mor83
ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R3 (cont'd)
RELATED IBM PROGRAMS
ACF/TCAM V2 R3 Terminal Support Summary
The following summarizes relationships:
ACF/TCAM V2 R3
OSI
VS1
OSI
VS2
MVS
· ···
··
·· ·
· ··
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
*
•
••
GETIPUT Subsystem
DB/DC
CICS/VS
JOB ENTRY
JES2/RJE 4.1
Interface*
Interface
·
•
IMS/VS 1.1.6
JES2/NJE 3.0
JES3/R3.0
Interactive
SSS6.0
·
·•
DSX
•
TSO
VSPC
liS
Device Suppt.
PSS Host
Support*·
Host Command
Facility
Communication
Network Mgt.
•
NCCF-NPDA
Programmed Cryptographic
Facility.
·
See
Note
···
·
·
·
·
·
See
Note
Includes programs rutilizing TGET, TPUT, READ, WRITE, and native
TCAM applications.
-
X
3272-1,2
X
X
X
3274-1A,21A,31A (3791)
X
X
3274-10,210,310 (32721
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3791 (1)
3791/3730 (1)
3791 (3270) (1)
3791/3730(3270)(1)
7770-3
Start/Stop
Terminals
DCBAPI
(2)
1030
X
1050
X
1060
X
ACF/NCP
NCPNS
Sub.ys.
Int'f'ce
(3)
X
X
TSO
EP
(2)
ACF/NCP
NCPNS
X
X
N
X
0
T
2260
X
2266
X
2740-1,2
X
X
p
-
2741
X
P
X
X
WU 116A
X
X
X
X
X
X
CPT-TWX (M33/35)
X
WT Telegraph
X
2760
Host Support for 3650 Programmable Store System.
3101
3232
PROGRAM CURRENCY
TSO
(3)
X
X
2260
2715-1
Note: Supported by ACF /TCAM V2 R3 but independent of
application program interface.
TeAM and ACF/TCAM levels are currently supported on each
operating system release as follows:
Subsystem
Interface
DCB
API
Local
Terminals
AT&T83B3
X
A
X
L
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XIS)
X
X(4)
I
X
X
X
X
X
X
C
A
B
L
TCAM Level 8 •
OS /VS2 (MVS) - 3.7
3767-1,2 (2740-1)
TCAM' Level 9 •
OS/VS1 - 6.0
OS /VS2 (MVS) - 3.7
3767-1.2 (2740-2)
X
X(5)
TCAM Level 10 •
OS/VS1 - 6.0, 6.7, 7.0
3767-1.-2 (2741)
X
OS/VS2 (SVS) - 1.7
OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.7,3.8
CMCST (2741)
X
S/7 (2740-1)
X
X
ACF/TCAMV1
OS/VS1 - 6.0, 6.7
OS/VS2 (SVS) - 1.7
OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.7, 3.8
6100(2741)
X
X
X
X
6110(2741)
X
X
X
X
6733 (M33/35)
X
X
X
X
ACF/TCAM V2 Rl,
R2
OS/VS1 - 6.7, 7.0
OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.8
• These releases will no longer be supported when currency terminates
for the associated operating system. Currency is as follows:
OS/VS1 6.0
QS/VS2 (SVS) 1.7
OS/VS2 (MVS) 3.7
12 months after availability of VS1 Release
6.7
December 1979
21 months after availability of OS/VS2
(MVS) Release 3.8
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Advancod Communications Function for TCAM (ACF/TCAM) Version
2 General Information Manual: Introduction (GC30-3057) ...
ACF ITCAM Version 2 Release 3 Program Summary (GC30-9626) •••
Introduction to Advanced Communications Function (GC30-3033).
Introduction to Advanced Communication Function for TCAM
Program Product Specifications will be available at ACF/TCAM V2 R3
availability•.
MVS INTEGRITY
IBM will accept APARa describing any situation where the installation of
ACF /TCAM V2 R3 causes an exposure to the· system integrity of
OS/VS2 (MVS).
E
X
X
X
X
------ ----:: - - :§~E: ISG
PP 5735-RC3.13
00 not reproduce without written permission
Mar83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R3 (cont'd)
BSC
Terminals
OCBAPI
EP
(2)
ACF/NCP
NCP/VS
Subsys.
Int'f'ee
TSO
EP
(2)
OCBAPI
SOlC
Terminals
ACF/NCP
NCP/VS
2715-2
X
X
3232-1
2772
X
X
3271-11.12
2780
X
X
2922
X
EP
(2)
"
3274-1 C.21 C,31 C.51 C
3275-11,12
ACF/NCP
NCP/VS
Subsys.
Int'f'ce
TSO
EP
(2)
-
X
X
-
X
N
X(5)
X(5)
N
X(5)
·0
X(5)
X(5)
0
X(5)
T
X(5)
X(5)
T
X(5)
X(5.8)
X(5,B)
X
X
X
X
A
2972-8,11
X(5)
X(5)
3271-1,2
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
3276-11,12,13,14
3275-1,2
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
3601
A
3276-1,2,3,4
X(5.8)
X
3670
X
3602
P
X
X
P
3735
X
X
3614
P
X(5)
X(5)
P
3741-2,4
X
X
3624
L
X(5)
X(5)
L
3747
X
X
3651
I
X(6)
I
5110
X
X
3694
X
X
1131
X
X
3767-1,2,3
C
X
X
C
1826
X
X
3771-1,2,3
A
X
X
A
5/3
X
X
3773-1,2.3,Pl,P2,P3
B
X
X
B
3774-1,2,P1,P2
L
X
X
L
3775-1.Pl
E
X
X
E
3274-1 C,2', C,31 C,51 C
(3271)
X(5)
3276-1,2,3,4 (3271)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
3771-1,2,3 (2772)
X
X
3773-1,2,3,Pl,P2,P3
(2772)
X
X
3774-1.2.P1,P2
(2772)
X
X
3775-1,Pl (2772)
X
X
3776-1,2 (2772/3780)
X
3777-1 (2772/3780)
X
3780 (2772)
X
X
5265 (3271-2.4)
X
X
5275 (3275-1,2)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(7)
X(5)
6670
X
X
Series/l
X
3631.3632
. (3601,3602)
X
X
3773-1,2,3 (3767)
X
X
X'
3774-1.2 (3767)
X
X
X
3775-1,3 (3767)
X
X
X
6520 (3791/3730)
X
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
5937 (3271-1.2)
XIS)
X(5)
X(5)
X
X
X(5)
X
X
5/32 (5/3)
X
X
5/34 (5/3)
X
X
5/38 (S/3)
X
X
X(5)
X
X(5)
X(5)
X
3771-1,2.3 (3767)
5285/5288(3271-2)
X(5)
X
X(5)
-
-
X(7)
X
X
-
Series/1 (S/3)
X
X
X
X(5)
5/38 (3271-2)
X
3791/3730 .
X
-
5/7 (5/3)
3791
X(5)
X
8100/DPPX (3271)
X
X
X
X(5)
6670 (2772)
X
X
X(5)
X
5285/5288 (3741)
3776-1.2.3,4
5285/5288 (3770)
X(5)
X
3777-1.3,4
5285/5288 (3274-1 C)
X(5)
ACF/NCP
NCP/VS
X(5)
5937 (3271)
X
X
X(5)
8100/DPPX (3791)
X
X
X(7)
8100/DPCX (3791)
X
X
X(7)
S/32 (3770)
X
X
X
S/34 (3767,3770,
3791)
X
X
X
X(5)
Notes
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Configuration support #9165 and #9169 only.
No multisystem support unless host to host data flows are
utilized.
,
ACF /TCAM V2 R2 and subsequent releases only.
Switched support only.
Nonswitched support only.
Applies to 3651 mdls A25, 825, A75, 875, C75, and 075.
TSO support applies to 3276 mdls 1, 2,3, and 4 with 8SC/SOLC,
switch set to SOLC mode.
.
Applies to 3276 mdls1, 2,3 and 4 with 8SC/SOLC switch setto
SOLC mode.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG
PP 5735-RC3.14
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION FOR TCAM
ACF/TCAM VERSION 2 RELEASE 4
5735-RC3
ACF /TCAM Version 2 Release 4 offers significant extensions and
enhancements to TCAM customers in a single and multiple networking
environment.
Advanced Communications Function for TCAM Version 2 Release 4 is a
program product for users of OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 (MVS) that offers
expanded network configurability, network management capability,
enhanced queue recoverability, and improved migration.
ACF /TCAM V2 requires the following features in sl!P'port of the
Compare and Swap Instruction: Conditional Swapping (#1051) on the
3135; Advanced Control Program Support (#1001) or Conditional
Swapping (#1051) on the 3145.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
ACF /TCAM V2 R4 requires one of the following operating systems at
the specified level, or subsequent levels, unless otherwise specified:
To support multiple S/370 networks, a user must install the
ACF/TCAM V2 R4 Multisystem Networking Facility feature. With
multiple TCAMs a user ma}' network in the same CPU as well as run
two or more copies of ACF ITCAM V2 R4.
HIGHLIGHTS OF ACF/TCAM V2 R4
Multiple TCAMs: Capability of running multiple copies of
ACF/TCAM V2 R4 concurrently in the same CPU. This function is
not supported on an MVS/XA system.
Reusable Queues Enhancement: Sequence of messages on a
reusable queue will be maintained after queue reorganization is
completed. Also most 045-2 ABEND conditions have been
eliminated.
Support Local Non-SNA 3270 Networking.
Model MCP Supports Remote SNA 3270 Controllers.
Support for 3274 Notify: Ability to sense power on/off status of
LUs attached to 3274.
Support for MVS/XA: The ability of ACF/TCAM to run on
hardware supported by MVS/XA.
Support for TAF (Terminal Access Facility) and HCF V2 (Host
Command Facility)
OS/VS17.0
MVS!370
MVS!XA
ACF/TCAM V2 will operate in a VM/370 virtual machine which
supports the required release of the operating system (OS/VS1,
OS/VS2 (MVS)). VM/370 provides a means of supporting any
combination of TCAM and VTAM systems in the same' CPU each
running in its own virtual machine. This facility can be helpful when
changing TCAM releases, and when testing the ACF /TCAM Multisystem Networking Facility. Further, one VTAM and one TCAM system
can coexist in .one virtual machine.
Prerequisite SCP: Use of ACF /TCAM requires the concurrent
installation of prerequisite TCAM System Control Programming (SCP)
modules.
Other Considerations: In a mixed ACF/TCAM - ACF/VTAM
multisystem environment, the ability of ACF/VTAM to access device
characteristics of terminals controlled by ACF /TCAM V1 or
ACF /TCAM V2 is limited to those indicators defined and maintained by
these versions of ACF /TCAM. In particular, the ability to determine the.
physical device address used with the copy function of a 3271-11, 12;
is not supported.
COMPATIBILITY
3270 SNA Local REQMS/RECFMS Support: New options to
retrieve messages.
See section on "Migration and Planning Considerations" for important:
compatibility exceptions.
Tote Removal.
Object code compatibility is retained in ACF /TCAM V2 R4 for related
IBM programs (see "Related IBM Programs" chart) written to the'
VTAM Record Application Program Interface (Record API). User'
programs written directly to the VTAM Record API are not supported'
by the ACF /TCAM V2 subsystem interface.
0
SUMMARY AND ADVANTAGES OF ACF/TCAM V2 R4
Multiple TCAM's: Multiple copies of ACF /TCAM V2 R4 may run
concurrently in the same CPU. This capability is only supported in
OS/VS2 MVS SP1.3.1. All copies of ACF/TCAM V2 R4 must be at the
same maintenance level. Only one TSO/TCAM can run in a CPU.
RELATED IBM PROGRAMS: The following summarizes ACF /TCAM :
Version 2 Release 4 relationships:
Reusable Queue Enhancements: The possibility of overlaying a message
during reusable queue reorganization has been greatly reduced. Also
during reuse, sequence of messages is retained.
Local Non-SNA 3270 Networking: Local non-SNA 3270 terminals owned
by ACF /TCAM may now participate in cross-domain sessions with
either another ACF/TCAM or an ACF/VTAM.
Model MCP Supports Remoto SNA 3270 Controllers: The Model MCPs
are enhanced to support the remote 3270 SNA devices. Two additional
SNA message handlers are included in the models. A message handler
which supports displays (LU 2) and a message handler which supports
printers (LU 1 and LU 3).
Retrieval Enhancements: New options have been provided to allow
retrieval of very old messages, messages that have a higher sequence
number than the current message number (rollover of sequence
number) and other capabilities.
New Subsystem Support: Support of the Terminal Access Facility (TAF)
feature of NCCF and Host Command Facility (HCF) V2.
Support for 3274 Notify: Support of the powered on/powered off feature
on the model 1A control unit or model 1C or 51 C control unit when
BSC/SDLC switch is in SDLe mode.
3270 SNA Local REQMS/REQFMS Support: Allows 3274 model 1A
maintonance statistics to be collected and transmitted to the host for
procossing by NPDA.
TOTE Removal: The Teleprocessing Online Test Executive (TOTE) is no
.Iongor supported.
OSiVS2 (MVS/SP Version 21: Support for expanded (3 byte) UCB in
OS/VS2 (MVS/SP V2).
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
;
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
A~ ITCAM V2 R4 oporates with the following communication
I
co~rollersas supported by NCP/VS 5.0, ACF/NCP Vl Rl, R2, R3 or
ACF/NCPV2:
•
3705f; I Communications Controller
3i-1I comm
. . . u:n.ications.Controller
37 -80 Communications Controller
5 Comm~nications Controllers
I.a
....
ACF/TCAM V2 R4
05/
VS1
05/
VS2
MVS
· ···
·
·• ··
·
· ··
*
GET/PUT Subsystem
Interface· Interface
DB/DC
*
*
*
· •
· ·•
·· ·
·
*
*
IMS!VS 1.1.6
Job Entry
..
JES3/R3.0
Interactive
TSO
liS
liPS
Device Suppt.
*
*
*
SSS 5.0
DSX
HTF
lOWS
Programmablo
Store
System
Host
Support ..
Communication
Network Mgt.
*
*
*
··
*
Host Command
Facility_···
*
NCCF-NPDA
*
TAF
Programmed Cryptographic
Facility
*
*
·
JES2/RJE 4.1
JES2/NJE 3.0
*
*
CICS!VS 1.4
See
Note
·
·
See
Note
Includes programs utilizing TGET, TPUT, READ, WRITE, and native
TCAM applications.
Host Support for 3650 Programmable Store System.
------- --------
PP 5735-RC3.15
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar83
.=.':: :§~§: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R4 (cant'd)
Host Command Facility (HCF) runs only on Get/Put interface and V2 runs
only on subsystem interface.
Note: Supported by ACF/TCAM V2 R3 but independent of application
program interface.
User management is responsible for the selection, adequacy, and
implementation of these features and for appropriate application and
administration control.
DOCUMENTATION
(available fom Mechanicsburg)
PROGRAM CURRENCY
TCAM and ACF/TCAM Levels are currently supported on each
operating system release as follows:
TCAM Level 10
OS/VS1 - 7.0*
OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.8*
ACF /TCAM Vl
OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.8*
ACF/TCAM V2 R2, R3
OS/VSl - 7.0**
OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.8**
*
Advanced Communications Function for TCAM (ACF/TCAM) Version
2 General Information Manual: Introduction (GC30-3057)
ACF /TCAM Version 2 Release 4 Program Summary (GC30-9526).
MVS INTEGRITY
IBM will accept APARs where the installation of ACF/TCAM V2 R4
introduces an exposure to the system integrity of OS/VS2 (MVS). This
program is intended to run authorized.
ACF /TCAM V2 R4 enhancements made in support of multiple
concurrent ACF /TCAMs, result in minor operational differences from
previous releases of TCAM. Users should refer to the ACF /TCAM V2
Installation and Sample Programs manual available at first customer
shipment.
Corrective service only
ACF/TCAM V2 R2 will remain current until October, 1982.
MIGRATION AND PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
ACF/TCAM V2 R4 with NCP/VS and ACF/NCP/VS: All functions that are
supported by ACF/TCAM V2 R2 and R3 are also supported by this
release.
RPQs ACCEPTED: No
ACF/TCAM V2 R4 Terminal Support Summary
ACF/TCAM V2 R4 with EP/VS: ACF/TCAM R4 will continue to support
the latest current level of the Emulator Program (EP /VS) and Partitioned Emulator Program (PEP). See the Terminal Support Chart for
specific device support.
DCB
API
Local Terminals
Subsys.
Int'fce. (3)
TSO
I
Migrating from ACF/TCAM Vl. ACF/TCAM V2 Rl, R2, R3 to ACF/TCAM
V2 R4: Migration plans can take advantage of the following support
2260
X
2715-1 (10)
X
alternatives:
3272-1,2
X
X
X
3274-1A (3791). 1B,l D
X
X
X
3791 (1)
X
X
3791 /3730 (1)
X
X
3791 (3270) (1)
X
X
X
3791/3730 (3270) (1)
X
X
X
7770-3
X
ACF/TCAM
V1
ACF/TCAM
V2 R1
ACF/TCAM
V2 R2
ACF/TCAM
V2 R3
ACF/TCAM
V2 R4
NCP/VS
5.0
ACF/NCP
Vl Rl
ACF/NCP
Vl R2,2.1
ACF/NCP
Vl R3
X
X
X*
X*
X
X
X
X
X
X
ACF/NCP
V2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DCBAPI
Start/Stop Terminals
* Requires applicable TCAM PTF's.
EP
(2)
1030
X
1050
X
1060 (10)
X
OS/VS2 (SVS) is not supported by ACF/TCAM V2, and consideration
must be given to migrating a user's operating system support before or
at the same time as migrating to ACF /TCAM V2.
2260
X
2265
X
2740-1
X
X
2740-2
X
X
2741
X
X
2760
X
In an ACF/TCAM V1 multisystem networking environment, when one
host had two or more 3705s with ACF/NCP/VS, cross-domain
session traffic could be routed either through an ACF /TCAM host
transit node or directly through the 3705s without host involvement. In
ACF /TCAM V2, the host transit node capability has been removed.
Therefore, cross-domain session traffic which does not use host to
host data flows must be routed directly through the 3705s. The new
3705-11 high-speed local attachment feature (see 278-95)for
communication between 3705-lIs offers an attractive means of
off-loading this function.
Multisystem Considerations: In a multiple host system environment:
The ACF /TCAM V2 R4 enhancements are supported for each
respective ACF/TCAM V2 R4 host system.
An ACF/TCAM V2 R4 host system can coexist with ACF/TCAM
V2 R2, ACF/TCAM V2 R3, ACF/TCAM Vl, ACF/VTAME,
ACF/VTAM V2, ACF/VTAM R3, ACF/VTAM R2, and/or
ACF/VTAM Rl host systems at the level of function supported by
these host systems.
X
ACF/NCP
NCP/VS
X
X
X
X(9)
X(9)
X
X
X(4)
X(4)
X
AT&T 8383
X
WU 115A
X
X
X(4)
X(4)
X(4,9)
X
X
X(5,9)
3101
X
X
X(4,9)
3767-1,2 (2740-1)
X
X
3767-1,2 (2740-2)
X(5)
X(5)
3767-1,-2 (2741)
X
X
X
X
CMCST (2741)
X
X(4)
X
X
CPT-TWX (M33/35)
WT Telegraph
S/7 (2740-1)
X
X
5100 (2741)
X
X
Machine and storage requirements will be provided in the Advanced
Communications Function for rCAM (ACF/TCAM) Version 2
Installation: Sample Programs at the availability of ACF/VTAM V2 R4
on each supported operating system.
5110(2741)
X
X
Security, Auditability, and Control: Previously announced security
functions such as support for the IBM Programmed Cryptographic
Facility, continue to be supported in ACF/TCAM V2 R4.
TSO
EP
(2)
X
PERFORMANCE and STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS
The new functions provided by ACF /TCAM V2 R4 may increase
storage requirements and path lengths over those in ACF/TCAM V2
R3. The actual performance impact (if any) to a customer will vary
depending upon his particular hardware and network configuration.
Subsys.
Int'f'ce
(3)
ACF/NCP
NCP/VS
The following significant differences between ACF/TCAM V2 and
ACF /TCAM Vl may require special planning. All other functions
supported by ACF/TCAM Vl are also supported by ACF/TCAM V2 Rl,
R2, R3 and R4.
X
'1
\
,
'
'
X
X
X
X
'
,
------ ----:: - - :§':f§: ISG
PP 5735-RC3.16
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
ACF/TCAM V2 R4 (cont'd)
BSC
Terminals
DCBAPI
EP
(2)
I
ACF/NCP
NCP/VS
Subsys.
Int'f'ce
TSO
EP
(2)
ACF/NCP
NCP/VS
-
-
SDLC
Terminals
DCBAPI
EP
(2)
ACF/NCP
NCP/VS
3271-11.12
N
X(5)
3274-1C
0
X(5)
3275-11.12
T
Subsys.
Int'f'ce.
TSO
EP
(2)
ACF/NCP
NCP/VS
X(5)
N
X(5)
X(5)
0
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
T
X(5.8)
X(5.8)
2972-8.11
X(5)
X(5)
-
-
-
X,
X
3271-1.2
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
3601
A
X
X
A
3275-1.2
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
3602
P
X
X
P
-
-
-
3614
P
X(5)
X(5)
P
-
3624
L
X(5)
X(5)
L
3651
I
-
X(6)
I
3767-1.2.3
C
X
X
C
X
-
-
-
-
3771-1.2.3
A
X
X
A
-
-
3773-1.2.3.Pl.P2.P3
B
X
X
B
-
2715-2
X
X
2772
X
X
2780
X
X
2922
X
-
-
-
3276-1.2.3,4
3276-11.12.13.14
X(5)
X(5.8)
X
3670 (10)
X
-
3735
X
X
3741-2,4
X
X
3747
X
X
5110
X
X
1131
X
X
1826
X
X
-
-
-
3774-1.2.P1.P2
L
X
X
L
S/3
X
X
-
-
-
3775-1.P1
E
X
X
E
3274-1C (3271)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
3776-1.2.3,4
X
X
3276-1.2.3,4 (3271)
3777-1.3
X
X
-
3791
X
X
X(7)
-
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
3771-1.2.3 (2772)
X
X
X
X
-
-
3773-1.2.3.Pl.P2.P3
(2772)
-
3774-1.2.Pl.P2
(2772)
X
X
3775-1.Pl (2772)
X
X
3776-1.2 (2772/3780)
X
X
3777-1 (2772/3780)
X
X
3780 (2772)
X
5275 (10)
(3275-1.2)
5937 (3271-1.2)
6670 (2772)
8100/0PPX (3271)
S/7 (S/3)
X
-
-
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X
X
-
-
-
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
X(5)
-
-
-
X
X
S/32 (S/3)
X
X
S/34 (S/3)
X
X
S/38 (S/3)
X
X
Series/l (S/3)
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
3791/3730
X
X
X(7)
6670
X
X
X
-
-
Series/1
3631.3632
(3601.3602)
X
X
-
3771-1.2.3 (3767)
X
X
X
-
3773-1.2.3 (3767)
X
X
X
3774-1.2 (3767)
X
X
X
X(5)
3775-1.3 (3767)
X
X
X
-
-
5937 (3271)
8100/0PPX (3791)
X
X(5)
-
X
X(7)
8100/0PCX (3791)
X
X
X(7)
S/32 (3770)
X
X
X
S/34 (3767.3770,
3791)
X
X
X
Notes:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Configuration support #9165 and #9169 only.
No multisystem support unless host to host data flows are
.
utilized.
ACF/TCAM V2 R2 and subsequent releases only.
Switched support only.
Nonswitched support only.
Applies to 3651 mdls A25, B25, A75, B75, C75, and 075 with
the appropriate SOLC feature.
TSO support applies only with 3270 data stream compatibility.
Applies to 3276 mdls 1, 2,3 and 4 with BSC/SOLC switch set to
SOLC mode.
Supported via Network Terminal Option (NTO) program product.
These devices are not supported by MVS/XA.
The terminal types in parentheses designate the programming support
provided by ACF/TCAM, e.g., S/7 (2740-1) means the S/7 is
supported as a 2740-1.
---- ----- ---:: - - :S~5: ISG
PP 5735-RC5.1
Do not reproduce without written· permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
VIRTUAL MACHINE/VTAM
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK APPLICATION
VM/VCNA (5735-RC5)
PURPOSE
DESCRIPTION
The Virtual Machine/VTAM Communications Network Application
(VM/VCNA). program product provides the VM/System Product
(VM/SP) user the capability of using an SNA, BSC, SS or local terminal
as an operator console for a virtual machine. Support is included for
Control Program/Conversational Monitor System (CP/CMS) command
processing, CMS editor processing and VM full screen support.
VM /VCNA is an application program that provides an interface
between VM's console support and ACF/VTAM's or ACF/VTAME's
application program interface in order to support SNA, BSC, SS or local
devices as virtual machine consoles.
VM/VCNA, in conjunction with ACF/VTAME, ACF/VTAM, NTOand
ACF/NCP/VS, offers the following advantages to the VM user:
VM/VCNA, in conjunction with ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME, provides
SNA, BSC, SS or local console support for virtual machines for VM/SP
users and supports those S/370, 303X and 4300 processors announced as supported by VM/SP. All references to ACF/VTAM refer
to ACF/VTAM Version 1 Release 2 or Release 3 or ACF/VTAM Version
2 (VSE or OS/VS1).
VM/VCNA in conjunction with ACF/VTAM, ACF/VTAME, NTO and
ACF/Ncplvs, provides VM .users the advantages and capabilities of
the multisystem networking facilities of the ACF products and allows
the VM system to participate in an existing or planned multisystem ACF
network based on Systems Network Architecture (SNA).
The SNA support for VM is located in what will be referred to· as the
VTAM (SNA) Service Machine (THE VSM,Figure 1) and providesSNA,
BSC, SS or local terminal services to virtual machine consoles as well as
providing ACF networking services. The VSM is a VM/Sp· Virtual
Machine which consists of the following components:
- Extend data communication functions conveniently and
effectively to the end-user in a distributed data processing (DDP)
network.
THE VSM
I------------~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
or
VSE/AF
- Minimize the end user's involvement in the details of data
communications operations.
The support of NTO by VM /VCNA is transparent· to both the NTO
devices and the VM/SP control program. The NTO devices are
supported by VM/VCNA through the application programming interface
(API) of ACF/VTAM.
I
I
+-*-----*---------------------------------------*-+
I
VM/SP
I
I---------------------------------------~---------I
!
- Minimize the effects of system changes.
- Allow for network sharing of asynchronous non-SNA devices.
+-----+
+----------------+
+-------------+
I CMS I I
Other
I
I * I VM/VCNA I
Operating
I
I
I I
+*----++
I
systems
I
I ACF /VTAM (**) I
I CMS I
I
I
I or
.
I
I
I
I (OS/VS1, OS/VS21
IACF/VTAME·
I
++----++
I VSE or VM/370) I
1-------------1
I CMS I
I
I
I OS/VS 1 BPE I
I
NTO Device Support by VM/VCNA: NTO is an IBM program product
that extends the capabilities of ACF/NCP/VS in a 3705 Communications Controller to allow a select group ofnon-SNA devices to be
supported as SNA devices. VM/VCNA's support of NTO allows VM
installations with non-SNA devices to migrate to SNA. NTO support
also allows an installation with SIS or asynchronous non-SNA devices
to have the use of SNA services that:
- Provide a·· consistent and comprehensive strlicture for data
communications growth.
- Distribute data communication functions throughout the SNA
network.
-VSE and VSE/ AF or OS/VSl and OS/VS1· BPE
-ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME
-VM/VCNA
I
I
Terminal sharing (assuming NTO support for SS devices) of the
VSM across multiple ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME applications or
subsystems, such as the Customer Information Control
System/Virtual Storage (CICS/VS), the Information Management
System/Virtual Storage (excluding NTO devices), user-written
application programs and the CP/CMS system. This increases the
usage of the terminal since it can now be located anywhere in a
multisystem ACF network and may be used as a virtual machine
console on VM systems in addition. to having access to other
systems that are not VM-based, (such as CICS/VS. under
ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME or TSO under ACF/VTAM or
ACF/TCAM on an operating system running in native mode on
another processor).
(S/370, 303X or 4300 Processor)
I
+-------------------------------------------------+
FIGURE I
Other application .programs and subsystems; for example, CICS/VS or
NCCF/NPDA.
For ACF multisystem networking, ACF/VTAM Version 2 (VSE or OS/VS1)
or the MSNF feature on ACF/VTAM Version 1 Release 2 or 3 is required.
The VSM owns and controls the network through ACF/VTAME or
ACF/VTAM, including the SNA, BSC, SS or local terminals that'will be
used as VM Virtual Machine consoles. It is this ownership that permits
terminals attached to the VM system, through ACF/VTAME (locally or
through a Communications Adapter) or ACF/VTAM (locally or through
ACF/NCP/VS), to gain access to the facilities of a multisystem (cross
domain) ACF network.
Additional IBM and user application programs may also be present in
the VSM (e.g., CICS/VS, NCCF/NPDA). VM/VCNA uses both the
Console Communication Services and the Inter-User Communication
Vehicle facilities available with the VM/System Product. The commu~
nication between the VSM and Console Communication Services of
VM/SP is by the Inter-User Communication Vehicle available with
VM/SP.
The terminals owned by the VSM may now be used by applications or
subsystems in the VSM, such as CICS/VS, as well as virtual machine
consoles for systems such as: CMS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2 or VSE.
These supported NTO devices appear to ACF/VTAM as Physical Unit
Type 1 (PU type 1), logical Unit Type 1 (lU type 1) devices and support
the same bind parameters as the SDlC 3767 Communications terminal.
Therefore, the NTO support by VM /VCNA is an enhancement to the lU
type 1 support provided by VM/VCNA. Thus the support provided for
the IBM 3101 display terminal is a line by line operation in character
mode using the 64 graphic character set.
For a description of the facilities of related SNA products, see the
following announcement letters:
ACF VTAM Version 1 R2
ACF/VTAM Version 1 R3
ACF/VTAME
ACF/NCP/VS R2.1
ACF/NCP/VS R3
NTOR2
NCCF
NPDA
VM/VCNA
- ----- ---::' - - :s'=fi: ISG
PP 5746-XXB.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
---.
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
CICS/DOS/VS EXTM (5746-XXB)
[NO LONGER AVAILABLE, effective May, 1983.]
PURPOSE
The basic function of the Extended Telecommunications Modules
(EXTM) feature of CICS/DOS/VS is to establish and support data flow
between a CICS/DOS/VS application and a corresponding user
application for IBM advanced communication subsystems and preSNA
terminals. Services required to support the necessary data flow
(System Services Control Point, Session Control, etc.) are an integral
part of EXTM. EXTM uses the functional capability of the 3704/3705
Network Control Program/VS (NCP /VS) for controlling terminal
operations. Support utilities for the IBM advanced communication
subsystems and utility services such as load and dump for 3704/3705
are included. A preprocessor is provided to aid the user during system
generation. Normal CICS/DOS/VS functions are supported when
using this program. EXTM has been designed to share and take
advantage of the functions of CICS/DOS/VS in order to optimize
attachment of SNA terminals to a CICS/DOS/VS system and can
co-exist in the same partition with BTAM.
DESCRIPTION
EXTM provides support for the IBM advanced communication
subsystems with CICS/DOS/VS on smaller mdls of S/370 processors
(1OOK) as well as larger systems interested in an SNA interface tailored
to the CICS/DOS/VS environment. The functions performed by EXTM
are provided by the following facilities:
Application Program Interface: This module is an interface between the
EXTM I/O Module and DFHZCP (which provides CICS/DOS/VS
support for SNA terminals) and allows DFHZCP to operate as it does
with VTAM. This interface supports the subset of VTAM macros used
performs equivalent functions for
by CICS/DOS/VS and
CICS/DOS/VS. CICS/DOS/VS will continue to use the same control
blocks with EXTM as with VTAM.
I/O Module: The I/O Module controls the transfer of data between the
host computer and the 3704/3705. This includes blocking/ deblocking
of I/O, constructing of channel pro\i1rams, maintaining physical control
of the 3704/3705 NCP/VS and initiating 3704/3705 control functions
(activation/deactivation of lines, etc.). The I/O Module also provides
an interface to the 3704/3705 load and dump services.
Linkage Module: The Linkage Module acts as an interface between the
I/O Module and the CICS/DOS/VS user applications, for preSNA
terminals, performing such functions as message synchronization and
handling of read/write requests.
problem determination, diagnose I/O errors and verify device repairs
and engineering changes.
COLTT can be initiated from any alphameric terminal with input and
output capability that is supported by CICS/VS and has sufficient
output message size capacity.
Preprocessor: The Extended Telecommunications Modules Preprocessor
is an installation aid whose output provides input for the generation of
an NCP/VS, EXTM, and CICS/DOS/VS system generation including
required CICS/DOS/VS tables. Users may select various levels of
output from the preprocessor and save time in generating the job
stream to install their systems. The preprocessor will generate a
sample system based on device types specified, and will have additional
cross-checking of parameters between CICS/DOS/VS, EXTM,
and NCP /VS generations.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The specific installation requirements must be determined by customers
based on their need and available resources. Customer responsibilities
for installing CICS/DOS/VS are detailed in the CICS/VS General
Information Manual GH20-1280. For CICS/DOS/VS with the
Extended Telecommunications Modules Feature the customer should:
Order and install communications equipment based on processing
needs.
Train system analysts, programmers and operators in the use of
DOS/VS, CICS/DOS/VS with Extended Telecommunications
Modules, 3704/3705, NCP/VS, and subsystem design and
programming language.
Install the NCP /VS in the 3704/3705.
Develop, write and test the subsystem application programs and/or
customized images as required.
Have installed the
CICS/DOS/VS.
prerequisite
versions
of
DOS/VS
and
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The minimum configuration supported is:
3115 mdl GE (160K). IBM S/370 processor mdls and the IBM
3031 Processor supported by DOS/VS are supported by EXTM.
IBM I/O devices to support a Virtual Storage Operating System
(DOS/VS and CICS/DOS/VS).
Master Terminal Functions: The EXTM Master Terminal Programs
provide dynamic user control of the system for EXTM supported
terminals. The EXTM master terminal operator can change the status
and values of parameters used by CICS/DOS/VS and EXTM and
thereby alter the operation of the system.
IBM 3704/3705 II Communications Controller with required
channel prerequisites or, if appropriate, an IBM 3790 with LCA and
required channel prerequisites.
System Services Control Point: The function of the System Services
Control Point (SSCP) is to establish and maintain sessions between the
host computer and all nodes in the network. The SSCP will perform
network initialization and dynamic node activation/deactivation
requested through the EXTM master terminal commands.
Note 1: Only the standard IBM S/370 instruction set is used by EXTM.
The CICS/VS instruction set requirement for preSNA support with
EXTM is the same as with BTAM. The CICS/VS instruction set
requirement for SNA support with EXTM is the same as with VTAM.
Support Service Utilities: Utilities are provided for loading and dumping
the 3704/3705. The utilities run under CICS/DOS/VS. These services
can be invoked automatically and through EXTM master terminal
commands.
Note 3: See EXTM General Information Manual (GH20-1702) for
EXTM configuration guidelines. The EXTM storage configuration aid,
called STOREXTM, is available on HONE.
Access to Subsystem Support Services batch created files is provided
by EXTM for online transmission of subsystem data to the SNA
terminal system controllers. This access can be invoked by the EXTM
Master Terminal Facility. EXTM master terminal commands may be
used to transmit subsystem data to the 3600, 3650 and 3790.
Dumping of the 3600 is initiated by the 3600 user application program.
EXTM recognizes the request and invokes a DUMP program, routing
..,t~e 3600 system dump to a user-specified data set.
',RAS Functions: Message integrity is achieved through the sequence
, number facilities inherent in SNA transmission services.
,System / Network integrity is provided by serviceability aids which
.
include:
'1--:-'
,;',.
Path Information Unit (PIU) Trace
Channel End Appendage Trace
Miscellaneous Data Record (3704/3705) Statistics Recording
3704/3705 Formatted Dump Facility
CICS/DOS/VS System Trace (a CICS/DOS/VS facility)
3704/3705 Line Trace
'
Application Program Interface (API) Trace
C~>ncurrent Online Telecommunication Test
Conc~rrent Online TelecommuniCation Test: The EXTM Concurrent Online
Telecommunications Test Program is the interface between the online
test (OLT) programs and the Extended Telecommunications Modules
(EXTM). It controls the selection and execution of the OLTs used for
testing the t~leprocessing terminals supported by EXTM. COLTT
programs ca~:"be used to perform preventive maintenance, perform
A minimum of one EXTM supported terminal.
Note 4: The sizes of the CICS/DOS/VS partition and the DOS/VS
superv,sor are dependent· upon the functions and parameters chosen.
Appropriate SRLs should be used to configure these products.
Communication Device Support
Communications Controller Support: EXTM supports the IBM 3704 and
3705 Communications Controllers in either NCP /VS mode or NCP /VS
with PEP. The emulation of PEP may be utilized by CICS/DOS/VS BTAM or another partition. EXTM does not support the dynamic
switching of lines between the emulation partition and NCP /VS when
operating with PEP. Multiple IBM 3704s and 3705s may be attached to
an EXTM system. Remote IBM 3704/3705 facilities, available under
NCP/VS control, are supported by EXTM. The IBM terminals
supported by the remote controller are the same IBM terminals
supported by EXTM on a local controller.
3704 Communicaions Controller, mdls A3 and A4
3705-1 Communications Controller, mdls A2 - 08
3705-11 Communications Controller, mdls E2 - H8
Communication Systems and Terminals Supported
Start/Stop Transmission Terminals
2740 Communication Terminal mdl 1 with,
optionally,
Record Checking (#6114)
Station Control (#7479)
2740 Communication Terminal mdl 2 with,
optionally,
Record Checking (#611'4)
-
-~--- ----
PP 5746-XXB.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
:5: - - :5~5: ISG
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
EXTM (cont'd)
Buffer Receive (#1499)
2741 Communication Terminal with,
optionally,
Receive Interrupt (#4708)
3767 Communication Terminal with
Start/Stop Feature (#7"" #7112 or #7113)
(supported as compatible version of
appropriately featured 2740/2741)
SDLC Communication feature
(#6301, #6302 or #6303) and
Configuration Support #9165 and
3792 Auxiliary Control Unit
3793 Keyboard Printer mdl 1
3277 Display Station
3284 Printer mdls 1 and 2
3286 Printer mdls 1 and 2
3288 Printer mdl 2
3767 Communication Terminal mdls 1, 2 and 3 with
Vertical Forms Control feature (#8731) (optional)
3770 Data Communication System
with SDLC Communication feature (#1460 or #1470)
3771 Data Communication Terminal mdls 1, 2 and 3
3773 Data Communication Terminal
mdls1, 2 and 3
Programmable mdls P1, P2 and P3
3774 Data Communication Terminal
mdls 1 and 2
Programmable mdls P1 and P2
3775 Data Communication Terminal
mdl1
Programmable mdl P1
3776 Data Communication Terminal mdls 1 and 2
3777 Data Communication Terminal
3270 Information Display System
3271 Control Unit mdls 11 or 12 with
Copy (#1550)
3277 Display Station mdls 1 or 2,
and, optionally
3284 Printer mdls 1 or 2
3286 Printer mdls 1 or 2
3288 printer mdls 2
3775 Display Station mdl 11 or 12 with
3284 Printer mdl 3
Binary Synchronous Communications Terminals
2770 Data Communication System
2772 Multipurpose Control Unit, with
optionally,
EBCDIC Transpar~~~ J#3650)
WACK Response (#9936)
Buffer Expansion (#1490)
Conversational Mode (#1910)
Multipoint Data Link Control (#5010)
0545 Output Punch
1053 Printer or
2213 Printer
2265 Display Station
2502 Card Reader
3270 Information Display System
3271 Control Unit mdl1 or 2, with
EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) or
ASCII Transmission Code (#9762), and
3277 Display Station mdl 1 or 2,
and, optionally
3284 Printer mdl 1 or 2
3286 Printer mdl 1 or 2
3288 Printer mdl 2
Copy (#1550 for 3271 Control Unit)
3275 Display Station mdl 1 or 2 with
EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) or
ASCII Transmission Code (#9762), and
optionally
3284 Printer mdl 3
3780 Data Communication Terminal with
EBCDIC Transpar~~~ J#3601),
WACK Response (#9936)
Multipoint Data Link Control (#5010)
3781 Card Punch with
Component Selection (#1601) on 3780
3770 Data Communication System with
BCS feature (#1460 or #1461)
(supported as compatible version of
appropriately featured 2770)
Terminals Connected Via Local Attachment
3790 Communication System
3791 Controller mdls 1A, 1 B, 2A and 2B with
Local Channel Attachment (#1515) and
Configuration Support #9165 and
3792 Auxiliary Control Unit
3277 Display Station
3793 Keyboard Printer
3284 Printer mdls 1 and 2
3286 Printer mdls 1 and 2
3288 Printer mdl 2
The following table illustrates EXTM support of IBM SOLC devices
on nonswitched or dial communicating facilities:
Synchronous Data Link Control Terminals
3600 Finance Communication System
3601 Finance Communication System Controller
mdls 1, 2A, 2B, 3A and 3B with SDLC
Communication Feature (#4501, #4502, #6301 or fl63(2)
3602 Finance Communication System Controller
mdls 1A and 1B with SDLC
Communication Feature (#4501, #4502, #6301 or #63(2)
3604 Keyboard Display
mdls 1, 2,3,4,5 and 6
3606 Financial Services Terminal
mdls 1 and 2
3608 Printing Financial Services Terminal
mdls 1 and 2
3610 Document Printer
mdls 1, 2, 3 and 4
3611 Passbook Printer (supported as a 3612)
mdls 1 and 2
3612 Passbook and Document Printer
mdls 1, 2 and 3
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility
mdls " 2, 11 and 12
3618 Administrative Line Printer
mdl1
3624 Consumer Transaction Facility
mdls " 2, 11 and 12
3630 Plant Communication System
3631 Communication System Controller
mdls 1A and 1B with SDLC Communication
feature (#4502, #6301 and #6302) .
3632 Plant Communication System Controller
mdls 1A and 1B with SDLC Communication feature
(#4502, #6301 and #6302)
(3600 Compatible)
3650 Retail Store System
3651 Store Controller
mdls A50 and BOO
3653 Point of Sale Terminal mdl 1
3275 Display Station mdl 3
3284 Printer mdl 3
3790 Communication System
3791 Controller mdls 1A, 1B, 2A and 2B with
SDlC
Devlca
Non·
switched
3270
3600
3614
3624
3630
3650
3767
3770
3790
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Dial·ln
Dial-out
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Equivalent Terminals: Terminals that are functionally equivalent to those
specifically supported by EXTM may also function satisfactorily with
EXTM; the customer is responsible for establishing equivalency.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The Extended Telecommunications Modules Feature is coded using
S/370 Assembler language.
EXTM operates in the following environment:
EXTM
V2 Rei. 0
DOS/VS Release
31 or 32
NCP /VS Version
4.1 or 5.0
CICS/DOS/VS Version 1.1.1 or 1.2
.
EXTM
V3 Rei. 0
EXTM
V3 Rei. 1
32 or 33.\,;
4.1 or 5.0
1.2 or 1.3
33 or·
5.0 or ••
1.3 or •
•
Currently available version at the time of, EXTM V3.1 availability.
••
ACF/NCP/VS support will be available at the availability of
ACF/NCP/VS.··
, "
The support utilities for the subsystem controllers use CICS/DOS/VS
VSAM which requires the Relocating Loader.
..
CICS/DOS/VS support of BTAM terminals remains unchanged. BTAM
can coexist with EXTM in the CICS/DOS/VS partition. When
supporting terminals via BTAM, they must interface to CICS/OOS/VSBTAM via a separate control unit or via an IBM 3704/3705 in emulation
mode or by using the Partitioned Emulator Program (PEP). VTAM can
coexist with Extended Telecommuni~tions Modules in the system but
--.----- ----...:: - - :a"f§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mara3
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
EXTM (cont'd)
not in the same CICS/DOS/VS partition. Each system, VTAM and
EXTM, must have its own 3704/3705.
EXTM/VTAM Selection Criteria: In selecting whether EXTM or VTAM
should be used in a DOS/VS environment with CICS/DOS/VS, careful
consideration should be given to the availability of the necessary
minimum system configuration and to the functions required in the
system.
PERFORMANCE CONSIDERATIONS
The performance of EXTM in a virtual storage environment is highly
dependent on the system resources available, on any programs that
operate concurrently and their relative priorities, on system and
application data file placement, on system timing, etc. Performance
also depends on the paging characteristics and storage reference
patterns of CICS/DOS/VS and its application programs, on the
allocation of data files to particular devices, and on the particular data
.
being processed.
For specific online performance and response time requirements,
careful attention should be given to ensure that adequate real resources
(main storage, processor computing capability, channels, disk file arms,
etc.) are available. To verify specific performance, benchmarking EXTM
with CICS/DOS/VS and DOS/VS may be appropriate.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
PP57~XXB.3
------- ----:: - - :S~5: ISG
PP S746-XXM.1
Mar 83
Do not reproduce without written permission
,PROGRAM PRODUCTS
COMMUNICATION ORIENTED MESSAGE SYSTEM
CORMES Release 1 Modification Level 0 (5746-XXM)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
PURPOSE
The Communication Oriented Message System (CORMES) is designed
to build the central "paperless" message exchange system in an
organization connecting terminal users and application programs of
different functions. It provides communication links:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
For the interaction between online application programs and
terminal users (action messages).
For compilation and/or execution of CORMES, an IBM 5/370 with the
minimum main storage capacity for CICS/DOS/VS operation is
required.
For CORMES, additional storage is required. For the first terminal
16,500 bytes and for each additional terminal 3,000 bytes; for the first
application program 11,800 bytes and for each additional program
1,200 bytes.
For triggering the execution of application programs based on the
occurrence of prespecified events (trigger messages).
For the data bases, and files the same devices are used as for the basic
software,9f DOS/VS, CICS/DOS/VS and DL/I DOS/VS.
For the exchange of information between terminal users (action
messages).
DESCRIPTION
CORMES operates under the IBM Disk Operating System/Virtual
Storage (DOS/VS) Release 33 or subsequent releases unless otherwise
identified.
.
For data base management, the system uses the data base facilities of
the IBM S/370 Data Language/I Disk Operating System/Virtual
Storage (DL/I DOS/VS) Version 1, program number 5746-XX1,
Release 1, or subsequent releases unless otherwise identified.
For data communication, CORMES uses the facilities of the IBM S/370
Customer Information Control System/Virtual Storage (CICS/DOS/VS)
Version 1, program number 5746-XX3, Release 2, or subsequent
releases unless otherwise identified.
HIGHLIGHTS
At least an IBM 3277 Display Station mdl 2 with a 66-key keyboard
must be available. The Selector Light-pen (#6530) and program
function keys are supported optionally. The IBM 3274 and 3276 are
supported in compatibility mode.
The online address space requirements for CORMES may vary widely,
according to the number of active terminals. A minimum installation
might require address space of about 384K bytes for the combined
CICS/VS and DL/I DOSIVS user task partition.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
CORMES is written in Assembler language and uses the macro
language facility.
CORMES is designed for an online DOS/VS environment and requires
the following programs:
DOS/VS Release 33 and subsequent releases). •
Terminal user services:
CICS/DOS/VS Version 1, program number 5746-XX3, Release 2
and subsequent releases). •
Easy to use terminal functions to create, display, modifY, and
distribute action messages.
DL/I DOS/VS Version 1, Program Number 5746-XX1, Release 1
and subsequent releases). •
Routing of action messages from one user to another.
Linkage to online application programs to process a user-selected
action message.
Application program services:
User macros to simplify the creation of action and trigger messages
in user-written programs and their transfer to the central message
files.
Triggering of application program execution according to prespecified events: A point in time, a time interval or a queue length.
CORMES as a frame for the implementation of interactive
application programs.
System services:
Monitoring of the individual message queue of each terminal user
by due date and priority of the received messages.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
This section briefly discusses the activities the user has to perform to
make CORMES operational. It gives a rough guide for assessing the
total installation effort. The assumption is that a system running under
OOS/VS with OL/I OOS/VS and CICS/DOS/VS has already been
installed.
The installation procedure allows an easy installation of the CORMES
system including the sample by use of object code facility. The
distributed source code will be used for the final adaptation to the
existing system environment.
The major implementation steps are:
Installation of the CORMES system according to the distribution
tape and installation description.
'(
Execution of the supplied sample to verify the installation. This
sample can also be used as a tool for training terminal users.
Optionally, assembly of all CORMES online programs to include
customer requirements.
Modification and reassambly of existing programs for CORMES
communication (according to the rules defined by CORMES) by use
of macros and examples provided.
Exchange of the sample files and tables by files and tables that
describe the customer system.
The required changes within existing customer programs have been
reduced to a minimum. In addition, macros are provided to simplify the
program interactions. Support is provided for Assembler, PL/I and
COBOL programs.
•
Unless otherwise identified in a future revision of this document.
Note: CORMES executes, and is supported by IBM, on S/370 virtual
storage configurations running under DOS/VS in virtual mode, and
DOS/VS underVM/370in virtual machine mode.
'
DOCUMENTATION:
(available only from the European Publications
Center)
Licensed Program Specifications (GH12-5238) ... General Information
Manual (GH12-5127).
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
------- ----:: - -:E'f§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 5748-XC2.1
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
DISPLAY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM/3790
,
5748-XC2
[NO LONGER AVAILABLE, effective May, 1983.]
PURPOSE
This program prodl!ct is' a productivity aid for users 'of the 3790
Communication System that eases the design,' coding, testing and
support of the 3790 application programs. The OMS /3790 program
product consists of a forms-oriented program generator for modules
interfacing with the operator terminals, a teleprocessing interface
program, and a set of macros to invoke functions, retrieve data, and
manage the program's working storage.
DESCRIPTION
The DMS/3790 program product produces a class of programs
referred to as screen handlers. The user defines the screen handler on
a set of forms that is provided with OMS/3790. These forms allow the
user to describe layouts (screen, line printer or 3793), input and output
fields and the editing characteristics of these fields. In addition, the
meaning of program function keys, program attention keys and selector
pen detectable fields can be described. The output of the 3790
Program Generator will be programs which are ready for assembly. A
facility is also available which will allow these forms to be prepared
interactively under CICS/VS, TSO or VM/370.
DMS/3790 will provide the Communications Interface Monitor (CIM)
as an optional feature. This feature manages communications between
3790 user application programs' and IMS/VS or CICS/VS. CIM
supports opening and closing of sessions with IMS/VS and CICS/VS,
recovering from sessions that failed due .to errors, sending messages to
and receiving replies from the host system and. storing replies in 3790
user buffers, indexed or relative data sets or work area files. CIM
supports CICS/VS Release 1.3 and IMS/VS Release 1.1.4 host
applications using VTAM. CIM will provide. communications between
DMS/3790 programs and IMS/VS via SLU type P.
DMS/3790 provides a Linkage Service facility which establishes
standard interfaces and communication protocols between modules via
a set of macros. Programmers can invoke application functions by
names specifying only what data is to be operated on and where the
result is to be stored. Linkage services locates the invoked function
,and, if at the host, CIM will transmit the data and store the reply in the
specified location.
T.he Get Collection .facility of DMS/3790 allows programmers to
request inquiry data by name, specifying only a key field. Get Collection
will permit inquiries against local or host resident files or files split
between the 3790 and host systems. If the data resides on the host
system, control will be given to the Communications Interface Monitor
which will send the transaction to the host to retrieve the data.
The Work Area Management (WAM) facility of DMS/3790 provides
temporary working storage for application programs. The WAM
macros provide for high-level manipulation of this working storage, and
symbolic addressing of storage. The Work Area is designed for storing
terminal input data and passing data between modules on the 3790 and
between the 3790 and the host.
HIGHLIGHTS
• DMS/3790 forms allow an application designer to describe the 3790
interface with the display operator. The forms provided are:
- The Layout Form which defines:
Program information such as name, number and record layouts.
The screen format to be displayed to the operator.
The location of variable display and input fields on the display.
The meaning of PA keys, PF keys and selector light-pen
attentions.
Special error messages that may be displayed to the terminal
operator.
- The Field Processing Form which defines:
Variable fields to be displayed to the operator.
Input fields to be entered by the operator.
Input field edits, including count, required or optional, type,
selfcheck, picture, range and value.
Selector 'light- pen' data.
The action that is to be taken if an edit detects an error.
- The Buffer Description Form which defines the layout of fields in
.
a record or buffer.
• Flexible panel definition provides for:
Field-by-Field Support.
Full Screen Processing Support.
Full 327.7 Field Attribute Capability.
Extensive Operator Communications.
Deferred and Immediate Selector' Light-Pen Support.
• Interactive Forms Preparation facility is a productivitY tool that aids
the designer in describing the interface with the display operator. It
operates with a 3277 mdl 2 attached to the S/370 via a 3271 or
3277 control unit. This facility operates under TSO ITCAM,
TSO/VTAM, CICS/VS and VM/370. This feature supports all the
capabilities of the form plus:
Full screen entry of display and print layouts.
Left-right arld up-:down scrolling capability.
Automatic prompting for field attributes.
Restart capability.
Help panels.
• The Work Area Manager is a high function facility for temporary
working storage.
It contains a two-level hierarchical structure. It provides for root
segment and multiple dependent segment. types, and multiple
occurrences of each dependent type.
It is application oriented. The programmer assigns symbolic names
to the root and dependent segment types. Using these names and
flexible work area macros the programmer can easily add desired
segments, add new occurrences of segments, insert segments at
the start or middle of a chain and delete segments anywhere in the
work area.
It provides for security checking.
The Work Area Manager performs all work area disk 110 for the
program. If a segment has been updated by an application, the
Work Area Manager automatically writes that segment to disk,
eliminating the chance of losing the new information. The Work
Area Manager controls record pools for allocation of work areas to
programs and gives segments to all programs as needed.
• Get Collection supports distribution of' inquiry data in the 3790
environment.
Inquiry data is requested by name, :specifying only a key field.
System-wide symbolic names are given to groups of related fields
called collections. The programmer requests. a collection by its
symbolic name, specifying only the key of the collection.
A collection can be resident on the 3790, the host S/370 system,
or distributed between the two systems. If it is 3790 resident; Get
Collection will retrieve it from the local disk and present it to the
program. If it is host resident, Get Collection will search the local
disk to determine if it has previously been retrieved before
requesting it from the host system. This reuse of data can improve
response time to the user, and can minimize communications traffic
and host processing overhead. If a collection can reside both
locally and at the host system, Get Collection will search the local
data set to see if it is residing locally before going to the host
system~" This allows the system designe"r to permanently store
those collections that are most frequently used on the controller
without limiting access to collections that are on the host system.
Location of collections is transparent to 3790 programs. Get
Collection allows the system designer to change where collections
reside without having to be concerned about the programs that
reference them. A reassembly of these programs is necessary to
allow them access to the moved collection. It is the user's
responsibility to provide the necessary host application programs to
transfer the collections.
.
Get Collection is transparent to the 3790 program because it
automatically invokes the Communications Interface Monitor if the
collection is located at the host system. When the program regains
control, it looks as if the collection was resident on the local 3790
disk.
• Linkage Services supports the distribution of function in the 3790
environment.
Functions are invoked by name, specifying only the input and
where to place the reply. A symbolic name is given to' each
function in the distributed system. The program invokes a function
by this symbolic name, identifying the data that is to be passed to
the function and where the reply is to be .stored.
Linkage Services provides a set of standard data interfaces that can
be used between 3790. programs. These interfaces identify the
data that is to be operated on by a called function and where the
calling function expects the reply to be stored.
.
Functions can be local or host resident. If a called function resides
at the host, Linkage Services will invoke tho communications
facility to transmit the data to host system. When the reply is
PP 5748-XC2.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
MarS3
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
DMS/3790 (cont'd)
retrieved, it will be stored in the area specified by the calling
function.
Location of invoked functions is transparent to the. programmer.
Linkage Services allows the system designer to change. where
functions are located without being concerned about the programs
that invoke them. Only a reassembly of the invoking programs is
necessary to provide access to the moved function. It is the user's
responsibility to write the application programs which perform the
specific function.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
DMS/3790 is written in S/370 Assembler language, PL/S· and 3790
programming statements as follows:
Interactive Forms Preparation - PL/S· and Assembler
Screen Handler Generator - PL/S· and Assembler
Get Collection - Assembler
Linkage Services - Assembler
• Communications Interface Monitor (CIM) is a separate feature of the
DMS/3790 product
Work Area Management - Assembler and 3790. Programming
Statements
CIM controls the 3790 side of the communications link. The
session control functions performed include openin~ and closing of
sessions, recovery from temporary errors, restarting and resynchronizing interrupted sessions and maintaining a log of communications errors.
Communications Interface Monitor (feature) -.3790 Programming
Statements
CIM transmits requests to the host from the calling program's
buffer,. the calling program's work area, indexed records or relative
records.
CIM retrieves replies from the host and stores them in the calling
program's buffer, the calling program's work area, indexed records
or relative records.
•. Programming Language/Systems (PL/S) is an IBM proprietary
language.
Assembler language and 3790 programming statements source code is·
jJrovided with the DMS/3790 program product.
Depending upon the host operating system used, the following
programs are required:
OS/VS
VS1
VS2
OS/VS Assembler XF
5741-SC1-03
5752-SC1-03*
5742-SC1-03**
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
To install and use the DMS/3790 program product the user must:
1.
Acquire a knowledge of the functions provided by the different
facilities.
Linkage Editor
5741-SC1-04
5752-SC1-04*
5742-SC1-04··
Virtual Storage Access
Method (VSAM)
5741-SC1-DE
5752-SC1-DE·
5742-SC1-DE··
IDCAMS (Access Method
Services)
5741-SC1-DK
5752-SC1-DK·
5742-SC1-DK··
Sequential Access Method
.. 5741-SC1-DO
5752-SC1-DO·
5742-SC1-DO··
Virtual Telecommunications
Access Method (~AM)
5741-SC1-23
5752-SC1-23*
574?-SC1-23··
2.
Learn the new macros provided for implementing these facilities.
3.
Learn how to prepare the forms provided for the screen handler
generation.
4.
Generate the necessary tables required at the host system for
Linkage Services and Get Collection.
5.
Provide the necessary data set and program IDs to be used.
6.
Provide the necessary host application programs if the CIM feature
is used.
7.
Provide additional programming for the screen handler user
routines if required for the 3790 applications.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
DMS/3790 requires the following system configuration:
An IBM S/370 mdl115 or larger for DOS/VS, mdl 135 or larger
for OS/VS1 or a mdl 145 or larger for OS/VS2.The machine
configuration for DMS/3790 varies according to the user's
application needs. The requirement for.operation under CICS/VS
or IMS/VS is any IBM S/370 with enough real storage to meet the
combined operating requirements of CICS/VS or IMS/VS, the host
operating system, the appropriate access methods and other
user-required applications. DMS/3790 requires S5K of virtual
storage. The program operates in a virtual equals virtual environment.
3704/3705 Network Control
Program (NCP /VS)
(If 3790 is not local
channel attached)
5744-BA2
Subsystem Support Services
(SSS)
6741-SC1-SS
3790 Host Support
6744-BZ3
5740-XX1
6740-XX1
5740;..XX2
5740-XX2
Any card read/punch and printer supported by OS/VS1,OS/VS2
or DOS/VS.
.
Telecommunications Access
Method (TCAM)
--------
5752-SC.1-21·
5742-SC1-21··
Any magnetic tape drive supported by OS/VS1, OS/VS2 or
DOS/VS (required for installation only.)
TSO Subroutines for TCAM
--------.
6752-SC1-TS·
6742-SC1-TS··
A minimum of 1-3271 or 1-3272 and 1-3277 mdl 2 Display
Station if the Interactive Forms Preparation facility is used.
TSO
Data Management
--------
Schedu~r
--------
6762-SC1-T3·
5742-SC1-T3··
5752-SC1-T4*<'
5742-SC1-T4**
Supervisor
--------
A 3747 Data Converter for offline diskette creation.
A 3791 Controller, mdl1A or larger.
- 3791 configuration support feature #9431, #9165 or #9169. (CIM
does not support feature #9431).
•
•••
•••
- DMS/3790 will support only' the following attached devices
included in the above configuration:
Note 1:
3793 Keyboard/Printer
3277 mdl 1 or 2
- A minimum of either 1-3277 or 1-3793 is required. In addition
to above attached devices, the line printer (feature #4710, #4711
or #4715) is also supported .
"
6744-BZ3
Depending upon the' operating system used,. any direct access
storage device supported by the Virtual Storage Access Method
(VSAM) and OS/VS1, OS/VS2 or DOS/VS.
or
"
5762-SC1-SS*
6742-SC1-SS··
Customer Information
Control System
(CICS/VS), Version 1
Release 3.0 •••
or
Information Management
System (lMS/VS)
Version 1, Release1.4···
A 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller for online operations (if
the 3790 is not local channel attached).
.
5744-BA2
MVS
SVS
Also applies to
identified.
_,
subsequent
5742-SC1-T7**
releases . unless
otherwise
VTAM or TCAM/NCP/VS Direct, NCP/VS and SSS are required
for the transmission of programs from the host to the 3790. They
are not required if the Batch Data Exchange facility is used to
forward programs to the 3790.
',,'
Note 2:
------ ---:: - - :S~5: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
DMS/3790 (cont'd) .
VTAM, NCP/VS and CICS/VS or IMS/VS are required if the
Communications Interface Monitor feature of DMS/3790 is to be
used.
Note 3:
For the Interactive Forms Preparation facility CICS/VS or TSO with
either VTAM or TCAM is required.
DOS/VS: Release 33
D.OS/VS Assembler
5745-SC-ASM
Linkage Editor
5745-SC-LNK
Virtual Storage Access Method
(VSAM)
5745-SC-VSM
Access· Method Services
5745-SC-AMS
Sequential Disk IOCS
5745-SC~DSK
Virtual Telecommunications Access
Method (VTAM)
5745-SC-VTM
Extended Telecommunications
Modules (EXTM) with CICS/VS
Version 1, Release 3.0
5746-XXB
3704/3705 Network Control
Program/VS (NCP /VS)
(if 3790 is not local channel
attached)
5747-AJ2
Subsystem Support Services (SSS)
5745-SC-SSS
3790 Host Support
5747-BQ1
Customer Information Control
System (CICS/VS) Version 1,
Release 3.0
(and subsequent releases
unless oterwise identified)
5746-XX3
Note 1:
NCP/VS, SSS and either VTAM or EXTM are required for the
transmission of programs from the host to the 3790. They are not
required if the Batch Data Exchange facility is used to transfer
programs to the 3790.
Note 2:
NCP /VS and CICS/VS with either VTAM or EXTM are required if
the Communications Interface Monitor feature of DMS/3790 is to
be used.
Note 3:
PP 5748-XC2.3
.
For the Interactive Forms Preparation facility CIC~/VS is required.
VM/370: VM /370 can be used for execution of the screen handler
generator, for interactive forms preparation and for assembly of
programs if a 3790 macro library is available. For validation and
transmission of programs to the 3790 and for use of the CIM foature of
DMS/3790, El DOS/VS or OS/VS system is required.
DOCUMENTATION
(availablo from Mechanicsburg)
Title
Order
Number
General Information Manual
To Be
Sales Flyer
Announced
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index,
--.----- --------
pp, 5748-~C3.1
Mar 83
Do not, reproduce without written permission .
.=. =:: :§~5: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
DISPLAY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM/3770
(DMS/3770), RELEASE 1
5748-XC3
PURPOSE
This program product is a productivity aid for users of the 3770
Communication System that simplifies the design, coding, testing and
maintenance of the 3770 application programs. The DMS/3770
program product consists of an interactive or forms driven panel
definition program, a screen handler program generator, a local data set
access manager, a host communication access manager and an
application function manager.
The 3770 programmable system is an operator oriented communication
system that consists of an IBM 3774 or 3775 Programmable Communication Terminal and its attached devices. The operator terminal
consists of the console keyboard, the 480 character gas panel display,
the console printer and the 3278 Display Station mdl 2 RPQ #EJ2657
(3774 only). Support for the RPQ will be available in a later release.
Records may be stored on one fixed diskette drive, and / or two
additional diskette drives that are optional. Other devices supported are
the 3501 Card Reader, the 2502 Card Reader and the 3521 Card
Read / Punch.
'
Five operatiol)al functions may be selected by the application programmer to be provided in the generated functional program:
-~- Selected input data fields from the panel described by the
application programmer are collected and arranged in the order
specified by the buffer description and are stored in the
local/host data sets selected by the operator.
, I
Add
Display ---~ Previously entered data is retrieved and merged with the
panel described by the application programmer, and is
displayed on the operator console of the 3770. A record may
be retrieved by the operator by entering the key of the record,
by entering the relative record number of the record, or by
entering a null key which signifies "next record".
Verify
Programs prepared on the host system are transmitted to the 3770
where they may be executed. These programs can operate in a
stand-alone manner or with host communication.
The S/370 host system supports the 3770 under DOS/VS, OS/VS1,
OS/VS2 and VM/370 (CMS). 3770 programs are created and tested at
the host system and are transmitted by the user to the 3770.
DMS/3770 generates a 3770 application program which supports data
collection and maintenance from the 3770 console. local data sets may
be either indexed or relative in organization. Host data sets may have
any form of organization which the user-written host program will
support.
HIGHLIGHTS
Improved programmer productivity.
The cost of maintaining 3770 application programs should be
reduced because of system modularity and standardized documentation.
--- Previously entered data is retrieved by key or tlyentering a
null key ("next record"). The operator is supplied with the
prompts from the application programmer specified panel and
is required to rekey the entry values. If the existing data and
the newly keyed data match, the next field is processed. Three
attempts at each field are allowed before the new value is
accepted in the case of mismatch. The original data is not
shown to the verify operator to maintain keying independence.
Indexed data sets include a verification indicator. The indicator
will be changed to a "v" if the record was verified correct as
is, and will be changed to a "c" if,the record was altered
during the verify operation.
Update --- Previously entered data is retrieved by key or by entering a
null key ("next record"). The data is then merged with the
panel described by the application programmer, and is
displayed on the operator console one field at a time. After,
each input value is displayed, the operator is' given the',
opportunity to alter it. After the last field, the record .is
rewritten to the source data set. .If an indexed data set is being
processed, the verification indicator will be changed to a "u" if
a field is updated.
Distribution of function or data from the host system to the 3770 or
vice versa.
--.: The record is selected by the operator by key only, is
merged with the application programmer specified panel and is
displayed on the operator console. The operator is then
prompted to continue or to abort the delete request. " No'l
implies abort, "yes" :implies continue. The record is then
removed from the data set by altering the key so that it is no
longer selectable. (The deleted record may be returned to
active status by the operator.)
Application may be described on the Interactive Forms Preparation
facility or by using the DMS/3770 forms.
Continuous running routines .; - .the operator has the option of
performing a selected function in a continuous mode.
Full Screen Processing facility.
DMS/3770 requires at the host a number of input, output and work
files to retain information as it is processing the various screen handler
forms. These files are:
Delete
Tedious aspects of 3770 programming are removed without
prohibiting unique implementation via user exits.
DESCRIPTION
Field by field support.
The Interactive Forms Preparation Facility (lFP) is a productivity tool that
aids the application designer in describing the interface with the display
operator. This facility operates under TSO, CICS/VS and CMS. The
IFP provides for online entry of the information necessary to generate
screen handler programs by using a 3271 or 3272 and one 3277 mdl 2
Display Station or one 3275 Display Station (or equivalent
3274/3276/3278 combination). This facility provides the capability to
improve productivity with functions such as:
Full screen entry of display and print layouts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Input file.
layout & field processing file (work).
Mapping file (work).
Generated output file.
I
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
To install and use the OMS/3770 program product the user must:
I
1.
Acquire a :knowledge of th~ functions provided by the different
facilities.
.
2.
learn the new macros provided for implementing the~e facilities.
3.
learn how to use the IFP facility or the forms provided for the
screen handler generation.
Restart capability.
4.
Provide the necessary data set and program 10's to be used.
Help panels.
5.
Provide the necessary host application programs and install
CICS/VS or IMS/VS if host communications is u s e d . ' ' '.
6.
Provide any necessary user programming to .perform functions
not provided by 9MSI,3770. This may b~ done yi~'User exits.
7.
Provide the NCP /VS and Access Method Generations if online
diskette transmission or OMS/3770 Host: Communications is
used.
'
~,
left-right and up-down scrolling capability.
Automatic prompting for field
defini~ions.
OMS/3770 forms allow an application programmer to describe the
3770 interface with the display operator. In order to use the screen
handler function of DMS/3770 for specifying operator communications,
certain forms must be filled out, keyed and input to the DMS/3770
screen handler generator. The forms are divided into two groups: (1)
data definition and (2) screen handler definition. Data definition
consists of the buffer definition form. This form allows the user to
specify the formats of buffers or records. A OMS/3770 data definition
processor edits this form and then generates, in card form, the
appropriate 3770 code for the definitions. These definitions can then
be added to a MACLIB or source statement library for reference at
assembly time for the application.
There are two forms which provide for the screen handler definition.
Contents of these forms allow input of basic program information of
field editing characteristics.
The host communication function supports the BSC mode of line use.
SOlC support is also available.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ) ,
OMS/3770 requires the followin'gsystem configuration:
An IBM S/370 mdl .115 or I~~ger for DOS/VS, an IBM mcll135 or
larger for OS/VS1 or an IBM mdl 145 or larger for OS/VS2 and
comparable mdls of the IBM 3031, 3032, and 3033. The machine
configuration for OMS/3770 varies according to the user's
application needs. The requirement for operation under CICS/VS
or IMS/VS is anyS/370 with enough real storage to meet the
combined operating requirements of CICS/VS or IMS/~S, the host
operating system, the appropriate access methods ':-,and other
------- ----:= - - :§~5: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER MACRO ASSEMBLER
6024002
PURPOSE
The Macro Assembler operates with the IBM Personal Computer Disk
Operating System (DOS). Programs written in Assembler language are
assembled into executable machine code that may run several times
faster than equivalent high-level language routines. Additionally, the
Assembler permits the programmer to design detailed program
functions that are often impossible in a higher-level language.
Assembler-produced programs, called "object" files, may be called
from programs written from the following IBM Personal Computer
languages: BASIC, Pascal, and FORTRAN.
HIGHLIGHTS
Relocatable object modules
- Definition of macros to generate commonly-used instruction
sequences
- Two versions: 96KB macro and 64KB subset
Machine language of each instruction
- Start and end addresses
~ Name, length, class of each segment
- Public and local names and their attributes
- Line numbers
- Alphabetic cross-reference of variables
Compatible with IBM Personal Computer BASIC, Pascal, and
FORTRAN programs
The Assembler language program is created using a text editor such as
the EDLIN utility program that is packaged with DOS, or a full-screen
text editor such as the Personal Editor (6024051) which is a separate
licensed program. The Macro Assembler is then used to assemble the
program. Next, the DOS Linker translates the Assembler relocatable
output into a load module, ready for loading and execution. While this
process must take place on a 64KB or larger diskette system, the load
module itself could be run on a diskette system with as little as 32KB
memory. When a load module is designed for use as a subroutine of a
higher-level language program (IBM Personal Computer BASIC, Pascal,
or FORTRAN), the appropriate instructions must be included in the
calling program.
Both versions of the Macro Assembler are co-resident on one diskette.
A reference manual is packaged with the diskette.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Customers are responsible for producing backup copies of the original
diskettes when copying is permitted according to the terms and
conditions of the IBM Program License Agreement and perform backup
and recovery procedures for data diskettes.
BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
An IBM 5160 Personal Computer XT or an IBM 5150 Personal
Computer with at least 96KB of memory and one diskette drive. One of
the following display options required for te,xt entry:
IBM 5151 Monochrome Display and the IBM Monochrome Display
.
and Printer Adapter
IBM Color Display and the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
A 40- or 80-column black/white or 40- or SO-column color
monitor with the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
A minimum 96KB, one diskette drive sy~tf!m Is required to produce an
assembler language object module using the full Macro Assembler
version. A subset version is provided to assemble programs on a 64KB
system. This version does not support macros, repeat functions (REPT,
IRP, IRPC), record pseudo-ops, or structure pseudo-ops.
I
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
'
B6ttl Assembler versions must be executed under control of the IBM
Personal Computer Dis~ Operating System (DOS) Version 1 or
subsequent versions or releases. When used with the IBM Personal
Computer Disk,Operating System Version 2.0, the Macro Assembler
may, reside on a fixed disk drive, and it may access fixed disk files. The
DOS .Linker program (on the DOS Diskette) is also required for the
linkage editor process. A text editinQ program (EDLIN) for entry of the
Assembler, source program, is reSident on the DOS Diskette. If
full-screen text editing is required, the Personal Editor is available as a
separate product..,
. PACKAGING
IBM Personal Computer Macro Assembler Reference Manual- The
correct procedures- for.: writing, assembling, linking and running an
Assembler program are: described in the Macro Assembler Reference
Manual. A complete instruction set reference is included. Details about
the Linker program and EDLIN are' included in the IBM Personal
Computer Di~k Operating System.Manual.
.
.
PP 6024-002.1
Mar 83
New
------- ----:: - - :S~5: ISG
PP 6024-003.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER BASIC COMPILER
6024003
PURPOSE
With BASIC Compiler, programs written in IBM Personal Computer
BASIC (Interpreter) may be converted to object code for improved
run-time performance. Most functions supported by the Disk and
Advanced versions of the BASIC Interpreter are also supported by the
BASIC Compiler.
HIGHLIGHTS
Programs may be written and tested using the BASIC Interpreter and
the BASIC program editor. Performance gains of several times over
interpreter timings are possible (results vary by program). Object
modules may be linked with subroutines written with the IBM Personal
Computer Macro Assembler. Compiled programs may not be listed or
modified, as source or BASIC Interpreter files can, thus providing some
application security. Some double-precision arithmetic is supported by
the compiler (trig functions, FOR-NEXT loop variables). The compiler
checks every program statement for syntax errors during compilation.
(BASIC Interpreter checks syntax of statements during program
execution. It may miss errors in untested statements.) Demo program
provided for training purposes. Compiler" metacommands" (directives)
are available to control output formats and run-time options.
DESCRIPTION
The BASIC Compiler permits a programmer to convert an existing
program written in IBM Personal Computer BASIC (Interpreter) to
object code for a significant improvement in run-time performance. A
high degree of compatibility between the interpreter and compiler has
been maintained to minimize program modifications.
Each BASIC program to be compiled must be created as a source
(ASCII) file using the BASIC program editor or an editor such as the
EDLIN utility program on the DOS diskette. The compiler is then used
to compile the program, producing a machine language file. Finally, a
Linker program resident on the BASIC Compiler diskette is used to
convert the machine language file into one that is ready for loading and
execution (load module). The compiled load module contains some
language functions that the interpreter has in the system unit's
read-only-memory (ROM). For this reason, the compiled program may
be larger in memory than the interpreter version plus the BASIC or
BASICA (resident) Interpreter extensions.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer is responsible for producing backup copies of the original
compiler diskettes.
Application programs using compiled code may require licensed
run-time libraries. Information concerning distribution must be
obtained from IBM.
Usage of the run-time module is an option taken at compile time.
Programs compiled without this option can be distributed with no
additional considerations, but may require significantly more diskette
space.
Since there are some minor differences between the language functions
supported by the BASIC Interpreter and Compiler versions, the
customer should be prepared to make changes to an existing interpreter
program prior to compilation. These differences are summarized in the
Compatibility section below.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
A minimum 64KB, one-diskette drive system is required to compile a
BASIC program, although the program itself may be executable on a
smaller system (two drives are recommended for easier operation).
While the IBM Monochrome Display with the IBM Monochrome Display
and Printer Adapter as well as the IBM Color Display with the
Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter (40- or eO-column formats) are
supported, eO-columns are recommended for displaying compiler
messages and listings.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM Personal Computer DOS Diskette provides the necessary I/O
routines and linker. When used with DOS Version 2.0, the BASIC
Compiler may reside on a fixed disk drive, and it may access fixed disk
files.
COMPATIBILITY
BASIC Interpreter Command,
Function, or Statement
BASIC Compiler Differences
LOAD, SAVE, AUTO, EDIT, LIST, Not supported on compiler. These
ILlST, DELETE, MERGE, NEW,
commands .are normally associated
RENUM, CONT
with program editing in the interpreter environment.
CHAIN, COMMON
Compiler function is a subset of
interpreter. MERGE, DELETE and
ALL options operate on lines in an
interpretive program only. COMMON must appear in each program;
variables must be listed in the same
order in each program.
Commands referencing "CAS1:"
(LIST, RUN, LOAD, SAVE, etc.)
and MOTOR DEF FN,
DEFINT /SNG/DBL/STR, and
DIM
Cassette operations are not supported. In a compiler program these
statements must appear before
functions or variables are referenced.
Dynamic array dimensioning and
ERASE statement
Not supported.
Integer overflow error handling
Subset of interpreter function. /0
compiler option available to provide
additional support.
"Soft Key" support (default char- Defaults are not supported. Proacter strings assigned to function grams may assign values using KEY
keys F1-F10)
statement.
String handling
Character-string length in interpretive BASIC is 256 characters; in
compiled BASIC it may be up to
32,767 characters. The string descriptor (referred to by VARPTR and
some assembler langua\1e subroutines) is three bytes long 10 the interpreter; four bytes in the compiler.
DRAW, PLAY
"X String" and "-variable" require
use of VARPTR.
OPEN COM
LEN • number option must be added
to support GET or PUT
DOCUMENTATION
IBM Personal Computer BASIC Compiler Manual,
The BASIC Compiler Manual should be used with the BASIC Reference
Manual (6025013) and the Disk Operating System Manual (6172220).
The BASIC Reference Manual contains additional cross-reference
information to the compiler product, and will be shipped with new
system units.
PACKAGING
The BASIC Compiler is resident on· two diskettes. It is packaged with
the IBM Personal Computer BASIC Compiler Manual.
--.----- ----.:.:::::
----:E~~ ISG
PP 6024-004.1
Do .not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
New
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
VISICALC*
6024004
PURPOSE
VisiCalc is an electronic spreadsheet application.
HIGHLIGHTS
A "worksheet" of 254 rows and 63 columns
Automatic recalculation of entire worksheet with new or changed
data
Automatic recalculation which takes care of the order of
recalculation
Step-by-step instructions with examples for all major features
Quick Reference Summary card for easy reference
Overlay of mUltiple worksheets to a single worksheet
Variable column width
Ability to view two parts of worksheet simultaneously
Horizontal and Vertical dual-window synchronization
Extensive functions and operators
Fixed Title option for scrolling
Replicate function for repetitive entries
Transcendental functions
Scientific notation available
Communicates with other programs through the DIF··
format
DESCRIPTION
VisiCalc is a program that creates worksheets in which a user can
create dynamic tables of information. Each worksheet is composed of
254 rows and 63 columns which allow for 16,002 (254 X 63) unique
locations or "cells". VisiCalc allows the user to perform processing in
these tables by Lising algebraic formulas in cell locations in which the
variables are other cell locations: When the value'in one cell location
changes, the entire worksheet including cell formulas is automatically
recalculated. The display screen is called the window to the worksheet
in which the resultant values (the result of calculating the formulas) are
displayed. The formulas can be changed in place (edited), or moved or
duplicated (by single cell or block of cells) to another location on the
worksheet and saved on disk or diskette for later editing / processing.
Two or more worksheets can be "overlayed", allowing for combination
of data. Blocks of the worksheet can be saved in DIF·· format which
can then be read by applications supporting the DIF·· format such as
VisiPlot···, and Multiplan by Microsoft. DIF format does not ,include
cell formulas, only the resultant values. This application is known also
as an "electronic spreadsheet" .
VisiCalc for the IBM Personal Computer is a unique tool which allows
the businessman, the accountant, the analyst, and the planner an
efficient way to solve their problems with no knowledge of a traditional
programming language. VisiCalc combines the convenience and
familiarity of a pocket calculator with the powerful memory and
electronic screen capabilities of the. IBM Personal Computer. Taking
advantage of the tutorial nature of the documentation, new users will be
able to build a spread sheet of numeric values easily, which they can
then modify, causing the complete spread sheet to be recalculated
.
using the new value or values entered.
Users can add labels, headings, and lines to their data to allow the
printing of reports displaying the different "what if" situations which
can be computed with the simple change of one or more of the data
elements.
The Vi siCa Ie program providos tho facility to arrange data into a grid of
up to 63 columns and 254 rows. Any element in this grid can be a
numeric value, a label, or a formula. These formulas allow elements of
the grid to relate to other elements, and have a wide range of flexibility.
The formulas can also use the standard functions provided by VisiCalc.
Some of these are: Summation, net present value, integer, and
trigonometric functions.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer must perform an initial setup procedure to format blank
diskette(s) and copy portions of DOS onto the diskette(s). A specificationfile must be created for unique requirements; or, one of the sample
files. can be used. A DOS batch file can be prepared to automatically
"boot" the emulation p~ogram at power-on time.
BRA",CH OFFIC:E RESPONSIBILITIES (None)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
An IBM 5150 Personal Computer with at least 64KB of memory, and
one diskette drive or an IBM 6160 Personal Computer XT is required.
In addition, ,one of the following BO-column display options is required:
IBM 5151 Monochrome Display and the IBM'Monochrome Display
and Printer Adapter (1504900)'
.
IBM Color Display and the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
An BO-column black/white or BO-column color monitor with the
IBM Color/Graphics Monitor ~dapter
'
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS '
IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 1.1 or
2.0
The VisiCalc· prOgram resides on diskette only. VisiCalc· data files may
reside on diskette or fixed disk.
PACKAGING
VisiCalc is distributed with the following:
User's Reference Manual ... Quick Reference Summary Card ... one
program diskette ... one backup program diskette
•
Trademark of Personal Software, Inc.
•• Trademark of Software Arts. Inc.
••• Trademark of VisiCorp.
------- ----:: - - :§"f~ ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
MarS3
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
EASVWRITERVERSION 1.1
6024005
PURPOSE
EasyWriter is a versatile and easy-to-use word processor featuring a
menu-driven interface that allows users with varied skills to be
productive quickly.
HIGHLIGHTS
Full-screen editing
Variable margln size
Variable line spacing
Insert and delete characters, words and lines
Undelete (bring back) deleted characters and words
Help menus on screen
Automatic page numbering
Search and replace
Margin justification
Tab set
Titles and headings
Block moves and copies
Line centering
Word count
Linking and appending files
VisiCalc* print files may be converted and merged into EasyWriter
documents with the transfer program.
DESCRIPTION
EasyWriter allows users to write letters, reports, articles, even books.
The text can be edited on the screen before it's printed, allowing the
user to make changes, prepare personalized form letters, and much
more.
Once EasyWriter is loaded into the computer's memory, EasyWriter
displays the first of three system menus -- the File System menu.
From this menu the user can save, revise, delete, link, protect, edit,
append and format a file. The user can print a file from any menu. The
Help menu describes options available to the user while text is being
worked on. The Additional Commands menu allows the user to
perform special functions such as setting margins and tabs as well as
displaying the document in a print format.
All 12 fonts of the IBM 5152 model 2 Graphics Printer are available to
the user. In addition, print files can be transmitted over the Asynchronous Communications Adapter to a serial printer.
The simple text entry and the full-function; full-screen text editor
facilitate: Adding, inserting, deleting, and correcting of existing files;
horizontal and vertical scrolling through text; and global selective search
and replace. This is combined with the flexibility of formatting the
output to the printer.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Customers are responsible for producing backup copies of the original
diskettes, when copying is permitted, according to the terms and
conditions of the IBM Program License Agreement. Customers must
install DOS on the EasyWriter program diskette according to instructions in the EasyWriter Reference Manual.
BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
An IBM 5150 Personal Computer with at least 64KB of memory and
one diskette drive or an IBM 5160 Personal Computer XT is required.
In addition, one of the following SO-column display options is required:
IBM 5151 Monochrome Display and the IBM Monochrome Display
and Printer Adapter
IBM Color Display and the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
An aO-column black/white or SO-column color monitor with the
IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
The available work area in a Personal Computer with 64KB is 13.9KB.
To avoid an out of space condition when running on a 64KB system, the
user may split a large file into two smaller files. These may be linked
together and treated as a single document. In a 96KB or larger system,
EasyWriter supports a larger document size, up to a maximum of 24KB
characters.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System Version 1 or subsequent versions and releases. The EasyWriter program resides on
diskette only. EasyWriter data files may reside on diskette or fixed disk.
Any DOS formatted diskette may be used for EasyWriter files.
PACKAGING
Reference Manual... Quick Reference Summary card... one program
diskette
*
PP 6024-005.1
VisiCalc is a trademark of Personal Software, Inc.
New
------- ----:: - - :§~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER PASCAL COMPILER
6024010
PURPOSE
The IBM PC Pascal Compiler operates with the IBM Personal Computer
Disk Operating System (DOS) .. It provides the. capability to compile
Pascal programs conforming to ISO Working Draft #6 (with the
exception of conformant arrays).
HIGHLIGHTS
Generally conforms to ISO Draft (lSO/TC 97/SC 5 N595)
Separate compilation of large program segments
Object modules may be combined with subroutines written in IBM
PC FORTRAN or Macro Assembler
Variable length strings
Super-array type supported
Machine-oriented constructs
Compiler Directives and Metacommands
Flags for Jumps, Globals, Identifier level, Control level header,
trailer, general listing format textual error and warning messages
Extended CASE range
Bitwise logical Boolean operators
Extended Intrinsics
Extended I/O
DESCRIPTION
The Pascal Compiler is available as an optional software product. The
IBM Personal Computer Pascal version supports all of the facilities of
the International Standards Organization (ISO) Working Draft #6, with
the exception of conformant array parameters, which are instead
provided by the "super array" type. Many additional features are also
supported.
The Pascal program must be created as a source (text) file using a text
editor such as the EDLIN utility program that is packaged with DOS on
the DOS Diskette, or the Personal Editor, which is a separate IBM
product. The Pascal Compiler is then used to compile the program,
producing a machine language (object) file in relocatable format. Finally,
the Linker program, packaged with DOS on the DOS Diskette, is used
to convert the relocatable program into one that is ready for loading and
execution at a specific memory address.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer is responsible for producing backup copies of the original
compiler diskettes. Since the reference manual does not provide a
tutorial on the language, the customer should have some prior
knowledge of Pascal.
BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
An IBM 5150 Personal Computer with at least 128KB of memory, and
two diskette drives... one of the following display options required for
text entry:
IBM 5151 Monochrome Display and the IBM Monochrome Display
and Printer Adapter
IBM Color Display and the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
A 40- or 80-column black/white or 40- or 80-column color
monitor with the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
The IBM 5152 model 2 Graphics Printer is recommended
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 1 or
subsequent versions or releases
•. ' If a compiled program performs diskette I/O, the IBM Personal
Computer DOS must be diskette and momory resident.
PACKAGING
A;Pascal ,Compiler Reference Manual. Since the Disk Operating
System (DOS) is used during the program entry, compilation, linking,
and execution phases;t~e DOS Reference Manual is required.
The Pascal Compiler comes on three diskettes.
PP 6024-010.1
Mar 83
New
- ----- ---:: - - ::5-:;:5: ISG
PP 6024-011.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
---..
Mar 83
New
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER COBOL COMPILER
6024011
PURPOSE
The IBM 5152 model 2 Graphics Printer is recommended.
With the COBOL compiler, programs may be written in ANSI standard
COBOL. These programs are then compiled to an interpretive object
code for execution on the IBM Personal Computer.
The COBOL compiler for the Personal Computer is designed according
to the specifications for American National Standard (ANS) Programming Language COBOL (X3.23-1974) as understood and interpreted by
IBM as of February 1982. American National Standard COBOL is
compatible with, and identical to, ISO 1989-1978 standard of the
International Organization for Standardization.
HIGHLIGHTS
The following functional modules are supported:
1 NUC1, 2
1 TBL 1, 2
1 SEQ1, 2
1 REL 0, 2
1 INX 0,2
1 LIB 0, 2
1 IPC 0, 2
(Nucleus)
(Table-handling)
(Sequential 1-0) except RERUN
(Relative 1-0) except RERUN
(Segmentation)
(Library)
(Inter-program Communication)
Additional Features
From ANS Level 2 Nucleus:
Level 88 conditions
AND, OR, NOT conditions
Nested IF statements
STRING and UNSTRING
PERFORM VARYING .... UNTIL
From ANS Level 2 Table- Handling:
SEARCH ALL statement
From ANS Level 1 Debug (DEB 0,2)
SOURCE-COMPUTER
clause
paragraph
WITH
DEBUGGING
MODE
Other IBM Personal Computer COBOL Features
Object modules may be linked with modules produced by the IBM
Personal Computer Macro Assembler
ACCEPT and DISPLAY extensions for formatted screen handling
CHAIN to other programs
DESCRIPTION
The COBOL compiler for the Personal Computer is designed according
to the specifications for American National Standard (ANS) Programming Language COBOL (X3.23-1974) as understood and interpreted by
IBM as of February 1982. American National Standard COBOL is
compatible with, and identical to, ISO 1989-1978 standard of the
International Organization for Standardization.
Each COBOL program must be created as a source (text) file using a
text editor such as the EDLIN utility program that is packaged with the
IBM Personal Computer DOS on the DOS Diskette, or the Personal
Editor, which has full-screen function. The COBOL Compiler is then
used to compile the program, producing an object file in relocatable
format. Finally, the Linker program is used to convert the relocatable
file into one ready for loading and execution using the COBOL run-time
library.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer is responsible for producing backup copies of the original
cOrTlpiler diskettes. Since the reference manual does not provide a
tutorial on the language, the user should have some prior knowledge of
COBOL. Programs may be written on standard COBOL coding forms.
The COBOL run-time library contains proprietary code. A distribution
agreement between the customer and IBM is required before application programs can be distributed to others. For additional information,
see the COBOL Reference Manual, or write to IBM, PO Box 1328-P,
Boca Raton, Florida 33432.
BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
An IBM 5150 Personal Computer with a minimum of 64KB memory and
two diskette drives or an IBM 6160 Personal Computer XT is required
to compile a COBOL program, although the program itself may be
executable on a smaller system. An 80-column display is recommended for displayinp compiler messages and listings. One of the following
display options IS required:
An IBM 6161 Monochrome Display and the IBM Monochrome
Display and Printer Adapter
An IBM Color Display and the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
A 40- or 80-column black/white or 40- or 80-column Color
monitor with the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 1 or
subsequent versions or releases is required. When the IBM Personal
Computer Disk Operating System Version 2.0 is used, the COBOL
compiler may be resident on a fixed disk drive and it may access fixed
disk files.
PACKAGING
IBM Personal Computer COBOL Reference Manual. Since the IBM
Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS) is used during the
program compilation, linking, and execution phases, the DOS Reference
Manual is required. If the Personal Editor is used to enter the
programs, the Personal Editor Reference Manual is required. The
COBOL Compiler is resident on two diskettes packaged with the IBM
Personal Computer COBOL Reference Manual.
---------------
Do not reproduce without written permission
=::: :5~5: ISG
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
PP 6024-016.1
Mar 83
New
UCSD p-System* with UCSD Pascal*
6024016
UCSD p-System with FORTRAN-77
6024017
PURPOSE
The UCSD p-System consists of an operating system and either one or
two languages for the IBM Personal Computer. The p-System provides
the programmer with an extended Version IV.O of the operating system,
including a full-screen editor, program debugger, graphics support, an
assembler, file handler, native code generator, and a print spooler. The
system is available with either UCSD Pascal, FORTRAN-77, or both
languages.
HIGHLIGHTS
The p-System provides an excellent environment for program
development.
The language compilers generate "p-code", a portable, machineindependent format.
A Native Code Generator may be used to convert p-code to
efficient code for better performance.
Machine-level reference and tutorial documentation is provided.
FORTRAN-77 is ANSI-1977 level, supporting a wide range of
engineering and scientific applications
It provides extensions to UCSD Pascal for development and
commercial programming.
Structured programming produces programs that are more efficient
and easier to maintain.
DESCRIPTION
The UCSD p-System, with either UCSD Pascal or FORTRAN-77, is
designed to run on an IBM Personal Computer with a minimum of 64KB
and two diskette drives. A program is entered via the p-System's.
editor, then compiled to p-code and stored on diskette. The p-code
version can then be exocuted as needed. The p-System filer maintains
a library of user-written programs on diskette. For convenience,
run-time or execution routines may be moved to an application program
diskette.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer is responsible for producing backup copies of the original
diskette or for copying UCSD p-System files onto application program
diskettes. Such copying is provided for convenience, but UCSD
p-System resident diskottes may not be distributed to other users.
BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
A minimum 64KB, two diskette drive system is required to run the
UCSD p-System, although some application programs may execute in
less memory.
Both 40- and SO-column display output is supported although
SO-column displays (IBM Monochrome or Color Display) are recommended.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Run-time routines may be packaged with application programs to
provide the necessary execution prerequisites, although licensing of
such routines is required for redistribution to others.
DATA SECURITY
The customer is responsible for the protection of data from unintended
modification, destruction, or disclosure, and for the accuracy and
integrity of the results.
DOCUMENTATION
, Publications are packaged with diskettes for the products described
, a~ove. They are:
Y
Development (p-System)
Beginner's Guide for the UCSD p-System ... User's Guide for the
UCSD p-System~... Internal Architecture Guide for the UCSD
p-System ... Assemb(er.Reference Manual for the UCSD p-System
FORTRAN- il Compile~
FORTRAN-77 Reference Manual for the UCSD p-System
UCSD Pa'scal Compiler
UCSD Pascal Reference for the UCSD p-System
PACKAGING
The three major p-System components are the development (operating)
system, FORTRAN-77 compiler, and UCSD Pascal compiler. They are
packaged as four products on diskettes with related publications. They
are available as the development system with a language. The second
language is available with the development system or at a later time.
p-System with UCSD Pascal
UCSD Pascal Compiler
p-System with FORTRAN-77
FORTRAN-77 Compiler
•
UCSD p-System and UCSD Pascal are trademarks of the Regents
of the University of California.
-.-.-.
- -- ---:: - - :5~5: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
PP 6024-022.1
MarS3
PROGRAM PRODUCTS
New
MULTIPLAN by MICROSOFT
6024022
PURPOSE
The IBM Personal Computer Multiplan is an advanced electronic
spreadsheet for financial modeling and reporting.
HIGtiLiGHTS
Provides a "worksheet" of 255 rows X 63 columns
Tutorial models on diskette
Online helptext
Linking of active model to models on secondary (disk) storage
Full support of IBM Personal Computer keyboard
Full support of color capabilities
Variable column width
Natural language commands and variable (cell) names up to S
display windows
Extensive functions and operators
Automatic recalculation which takes care of the order of recalculation
Sorting of alphabetic or numeric data
Cell protection
Continuous formatting (allows entries across cell boundaries)
Full-line (cell) editing
Iterative solutions to simultaneous equations in more than one
variable
DESCRIPTION
The IBM Personal Computer Multiplan is a spread-sheet simulator
which is applicable to many different kinds of numeric modeling and
planning. It provides a framework for holding the relationships between
constant and varying elements of a numer:::: model. This gives the user
the opportunity to do projections, what-ifs, sensitivity analysis, budget
and resource planning, scheduling, and a host of other applications that
involve extensive manipulation of numbers and formulas.
The electronic worksheet is represented by a grid 'of cells. The user fills
out the worksheet by entering words, numbers, or formulas into the
cells. In this respect, the "electronic worksheet" is like a ledger with
headings, values, and algebraic formulas filled via the keyboard, and the
display screen provides a window to view the worksheet. Two or more
completely different parts of the worksheet can be viewed through
windows, or entire areas of the worksheet can be given a name which
can be used in formulas and commands to refer to all the cells in the
area. Cells may be "designed" (formatted) to further reflect the type of
data they contain. For applications which require a "third dimension"
(depth), Multiplan allows creation of more than one sheet. The active
sheet may then refer to named-cells on different, inactive sheets.
After backing up the diskettes and transferring DOS to the program
diskette, Multiplan is loaded by inserting the program diskette and
turning on the computer. The user may obtain help at any time during
the session by pressing "H" for help from the main menu or "?" from
any sub-menu.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Customers are responsible for producing backup copies of the original
diskettes when copying is permitted according to the terms and
conditions of the IBM Program License Agreement and perform backup
and recovery procedures for data diskettes.
BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None)
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
An IBM 5150 Personal Computer with at least 64KB of memory and
one diskette drive, or an IBM 5160 Personal Computer XT is required.
In addition, one of the following display options is required:
IBM 5151 Monochrome Display and the IBM Monochrome Display
and Printer Adapter
IBM Color Display and the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter.
A 40- or SO-column black/white or 40- or aO-column color
monitor with the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter
The IBM 5152 model 2 Graphics Printer is required in order to print a
worksheet.
'
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 1 or
subsequent versions or releases When used with the IBM Personal
Computer Disk Operating System Version 2.0, Multiplan may be
resident on a fixed disk drive and it will support files on the fixed disk.
COMPATIBILITY
Multiplan can read DIF~ files from diskette put there by Multiplan or any
of the VisiCalc** series pac.:
Minimum System Requirements: In addition to the' requirement for
5702-SC1, this feature requires a 3741 directly attached.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: 5702-sC1.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Manual
A system/3 model 10 includes: IBM 5410 Processing Unit model A13
(12K bytes) ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 2 or A2 ... IBM 5448
Disk Storage Drive model A 1 ... plus other devices required for a model
10 Disk System.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: 5702-sC1.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM System/3 5448 Disk Storage Drive Program Reference Manual
(GC21-5168) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
5702-SC1; 5702-SC1 feature #6026/#6027.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
System/3 3741 Reference
Bibliography (GC20-8080).
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: An IBM system/3 model 8 includes:
.IBM 5408 Processing Unit model A14 (16K bytes) ••• IBM 5444 Disk
Storage Drive model A2 ... IBM 5448 Disk Storage Drive model A1 .•.
plus other devices required for a model 8.
(GC21-5113)
R1,F1
R1,F1,R2
R1,F1,R2,F2
R1,Fl,D1 (5445)
R1,F1,D1,D2 (5445)
R1,F1,D1,D2 (5448)
R1,F1,R2,F2,D1
(5445)
Rl,F1,R2,F2,D1,D2
(5445)
R1,F1,R2,F2,D1,D2
(5448)
Dedicated System
w/
w/o
console
console
Dual Programming
w/o
console
console
w/
2.75K
3.00K
3.00K
3.75K*
3.75K
4.50K
3.75K
3.75K*
4.00K
4.00K
4.75K
4.75K
5.50K
4.75K
3.50K*
4.00K
4.00K
4.50K
4.50K
5.50K
4.50K
4.00K,
3.75K
4.75K
4.50K
4.75K
4.50K
5.75K
5.50K
3.00K
3.25K
3.25K
3.75K
4.00K
4.75K
4.00K
·*Notes:
...
System/3
6448 DISK STORAGE DRIVE FEATURE
(Feature #6074)
PURPOSE
K
R1,F1
R2/R2,F2
01
01,02
- 1024 bytes (decimal)
• 5444 drive 1
... 5444 drive 2
a
5445 drive 1
... 5448/5445 drive 1 and drive2
For tape support, add O.50K to the above numbers.
The 5448 Disk Storage Drive on the system/3 models 8 and 10 is
supported by the SCP as an input/output and data storage device. The
5448 is not supported for either system or library residence. Except for
split cylinder files and offline multivolume files, the 5448 file organizations (sequential, indexed, and direct) and access methods are the same
as for the 5445.
For configurations indicated with an asterisk, add 0.75K instead of
O.50K.
For BSCA support (with LINE 1 and LINE 2, ICA, local display adapter or
ML/MP), add 0.25K to the above numbers. ICA and display adapter
are supported on the model 8 only. BsCA support is not required if
only running MRJE, since MRJE supplies its own BsCA support.
Note: To access files on the 5448, the RPG II compiler requires the Disk
RPG II 5445 Disk Storage Drive feature (5702-RG1, feature #6014),
and the Disk Sort program requires the Disk Sort 5445 Disk Storage
feature (5702-sM 1, feature #6010).
For 3741 directly'attached, add 0.75K to the above numbers.
Disk Utility Programs: The Disk Utility Programs used to prepare
and maintain the 5448 include the following:
'
DESCRIPTION
$INIT
$ALT
$BUILD
$LABEL
$DELET
,:$COPY
':$DCOPV
$PCOPY
Disk Initialization
Alternate Track Assignment
Alternate Track Rebuild
File and Volume Label Display
File Delete Program
Copy/Dump Program
Dump/Restore Program
Disk Pack Backup/Restore Program
Copy/Dump Programs: By using unit codes 01 and 02, $COPY can be
used to copy files or entire volumes. For the COPYFILE function, all the
features for 5444 and 5445 copies are supported. Using, the COPYPACK function, a volume can be copied as follows: 5444 to 5444 ...
5448 to 5448.
Dump/Restore Prograin: By using the unit code 01 or 02, the $DCOPY
program' can be used to dump a 5448 volume to magnetic tape for
backup, or to restore a 5448 volume from a tape created by this
proqram. It is not possible to restore a 5444 or. 5445 tape to a 6448,
nor IS it possible to restore a 5448 tape to a 5444 or 5445.
Disk Pack' Backup/Restore Program: ,The Disk Pack Backup/Restore
Program ($PCOPY)'provides a method to backup a 5448 volume (01 or
02) onto tWo 5440 disk cartridges and to restore a 5448 volume from
two 5440 disk cartridges created by this program. When the 6440 disk
cartridges contain a 5448 backup,' they are protected and may only be
accessed by $PCOPY or $INIT (using TYPE-CLEAR).
'
Multiple Program Requests: system/3 Program Products and System
Control Programming of program type 5702 which are ordered from
PIDfor shipment at the same time may be shipped to the user stacked
on a 5440 disk cartridge.
--.--- ----
SCP 5703-SC1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - - :§~E: ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
MODEL 4 and MODEL 6 BASE SCP
5703-SC1
PURPOSE
These programs perform the system control functions that are basic to
a commercially-oriented IBM System/3 model 6 installation, or to an
IBM System/3 model 4 installation. They are designed to run on either
a model 4 or a model 6, except as noted in the program descriptions.
Devices Supported:
Model 4
Model 6
Description
X
X
129 Card Recorder model 1, 2 or 3
2222 Printer model 1 or 2
2265 Display Station model 2
(6406-B3 or B4 is required)
5213 Printer model 1, 2 or 3
5213 Printer model 3
'
5404 Processing Unit model A 18
5406 Processing Unit model B2, B3 or B4
6444 Disk Storage Drive model 1, 2 or 3
5447 Disk Storage and Control
model A 1 or A2
5496 Data Recorder model 1
X
DESCRIPTION
Disk System Management Programs: The disk system management
programs are designed to generate and maintain a disk resident system
which facilitates the compilation, generation, and execution of
programs.
X
X
The management programs consist of a supervisor and a scheduler
which provide the user with the advantages of:
X
Automatic job-to-job transition.
Selective retrieval of programs stored in object libraries on disk.
Selective retrieval of programs and procedures stored in libraries on
disk.
Functional ability of expanded core storage (program overlay).
Support of ROLLIN/ROLL OUT capability - the ability to roll out a
program during its execution, bring in an inquiry program to be
executed and upon its completion, restart the original program at
point of interruption.
Data Management and I/O Support for the control of Input/Output
Services.
Execution of progrems from cataloged procedures - Operation
Control Language Procedures can be catalm Mechanicsburg)
Switched
Nonswitched point-to-point
Multipoint (System/3 is control station)
...
System/3
System/360, System/370
The IBM System/3 model 4 Communications Control Program (CCP)
provides cortrol program services needed for local or remote communication with workstations.
The services are:
RPG II access to terminals attached to the CPU and to the Binary
Synchronous Co~munications Adapter (BSCA).
.: Program Fetch as a result of terminal operator request.
Switched
Nonswitched point-to-point
Multipoint (System/3 is tributary)
In addition to controlling terminals, the System/3 can operate as a
tributary terminal (BSCA only) to a host System/360 or System/370.
In this configuration, the System/3 is a sub-host controlling terminals
and is itself a terminal to another system .
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Resource Management to reduce contention between programs
accessing the same files, provide access to terminals and manage
storage available for application programs.
multiple
System/34
Switched
Nonswitched point-to-point
Multipoint (System/3 is control station)
COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL PROGRAM
Feature /lS033 (model 4 only) .
.. PURPOSE
Concurrent program execution.· ail~wing
programs within the available storage. ".
Switched
Nonswitched point-to-point
System/7
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Terminal Monitoring to accept
3270 Information Display System
Point-to-point (switched and nonswitched)
Multipoint tributary
5703-SC1; 5703-SC1 feature #6010/#6011.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Manual
With the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA)
3741 Data Station model 2 and 3741 Programmable Workstation
model 4
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
System/3 3741 Reference
Bibliography (GC20-8080).
Display Station (model 1 or 2)
Printer (model 1 or 2)
Printer (model 1 or 2)
Printer (model 2)
application
·data and terminal commands.
Display Format Facility (DFF)~hich' permits the support of 3270
systems with a minimum of coding in RPG II.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: The Communications Control Program
requires an IBM System/3 model 4 which includes an IBM 5404
Processing Unit model A18 (64K bytes) ... An IBM 5447 Disk Storage
and Control .•. An IBM 5213 model 3 Printer... An IBM 3277 model 1
Display Station (for CCP messages)... and one of the devices listed
under "Terminals and Features Supported".
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Since CCP is pre-generated by IBM, to install CCP the user simply
copies one of two versions from the distribution disk cartridge.
Do not reproduce without written permission
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/3 NIdi 4 and Mdl 6 Base SCP (cont'd)
Execution of CCP requires the System Control Programming (5703SC1).
No special programming systems requirement exists for the running of
system assignments. The use of the Display Format Generator routines
and the Printer Format Generator routines require the Overlay Linkage
Editor (5703-SC1, feature #6011).
"
For the preparation of application programs, the RPG II Compiler
(5703- RG 1) is required. For the preparation of sort jobs to be run under
control of CCP, the CCP/Disk Sort program (5703-SM2) is required.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
5703-SC1; 5703-SC1 feature #6011.
COMPATIBILITY
This Communications Control program is upward compatible with with
the CCP for the model 8 and 10 (5702-SC1, feature #6033). The
interface between the system and the operator is different from that of
the model 8 or 10.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Model 4 Introduction (GC21-5146) ... Model
System Design Guide (GC21-5148) .. , Model
Reference Manual (GC21-5150) ... Model
(GC21-5149) ... Terminal Operator's Guide,
Messages Manual (GC21-5170) ... System/3
8080).
4 CCP Concepts and
4 CCP Programmer's
4 Operator's Guide
(GC21-7580) ... CCP
Bibliography (GC20-
SCP5703-SC1.3
Mar 83
Major Revision
---
--- ---:: - - :5~5: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SCP 5704-SC1.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
5704-SC1. 5704-SC2
PURPOSE
Support of Checkpoint/ Restart capability - The ability to write
checkpoint records ,when using problem programs that have
Checkpoint/Restart capabilities (such as COBOL). Restart provides
the facility to resume the execution of programs from the last
checkpoint rather than from the beginning, if processing is
terminated via a machine failure or an operator initiated immediate
cancel. (Checkpoint/Restart is supported in Partition 1 only and,
using 5704-SC2, checkpointed programs must be 48K or less and
must not be using file sharing or external buffers.)
These 'programs perform the system's control functions for the
installation. They are supplied by IBM with the system at no additional
charge.
,,'
System Control Programming (SCP) must be ordered from PID prior to
Order Confirmation (OC) time.
DESCRIPTION
The SCP consists of Disk System Management, System Control
Programs, and System Service Programs. Operation of the system is
by means of Operator Control Commands (OCC) and Operation Control
Language (OCL) statements. Libraries on disk store object programs,
source programs and OCl procedures.
SCP 5704-SC1 is designed to support model 15A, 15B and 15C.
Model 15A has 5444 Disk Storage Drives and, optionally, 5445 Disk
Storage. Models 15B and 15C have the 3340 Direct Access Storage
Facility. SCP 5704-SC2 is designed to support model 150, which has
the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility and, optionally, the 3344 Direct
Access Storage.
For 5704-SC1, the SCP and libraries must reside on a 5444 or 3340.
System residence (pack or area from which Initial Program load occurs
and which contains the SCP library) must be on drive 1. The user
libraries may reside on either of the 5444 drives or on drive 1 or 2 of a
3340.
On the 3340, programs are stored in special areas on a 3348 data
module called 5444 simulation areas. Each 5444 simulation area is
large enough to contain data from one 5440 disk cartridge. Two 5444
simulation areas on a data module mounted on 3340 drive 1 can be
used by system programming and are referred to as R1 and F1. Two
5444 simulation areas on a data module mounted on drive 2 can be
used by system programmin~ and are referred to as R2 and F2. Use of
these areas for program reSIdence is the same as an actual 5444 disk
storage drive.
For 5704-SC2, the SCP and libraries must reside on a 3340 or 3344.
System residence can be on drive 1 (3340) or drive 3 (3344 only). The
user libraries may reside on any drive.
•
The Tape Sort program supports Checkpoint/Restart but uses its
own routines rather than the system routines.
CRT /Keyboard simplifies operational control and speeds communications between the operator and the system.
New halt approach - The need for operator intervention when
system errors are encountered is reduced to a minimum through
the use of system assigned automatic error defaults. The user has
the flexibility of being able to specify the severity level of errors that
he wishes his operator to control.
Reduced system overhead-Improved transient handling, reduced
interpartition interlock time and faster operator communication with
the CRT should reduce system overhead (i.e., time required for
such functions as initiate/terminate, open/close, allocate) as
compared with the model 10.
The Interval timer - a standard feature on all 5415 Processing Units - is
supported in one of the following levels:
The time-of-day function is used by the system to time-stamp
certain messages in the System History Area, and it can be used in
application programs written in RPG II, COBOL, FORTRAN or
Assembler.
Full timer support, in addition to the time-of-day function, allows
the user to time intervals.
Multiprogramming
On the 3340 or 3344, programs are stored in 5444 simulation areas.
However, assignments of these areas can be made by the user.
System/3 model 15 allows the concurrent execution of one user
program in each of the two program partitions (5704-SC1) or three
program partitions (5704-SC2). Programs share the CPU facilities,
thus reducing the time that the system is in an unproductive waiting
state.
On the 3344 (model 150 only) each drive contains four main data areas
and eight 5444 simulation areas. The main data areas are supported in
similar fashion to those on a 3348 data module. A simulation area on
drive 1 (3340) or drive 3 (3344 only) is set by IPL as F1 (or R1) by the
user and can be used for system programming by the three partitions.
Then, from three to nine additional simolation areas can be referred to
as R1 (or F1), F2 and R2 by the three partitions. The designation of
units (except for IPL unit) as F1, R1, F2 and R2 is accomplished by
partition OCl assignment.
The supervisor controls priority for CPU processing, giving one
partition priority over the other partition. All programs operate with
interrupts enabled - when an interrupt occurs, the supervisor gains
control, processes the interrupt, and gives control to the highest
priority program that is in a ready state. Control is given up by a
high priority program when it encounters a condition that prevents
further processing. Control is taken away from a lower priority
program at the completion of an event for which the higher priority
program is waiting.
Both data files and program libraries can reside on a 5444. Only data
files can reside on a 5445; programs can be stored in data files on a
5445, but to use them, they must be cataloged into the 5444 library.
On a 3340 or 3344, data files reside in the main data area, and libraries
reside in 5444 simulation areas.
System/3 model 15 differs from other System/3 models in these ways:
Support of different devices and features
Multiprogramming
Spooling of a unit record input and/or output
Different Operator Interface
Disk System Management: The Disk System Management consists of a
supervisor, scheduler and data management facilities for operation and
, support of the system and for execution of user programs. Highlights
.include: ;
,Automatic Job-to-Job transition in any partition.
,.
Sel'~ctive
.retrieval of object programs, source programs, and
from libraries on disk.
procedure~
• ,., ,Execution of programs by using cataloged procedures - OCl
'. procedures can be cataloged In the library and called by the
scheduler at execution time.
Support of ROllOUT/ROLLIN capability - The ability to roll out a
program during its execution, bring in an inquiry program to be
executed and upon its completion, restart the original program.
ROllOUT/ROLLIN is supported by 'RPG II, COBOL, and FORTRAN, and Is available to Assembler users; it is not supported for
Sorts, Utilities and System.,);Control and Service Programs.
(ROLLOUT /ROlLiN is supported in Partition .1 only and is not
supported by 6704-SC2.) ." .. , .
Spooling
Spooling uses either a 5445 or a main data area on a 3340/3344
for intermediate storage of unit record input and output. It allows a
single input or output device to serve all partitions.
Spooling increases throughput by reducing the time the CPU waits
for the completion of unit-record I/O operations. With spooling,
the unit-record input and output is performed at disk I/O speed. A
job's normal punched-card input (including operation control
statements) is read from the card reader and stored on disk in an
input queue before the start of the job. Similarly, a job's output is
stored on disk in an output queue and printed and / or punched at a
later time.
One of the following levels of spooling support may be selected
during system generation: Printing only ... printing and punching ...
printing and Input ... printing, punching and input. The selected
level of support may be used in any or all partitions.
The following devices are supported for spooling input and/or
output: MFCU1, MFCU2, MFCM1, MFCM2, 1442, 2501, 1403.
The 3741 directly attached is supported by spooling as an input
device.
Data Management: Data Management routines provide an interface
between the user program and the required data file(s). Data Management services are provided for disk files, tape files, card files, diskette
files, printer files, and CRT files. In addition, a device-independent
access method is supported.
Disk Data Management: Records may span physical disk boundaries
(sectors, tracks, cylinders); the user need not be aware of the physical
'boundaries when he writes programs to access the data. Record sizes
may range from 1 byte to 64K bytes, although a particular program
(such as RPG II) may restrict the maximum size. The fixed length
records may be blocked or unblocked for processing, and the blocking
factor may vary from program to program.
------- -----
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - - ::E~S: ISG
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SCP 5704-SC1.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
System/3 Model 15 SCP (cont'd)
The following table shows the file organizations and maximum number
of files for the 5444, 5445, 3340, and 3344.
File Organizations Supported
5444 disk
5445 disk
3340 data module
Main data area
Simulation area
3344 disk
Main data area
Simulation area
Sequential
Indexed
X
X
Direct
X
X
X
X
Number of
Files (Max)
50
50 or 1000
X
X
X
X
50
X
X
1000
50
X
X
X
X
1000
A file may be large enough to require more than one disk pack.
Multivolume sequential or indexed files may be online (all volumes
mounted during file allocation) or offline (all volumes not necessarily
mounted during file allocation); multi-volume direct files must be online.
Offline multi-volume files are not allowed on the IPL drive. Multivolume files are not supported under CCP, and they cannot be shared.
External buffers (5704-SC2 only): An optional data management
technique allows disk I/O buffers to be outside of the object program
but within the partition.
File Sharing: Both SCPs allow the sharing of a disk file between
partitions. However, 5704-SC2 has very few restrictions compared
with 5704-SC1.
Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory for all disk files. Data
and labels are stored as a-bit bytes on disk.
Tape Data Management: The 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem is
supported by data management. Magnetic tape is used as a data
storage medium only; libraries and programs are not supported on tape,
but they can be contained in data files on tape. The following features
are supported by the SCP tape data management routines:
Fixed or variable length records
Blocked or unblocked records
Physical block size from 18 bytes to 32K bytes
Multi-volume files
Multi-file volumes
Unlabeled or labeled (ANSI or IBM Standard labels) tapes.
(Non-standard labels on input will be bypassed.)
Recording format: EBCDIC or ASCII
Tape Error Statistics
Tape support is functionally equivalent to tape support on .other
System/3 models, except that only the model 15 supports multi-file
tape volumes.
Card I/O Data Management
5424 MFCU - read 96 columns ... punch 96 columns ... print ... feed .. .
deferred punch or print ... stacker select ... single or double buffering .. .
combined file processing .. , 64 EBCDIC characters for read, punch, or
print ... same as model 10 support.
2560 MFCM - read 1-80 columns .. , punch 1-80 columns... print
1-64 positions on 1-6 lines ... feed ... stacker select ... single or double
buffering ... deferred punch or print ... combined file processing ... 256
EBCDIC characters for read or punch; 64 characters for print.
1442 - read 80 columns .. , punch 1-80 columns ... read card image
(column binary) ... feed ... stacker select ... single or double buffering ...
combined file processing .. , 256 EBCDIC characters for read or punch
(except for card image mode) .. , same as model 10 support.
2501 - read 1-80 columns ... read card image (column binary) ... single
or double buffering ... 256 EBCDIC characters (except for card image
mode).
Diskette Data Management
3741 Directly attached - read 1-128 characters ... write 1':'128
characters ... single or double buffering... 256 EBCDIC characters ...
support similar to card I/O support ... for 3741 models 3 and 4, does
.
not support the Application Control Language (ACL).
Printer Data Management
1403 - print 132';'character line .. , skip to line number before or after
print ... space 0, 1, 2, or 3 before or after print ... page overflow
detection ... Universal Character Set ... same as model 10 support.
3284 - print 120-, 126-, or 132-character line ... skip to line number
before or after print ... space 0, 1, 2, or 3 before print... space 1, 2, or
3 after print ... page overflow detection ... 64 'EBCDIC character set.
CRT/Keyboard Data Management: The 3277-1 Display Station is
supported for output records, and in conjunction with the 78-key
Operator Console Keyboard, for input and update records. The top 7
lines (each 40 characters) of the CRT screen are used, to a maximum
area of 279 positions (the last position of this area is reserved for
system use). Data can be displayed using any of the 64 EBCDIC
characters allowed by the 3277. The program function keys 1-9 can be
individually allocated by user programs.
Device Independent Data Management: A sequential file that uses Device
Independent Data Management can be assigned at program execution
time to one of the following devices: 1403, 3284, 5424, 2560, 1442,
2501,3741 directly attached, 5444, 5445,3340,3344 or 3410/3411.
The following functions are supported: Double buffering, MFCU card
printing, fixed length record processing, multi-volume tape file
processing, and support of EBCDIC formats.
The following functions are not supported: stacker selection, forms
control, record updating, record addition, combined file processing,
multi-volume disk file processing, variable-length record processing,
deferred opening of tape files, and support of ASCII formats.
Communications Management: Five communications interfaces are
provided: RPG II Telecommunications (BSCA) support, RPG " 3270
Display Control Feature, BSCA Multiline/Multipoint (ML/MP) support,
Multiple Line Terminal Adapter (MLTA) 10CS, and the Communications
Control Program. The Terminal Support Chart shows the terminals
supported by each interface. Refer to System/3 model 15 RPG pages
for information on RPG "support. The MLTA 10CS is provided as a
PSHRPQ and the Communications Control Program is an SCP feature.
BSCA Multiline/Multipoint Support: Configurations supported are
point-to-point nonswitched, point-to-point switched and multipoint
leased line with the System/3 as a multi-dropped terminal or a control
station. Also provided is the capability to operate two BSCA lines
simultaneously on one System/3. The two BSCAs may have different
configurations. For a list of BSC devices and of the communications
modes in which each device is supported (e.g., point-to-point,
multipOint, etc.), see M5415 page. Support for 3270 terminals via the
Display Adapter (#4601) is also included.
Program counters are maintained on disk to accumulate performance
information per BSC line. Counters are logged at CLOSE time. A utility
program allows the counters to be displayed.
RPG II Telecommunications Specifications must not be used in the
same RPG " program to which subroutines using Multiline/Multipoint
support are linked.
For compilation, ML/MP requires the SCP, including the macros, and
requires an Assembler.
Other I/O Data Management: Two different SCP subroutines (SUBR07
and SUBR08) are supplied to perform device control and data
management services for the 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. Each
subroutine is used with a user-written RPG II or Assembler program.
An SCP subroutine (SUBR09) is supplied to perform device control and
data management services for the 1419 Magnetic Character Reader.
The subroutine is used with a user-written RPG " or Assembler
program.
An SCP subroutine is supplied to perform device control and data
management services for the 3881 Optical Mark Reader. The
subroutine is used with a user-written RPG " or Assembler program
and is functionally equivalent to the model 10 3881 feature.
--- -
SCP 5704-SC1.3
Do not reproduce without written permission
--- ----
:: - - :S~5: ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/3 Model 15 SCP (cont'd)
TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART FOR SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15
Terminals
Operating
with S/3-15
1050
2740 mdl1
2740 mdl2
2741
3767 (as
274X)
5100/5110 (as a
2741)
CMCST
5/7 ACC
5100 (Note 7)
5/360 & 370
5/360 mdl20
1130 (Note 5)
2780
2770
5/7
2972 mdls 8.11
3735
5/3
3270
3600 (Note 5)
3741 mdls 2. 4
Series/1
5/32& 5/34
5280 (as a 3741)
5110
5231mdl2 (as a
3741
6670 (as a 2770)
Type
Comm
Programming Support
(1)
RPGII
MLMP
MLTA
CCP
Communication Code (2)
ASCII
EBCDIC
Nor
Tran
Nor
Tran
PTTC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(6)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
IX
X
55
55
55
55
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ss
X
'x
X
55
55
55
SS
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
BSC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
esc
BSC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
,X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Communication Network (3)
MultiPoint-to-Point
Point
Ctrl
Sw
Nonsw Trib
Stat
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(4)
X
X
X(4)
X
X
X(4)
X(4)
X(4)
X(4)
X(4)
X
Legend:
X
=
Supported
Not Supported
Notes:
1.
Type Comm - Type of Communication
55 ... Sta rt / Stop
BSC ... Binary Synchronous Communication
2.
Communication Code (as supported by
System/3 model 15)
Nor • Normal
Tran .. Transparency
PTTC· Paper Tape Transmission Code
3.
Communication Network
Point-to- Point Switched (Sw)
Point-to-Point Nonswitched (Nonsw)
Multipoint, System/3 as a tributary station (Trib)
Multipoint, System/3 as a control station (Ctrl Stat)
4.
Not supported by RPG II.
5.
Requires no-charge RPQ.
6.
3275 only.
7.
The 5100 is supported by CCP as a 2741.
System Control and Service Programs: These programs allow the user to
prepare and service his disks, and to perform basic functions necessary
for ,the operation of the system. They are:
Library Maintenance Program: Allows the user to produce and
service the source and object program libraries. The principal
of the program are as follows:
'
attached.
Printer.
Printed output may be on either the 1403 or 3284
With 5704-SC2, the library entry retrieval subroutine (SUBR15)
may be incorporated into a user-written RPG II or Assembler
program in order to retrieve entries from any disk library (object.
routine, source, procedure).
Copy/Dump Program: Used in the system generation process to
provide the user with a system tailored for his installation. The
program supports both file-to-file copies (COpy) and volume-tovolume copies (DUMP).
The file copy routines provide the user with an easy to use method
of creating a file backup on another disk, tape, or printer. Additionally, it provides an easy method of moving files from one location to
another, with both file limit modifications and reorganization. The
program supports one input and one output per execution. Disk
input can be a sequential, indexed. or direct file.
A sequential file can be copied to an indexed file, and tape, card
and diskette files are supported for input and output. When
copying a file. the printer may be specified in addition to other
output. Records may be deleted from files by specifying a deletion
code and position within each record. These deleted records may
be printed. Using 5704-SC2, a direct file may be created from a
sequential or direct file.
The volume copy allows the user to copy an entire volume to
another volume for backup. The following combinations are
supported:
f~l"!ctions
5704-SC1: 5444 to 5444 ... 5445 to 5445 ... 3340 to 3340.
• Add (or delete) source programs, procedures and object
. programs to (or from) the user's program libraries.
5704-SC2: 3340 to 3340 ... 3344 to 3344 ... 3340 to 3344 ...
3344 to 3340.
• Allocate or re-allocate disk space to the libraries or to the system
history area.
For the 3340 and 3344, either a main data area or simulation ajea
can be copied. A simulation area can be copied only to another
simulation area; a main data area can be copied only to another
main data area.
• Display library contents.
• Copy any or all of a library from one disk to another.
• Copy a module into 8 library fr.om a disk file.
• Copy a module from a library to a disk file.
• Modify entries in the source library.
Libraries may reside on either;a 5444 or in 8 5444 simulation area
on a 3340/3344. Control statements may be entered from the
system input device: MFCU, MFCM, 1442, 2501, 3741 directly
attached, or 3277 keyboard. Library entries may be "punched" on
the system punch device: MFCU, MFC~, 1442, or 3741 directly
Dump/Restore Program: Copies a disk volume to magnetic tape
and restores a disk volume from a tape previously created by this
program. For 5444 or 5444 simulation area, backup can be on
diskettes.
Dump: 5444 to tape Qr diskettes ... 5445 to tape ... 3340/3344
main data area to tape ... 5444 simulation area to tape or diskettes.
Restore: 5444 on tape or diskettes to 5444 or 5444 simulation area
... 5445 on tape to 5445 ... 3340/3344 main data area on tape to
3340/3344 main data area ... 5444 simulation area on tape or
diskettes to 5444 or 5444 simulation area.
--- -
--- ----
:: - - :5~5: ISG
SCP 5704-SC1.4
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/3 Model 15 SCP (cont'd)
A tape created by this program can be used only by this program to
restore the disk data at some future time, and cannot be accessed
as a typical data.file.
Macros: Macros provide data management and input/output 'upport for
the control of input/output services through assembler languages. The
I/O services are available to users of assembler languages1hrough the
macro processor in conjunction with the disk system input/ output
service macros. The keyword macro statements coded!Jy'the user are
expanded by the macro processor using the macro prototype definitions. The expanded code is in a form that can be' processed by an
assembler.
Other Disk Programs: The fol/owing programs are used for all disk units
unless otherwise indicated.
Disk Initialization Program - Performs surface analysis on the
user's disk and formats the disk according to disk system management requirements. (Not used for 5444 simulation areas.)
Macros provide system services, general I/O support, unit record
device support, disk device support, tape device support, and
CRT /Keyboard support.
'
Alternate Track Assignment - Allows the user to assign an
alternate track in place of a defective one and print the data content
of the area in error.
MRJE/WS: System/3 mode./ 15 MULTI-LEAVING Remote Job Entry
Workstation (MRJE/WS) Program permits a model 15 equipped with a
BSCA with EBCDIC (Text Transparency optional) to function as a
MULTI-LEAVING Remote Job Entry Work Station communicating over
a point-to-point (switched or nonswitched) line to a 370.
Alternate Track Rebuild - Permits the user to correct data on the
assigned alternate track.
File and Volume Label Display - Permits the user to display the
entire Volume Table of Contents (VTOC) of a disk, or the information pertaining to a single file.
.
This program, included with the base SCP 5704-SC2 (model 150), is
functionally identical to the MRJE/WS feature for System/3 models
15A, 15B, and 15C (see 5704-SCl feature #6001/#6002 in the SCP
section). In addition, the 3344 Direct Access Storage is supported for
input and output.
File Delete - is one means for deleting temporary data files from a
disk and the only means for the user to delete permanent data files
from a disk.
The following programs are used only for the disks indicated:
Concurrent CE Diagnostics: CE diagnostics for selected devices and
functions are distributed with SCP and generated as a user system.
These diagnostic functions can be executed under SCP control in one
partition while another program (such as CCP) is being executed in
another partition.
System History Area Display (5445, 3340 or 3344) - Permits the
user to display or copy the contents of the system history area.
1000- File VTOC Conversion (5445, 3340 or 3344) - Permits the
user to convert a 50-file VTOC on a 5445 to a lOOO-file VTOC.
For any disk with a 1ooo-file VTOC, this program can be used to
compress the entries in the VTOC. For the 5704-SC2 user, only
the compress function is supported.
SCP Main Storage Requirements: (These figures are provided for
planning purposes only and are subject to change.)
Supervisor Requirements: The base supervisor supports multiprogramming and certain I/O devices. The size of the resident supervisor
support depends on the options selected during system generation:
Simulation Area Program (3340 or 3344) - This program is used to
service the 5444 simulation areas on a 3340 or 3344. Copy, clear,
rename, and display functions are provided.
Reassign Alternate Track (334O)-Permits the user to reassign the
location of the alternate tracks on a data module so it can be used
on a System/360 or System/370. The module is physically
interchangeable, but the data is not.
Base Supervisor
Options:
3340 Support
3410/3411 Support
3741 Support
3284 Support
5424 M FCU Support
2560 MFCM Support
1442 Support
2501 Support
I/O Storage Protection
Unit Record Restart
Memory Resident Overlays
Second 1403 Printer
BSCA/DA/LCA/MLTA/SIOC
Add forSIOC
BSCA/DA/LCA/MLTA/BSCC
96K to 256 CPU
384K or 512K CPU
Add for BSCA/DA/LCA
AddforMLTA
Add forSIOC
Add for BSCC
Interval Timer
Either Time of day only
Or full timer support
Spooling
Minimum
Maximum
CCP
Minimum
Maximum
Recover Index (3340 or 3344) - Permits the user to recover the
index of an indexed file following abnormal program termination.
File Compress (3340 or 3344) - Permits the user to rearrange files
to make one contiguous space out of the unused space between
files. Using 5704-SC2, all of the files in a main data area may be
copies to tape and be restored individually to disk.
Spool File Copy Program (5704-SC2 only) - Provides the user with
access to the spool queues from a program partition--either a
batch partition or a CCP partition. With this program, the user can:
(1) copy the $SPOOL file to disk or tape; (2) copy jobs into the
reader queue from a file or terminal; (3) copy print steps to a file;
(4) copy punch steps to a file; and (5) copy spool queue status
displays to a file or terminal.
5445 Data Interchange Utility (5445) (5704-SC1 only) - This
program is used prior to taking a 2316 Disk Pack from System/3 to
System/360 or System/370 for processing, or prior to using the
disk pack on System/3 after returning from System/360 or
System/370. To use a 2316 Disk Pack in an interchange environment, it must have been initialized on System/3 and the interchange files must have been aliocated_on_System/3. System/360
or System/370 OS or DOS may-read, update, or in OS only,
OUTPUT to these files, but may not create or extend themslnceOS and DOS do not create or update the System/3 Volume Table
of Contents (VTOC).
Other!ape Programs (3410/34111:
Tape Initialization Program - Allows the users of magnetic tape to
create and delete standard tape volume labels, check for unexpired
files and to display existing volume and data file labels.
Tape Error Summary Program - Prints magnetic tape error statistics
that have been accumulated during processing.
6704-SC1
(ReI. 6)
6704-SC2
(ReI. 2)
17.45K
21.07K-
0.94
N/A
1.16
0.50
0.50
0.65
0.69
0.25
0.21
1.16
0.50
0.50
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.49
0.34
0.50
N/A
1.41
0.40
0.49
0.25-·
0.50
2.02
1.17
1.27
0.16
0.09
0.41
0.35
0.45
0.47
2.00
2.00
7.11
17.21 '
7.11
20.79
1.69
6.32
1.91
6.65
• Includes 3340/3344 support.
-·Includes extended restart as well as unit record restart.
J
The size of the supervisor is a multiple of 2K bytes.
, .. ,
",
The requirement for spooling depends on the devices and partitions
selected for spooling. For example, with 7.11 K spooling' support,
printer output from one partition can be spooled.
->
Overlay Linkage Editor: The Overlay Linkage Editor creates loadable
programs from multiple relocatable modules. Output from the Overlay
Linkage Editor may be cataloged ir:t the object library and/or punched
In addition to the resident supervisor requirements listed atX)ve, a
into cards or written on a diskette. Overlay structures may be created
resident file share common area is also required for SCP 6704-SC2.
automatically or as desiQnated by the user from relocatable program
This area is a minimum of 2.ooK and resides at the upper limit of main
modules. The Overlay Lmkage Editor is used by the RPG II, COBOl,
':,:
'
and FORTRAN Compilers, by the Basic Assembler Program, by the I storage.
CCP /Disk Sort Program and by the System Generation procedures.
'I Depending on what modules are included during system generation, the
System Generation: When a user Installs a system, he performs a size of the actual supervisor may not agree exactly with the size
computed from the published tables;'
"System Generation" (SYSGEN) to create a supervisor and data
management support for his particular configuration, and to include the
Refer to System Generstlon Reference Msnusl". GC21-7616, for
program products he has ordered. During system generation, the
additional information regarding storage _requirem~nts.
source library, object library, and system history area are established.
The characteristics of the required spooling support are also defined.
I
------- ----:: - - :§':f§: ISG
SCP 5704-SC1.5
Do not reproduce without written permission
MarS3
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/3 Model 15 SCP (cont'd)
System Control and Service Programs
Library Maintenance Program
Copy/Dump Program
Dump/Restore Program
Disk Programs
Disk Initialization
Alternate Track Assignment
Alternate Track Rebuild
File and Volume Label Display
,
50-File VTOC
1000-File VTOC
File Delete
System History Area Display
1000-File VTOC Conversion
3340 Simulation Area Program
Reassign Alternate Track
Recover Index
File Compress
Spool File Copy
5445 Data Interchange Utility
Tape Programs
Tape Initialization
Tape Error Summary
Overlay Linkage Editor
System Generation
Macro Processor
Minimum Partition
10K+
10K+
SK+
S,K+
SK+
SK
SK'
10 K-18K
SK
SK
SK
10K
SK
10K
10K
10K
SK
SK
SK
10K+
30K
12K+
+ These programs use additional storage, if available.
•
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
i
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Min'imum System Requirements: For an IBM System/3 model 15 with
5415 A Processing Unit:
5415 Processing Unit model A 17 (48K bytes)
3277 Display Station model 1 with feature #4632 (Operator
Console Keyboard)
5444 Disk Storage Drive
1403 Printer
One of the following:
- 5424 MFCU
- 2560 MFCM
- 1442 Card Read Punch
For a System/3 model 15 with 5415B or 5415C Processing Unit:
1255 Magnetic Character Reader models 1, 2 and 3
1419 Magnetic Character Reader model 1
38S1 Optical Mark Reader model 1 '
3741 Data Station models 1 and 2 (directly attached)
3741 P~ogrammable Workstation models 3 and 4 (directly attached)
SCP 5704-SC2 and its data management facilities support the above
devices with the following exceptions/additions:
5444 Disk Storage Drives are not supported.
5445 Disk Storage is not supported.
3344 Direct Access Storage model B2 is supported.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (None)
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Model 15 Introduction (GC21-5094) ... SCP Reference ,Manual
(GC21-5077 I for 5704-SC1) and (GC21-5162 for 5704-SC2) ...
Operator's Guide (GC21-5075) ... Messages (GC21-5076) ... System
Generation (GC21-7616) ... 3340 Reference Manual (GC21-5111) ...
3741 Reference Manual, GC21-5113 ... User's Guide to Spooling,
GC21-7632 ... Disk Concepts and Planning (GC21-7571) ... System/3
Bibliography (GC20-S0S0).
, SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15
REMOTE JOB ENTRY
WORKSTATION PROGRAM
5704-SC1 FEATURE 1/0001-Il6002
MULTI~LEAVING
PURPOSE
5704-SC1 feature #6001-#6002 is used with SCP 5704-SC1, and uses
5444, 5445 or 3340 disks.
Permits an IBM System/3 model 1S,equipped with a Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter with EBCDIC ,(Text Transparency
optional) to function as a MULTI-LEAVING Remote Job Entry Work
Station communicating over a point-to-point (switched or nonswitched) line to a System/370 operating' under control of one of the
following:
HASP II (Version 3.1 or 4.0)
ASP (Version 2.6 or 3.1)
,
Remote Entry Services (RES) of JES under OS'/VS1
MULTI-LEAVING Work Station facilities of JES2/JES3 under
OS/VS2
VM/370 Remote Spooling Communications Subsystem (RSCS)
5415 Processing Unit model B17 (48K bytes) or model C21 (160K
bytes)
3277 Display Station model 1 with #4632 (Operator Console
Keyboard)
Any job which can be entered into the central system from locallyattached, similarly-functioned I/O devices can be entered from the
System!3 model 15 workstation.
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
1403 Printer
One of the following:
Workstation input may be read from any of the devices indicated below.
Operator messages and output data sets may be directed to any of the
devices shown below.' Output may be returned to the submitting work
station or routed to another work station or directed to local central
system I/O devices.
-
5424 MFCU
2560 MFCM
1442 Card Read Punch
3741 Data Station, directly attached
3741 Programmable Workst~tion, directly attached
For a System/3 model 15 with 54150 Processing Unit:
5415 Processing Unit model 019 (96K bytes)
3277 Display Station model 1 with #4632 (Operator Console
Keyboard)
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
1403 Printer
One of the following:
',-
5424 MFCU
2560 MFCM
1442 Card Read Punch
3741 Data Station, directly attached
,
3741. ~rogrammable Workstation, directly attached
The, following' devices are supported by SCP 5704-SC1 and its data
managem~~tfacilities :
, 5444 Disk Storage Drive models A2 and A3
5445 Disk Storage models 1,2, and 3 (maximum 4)
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility models A2, B1 and B2 (3340 is
mutually exclusive with 5444 and 5445)
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem models 1, 2 and 3
(maximum 4 tape units)
1403 Printer models 2, 5 and N1 .
3277 Display Station model 1 (console)
5424 MFCU model A1 or A2,;:,'
2560 MFCM model A1 or A2:' ,
1442 Card Read Punch model 6 or 7
2501 Card Readermodel A 1 orA2 '
3284 Printer model 1 (console)
Input·
5424 MFCU
2560 MFCM
1442 Card Read Punch··
2501 Card Reader
3741 directly attached··
1403 Printer
3284 Printer
5444 Disk Storage Drive
5445 Disk Storage
3340 Direct Access Storage
Facility
3410/3411 MagneticTape
3277 Display Station
Messages
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Output
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
• Input may be from a combination of these devices.
•• Cannot be used for both input and output simultaneously.
All disk files created by the work station program are standard
System/3 consecutive files and may be accessed by any of the
following' programs:, MRJE/WS Print Utility, SCP Copy/Dump
Program, or user-written RPG II, COBOL, FORTRAN or Assembler
programs.
When using the Workstation program, the following restrictions apply:
Column binary is not supported.
. .
Reading and punching of OS object decks requires the BSCA Text
Transparency Feature and either a 2560 MFCM or 1442 Card Read
Punch; OS object decks can be read from the 2501 Card Reader.
For unit record devices (including the 3741), input record length can
be 80 or 96 bytes; however, only the first SO bytes of the input
records will be processed by the workstation program.
------- - -----
SCP 5704-SC1.6
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - -:§~~ ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/3 Model 15 SCP (cont'd)
Files processed with the READFILE command can contain records
of other than 80 or 96 bytes. The file will be transmitted to the
host central as 80-byte records. (Regrouping the data is the user's
responsibility.)
Print records which exceed the line length of the System/3 printer
, will be truncated.
COMPATIBILITY
The model 15 MRJE/WS Program is functionally compatible with the
MRJE/WS programs for model 6, 8, 10 or 12. Differences exist only in
MRJE/WS messages, MRJE/WS commands and the MRJE/WS
program generation, which are designed to be easier to use on the
model 15.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: In addition to the minimum requirements for SCP, this feature requires a Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074) with EBCDIC. A minimum partition size of 16K
bytes is required for execution.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Model 15 MRJE/WS Reference Manual (GC21-5115)
Bibliography (GC20-8080).
System/3
5444 Disk Storage Drive mdl A2 or A3
5445 Disk Storage mdl 1, 2 or 3
(5704-SCl only)
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility
mdl A2, Bl or B2
3344 Direct Access Storage mdl B2
(5704-SC2 only)
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
mdll, 2 or 3
1403 Printer mdl 2, 5 or N 1
3277 Display Station mdl 1 (console)
5424 MFCU mdl Al or A2
2560 MFCM mdl A 1 or A2
1442 Card Read Punch mdl6 or 7'
2501 Card Reader mdl A 1 or A2
3284 Printer mdl 1 (console)
1255 MCR mdl1, 2 or 3
3881 OMR mdl 1
3741 Data Station mdl 1, 2, 3 or 4
(directly attached)
Generation
Execution
Ves
Ves
Opt
Opt
Yes
Ves
Vos
Ves
No
Req
Roq
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
No
No
No
Opt
Req
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
No
No
No
Opt
Opt
Terminals and Features Supported: Table 1 lists the devices supported by
CCP on System/3 model 15. Table 2 lists the devices of the 3270
Information Display System that are supported by model 15 CCP. Both
tables show the communications interface used to attach each device.
Listed below are the particular features supported by CCP for each
terminal, system, or device.
SVSTEM/3 MODEL 15
COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL PROGRAM
5704-SC1, FEATURE #6033-#6070/#6071
5704-SC2, FEATURE #6011/#6012
Asynchronous (start-stop) Terminals (via MLTA)
1050 Data Communication System
PURPOSE
The Communications Control Program provides control program
services needed for telecommunications systems.
5704-SCl feature #6033 is resident on a 5444 Disk Storage Drive;
5704-SCl feature 6070/6071 is resident on a 5444 simulation area on
a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility. Each feature requires the
services of the supervisor and other SCP facilities of 5704-SC1.
5704-SC2 feature #6011/#6012 is resident on a 5444 simulation area
on a, 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344 Direct Access
Storage, and it requires the services of the supervisor and other SCP
facilities of 5704-SC2.
The services included in CCP are:
- Multipoint switched
- Multipoint nonswitched
2740 Communication Terminal Model 1
-
Basic
Checking
Dial
Dial with checking
Dial with transmit control
Dial with transmit control and checking
Station Control
Station Control with checking
2740 Communication Terminal Model 2
High-Level language (COBOL, FORTRAN and RPG II) access to
asynchronous start-stop) (MLTA) and binary synchronous (BSCA,
BSCC, DA, LCA) terminals.
Program Fetch as a result of terminal operator requests.
Resource Management to reduce contention between programs
accessing the same files, provide access to terminals ,and manage
storage available for application programs.
Concurrent program execution allowing
programs within the available storage.
CCP Device Support (System)
multiple
.
application
Terminal Monitoring to accept data and terminal commands.
Display Format Facility (DFF) which permits the support of 3270
systems with a minimum of coding in high-level languages.
The Communications Control Program is designed to be an integral part
of the SCPo CCP will control program execution in one partition of a
multi-partition system. The minimum partition size is 16K bytes,
exclusive of user program areas; there is no limit on the maximum size
of the partition. One to 15 programs can run concurrently under CCP;
each program can range in size from 4K to 32K bytes. By contrast,
under CCP on the model 4, 8, 10, or 12, 1 to 8 programs can run
concurrently, and each program can range in size up to 48K bytes. In
the minimum system configuration, more than one program may be
executed under control of CCP.
Using model15A or 15B the minimum system required to support CCP
with DFF and multiple tasks is 64K. With a 48K system, OFF cannot be
used, and the user may be limited to a single task.
-
Station
Station
Station
Station
Control
Control with checking
Control with Buffer Receive
Control with Buffer Receive and checking
2741 Communication Terminal
- Basic
- Switched
3767 Communication Terminal
- Treated as a 2740 Communication Terminal (model 1 or 2) or as a
2741 Communication Terminal
System/7
-
Supported as a 2740-1
Checking
Dial with checking
Station Control with Checking
Communicating Magnetic Card Selectric® Typewriter
- Point-to- point switched (appears identical to 2741 )
With Binary Synchronous Terminals
3270 Information Display System
- Multipoint nonswitched
- Point-to-point switched (3275 only)
3735 Programmable Terminal
- Switched
- Multipoint
5110 Computer' (as a data mode CPU)
- Point-to-point (switched or nonswitched)
- Multipoint tributary
5231 model 2 (supported as a 3~41 model 2 or 4)
- Point-to':"J)0int switched or non~witched
----..-- --------==-= :5~E: ISG
SCP 5704-SC1.7
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/3 Model 15 SCP (cont'd)
3741 Data Station model 2 and 3741 Programmable Workstation
model 4
Table 1: Devices Supported by System/3 Model 15 CCP
System/3-15 Communications Interface
BSCC
Display
(160
Adapter BSCA only)
LeA MLTA
- Point-to-point (switched and nonswitched)
- Multipoint tributary
5280 Distributed Data System
- Point-to-point (switched and nonswitched)
- Multipoint tributary
Series/1
- Point-to-point (switched or nonswitched)
System/3
- Point-to-point nonswitched or switched
- Multipoint control station
- Multipoint tributary
System/7
- Point-to-point nonswitched or switched
- Multipoint tributary
System/32
- Point-to-point nonswitched or switched
- Multipoint tributary
System/34
- Point-to- Point nonswitched or switched
- Multipoint tributary
System/360 and System/370
- Point-to-point nonswitched or switched
- Multipoint with System/3 as tributary
In addition to controlling the terminals previously listed, the System/3
operates as a tributary terminal (BSCA only) to a host System/360 or
System/370. In this configuration, the System/3 is a sub-host
controlling terminals and is itself a terminal to another system.
Refer to the "Terminal Support Chart" in the System/3 model 15 SCP
programming pages for more information.
Terminals equivalent to those listed may also work, but the user must
establish the equivalency, and IBM assumes no responsibility for impact
of changes made to programming support.
1050 Data Communication
System
2740 Communication Terminal
model 1
model 2
2741 Communication Terminal
3270 Information Display
System (see Table 2)
3600 Finance Communication
System
3735 Programmable
Buffered Terminal
3741 Data Station model 2
3741 Programmable
Workstation model 4
3767 Communication Terminal
5100 Portable Computer
5230 Data Collection System
(5231 Controller model 2)
5280 Distributed Data System
Communicating Magnetic Card
Selectric Typewriter
System/3
System/7
System/32
System/34
System/360
System/370
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: In addition to the minimum system
requirements of the SCP, the Communications Control Program
requires one of the followina; MLTA (RPQ S40028) or BSCA or BSCC
or LCA or Display Adapter (#4601). In addition, at least one communications terminal of a type listed under "Terminals and Features
Supported" must be included.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Generation and execution of the model 15 Communications Control
Program requires System/3 model 15 System Control Programming. If
the MLTA is to be supported, the MLTA IOCS must be available.
No special programming system requirements exist for the running
, system assignments. For the preparation of application programs, an
, applicable compiler or assembler is required.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
CCP System .Reference Manual (GC21-7620) ... CCP Programmers
Reference,(GC21-7579) ... CCP System Operator's Guide (GC21-7619)
..: CCP Terminal Operator's Guide (GC21-7580) ... CCP General
Information (GC21-7578) ... CCP System Design Guide (GC21-5165)
... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080).
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes:
MLTA is mutually exclusive with BSCC.
.
Display Adapter is mutually exclusive with BSCA-2.
LCA is mutually exclusive with BSCA-1.
Table 2: 3270 Devices Supported by System/3 Model 15 CCP
System/3-15 Communications Interface
Display
Adapter
COMPATIBILITY
The System/3 model 15 Communications Control Program is upward
compatible with the Communications Control Program for the model 4
(5703-SC1, feature #6033), for the model 8 and 10 (5702-SC1, feature
#6033) or for the model 12 (5705-SC1, feature #6070). The'interface
between the system and the operator is different than that of the model
4,8, 10 or 12.
X
3271
Control Unit
mdl1
mdl2
3274mdl1C
Control Unit
3275 Display
Station (nonsw)
mdl1
mdl2
3275 Display
Station
(switched)
3276-2
Control Unit
3277 Display
Station
mdl1
mdl2
3278-2
Display Station
3284 Printer
mdl1
mdl2
3286 Printer
mdl1
mdl2
3287 Printer
mdl1
mdl2
3288 Line
Printer
mdl2
3289 Printer
mdl1
mdl2
BSCC
(150
BSCA only) LCA
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3270 Control Units
3271 3274 3276
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
---. - --- ---=~ :i'f§: ISG
SCP 5705-$C1.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
5705-SC1
PURPOSE
The system/3 model 12 System Control Programming (SCP) consists
of Disk System Management and System Utility Programs. These
programs perform the system's control functions. They are supplied by
IBM with the system at no additional charge.
DESCRIPTION
Program Residence: The sCP and libraries must reside on a 3340
Direct Access Storage Facility (DAsF). These programs are stored in
special areas on a 3340 data module called 5440 simulation areas.
Each simulation area is large enough to contain data from one 5540
Disk Cartridge (2.45 million bytes). Two simulation areas on a data
module mounted on 3340 Drive 1 can be used by system programming
and are referred to as Rl and Fl. Two simulation areas on a data
module mounted on Drive 2 can be used by system programming and
are referred to as R2 and F2. Use of these areas for program residence
is the same as on an actual 5444 Disk Storage Drive.
System residence (pack from which Initial Program Load occurs and
which contains the sCP library) must be on Drive 1 of a 3340 DAsF.
Libraries on the 3340 store object programs, source programs and
Operation Control Language (OCL) procedures; the user libraries may
reside on either Drive 1 or Drive 2 of a 3340 DAsF. Data files reside in
the main data area (40.8 million bytes per drive) of a 3340 data module.
Disk System Management: The Disk System Management consists
of a supervisor, scheduler and data management facilities for operation
and support of the system and for execution of user programs.
HIGHLIGHTS
Automatic job-to-job transition.
Selective retrieval of' object programs, source programs, and
procedures from libraries on disk.
Execution of programs by using catalogued procedures - OCL
procedures can be catalogued in the library and· caned by. the
.
scheduler at execution time.
Support of ROLLOUT/ROLLIN capability - The ability to rollout a
program during its execution, bring in· an inquiry program to be
executed and upon its completion, restart the original program.
ROLLOUT /ROLLIN is supported by RPG II and FORTRAN, and is
available to Assembler users; it is not supported for COBOL, Sorts,
CCP, Utilities and System Control and Utility Programs. To use
ROLLOUT/ROLLIN, a 5471 Printer-Keyboard is required.
ROLLOUT/ROLLIN is supported in Program Levell only.
Support of Checkpoint/Restart capability - The ability to write
checkpoint records when using problem programs that have
Checkpoint/Restart capabilities· (such as COBOL). Restart
provides the facility to resume the execution of programs from the
last checkpoint rather than from the beginning, if processing is
terminated for any reason (except controlled cancel) before the
normal end of job. Checkpoint/Restart is supported in Program
Levell only.
• The Tape Sort Program supports Checkpoint/Restart but uses its
own routines rather than the system routines.
Support of Dual Program Feature (DPF) - DPF allows two programs
to reside in main storage at the same time. An expanded version of
the supervisor controls program initiation, execution, and termination asynchronously in each of two main storage areas called
program levels. Except for the 3340 DAsF and the 5471 PrinterKeyboard, both program levels cannot use the same device at the
same time. (Through the use of Print Spooling, the printer can
serve both program levels.) Disk data files may be shared, but only
one program level may write to a shared file. The 5471 PrinterKeyboard may be used by both program levels for either object
program input/ output of data, or operation control information.
The Library Maintenance Program, the Macro Processor of the SCP
(5705-SC1), the Basic Assembler (5705-Asl), and the Auto
Report facility of RPG II (5705-RG1) will not run in the Dual
Program mode but can run in a dedicated mode with the Dual
Program Supervisor.
Print Spooling - Print Spooling uses the 3340 DAsF for intermediate storage of 5203 or 1403 Printer output. It allows a single
printer to serve both program levels.
Print Spooling increases throu~hputby reducing the time the CPU
waits for the completion of printer operations. With spooling, the
printer output is performed at disk I/O speed. A job's printed
output is stored in a disk area called a print queue, and printed at a
later time.
Print Spooling requires as a prerequisite, either the 5471 PrinterKeyboard, or the Dual Program feature on the 5412 CPU.
Data Management: Data Management routines provide an interface
between the user program and the required data file(s). Data Manage-
ment services are provided for disk, card,
keyboard, and tape files.
print~r,
diskette, printer-
Disk Data Management: For data files on the 3340 DAsF, the following
file organizations are. supported: Sequential, Indexed or Direct.
Processing of these files can be consecutive, sequential, or random.
Split cylinder,files are not supported.
,..,
I
Records may span physical disk boundaries (sectors, tracks, cylinders);
the user need not be aware of the physical boundaries when writing
programs to access the data. The fixed length records may be blocked
or unblocked for processing, and the blocking factor may vary from
program to program.
The main data area of a 3340 data module may contain a m~ximum of
1,000 files. A file may be large enough to require more than one disk
pack; Multivolume sequential or indexed files may be online or offline.
Multivolume direct files must be online. Offline multivolume files are
allowed on Drive 2 only.
A simulation area may contain up to'50 files. Indexedand multivolume
files are not supported in the simulation areas.
Standard system/3 Disk Labels are mandatory for all disk files. Data
and labels are stored as 8-bit bytes on disk.
Tape Data Management: The 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem is
supported by data management. Magnetic tape is used as a data
storage medium only; .libraries and programs are not supported on tape,
but they can be contained in data files on tape.
The following features are supported by the SCP tape data manage"
ment routines:
Fixed- or variable-length records
Blocked or unblocked records
Physical block size from 18 bytes to 32K bytes
Multivolume files
Unlabeled or labeled· (ANSI or IBM Standard labels) tapes·
(non-standard labels on input will be bypassed)
Recording format: EBCDIC or ASCII
Tape Error Statistics
Tape support is functionally equivalent to model 10 tape support.
Card I/O Data Management
5424 MFCU - read 1-96 columns ... punch 1-96 columns ... print ...
feed... deferred punch or print ... stacker select ... single or double
buffering ... combined file processing ... 64 EBCDIC characters for read,
punch, or print ... same as model 10 support.
1442 - read 80 columns ... punch 1-80 columns ... read card image
(column binary) ... feed ... stacker select ... single or double buffering ...
combined file processing ... 256 EBCDIC characters for read or punch
(except for card image model) ... same as model 10 support.
Printer Data Management
1403 - print 132-character line ... skip to line number before or after
print ... space 0, 1, 2 or 3 before or after print... page overflow
detection ... Universal Character Set ... same as model 10 support.
5203 - print 96-, 120- or 132-character line ... skip to line number
before or after print ... space 0, 1, 2 or 3 before or after print ... page
overflow detection ... Universal Character Set ... Dual Feed Carriage .. ,
same as model 10 support.
Diskette Data Management
3741 directly attached - read 1-128 characters ... write 1-128
characters... single or double buffering ... 256 EBCDIC characters ...
support similar to card I/O support ... for 3741 models 3 and 4, the
Application Control Language (ACL), is not supported by data
management.
'
Printer-Keyboard Data Management
5471 Printer- Keyboard - read 1-125 characters ... print 1-125
characters... 64 EBCDIC character set (except minus zero) ... same as
model 10 support.
.
Communications Management: Four communications intedaces are
provided: RPG " Telecommunications (BsCA) support, BsCA
Multiline/Multipoint (ML/MP) support, Multiple Line Terminal Adapter
(MLTA) 10Cs, and the Communications Control Program. The Terminal
Support Chart shows the terminals supported by each interface. Refer
to system/3 model 12 RPG II in the Program Product section for
information on RPG II support. The MLTA 10CS is provided as a
PsHRPQ, (5799-WKH), arid the Communications Control Program is an
SCP feature (see 5705-SC1, feature #6070).
BSCA Multiline/Multipoint Support: Configurations supported are
point-to-point nonswitched point-to-point switched and multipoint
leased line with the System 3 as a multi-dropped terminal,.or a control
statiori. Also provided, is the capability to operate two 13,sCA lines
Simultaneously on one system/3. The two BsCAs may have different
7
------- ----:: - -~~5: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/3 Mdl12 SCP (cont'd)
configurations. For a list of BSC devices and of the communications
modes in which each device is supported (e.g., point-to-point,
multipoint, etc.), see page M5412. Support for the 3270 terminals via
the Local Display Adapter is also included.
Program counters are maintained on disk to accumulate performance
information per BSC line. Counters are logged at CLOSE time. A utility
prog.ram allows the counters to be displayed.
RPG II Telecommunications Specifications must not be used in the
same RPG II program to which subroutines using Multiline/Multipoint
support are linked.
For compilation, ML/MP requires the SCP (5705-SC1), including the
macros, and ari assembler.
3881 Data Management: An SCP subroutine is supplied to perform
device control and data management services for the 3881 Optical Mark
Reader. The subroutine is used with a user-written RPG II or Assembler program and is functionally equivalent to the model 10 3881
feature.
1255 and 1419 Data Management: SCP subroutines are supplied to
perform device control and data management services for the 1255 and
1419 Magnetic Character Readers.
The 1255 Subroutine (SUBR08) and the 1419 Subroutine (SUBR09) are
used with a' user-written RPG II or Assembler program and are
functionally equivalent to the model 15 1255 (SUBR08) and 1419
(SUBR09) SCP support.
Concurrent CE Diagnostics: CE diagnostics for selected devices and
functions are distributed with the SCP and generated as a.user option.
These diagnostic functions can be executed under SCP control in
program level 1 while another program is being executed in program
level 2.
SCP 5705-SC1.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
------- ----:: - -~~E: ISG
SCP 5705-SC1.3
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/3 Mdl12 SCP (cont'd)
TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART FOR SYSTEM/3 MODEL 16
Terminals
Operating
with S/3-16
Type
Comm
Programming Support
(1)
RPGII
1050
2740 mdl1
2740 mdl2
2741
3767 (Note 7)
5100/5110
(Note 8)
eMeST
s/7 ACe
S/360 & 370
S/360 mdl20
1130 (Note 5)
2780
2770
s/7
2972 mdls 8,11
3735
S/3 mdls 4,6,8,
10,12,15
3270
3741 mdls 2, 4
Series/1
S/32 & S/34
5110
5280 (as a 3741)
5231 mdl2 (as a
3741
6670 (as a 2770)
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
X
X
X
X
X
SS
SS
ss
sse
ase
sse
sse
ase
sse
sse
sse
X
X
MLMP
MLTA
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
sse
sse
sse
esc
esc
sse
esc
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
BSe
esc
X
X
X
X
CCP
,X
X
X
X
X
Communication Code (2)
ASCII
EBCDIC
Nor
Nor
Tran
X
Tran
PTTC
Communication Network (3)
MultiPolnt-to-Polnt
Point
CtrI
Nonsw Trib
Sw
Stat
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(6)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(4)
X
X
X
X(4)
X
X(4)
X(4)
X(4)
X(4)
X(4)
Legend:
X
Supported
Supported
~ot
Notes:
1.
Type Comm - Type of Communication
SS = Start/Stop
BSC = Binary Synchronous Communication
2.
Communication Code (as supported by System/3-12)
Nor = Normal
Tran = Transparency
PTTC = Paper Tape Transmission Code
3.
Communication Network
Point-to-Point Switched (Sw)
Point-to-Point Nonswitched (Nonsw)
Multipoint, System/3 as a tributary station (Trib)
Multipoint, System/3 as a control station (Ctrl Stat)
4.
Not supported by RPG II
5.
Requires no-charge RPQ.
6.
Only the 3275 (supported by ML/MP)
7.
The 3767 is supported as a 2740 model 1 or 2 or a 2741 by CCP.
8.
The 5100 is supported as a 2741 by CCP.
System Control and Utility Programs:
These programs allow the user to prepare and maintain modules, and to
perform basic functions necessary for the operation of the system.
.
They are:
library Maintenance Program: Allows the user to produce, maintain, and
service the source and object program libraries. The principal functions
of the program are as follows:
"
Add (or delete) source programs, procedures and object programs
to (or from) the user's program libraries.
Allocate or re-allocate disk space to the libraries.
Print or punch library contents.
Copy a part or all of a library from one simulation area to another.
Copy a module into a library from a diskette (3741 directly
attached), card, or disk file (either on the simulation area or main
data area).
Modify entries in the source library.
Copy a module from a library to a disk file located on the simulation
area or main data area.
The Library Maintenance program requires a dedicated system.
Copy/Dump Program: This program supports both file-to-file copies
,
(COpy) and volume-to-volume copies (DUMP).
The 'file copy' routines provide the user with an easy-to-use method of
creating a file backup on another disk, diskette, cards, tape, or printer.
Additionally, it provides an easy method of moving files from one
location to another, with both file limit modifications and reorganization.
The program supports one input and one output per execution. Disk
input can be a sequential, indexed, or direct file. A sequential file can
be copied to an indexed file, and tape, card and diskette files are
supported for input and output. When copying a file, the printer may be
specified in addition to tape, card, diskette, or disk output. Records
may be deleted from files by specifying a deletion code and position
within each record. These deleted records may be printed.
The volume copy function of the Copy/Dump Propram copies the main
data area from one data module to another (the Simulation Area
Program copies the simulation areas).
Simulation Area Program: This program is used to service the simulation
areas of a 3340 data module. Copy, clear, move, rename, and display
functions are provided.
Dump/Restore Program: Copies an entire main data area (01, 02) to
magnetic tape and restores a main data area from a tape previously
created by this program. Copies an entire simulation area (R1, F1, R2,
F2) to magnetic tape or diskettes and restores a simulation area from
.
tape or diskettes previously created by this program.
A tape or diskettes created by this program can be used only by this
program to restore, the disk data at some future time, and can't be
accessed as a typical data file.
Spool Writer Program: This program controls the printing of the spooled
output and handles Operator Control Command (OCC) requests. The
program operates in s program level (or on a dedicated system) and is
executed like any other program. The Spool Writer requires, as, a
prerequisite, either the 5471 Printer-Keyboard, or the Dual Program
Feature on the 5412 CPU.
Execution of the program is controlled by the operator"using OCC
commands. On a dedicated system (without ,the~Dual Program
Feature), commands are entered via the 5471 Printer-Keyboard. Ona
DPF system, commands are entered via the system input device or the
5471 Printer-Keyboard (optional on a DPF system).
'
Other Disk Utilities (3340)
Disk Initialization Program - Formats ~he data module according to
disk system management requirements.
'
Alternate Track Assignment Program - Allows the user to 'assign an
alternate track in place of a defective one and print the data content
of the area in error; ,
Alternate Track Rebuild ,Program - Permits the user to correct data
on the assigned alternate track.
'
,
File and Volume La~IDisPlay Program - Permits the user to display
the entire Volume Table of ConJents (VTOC) of either a simulation
------- ----:: - - ~"f5: ISG
SCP 5705-SC1.4
Do not reproduce without written permission
MarB3
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/3 Mdl12 SCP (cont'd)
area or main data area or the VTOC information pertaining to a
single file.
System Control and Utility Programs
File Delete Program - Is one means for deleting temporary data files
from a simulation area or main data area and the only means for the
user to delete permanent data files from either a simulation area or
main data area.
Library Maintenance Program
Copy I Dump Program
Simulation Area Program
Dump/Restore Program
Spool Writer Program
Disk Programs
.
Disk Initialization
Alternate Track Assignment
Alternate Track Rebuild
File and Volume Label Display
File Delete
Recover Index
Reassign Alternate Track
File Compress
Recover Index
Tape Programs
Tape Initialization
Tape Error Summary
Overlay Linkage Editor
Macro Processor
Re-assign Alternate Track Program - Permits the user to re-assign
the location of the alternate tracks on a data module so it can be
used on a System/360 or System/370. The module is physically
interchangeable, but the data is not.
Recovery Index Program - Permits the user to recover the index of
an indexed file following abnormal program termination.
Tape Utilities (3410/3411)
Tape Initialization Program - Allows the users of magnetic tape to
create and delete standard tape volume labels, check for unexpired
files and to display existing volume and data file labels.
Tape Error Summary Program - Prints magnetic tape error
statisticsthat have been accumulated during processing.
Overlay Linkage Editor: The Overlay Linkage Editor creates loadable
programs from multiple relocatabJe modules. Output from the Overlay
Linkage Editor may be cataloged in the object library and/or punched
into cards or written on a diskette. Overlay structures may be created
automatically or as designated by the user from relocatable program
modules. The Overlay Linkage Editor is used by the COBOL and
FORTRAN Compilers, by the Basic Assembler Program, and by the
System Generation procedures. (RPG II uses its own Linkage Editor.)
System Generation: When a user installs a system, System Generation (SYSGEN) is performed to create a supervisor and data management support for the particular configuration, and to include the
program products the user has ordered. During system generation, the
source library and object library are established. The characteristics of
the required spooling support are also defined.
Macros: Macros provide data management and input/output support
for the control of input/ output services through an assembler language.
The I/O services are available to users of an assembler language
through the macro processor in conjunction with the disk system
input! output service macros. The keyword macro statements coded by
the user are expanded by the macro.process or using the macro
prototype definitions. The expanded code is in a form that can be
processed by an assembler.
Macros provide system services, general I/O support, unit record
device support, disk device support, tape device support, and
communications support.
SCP Main Storoge Requirements
Supervisor Requirements: The minimum main storage requirement for
the supervisor on the model B16 (32K), B17 (4BK), and B1B (64K), is
7.2K bytes. For the C19 (BOK) and C20 (96K), the minimum main
storage requirement is B.BK bytes. The minimum supervisor on both
the B-models and the C-models supports the following configurotion:
3340 DASF model C2
5203 or 1403 Printer
Minimum Program Level
BK*
BK*
BK*
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK**
BK
10K*
BK
10K*
10K
BK
BK
BK
12K*
* These programs use additional storage, if available.
** BK for simulation areas; 10-1BK for main data areas. Total
memory required is a function of the. number of files and the use
of the SORT function.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: As a minimum, the System Control and
Utility Programs require a configuration of the IBM System/3 model 12
which includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K) ... an
IBM 3340 DASF ... an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer ... and an IBM 5424
MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch or a directly-attached IBM
3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation. Additionally, a C19 or
C20 Processing Unit requires the Dual Program feature (#3500) for IBM
Programming Systems Support.
SCP services are also provided for the IBM 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape
Subsystem ... the IBM 5471 Printer-Keyboard ... and the IBM 3BB1
Optical Mark Reader model 1... the IBM 1255 Magnetic Character
Reader model 1, 2 and 3... and the IBM 1419 Magnetic Character
Reader model 1 (requires an RPQ on the 1419).
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (None)
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
System/3 Model 12 Introduction (GC21-5116) ... System/3 Model 12
System Control Programming Reference Manual (GC21-5130) ...
System/3 Model 12 User's Guide (GC21-5142) ... System/3
Multiline/Multipoint BSC Reference Manual (GC21-7573) '" 3881
Optical Mark Reader Model 1 Program Reference and Logic Manual
(GC21-5103) ... Tape Program Planning Manual (GC21-5040) ...
System/3 Models 12 and 15 1255 and 1419 Magnetic Character
Readers Reference and Program Logic Manual (GC21-5132) ...
System/3 Bibliography (GC20-80BO).
5424 MFCU or 1442 Card Read Punch
For the Dual Program Feature, on the B-models, add O.9K bytes; on the
~-models, the minimum supervisor supports the Dual Program feature.
For print spooling support on the B-models, add 4.BK bytes for one
program level, or 6.1 K bytes for two program levels; on the C-models,
add 5.1 K bytes for one program level, or 6.4K bytes for two program
levels.
Additional supervisor main storage is required, on any model, to
support:
BSCA-2 or ICA or LOA and/or MLMP:
3410/341'1 Magnetic Tape Subsystem:
5471 Printer-Keyboard:
3741 Data/Programmable Workstation,
directly attached: .
0.3K bytes
0.7K bytes
0.3K bytes
0.6K bytes
~Additional supervisor main storage is required, on C-models using CCP,
for a CCP intercept routine: 0.5K bytes.
When calculating the moln storage requirements for program level 1 on
any model or for program level 2 on B-models, the supervisor size
(including optional print spooling) must be rounded up to the nearest
multiple of 0.25K bytes.
When calculating the main storage requirements for program level 2 on
the C-models, the supervisor size (excluding any spooling support)
must be rounded up tothe nearest multiple of 2.0K bytes.
MULTI-LEAVING REMOTE JOB ENTRY
WORKSTATION PROGRAM
Feature #6001
PURPOSE
Permits a System/3 Disk System equipped with an Integrated
Communications Adapter (remote onl~) or a Binary Synchronous
Communications Adapter with EBCDIC (Text Transparency optional) to
function as a MULTI-LEAVING Remote Job Entry Work Station
communicating over a point-to-point (switched or non-switched) line
to a S/360 or S/370. MRJE/WS operates with one of the following:
HASP II (Version 3.1 or 4.0)
ASP (Version 2.6 or 3.1)
Remote Entry Services (RES) of JES under OS/VS1
MULTI-LEAVING Workstation facilities of JES2/JES3 under
OS/VS2
Remote spooling capability of VM/370 (RSCS)
DESCRIPTION
Any job which can be entered into the central system from locally
attached, similarly-functioned I/O devices can be entered from the
System/3 MRJE Workstation. Workstation input may be read from the
5424 MFCU, the 1442 Card Read Punch, the directly-attached 3741
Data Station/Programmable Workstation, the 3340 Direct Access
Storage Facility, the 5471 Printer-Keyboard, the 3410/3411 Magnetic
Tape Subsystem or from a combination of these devices. Operator
------- -------.:. =-= :5~5: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
SCP 5705-SC1.5
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
Mar 83
Major Revision
System/3 Mdl12 SCP (cont'd)
messages may be directed to either the System/3printer or the 5471
Printer- Keyboard.
Terminals and Features Supported: The following terminals may be
used with the Communications Control Program:
Output data sets may be directed to the System/3 printer (5203 or
1403 both of which can be spooled), the 5424 MFCU, the 1442 Card
Read Punch, the directly attached 3741 Data Station/Programmable
Workstation, or written to disk or magnetic tape. Output may be
returned to the submitting work station or routed to another workstation
or directed to local central system I/O devices.
Through the Multiple Line Terminal Adapter (MLTAI:
All files created by the MRJE/WS program are standard System/3
consecutive files and may be accessed by user-written RPG II, COBOL,
FORTRAN and Assembler Programs, or by the Copy/Dump program.
Also, the MRJE/WS Print Utility can be used to print data which was
directed to disk or tape data sets during an MRJE/WS session.
When using the MRJE/WS Program, the following restrictions apply:
Column binary is not supported.
Reading or punching of OS object decks requires the BSCA Text
Transparency feature and a 1442 Card Read Punch.
Input record lengths may be greater than 96 bytes; however, the
input file will be transmitted to the host central as 80-byte records,
and it will be the users' responsibility to regroup the data.
Print records which exceed the print positions of the System/3
printer will be truncated.
The Workstation Program requires a logging device.
The 5471 Printer-Keyboard is required only if the MRJE/WS is an
Inquiry program, or if the MRJE/WS output is being spooled.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: In addition to the minimum requirements of 5705-SC1, this feature requires a Binary Synchronous
Communications Adapter (#2074 or #2084) with EBCDIC or the
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4645 and #6202). A minimum
program level size of 14K bytes is required for execution.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (5705-SC1)
COMPATIBILITY
The model 12 MRJE/WS program is functionally compatible with the
MRJE/WS programs for System/3 model 6, 8 or 10.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
System/3 MRJE/WS Reference Manual (GC21-7621) ..• System/3
Bibliography (GC20-8080).
PURPOSE
The Communication Control Program (CCP) provides control program
services needed for telecommunications systems. This SCP feature is
resident on a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility and requires the
services of the Supervisor and other SCP facilities (5705-SC1).
The services included are:
High-Level language (COBOL, FORTRAN, and RPG II) access to
MLTA, BSCA (including the Integrated Communications Adapter),
and Local Dis~lay Adapter attached terminals.
Program Fetch as a result of terminal operator requests.
Resource Management to reduce contention between programs
accessing the same files, provide access to terminals and manage
storage available for application programs.
multiple
2740 Communication Terminal model 1
- Basic
- Checking
- Dial
- Dial with checking
- Dial with transmit control
- Dial with transmit control and checking
- Station Control
- Station Control with checking
2740 Communication Terminal model 2
- Station Control
- Station Control with checking
- Station Control with buffer receive
- Station Control with buffer receive and checking
2741 Communication Terminal
- Basic
- Switched
3767 Terminal
- Supported by CCP as a 2740 model 1 or 2 or a 2741.
- Transparent to MLTA.
Communicating Magnetic Card Selectric® Typewriter
(appears identical to 2741)
- Point-to-point switched
System/7 (appears identical to a 2740 model 1)
- Checking
- Dial with checking
- Station control with checking
With the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA), or the
Integrate,d Communications Adapter (lCA):
3270 Information Display System
- Point-to-Point nonswitched
- Multipoint nonswitched
- Switched - 3275 only
3735 Programmable Terminal
- Switched
- Multipoint
5231 model 2 (appears identical to a 3741-2, 4)
- Point-to-point switched or nonswitched
3741 Data Station model 2 and 3741 Programmable Workstation
Station model 4
- Point-to- Point (switched and nonswitched)
- Multipoint tributary
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12
COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL PROGRAM
Feature #16070
Concurrent program execution allowing
programs within the available storage.
1050 Data Communication System
- Multipoint switched
- Multipoint nonswitched
application
Terminal Monitoring to accept data and terminal commands.
Display Format Facility (OFF) which permits the support of 3270
systems with a minimum of coding in high-level languages.
The Communications Control Program is designed to be an integral part
of the SCPo CCP will control program execution in one program level on
a system with the Dual Program feature. The minimum main memory
requirements for CCP (exclusive of Supervisor requirements) are: 18K,
plus 4K for OFF, plus a user program (5K minimum). One to eight
programs can run concurrently.
5110 Computer (as a data mode CPU)
- Point-to-point (switched and nonswitched)
- Multipoint tributary
5280 Distributed Data System
- Switched
- Nonswitched point-to-point
- Multipoint tributary
Series/l
- Switched
- Nonswitched point-to-point
System/3
- Switched
- Nonswitched point-to-point
- Multipoint control station
- Multipoint tributary
System/7
- Switched
- Nonswitched Point-to-point
- Multipoint (System/3 is control station)
System/32
..
- Switched
- Nonswitched point-to-point
- Multipoint (System/3 is control station)
System/34
- Switched
- Nonswitched point-to-point
"
- Multipoint (System/3 is control station)
------- -----
SCP 5705-SC1.6
Do not reproduce without written permission
:: - -:S~~ ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/3 Mdl12 SCP (cont'd)
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
System/360 and System/370
- Switched
- Nonswitched point-to-point
- Multipoint (System/3 is tributary)
System/3 CCP General Information Manual (GC21-7578) ... System/3
CCP Program Reference Manual (GC21-7579) ... System/3 CCP
Terminal Operator's Guide GC21-7580) ... Srstem/3 Models 10 and
12 CCP System Operator's Guide (GC21-7681 ... System/3 Models 10
and 12 CCP System Reference Manual (GC21-7588) ... System/3
Bibliography (GC20-8080).
With the Local Display Adapter:
3277 Display Station
3284 Printer, model 1 or 2
3286 Printer, model 1 or 2
3288 Printer, model 2
In addition to controlling the terminals previously listed, the System/3
operates as a multipoint tributary (BSCA only) to a host S/360 or
S/370. In this configuration, the System/3 is a sub-host controlling
terminals and is itself a terminal to another system.
Refer to the "Terminal Support Chart" in the model 12 SCP section for
more information.
Terminals equivalent to those listed may also work, but the user must
establish the equivalency, and IBM assumes no responsibility for impact
of changes made to programming support.
COMPATIBILITY
The System/3 model 12 Communications Control Program is upward
compatible with the Communications Control Program for the
System/3 model 4 (feature #6033) and for the System/3 model 8 and
10 (5702-SC1, feature #6033). The interface between the system and
the operator is different than that of the model 4, 8, or 10.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements: CCP requires an IBM System/3 model
12 which includes as a minimum, an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model
B17 (48K bytes) '" an IBM 3340 DASF '" an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer
... an IBM 5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch or a
directly-attached IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation
... an IBM 5471 Printer-Keyboard ... a Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter or the Multiple Line Terminal Adapter (MLTA) RPQ
(RPQs S4OO28 through S4OO33) or the Integrated Communications
Adapter (#4645) or the Local Display Adapter (#4702) ... and at least
one communications terminal of a type listed under "Terminals and
Features Supported". Additionally, if CCP is to run on a C-model CPU,
that model requires the Dual Program feature (#3500) for IBM
.
Programming Systems Support.
CCP will operate with the Dual Program feature (DPF), however,· CCP
does not require the DPF to allow more than one program to be
executed at a time. Use of the oPF is not prohibited during execution
of the CCP, but any program executod in the other program level does
not run under control of the CCP. CCP cannot be run in both program
levels concurrently.
CCP Device Support (Systom)
3340 Direct Access Storago Facility
model C2
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit
modell, 2 or 3
5203 Printer, modell, 2 or 3
1403 Printer, model 2, 5 or N1
5424 MFCU, model Al or A2
1442 Card Read Punch, model 6 or 7
5471 Printer-Keyboard, model 1
3741 Data Station / Programmable
Workstation modell, 2, 3 or 4
(directly attached)
1255 MCR modell, 2 or 3
3881 OMR model 1
Generation
Execution
Req
Req
No
Req*
Req*
Opt
Opt
Opt
No
Opt
Opt
Opt
Opt
Req
Opt
No
No
Opt
No
No
* Either. a 5203 or 1403 Printer is required during CCP generation.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Generation and execution of the model 12 Communications Control
,Program requires IBM System/3 model 12 System Control Programming (5705;"SC1). If the MLTA is to be supported, the MLTA IOCS
(5799-WKH) must also be available.
No special programming system requirements exist for tho running of
system assignments. For tho preparation of· application programs, an
applicable compiler or assemblor is required.
Note: While MLTAcan run in either program level on the B-model CPU,
it can run in only program level one on the C-models.
- ----- ---:: - - :§~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
---.
SCP S707-AA1.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM/7 PROGRAM PREPARATION FACILITIES
5707-AA1
PURPOSE
SYSTEM/7 MACRO LIBRARY/RELOCATABLE
5707·AC1
System/7 Program Preparation Facilities provides stand-alone program
preparation capability for the System/7. This capability is complementary to the MSP /7 Host Program Preparation Facility " and allows the
user to select which of the two methods most suitably meets the user's
requirements for System/7 program preparation.
Macro Library /Relocatable provides MSP /7 support macros to operate
in the Linkage Editor and TASKING environment. Functions include:
System/7 Program Preparation Facilities provides the following
System/7 stand-alone components:
Specification Macros
•. Disk Support System/7 (5707-AG1)
Source Library Editor (5707-AE1)
System/7 Macro Library/Relocatable (MACLIB/R) (5707-AC1)
System/7 Macro Assembler (ASM/7) (5707-AD1)
System/7 Linkage Editor (LiNK/7) (5707-AF1)
System/7 Procedure Library (5707-AB1)
System/7 program preparation can also be provided concurrently with
an application via the online batch facility (EXECUTIVE/7).
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements for the System/7 Program Preparation
Facilities include:
IBM 5010 Processor Module with a minimum of 12K words of
storage for' program preparation offline and a minimum of 20K
words of storage for program preparation online. (Cycle Steal Disk
is strongly recommended when using online program preparation
facilities.)
IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module model 1 or 2 (2 platter).
5028 Operator Station.
Support is also included for the IBM 129 Card Data Recorder, 7431
Serial Printer, 2502 model A2 Card Reader and the Line Printer available
with the IBM 5024 I/O Attachment Enclosure. These devices should
be considered for ease of use and performance improvements. The
nucleus provided must be reassembled if support for the IBM 5496
Data Recorder is desired. The 5496 is supported only as an
input/ output source device.
Emulated 5022s on an IBM 3348 Data Module are supported:
However, the minimum system configuration when using the IBM 3340
Direct Access Storage Facility (DASF) is 28K words of storage.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (None)
The group order number, 5707-AA1, provides a" modules of the
System/7 Program Preparations Facilities.
System/7
System/7
System/7
System/7
System/7
System/7
System/7
*
**
***
Program Preparation Facilities (5707-AA1)
Procedure Library** (5707-AB1)*
Macro Library/Relocatable*** (5707-AC1)*
Macro Assembler (5707-AD1)*
Source Library Editor (5707-AE1)*
Linkage Editor (5707-AF1)*
Disk Support for System/7 (8-12K) (5707-AG1)
Orderable only under group order 5707-AA1, not orderable
separately.
Contains cataloged procedures.
Contains both source and object libraries ($SYSCODE).
The Disk Support System/7 (5707-AG1) can be ordered separately.
The 8K version excludes stand-alone program preparations and is
available on tape cassette. The 12K version with stand-alone program
preparation is available on 5440 only.
SYSTEM/7 PROCEDURE LIBRARY
5707·AB1
PURPOSE
The Procedure Library contains predefined catalog procedures to
support stand-alone program preparation via the System/7 Program
Preparation Facilities. The procedures are shipped as part of 5707AA 1. The user may add procedures to this library as required.
PURPOSE
DESCRIPTION
Environmental characteristics.
Physical and operational characteristics of the system.
System Macros
System Initialization.
Start timers, prepare feature modules for operation, etc.
Timer control functions that provide for program timers, time-ofday clocks, and scheduling of·periodic program execution.
Two-way communication between operator and system through
the Operator Station printer-keyboard.
Program checkout and debugging facilities providing storage dump,
snapshot dump, and storage patch via printer/keyboard or paper
tape.
Error recovery to handle machine check, power failure, and
program check interrupts.
Access Macros: Macros to control the functions of Digital, Analog and
Operator Station input/output. These include interrupt handling and
error recovery routines.
2790 Control Support
- Macros allowing use of the System/7, with 2790 control, as the
system controller for 2790 system units. (Supports. one to four
2790 Controls per System /7 .)
- Macros for area station and attached device definition, building
Transaction Control List, and Data Entry Unit List.
- Units supported include: 2791 Area Stations ... 2792 Remote
Communications Controller '" 2793 Area Stations ... 2795 Data
Entry Unit... 2796 Data Entry Unit ... 2797 Data Entry Unit ...
2798 Guidance Display Unit... 1053 Output Typewriter ... 1035
Badge Reader.
- Online Diagnostics for both area stations and 2792. Invokable
from any local or remote area station or from 5028 or 2792.
Prerequisite for systems with 2792, more than 16 area stations,
or when system availability is critical. The 2790 online diagnostics may reside either on disk or in storage. If disk resident is
specified, the 2790 diagnostics will be loaded into a partition
when required. The disk~resident version requires the partition
queuing facilities.
Asynchronous Communication Control Support .
- Macros to initiate and control data transfer via the asynchronous
communication adapter.
- A transparent data scheme to permit the transfer of load modules
to the System/7 for execution or punching to paper tape.
- Macros to simulate 2740 model 1 terminal with error checking,
which allows System /7 to send and receive data under control of
DOS/VS BTAM, QTAM, and VSAM; OS/VS BTAM, TCAM, and
VTAM.
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter Support via the
Communications Access Method.
The BSCA feature allows remote connection of a System/7 as a
processor terminal to:
- S/370 models 115, 125, and 135 (via the Integrated Communications Adapter).
- S/370 models 115 or larger (via a 2701, 2703, 3704, or 3705).
- System/3 model 6, 10 or 15 (via the System/3 BSCA).
- Another System/7 (via the BSCA).
- System/32 (via the System/32 BSCA).
Both EBCDIC and ASCII transmission codes are supported under
software control. Transparent mode is standard but allowed only
with EBCDIC. Note: S/370 model 135 ICA will not allow transparent and non-transparent code support on the same line.)
~~.
Communication may be over any 2-or 4-wire links on point-topoint (switched or nonswitched) or multipoint configurations. In
point-to-point configurations, the System/7 is supported as a
processor terminal. In a multipoint configuration, System/7 is
supported as a tributary station only with no multipoint central
capability available. Transmission is half duplex, and data transfers
in and out of System/7 storage are by means of a direct storage
access mechanism on a cycle stealing b~si~: ;
The System/7 BSCA provides the capability of remote initial
program load (lPL) from another system."- Initiation of the IPL is
controlled by the remote system. A System/7 can be IPL'd from a
remote system when it is configured as a processor terminal on a
point-to-point switched line or as a tributary station in a multipoint
- -----------=:;:
ISG
---...
:§~5:
Do not reproduce without written permission
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
SCP 5707·AA1.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
System/7 Program Preparation Facilities (cont'd)
configuration.
E8CDIC only.
The IPL message is transmitted in transparent
'
The System/7 BSCA is supported as a BSC terminal by: BTAM
under DOS/VS; BTAM and TCAM under OS/VS1 and OS/VS2;
3704/3705 emulation mode; System/3 Multiline/Multipoint
(ML/MP), RPG II and Communication Control Program (CCP).
Other Function Macros
Data conversion macros
M ultiply- Divide
Square Root
Simultaneous Disk Services
Dynamic Buffer Management
Variable-Length Character Manipulation
Double-Word Integer Arithmetic
Basic Disk Support Macros
Seek, Read, Write, and Write-Verify functions.
Multiple sector operations, including cylinder overflow support.
Multiple 5022 Modules are supported. (Seeks may be overlapped.)
Error handling routines.
Symbolic File Support Macros
5022 Disk Module
System/3 compatible, Volume Table of Contents (VTOC).
Directorized data sets with sub-allocation of data set space into
subdata sets called members.
Programs stored to disk as members of a directorized data set.
Data sets comprised of one or more tracks, members comprised of
one or more sectors.
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility (DASF)
S/370-Compatible Volume Table of Contents (VTOC)
Each 3348 data module can emulate multiple 5022 disk modules
(emulation by programming)
Emulated 5022s support all functions provided by Symbolic File
Support (SFS) for 5022 Disk Modules.
'
New Direct Access Method for 3340 on System/7 (NDAM/7)
compatible with OS/VS and DOS/VS, and S/370 DOS/VS. Can
be created, written into, and read from by System/7, S/370
OS/VS, and S/370 DOS/VS.
All models of the 3348 Data Module are supported, including the
fixed head data area.
Support provides:
Storage Resident (non-disk support) and Disk Resident Versions
(full support).
Access routines to load data sets or members
OPEN routine to locato data sets or members and make available
for access.
Access routines to SEEK, READ, WRITE, GET, PUT data sets or
member records.
CLOSE routinos to make data sets or members unavailable for
access.
Retrieval and execution of program members via @FETCH macro.
Programs which are FETCHed into storage may contain a single
overlay area defined at link-edit time by Link/7 for loading called
routines.
Access routines support:
Basic Access Method - Access to data sets or members by relative
sector number. One request allows read and write of multiple
sectors across track and cylinder boundaries.
Direct Access Method - Access to fixed-length records of data
sets or members randomly by relative record number. GET and
PUT of records also provides for sequential input/ output of records
, (record number, is incremented by one after each access).
'
• 'Program Access Method - Supports the loading and retrieval of a
'program to a program member already defined under the Disk
': ;Support System.
}'.' •
Variable Segment Access Method - Access to variable-length
records as if they were on a sequential device. Provides for
backspace of records, rewind of data set, etc.
Sequential Access Method - Provides sequential device independent I/O for 5022 disk, 129 and 5496 data recorders. 7431 serial
printer, 5028 operator station, and the 2502 Card Reader and Line
Printer available with the 50241/0 Attachment Enclosure.
New Direct Access Method - (NDAM/7). Access to data sets
organized in a 370-9ompatible format. Method used is direct, fixed
length (within a data set), unblocked, relative record access.
Communications Access Method - Supports BSCA at the logical
(GET /PUT) record level and the physical record (READ/WRITE)
'
level.
The allocation of disk space and the use of the OPEN facility allows the
user to reference a data area on disk by symbolic name rather than disk
address. OPEN logically connects a disk data area to the symbolic
name referenced in the application program and can be either within the
program at assembly time or in conjunction with the Disk Support
System at the time the program is loaded for execution.
Note: System/3 - System/7 data interchange
System/3 to System/7: System/3 files (data sets) marked as
Direct Indexed and Consecutive may be read on the System/7
using the Basic Access Method or the Direct Access Method.
System/3 files (data sets) marked as Variable-Length Spanned
Unblocked Sequential may be accessed on the System/7 using
Basic Access Method or the Variable Segment Access Method.
System/7 FORTRAN uses VSAM and DAM.
System/7 to System/3: System/7 data sets marked as Direct
(built by the Direct Access Method) may be opened by System/3
data management and accessed as a consecutive or direct file.
System/7 data sets marked as variable sequential (loaded by the
Variable Segment Access Method) may be accessed by System/3
data management as a variable consecutive file. System/3
FORTRAN uses both direct and variable sequential files. The
System/7 directorized data sets and members of directorized data
sets are not available to System/3 Support Facilities.
Message Buffering Facility: A facility which provides for routing of text
messages to symbolic devices with independent disk buffering of
messages, and on line operator and program control of the devices.
Data sets on a 5022 Disk Module or in an emulated 5022 on a 3348
Data Module can be used for disk buffering.
Output devices supported include 1053 Printer (on 2790 only), 7431
Matrix Printer, 129 Card Data Recorder, 5496 Data Recorder, 5028
Operator Station, Binary Synchronous Communications Control (feature
#20]4 on 5010), the Asynchronous Communications Control (feature
#1610 on 5010), and the line printer available with the 5024 I/O
Attachment Enclosure.
Data Intftrchange Facility: A program for data transmission, via BSCA,
between a System/7 and a System/3, System/32, S/370 or another
System/7. The program runs in a partition of a user-generated MSP /7
Release 9 system and will operate in the following manner.
Single Partition - Data Interchange Facility is the only job running.
Multiple Partition - Data Interchange is running with other realtime
jobs and / or a batch job.
Data Interchange Facility must be loaded into a realtime partition.
Data is transfEmed to/from a System/7 disk file. Data sets on a
5022 Disk Module or in an emulated 5022 on a 3348 Data Module
can be used for disk buffering.
The user is required to write a communication program for the host
system (System/3, System/32, S/370 or another System/7).
The programming interface information that is required by the user to
write a host program is documented in the System /7 publication
MSP/7 Macro Library/Relocatable: Coding the I/O Macros (GC340020). In addition, sample RPG II T /p programs for the System/3 and
the System/32 are included in this manual. These sample programs
illustrate the host program requirements for the System/3 or the
System/32 to communicate with a System/7 that is using the Data
Interchange, Facility.
Online Batch Facility (EXECUTIVE/1)
Concurrent execution of batch programs
preparation with realtime operations.
including
program
Storage protection of realtime programs from online batch
processing.
Interactive or unattended mode for online batch processing.
Automatic clearing of online batch programs from the card reader
when errors occur (unattended mode).
Priority queuing by hardware level of 5022 Disk I/O requests.
@RELEV macro which releases current level for execution of other'
programs on the same level.
Establishment and processing of a permanent system REFER library
supporting both realtime and batch programs.
Partition Queuing Facilities
Facility for a generated storage load to be subdivided into separate
areas called partition,S to effectively utilize storage.
Ability to operate online batch in a partition.
Batch Save/Restore facility to preempt and utilize the batch
partition.
--.--- ----
SCP 5707-AA1.3
Do not reproduce withoUt written permission
. :: - - i"f§: ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/7 Program Preparation Facilities (cont'd)
Automatic recovery capability that allows the user to specify the
program that will be executed after a power failure as well as the
partition in which it will be executed. Power Failure Detect (#5731)
is required on the 6026 Enclosure in order to use this facility.
TASKING
MSP /7 Support Macros provide facility:
To ensure serial use of a non-reentrant program.
To maintain registers and work area after program suspension and
reactivation.
WAIT /POST Macros: The program WAITING for the completion of an
event can relinquish control and free its interrupt level for other use.
The WAIT/POST Macros:
Save registers in dynamically allocated storage.
Automatically restore register contents and reactivate
supported program when completion of the event is POSTED.
Facilitate overlap of processing with input/output operations.
the
SYSTEM/7 MACRO ASSEMBLER (ASM/7)
5707·AD1
PURPOSE
ASM/7 is a System/7 Language Translator that translates symbolic
instructions into machine language instruction, assigns storage
locations, and performs auxiliary functions necessary to produce
executable machine language programs. In addition, ASM/7:
Produces object modules suitable for input to the storage load
formatting utility or the Linkage Editor.
Allows user macros.
Provides conditional assembly instructions.
Minimum system requirements in the minimum confiQuration required
by the stand-alone System/7 Program Preparation Facilities.
SYSTEM/7 SOURCE LIBRARY EDITOR
5707·AE1
PURPOSE
The Source Library Editor service program is provided to facilitate entry
and manipulation of source data such as FORTRAN and Assembler
source, catalog procedures, source PTFapplication, etc.
SYSTEM/7 LINKAGE EDITOR (LiNK/7)
5707·AF1
PURPOSE
The Linkage Editor combines separately assembled or compiled object
modules into a load module suitable for input to the storage load
formatting utility of DSS/7 and subsequent execution. It also combines
previously edited load modules with each other or with object modules.
HIGHLIGHTS
In addition to its primary function of linking or combining of program
modules, the Linkage Editor:
Incorporates program segments from a library into load modules,
either automatically or upon request.
.
Aids in construction of overlay program segments.
Aids program modification by replacing program segments.
Allows the user to define a single overlay area in each partition for
subroutines to be loaded-on-call.
Minimum system requirements is the minimum confif;luration required
by the stand-alone System/7 Program Preparation FaCilities.
DISK SUPPORT SYSTEM/7
5707·AG1
PURPOSE
This version of DSS/7 is an extended version of the 4K DSS/7. In the
8-12K environment, support is provided for the 5022 Disk, the 129
Data Recorder, the 7431 Serial Printer and the 5028 Operator Station
via the Sequential Access Method. This provides device independence
and permits the user to alter device assignments at execution time. In
an 8K System/7 the user can execute service programs which do not
require deviCE support beyond the 5022, 129, 7431, or 5028. In
addition to these devices DSS/7 also supports the 2502 model A2 Card
Reader and the Line Printer available with the 5024 I/O Attachment
Enclosure. This DSS/7 support requires a 6010 E·processor.
DSS/7 utilizes an enhanced command language which permits the:
Loading and execution of the 'System/7 Program Preparation
Facilities
Loading and execution of user programs (non-real time)
Loading and execution of a complete storage load (realtime)
Loadinq and execution of disk resident service programs
AcceSSing and execution of predefined catalog procedures
Association of symbolic file names with physical devices
Establishment and processing of a permanent system REFER library
supporting both realtime and batch programs
Passing of parameter information
Selection of alternate command language Input streams
The MSP /7 service programs provided include:
Device Independent Copy
Disk to Print
Disk Delete, Rename Data Set or Member
Define Data Set or Members
Disk Initialize
Disk Patch
Define Auto Restart
Service Program Monitor
Load Module Formatting
Also, the stand-alone program preparation components execute as
service programs in the 12K DSS/7 environment. With additional
storage, program preparation, service programs, and user batch
programs can be sUp'ported online concurrently with realtime programs.
The user is responsible for generating a storage load supporting online
batch operations.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Understanding MSP /7 (GC34-0027) ... MSP /7 Binary Synchronous
Communications: Program Logic Manual (GY34-0012) :.. IBM
System/7 Macro Assembler: Program Logic Manual (GY34-0013) ...
IBM System/7 Linkage Editor: Program Logic Manual (GY34-0014) ...
IBM, System/7 Source Librar'l Editor: Program Logic Manual
(GY34-0015) .... IBM System!7 Disk Support System (DSS/7):
Program Logic Manual (GY34-0011) ... IBM, System/7 ,Macro
Library/Relocatable: Program Logic Manual (GY34-0010) ... IBM
System/7 Symbolic File Support (SFS): Program Logic Manual
(GY34";'OO18) ... MSP /7 Subject Guide (GC34-0035).
--- ----
SCP 5707-SC2.1
Do not reproduce without written permission
-~-
:: - -:5,;"~ ISG
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
MSP/7 DISK SUPPORT SYSTEM (055/7)
5707-SC2
PURPOSE
In addition, ASM /7:
The MSP/7 Disk Support System is a group of IBM-supplied programs
which reside on the 5022 Disk Storage Module and provide program
initiation capability using the 5028 Operator Station, and service
programs to support disk organization and maintenance. The Disk
Support System supports both Direct Program Control and Cycle Steal
5022s.
Produces object modules suitable for input to the storage load
formatting utility or the Linkage Editor.
Allows user macros.
Provides conditional assembly instructions.
Supports new instructions for System /7 mdl E processor.
DESCRIPTION
This version of DSS/7 (5707-SC2) requires a 4K System/7 and does
not support System /7 Program Preparation Facilities. The 8-12K
vorsion of DSS/7 (5707-AG1) is required for program preparation.
Operator Station commands allow:
Load and execution of IBM-supplied disk-resident support service
programs.
Load and execution of disk-resident user programs.
Association of symbolic file names to disk data sets or members at
IPL time (requires symbolic file support macros).
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT'
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements for Execution on an IBM S/370
Operating Under:
Disk Operating System - Virtual Storage (DOS-VS)
14K bytes of storage exclusive of System Control and Basic IOCS.
In addition, ASM/7 requires auxiliary storage as follows:
Three IBM 2311, 2314/2319, or 3330 disk storage extents as work
files, or
Disk Support Service Programs:
Three IBM 2400- or 34OO-series magnetic tape units (either
7 -track or 9 -track) as work files. The data conversion feature is
required for 7 -track operation.
The Disk Initialization Service Program ($UDINT) Formats the Disk
Volume ... Performs Surface Analysis ... Performs alternate track
assignment or deassignment ... Verifies Disk Data.
The Designate Restart Service Program ($UDARP) provides support
of the Auto- Restart Facility on disk. The restart program is linked
to the Automatic IPL Function of the Auto-Restart feature (#5731).
The restart program information can also be printed to the Operator
Console Printer.
The Define Disk File Service Program ($UDDEF) provides allocation
of disk space into data sets through a System/3 compatible
Volume Table of Contents (VTOC) and provides for suballocation of
directorized data set space into subsets called'members. The utility
determines if sufficient space is available and allocates a data set or
member. An entry is made in the directory and/or VTOC.
Must be link-edited using the NOREL option and executed in
Virtual=Real Mode.
Operating System - Virtual Storage (OS-VS)
44K bytes of storage exclusive of data management and supervisor
services.
In addition, ASM/7 requires space in auxiliary storage for the following
data sets:
System Input.
Three Intermediate (work storage).
Macro Instruction Library (this requirement may be satisfied by
OASO system residence or private library).
The Delete Data Set Utility ($UDDLT) deletes or re-names existing
data sets or members. The VTOC directory entry is changed
optionally, the area formerly occupied by the data set or member
may be set to zero.
Print Output (selectable through JCL).
Object Module (selectable through JCL).
The Program Load to Disk Service Program ($UDLOR) loads
programs from paper tape to a disk volume. Output of FORMAT /7
or the 1130 or 1800 Edit program is loaded to a previously defined
program member of a Oirectorized Data Set.
Punch Output (selectable through JCL).
SYSTEM/7 HOST LINKAGE EDITOR (LiNK/7)
The Disk Dump Service Program ($UDOMP) dumps data in
hexadecimal representation from the disk to the Operator Station
printer. An edited dump of VTOC or the directory of a directorized
data set may be requested.
OS-VS (5744-AC1)
DOS-VS (5747-AC1)
PURPOSE
The Disk Copy Service Program ($UOCPY) copies data from one
disk volume to another disk volume or to another location of the
same disk volume. The data copies may be designated by data set
name, member name, or absolute disk addresses.
The Linkage Editor combines separately assembled or compiled object
modules into a load module suitable for input to FORMAT /7 and
subsequent execution. It also combines previously edited load modules
with each other or with object modules.
The Disk Patch Utility ($UDPAT) allows data stored on disk to be
modified by Input from paper tape or the keyboard of the 6028
Operator Station.
In addition to its primary function of linking or combining of host or
stand-alone program modules, the Linkage Editor:
HIGHLIGHTS
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Incorporates program segments from a library into load modules,
either automatically or upon request.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Aids in construction of overlay program segments.
Minimum Storage Requirements: To execute the Disk Support
System, an IBM System/7 with 4,096 words of storage, an IBM 5022
Disk Module (mdls 1, 2, 3, or 4) and an IBM 6028 Operator Station.
The 6022 may be either a Direct Program Control or Cycle Steal
(#2664). The IBM 5010 Processor Module must have Cycle Steal Basic
(#2~62) Installed to operate with a Cycle Steal 5022.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM sYstem/7 Disk Support System (DSS/7): Program Logic Manual
(GY34-0011):
,
Aids program modification by replacing program segments.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements for Execution on an IBM S/370
Operating Under:
Disk Operating System - Virtual Storage (DOS/VS)
24K bytes of storage exclusive of system control and Basic IOCS.
Auxiliary storage for at least two intermediate work areas (OASD).
SVSTEM/7 HOST MACRO ASSEMBLER (ASM/7)
os·va
(6744-AB1)
DOS-VS (6747'AB1)
PURPOSE
ASM/7 is a System/ilanguage Translator that translates symbolic
instructions int() machine language instructions, assigns storage
locations, and performs' auxiliary functions necessary to produce
executable . machine-language programs.
ASM /7 is language
compatible .with the stand-alone ~SMn.
Operating System· Virtual Storage (OS/VS)
•
'44K bytes of storage exclusive of data management and supervisory services.
In addition to the standard system residence, the Linkage Editor
requires space in auxiliary storage for at least the following data sets:
System Input.
One Intermediate (requires OASO).
-_._--
-~--:: - - :S~5: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/7 DSS/7 (cont'd)
Print Output (selectable through JCL).
Output Load Modules (requires DASD).
SYSTEM/7 HOST STORAGE LOAD
FORMATTING PROGRAM (FORMAT/7)
OS·VS (5744-AD1)
DOS·VS (5747-AD1)
PURPOSE
FORMAT/7 allows the user to generate loadable System/7 storage
loads from ASM /7 output. The output storage load can be directed to
disk for transmission via the ACCA connection or to cards for later
conversion. For the DOS user with a 1018 Paper Tape Punch, the
storage load can go directly to paper tape.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum System Requirements for Execution on an IBM S/370
Operating Under:
Disk Operating System - Virtual Storage (DOS/VS)
14K bytes of storage exclusive of System Control and Basic IOCS.
Operating System - Virtual Storage (OS/VS)
44K bytes of storage exclusive of data management and supervisory services.
SCP 5707-SC2.2
Mara3
Major Revision
-------- ----:: - - :E~!: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
5280 SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
5708-SC1
PURPOSE
System Control Programming (SCP) provides the capability to perform
basic functions necessary for the operation of the system. The SCP has
been designed for ease of installation and is provided by IBM at no
additional charge.
DESCRIPTION
Included in the SCP are:
System Configuration Program: Allows the user to describe the physical
and logical configuration of a 5280 system to be used in a specific
operating environment. Output of this program is an IPL diskette,
which contains user-specified system characteristics.
Execution of the System Configuration Program is an interactive
process of responding to displayed prompts to describe the system
configuration (for example, keyboard types, number of diskette drives
and the number and size of partitions.) This procedure is typically
performed during initial installation of the SCP on the user's system, but
may be repeated as required, to reflect a change in the system
configuration or to change the number and/ or size of partitions required
for a specific operating environment.
Initial Program Loader: A unique IPL, providing a single partition 'starter'
system for any 5280 system. The Initial Program Loader initializes the
system for program execution by loading a storage map, tables and
common subroutines into main storage.
Programming Maintenance Program: Provides the capability to make
program patches, formal changes to IBM programs, replace program
modules and display the PTF log number of changes made to a module
or the whole system.
Close Failure Recovery Program: Provides the carability for the user to
scan a data set and specify an EOD (end of data record. The program
is designed for circumstances, such as power failure, that prevent the
normal closing of a data set, which may result in data loss.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated
in the following specified operating environment:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM 5280 System Control Programming runs on any IBM 5280
system. Minimum main storage partition size requirements are as
follows: For the System Configuration Program - 16K; for the
PTF/Patch Program and the Close Failure Recovery Program - 9K.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (None)
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
IBM 5280 System Control Programming Specifications (GC21-7797)
... IBM 5280 System Control Programming Reference/Operation
Manual (GC21-7824).
SCP 5708-SC1.1
Mar 83
Major Revision
Do not reproduce without written permission
SCP 5725-SC1.1
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM/32 SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
5725-SC1
PURPOSE
System/32 System Control
capabilities:
Programming
provides these major
The macros are supplied to provide an interface to existing SCP support
for the user who desires to use the Assembler for some purpose, and it
is recommended that they be used only to meet those requirements.
Job Stream Support: An SCP command statement reads a prepared
job stream, consisting of OCl, source code and data from either cards
or diskette into the System/32 library as a procedure: This procedure
can then be executed with OCl, source and data being read from the
procedure.
Operation Control language
System Utilities
Data Management
System History Area
1255 MICR Device Support: An SCP subroutine, similar to that
provided on System/3 mdls 12 and 15, performs device control and
data management services for the 1255 Magnetic Character Reader.
The subroutine can be used with user-written RPG II or Basic
Assembler programs.
2K SCP Main Storage Requirement
Rollout/ Rollin Inquiry
Overlay Linkage Editor
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDlC) as a part of the Systems
Network Architecture (SNA): System/32 batch workstation system
utility program (SCP) provides data communications' capability with a
Job Stream Support
S/370 (mdls 115 through 168) operating under DOS/VS, OS/VS1,
1255 MICR Device Support
OS/VS2, or any of these operatinq systems when running under
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDlC) as a part of the Systems . VM/370. Attachment of System/32 IS with a 3704 or 3705 operating
under the Network Control Program/VS (NCP /VS).
Network Architecture (SNA)
These SNA/SDlC utility programs provido communications with the
Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC)
following subsystems:
Word Processing Feature
POWER/VS
System/32 Macros
DESCRIPTION
Operation Control language (OCl): System/32 OCl is highly
compatible with System/3 OCl with the following exceptions:
A command statement which has the capability to pass parameters
to the indicated procedure is used in place of the System/3 CALL.
Capability for specifying default values for missing OCl parameters.
logical IF statement provides for intelligence within procedures. It
is possible to execute different jobs based on tests performed in
OCL.
Other differences brought about by devices and system function ..
System Utilities: In addition to the function provided by System/3
SCP Utilities, System/32 also provides a complete set of utilities to
copy data, programs and procedures for transferring data from the
diskettes and to the disk and vice versa. Procedures, distributed as part
of the SCP, allow easier execution of the most frequently desired utility
functions by entering a one-statement command. The SCP utilities
support the diskette in both 128 bytes per sector and 512 bytes per
sector formats.
Data Management: System/32 provides data management support
for the disk, the display screen, the keyboard and printing, all of which
are functionally equivalont to that provided on System/3 mdl 6. In
addition, a new combined buffered data management is provided for
the display and the keyboard, which makes the programming of
interactive data entry easier. The diskette drive is supported only by
load / Dump utilities.
System History Area: System/32 provides a history area on disk
which contains all recently executed OCl statements and all messages
issued to SYSlOG. The messages and data may be retrieved and
redisplayed on the display or printed. Either all the OCl statements or
only those originally displayed may be printed as a hard copy log of the
activity of the system.
2K SCP Main Storage Requirement: Only 2K bytes of main storage
are required for the supervisor. The remainder IS avaiiablA for user
programming.
ROllout/Rollin Inquiry: The user may interrupt a processing program,
inquire into a file and return to the processing program. The processing
program will be rolled out to disk; the inquiry program will be executed
and the processing program will be rolled back into main storage and
processing. resumed.
Overlay Link~ge· Editor: The Overlay Linkage Editor Facility converts
relocatable/ 'object modules, produced by the Basic Assembler and
FORTRAN, to executable programs. Overlay structures may be created
automatically or as designated by the user.
.
.
This facility is not required for Assembler subroutines included in RPG II
progranw that have been previously assembled.
System/32 Macros: System/32 Macros will provide support to the
Assembler user through the Macro Processor for the following System
Control Program facilities: Disk functions, printer operation, keyboard
and display screen access, Scientific Macros, and 'binary synchronous
communications. The macros themselves provide no capability that is
not;~vailable. elsewhere in the system (for example, RPGII, FORTRAN
IV,.and System Utilities).
f·
Remote Entry Services (RES)
Job Entry Subsystem 2 (JES2)
CICS/DOS/VS
CICS/OS/VS
IMS/OS/VS
Highlights of the batch workstation programs are:
Batch input (JCl and/ or data) from disk storage
Batch output to either the print facility or disk storage
Individual printer and 'punch' data sets can be directed to disk
storage for creation of permanent individual files.
Keyboard/display screen combination functions as a console for
operator communication.
Utility program statements may be entered through the keyboard or
from a file on disk storage.
All utility program statements and central system commands and all
messages are logged in the System/32 History File.
'Compression and expansion of blanks and duplicate characters
(POWER/VS, RES and JES2 only)
Multiple buffers provided to enhance data transmission.
Utility program will utilize more than 22K if available.
Central system programming support is generated specifying 3770
as the supported terminal.
Note: Card I/O, the Mag Card Unit, the 1255 Magnetic Character
Reader or the diskette drive cannot be operated within the same
program as the Batch Workstation system utility program.
Binary Synchronous Communications: The SCP provides the Binary
Synchronous Communications (BSC) data management for System/32
RPG II. For the devices supported, this BSC data management appears
the same as the program support provided by the System/3 RPG II
Telecommunications feature. A system utility is also provided to select
certain communications characteristics at program execution time such
as: Line type, terminal address, line speed, error retry count, etc.
Multi-leaving
Remote
Job
Entry
Workstation
Program
(MRJE!WS): The MRJE/WS System Utility program permits a
System/32 to function as a remote job entry (RJE) workstation for
submission of jobs to a central S/370. The central OS processing is
performed under control of one of the following: HASP II, ASP, RES or
OS/VS1, JES2, or JES3 of OS/VS2. The System/32 MRJE/WS
program will also operate with VM/370 Remote Spooling Communications Subsystem (RSCS) as a HASP Workstation. The workstation
program operates under control of the System/32 SCP and communicates with the central system over a point-to- point (switched or
nonswitched) communication line via the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter. Central system R..IE programming support should be
generated specifying System/3 as the supported terminal.
Highlights of the MRJE/WS Program are:
Full multi-leaving support permits concurrent System/32 device
operation.
Card I/O operation is simulated by disk storage.
--.--- ---:: ~:s'f5: ISG
SCP 5725-SC1.2
Do not reproduce without written permission
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/32 SCP (cont'd)
Compression and expansion of blanks and duplicate characters is
performed for increased line utilization.
.
At user option, the program automatically selects a default for any
message requiring an operator response.
Disk storage is supported for jobstream input and output and for
individual data set output.·
,
A Print Utility program is provided for. transferring 'punch' and
printer data streams to the print facility which were directed to disk
storage during the RJE session.
MRJE/WS program statements may be entered through the
keyboard or from a file on disk storage.
Keyboard/display screen combination functions as a console for
operator communication.
All MRJE/WS program statements and c.entral system commands
and all messages are logged in the System/32 History File.
MRJE/WS program will utilize more than 14K if available.
Note: Card I/O, the 5321 Mag Card Unit, the 1255 Magnetic Character
Reader or the diskette drive cannot be operated within the same
program as the MRJE/WSProgram.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The IBM System Control Programming (SCP) runs on all models of IBM
System/32 and supports all features. The system configuration
required to support SDlC (#6301) via System/32 SCP requires a
minimum of 24K bytes of main storage. A minimum of one Additional
Storage feature (#1005) must be installed.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
All IBM licensed programs for IBM System/32 are designed to 0rerate
in an environment that Includes IBM System/32 SCP (5725-SC1 or its
equivalent.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
System/32 System Dsts Aress snd Disgnostic Aids (SY21-0532)
...System/32 Control Storsge Logic Msnusl (SY21-0533) ... System/32
Word Processing Logic Msnusl (SY34-oo69).
WORD PROCESSING FEATURE (Il6002)
PURPOSE
System Control Programming Word
provides these additional capabilities:
Processing feature
(#6002)
Extended printing support
Character set extensions for upper/lowercase keyboard/display
Job-to-Job Transition without operator intervention
Mag Card Unit access method
Linked Direct Access Method (lOAM) for document libraries
System utilities for document library maintenance
Word Processing Communications Utility
DESCRIPTION
Extended Printing Sqpport: The System/32 printing function is
extended to support superscript and subscript printing and to provide
additional translate tables and code required to permit printing
upper /Iowercase data using the 48- and 64-character monocase
(EBCDIC) belts.
Character Set Extensions for the Keyboard/Display: The
System/32 Console Keyboard/Display capability is extended to include
user-controlled definition. The SCP feature (#6002) supports
user-redefinition of the keyboard both in character set and in character
arrangement. A predefined set of character/graphics and arrangements can be selected by the operator through OCl statements at job
initiation time. The various offerings of characters and the arrangements were selected to support word/text processing applications with
nine ma~netic keyboard arrangements. Two System/32 arrangements
are provided. Support of the new code key functions is via application
programming. See Type Catalog for details. (Does not support ASCII
arrangements.)
Job-to-Job Transition: Job-to-Job Transition is provided to support
the word processing user transition between jobs without operator
intervention.
Magnetic Card Unit Access Method: The access method provides
data transfer between System/32 and the 5321 Magnetic Card Unit at
application program request. I/O control commands are supported by
Basic Assembler. The File Conversion utility provides stand-alone
access to magn~tic card data.
Linked Direct Access Method (lOAM): Feature #6002 provides
additional fixed disk data management support for System/32. It
supports (a) storing· variable length data such as text and (b) the
dynamic reuse of file space without reorganization. In brief, this is
accomplished through the use of two files; (1) an indexed sequential file
which contains the data IDs, starting addresses, etc. and also a dynamic
table of available space; (2) the 'member' file of user data consisting of
linked direct sectors with embedded chained addresses. File organization, definition, load, dump and application use is supported at the user
level through provided utilities and System/32 Basic Assembler
licensed program.
System Utilities: Feature #6002 provides a complete set of utilities
initiated via System/32 console input to initialize, reorganize and/or
dump lOAM members to and from diskette; document deletion is
supported from System/32 console or application program.
The Word Processing Communications Utility (WPCU) is provided as a
System/32 Word Processing feature (#6002) enhancement to support
the transfer of documents or data files between a Word Processing
System/32 and another word processing system:
Office Systems 6/430, 6/440 or 6/450
6640 Docum~nt Printer
System/32 (with feature (#6002 WPCU)
Magnetic Card II Typewriter - Communicating
WPCU is invoked at the System/32 using a procedure statement and
prompts via the System/32 console display, .or through standard:
System/32 OCl and utility control statements to define the remote,
device, mode bf operation (transmit/receive), line speed, transparency
option, and other information. This utility can transmit or receive
multiple lOAM document ·Iibrary members (document or tabular data·
files) or a single System/32 data file (records accessed consecutively).
Data Transmission is accompli.shed using the existing Binary S.y.nchro-.
nous Communications Adapter (BSCA) #2074 on the Systemi,e2 ove'r
point-to-point switched ·or nonswitched lines. Communications with
an Office System/6, Magnetic Card " Typewriter Communicating
or a 6640 Document Printer are at speeds of up to 2400 bps in EBCDIC
nontransparent mode only. System/32-to-System/32 communications are at speeds of up to 4800 bps (switched) or up to 7200. bps
(nonswitched) in EBCDIC transparent or nontransparent mode.
Character .set translation Is supported for all valid magnetic card
keyboard character sets supported by the SCPo
------- ----=
--:E~§: ISG
Do not reproduce without written permission
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
System/32 SCPo (cont'd)
Release 2 of the Word Processor /32 licensed program will support the
writing of systems formattted data (documents) to the LOAM Document Library.
Prerequisites: BSCA feature #2074 on the, 5320.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM SCP Word Processing feature (#6002) requires 4.6K of high-end
user storage when LOAM or Job-to-Job transition functions are used.
Otherwise, regular SCP main storage requirements apply. SCP Word
Processing feature (#6002) supports all IBM 5320 'B' and 'C' mdls and
the following Special Features: #4530 Half Line Space Printing, #4900
5321 Magnetic Card Unit Attachment, #34OP Dual Case Keyboard and
Display, and #1005 Additional Storage. 96-character print belts do not
. '
require #6002 for support.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM System/32 SCP Word Processing Feature (#6002) requires the
current version of IBM System/32 System Control Programming
(5725-SC1) for support.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
Word Processing SCP Reference Manual (GC34-0078)
Processing SCP PLM (SY34-0069).
.
TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index
Wore{
SCP 5725-SC1.3
Mara3
Major Revision
-~--- ---:: - -:5~~ ISG
SCP 5744-BK1.1
Do not reproduce without written permlaalon
Mar 83
Major Revision
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
DISTRIBUTED INTELLIGENCE SYSTEM
HIGH-LEVEL HOST SUPPORT OF SYSTEM/7
ATTACHMENT TO SYSTEM/370
5744-BK1
PURPOSE
The Distributed Intelligence System System Control Programming
provides the means for operating a host S/370 connected to one or
more System/7s.
Each System/7 is attached to the S/370 using the high-speed
S-Based Control Unit/Sensor-Based Control Adapter (SBCU/SBCA)
attachments. Distributed Intelligence System supports the S/370 and
each System /7 as a single system with distributed facilities. The
System/7 applications programmer using Distributed Intelligence
System has available for use, through the high-level Distributed
Intelligence System functions, the power of a S/370 for data analysis
and storage.
Distributed Intelligence System provides System Control Programming
code on the S/370 under OS/VS1 and on the System/7 under MSP/7.
The Distributed Intelligence System functions provide the user with the
ability to move data between the S/370 system and each satellite
System/7, and the ability to load and execute application programs in a
given system in the network.
In general, almost all Distributed Intelligence System functions are
symmetrical; i.e., each processor may invoke any command.
HIGHLIGHTS
Distributed Intelligence System supports S/370 mdls 135, 145,
155 II, 158, 165 II and 168 with the SBCU custom product (RPQ
008116) and System/7 with the SBCA custom product (RPQ
008119).
Requests for Distributed Intelligence System functions may be
initiated by either the S/370 system or any System/7.
Distributed Intelligence System provides inter-partition data
handling and transaction synchronization functions which provide a
high-level interface between Distributed Intelligence System and
CICS or IMS.
High-level language support is available through PL/I and
FORTRAN in the S/370; and FORTRAN and APG/7 (5734-XC3) in
the System /7.
Program Movement and Execution:
.Dumps of System/7 storage on S/370 may be invoked by S/370
or System/7 programs, or System/370 console operator.
Initiation and termination of logging and tracing functions may be
invoked by the S/370 console operator. User logging functions
may be invoked by S/370 or System/7.
Communication with the S/370 console operator with option to
receive a reply may be invoked by S/370 or System/7.
Use: Distributed Intelligence System consists of control software which
resides on both the S/370 and System/7. To use the S/370System/7 multisystem configuration, application programs must use
DIstributed Intelligence System in the following manner:
The Distributed Intelligence System partition is initiated as an
OS/VSl job by using OS/VSl Job Control Language (JCL).
The S/370 or System/7 user programs can invoke the Distributed
Intelligence System subroutines, from a high level language
(FORTRAN or PL/I from the System/370; and a FORTRAN or
APG/7 from the System/7).
The System/7 or S/370 assembler language programs invoke
Distributed Intelligence System macros.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
The customer:
18 re8p.0nsible for providing. the necessary cabling between the
SBCU/SBCA.
Is responsible for proper generation of Distributed Intelligence
System to match the system configuration.
Must ensure that the macros provided with· S/370 Distributed
Intelligence System are installed in the OS/VSl macro library or
another S/370 library, and that the FORTRAN subroutines, PL/I
and APG/7 subroutines have been installed in the FORTRAN,
APG/7 and PL/I libraries, if Distributed Intelligence System
functions are to be invoked through these high-level languages.
. Must have knowledge of Distributed Intelligence System, MSP/7,
and S/370 Assembler, FORTRAN, APG/7 or PL/I languages in
order to code the Distributed System Application.
System/7 application programs are on S/370 disk in a partitioned
data set. The user may also specify programs to be loaded into
pageable or page-fixed S/370 storage for high-speed access.
System/7 application programs may be loaded and executed by a
command from the S/370 or System/7.
System/7 application programs may be executed in either IPL or
program segment mode.
Must provide sufficient S/370 direct access storage to contain any
System/7 programs and data sets desired as resident on the
S/370.
Is responsible for providing protection against accidental loss or
misuse of their data.
S/370 programs must reside on S/370 disk in one of a number of
partitioned data sets. These programs may be loaded and
executed, in the Distributed Intelligence System partition or in a
background partition, by a command from the S/370 program,
System/7, or S/370 console operator dynamically or at initialization time. The operating system facilities for program retention will
be used.
Minimum Machine Configurations: The Distributed Intelligence
System minimum IBM S/370 configuration is:
Supported on mdls 135, 145, 15511, 158 16511 and 168 CPU, the
minimum configuration is that required for the OS/VS1 operating
system used plus a minimum of 6K page-fixed for Distributed
Intelligence System. However, 30K is recommended. Additionally, a
minimum of 64K of real storage for paging is recommended in S/370
for Distributed Intelligence System and other VS1 applications. Mdl
135 must have the Conditional Swapping feature (#1051). Mdl 145
must have either Conditional Swap'ping feature (#1051) or Advanced
Control Program Support feature (#1001). Sensor-Based Control Unit
(SBCU) custom product (RPQ 008116) attached to a selector/block
multiplexer channel.
Data Definition and Movement:
A given program can move data to itself or to any other program in
the network with a single command. These programs may reside in
any VSl partition or the Distributed Intelligence System partition of
the S/370 or on the System/7.
A System /7 application program either in the Distributed
Intelligence System partition or another partition may move data to
aSystem/7 program, a storage area obtained within Distributed
... ; Intelligence System, or a S/370 disk file.
::.''"::< A System/7 .application program may move data to or from a
.>system/370. ·. .program (either in the Distributed Intelligence System
: partition or another partition), a storage area on the S/370 obtained
within Distributed Inte!ligence System, or a S/370 disk file.
User's standardS/37o.disk data sets can be processed by
Distributed Intelligence System access commands (providing
VSAM;B.DAM or BSAM support).
S/:nO' work data files
may be dynamically selected from a. pool of
VSAM"di'~ data files according to user's· processing and perform-
ance requirements. The files are accessed. via Distributed Intelligence .. System commands and may be retumed to the pool
dynamically.
Control Services: .,
r'.
Program synchronization commands may be irwoked from S/370
or System / 1 . ' '.
SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
The minimum IBM System/7 configuration is:
IBM 5010 Processor Module mdl A06 (minimum 6K storage of
which Distributed Intelligence System requires 2K words) ...
Sensor-Based Control Adapter custom product (RPQ 008119) ...
IBM 5028 Operator Station.
SOFlWARE REQUIREMENTS
IBM S/370 Programs: The Distributed Intelligence System S/370resident programs operate under OS/VSl (5741-031). Distributed
Intelligence System runs in a Virtual (V-V) environment, but requires a
minimum of 6K of page-fixed storage: however, 30K is recommended
to support its functions. In addition, 64K of real pageable storaQe will
be required by Distributed Intelligence System. The Distnbuted
Intelligence System partition size in virtual storage will depend on user
routines included in these partitions. To this partition size must be
added space for buffered queues, storage files, and user programs,
which .re to be executed in the Distributed Intelligence System
partition. Any other access method the user wishes to support may be
Included 8S part of the supervisor. For example, if the Virtual Storage
Access Method (VSAM) is to be supported, it should be included as
part of the pageable System Queue Area.
--..-----..5. :-::5"f§: ISG
--
Do not reproduce without written permission
SYSTEM CONTROL PROGRAMMING
Distributed Intelligence System High-Level
Host Support of System/7 Attach to S/370 (cont'd)
Distributed Intelligence System adds SVC routines and a resident
attention handling routine to the OS/VS1 Nucleus and a minimum of
six modules (appendages, error routines, SVCs) to SYS1.SVCLlB
IBM System/7 Programs: MSP /7 supports Distributed Intelligence
System. IBM System/7 Host Program Preparation Facilities "
programs (OS/VS1) are required for System/7 program generation.
DOCUMENTATION
(available from Mechanicsburg)
SBCU General Information Manual (GA34-1511) ... SBCA General
Information Manual (GA34-1512) ... General Information Manual
(GC34-0056) ... OS/VS1: Program Logic Manual (GY34-0019) .•.
Program Listings (Microfiche) (GJD1-1795).
RPQs ACCEPTED: Yes
SCP 5744-BK1.2
Mar 83
Major Revision
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2013:03:27 13:28:53-08:00 Modify Date : 2013:03:27 14:49:59-08:00 Metadata Date : 2013:03:27 14:49:59-08:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.52 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:3f454338-f2d9-46dd-b878-1c18325c5df9 Instance ID : uuid:29b1a185-e8fd-4244-8079-852a1c983954 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 223EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools